--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ mail - send and receive mail
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-s\bs subject ] [ user ... ]
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-n\bn ] -\b-f\bf [ name ]
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-n\bn ] -\b-u\bu user
+
+I\bIN\bNT\bTR\bRO\bOD\bDU\bUC\bCT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl is a intelligent mail processing system, which has a
+ command syntax reminiscent of _\be_\bd with lines replaced by mes-
+ sages.
+
+ The -\b-v\bv flag puts mail into verbose mode; the details of
+ delivery are displayed on the users terminal. The -\b-i\bi flag
+ causes tty interrupt signals to be ignored. This is particu-
+ larly useful when using _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl on noisy phone lines. The -\b-n\bn
+ flag inhibits the reading of /usr/lib/Mail.rc.
+
+ _\bS_\be_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. To send a message to one or more people, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl
+ can be invoked with arguments which are the names of people
+ to whom the mail will be sent. You are then expected to
+ type in your message, followed by an EOT (control-D) at the
+ beginning of a line. A subject may be specified on the com-
+ mand line by using the -\b-s\bs flag. (Only the first argument
+ after the -\b-s\bs flag is used as a subject; be careful to quote
+ subjects containing spaces.) The section below, labeled
+ _\bR_\be_\bp_\bl_\by_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bt_\bo _\bo_\br _\bo_\br_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl, describes some features of
+ _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl available to help you compose your letter.
+
+ _\bR_\be_\ba_\bd_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. In normal usage _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl is given no arguments
+ and checks your mail out of the post office, then prints out
+ a one line header of each message there. The current mes-
+ sage is initially the first message (numbered 1) and can be
+ printed using the p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt command (which can be abbreviated
+ p\bp). You can move among the messages much as you move
+ between lines in _\be_\bd, with the commands `+' and `-' moving
+ backwards and forwards, and simple numbers.
+
+ _\bD_\bi_\bs_\bp_\bo_\bs_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bo_\bf _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. After examining a message you can d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be
+ (d\bd) the message or r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by (r\br) to it. Deletion causes the
+ _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl program to forget about the message. This is not
+ irreversible; the message can be u\bun\bnd\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\bed\bd (u\bu) by giving its
+ number, or the _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl session can be aborted by giving the
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt (x\bx) command. Deleted messages will, however, usually
+ disappear never to be seen again.
+
+ _\bS_\bp_\be_\bc_\bi_\bf_\by_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\be_\bs_\bs_\ba_\bg_\be_\bs. Commands such as p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt and d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be can
+ be given a list of message numbers as arguments to apply to
+ a number of messages at once. Thus ``delete 1 2'' deletes
+ messages 1 and 2, while ``delete 1-5'' deletes messages 1
+ through 5. The special name ``*'' addresses all messages,
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ and ``$'' addresses the last message; thus the command t\bto\bop\bp
+ which prints the first few lines of a message could be used
+ in ``top *'' to print the first few lines of all messages.
+
+ _\bR_\be_\bp_\bl_\by_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bt_\bo _\bo_\br _\bo_\br_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. You can use the r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by com-
+ mand to set up a response to a message, sending it back to
+ the person who it was from. Text you then type in, up to an
+ end-of-file, defines the contents of the message. While you
+ are composing a message, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl treats lines beginning with
+ the character `~' specially. For instance, typing ``~m''
+ (alone on a line) will place a copy of the current message
+ into the response right shifting it by a tabstop. Other
+ escapes will set up subject fields, add and delete reci-
+ pients to the message and allow you to escape to an editor
+ to revise the message or to a shell to run some commands.
+ (These options are given in the summary below.)
+
+ _\bE_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bn_\bg _\ba _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bs_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn. You can end a _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl ses-
+ sion with the q\bqu\bui\bit\bt (q\bq) command. Messages which have been
+ examined go to your _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx file unless they have been deleted
+ in which case they are discarded. Unexamined messages go
+ back to the post office. The -\b-f\bf option causes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl to read
+ in the contents of your _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx (or the specified file) for
+ processing; when you q\bqu\bui\bit\bt, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl writes undeleted messages
+ back to this file. The -\b-u\bu flag is a short way of doing
+ "mail -\b-f\bf /usr/spool/mail/user".
+
+ _\bP_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn_\ba_\bl _\ba_\bn_\bd _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm_\bw_\bi_\bd_\be _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bb_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bs. It is also pos-
+ sible to create a personal distribution lists so that, for
+ instance, you can send mail to ``cohorts'' and have it go to
+ a group of people. Such lists can be defined by placing a
+ line like
+
+ alias cohorts bill ozalp jkf mark kridle@ucbcory
+
+ in the file .mailrc in your home directory. The current
+ list of such aliases can be displayed with the a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs (\b(a\ba)\b)
+ command in _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. System wide distribution lists can be
+ created by editing /usr/lib/aliases, see _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs(5) and
+ _\bs_\be_\bn_\bd_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(8); these are kept in a different syntax. In mail
+ you send, personal aliases will be expanded in mail sent to
+ others so that they will be able to r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by to the recipients.
+ System wide _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs are not expanded when the mail is sent,
+ but any reply returned to the machine will have the system
+ wide alias expanded as all mail goes through _\bs_\be_\bn_\bd_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl.
+
+ _\bN_\be_\bt_\bw_\bo_\br_\bk _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl (_\bA_\bR_\bP_\bA, _\bU_\bU_\bC_\bP, _\bB_\be_\br_\bk_\bn_\be_\bt) See _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br(_\b7) for a
+ description of network addresses.
+
+ _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl has a number of options which can be set in the ._\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl_\br_\bc
+ file to alter its behavior; thus ``set askcc'' enables the
+ ``askcc'' feature. (These options are summarized below.)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSU\bUM\bMM\bMA\bAR\bRY\bY
+ (Adapted from the `Mail Reference Manual')
+
+ Each command is typed on a line by itself, and may take
+ arguments following the command word. The command need not
+ be typed in its entirety - the first command which matches
+ the typed prefix is used. For commands which take message
+ lists as arguments, if no message list is given, then the
+ next message forward which satisfies the command's require-
+ ments is used. If there are no messages forward of the
+ current message, the search proceeds backwards, and if there
+ are no good messages at all, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl types ``No applicable mes-
+ sages'' and aborts the command.
+
+ -\b- Goes to the previous message and prints it out.
+ If given a numeric argument _\bn, goes to the _\bn-th
+ previous message and prints it.
+
+ ?\b? Prints a brief summary of commands.
+
+ !\b! Executes the UNIX shell command which follows.
+
+ P\bPr\bri\bin\bnt\bt (P\bP) Like p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt but also prints out ignored
+ header fields. See also p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt , i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be and
+ r\bre\bet\bta\bai\bin\bn.\b.
+
+ R\bRe\bep\bpl\bly\by (R\bR) Reply to originator. Does not reply to other
+ recipients of the original message.
+
+ T\bTy\byp\bpe\be (T\bT) Identical to the P\bPr\bri\bin\bnt\bt command.
+
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs (a\ba) With no arguments, prints out all
+ currently-defined aliases. With one argument,
+ prints out that alias. With more than one argu-
+ ment, creates an new or changes an on old alias.
+
+ a\bal\blt\bte\ber\brn\bna\bat\bte\bes\bs (a\bal\blt\bt) The a\bal\blt\bte\ber\brn\bna\bat\bte\bes\bs command is useful if you
+ have accounts on several machines. It can be
+ used to inform _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl that the listed addresses
+ are really you. When you r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by to messages, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl
+ will not send a copy of the message to any of
+ the addresses listed on the _\ba_\bl_\bt_\be_\br_\bn_\ba_\bt_\be_\bs list. If
+ the a\bal\blt\bte\ber\brn\bna\bat\bte\bes\bs command is given with no argu-
+ ment, the current set of alternate names is
+ displayed.
+
+ c\bch\bhd\bdi\bir\br (c\bc) Changes the user's working directory to that
+ specified, if given. If no directory is given,
+ then changes to the user's login directory.
+
+ c\bco\bop\bpy\by (c\bco\bo) The c\bco\bop\bpy\by command does the same thing that
+ s\bsa\bav\bve\be does, except that it does not mark the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ messages it is used on for deletion when you
+ quit.
+
+ d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be (d\bd) Takes a list of messages as argument and
+ marks them all as deleted. Deleted messages
+ will not be saved in _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx, nor will they be
+ available for most other commands.
+
+ d\bdp\bp (also d\bdt\bt) Deletes the current message and prints
+ the next message. If there is no next message,
+ _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl says ``at EOF.''
+
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt (e\be) Takes a list of messages and points the text
+ editor at each one in turn. On return from the
+ editor, the message is read back in.
+
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt (e\bex\bx or x\bx) Effects an immediate return to the
+ Shell without modifying the user's system mail-
+ box, his _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx file, or his edit file in -\b-f\bf.
+
+ f\bfi\bil\ble\be (f\bfi\bi) The same as f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\br.
+
+ f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\brs\bs List the names of the folders in your folder
+ directory.
+
+ f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\br (f\bfo\bo) The f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\br command switches to a new mail
+ file or folder. With no arguments, it tells you
+ which file you are currently reading. If you
+ give it an argument, it will write out changes
+ (such as deletions) you have made in the current
+ file and read in the new file. Some special con-
+ ventions are recognized for the name. # means
+ the previous file, % means your system mailbox,
+ %user means user's system mailbox, & means your
+ ~/mbox file, and +folder means a file in your
+ folder directory.
+
+ f\bfr\bro\bom\bm (f\bf) Takes a list of messages and prints their
+ message headers.
+
+ h\bhe\bea\bad\bde\ber\brs\bs (h\bh) Lists the current range of headers, which is
+ an 18 message group. If a ``+'' argument is
+ given, then the next 18 message group is
+ printed, and if a ``-'' argument is given, the
+ previous 18 message group is printed.
+
+ h\bhe\bel\blp\bp A synonym for ?
+
+ h\bho\bol\bld\bd (h\bho\bo, also p\bpr\bre\bes\bse\ber\brv\bve\be) Takes a message list and
+ marks each message therein to be saved in the
+ user's system mailbox instead of in _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx. Does
+ not override the d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be command.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be N\bN.\b.B\bB.\b.:\b: _\bI_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be has been superseded by _\br_\be_\bt_\ba_\bi_\bn.
+ Add the list of header fields named to the
+ _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\bd _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. Header fields in the ignore list
+ are not printed on your terminal when you print
+ a message. This command is very handy for
+ suppression of certain machine-generated header
+ fields. The T\bTy\byp\bpe\be and P\bPr\bri\bin\bnt\bt commands can be used
+ to print a message in its entirety, including
+ ignored fields. If i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be is executed with no
+ arguments, it lists the current set of ignored
+ fields.
+
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl (m\bm) Takes as argument login names and distribu-
+ tion group names and sends mail to those people.
+
+ m\bmb\bbo\box\bx Indicate that a list of messages be sent to _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx
+ in your home directory when you quit. This is
+ the default action for messages if you do _\bn_\bo_\bt
+ have the _\bh_\bo_\bl_\bd option set.
+
+ n\bne\bex\bxt\bt (n\bn like +\b+ or CR) Goes to the next message in
+ sequence and types it. With an argument list,
+ types the next matching message.
+
+ p\bpr\bre\bes\bse\ber\brv\bve\be (p\bpr\bre\be) A synonym for h\bho\bol\bld\bd.
+
+ p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt (p\bp) Takes a message list and types out each mes-
+ sage on the user's terminal.
+
+ q\bqu\bui\bit\bt (q\bq) Terminates the session, saving all
+ undeleted, unsaved messages in the user's _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx
+ file in his login directory, preserving all mes-
+ sages marked with h\bho\bol\bld\bd or p\bpr\bre\bes\bse\ber\brv\bve\be or never
+ referenced in his system mailbox, and removing
+ all other messages from his system mailbox. If
+ new mail has arrived during the session, the
+ message ``You have new mail'' is given. If
+ given while editing a mailbox file with the -\b-f\bf
+ flag, then the edit file is rewritten. A return
+ to the Shell is effected, unless the rewrite of
+ edit file fails, in which case the user can
+ escape with the e\bex\bxi\bit\bt command.
+
+ r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by (r\br) Takes a message list and sends mail to the
+ sender and all recipients of the specified mes-
+ sage. The default message must not be deleted.
+
+ r\bre\bes\bsp\bpo\bon\bnd\bd A synonym for r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by.
+
+ r\bre\bet\bta\bai\bin\bn Add the list of header fields named to the
+ _\br_\be_\bt_\ba_\bi_\bn_\be_\bd _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. Only the header fields in the
+ retain list are shown on your terminal when you
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ print a message. All other header fields are
+ suppressed. The T\bTy\byp\bpe\be and P\bPr\bri\bin\bnt\bt commands can be
+ used to print a message in its entirety. If
+ r\bre\bet\bta\bai\bin\bn is executed with no arguments, it lists
+ the current set of retained fields.
+
+ s\bsa\bav\bve\be (s\bs) Takes a message list and a filename and
+ appends each message in turn to the end of the
+ file. The filename in quotes, followed by the
+ line count and character count is echoed on the
+ user's terminal.
+
+ s\bse\bet\bt (s\bse\be) With no arguments, prints all variable
+ values. Otherwise, sets option. Arguments are
+ of the form ``option=value'' (no space before or
+ after =) or ``option.''
+
+ s\bsh\bhe\bel\bll\bl (s\bsh\bh) Invokes an interactive version of the
+ shell.
+
+ s\bsi\biz\bze\be Takes a message list and prints out the size in
+ characters of each message.
+
+ s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be (s\bso\bo) The s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be command reads _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl commands from
+ a file.
+
+ t\bto\bop\bp Takes a message list and prints the top few
+ lines of each. The number of lines printed is
+ controlled by the variable t\bto\bop\bpl\bli\bin\bne\bes\bs and defaults
+ to five.
+
+ t\bty\byp\bpe\be (t\bt) A synonym for p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt.
+
+ u\bun\bna\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs Takes a list of names defined by a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs commands
+ and discards the remembered groups of users.
+ The group names no longer have any significance.
+
+ u\bun\bnd\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be (u\bu) Takes a message list and marks each message
+ as _\bn_\bo_\bt being deleted.
+
+ u\bun\bnr\bre\bea\bad\bd (U\bU) Takes a message list and marks each message
+ as _\bn_\bo_\bt having been read.
+
+ u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bt Takes a list of option names and discards their
+ remembered values; the inverse of s\bse\bet\bt.
+
+ v\bvi\bis\bsu\bua\bal\bl (v\bv) Takes a message list and invokes the display
+ editor on each message.
+
+ w\bwr\bri\bit\bte\be (w\bw) Similar to s\bsa\bav\bve\be, except that _\bo_\bn_\bl_\by the mes-
+ sage body (_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bh_\bo_\bu_\bt the header) is saved.
+ Extremely useful for such tasks as sending and
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ receiving source program text over the message
+ system.
+
+ x\bxi\bit\bt (x\bx) A synonym for e\bex\bxi\bit\bt.
+
+ z\bz _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl presents message headers in windowfuls as
+ described under the h\bhe\bea\bad\bde\ber\brs\bs command. You can
+ move _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl's attention forward to the next window
+ with the z\bz command. Also, you can move to the
+ previous window by using z\bz-\b-.
+
+ Here is a summary of the tilde escapes, which are used when
+ composing messages to perform special functions. Tilde
+ escapes are only recognized at the beginning of lines. The
+ name ``tilde escape'' is somewhat of a misnomer since the
+ actual escape character can be set by the option e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be.\b.
+
+ ~\b~!\b!command Execute the indicated shell command, then return
+ to the message.
+
+ ~\b~b\bb name ... Add the given names to the list of carbon copy
+ recipients but do not make the names visible in
+ the Cc: line ("blind" carbon copy).
+
+ ~\b~c\bc name ... Add the given names to the list of carbon copy
+ recipients.
+
+ ~\b~d\bd Read the file ``dead.letter'' from your home
+ directory into the message.
+
+ ~\b~e\be Invoke the text editor on the message collected
+ so far. After the editing session is finished,
+ you may continue appending text to the message.
+
+ ~\b~f\bf messages Read the named messages into the message being
+ sent. If no messages are specified, read in the
+ current message.
+
+ ~\b~h\bh Edit the message header fields by typing each
+ one in turn and allowing the user to append text
+ to the end or modify the field by using the
+ current terminal erase and kill characters.
+
+ ~\b~m\bm messages Read the named messages into the message being
+ sent, shifted right one tab. If no messages are
+ specified, read the current message.
+
+ ~\b~p\bp Print out the message collected so far, prefaced
+ by the message header fields.
+
+ ~\b~q\bq Abort the message being sent, copying the mes-
+ sage to ``dead.letter'' in your home directory
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ if s\bsa\bav\bve\be is set.
+
+ ~\b~r\br filename Read the named file into the message.
+
+ ~\b~s\bs string Cause the named string to become the current
+ subject field.
+
+ ~\b~t\bt name ... Add the given names to the direct recipient
+ list.
+
+ ~\b~v\bv Invoke an alternate editor (defined by the
+ VISUAL option) on the message collected so far.
+ Usually, the alternate editor will be a screen
+ editor. After you quit the editor, you may
+ resume appending text to the end of your mes-
+ sage.
+
+ ~\b~w\bw filename Write the message onto the named file.
+
+ ~\b~|\b|command Pipe the message through the command as a
+ filter. If the command gives no output or ter-
+ minates abnormally, retain the original text of
+ the message. The command _\bf_\bm_\bt(1) is often used
+ as _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd to rejustify the message.
+
+ ~\b~~\b~string Insert the string of text in the message pre-
+ faced by a single ~. If you have changed the
+ escape character, then you should double that
+ character in order to send it.
+
+ Options are controlled via the s\bse\bet\bt and u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bt commands.
+ Options may be either binary, in which case it is only sig-
+ nificant to see whether they are set or not; or string, in
+ which case the actual value is of interest. The binary
+ options include the following:
+
+ a\bap\bpp\bpe\ben\bnd\bd Causes messages saved in _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx to be appended
+ to the end rather than prepended. (This is
+ set in /usr/lib/Mail.rc on version 7 sys-
+ tems.)
+
+ a\bas\bsk\bk Causes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl to prompt you for the subject of
+ each message you send. If you respond with
+ simply a newline, no subject field will be
+ sent.
+
+ a\bas\bsk\bkc\bcc\bc Causes you to be prompted for additional car-
+ bon copy recipients at the end of each mes-
+ sage. Responding with a newline indicates
+ your satisfaction with the current list.
+
+ a\bau\but\bto\bop\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt Causes the d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be command to behave like d\bdp\bp -
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ thus, after deleting a message, the next one
+ will be typed automatically.
+
+ d\bde\beb\bbu\bug\bg Setting the binary option _\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg is the same
+ as specifying -\b-d\bd on the command line and
+ causes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl to output all sorts of informa-
+ tion useful for debugging _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl.
+
+ d\bdo\bot\bt The binary option _\bd_\bo_\bt causes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl to inter-
+ pret a period alone on a line as the termina-
+ tor of a message you are sending.
+
+ h\bho\bol\bld\bd This option is used to hold messages in the
+ system mailbox by default.
+
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be Causes interrupt signals from your terminal
+ to be ignored and echoed as @'s.
+
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\bee\beo\bof\bf An option related to _\bd_\bo_\bt is _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\be_\bo_\bf which
+ makes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl refuse to accept a control-d as
+ the end of a message. _\bI_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\be_\bo_\bf also applies
+ to _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl command mode.
+
+ m\bme\bet\bto\boo\bo Usually, when a group is expanded that con-
+ tains the sender, the sender is removed from
+ the expansion. Setting this option causes
+ the sender to be included in the group.
+
+ n\bno\bos\bsa\bav\bve\be Normally, when you abort a message with two
+ RUBOUT, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl copies the partial letter to the
+ file ``dead.letter'' in your home directory.
+ Setting the binary option _\bn_\bo_\bs_\ba_\bv_\be prevents
+ this.
+
+ R\bRe\bep\bpl\bly\bya\bal\bll\bl Reverses the sense of _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\by and _\bR_\be_\bp_\bl_\by com-
+ mands.
+
+ q\bqu\bui\bie\bet\bt Suppresses the printing of the version when
+ first invoked.
+
+ v\bve\ber\brb\bbo\bos\bse\be Setting the option _\bv_\be_\br_\bb_\bo_\bs_\be is the same as
+ using the -\b-v\bv flag on the command line. When
+ mail runs in verbose mode, the actual
+ delivery of messages is displayed on he users
+ terminal.
+
+ The following options have string values:
+
+ EDITOR Pathname of the text editor to use in the
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt command and ~e escape. If not defined,
+ then a default editor is used.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 9
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ PAGER Pathname of the program to use in the m\bmo\bor\bre\be
+ command or when _\bc_\br_\bt variable is set. A
+ default paginator is used if this option is
+ not defined.
+
+ SHELL Pathname of the shell to use in the !\b! command
+ and the ~! escape. A default shell is used
+ if this option is not defined.
+
+ VISUAL Pathname of the text editor to use in the
+ v\bvi\bis\bsu\bua\bal\bl command and ~v escape.
+
+ c\bcr\brt\bt The valued option _\bc_\br_\bt is used as a threshold
+ to determine how long a message must be
+ before P\bPA\bAG\bGE\bER\bR is used to read it.
+
+ e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be If defined, the first character of this
+ option gives the character to use in the
+ place of ~ to denote escapes.
+
+ f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\br The name of the directory to use for storing
+ folders of messages. If this name begins with
+ a `/', _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl considers it to be an absolute
+ pathname; otherwise, the folder directory is
+ found relative to your home directory.
+
+ r\bre\bec\bco\bor\brd\bd If defined, gives the pathname of the file
+ used to record all outgoing mail. If not
+ defined, then outgoing mail is not so saved.
+
+ t\bto\bop\bpl\bli\bin\bne\bes\bs If defined, gives the number of lines of a
+ message to be printed out with the t\bto\bop\bp com-
+ mand; normally, the first five lines are
+ printed.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/mail/* post office
+ ~/mbox your old mail
+ ~/.mailrc file giving initial mail commands
+ /tmp/R# temporary for editor escape
+ /usr/lib/Mail.help* help files
+ /usr/lib/Mail.rc system initialization file
+ Message* temporary for editing messages
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ binmail(1), fmt(1), newaliases(1), aliases(5),
+ mailaddr(7), sendmail(8)
+ `The Mail Reference Manual'
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ There are many flags that are not documented here. Most are
+ not useful to the general user.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 10
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ Usually, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl is just a link to _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl, which can be confus-
+ ing.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Kurt Shoens
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 11
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ adb - debugger
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\bad\bdb\bb [-\b-w\bw] [ -\b-k\bk ] [ -\b-I\bIdir ] [ objfil [ corfil ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bA_\bd_\bb is a general purpose debugging program. It may be used
+ to examine files and to provide a controlled environment for
+ the execution of UNIX programs.
+
+ _\bO_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl is normally an executable program file, preferably
+ containing a symbol table; if not then the symbolic features
+ of _\ba_\bd_\bb cannot be used although the file can still be exam-
+ ined. The default for _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl is a\ba.\b.o\bou\but\bt.\b. _\bC_\bo_\br_\bf_\bi_\bl is assumed to
+ be a core image file produced after executing _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl; the
+ default for _\bc_\bo_\br_\bf_\bi_\bl is c\bco\bor\bre\be.\b.
+
+ Requests to _\ba_\bd_\bb are read from the standard input and
+ responses are to the standard output. If the -\b-w\bw flag is
+ present then both _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl and _\bc_\bo_\br_\bf_\bi_\bl are created if necessary
+ and opened for reading and writing so that files can be
+ modified using _\ba_\bd_\bb.
+
+ The -\b-k\bk option makes _\ba_\bd_\bb do UNIX kernel memory mapping; it
+ should be used when _\bc_\bo_\br_\be is a UNIX crash dump or /_\bd_\be_\bv/_\bm_\be_\bm.
+
+ The -\b-I\bI option specifies a directory where files to be read
+ with $< or $<< (see below) will be sought; the default is
+ /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\ba_\bd_\bb.
+
+ _\bA_\bd_\bb ignores QUIT; INTERRUPT causes return to the next _\ba_\bd_\bb
+ command.
+
+ In general requests to _\ba_\bd_\bb are of the form
+
+ [_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs] [, _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt] [_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd] [;]
+
+ If _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs is present then _\bd_\bo_\bt is set to _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs. Initially
+ _\bd_\bo_\bt is set to 0. For most commands _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt specifies how many
+ times the command will be executed. The default _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is 1.
+ _\bA_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs and _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt are expressions.
+
+ The interpretation of an address depends on the context it
+ is used in. If a subprocess is being debugged then
+ addresses are interpreted in the usual way in the address
+ space of the subprocess. If the operating system is being
+ debugged either post-mortem or using the special file
+ /_\bd_\be_\bv/_\bm_\be_\bm to interactive examine and/or modify memory the
+ maps are set to map the kernel virtual addresses which start
+ at 0x80000000 (on the VAX). ADDRESSES.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1)
+
+
+
+E\bEX\bXP\bPR\bRE\bES\bSS\bSI\bIO\bON\bNS\bS
+ .\b. The value of _\bd_\bo_\bt.
+
+ + The value of _\bd_\bo_\bt incremented by the current incre-
+ ment.
+
+ ^ The value of _\bd_\bo_\bt decremented by the current incre-
+ ment.
+
+ " The last _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs typed.
+
+ _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\bg_\be_\br
+ A number. The prefixes 0o and 0O ("zero oh") force
+ interpretation in octal radix; the prefixes 0t and 0T
+ force interpretation in decimal radix; the prefixes
+ 0x and 0X force interpretation in hexadecimal radix.
+ Thus 0o20 = 0t16 = 0x10 = sixteen. If no prefix
+ appears, then the _\bd_\be_\bf_\ba_\bu_\bl_\bt _\br_\ba_\bd_\bi_\bx is used; see the $d
+ command. The default radix is initially hexadecimal.
+ The hexadecimal digits are 0123456789abcdefABCDEF
+ with the obvious values. Note that a hexadecimal
+ number whose most significant digit would otherwise
+ be an alphabetic character must have a 0x (or 0X)
+ prefix (or a leading zero if the default radix is
+ hexadecimal).
+
+ _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\bg_\be_\br.\b._\bf_\br_\ba_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ A 32 bit floating point number.
+
+ '_\bc_\bc_\bc_\bc' The ASCII value of up to 4 characters. \ may be used
+ to escape a '.
+
+ < _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be The value of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be, which is either a variable name or
+ a register name. _\bA_\bd_\bb maintains a number of variables
+ (see VARIABLES) named by single letters or digits.
+ If _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is a register name then the value of the
+ register is obtained from the system header in _\bc_\bo_\br_\b-
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl. The register names are those printed by the $r
+ command.
+
+ _\bs_\by_\bm_\bb_\bo_\bl A _\bs_\by_\bm_\bb_\bo_\bl is a sequence of upper or lower case
+ letters, underscores or digits, not starting with a
+ digit. The backslash character \\b\ may be used to
+ escape other characters. The value of the _\bs_\by_\bm_\bb_\bo_\bl is
+ taken from the symbol table in _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl. An initial _
+ will be prepended to _\bs_\by_\bm_\bb_\bo_\bl if needed.
+
+ _ _\bs_\by_\bm_\bb_\bo_\bl
+ In C, the `true name' of an external symbol begins
+ with _. It may be necessary to utter this name to
+ distinguish it from internal or hidden variables of a
+ program.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1)
+
+
+
+ _\br_\bo_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bn_\be.\b._\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ The address of the variable _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be in the specified C
+ routine. Both _\br_\bo_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bn_\be and _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be are _\bs_\by_\bm_\bb_\bo_\bl_\bs. If _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ is omitted the value is the address of the most
+ recently activated C stack frame corresponding to
+ _\br_\bo_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bn_\be. (This form is currently broken on the VAX;
+ local variables can be examined only with _\bd_\bb_\bx(1).)
+
+ (_\be_\bx_\bp) The value of the expression _\be_\bx_\bp.
+
+ M\bMo\bon\bna\bad\bdi\bic\bc o\bop\bpe\ber\bra\bat\bto\bor\brs\bs
+
+ *_\be_\bx_\bp The contents of the location addressed by _\be_\bx_\bp in _\bc_\bo_\br_\b-
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl.
+
+ @_\be_\bx_\bp The contents of the location addressed by _\be_\bx_\bp in
+ _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl.
+
+ -_\be_\bx_\bp Integer negation.
+
+ ~_\be_\bx_\bp Bitwise complement.
+
+ #_\be_\bx_\bp Logical negation.
+
+ D\bDy\bya\bad\bdi\bic\bc o\bop\bpe\ber\bra\bat\bto\bor\brs\bs are left associative and are less binding
+ than monadic operators.
+
+ _\be_\b1+_\be_\b2 Integer addition.
+
+ _\be_\b1-_\be_\b2 Integer subtraction.
+
+ _\be_\b1*_\be_\b2 Integer multiplication.
+
+ _\be_\b1%_\be_\b2 Integer division.
+
+ _\be_\b1&_\be_\b2 Bitwise conjunction.
+
+ _\be_\b1|_\be_\b2 Bitwise disjunction.
+
+ _\be_\b1#_\be_\b2 _\bE_\b1 rounded up to the next multiple of _\be_\b2.
+
+C\bCO\bOM\bMM\bMA\bAN\bND\bDS\bS
+ Most commands consist of a verb followed by a modifier or
+ list of modifiers. The following verbs are available. (The
+ commands `?' and `/' may be followed by `*'; see ADDRESSES
+ for further details.)
+
+ ?_\bf Locations starting at _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs in _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl are printed
+ according to the format _\bf. _\bd_\bo_\bt is incremented by the
+ sum of the increments for each format letter (q.v.).
+
+ /_\bf Locations starting at _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs in _\bc_\bo_\br_\bf_\bi_\bl are printed
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1)
+
+
+
+ according to the format _\bf and _\bd_\bo_\bt is incremented as for
+ `?'.
+
+ =_\bf The value of _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs itself is printed in the styles
+ indicated by the format _\bf. (For i\bi format `?' is
+ printed for the parts of the instruction that reference
+ subsequent words.)
+
+ A _\bf_\bo_\br_\bm_\ba_\bt consists of one or more characters that specify a
+ style of printing. Each format character may be preceded by
+ a decimal integer that is a repeat count for the format
+ character. While stepping through a format _\bd_\bo_\bt is incre-
+ mented by the amount given for each format letter. If no
+ format is given then the last format is used. The format
+ letters available are as follows.
+
+ o\bo 2 Print 2 bytes in octal. All octal numbers output
+ by _\ba_\bd_\bb are preceded by 0.
+ O\bO 4 Print 4 bytes in octal.
+ q\bq 2 Print in signed octal.
+ Q\bQ 4 Print long signed octal.
+ d\bd 2 Print in decimal.
+ D\bD 4 Print long decimal.
+ x\bx 2 Print 2 bytes in hexadecimal.
+ X\bX 4 Print 4 bytes in hexadecimal.
+ u\bu 2 Print as an unsigned decimal number.
+ U\bU 4 Print long unsigned decimal.
+ f\bf 4 Print the 32 bit value as a floating point number.
+ F\bF 8 Print double floating point.
+ b\bb 1 Print the addressed byte in octal.
+ c\bc 1 Print the addressed character.
+ C\bC 1 Print the addressed character using the standard
+ escape convention where control characters are
+ printed as ^X and the delete character is printed
+ as ^?.
+ s\bs _\bn Print the addressed characters until a zero char-
+ acter is reached.
+ S\bS _\bn Print a string using the ^_\bX escape convention (see
+ C\bC above). _\bn is the length of the string including
+ its zero terminator.
+ Y\bY 4 Print 4 bytes in date format (see _\bc_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be(3)).
+ i\bi n Print as machine instructions. _\bn is the number of
+ bytes occupied by the instruction. This style of
+ printing causes variables 1 and 2 to be set to the
+ offset parts of the source and destination respec-
+ tively.
+ a\ba 0 Print the value of _\bd_\bo_\bt in symbolic form. Symbols
+ are checked to ensure that they have an appropri-
+ ate type as indicated below.
+
+ / local or global data symbol
+ ? local or global text symbol
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1)
+
+
+
+ = local or global absolute symbol
+
+ p\bp 4 Print the addressed value in symbolic form using
+ the same rules for symbol lookup as a\ba.
+ t\bt 0 When preceded by an integer tabs to the next
+ appropriate tab stop. For example, 8\b8t\bt moves to
+ the next 8-space tab stop.
+ r\br 0 Print a space.
+ n\bn 0 Print a newline.
+ "\b".\b..\b..\b."\b" 0
+ Print the enclosed string.
+ ^\b^ _\bD_\bo_\bt is decremented by the current increment.
+ Nothing is printed.
+ + _\bD_\bo_\bt is incremented by 1. Nothing is printed.
+ - _\bD_\bo_\bt is decremented by 1. Nothing is printed.
+
+ newline
+ Repeat the previous command with a _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt of 1.
+
+ [?\b?/\b/]l\bl _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be _\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk
+ Words starting at _\bd_\bo_\bt are masked with _\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk and compared
+ with _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be until a match is found. If L\bL is used then
+ the match is for 4 bytes at a time instead of 2. If no
+ match is found then _\bd_\bo_\bt is unchanged; otherwise _\bd_\bo_\bt is
+ set to the matched location. If _\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk is omitted then
+ -1 is used.
+
+ [?\b?/\b/]w\bw _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be ...
+ Write the 2-byte _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be into the addressed location. If
+ the command is W\bW, write 4 bytes. Odd addresses are not
+ allowed when writing to the subprocess address space.
+
+ [?\b?/\b/]m\bm _\bb_\b1 _\be_\b1 _\bf_\b1[?\b?/\b/]
+ New values for (_\bb_\b1, _\be_\b1, _\bf_\b1) are recorded. If less than
+ three expressions are given then the remaining map
+ parameters are left unchanged. If the `?' or `/' is
+ followed by `*' then the second segment (_\bb_\b2,_\be_\b2,_\bf_\b2) of
+ the mapping is changed. If the list is terminated by
+ `?' or `/' then the file (_\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl or _\bc_\bo_\br_\bf_\bi_\bl respec-
+ tively) is used for subsequent requests. (So that, for
+ example, `/m?' will cause `/' to refer to _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl.)
+
+ >\b>_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ _\bD_\bo_\bt is assigned to the variable or register named.
+
+ !\b! A shell (/bin/sh) is called to read the rest of the
+ line following `!'.
+
+ $_\bm_\bo_\bd_\bi_\bf_\bi_\be_\br
+ Miscellaneous commands. The available _\bm_\bo_\bd_\bi_\bf_\bi_\be_\br_\bs are:
+
+ <\b<_\bf Read commands from the file _\bf. If this command is
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1)
+
+
+
+ executed in a file, further commands in the file
+ are not seen. If _\bf is omitted, the current input
+ stream is terminated. If a _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is given, and is
+ zero, the command will be ignored. The value of
+ the count will be placed in variable _\b9 before the
+ first command in _\bf is executed.
+ <\b<<\b<_\bf Similar to <\b< except it can be used in a file of
+ commands without causing the file to be closed.
+ Variable _\b9 is saved during the execution of this
+ command, and restored when it completes. There is
+ a (small) finite limit to the number of <\b<<\b< files
+ that can be open at once.
+ >\b>_\bf Append output to the file _\bf, which is created if
+ it does not exist. If _\bf is omitted, output is
+ returned to the terminal.
+ ?\b? Print process id, the signal which caused stoppage
+ or termination, as well as the registers as $\b$r\br.
+ This is the default if _\bm_\bo_\bd_\bi_\bf_\bi_\be_\br is omitted.
+ r\br Print the general registers and the instruction
+ addressed by p\bpc\bc. _\bD_\bo_\bt is set to p\bpc\bc.
+ b\bb Print all breakpoints and their associated counts
+ and commands.
+ c\bc C stack backtrace. If _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs is given then it is
+ taken as the address of the current frame instead
+ of the contents of the frame-pointer register. If
+ C\bC is used then the names and (32 bit) values of
+ all automatic and static variables are printed for
+ each active function. (broken on the VAX). If
+ _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is given then only the first _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt frames
+ are printed.
+ d\bd Set the default radix to _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs and report the
+ new value. Note that _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs is interpreted in
+ the (old) current radix. Thus "10$d" never
+ changes the default radix. To make decimal the
+ default radix, use "0t10$d".
+ e\be The names and values of external variables are
+ printed.
+ w\bw Set the page width for output to _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs (default
+ 80).
+ s\bs Set the limit for symbol matches to _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs
+ (default 255).
+ o\bo All integers input are regarded as octal.
+ q\bq Exit from _\ba_\bd_\bb.
+ v\bv Print all non zero variables in octal.
+ m\bm Print the address map.
+ p\bp (_\bK_\be_\br_\bn_\be_\bl _\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg_\bg_\bi_\bn_\bg) Change the current kernel
+ memory mapping to map the designated u\bus\bse\ber\br s\bst\btr\bru\buc\bc-\b-
+ t\btu\bur\bre\be to the address given by the symbol __\bu. The
+ _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs argument is the address of the user's user
+ page table entries (on the VAX).
+
+ :\b:_\bm_\bo_\bd_\bi_\bf_\bi_\be_\br
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1)
+
+
+
+ Manage a subprocess. Available modifiers are:
+
+ b\bb_\bc Set breakpoint at _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs. The breakpoint is exe-
+ cuted _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt-1 times before causing a stop. Each
+ time the breakpoint is encountered the command _\bc
+ is executed. If this command is omitted or sets
+ _\bd_\bo_\bt to zero then the breakpoint causes a stop.
+
+ d\bd Delete breakpoint at _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs.
+
+ r\br Run _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl as a subprocess. If _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs is given
+ explicitly then the program is entered at this
+ point; otherwise the program is entered at its
+ standard entry point. _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt specifies how many
+ breakpoints are to be ignored before stopping.
+ Arguments to the subprocess may be supplied on the
+ same line as the command. An argument starting
+ with < or > causes the standard input or output to
+ be established for the command.
+
+ c\bc_\bs The subprocess is continued with signal _\bs, see
+ _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2). If _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs is given then the subpro-
+ cess is continued at this address. If no signal
+ is specified then the signal that caused the sub-
+ process to stop is sent. Breakpoint skipping is
+ the same as for r\br.
+
+ s\bs_\bs As for c\bc except that the subprocess is single
+ stepped _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt times. If there is no current sub-
+ process then _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl is run as a subprocess as for
+ r\br. In this case no signal can be sent; the
+ remainder of the line is treated as arguments to
+ the subprocess.
+
+ k\bk The current subprocess, if any, is terminated.
+
+V\bVA\bAR\bRI\bIA\bAB\bBL\bLE\bES\bS
+ _\bA_\bd_\bb provides a number of variables. Named variables are set
+ initially by _\ba_\bd_\bb but are not used subsequently. Numbered
+ variables are reserved for communication as follows.
+
+ 0 The last value printed.
+ 1 The last offset part of an instruction source.
+ 2 The previous value of variable 1.
+ 9 The count on the last $< or $<< command.
+
+ On entry the following are set from the system header in the
+ _\bc_\bo_\br_\bf_\bi_\bl. If _\bc_\bo_\br_\bf_\bi_\bl does not appear to be a c\bco\bor\bre\be file then
+ these values are set from _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl.
+
+ b The base address of the data segment.
+ d The data segment size.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ADB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADB(1)
+
+
+
+ e The entry point.
+ m The `magic' number (0407, 0410 or 0413).
+ s The stack segment size.
+ t The text segment size.
+
+A\bAD\bDD\bDR\bRE\bES\bSS\bSE\bES\bS
+ The address in a file associated with a written address is
+ determined by a mapping associated with that file. Each
+ mapping is represented by two triples (_\bb_\b1, _\be_\b1, _\bf_\b1) and (_\bb_\b2,
+ _\be_\b2, _\bf_\b2) and the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs corresponding to a written
+ _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs is calculated as follows.
+
+ _\bb_\b1<\b__\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs<_\be_\b1 => _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs=_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs+_\bf_\b1-_\bb_\b1, otherwise,
+
+ _\bb_\b2<\b__\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs<_\be_\b2 => _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs=_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs+_\bf_\b2-_\bb_\b2,
+
+ otherwise, the requested _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs is not legal. In some
+ cases (e.g. for programs with separated I and D space) the
+ two segments for a file may overlap. If a ?\b? or /\b/ is fol-
+ lowed by an *\b* then only the second triple is used.
+
+ The initial setting of both mappings is suitable for normal
+ a\ba.\b.o\bou\but\bt and c\bco\bor\bre\be files. If either file is not of the kind
+ expected then, for that file, _\bb_\b1 is set to 0, _\be_\b1 is set to
+ the maximum file size and _\bf_\b1 is set to 0; in this way the
+ whole file can be examined with no address translation.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ a.out
+ core
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cc(1), dbx(1), ptrace(2), a.out(5), core(5)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ `Adb' when there is no current command or format. Comments
+ about inaccessible files, syntax errors, abnormal termina-
+ tion of commands, etc. Exit status is 0, unless last com-
+ mand failed or returned nonzero status.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Since no shell is invoked to interpret the arguments of the
+ :\b:r\br command, the customary wild-card and variable expansions
+ cannot occur.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 8
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+ADDBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADDBIB(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ addbib - create or extend bibliographic database
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\bad\bdd\bdb\bbi\bib\bb [ -\b-p\bp promptfile ] [ -\b-a\ba ] database
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ When this program starts up, answering ``y'' to the initial
+ ``Instructions?'' prompt yields directions; typing ``n'' or
+ RETURN skips them. _\bA_\bd_\bd_\bb_\bi_\bb then prompts for various biblio-
+ graphic fields, reads responses from the terminal, and sends
+ output records to a _\bd_\ba_\bt_\ba_\bb_\ba_\bs_\be. A null response (just RETURN)
+ means to leave out that field. A minus sign (-) means to go
+ back to the previous field. A trailing backslash allows a
+ field to be continued on the next line. The repeating
+ ``Continue?'' prompt allows the user either to resume by
+ typing ``y'' or RETURN, to quit the current session by typ-
+ ing ``n'' or ``q'', or to edit the _\bd_\ba_\bt_\ba_\bb_\ba_\bs_\be with any system
+ editor (_\bv_\bi, _\be_\bx, _\be_\bd_\bi_\bt, _\be_\bd).
+
+ The -\b-a\ba option suppresses prompting for an abstract; asking
+ for an abstract is the default. Abstracts are ended with a
+ CTRL-d. The -\b-p\bp option causes _\ba_\bd_\bd_\bb_\bi_\bb to use a new prompting
+ skeleton, defined in _\bp_\br_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bt_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. This file should contain
+ prompt strings, a tab, and the key-letters to be written to
+ the _\bd_\ba_\bt_\ba_\bb_\ba_\bs_\be.
+
+ The most common key-letters and their meanings are given
+ below. _\bA_\bd_\bd_\bb_\bi_\bb insulates you from these key-letters, since
+ it gives you prompts in English, but if you edit the
+ bibliography file later on, you will need to know this
+ information.
+
+ %A Author's name
+ %B Book containing article referenced
+ %C City (place of publication)
+ %D Date of publication
+ %E Editor of book containing article referenced
+ %F Footnote number or label (supplied by _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br)
+ %G Government order number
+ %H Header commentary, printed before reference
+ %I Issuer (publisher)
+ %J Journal containing article
+ %K Keywords to use in locating reference
+ %L Label field used by -\b-k\bk option of _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br
+ %M Bell Labs Memorandum (undefined)
+ %N Number within volume
+ %O Other commentary, printed at end of reference
+ %P Page number(s)
+ %Q Corporate or Foreign Author (unreversed)
+ %R Report, paper, or thesis (unpublished)
+ %S Series title
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ADDBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ADDBIB(1)
+
+
+
+ %T Title of article or book
+ %V Volume number
+ %X Abstract - used by _\br_\bo_\bf_\bf_\bb_\bi_\bb, not by _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br
+ %Y,Z ignored by _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br
+
+ Except for `A', each field should be given just once. Only
+ relevant fields should be supplied. An example is:
+
+ %A Bill Tuthill
+ %T Refer - A Bibliography System
+ %I Computing Services
+ %C Berkeley
+ %D 1982
+ %O UNX 4.3.5.
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ promptfile optional file to define prompting
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ refer(1), sortbib(1), roffbib(1), indxbib(1), lookbib(1)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bRS\bS
+ Al Stangenberger, Bill Tuthill
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+APPLY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual APPLY(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ apply - apply a command to a set of arguments
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\bap\bpp\bpl\bly\by [ -\b-a\ba_\bc ] [ -\b-_\bn ] command args ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bA_\bp_\bp_\bl_\by runs the named _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd on each argument _\ba_\br_\bg in turn.
+ Normally arguments are chosen singly; the optional number _\bn
+ specifies the number of arguments to be passed to _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd.
+ If _\bn is zero, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is run without arguments once for each
+ _\ba_\br_\bg. Character sequences of the form %_\bd in _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd, where _\bd
+ is a digit from 1 to 9, are replaced by the _\bd'th following
+ unused _\ba_\br_\bg. If any such sequences occur, _\bn is ignored, and
+ the number of arguments passed to _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is the maximum
+ value of _\bd in _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd. The character `%' may be changed by
+ the -\b-a\ba option.
+
+ Examples:
+ apply echo *
+ is similar to ls(1);
+ apply -2 cmp a1 b1 a2 b2 ...
+ compares the `a' files to the `b' files;
+ apply -0 who 1 2 3 4 5
+ runs who(1) 5 times; and
+ apply 'ln %1 /usr/joe' *
+ links all files in the current directory to the directory
+ /usr/joe.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Rob Pike
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Shell metacharacters in _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd may have bizarre effects; it
+ is best to enclose complicated commands in single quotes
+ ' '.
+
+ There is no way to pass a literal `%2' if `%' is the argu-
+ ment expansion character.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+APROPOS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual APROPOS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ apropos - locate commands by keyword lookup
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\bap\bpr\bro\bop\bpo\bos\bs [ -\b-M\bM _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh ] keyword ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bA_\bp_\br_\bo_\bp_\bo_\bs shows which manual pages contain instances of any of
+ the given _\bk_\be_\by_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd(s) in their title line. Each word is con-
+ sidered separately and case of letters is ignored. Words
+ which are part of other words are considered; when looking
+ for compile, _\ba_\bp_\br_\bo_\bp_\bo_\bs will also find all instances of ``com-
+ piler''.
+
+ If the line output by _\ba_\bp_\br_\bo_\bp_\bo_\bs starts ``name(section) ...''
+ you can enter ``man section name'' to get its documentation.
+
+ Normally _\ba_\bp_\br_\bo_\bp_\bo_\bs checks in a standard location (/usr/man)
+ for its database ``whatis''. This can be changed by supply-
+ ing a _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh (a la the Bourne shell) with the -\b-M\bM flag. This
+ search path must be a colon (``:'') separated list of direc-
+ tories which _\ba_\bp_\br_\bo_\bp_\bo_\bs will search for files named ``whatis''.
+ The path can also be set with the environmental variable
+ _\bM_\bA_\bN_\bP_\bA_\bT_\bH.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/man/whatis data base
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ man(1), whatis(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 30, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+AR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ar - archive and library maintainer
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\bar\br key [ posname ] afile name ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bA_\br maintains groups of files combined into a single archive
+ file. Its main use is to create and update library files as
+ used by the loader. It can be used, though, for any similar
+ purpose. N\bN.\b.B\bB:\b: This version of _\ba_\br uses a ASCII-format
+ archive which is portable among the various machines running
+ UNIX. Programs for dealing with older formats are avail-
+ able: see _\ba_\br_\bc_\bv(8).
+
+ _\bK_\be_\by is one character from the set d\bdr\brq\bqt\btp\bpm\bmx\bx,\b, optionally con-
+ catenated with one or more of v\bvu\bua\bai\bib\bbc\bcl\blo\bo.\b. _\bA_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is the archive
+ file. The _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be_\bs are constituent files in the archive file.
+ The meanings of the _\bk_\be_\by characters are:
+
+ d\bd Delete the named files from the archive file.
+
+ r\br Replace the named files in the archive file. If the
+ optional character u\bu is used with r\br,\b, then only those
+ files with `last-modified' dates later than the archive
+ files are replaced. If an optional positioning charac-
+ ter from the set a\bab\bbi\bi is used, then the _\bp_\bo_\bs_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be argument
+ must be present and specifies that new files are to be
+ placed after (a\ba) or before (b\bb or i\bi) _\bp_\bo_\bs_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. Otherwise
+ new files are placed at the end.
+
+ q\bq Quickly append the named files to the end of the
+ archive file. Optional positioning characters are
+ invalid. The command does not check whether the added
+ members are already in the archive. Useful only to
+ avoid quadratic behavior when creating a large archive
+ piece-by-piece.
+
+ t\bt Print a table of contents of the archive file. If no
+ names are given, all files in the archive are tabled.
+ If names are given, only those files are tabled.
+
+ p\bp Print the named files in the archive.
+
+ m\bm Move the named files to the end of the archive. If a
+ positioning character is present, then the _\bp_\bo_\bs_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ argument must be present and, as in r\br,\b, specifies where
+ the files are to be moved.
+
+ x\bx Extract the named files. If no names are given, all
+ files in the archive are extracted. In neither case
+ does x\bx alter the archive file. Normally the `last-
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+AR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AR(1)
+
+
+
+ modified' date of each extracted file is the date when
+ it is extracted. However, if o\bo is used, the `last-
+ modified' date is reset to the date recorded in the
+ archive.
+
+ v\bv Verbose. Under the verbose option, _\ba_\br gives a file-
+ by-file description of the making of a new archive file
+ from the old archive and the constituent files. When
+ used with t\bt,\b, it gives a long listing of all information
+ about the files. When used with p\bp, it precedes each
+ file with a name.
+
+ c\bc Create. Normally _\ba_\br will create _\ba_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be when it needs
+ to. The create option suppresses the normal message
+ that is produced when _\ba_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is created.
+
+ l\bl Local. Normally _\ba_\br places its temporary files in the
+ directory /tmp. This option causes them to be placed
+ in the local directory.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/v* temporaries
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lorder(1), ld(1), ranlib(1), ar(5), arcv(8)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If the same file is mentioned twice in an argument list, it
+ may be put in the archive twice.
+
+ The `last-modified' date of a file will not be altered by
+ the o\bo option if the user is not the owner of the extracted
+ file, or the super-user.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+AS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ as - VAX-11 assembler
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\bas\bs [ -\b-a\ba1\b1-\b-1\b16\b6 ] [ [ -\b-d\bd1\b12\b24\b4 ] [ -\b-L\bL ] [ -\b-W\bW ] [ -\b-V\bV ] [ -\b-J\bJ ] [ -\b-R\bR ]
+ [ -\b-t\bt directory ] [ -\b-o\bo objfile ] [ name ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bA_\bs assembles the named files, or the standard input if no
+ file name is specified. The available flags are:
+
+ -\b-a\ba Specifies the alignment of procedures and data blocks.
+ It is given as a power of two; thus an alignment of 3
+ causes alignment on an eight byte boundary. The
+ default is -\b-a\ba2\b2.\b.
+
+ -\b-d\bd Specifies the number of bytes to be assembled for
+ offsets which involve forward or external references,
+ and which have sizes unspecified in the assembly
+ language. The default is -\b-d\bd4\b4.\b.
+
+ -\b-L\bL Save defined labels beginning with a `L', which are
+ normally discarded to save space in the resultant sym-
+ bol table. The compilers generate such temporary
+ labels.
+
+ -\b-V\bV Use virtual memory for some intermediate storage,
+ rather than a temporary file.
+
+ -\b-W\bW Do not complain about errors.
+
+ -\b-J\bJ Use long branches to resolve jumps when byte-
+ displacement branches are insufficient. This must be
+ used when a compiler-generated assembly contains
+ branches of more than 32k bytes.
+
+ -\b-R\bR Make initialized data segments read-only, by con-
+ catenating them to the text segments. This obviates
+ the need to run editor scripts on assembly code to make
+ initialized data read-only and shared.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Specifies a directory to receive the temporary file,
+ other than the default /tmp.
+
+ All undefined symbols in the assembly are treated as global.
+
+ The output of the assembly is left on the file _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be; if
+ that is omitted, _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt is used.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/as* default temporary files
+ a.out default resultant object file
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+AS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AS(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ld(1), nm(1), adb(1), dbx(1), a.out(5)
+ Auxiliary documentation _\bA_\bs_\bs_\be_\bm_\bb_\bl_\be_\br _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br_\be_\bn_\bc_\be _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bRS\bS
+ John F. Reiser
+ Robert R. Henry
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ -\b-J\bJ should be eliminated; the assembler should automatically
+ choose among byte, word and long branches.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+AT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ at - execute commands at a later time
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\bat\bt [\b[ -\b-c\bc ]\b] [\b[ -\b-s\bs ]\b] [\b[ -\b-m\bm ]\b] time [ day ] [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bA_\bt spools away a copy of the named _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be to be used as input
+ to _\bs_\bh(1) or _\bc_\bs_\bh(1). If the -\b-c\bc flag (for (_\bc_\bs_\bh(1))) or the -\b-s\bs
+ flag (for (_\bs_\bh(1))) is specified, then that shell will be
+ used to execute the job; if no shell is specified, the
+ current environment shell is used. If no file name is
+ specified, _\ba_\bt prompts for commands from standard input until
+ a ^D is typed.
+
+ If the -\b-m\bm flag is specified, mail will be sent to the user
+ after the job has been run. If errors occur during execution
+ of the job, then a copy of the error diagnostics will be
+ sent to the user. If no errors occur, then a short message
+ is sent informing the user that no errors occurred.
+
+ The format of the spool file is as follows: A four line
+ header that includes the owner of the job, the name of the
+ job, the shell used to run the job, and whether mail will be
+ set after the job is executed. The header is followed by a
+ _\bc_\bd command to the current directory and a _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk command to
+ set the modes on any files created by the job. Then _\ba_\bt
+ copies all relevant environment variables to the spool file.
+ When the script is run, it uses the user and group ID of the
+ creator of the spool file.
+
+ The _\bt_\bi_\bm_\be is 1 to 4 digits, with an optional following `A',
+ `P', `N' or `M' for AM, PM, noon or midnight. One and two
+ digit numbers are taken to be hours, three and four digits
+ to be hours and minutes. If no letters follow the digits, a
+ 24 hour clock time is understood.
+
+ The optional _\bd_\ba_\by is either (1) a month name followed by a
+ day number, or (2) a day of the week; if the word `week'
+ follows, invocation is moved seven days further off. Names
+ of months and days may be recognizably truncated. Examples
+ of legitimate commands are
+
+ at 8am jan 24
+ at -c -m 1530 fr week
+ at -s -m 1200n week
+
+ _\bA_\bt programs are executed by periodic execution of the com-
+ mand /usr/lib/atrun from _\bc_\br_\bo_\bn(8). The granularity of _\ba_\bt
+ depends upon the how often atrun is executed.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 20, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+AT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AT(1)
+
+
+
+ Error output is lost unless redirected or the -_\bm flag is
+ requested, in which case a copy of the errors is sent to the
+ user via _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(1).
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/at spooling area
+ /usr/spool/at/yy.ddd.hhhh.* job file
+ /usr/spool/at/past directory where jobs are executed from
+ /usr/spool/at/lasttimedone last time atrun was run
+ /usr/lib/atrun executor (run by cron(8))
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ atq(1), atrm(1), calendar(1), sleep(1), cron(8)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Complains about various syntax errors and times out of
+ range.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Due to the granularity of the execution of /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\ba_\bt_\br_\bu_\bn,
+ there may be bugs in scheduling things almost exactly 24
+ hours into the future.
+
+ If the system crashes, mail is not sent to the user inform-
+ ing them that the job was not completed.
+
+ Sometimes old spool files are not removed from the directory
+ /usr/spool/at/past. This is usually due to a system crash,
+ and requires that they be removed by hand.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 20, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+ATQ(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ATQ(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ atq - print the queue of jobs waiting to be run
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\bat\btq\bq [ -c ] [ -n ] [ name ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bA_\bt_\bq prints the queue of jobs that are waiting to be run at a
+ later date. These jobs were created with the _\ba_\bt(1) command.
+ With no flags, the queue is sorted in the order that the
+ jobs will be executed.
+
+ If the -\b-c\bc flag is used, the queue is sorted by the time that
+ the _\ba_\bt command was given.
+
+ The -\b-n\bn flag prints only the total number of files that are
+ currently in the queue.
+
+ If a name(s) is provided, only those files belonging to that
+ user(s) are displayed.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/at spool area
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ at(1), atrm(1), cron(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+ATRM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ATRM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ atrm - remove jobs spooled by at
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\bat\btr\brm\bm [ -f ] [ -i ] [-] [[ job #] [ name ]... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bA_\bt_\br_\bm removes jobs that were created with the _\ba_\bt(1) command.
+ With the -\b- flag, all jobs belonging to the person invoking
+ _\ba_\bt_\br_\bm are removed. If a job number(s) is specified, _\ba_\bt_\br_\bm
+ attempts to remove only that job number(s).
+
+ If the -\b-f\bf flag is used, all information regarding the remo-
+ val of the specified jobs is suppressed. If the -\b-i\bi flag is
+ used, _\ba_\bt_\br_\bm asks if a job should be removed; a response of
+ 'y' causes the job to be removed.
+
+ If a user(s) name is specified, all jobs belonging to that
+ user(s) are removed. This form of invoking _\ba_\bt_\br_\bm is useful
+ only to the super-user.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/at spool area
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ at(1), atq(1), cron(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+AWK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AWK(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ awk - pattern scanning and processing language
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ a\baw\bwk\bk [ -\b-F\bF_\bc ] [ prog ] [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bA_\bw_\bk scans each input _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be for lines that match any of a set
+ of patterns specified in _\bp_\br_\bo_\bg. With each pattern in _\bp_\br_\bo_\bg
+ there can be an associated action that will be performed
+ when a line of a _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be matches the pattern. The set of pat-
+ terns may appear literally as _\bp_\br_\bo_\bg, or in a file specified
+ as -\b-f\bf _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+ Files are read in order; if there are no files, the standard
+ input is read. The file name `-' means the standard input.
+ Each line is matched against the pattern portion of every
+ pattern-action statement; the associated action is performed
+ for each matched pattern.
+
+ An input line is made up of fields separated by white space.
+ (This default can be changed by using FS, _\bv_\bi_\bd_\be _\bi_\bn_\bf_\br_\ba.) The
+ fields are denoted $1, $2, ... ; $0 refers to the entire
+ line.
+
+ A pattern-action statement has the form
+
+ pattern { action }
+
+ A missing { action } means print the line; a missing pattern
+ always matches.
+
+ An action is a sequence of statements. A statement can be
+ one of the following:
+
+ if ( conditional ) statement [ else statement ]
+ while ( conditional ) statement
+ for ( expression ; conditional ; expression ) statement
+ break
+ continue
+ { [ statement ] ... }
+ variable = expression
+ print [ expression-list ] [ >expression ]
+ printf format [ , expression-list ] [ >expression ]
+ next # skip remaining patterns on this input line
+ exit # skip the rest of the input
+
+ Statements are terminated by semicolons, newlines or right
+ braces. An empty expression-list stands for the whole line.
+ Expressions take on string or numeric values as appropriate,
+ and are built using the operators +, -, *, /, %, and con-
+ catenation (indicated by a blank). The C operators ++, --,
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+AWK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AWK(1)
+
+
+
+ +=, -=, *=, /=, and %= are also available in expressions.
+ Variables may be scalars, array elements (denoted x[i]) or
+ fields. Variables are initialized to the null string.
+ Array subscripts may be any string, not necessarily numeric;
+ this allows for a form of associative memory. String con-
+ stants are quoted "...".
+
+ The _\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt statement prints its arguments on the standard
+ output (or on a file if >_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is present), separated by the
+ current output field separator, and terminated by the output
+ record separator. The _\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\bf statement formats its expres-
+ sion list according to the format (see _\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\bf(3S)).
+
+ The built-in function _\bl_\be_\bn_\bg_\bt_\bh returns the length of its argu-
+ ment taken as a string, or of the whole line if no argument.
+ There are also built-in functions _\be_\bx_\bp, _\bl_\bo_\bg, _\bs_\bq_\br_\bt, and _\bi_\bn_\bt.
+ The last truncates its argument to an integer.
+ _\bs_\bu_\bb_\bs_\bt_\br(_\bs, _\bm, _\bn) returns the _\bn-character substring of _\bs that
+ begins at position _\bm. The function
+ _\bs_\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\bf(_\bf_\bm_\bt, _\be_\bx_\bp_\br, _\be_\bx_\bp_\br, ...) formats the expressions
+ according to the _\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\bf(3S) format given by _\bf_\bm_\bt and returns
+ the resulting string.
+
+ Patterns are arbitrary Boolean combinations (!, ||, &&, and
+ parentheses) of regular expressions and relational expres-
+ sions. Regular expressions must be surrounded by slashes
+ and are as in _\be_\bg_\br_\be_\bp. Isolated regular expressions in a pat-
+ tern apply to the entire line. Regular expressions may also
+ occur in relational expressions.
+
+ A pattern may consist of two patterns separated by a comma;
+ in this case, the action is performed for all lines between
+ an occurrence of the first pattern and the next occurrence
+ of the second.
+
+ A relational expression is one of the following:
+
+ expression matchop regular-expression
+ expression relop expression
+
+ where a relop is any of the six relational operators in C,
+ and a matchop is either ~ (for contains) or !~ (for does not
+ contain). A conditional is an arithmetic expression, a
+ relational expression, or a Boolean combination of these.
+
+ The special patterns BEGIN and END may be used to capture
+ control before the first input line is read and after the
+ last. BEGIN must be the first pattern, END the last.
+
+ A single character _\bc may be used to separate the fields by
+ starting the program with
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+AWK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual AWK(1)
+
+
+
+ BEGIN { FS = "c" }
+
+ or by using the -\b-F\bF_\bc option.
+
+ Other variable names with special meanings include NF, the
+ number of fields in the current record; NR, the ordinal
+ number of the current record; FILENAME, the name of the
+ current input file; OFS, the output field separator (default
+ blank); ORS, the output record separator (default newline);
+ and OFMT, the output format for numbers (default "%.6g").
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bES\bS
+ Print lines longer than 72 characters:
+
+ length > 72
+
+ Print first two fields in opposite order:
+
+ { print $2, $1 }
+
+ Add up first column, print sum and average:
+
+ { s += $1 }
+ END { print "sum is", s, " average is", s/NR }
+
+ Print fields in reverse order:
+
+ { for (i = NF; i > 0; --i) print $i }
+
+ Print all lines between start/stop pairs:
+
+ /start/, /stop/
+
+ Print all lines whose first field is different from previous
+ one:
+
+ $1 != prev { print; prev = $1 }
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lex(1), sed(1)
+ A. V. Aho, B. W. Kernighan, P. J. Weinberger, _\bA_\bw_\bk - _\ba _\bp_\ba_\bt_\b-
+ _\bt_\be_\br_\bn _\bs_\bc_\ba_\bn_\bn_\bi_\bn_\bg _\ba_\bn_\bd _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bl_\ba_\bn_\bg_\bu_\ba_\bg_\be
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ There are no explicit conversions between numbers and
+ strings. To force an expression to be treated as a number
+ add 0 to it; to force it to be treated as a string concaten-
+ ate "" to it.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+BASENAME(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BASENAME(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ basename - strip filename affixes
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ b\bba\bas\bse\ben\bna\bam\bme\be string [ suffix ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bB_\ba_\bs_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be deletes any prefix ending in `/' and the _\bs_\bu_\bf_\bf_\bi_\bx, if
+ present in _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg, from _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg, and prints the result on the
+ standard output. It is normally used inside substitution
+ marks ` ` in shell procedures.
+
+ This shell procedure invoked with the argument
+ /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bs_\br_\bc/_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bc_\ba_\bt._\bc compiles the named file and moves the
+ output to _\bc_\ba_\bt in the current directory:
+
+ cc $1
+ mv a.out `basename $1 .c`
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+BC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BC(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ bc - arbitrary-precision arithmetic language and calculator
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ b\bbc\bc [ -\b-c\bc ] [ -\b-l\bl ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bB_\bc is an interactive processor for a language which resem-
+ bles C but provides unlimited precision arithmetic. It
+ takes input from any files given, then reads the standard
+ input. The -\b-l\bl argument stands for the name of an arbitrary
+ precision math library. The syntax for _\bb_\bc programs is as
+ follows; L means letter a-z, E means expression, S means
+ statement.
+
+ Comments
+ are enclosed in /* and */.
+
+ Names
+ simple variables: L
+ array elements: L [ E ]
+ The words `ibase', `obase', and `scale'
+
+ Other operands
+ arbitrarily long numbers with optional sign and
+ decimal point.
+ ( E )
+ sqrt ( E )
+ length ( E ) number of significant decimal digits
+ scale ( E ) number of digits right of decimal point
+ L ( E , ... , E )
+
+ Operators
+ + - * / % ^ (% is remainder; ^ is power)
+ ++ -- (prefix and postfix; apply to names)
+ == <= >= != < >
+ = += -= *= /= %= ^=
+
+ Statements
+ E
+ { S ; ... ; S }
+ if ( E ) S
+ while ( E ) S
+ for ( E ; E ; E ) S
+ null statement
+ break
+ quit
+
+ Function definitions
+ define L ( L ,..., L ) {
+ auto L, ... , L
+ S; ... S
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 28, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+BC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BC(1)
+
+
+
+ return ( E )
+ }
+
+ Functions in -\b-l\bl math library
+ s(x) sine
+ c(x) cosine
+ e(x) exponential
+ l(x) log
+ a(x) arctangent
+ j(n,x) Bessel function
+
+ All function arguments are passed by value.
+
+ The value of a statement that is an expression is printed
+ unless the main operator is an assignment. Either semi-
+ colons or newlines may separate statements. Assignment to
+ _\bs_\bc_\ba_\bl_\be influences the number of digits to be retained on
+ arithmetic operations in the manner of _\bd_\bc(1). Assignments
+ to _\bi_\bb_\ba_\bs_\be or _\bo_\bb_\ba_\bs_\be set the input and output number radix
+ respectively.
+
+ The same letter may be used as an array, a function, and a
+ simple variable simultaneously. All variables are global to
+ the program. `Auto' variables are pushed down during func-
+ tion calls. When using arrays as function arguments or
+ defining them as automatic variables empty square brackets
+ must follow the array name.
+
+ For example
+
+ scale = 20
+ define e(x){
+ auto a, b, c, i, s
+ a = 1
+ b = 1
+ s = 1
+ for(i=1; 1==1; i++){
+ a = a*x
+ b = b*i
+ c = a/b
+ if(c == 0) return(s)
+ s = s+c
+ }
+ }
+
+ defines a function to compute an approximate value of the
+ exponential function and
+
+ for(i=1; i<=10; i++) e(i)
+
+ prints approximate values of the exponential function of the
+ first ten integers.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 28, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+BC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BC(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bB_\bc is actually a preprocessor for _\bd_\bc(1), which it invokes
+ automatically, unless the -\b-c\bc (compile only) option is
+ present. In this case the _\bd_\bc input is sent to the standard
+ output instead.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/lib.b mathematical library
+ dc(1) desk calculator proper
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ dc(1)
+ L. L. Cherry and R. Morris, _\bB_\bC - _\bA_\bn _\ba_\br_\bb_\bi_\bt_\br_\ba_\br_\by _\bp_\br_\be_\bc_\bi_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ _\bd_\be_\bs_\bk-_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bu_\bl_\ba_\bt_\bo_\br _\bl_\ba_\bn_\bg_\bu_\ba_\bg_\be
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ No &&, ||, or ! operators.
+ _\bF_\bo_\br statement must have all three E's.
+ _\bQ_\bu_\bi_\bt is interpreted when read, not when executed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 28, 1987 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+BIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BIFF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ biff - be notified if mail arrives and who it is from
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ b\bbi\bif\bff\bf [ y\byn\bn ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bB_\bi_\bf_\bf informs the system whether you want to be notified when
+ mail arrives during the current terminal session. The com-
+ mand
+
+ b\bbi\bif\bff\bf y\by
+
+ enables notification; the command
+
+ b\bbi\bif\bff\bf n\bn
+
+ disables it. When mail notification is enabled, the header
+ and first few lines of the message will be printed on your
+ screen whenever mail arrives. A ``biff y'' command is often
+ included in the file ._\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn or ._\bp_\br_\bo_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be to be executed at
+ each login.
+
+ _\bB_\bi_\bf_\bf operates asynchronously. For synchronous notification
+ use the MAIL variable of _\bs_\bh(1) or the _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl variable of
+ _\bc_\bs_\bh(1).
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), sh(1), mail(1), comsat(8C)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+BINMAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BINMAIL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ binmail - send or receive mail among users
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ /\b/b\bbi\bin\bn/\b/m\bma\bai\bil\bl [ +\b+ ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ person ] ...
+ /\b/b\bbi\bin\bn/\b/m\bma\bai\bil\bl [\b[ +\b+ ]\b] [ -\b-i\bi ] -\b-f\bf file
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ Note: This is the old version 7 UNIX system mail program.
+ The default _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl command is described in _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl(1), and its
+ binary is in the directory /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bu_\bc_\bb.
+
+ _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl with no argument prints a user's mail, message-by-
+ message, in last-in, first-out order; the optional argument
+ +\b+ displays the mail messages in first-in, first-out order.
+ For each message, it reads a line from the standard input to
+ direct disposition of the message.
+
+ newline
+ Go on to next message.
+
+ d Delete message and go on to the next.
+
+ p Print message again.
+
+ - Go back to previous message.
+
+ s [ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ] ...
+ Save the message in the named _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs (`mbox' default).
+
+ w [ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ] ...
+ Save the message, without a header, in the named _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs
+ (`mbox' default).
+
+ m [ _\bp_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn ] ...
+ Mail the message to the named _\bp_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn_\bs (yourself is
+ default).
+
+ EOT (control-D)
+ Put unexamined mail back in the mailbox and stop.
+
+ q Same as EOT.
+
+ !_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd
+ Escape to the Shell to do _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd.
+
+ * Print a command summary.
+
+ An interrupt normally terminates the _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl command; the mail
+ file is unchanged. The optional argument -\b-i\bi tells _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl to
+ continue after interrupts.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+BINMAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual BINMAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ When _\bp_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn_\bs are named, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl takes the standard input up to
+ an end-of-file (or a line with just `.') and adds it to each
+ _\bp_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn'_\bs `mail' file. The message is preceded by the
+ sender's name and a postmark. Lines that look like post-
+ marks are prepended with `>'. A _\bp_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn is usually a user
+ name recognized by _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn(1). To denote a recipient on a
+ remote system, prefix _\bp_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn by the system name and exclama-
+ tion mark (see _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp(1C)).
+
+ The -\b-f\bf option causes the named file, for example, `mbox', to
+ be printed as if it were the mail file.
+
+ When a user logs in he is informed of the presence of mail.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/passwd to identify sender and locate persons
+ /usr/spool/mail/* incoming mail for user *
+ mbox saved mail
+ /tmp/ma* temp file
+ /usr/spool/mail/*.lock lock for mail directory
+ dead.letter unmailable text
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ Mail(1), write(1), uucp(1C), uux(1C), xsend(1), sendmail(8)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Race conditions sometimes result in a failure to remove a
+ lock file.
+
+ Normally anybody can read your mail, unless it is sent by
+ _\bx_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd(1). An installation can overcome this by making _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl
+ a set-user-id command that owns the mail directory.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CAL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CAL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ cal - print calendar
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bca\bal\bl [ month ] [ year ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\ba_\bl prints a calendar for the specified year. If a month is
+ also specified, a calendar just for that month is printed.
+ If no arguments are given, a calendar for the current month
+ is printed. _\bY_\be_\ba_\br can be between 1 and 9999. The _\bm_\bo_\bn_\bt_\bh is a
+ number between 1 and 12. The calendar produced is that for
+ England and her colonies.
+
+ Try September 1752.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The year is always considered to start in January even
+ though this is historically naive.
+ Beware that `cal 78' refers to the early Christian era, not
+ the 20th century.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 28, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CALENDAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CALENDAR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ calendar - reminder service
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bca\bal\ble\ben\bnd\bda\bar\br [ - ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\ba_\bl_\be_\bn_\bd_\ba_\br consults the file `calendar' in the current direc-
+ tory and prints out lines that contain today's or tomorrow's
+ date anywhere in the line. Most reasonable month-day dates
+ such as `Dec. 7,' `december 7,' `12/7,' etc., are recog-
+ nized, but not `7 December' or `7/12'. If you give the
+ month as ``*'' with a date, i.e. ``* 1'', that day in any
+ month will do. On weekends `tomorrow' extends through Mon-
+ day.
+
+ When an argument is present, _\bc_\ba_\bl_\be_\bn_\bd_\ba_\br does its job for every
+ user who has a file `calendar' in his login directory and
+ sends him any positive results by _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(1). Normally this is
+ done daily in the wee hours under control of _\bc_\br_\bo_\bn(8).
+
+ The file `calendar' is first run through the ``C'' prepro-
+ cessor, /_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\bc_\bp_\bp, to include any other calendar files speci-
+ fied with the usual ``#include'' syntax. Included calendars
+ will usually be shared by all users, maintained and docu-
+ mented by the local administration.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ calendar
+ /usr/lib/calendar to figure out today's and tomorrow's dates
+ /etc/passwd
+ /tmp/cal*
+ /lib/cpp, egrep, sed, mail as subprocesses
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ at(1), cron(8), mail(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bC_\ba_\bl_\be_\bn_\bd_\ba_\br'_\bs extended idea of `tomorrow' doesn't account for
+ holidays.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sh, for, case, if, while, :\b:, .\b., break, continue, cd, eval,
+ exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift,
+ times, trap, umask, wait - command language
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsh\bh [ -\b-c\bce\bei\bik\bkn\bnr\brs\bst\btu\buv\bvx\bx ] [ arg ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bh is a command programming language that executes commands
+ read from a terminal or a file. See i\bin\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn for the
+ meaning of arguments to the shell.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ A _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is a sequence of non blank _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bs separated
+ by blanks (a blank is a t\bta\bab\bb or a s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be). The first word
+ specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as
+ specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments
+ to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu-
+ ment 0 (see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2)). The _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be of a simple-command is
+ its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs if
+ it terminates abnormally (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2) for a list of status
+ values).
+
+ A _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be is a sequence of one or more _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd_\bs separated
+ by |\b|.\b. The standard output of each command but the last is
+ connected by a _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be(2) to the standard input of the next
+ command. Each command is run as a separate process; the
+ shell waits for the last command to terminate.
+
+ A _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is a sequence of one or more _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bs separated by
+ ;\b;, &\b&, &\b&&\b& or |\b||\b| and optionally terminated by ;\b; or &\b&. ;\b; and &\b&
+ have equal precedence which is lower than that of &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b|,
+ &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes
+ sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding
+ _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be to be executed without waiting for it to finish.
+ The symbol &\b&&\b& (|\b||\b|) causes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following to be executed
+ only if the preceding _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be returns a zero (non zero)
+ value. Newlines may appear in a _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt, instead of semi-
+ colons, to delimit commands.
+
+ A _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is either a simple-command or one of the follow-
+ ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last
+ simple-command executed in the command.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\br _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be [i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ...] d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ Each time a f\bfo\bor\br command is executed _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is set to the
+ next word in the f\bfo\bor\br word list. If i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ... is
+ omitted, i\bin\bn "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is assumed. Execution ends when there
+ are no more words in the list.
+
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd i\bin\bn [_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn [ |\b| _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn ] ... )\b) _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt ;\b;;\b;] ... e\bes\bsa\bac\bc
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ A c\bca\bas\bse\be command executes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt associated with the
+ first pattern that matches _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd. The form of the pat-
+ terns is the same as that used for file name genera-
+ tion.
+
+ i\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [e\bel\bli\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] ... [e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] f\bfi\bi
+ The _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following i\bif\bf is executed and if it returns
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Otherwise,
+ the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following e\bel\bli\bif\bf is executed and if its value is
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Failing that
+ the e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is executed.
+
+ w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ A w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be command repeatedly executes the w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt and
+ if its value is zero executes the d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt; otherwise
+ the loop terminates. The value returned by a w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ command is that of the last executed command in the d\bdo\bo
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl may be used in place of w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be to negate the
+ loop termination test.
+
+ (\b( _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt )\b)
+ Execute _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt in a subshell.
+
+ {\b{ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt }\b}
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is simply executed.
+
+ The following words are only recognized as the first word of
+ a command and when not quoted.
+
+ i\bif\bf t\bth\bhe\ben\bn e\bel\bls\bse\be e\bel\bli\bif\bf f\bfi\bi c\bca\bas\bse\be i\bin\bn e\bes\bsa\bac\bc f\bfo\bor\br w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl d\bdo\bo
+ d\bdo\bon\bne\be {\b{ }\b}
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of
+ back quotes (`\b``\b`) may be used as part or all of a word;
+ trailing newlines are removed.
+
+ P\bPa\bar\bra\bam\bme\bet\bte\ber\br s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The character $\b$ is used to introduce substitutable parame-
+ ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by s\bse\bet\bt.
+ Variables may be set by writing
+
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be ] ...
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br}\b}
+ A _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is a sequence of letters, digits or under-
+ scores (a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be), a digit, or any of the characters *\b* @\b@
+ #\b# ?\b? -\b- $\b$ !\b!.\b. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub-
+ stituted. The braces are required only when _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br
+ is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is
+ not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\b-
+ _\bt_\be_\br is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is *\b* or @\b@ then all the positional parameters,
+ starting with $\b$1\b1, are substituted separated by spaces.
+ $\b$0\b0 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br-_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise
+ substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br=_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is not set, set it to _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; the value of
+ the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame-
+ ters may not be assigned to in this way.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br?_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise,
+ print _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd and exit from the shell. If _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is omit-
+ ted, a standard message is printed.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br+_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; otherwise substi-
+ tute nothing.
+
+ In the above _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is not evaluated unless it is to be used
+ as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo
+ ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _\bp_\bw_\bd if _\bd is unset.)
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are automatically set by the shell.
+
+ #\b# The number of positional parameters in decimal.
+ -\b- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by
+ s\bse\bet\bt.
+ ?\b? The value returned by the last executed command in
+ decimal.
+ $\b$ The process number of this shell.
+ !\b! The process number of the last background command
+ invoked.
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are used but not set by the shell.
+
+ H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE The default argument (home directory) for the c\bcd\bd
+ command.
+ P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH The search path for commands (see e\bex\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn).
+ M\bMA\bAI\bIL\bL If this variable is set to the name of a mail
+ file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of
+ mail in the specified file.
+ P\bPS\bS1\b1 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '.
+ P\bPS\bS2\b2 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '.
+ I\bIF\bFS\bS Internal field separators, normally s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be, t\bta\bab\bb,
+ and n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be. I\bIF\bFS\bS is ignored if _\bs_\bh is running as
+ root or if the effective user id differs from the
+ real user id.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ B\bBl\bla\ban\bnk\bk i\bin\bnt\bte\ber\brp\bpr\bre\bet\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ After parameter and command substitution, any results of
+ substitution are scanned for internal field separator char-
+ acters (those found in $\b$I\bIF\bFS\bS) and split into distinct argu-
+ ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu-
+ ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments
+ (those resulting from _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs that have no values) are
+ removed.
+
+ F\bFi\bil\ble\be n\bna\bam\bme\be g\bge\ben\bne\ber\bra\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the
+ characters *\b*, ?\b? and [\b[.\b. If one of these characters appears,
+ the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced
+ with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat-
+ tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern,
+ the word is left unchanged. The character .\b. at the start of
+ a file name or immediately following a /\b/, and the character
+ /\b/, must be matched explicitly.
+
+ *\b* Matches any string, including the null string.
+ ?\b? Matches any single character.
+ [\b[.\b..\b..\b.]\b]
+ Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of
+ characters separated by -\b- matches any character lexi-
+ cally between the pair.
+
+ Q\bQu\buo\bot\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ The following characters have a special meaning to the shell
+ and cause termination of a word unless quoted.
+
+ ;\b; &\b& (\b( )\b) |\b| <\b< >\b> n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be t\bta\bab\bb
+
+ A character may be _\bq_\bu_\bo_\bt_\be_\bd by preceding it with a \\b\.\b. \\b\n\bne\bew\bw-\b-
+ l\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of
+ quote marks ('\b''\b'), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside
+ double quotes ("\b""\b") parameter and command substitution occurs
+ and \\b\ quotes the characters \\b\ '\b' "\b" and $\b$.
+
+ "\b"$\b$*\b*"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1 $\b$2\b2 .\b..\b..\b."\b" whereas
+ "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1"\b" "\b"$\b$2\b2"\b" .\b..\b..\b. .\b.
+
+ P\bPr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of
+ PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is
+ typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the
+ secondary prompt ($\b$P\bPS\bS2\b2) is issued.
+
+ I\bIn\bnp\bpu\but\bt o\bou\but\btp\bpu\but\bt.\b.
+ Before a command is executed its input and output may be
+ redirected using a special notation interpreted by the
+ shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple-
+ command or may precede or follow a _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd and are not
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs
+ before _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd or _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt is used.
+
+ <_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard input (file descriptor 0).
+
+ >_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output (file descriptor 1).
+ If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it
+ is truncated to zero length.
+
+ >>_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output. If the file exists,
+ output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise
+ the file is created.
+
+ <<_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ The shell input is read up to a line the same as _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd,
+ or end of file. The resulting document becomes the
+ standard input. If any character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is quoted, no
+ interpretation is placed upon the characters of the
+ document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution
+ occurs, \\b\n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored, and \\b\ is used to quote the
+ characters \\b\ $\b$ '\b' and the first character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ <&_\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt
+ The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor
+ _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt; see _\bd_\bu_\bp(2). Similarly for the standard output
+ using >.
+
+ <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan-
+ dard output using >.
+
+ If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file
+ descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead
+ of the default 0 or 1). For example,
+
+ ... 2>&1
+
+ creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip-
+ tor 1.
+
+ If a command is followed by &\b& then the default standard
+ input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other-
+ wise, the environment for the execution of a command con-
+ tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified
+ by input output specifications.
+
+ E\bEn\bnv\bvi\bir\bro\bon\bnm\bme\ben\bnt\bt.\b.
+ The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed
+ to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument
+ list; see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2) and _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7). The shell interacts
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the
+ shell scans the environment and creates a _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br for each
+ name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed
+ commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies
+ the values of these _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs or creates new ones, none of
+ these affects the environment unless the e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt command is
+ used to bind the shell's _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br to the environment. The
+ environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of
+ any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the
+ shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which
+ must be noted in e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt commands.
+
+ The environment for any _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd may be augmented by
+ prefixing it with one or more assignments to _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs.
+ Thus these two lines are equivalent
+
+ TERM=450 cmd args
+ (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args)
+
+ If the -\b-k\bk flag is set, _\ba_\bl_\bl keyword arguments are placed in
+ the environment, even if the occur after the command name.
+ The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c':
+ echo a=b c
+ set -k
+ echo a=b c
+
+ S\bSi\big\bgn\bna\bal\bls\bs.\b.
+ The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are
+ ignored if the command is followed by &\b&; otherwise signals
+ have the values inherited by the shell from its parent.
+ (But see also t\btr\bra\bap\bp.\b.)
+
+ E\bEx\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are
+ carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below
+ a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute
+ the command via an _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2).
+
+ The shell parameter $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH defines the search path for the
+ directory containing the command. Each alternative direc-
+ tory name is separated by a colon (:\b:). The default path is
+ :\b:/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn:\b:/\b/u\bus\bsr\br/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn. If the command name contains a /, the
+ search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the
+ path is searched for an executable file. If the file has
+ execute permission but is not an _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt file, it is assumed
+ to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a
+ separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized
+ command is also executed in a subshell.
+
+ S\bSp\bpe\bec\bci\bia\bal\bl c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ The following commands are executed in the shell process and
+ except where specified no input output redirection is
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ permitted for such commands.
+
+ #\b# For non-interactive shells, everything following the #\b#
+ is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is
+ ignored. For interactive shells, the #\b# has no special
+ effect.
+
+ :\b: No effect; the command does nothing.
+ .\b. _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Read and execute commands from _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be and return. The
+ search path $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH is used to find the directory con-
+ taining _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bk [_\bn]
+ Exit from the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be loop, if any. If
+ _\bn is specified, break _\bn levels.
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bti\bin\bnu\bue\be [_\bn]
+ Resume the next iteration of the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ loop. If _\bn is specified, resume at the _\bn-th enclosing
+ loop.
+ c\bcd\bd [_\ba_\br_\bg]
+ Change the current directory to _\ba_\br_\bg. The shell parame-
+ ter $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE is the default _\ba_\br_\bg.
+ e\bev\bva\bal\bl [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The arguments are read as input to the shell and the
+ resulting command(s) executed.
+ e\bex\bxe\bec\bc [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The command specified by the arguments is executed in
+ place of this shell without creating a new process.
+ Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu-
+ ments are given cause the shell input output to be
+ modified.
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit
+ status specified by _\bn. If _\bn is omitted, the exit status
+ is that of the last command executed. (An end of file
+ will also exit from the shell.)
+ e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked for automatic export to the
+ _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt of subsequently-executed commands. If no
+ arguments are given, a list of exportable names is
+ printed.
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bd _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...
+ One line is read from the standard input; successive
+ words of the input are assigned to the variables _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ in order, with leftover words to the last variable.
+ The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun-
+ tered.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bdo\bon\bnl\bly\by [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked readonly and the values of
+ the these names may not be changed by subsequent
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all
+ readonly names is printed.
+ s\bse\bet\bt [-\b-e\bek\bkn\bnp\bpt\btu\buv\bvx\bx [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]]
+ -\b-e\be If non interactive, exit immediately if a command
+ fails.
+ -\b-k\bk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment
+ for a command, not just those that precede the com-
+ mand name.
+ -\b-n\bn Read commands but do not execute them.
+ -\b-t\bt Exit after reading and executing one command.
+ -\b-u\bu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting.
+ -\b-v\bv Print shell input lines as they are read.
+ -\b-x\bx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe-
+ cuted.
+ -\b- Turn off the -\b-x\bx and -\b-v\bv options.
+
+ These flags can also be used upon invocation of the
+ shell. The current set of flags may be found in $\b$-\b-.
+
+ Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are
+ assigned, in order, to $\b$1\b1, $\b$2\b2, etc. If no arguments
+ are given, the values of all names are printed.
+
+ s\bsh\bhi\bif\bft\bt
+ The positional parameters from $\b$2\b2... are renamed $\b$1\b1...
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\bes\bs
+ Print the accumulated user and system times for
+ processes run from the shell.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bap\bp [_\ba_\br_\bg] [_\bn] ...
+ _\bA_\br_\bg is a command to be read and executed when the shell
+ receives signal(s) _\bn. (Note that _\ba_\br_\bg is scanned once
+ when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.)
+ Trap commands are executed in order of signal number.
+ If _\ba_\br_\bg is absent, all trap(s) _\bn are reset to their ori-
+ ginal values. If _\ba_\br_\bg is the null string, this signal
+ is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _\bn
+ is 0, the command _\ba_\br_\bg is executed on exit from the
+ shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _\bn as numbered
+ in _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2). _\bT_\br_\ba_\bp with no arguments prints a list of
+ commands associated with each signal number.
+
+ u\bum\bma\bas\bsk\bk [ _\bn_\bn_\bn ]
+ The user file creation mask is set to the octal value
+ _\bn_\bn_\bn (see _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk(2)). If _\bn_\bn_\bn is omitted, the current
+ value of the mask is printed.
+
+ w\bwa\bai\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Wait for the specified process and report its termina-
+ tion status. If _\bn is not given, all currently active
+ child processes are waited for. The return code from
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ this command is that of the process waited for.
+
+ I\bIn\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ If the first character of argument zero is -\b-, commands are
+ read from $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE/\b/.\b.p\bpr\bro\bof\bfi\bil\ble\be, if such a file exists. Commands
+ are then read as described below. The following flags are
+ interpreted by the shell when it is invoked.
+ -\b-c\bc _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg If the -\b-c\bc flag is present, commands are read from
+ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg.
+ -\b-s\bs If the -\b-s\bs flag is present or if no arguments
+ remain then commands are read from the standard
+ input. Shell output is written to file descrip-
+ tor 2.
+ -\b-i\bi If the -\b-i\bi flag is present or if the shell input
+ and output are attached to a terminal (as told by
+ _\bg_\bt_\bt_\by) then this shell is _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\ba_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bv_\be. In this
+ case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2))
+ is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an
+ interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG-
+ INT is caught and ignored (so that w\bwa\bai\bit\bt is inter-
+ ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by
+ the shell.
+
+ The remaining flags and arguments are described under the
+ s\bse\bet\bt command.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ $HOME/.\b.profile
+ /tmp/sh*
+ /dev/null
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause
+ the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is
+ being used non interactively then execution of the shell
+ file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit
+ status of the last command executed (see also e\bex\bxi\bit\bt).
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous
+ process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming
+ the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and
+ the shell complains about not being able to find the file by
+ another name.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CAT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ cat - catenate and print
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bca\bat\bt [ -\b-b\bbe\ben\bns\bst\btu\buv\bv ] file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\ba_\bt reads each _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be in sequence and displays it on the stan-
+ dard output. Thus
+
+ cat file
+
+ displays the file on the standard output, and
+
+ cat file1 file2 >file3
+
+ concatenates the first two files and places the result on
+ the third.
+
+ If no input file is given, or if the argument `-' is encoun-
+ tered, _\bc_\ba_\bt reads from the standard input file. Output is
+ buffered in the block size recommended by _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(2) unless the
+ standard output is a terminal, when it is line buffered.
+ The -\b-u\bu option makes the output completely unbuffered.
+
+ The -\b-n\bn option displays the output lines preceded by lines
+ numbers, numbered sequentially from 1. Specifying the -\b-b\bb
+ option with the -\b-n\bn option omits the line numbers from blank
+ lines.
+
+ The -\b-s\bs option crushes out multiple adjacent empty lines so
+ that the output is displayed single spaced.
+
+ The -\b-v\bv option displays non-printing characters so that they
+ are visible. Control characters print like ^X for control-
+ x; the delete character (octal 0177) prints as ^?. Non-
+ ascii characters (with the high bit set) are printed as M-
+ (for meta) followed by the character of the low 7 bits. A
+ -\b-e\be option may be given with the -\b-v\bv option, which displays a
+ `$' character at the end of each line. Specifying the -\b-t\bt
+ option with the -\b-v\bv option displays tab characters as ^I.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cp(1), ex(1), more(1), pr(1), tail(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Beware of `cat a b >a' and `cat a b >b', which destroy the
+ input files before reading them.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 29, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CB(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ cb - C program beautifier
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bcb\bb
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bb places a copy of the C program from the standard input on
+ the standard output with spacing and indentation that
+ displays the structure of the program.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CC(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ cc - C compiler
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bcc\bc [ option ] ... file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bc is the UNIX C compiler. _\bC_\bc accepts several types of
+ arguments:
+
+ Arguments whose names end with `.c' are taken to be C source
+ programs; they are compiled, and each object program is left
+ on the file whose name is that of the source with `.o' sub-
+ stituted for `.c'. The `.o' file is normally deleted, how-
+ ever, if a single C program is compiled and loaded all at
+ one go.
+
+ In the same way, arguments whose names end with `.s' are
+ taken to be assembly source programs and are assembled, pro-
+ ducing a `.o' file.
+
+ The following options are interpreted by _\bc_\bc. See _\bl_\bd(1) for
+ load-time options.
+
+ -\b-c\bc Suppress the loading phase of the compilation, and
+ force an object file to be produced even if only one
+ program is compiled.
+
+ -\b-g\bg Have the compiler produce additional symbol table
+ information for _\bd_\bb_\bx(1). Also pass the -\b-l\blg\bg flag to
+ _\bl_\bd(1).
+
+ -\b-g\bgo\bo Have the compiler produce additional symbol table
+ information for the obsolete debugger _\bs_\bd_\bb(1). Also
+ pass the -\b-l\blg\bg flag to _\bl_\bd(1).
+
+ -\b-w\bw Suppress warning diagnostics.
+
+ -\b-p\bp Arrange for the compiler to produce code which
+ counts the number of times each routine is called.
+ If loading takes place, replace the standard startup
+ routine by one which automatically calls _\bm_\bo_\bn_\bi_\bt_\bo_\br(3)
+ at the start and arranges to write out a _\bm_\bo_\bn._\bo_\bu_\bt
+ file at normal termination of execution of the
+ object program. An execution profile can then be
+ generated by use of _\bp_\br_\bo_\bf(1).
+
+ -\b-p\bpg\bg Causes the compiler to produce counting code in the
+ manner of -\b-p\bp,\b, but invokes a run-time recording
+ mechanism that keeps more extensive statistics and
+ produces a _\bg_\bm_\bo_\bn._\bo_\bu_\bt file at normal termination.
+ Also, a profiling library is searched, in lieu of
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 7, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CC(1)
+
+
+
+ the standard C library. An execution profile can
+ then be generated by use of _\bg_\bp_\br_\bo_\bf(1).
+
+ -\b-O\bO Invoke an object-code improver.
+
+ -\b-R\bR Passed on to _\ba_\bs, making initialized variables shared
+ and read-only.
+
+ -\b-S\bS Compile the named C programs, and leave the
+ assembler-language output on corresponding files
+ suffixed `.s'.
+
+ -\b-M\bM Run only the macro preprocessor on the named C pro-
+ grams, requesting it to generate Makefile dependen-
+ cies and send the result to the standard output.
+
+ -\b-E\bE Run only the macro preprocessor on the named C pro-
+ grams, and send the result to the standard output.
+
+ -\b-C\bC prevent the macro preprocessor from eliding com-
+ ments.
+
+ -\b-o\bo _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt
+ Name the final output file _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt. If this option
+ is used the file `a.out' will be left undisturbed.
+
+ -\b-D\bD_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=_\bd_\be_\bf
+ -\b-D\bD_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be Define the _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the preprocessor, as if by
+ `#define'. If no definition is given, the name is
+ defined as "1".
+
+ -\b-U\bU_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be Remove any initial definition of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+
+ -\b-I\bI_\bd_\bi_\br `#include' files whose names do not begin with `/'
+ are always sought first in the directory of the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ argument, then in directories named in -\b-I\bI options,
+ then in directories on a standard list.
+
+ -\b-L\bL_\bd_\bi_\br Library archives are sought first in directories
+ named in -\b-L\bL options, then in directories on a stan-
+ dard list.
+
+ -\b-f\bf Use an alternate compiler which does not convert
+ expressions involving only floats to double. This
+ does not conform to the standard which states that
+ all intermediate results should be converted to dou-
+ ble but does provide a speed improvement for pro-
+ grams which don't require full double precision.
+ This option also makes r\bre\beg\bgi\bis\bst\bte\ber\br f\bfl\blo\boa\bat\bt variables work
+ appropriately.
+
+ -\b-B\bB_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 7, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CC(1)
+
+
+
+ Find substitute compiler passes in the files named
+ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg with the suffixes cpp, ccom and c2. If
+ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg is empty, use a standard backup version.
+
+ -\b-t\bt[p\bp0\b01\b12\b2]
+ Find only the designated compiler passes in the
+ files whose names are constructed by a -\b-B\bB option.
+ In the absence of a -\b-B\bB option, the _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg is taken
+ to be `/usr/c/'.
+
+ Other arguments are taken to be either loader option argu-
+ ments, or C-compatible object programs, typically produced
+ by an earlier _\bc_\bc run, or perhaps libraries of C-compatible
+ routines. These programs, together with the results of any
+ compilations specified, are loaded (in the order given) to
+ produce an executable program with name a\ba.\b.o\bou\but\bt.\b.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ file.c input file
+ file.o object file
+ a.out loaded output
+ /tmp/ctm? temporary
+ /lib/cpp preprocessor
+ /lib/ccom compiler
+ /lib/sccom compiler for single precision floats
+ /usr/c/occom backup compiler
+ /usr/c/ocpp backup preprocessor
+ /lib/c2 optional optimizer
+ /lib/crt0.o runtime startoff
+ /lib/mcrt0.o startoff for profiling
+ /usr/lib/gcrt0.ostartoff for gprof-profiling
+ /lib/libc.a standard library, see _\bi_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo(3)
+ /usr/lib/libc_p.aprofiling library, see _\bi_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo(3)
+ /usr/include standard directory for `#include' files
+ mon.out file produced for analysis by _\bp_\br_\bo_\bf(1)
+ gmon.out file produced for analysis by _\bg_\bp_\br_\bo_\bf(1)
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, _\bT_\bh_\be _\bC _\bP_\br_\bo_\bg_\br_\ba_\bm_\bm_\bi_\bn_\bg
+ _\bL_\ba_\bn_\bg_\bu_\ba_\bg_\be, Prentice-Hall, 1978
+ B. W. Kernighan, _\bP_\br_\bo_\bg_\br_\ba_\bm_\bm_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bi_\bn _\bC-_\ba _\bt_\bu_\bt_\bo_\br_\bi_\ba_\bl
+ D. M. Ritchie, _\bC _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br_\be_\bn_\bc_\be _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl
+ monitor(3), prof(1), gprof(1), adb(1), ld(1), dbx(1), as(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ The diagnostics produced by C itself are intended to be
+ self-explanatory. Occasional messages may be produced by
+ the assembler or loader.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The compiler currently ignores advice to put c\bch\bha\bar\br, u\bun\bns\bsi\big\bgn\bne\bed\bd
+ c\bch\bha\bar\br, s\bsh\bho\bor\brt\bt, u\bun\bns\bsi\big\bgn\bne\bed\bd s\bsh\bho\bor\brt\bt, f\bfl\blo\boa\bat\bt, or d\bdo\bou\bub\bbl\ble\be variables in
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 7, 1985 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CC(1)
+
+
+
+ registers, except as noted above. It previously produced
+ poor, and in some cases incorrect, code for such declara-
+ tions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 7, 1985 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ cd - change working directory
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bcd\bd directory
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by becomes the new working directory. The process
+ must have execute (search) permission in _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by.
+
+ Because a new process is created to execute each command, _\bc_\bd
+ would be ineffective if it were written as a normal command.
+ It is therefore recognized and executed by the shells. In
+ _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) you may specify a list of directories in which _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\b-
+ _\bt_\bo_\br_\by is to be sought as a subdirectory if it is not a sub-
+ directory of the current directory; see the description of
+ the _\bc_\bd_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh variable in _\bc_\bs_\bh(1).
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), sh(1), pwd(1), chdir(2)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ eqn, neqn, checkeq - typeset mathematics
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\beq\bqn\bn [ -\b-d\bdxy ] [ -\b-p\bpn ] [ -\b-s\bsn ] [ -\b-f\bfn ] [ file ] ...
+ c\bch\bhe\bec\bck\bke\beq\bq [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bq_\bn is a troff(1) preprocessor for typesetting mathematics
+ on a Graphic Systems phototypesetter, _\bn_\be_\bq_\bn on terminals.
+ Usage is almost always
+
+ eqn file ... | troff
+ neqn file ... | nroff
+
+ If no files are specified, these programs reads from the
+ standard input. A line beginning with `.EQ' marks the start
+ of an equation; the end of an equation is marked by a line
+ beginning with `.EN'. Neither of these lines is altered, so
+ they may be defined in macro packages to get centering,
+ numbering, etc. It is also possible to set two characters
+ as `delimiters'; subsequent text between delimiters is also
+ treated as _\be_\bq_\bn input. Delimiters may be set to characters _\bx
+ and _\by with the command-line argument -\b-d\bd_\bx_\by or (more commonly)
+ with `delim _\bx_\by' between .EQ and .EN. The left and right
+ delimiters may be identical. Delimiters are turned off by
+ `delim off'. All text that is neither between delimiters
+ nor between .EQ and .EN is passed through untouched.
+
+ The program _\bc_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\be_\bq reports missing or unbalanced delimiters
+ and .EQ/.EN pairs.
+
+ Tokens within _\be_\bq_\bn are separated by spaces, tabs, newlines,
+ braces, double quotes, tildes or circumflexes. Braces {}
+ are used for grouping; generally speaking, anywhere a single
+ character like _\bx could appear, a complicated construction
+ enclosed in braces may be used instead. Tilde ~ represents
+ a full space in the output, circumflex ^ half as much.
+
+ Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords
+ s\bsu\bub\bb and s\bsu\bup\bp.\b. Thus _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi makes _\bx_\bi, _\ba _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 produces
+ _\ba_\bi
+ 2
+ , and _\be _\bs_\bu_\bp {_\bx _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 + _\by _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2} gives _\be
+ _\bx2+_\by2
+ .
+
+
+ Fractions are made with o\bov\bve\ber\br: _\ba _\bo_\bv_\be_\br _\bb yields
+ _\bb
+
+ _\ba\b_.
+
+
+ s\bsq\bqr\brt\bt makes square roots: _\b1 _\bo_\bv_\be_\br _\bs_\bq_\br_\bt {_\ba_\bx _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 +_\bb_\bx+_\bc}
+
+ results in
+ v\b/~~~~~~~~\b\b\b\b\b\b\b\b_\ba_\bx
+ 2
+ +_\bb_\bx+_\bc
+
+ 1\b\b\b\b\b_________ .
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1)
+
+
+
+ The keywords f\bfr\bro\bom\bm and t\bto\bo introduce lower and upper limits on
+
+ arbitrary things:
+ _\bn->oo
+ lim
+ 0
+ _\b>\b_\b~
+ _\bn
+ _\bx_\bi is made with _\bl_\bi_\bm _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm {_\bn-> _\bi_\bn_\bf }
+
+ _\bs_\bu_\bm _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm _\b0 _\bt_\bo _\bn _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi.
+
+ Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height
+ are made with l\ble\bef\bft\bt and r\bri\big\bgh\bht\bt:\b: _\bl_\be_\bf_\bt [ _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 + _\by _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 _\bo_\bv_\be_\br
+
+ _\ba_\bl_\bp_\bh_\ba _\br_\bi_\bg_\bh_\bt ] ~=~_\b1 produces
+ |\b
+ |\b
+ |
+ _\bx
+ 2
+ +
+ _\bo\b(
+
+ _\by
+ 2
+ __
+ |\b
+ |\b
+ |
+ = 1. The r\bri\big\bgh\bht\bt clause
+
+ is optional. Legal characters after l\ble\bef\bft\bt and r\bri\big\bgh\bht\bt are
+ braces, brackets, bars, c\bc and f\bf for ceiling and floor, and
+ "" for nothing at all (useful for a right-side-only
+ bracket).
+
+ Vertical piles of things are made with p\bpi\bil\ble\be, l\blp\bpi\bil\ble\be, c\bcp\bpi\bil\ble\be,
+
+ and r\brp\bpi\bil\ble\be: _\bp_\bi_\bl_\be {_\ba _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be _\bb _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be _\bc} produces
+ _\bc
+ _\bb
+ _\ba
+
+ . There can
+
+ be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. l\blp\bpi\bil\ble\be left-
+ justifies, p\bpi\bil\ble\be and c\bcp\bpi\bil\ble\be center, with different vertical
+ spacing, and r\brp\bpi\bil\ble\be right justifies.
+
+ Matrices are made with m\bma\bat\btr\bri\bix\bx: _\bm_\ba_\bt_\br_\bi_\bx { _\bl_\bc_\bo_\bl { _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be
+
+ _\by _\bs_\bu_\bb _\b2 } _\bc_\bc_\bo_\bl { _\b1 _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be _\b2 } } produces
+ _\by2
+
+ _\bx_\bi
+
+
+ 2
+
+ 1
+
+ . In addition,
+
+ there is r\brc\bco\bol\bl for a right-justified column.
+
+ Diacritical marks are made with d\bdo\bot\bt, d\bdo\bot\btd\bdo\bot\bt, h\bha\bat\bt, t\bti\bil\bld\bde\be,
+ b\bba\bar\br, v\bve\bec\bc, d\bdy\bya\bad\bd, and u\bun\bnd\bde\ber\br: _\bx _\bd_\bo_\bt = _\bf(_\bt) _\bb_\ba_\br is _\bx\b.=_\bf(_\bt)\b\b\b\b~~~~, _\by
+ _\bd_\bo_\bt_\bd_\bo_\bt _\bb_\ba_\br ~=~ _\bn _\bu_\bn_\bd_\be_\br is _\by\b..\b\b~ = _\bn\b_, and _\bx _\bv_\be_\bc ~=~ _\by _\bd_\by_\ba_\bd is
+ _\bx\b->= _\by\b<-\b\b->\b.
+
+ Sizes and font can be changed with s\bsi\biz\bze\be _\bn or s\bsi\biz\bze\be +\b+\b\b\b_\b__\bn, r\bro\bom\bma\ban\bn,
+ i\bit\bta\bal\bli\bic\bc, b\bbo\bol\bld\bd, and f\bfo\bon\bnt\bt _\bn. Size and fonts can be changed glo-
+ bally in a document by g\bgs\bsi\biz\bze\be _\bn and g\bgf\bfo\bon\bnt\bt _\bn, or by the
+ command-line arguments -\b-s\bs_\bn and -\b-f\bf_\bn.
+
+ Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by 3 point
+ sizes from the previous size; this may be changed by the
+ command-line argument -\b-p\bp_\bn.
+
+ Successive display arguments can be lined up. Place m\bma\bar\brk\bk
+ before the desired lineup point in the first equation; place
+ l\bli\bin\bne\beu\bup\bp at the place that is to line up vertically in subse-
+ quent equations.
+
+ Shorthands may be defined or existing keywords redefined
+ with d\bde\bef\bfi\bin\bne\be: _\bd_\be_\bf_\bi_\bn_\be _\bt_\bh_\bi_\bn_\bg % _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt % defines a new
+ token called _\bt_\bh_\bi_\bn_\bg which will be replaced by _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1)
+
+
+
+ whenever it appears thereafter. The % may be any character
+ that does not occur in _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt.
+
+ Keywords like _\bs_\bu_\bm (_\b>\b_\b~) _\bi_\bn_\bt () _\bi_\bn_\bf (oo) and shorthands like >=
+ (>\b_) -> (->), and != (=\b/) are recognized. Greek letters are
+ spelled out in the desired case, as in _\ba_\bl_\bp_\bh_\ba or _\bG_\bA_\bM_\bM_\bA.
+ Mathematical words like sin, cos, log are made Roman
+ automatically. _\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1) four-character escapes like \(bs ()
+ can be used anywhere. Strings enclosed in double quotes
+ "..." are passed through untouched; this permits keywords to
+ be entered as text, and can be used to communicate with
+ _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf when all else fails.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ troff(1), tbl(1), ms(7), eqnchar(7)
+ B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, _\bT_\by_\bp_\be_\bs_\be_\bt_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bM_\ba_\bt_\bh_\be_\bm_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bc_\bs-
+ _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bG_\bu_\bi_\bd_\be
+ J. F. Ossanna, _\bN_\bR_\bO_\bF_\bF/_\bT_\bR_\bO_\bF_\bF _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ To embolden digits, parens, etc., it is necessary to quote
+ them, as in `bold "12.3"'.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CHECKNR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHECKNR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ checknr - check nroff/troff files
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bch\bhe\bec\bck\bkn\bnr\br [ -\b-s\bs ] [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-a\ba.x1.y1.x2.y2. ... .xn.yn ] [
+ -\b-c\bc.x1.x2.x3 ... .xn ] [ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\bn_\br checks a list of _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1) or _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1) input files
+ for certain kinds of errors involving mismatched opening and
+ closing delimiters and unknown commands. If no files are
+ specified, _\bc_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\bn_\br checks the standard input. Delimeters
+ checked are:
+
+ (1) Font changes using \fx ... \fP.
+
+ (2) Size changes using \sx ... \s0.
+
+ (3) Macros that come in open ... close forms, for example,
+ the .TS and .TE macros which must always come in pairs.
+
+ _\bC_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\bn_\br knows about the _\bm_\bs(7) and _\bm_\be(7) macro packages.
+
+ Additional pairs of macros can be added to the list using
+ the -\b-a\ba option. This must be followed by groups of six char-
+ acters, each group defining a pair of macros. The six char-
+ acters are a period, the first macro name, another period,
+ and the second macro name. For example, to define a pair
+ .BS and .ES, use -a\ba.BS.ES
+
+ The -\b-c\bc option defines commands which would otherwise be com-
+ plained about as undefined.
+
+ The -\b-f\bf option requests _\bc_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\bn_\br to ignore \f font changes.
+
+ The -\b-s\bs option requests _\bc_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\bn_\br to ignore \s size changes.
+
+ _\bC_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\bn_\br is intended to be used on documents that are
+ prepared with _\bc_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\bn_\br in mind, much the same as _\bl_\bi_\bn_\bt. It
+ expects a certain document writing style for \f and \s com-
+ mands, in that each \fx must be terminated with \fP and each
+ \sx must be terminated with \s0. While it will work to
+ directly go into the next font or explicitly specify the
+ original font or point size, and many existing documents
+ actually do this, such a practice will produce complaints
+ from _\bc_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\bn_\br. Since it is probably better to use the \fP and
+ \s0 forms anyway, you should think of this as a contribution
+ to your document preparation style.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ nroff(1), troff(1), checkeq(1), ms(7), me(7)
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHECKNR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHECKNR(1)
+
+
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Complaints about unmatched delimiters.
+ Complaints about unrecognized commands.
+ Various complaints about the syntax of commands.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ There is no way to define a 1 character macro name using -\b-a\ba.
+ Does not correctly recognize certain reasonable constructs,
+ such as conditionals.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ chfn, chsh, passwd - change password file information
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpa\bas\bss\bsw\bwd\bd [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-s\bs ] [ name ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ This command changes (or installs) a password, login shell
+ (-\b-s\bs option), or GECOS information field (-\b-f\bf option) associ-
+ ated with the user _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be (your own name by default).
+
+ When altering a password, the program prompts for the
+ current password and then for the new one. The caller must
+ supply both. The new password must be typed twice to fore-
+ stall mistakes.
+
+ New passwords must be at least four characters long if they
+ use a sufficiently rich alphabet and at least six characters
+ long if monocase. These rules are relaxed if you are
+ insistent enough.
+
+ Only the owner of the name or the super-user may change a
+ password; the owner must prove he knows the old password.
+
+ When altering a login shell, _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd displays the current
+ login shell and then prompts for the new one. The new login
+ shell must be one of the approved shells listed in
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl_\bs unless you are the super-user. If /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl_\bs
+ does not exist, the only shells that may be specified are
+ /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bs_\bh and /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bc_\bs_\bh.
+
+ The super-user may change anyone's login shell; normal users
+ may only change their own login shell.
+
+ When altering the GECOS information field, _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd displays
+ the current information, broken into fields, as interpreted
+ by the _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br(1) program, among others, and prompts for new
+ values. These fields include a user's ``real life'' name,
+ office room number, office phone number, and home phone
+ number. Included in each prompt is a default value, which
+ is enclosed between brackets. The default value is accepted
+ simply by typing a carriage return. To enter a blank field,
+ the word ``none'' may be typed. Below is a sample run:
+
+ N\bNa\bam\bme\be [\b[B\bBi\bif\bff\bf S\bSt\btu\bud\bds\bsw\bwo\bor\brt\bth\bh I\bII\bI]\b]:\b:
+ R\bRo\boo\bom\bm n\bnu\bum\bmb\bbe\ber\br (\b(E\bEx\bxs\bs:\b: 5\b59\b97\b7E\bE o\bor\br 1\b19\b97\b7C\bC)\b) [\b[]\b]:\b: 521E
+ O\bOf\bff\bfi\bic\bce\be P\bPh\bho\bon\bne\be (\b(E\bEx\bx:\b: 1\b16\b63\b32\b2)\b) [\b[]\b]:\b: 1863
+ H\bHo\bom\bme\be P\bPh\bho\bon\bne\be (\b(E\bEx\bx:\b: 9\b98\b87\b75\b53\b32\b2)\b) [\b[5\b57\b77\b71\b15\b54\b46\b6]\b]:\b: none
+
+
+ _\bP_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd allows phone numbers to be entered with or without
+ hyphens. It is a good idea to run _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br after changing the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1)
+
+
+
+ GECOS information to make sure everything is setup properly.
+
+ The super-user may change anyone's GECOS information; normal
+ users may only change their own.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/passwd The file containing all of this information
+ /etc/shells The list of approved shells
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ login(1), finger(1), passwd(5), crypt(3)
+ Robert Morris and Ken Thompson, _\bU_\bN_\bI_\bX _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd _\bs_\be_\bc_\bu_\br_\bi_\bt_\by
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CHGRP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHGRP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ chgrp - change group
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bch\bhg\bgr\brp\bp [ -\b-R\bRf\bf ] group file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bh_\bg_\br_\bp changes the group-ID of the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs to _\bg_\br_\bo_\bu_\bp. The group
+ may be either a decimal GID or a group name found in the
+ group-ID file.
+
+ The user invoking _\bc_\bh_\bg_\br_\bp must belong to the specified group
+ and be the owner of the file, or be the super-user.
+
+ No errors, except for usage errors, are reported when the -\b-f\bf
+ (force) option is given.
+
+ When the -\b-R\bR option is given, _\bc_\bh_\bg_\br_\bp recursively descends its
+ directory arguments setting the specified group-ID. When
+ symbolic links are encountered, their group is changed, but
+ they are not traversed.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ chown(1), chown(2), passwd(5), group(5)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 21, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CHMOD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHMOD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ chmod - change mode
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bch\bhm\bmo\bod\bd [ -\b-R\bRf\bf ] mode file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The mode of each named file is changed according to _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be,
+ which may be absolute or symbolic. An absolute _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be is an
+ octal number constructed from the OR of the following modes:
+
+ 4000 set user ID on execution
+ 2000 set group ID on execution
+ 1000 sticky bit, see _\bc_\bh_\bm_\bo_\bd(2)
+ 0400 read by owner
+ 0200 write by owner
+ 0100 execute (search in directory) by owner
+ 0070 read, write, execute (search) by group
+ 0007 read, write, execute (search) by others
+
+ A symbolic _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be has the form:
+
+ [_\bw_\bh_\bo] _\bo_\bp _\bp_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn [_\bo_\bp _\bp_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn] ...
+
+ The _\bw_\bh_\bo part is a combination of the letters u\bu (for user's
+ permissions), g\bg (group) and o\bo (other). The letter a\ba stands
+ for all, or u\bug\bgo\bo.\b. If _\bw_\bh_\bo is omitted, the default is _\ba but
+ the setting of the file creation mask (see umask(2)) is
+ taken into account.
+
+ _\bO_\bp can be +\b+ to add _\bp_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn to the file's mode, -\b- to take
+ away _\bp_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn and =\b= to assign _\bp_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn absolutely (all
+ other bits will be reset).
+
+ _\bP_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn is any combination of the letters r\br (read), w\bw
+ (write), x\bx (execute), X\bX (set execute only if file is a
+ directory or some other execute bit is set), s\bs (set owner or
+ group id) and t\bt (save text - sticky). Letters u\bu, g\bg, or o\bo
+ indicate that _\bp_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn is to be taken from the current
+ mode. Omitting _\bp_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn is only useful with =\b= to take away
+ all permissions.
+
+ When the -\b-R\bR option is given, _\bc_\bh_\bm_\bo_\bd recursively descends its
+ directory arguments setting the mode for each file as
+ described above. When symbolic links are encountered, their
+ mode is not changed and they are not traversed.
+
+ If the -\b-f\bf option is given, _\bc_\bh_\bm_\bo_\bd will not complain if it
+ fails to change the mode on a file.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bES\bS
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 22, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CHMOD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CHMOD(1)
+
+
+
+ The first example denies write permission to others, the
+ second makes a file executable by all if it is executable by
+ anyone:
+
+ chmod o-w file
+ chmod +X file
+
+ Multiple symbolic modes separated by commas may be given.
+ Operations are performed in the order specified. The letter
+ s\bs is only useful with u\bu or g\bg.\b.
+
+ Only the owner of a file (or the super-user) may change its
+ mode.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ls(1), chmod(2), stat(2), umask(2), chown(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 22, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ chfn, chsh, passwd - change password file information
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpa\bas\bss\bsw\bwd\bd [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-s\bs ] [ name ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ This command changes (or installs) a password, login shell
+ (-\b-s\bs option), or GECOS information field (-\b-f\bf option) associ-
+ ated with the user _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be (your own name by default).
+
+ When altering a password, the program prompts for the
+ current password and then for the new one. The caller must
+ supply both. The new password must be typed twice to fore-
+ stall mistakes.
+
+ New passwords must be at least four characters long if they
+ use a sufficiently rich alphabet and at least six characters
+ long if monocase. These rules are relaxed if you are
+ insistent enough.
+
+ Only the owner of the name or the super-user may change a
+ password; the owner must prove he knows the old password.
+
+ When altering a login shell, _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd displays the current
+ login shell and then prompts for the new one. The new login
+ shell must be one of the approved shells listed in
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl_\bs unless you are the super-user. If /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl_\bs
+ does not exist, the only shells that may be specified are
+ /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bs_\bh and /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bc_\bs_\bh.
+
+ The super-user may change anyone's login shell; normal users
+ may only change their own login shell.
+
+ When altering the GECOS information field, _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd displays
+ the current information, broken into fields, as interpreted
+ by the _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br(1) program, among others, and prompts for new
+ values. These fields include a user's ``real life'' name,
+ office room number, office phone number, and home phone
+ number. Included in each prompt is a default value, which
+ is enclosed between brackets. The default value is accepted
+ simply by typing a carriage return. To enter a blank field,
+ the word ``none'' may be typed. Below is a sample run:
+
+ N\bNa\bam\bme\be [\b[B\bBi\bif\bff\bf S\bSt\btu\bud\bds\bsw\bwo\bor\brt\bth\bh I\bII\bI]\b]:\b:
+ R\bRo\boo\bom\bm n\bnu\bum\bmb\bbe\ber\br (\b(E\bEx\bxs\bs:\b: 5\b59\b97\b7E\bE o\bor\br 1\b19\b97\b7C\bC)\b) [\b[]\b]:\b: 521E
+ O\bOf\bff\bfi\bic\bce\be P\bPh\bho\bon\bne\be (\b(E\bEx\bx:\b: 1\b16\b63\b32\b2)\b) [\b[]\b]:\b: 1863
+ H\bHo\bom\bme\be P\bPh\bho\bon\bne\be (\b(E\bEx\bx:\b: 9\b98\b87\b75\b53\b32\b2)\b) [\b[5\b57\b77\b71\b15\b54\b46\b6]\b]:\b: none
+
+
+ _\bP_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd allows phone numbers to be entered with or without
+ hyphens. It is a good idea to run _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br after changing the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1)
+
+
+
+ GECOS information to make sure everything is setup properly.
+
+ The super-user may change anyone's GECOS information; normal
+ users may only change their own.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/passwd The file containing all of this information
+ /etc/shells The list of approved shells
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ login(1), finger(1), passwd(5), crypt(3)
+ Robert Morris and Ken Thompson, _\bU_\bN_\bI_\bX _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd _\bs_\be_\bc_\bu_\br_\bi_\bt_\by
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CLEAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CLEAR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ clear - clear terminal screen
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bcl\ble\bea\bar\br
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bl_\be_\ba_\br clears your screen if this is possible. It looks in
+ the environment for the terminal type and then in
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp to figure out how to clear the screen.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/termcap terminal capability data base
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CMP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CMP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ cmp - compare two files
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bcm\bmp\bp [ -\b-l\bl ] [ -\b-s\bs ] file1 file2 [ skip1 ] [ skip2 ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The two files are compared. (If _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 is `-', the standard
+ input is used.) With no options, _\bc_\bm_\bp makes no comment if
+ the files are the same; if they differ, it reports the byte
+ and line number at which the difference occurred, or, that
+ one file is an initial subsequence of the other. _\bS_\bk_\bi_\bp_\b1 and
+ _\bs_\bk_\bi_\bp_\b2 are initial byte offsets into _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 and _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 respec-
+ tively, and may be either octal or decimal; a leading ``0''
+ denotes octal.
+
+ Options:
+
+ -\b-s\bs Print nothing for differing files; set exit codes
+ only.
+
+ -\b-l\bl Print the byte number (in decimal) and the differing
+ bytes (in octal) for all differences between the two
+ files.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ diff(1), comm(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Exit code 0 is returned for identical files, 1 for different
+ files, and 2 for an inaccessible or missing argument, or a
+ system error.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 November 18, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+COL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ col - filter reverse line feeds
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bco\bol\bl [ -\b-b\bbf\bfh\bh ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bo_\bl reads the standard input and writes the standard output.
+ It performs the line overlays implied by reverse line feeds
+ (ESC-7 in ASCII) and by forward and reverse half line feeds
+ (ESC-9 and ESC-8). _\bC_\bo_\bl is particularly useful for filtering
+ multicolumn output made with the `.rt' command of _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf and
+ output resulting from use of the _\bt_\bb_\bl(1) preprocessor.
+
+ Although _\bc_\bo_\bl accepts half line motions in its input, it nor-
+ mally does not emit them on output. Instead, text that
+ would appear between lines is moved to the next lower full
+ line boundary. This treatment can be suppressed by the -\b-f\bf
+ (fine) option; in this case the output from _\bc_\bo_\bl may contain
+ forward half line feeds (ESC-9), but will still never con-
+ tain either kind of reverse line motion.
+
+ If the -\b-b\bb option is given, _\bc_\bo_\bl assumes that the output dev-
+ ice in use is not capable of backspacing. In this case, if
+ several characters are to appear in the same place, only the
+ last one read will be taken.
+
+ The control characters SO (ASCII code 017), and SI (016) are
+ assumed to start and end text in an alternate character set.
+ The character set (primary or alternate) associated with
+ each printing character read is remembered; on output, SO
+ and SI characters are generated where necessary to maintain
+ the correct treatment of each character.
+
+ If the -\b-h\bh option is given, _\bc_\bo_\bl converts white space to tabs
+ to shorten printing time.
+
+ All control characters are removed from the input except
+ space, backspace, tab, return, newline, ESC (033) followed
+ by one of 7, 8, 9, SI, SO, and VT (013). This last charac-
+ ter is an alternate form of full reverse line feed, for com-
+ patibility with some other hardware conventions. All other
+ non-printing characters are ignored.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ troff(1), tbl(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Can't back up more than 128 lines.
+ No more than 800 characters, including backspaces, on a
+ line.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 16, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+COLCRT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COLCRT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ colcrt - filter nroff output for CRT previewing
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bco\bol\blc\bcr\brt\bt [ -\b- ] [ -\b-2\b2 ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bo_\bl_\bc_\br_\bt provides virtual half-line and reverse line feed
+ sequences for terminals without such capability, and on
+ which overstriking is destructive. Half-line characters and
+ underlining (changed to dashing `-') are placed on new lines
+ in between the normal output lines.
+
+ The optional -\b- suppresses all underlining. It is especially
+ useful for previewing _\ba_\bl_\bl_\bb_\bo_\bx_\be_\bd tables from _\bt_\bb_\bl(1).
+
+ The option -\b-2\b2 causes all half-lines to be printed, effec-
+ tively double spacing the output. Normally, a minimal space
+ output format is used which will suppress empty lines. The
+ program never suppresses two consecutive empty lines, how-
+ ever. The -\b-2\b2 option is useful for sending output to the
+ line printer when the output contains superscripts and sub-
+ scripts which would otherwise be invisible.
+
+ A typical use of _\bc_\bo_\bl_\bc_\br_\bt would be
+
+ tbl exum2.n | nroff -ms | colcrt - | more
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ nroff/troff(1), col(1), more(1), ul(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Should fold underlines onto blanks even with the `-\b-' option
+ so that a true underline character would show; if we did
+ this, however, _\bc_\bo_\bl_\bc_\br_\bt wouldn't get rid of _\bc_\bu'_\bd underlining
+ completely.
+
+ Can't back up more than 102 lines.
+
+ General overstriking is lost; as a special case `|' over-
+ struck with `-' or underline becomes `+'.
+
+ Lines are trimmed to 132 characters.
+
+ Some provision should be made for processing superscripts
+ and subscripts in documents which are already double-spaced.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+COLRM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COLRM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ colrm - remove columns from a file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bco\bol\blr\brm\bm [ startcol [ endcol ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bo_\bl_\br_\bm removes selected columns from a file. Input is taken
+ from standard input. Output is sent to standard output.
+
+ If called with one parameter the columns of each line will
+ be removed starting with the specified column. If called
+ with two parameters the columns from the first column to the
+ last column will be removed.
+
+ Column numbering starts with column 1.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ expand(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+COMM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ comm - select or reject lines common to two sorted files
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bco\bom\bmm\bm [ -\b- [ 1\b12\b23\b3 ] ] file1 file2
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm reads _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 and _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2, which should be ordered in ASCII
+ collating sequence, and produces a three column output:
+ lines only in _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1; lines only in _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2; and lines in both
+ files. The filename `-' means the standard input.
+
+ Flags 1, 2, or 3 suppress printing of the corresponding
+ column. Thus c\bco\bom\bmm\bm -\b-1\b12\b2 prints only the lines common to the
+ two files; c\bco\bom\bmm\bm -\b-2\b23\b3 prints only lines in the first file but
+ not in the second; c\bco\bom\bmm\bm -\b-1\b12\b23\b3 is a no-op.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cmp(1), diff(1), uniq(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ compress, uncompress, zcat - compress and expand data
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bco\bom\bmp\bpr\bre\bes\bss\bs [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-c\bc ] [ -\b-b\bb _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs ] [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+ u\bun\bnc\bco\bom\bmp\bpr\bre\bes\bss\bs [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-c\bc ] [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+ z\bzc\bca\bat\bt [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs reduces the size of the named files using adaptive
+ Lempel-Ziv coding. Whenever possible, each file is replaced
+ by one with the extension .\b.Z\bZ,\b, while keeping the same owner-
+ ship modes, access and modification times. If no files are
+ specified, the standard input is compressed to the standard
+ output. Compressed files can be restored to their original
+ form using _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs or _\bz_\bc_\ba_\bt.
+
+ The -\b-f\bf option will force compression of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be, even if it
+ does not actually shrink or the corresponding _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.Z file
+ already exists. Except when run in the background under
+ /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bs_\bh, if -\b-f\bf is not given the user is prompted as to
+ whether an existing _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.Z file should be overwritten.
+
+ The -\b-c\bc (``cat'') option makes _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs/_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs write to
+ the standard output; no files are changed. The nondestruc-
+ tive behavior of _\bz_\bc_\ba_\bt is identical to that of _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs -\b-c\bc.\b.
+
+ _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs uses the modified Lempel-Ziv algorithm popularized
+ in "A Technique for High Performance Data Compression",
+ Terry A. Welch, _\bI_\bE_\bE_\bE _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bu_\bt_\be_\br, vol. 17, no. 6 (June 1984),
+ pp. 8-19. Common substrings in the file are first replaced
+ by 9-bit codes 257 and up. When code 512 is reached, the
+ algorithm switches to 10-bit codes and continues to use more
+ bits until the limit specified by the -\b-b\bb flag is reached
+ (default 16). _\bB_\bi_\bt_\bs must be between 9 and 16. The default
+ can be changed in the source to allow _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs to be run on
+ a smaller machine.
+
+ After the _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs limit is attained, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs periodically
+ checks the compression ratio. If it is increasing, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs
+ continues to use the existing code dictionary. However, if
+ the compression ratio decreases, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs discards the table
+ of substrings and rebuilds it from scratch. This allows the
+ algorithm to adapt to the next "block" of the file.
+
+ Note that the -\b-b\bb flag is omitted for _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs, since the
+ _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs parameter specified during compression is encoded
+ within the output, along with a magic number to ensure that
+ neither decompression of random data nor recompression of
+ compressed data is attempted.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
+
+
+
+ The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of
+ the input, the number of _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs per code, and the distribution
+ of common substrings. Typically, text such as source code
+ or English is reduced by 50-60%. Compression is generally
+ much better than that achieved by Huffman coding (as used in
+ _\bp_\ba_\bc_\bk), or adaptive Huffman coding (_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\ba_\bc_\bt), and takes less
+ time to compute.
+
+ The -\b-v\bv option causes the printing of the percentage reduc-
+ tion of each file.
+
+ If an error occurs, exit status is 1, else if the last file
+ was not compressed because it became larger, the status is
+ 2; else the status is 0.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Usage: compress [-fvc] [-b maxbits] [file ...]
+ Invalid options were specified on the command line.
+ Missing maxbits
+ Maxbits must follow -\b-b\bb.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: not in compressed format
+ The file specified to _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs has not been
+ compressed.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: compressed with _\bx_\bx bits, can only handle _\by_\by bits
+ _\bF_\bi_\bl_\be was compressed by a program that could deal
+ with more _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs than the compress code on this
+ machine. Recompress the file with smaller _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: already has .Z suffix -- no change
+ The file is assumed to be already compressed.
+ Rename the file and try again.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: filename too long to tack on .Z
+ The file cannot be compressed because its name is
+ longer than 12 characters. Rename and try again.
+ This message does not occur on BSD systems.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)?
+ Respond "y" if you want the output file to be
+ replaced; "n" if not.
+ uncompress: corrupt input
+ A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means
+ that the input file is corrupted.
+ Compression: _\bx_\bx._\bx_\bx%
+ Percentage of the input saved by compression.
+ (Relevant only for -\b-v\bv.)
+ -- not a regular file: unchanged
+ When the input file is not a regular file, (e.g. a
+ directory), it is left unaltered.
+ -- has _\bx_\bx other links: unchanged
+ The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See
+ _\bl_\bn(1) for more information.
+ -- file unchanged
+ No savings is achieved by compression. The input
+ remains virgin.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Although compressed files are compatible between machines
+ with large memory, -\b-b\bb12 should be used for file transfer to
+ architectures with a small process data space (64KB or less,
+ as exhibited by the DEC PDP series, the Intel 80286, etc.)
+
+ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs should be more flexible about the existence of the
+ `.Z' suffix.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ cp - copy
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bcp\bp [ -\b-i\bip\bp ] file1 file2
+
+ c\bcp\bp [ -\b-i\bip\bpr\br ] file ... directory
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bF_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 is copied onto _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2. By default, the mode and owner
+ of _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 are preserved if it already existed; otherwise the
+ mode of the source file modified by the current _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk(2) is
+ used. The -\b-p\bp option causes _\bc_\bp to attempt to preserve
+ (duplicate) in its copies the modification times and modes
+ of the source files, ignoring the present _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk.
+
+ In the second form, one or more _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs are copied into the
+ _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by with their original file-names.
+
+ _\bC_\bp refuses to copy a file onto itself.
+
+ If the -\b-i\bi option is specified, _\bc_\bp will prompt the user with
+ the name of the file whenever the copy will cause an old
+ file to be overwritten. An answer of 'y' will cause _\bc_\bp to
+ continue. Any other answer will prevent it from overwriting
+ the file.
+
+ If the -\b-r\br option is specified and any of the source files
+ are directories, _\bc_\bp copies each subtree rooted at that name;
+ in this case the destination must be a directory.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cat(1), mv(1), rcp(1C)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 8, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CRYPT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CRYPT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ crypt - encode/decode
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bcr\bry\byp\bpt\bt [ password ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\br_\by_\bp_\bt reads from the standard input and writes on the stan-
+ dard output. The _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is a key that selects a particu-
+ lar transformation. If no _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is given, _\bc_\br_\by_\bp_\bt demands
+ a key from the terminal and turns off printing while the key
+ is being typed in. _\bC_\br_\by_\bp_\bt encrypts and decrypts with the
+ same key:
+
+ crypt key <clear >cypher
+ crypt key <cypher | pr
+
+ will print the clear.
+
+ Files encrypted by _\bc_\br_\by_\bp_\bt are compatible with those treated
+ by the editor _\be_\bd in encryption mode.
+
+ The security of encrypted files depends on three factors:
+ the fundamental method must be hard to solve; direct search
+ of the key space must be infeasible; `sneak paths' by which
+ keys or cleartext can become visible must be minimized.
+
+ _\bC_\br_\by_\bp_\bt implements a one-rotor machine designed along the
+ lines of the German Enigma, but with a 256-element rotor.
+ Methods of attack on such machines are known, but not
+ widely; moreover the amount of work required is likely to be
+ large.
+
+ The transformation of a key into the internal settings of
+ the machine is deliberately designed to be expensive, i.e.
+ to take a substantial fraction of a second to compute. How-
+ ever, if keys are restricted to (say) three lower-case
+ letters, then encrypted files can be read by expending only
+ a substantial fraction of five minutes of machine time.
+
+ Since the key is an argument to the _\bc_\br_\by_\bp_\bt command, it is
+ potentially visible to users executing _\bp_\bs(1) or a deriva-
+ tive. To minimize this possibility, _\bc_\br_\by_\bp_\bt takes care to
+ destroy any record of the key immediately upon entry. No
+ doubt the choice of keys and key security are the most
+ vulnerable aspect of _\bc_\br_\by_\bp_\bt.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /dev/tty for typed key
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ed(1), crypt(3), makekey(8)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 14, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CRYPT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CRYPT(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ There is no warranty of merchantability nor any warranty of
+ fitness for a particular purpose nor any other warranty,
+ either express or implied, as to the accuracy of the
+ enclosed materials or as to their suitability for any par-
+ ticular purpose. Accordingly, Bell Telephone Laboratories
+ assumes no responsibility for their use by the recipient.
+ Further, Bell Laboratories assumes no obligation to furnish
+ any assistance of any kind whatsoever, or to furnish any
+ additional information or documentation.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 14, 1987 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ csh - a shell (command interpreter) with C-like syntax
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bcs\bsh\bh [ -\b-c\bce\bef\bfi\bin\bns\bst\btv\bvV\bVx\bxX\bX ] [ arg ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bs_\bh is a first implementation of a command language inter-
+ preter incorporating a history mechanism (see H\bHi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by S\bSu\bub\bb-\b-
+ s\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs), job control facilities (see J\bJo\bob\bbs\bs), interactive
+ file name and user name completion (see F\bFi\bil\ble\be N\bNa\bam\bme\be C\bCo\bom\bmp\bpl\ble\be-\b-
+ t\bti\bio\bon\bn), and a C-like syntax. So as to be able to use its job
+ control facilities, users of _\bc_\bs_\bh must (and automatically)
+ use the new tty driver fully described in _\bt_\bt_\by(4). This new
+ tty driver allows generation of interrupt characters from
+ the keyboard to tell jobs to stop. See _\bs_\bt_\bt_\by(1) for details
+ on setting options in the new tty driver.
+
+ An instance of _\bc_\bs_\bh begins by executing commands from the
+ file `.cshrc' in the _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be directory of the invoker. If this
+ is a login shell then it also executes commands from the
+ file `.login' there. It is typical for users on crt's to
+ put the command ``stty crt'' in their ._\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn file, and to
+ also invoke _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt(1) there.
+
+ In the normal case, the shell will then begin reading com-
+ mands from the terminal, prompting with `% '. Processing of
+ arguments and the use of the shell to process files contain-
+ ing command scripts will be described later.
+
+ The shell then repeatedly performs the following actions: a
+ line of command input is read and broken into _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bs. This
+ sequence of words is placed on the command history list and
+ then parsed. Finally each command in the current line is
+ executed.
+
+ When a login shell terminates it executes commands from the
+ file `.logout' in the users home directory.
+
+ L\bLe\bex\bxi\bic\bca\bal\bl s\bst\btr\bru\buc\bct\btu\bur\bre\be
+
+ The shell splits input lines into words at blanks and tabs
+ with the following exceptions. The characters `&' `|' `;'
+ `<' `>' `(' `)' form separate words. If doubled in `&&',
+ `||', `<<' or `>>' these pairs form single words. These
+ parser metacharacters may be made part of other words, or
+ prevented their special meaning, by preceding them with `\'.
+ A newline preceded by a `\' is equivalent to a blank.
+
+ In addition strings enclosed in matched pairs of quotations,
+ `'', ``' or `"', form parts of a word; metacharacters in
+ these strings, including blanks and tabs, do not form
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ separate words. These quotations have semantics to be
+ described subsequently. Within pairs of `'' or `"' charac-
+ ters a newline preceded by a `\' gives a true newline char-
+ acter.
+
+ When the shell's input is not a terminal, the character `#'
+ introduces a comment which continues to the end of the input
+ line. It is prevented this special meaning when preceded by
+ `\' and in quotations using ``', `'', and `"'.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs
+
+ A simple command is a sequence of words, the first of which
+ specifies the command to be executed. A simple command or a
+ sequence of simple commands separated by `|' characters
+ forms a pipeline. The output of each command in a pipeline
+ is connected to the input of the next. Sequences of pipe-
+ lines may be separated by `;', and are then executed sequen-
+ tially. A sequence of pipelines may be executed without
+ immediately waiting for it to terminate by following it with
+ an `&'.
+
+ Any of the above may be placed in `(' `)' to form a simple
+ command (which may be a component of a pipeline, etc.) It is
+ also possible to separate pipelines with `||' or `&&' indi-
+ cating, as in the C language, that the second is to be exe-
+ cuted only if the first fails or succeeds respectively. (See
+ _\bE_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs.)
+
+ J\bJo\bob\bbs\bs
+
+ The shell associates a _\bj_\bo_\bb with each pipeline. It keeps a
+ table of current jobs, printed by the _\bj_\bo_\bb_\bs command, and
+ assigns them small integer numbers. When a job is started
+ asynchronously with `&', the shell prints a line which looks
+ like:
+
+ [1] 1234
+
+ indicating that the job which was started asynchronously was
+ job number 1 and had one (top-level) process, whose process
+ id was 1234.
+
+ If you are running a job and wish to do something else you
+ may hit the key ^\b^Z\bZ (control-Z) which sends a STOP signal to
+ the current job. The shell will then normally indicate that
+ the job has been `Stopped', and print another prompt. You
+ can then manipulate the state of this job, putting it in the
+ background with the _\bb_\bg command, or run some other commands
+ and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground
+ with the foreground command _\bf_\bg. A ^\b^Z\bZ takes effect immedi-
+ ately and is like an interrupt in that pending output and
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ unread input are discarded when it is typed. There is
+ another special key ^\b^Y\bY which does not generate a STOP signal
+ until a program attempts to _\br_\be_\ba_\bd(2) it. This can usefully
+ be typed ahead when you have prepared some commands for a
+ job which you wish to stop after it has read them.
+
+ A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to
+ read from the terminal. Background jobs are normally
+ allowed to produce output, but this can be disabled by giv-
+ ing the command ``stty tostop''. If you set this tty
+ option, then background jobs will stop when they try to pro-
+ duce output like they do when they try to read input.
+
+ There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The
+ character `%' introduces a job name. If you wish to refer
+ to job number 1, you can name it as `%1'. Just naming a job
+ brings it to the foreground; thus `%1' is a synonym for `fg
+ %1', bringing job 1 back into the foreground. Similarly
+ saying `%1 &' resumes job 1 in the background. Jobs can
+ also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to start
+ them, if these prefixes are unambiguous, thus `%ex' would
+ normally restart a suspended _\be_\bx(1) job, if there were only
+ one suspended job whose name began with the string `ex'. It
+ is also possible to say `%?string' which specifies a job
+ whose text contains _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg, if there is only one such job.
+
+ The shell maintains a notion of the current and previous
+ jobs. In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is
+ marked with a `+' and the previous job with a `-'. The
+ abbreviation `%+' refers to the current job and `%-' refers
+ to the previous job. For close analogy with the syntax of
+ the _\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bo_\br_\by mechanism (described below), `%%' is also a
+ synonym for the current job.
+
+ S\bSt\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs r\bre\bep\bpo\bor\brt\bti\bin\bng\bg
+
+ This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes
+ state. It normally informs you whenever a job becomes
+ blocked so that no further progress is possible, but only
+ just before it prints a prompt. This is done so that it
+ does not otherwise disturb your work. If, however, you set
+ the shell variable _\bn_\bo_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by, the shell will notify you immedi-
+ ately of changes of status in background jobs. There is
+ also a shell command _\bn_\bo_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by which marks a single process so
+ that its status changes will be immediately reported. By
+ default _\bn_\bo_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by marks the current process; simply say
+ `notify' after starting a background job to mark it.
+
+ When you try to leave the shell while jobs are stopped, you
+ will be warned that `You have stopped jobs.' You may use
+ the _\bj_\bo_\bb_\bs command to see what they are. If you do this or
+ immediately try to exit again, the shell will not warn you a
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ second time, and the suspended jobs will be terminated.
+
+ F\bFi\bil\ble\be N\bNa\bam\bme\be C\bCo\bom\bmp\bpl\ble\bet\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ When the file name completion feature is enabled by setting
+ the shell variable _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bc (see s\bse\bet\bt), _\bc_\bs_\bh will interactively
+ complete file names and user names from unique prefixes,
+ when they are input from the terminal followed by the escape
+ character (the escape key, or control-[). For example, if
+ the current directory looks like
+ DSC.OLD bin cmd lib xmpl.c
+ DSC.NEW chaosnet cmtest mail xmpl.o
+ bench class dev mbox xmpl.out
+ and the input is
+ % vi ch<escape>
+ _\bc_\bs_\bh will complete the prefix ``ch'' to the only matching
+ file name ``chaosnet'', changing the input line to
+ % vi chaosnet
+ However, given
+ % vi D<escape>
+ _\bc_\bs_\bh will only expand the input to
+ % vi DSC.
+ and will sound the terminal bell to indicate that the expan-
+ sion is incomplete, since there are two file names matching
+ the prefix ``D''.
+
+ If a partial file name is followed by the end-of-file char-
+ acter (usually control-D), then, instead of completing the
+ name, _\bc_\bs_\bh will list all file names matching the prefix. For
+ example, the input
+ % vi D<control-D>
+ causes all files beginning with ``D'' to be listed:
+ DSC.NEW DSC.OLD
+ while the input line remains unchanged.
+
+ The same system of escape and end-of-file can also be used
+ to expand partial user names, if the word to be completed
+ (or listed) begins with the character ``~''. For example,
+ typing
+ cd ~ro<escape>
+ may produce the expansion
+ cd ~root
+
+ The use of the terminal bell to signal errors or multiple
+ matches can be inhibited by setting the variable _\bn_\bo_\bb_\be_\be_\bp.
+
+ Normally, all files in the particular directory are candi-
+ dates for name completion. Files with certain suffixes can
+ be excluded from consideration by setting the variable _\bf_\bi_\bg_\b-
+ _\bn_\bo_\br_\be to the list of suffixes to be ignored. Thus, if _\bf_\bi_\bg_\b-
+ _\bn_\bo_\br_\be is set by the command
+ % set fignore = (.o .out)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ then typing
+ % vi x<escape>
+ would result in the completion to
+ % vi xmpl.c
+ ignoring the files "xmpl.o" and "xmpl.out". However, if the
+ only completion possible requires not ignoring these suf-
+ fixes, then they are not ignored. In addition, _\bf_\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be does
+ not affect the listing of file names by control-D. All
+ files are listed regardless of their suffixes.
+
+ S\bSu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs
+
+ We now describe the various transformations the shell per-
+ forms on the input in the order in which they occur.
+
+ H\bHi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs
+
+ History substitutions place words from previous command
+ input as portions of new commands, making it easy to repeat
+ commands, repeat arguments of a previous command in the
+ current command, or fix spelling mistakes in the previous
+ command with little typing and a high degree of confidence.
+ History substitutions begin with the character `!' and may
+ begin a\ban\bny\byw\bwh\bhe\ber\bre\be in the input stream (with the proviso that
+ they d\bdo\bo n\bno\bot\bt nest.) This `!' may be preceded by an `\' to
+ prevent its special meaning; for convenience, a `!' is
+ passed unchanged when it is followed by a blank, tab, new-
+ line, `=' or `('. (History substitutions also occur when an
+ input line begins with `^'. This special abbreviation will
+ be described later.) Any input line which contains history
+ substitution is echoed on the terminal before it is executed
+ as it could have been typed without history substitution.
+
+ Commands input from the terminal which consist of one or
+ more words are saved on the history list. The history sub-
+ stitutions reintroduce sequences of words from these saved
+ commands into the input stream. The size of which is con-
+ trolled by the _\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bo_\br_\by variable; the previous command is
+ always retained, regardless of its value. Commands are num-
+ bered sequentially from 1.
+
+ For definiteness, consider the following output from the
+ _\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bo_\br_\by command:
+
+ 9 write michael
+ 10 ex write.c
+ 11 cat oldwrite.c
+ 12 diff *write.c
+
+ The commands are shown with their event numbers. It is not
+ usually necessary to use event numbers, but the current
+ event number can be made part of the _\bp_\br_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bt by placing an
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ `!' in the prompt string.
+
+ With the current event 13 we can refer to previous events by
+ event number `!11', relatively as in `!-2' (referring to the
+ same event), by a prefix of a command word as in `!d' for
+ event 12 or `!wri' for event 9, or by a string contained in
+ a word in the command as in `!?mic?' also referring to event
+ 9. These forms, without further modification, simply rein-
+ troduce the words of the specified events, each separated by
+ a single blank. As a special case `!!' refers to the previ-
+ ous command; thus `!!' alone is essentially a _\br_\be_\bd_\bo.
+
+ To select words from an event we can follow the event
+ specification by a `:' and a designator for the desired
+ words. The words of an input line are numbered from 0, the
+ first (usually command) word being 0, the second word (first
+ argument) being 1, etc. The basic word designators are:
+
+ 0 first (command) word
+ _\bn _\bn'th argument
+ ^ first argument, i.e. `1'
+ $ last argument
+ % word matched by (immediately preceding) ?_\bs? search
+ _\bx-_\by range of words
+ -_\by abbreviates `0-_\by'
+ * abbreviates `^-$', or nothing if only 1 word in event
+ _\bx* abbreviates `_\bx-$'
+ _\bx- like `_\bx*' but omitting word `$'
+
+ The `:' separating the event specification from the word
+ designator can be omitted if the argument selector begins
+ with a `^', `$', `*' `-' or `%'. After the optional word
+ designator can be placed a sequence of modifiers, each pre-
+ ceded by a `:'. The following modifiers are defined:
+
+ h Remove a trailing pathname component, leaving the head.
+ r Remove a trailing `.xxx' component, leaving the root name.
+ e Remove all but the extension `.xxx' part.
+ s/_\bl/_\br/ Substitute _\bl for _\br
+ t Remove all leading pathname components, leaving the tail.
+ & Repeat the previous substitution.
+ g Apply the change globally, prefixing the above, e.g. `g&'.
+ p Print the new command line but do not execute it.
+ q Quote the substituted words, preventing further substitutions.
+ x Like q, but break into words at blanks, tabs and newlines.
+
+ Unless preceded by a `g' the modification is applied only to
+ the first modifiable word. With substitutions, it is an
+ error for no word to be applicable.
+
+ The left hand side of substitutions are not regular expres-
+ sions in the sense of the editors, but rather strings. Any
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ character may be used as the delimiter in place of `/'; a
+ `\' quotes the delimiter into the _\bl and _\br strings. The
+ character `&' in the right hand side is replaced by the text
+ from the left. A `\' quotes `&' also. A null _\bl uses the
+ previous string either from a _\bl or from a contextual scan
+ string _\bs in `!?_\bs?'. The trailing delimiter in the substitu-
+ tion may be omitted if a newline follows immediately as may
+ the trailing `?' in a contextual scan.
+
+ A history reference may be given without an event specifica-
+ tion, e.g. `!$'. In this case the reference is to the pre-
+ vious command unless a previous history reference occurred
+ on the same line in which case this form repeats the previ-
+ ous reference. Thus `!?foo?^ !$' gives the first and last
+ arguments from the command matching `?foo?'.
+
+ A special abbreviation of a history reference occurs when
+ the first non-blank character of an input line is a `^'.
+ This is equivalent to `!:s^' providing a convenient short-
+ hand for substitutions on the text of the previous line.
+ Thus `^lb^lib' fixes the spelling of `lib' in the previous
+ command. Finally, a history substitution may be surrounded
+ with `{' and `}' if necessary to insulate it from the char-
+ acters which follow. Thus, after `ls -ld ~paul' we might do
+ `!{l}a' to do `ls -ld ~paula', while `!la' would look for a
+ command starting `la'.
+
+ Q\bQu\buo\bot\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs w\bwi\bit\bth\bh '\b' a\ban\bnd\bd "\b"
+
+ The quotation of strings by `'' and `"' can be used to
+ prevent all or some of the remaining substitutions. Strings
+ enclosed in `'' are prevented any further interpretation.
+ Strings enclosed in `"' may be expanded as described below.
+
+ In both cases the resulting text becomes (all or part of) a
+ single word; only in one special case (see _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd _\bS_\bu_\bb_\bs_\bt_\bi_\bt_\bi_\b-
+ _\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn below) does a `"' quoted string yield parts of more
+ than one word; `'' quoted strings never do.
+
+ A\bAl\bli\bia\bas\bs s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ The shell maintains a list of aliases which can be esta-
+ blished, displayed and modified by the _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs and _\bu_\bn_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs
+ commands. After a command line is scanned, it is parsed
+ into distinct commands and the first word of each command,
+ left-to-right, is checked to see if it has an alias. If it
+ does, then the text which is the alias for that command is
+ reread with the history mechanism available as though that
+ command were the previous input line. The resulting words
+ replace the command and argument list. If no reference is
+ made to the history list, then the argument list is left
+ unchanged.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ Thus if the alias for `ls' is `ls -l' the command `ls /usr'
+ would map to `ls -l /usr', the argument list here being
+ undisturbed. Similarly if the alias for `lookup' was `grep
+ !^ /etc/passwd' then `lookup bill' would map to `grep bill
+ /etc/passwd'.
+
+ If an alias is found, the word transformation of the input
+ text is performed and the aliasing process begins again on
+ the reformed input line. Looping is prevented if the first
+ word of the new text is the same as the old by flagging it
+ to prevent further aliasing. Other loops are detected and
+ cause an error.
+
+ Note that the mechanism allows aliases to introduce parser
+ metasyntax. Thus we can `alias print 'pr \!* | lpr'' to
+ make a command which _\bp_\br'_\bs its arguments to the line printer.
+
+ V\bVa\bar\bri\bia\bab\bbl\ble\be s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ The shell maintains a set of variables, each of which has as
+ value a list of zero or more words. Some of these variables
+ are set by the shell or referred to by it. For instance,
+ the _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv variable is an image of the shell's argument list,
+ and words of this variable's value are referred to in spe-
+ cial ways.
+
+ The values of variables may be displayed and changed by
+ using the _\bs_\be_\bt and _\bu_\bn_\bs_\be_\bt commands. Of the variables referred
+ to by the shell a number are toggles; the shell does not
+ care what their value is, only whether they are set or not.
+ For instance, the _\bv_\be_\br_\bb_\bo_\bs_\be variable is a toggle which causes
+ command input to be echoed. The setting of this variable
+ results from the -\b-v\bv command line option.
+
+ Other operations treat variables numerically. The `@' com-
+ mand permits numeric calculations to be performed and the
+ result assigned to a variable. Variable values are, how-
+ ever, always represented as (zero or more) strings. For the
+ purposes of numeric operations, the null string is con-
+ sidered to be zero, and the second and subsequent words of
+ multiword values are ignored.
+
+ After the input line is aliased and parsed, and before each
+ command is executed, variable substitution is performed
+ keyed by `$' characters. This expansion can be prevented by
+ preceding the `$' with a `\' except within `"'s where it
+ a\bal\blw\bwa\bay\bys\bs occurs, and within `''s where it n\bne\bev\bve\ber\br occurs.
+ Strings quoted by ``' are interpreted later (see _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd
+ _\bs_\bu_\bb_\bs_\bt_\bi_\bt_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn below) so `$' substitution does not occur there
+ until later, if at all. A `$' is passed unchanged if fol-
+ lowed by a blank, tab, or end-of-line.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ Input/output redirections are recognized before variable
+ expansion, and are variable expanded separately. Otherwise,
+ the command name and entire argument list are expanded
+ together. It is thus possible for the first (command) word
+ to this point to generate more than one word, the first of
+ which becomes the command name, and the rest of which become
+ arguments.
+
+ Unless enclosed in `"' or given the `:q' modifier the
+ results of variable substitution may eventually be command
+ and filename substituted. Within `"', a variable whose
+ value consists of multiple words expands to a (portion of) a
+ single word, with the words of the variables value separated
+ by blanks. When the `:q' modifier is applied to a substitu-
+ tion the variable will expand to multiple words with each
+ word separated by a blank and quoted to prevent later com-
+ mand or filename substitution.
+
+ The following metasequences are provided for introducing
+ variable values into the shell input. Except as noted, it
+ is an error to reference a variable which is not set.
+
+ $name
+ ${name}
+ Are replaced by the words of the value of variable
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be, each separated by a blank. Braces insulate _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ from following characters which would otherwise be part
+ of it. Shell variables have names consisting of up to
+ 20 letters and digits starting with a letter. The
+ underscore character is considered a letter.
+ If _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is not a shell variable, but is set in the
+ environment, then that value is returned (but :\b: modif-
+ iers and the other forms given below are not available
+ in this case).
+
+ $name[selector]
+ ${name[selector]}
+ May be used to select only some of the words from the
+ value of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. The selector is subjected to `$' substi-
+ tution and may consist of a single number or two
+ numbers separated by a `-'. The first word of a vari-
+ ables value is numbered `1'. If the first number of a
+ range is omitted it defaults to `1'. If the last
+ member of a range is omitted it defaults to `$#name'.
+ The selector `*' selects all words. It is not an error
+ for a range to be empty if the second argument is omit-
+ ted or in range.
+
+ $#name
+ ${#name}
+ Gives the number of words in the variable. This is
+ useful for later use in a `[selector]'.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 9
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ $0
+ Substitutes the name of the file from which command
+ input is being read. An error occurs if the name is
+ not known.
+
+ $number
+ ${number}
+ Equivalent to `$argv[number]'.
+
+ $*
+ Equivalent to `$argv[*]'.
+
+ The modifiers `:e', `:h', `:t', `:r', `:q' and `:x' may be
+ applied to the substitutions above as may `:gh', `:gt' and
+ `:gr'. If braces `{' '}' appear in the command form then
+ the modifiers must appear within the braces. T\bTh\bhe\be c\bcu\bur\brr\bre\ben\bnt\bt
+ i\bim\bmp\bpl\ble\bem\bme\ben\bnt\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn a\bal\bll\blo\bow\bws\bs o\bon\bnl\bly\by o\bon\bne\be `\b`:\b:'\b' m\bmo\bod\bdi\bif\bfi\bie\ber\br o\bon\bn e\bea\bac\bch\bh `\b`$\b$'\b'
+ e\bex\bxp\bpa\ban\bns\bsi\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+
+ The following substitutions may not be modified with `:'
+ modifiers.
+
+ $?name
+ ${?name}
+ Substitutes the string `1' if name is set, `0' if it is
+ not.
+
+ $?0
+ Substitutes `1' if the current input filename is known,
+ `0' if it is not.
+
+ $$
+ Substitute the (decimal) process number of the (parent)
+ shell.
+
+ $<
+ Substitutes a line from the standard input, with no
+ further interpretation thereafter. It can be used to
+ read from the keyboard in a shell script.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd a\ban\bnd\bd f\bfi\bil\ble\ben\bna\bam\bme\be s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ The remaining substitutions, command and filename substitu-
+ tion, are applied selectively to the arguments of builtin
+ commands. This means that portions of expressions which are
+ not evaluated are not subjected to these expansions. For
+ commands which are not internal to the shell, the command
+ name is substituted separately from the argument list. This
+ occurs very late, after input-output redirection is per-
+ formed, and in a child of the main shell.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 10
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ Command substitution is indicated by a command enclosed in
+ ``'. The output from such a command is normally broken into
+ separate words at blanks, tabs and newlines, with null words
+ being discarded, this text then replacing the original
+ string. Within `"'s, only newlines force new words; blanks
+ and tabs are preserved.
+
+ In any case, the single final newline does not force a new
+ word. Note that it is thus possible for a command substitu-
+ tion to yield only part of a word, even if the command out-
+ puts a complete line.
+
+ F\bFi\bil\ble\ben\bna\bam\bme\be s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ If a word contains any of the characters `*', `?', `[' or
+ `{' or begins with the character `~', then that word is a
+ candidate for filename substitution, also known as `glob-
+ bing'. This word is then regarded as a pattern, and
+ replaced with an alphabetically sorted list of file names
+ which match the pattern. In a list of words specifying
+ filename substitution it is an error for no pattern to match
+ an existing file name, but it is not required for each pat-
+ tern to match. Only the metacharacters `*', `?' and `['
+ imply pattern matching, the characters `~' and `{' being
+ more akin to abbreviations.
+
+ In matching filenames, the character `.' at the beginning of
+ a filename or immediately following a `/', as well as the
+ character `/' must be matched explicitly. The character `*'
+ matches any string of characters, including the null string.
+ The character `?' matches any single character. The
+ sequence `[...]' matches any one of the characters enclosed.
+ Within `[...]', a pair of characters separated by `-'
+ matches any character lexically between the two.
+
+ The character `~' at the beginning of a filename is used to
+ refer to home directories. Standing alone, i.e. `~' it
+ expands to the invokers home directory as reflected in the
+ value of the variable _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be. When followed by a name consist-
+ ing of letters, digits and `-' characters the shell searches
+ for a user with that name and substitutes their home direc-
+ tory; thus `~ken' might expand to `/usr/ken' and
+ `~ken/chmach' to `/usr/ken/chmach'. If the character `~' is
+ followed by a character other than a letter or `/' or
+ appears not at the beginning of a word, it is left undis-
+ turbed.
+
+ The metanotation `a{b,c,d}e' is a shorthand for `abe ace
+ ade'. Left to right order is preserved, with results of
+ matches being sorted separately at a low level to preserve
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 11
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ this order. This construct may be nested. Thus
+ `~source/s1/{oldls,ls}.c' expands to `/usr/source/s1/oldls.c
+ /usr/source/s1/ls.c' whether or not these files exist
+ without any chance of error if the home directory for
+ `source' is `/usr/source'. Similarly `../{memo,*box}' might
+ expand to `../memo ../box ../mbox'. (Note that `memo' was
+ not sorted with the results of matching `*box'.) As a spe-
+ cial case `{', `}' and `{}' are passed undisturbed.
+
+ I\bIn\bnp\bpu\but\bt/\b/o\bou\but\btp\bpu\but\bt
+
+ The standard input and standard output of a command may be
+ redirected with the following syntax:
+
+ < name
+ Open file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be (which is first variable, command and
+ filename expanded) as the standard input.
+
+ << word
+ Read the shell input up to a line which is identical to
+ _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd. _\bW_\bo_\br_\bd is not subjected to variable, filename or
+ command substitution, and each input line is compared
+ to _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd before any substitutions are done on this input
+ line. Unless a quoting `\', `"', `'' or ``' appears in
+ _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd variable and command substitution is performed on
+ the intervening lines, allowing `\' to quote `$', `\'
+ and ``'. Commands which are substituted have all
+ blanks, tabs, and newlines preserved, except for the
+ final newline which is dropped. The resultant text is
+ placed in an anonymous temporary file which is given to
+ the command as standard input.
+
+ > name
+ >! name
+ >& name
+ >&! name
+ The file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is used as standard output. If the file
+ does not exist then it is created; if the file exists,
+ its is truncated, its previous contents being lost.
+
+ If the variable _\bn_\bo_\bc_\bl_\bo_\bb_\bb_\be_\br is set, then the file must
+ not exist or be a character special file (e.g. a termi-
+ nal or `/dev/null') or an error results. This helps
+ prevent accidental destruction of files. In this case
+ the `!' forms can be used and suppress this check.
+
+ The forms involving `&' route the diagnostic output
+ into the specified file as well as the standard output.
+ _\bN_\ba_\bm_\be is expanded in the same way as `<' input filenames
+ are.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 12
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ >> name
+ >>& name
+ >>! name
+ >>&! name
+ Uses file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be as standard output like `>' but places
+ output at the end of the file. If the variable
+ _\bn_\bo_\bc_\bl_\bo_\bb_\bb_\be_\br is set, then it is an error for the file not
+ to exist unless one of the `!' forms is given. Other-
+ wise similar to `>'.
+
+ A command receives the environment in which the shell was
+ invoked as modified by the input-output parameters and the
+ presence of the command in a pipeline. Thus, unlike some
+ previous shells, commands run from a file of shell commands
+ have no access to the text of the commands by default;
+ rather they receive the original standard input of the
+ shell. The `<<' mechanism should be used to present inline
+ data. This permits shell command scripts to function as
+ components of pipelines and allows the shell to block read
+ its input. Note that the default standard input for a com-
+ mand run detached is n\bno\bot\bt modified to be the empty file
+ `/dev/null'; rather the standard input remains as the origi-
+ nal standard input of the shell. If this is a terminal and
+ if the process attempts to read from the terminal, then the
+ process will block and the user will be notified (see J\bJo\bob\bbs\bs
+ above).
+
+ Diagnostic output may be directed through a pipe with the
+ standard output. Simply use the form `|&' rather than just
+ `|'.
+
+ E\bEx\bxp\bpr\bre\bes\bss\bsi\bio\bon\bns\bs
+
+ A number of the builtin commands (to be described subse-
+ quently) take expressions, in which the operators are simi-
+ lar to those of C, with the same precedence. These expres-
+ sions appear in the @, _\be_\bx_\bi_\bt, _\bi_\bf, and _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be commands. The
+ following operators are available:
+
+ || && | ^ & == != =~ !~ <= >= < > << >>
+ + - * / % ! ~ ( )
+
+ Here the precedence increases to the right, `==' `!=' `=~'
+ and `!~', `<=' `>=' `<' and `>', `<<' and `>>', `+' and `-',
+ `*' `/' and `%' being, in groups, at the same level. The
+ `==' `!=' `=~' and `!~' operators compare their arguments as
+ strings; all others operate on numbers. The operators `=~'
+ and `!~' are like `!=' and `==' except that the right hand
+ side is a _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn (containing, e.g. `*'s, `?'s and instances
+ of `[...]') against which the left hand operand is matched.
+ This reduces the need for use of the _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh statement in
+ shell scripts when all that is really needed is pattern
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 13
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ matching.
+
+ Strings which begin with `0' are considered octal numbers.
+ Null or missing arguments are considered `0'. The result of
+ all expressions are strings, which represent decimal
+ numbers. It is important to note that no two components of
+ an expression can appear in the same word; except when adja-
+ cent to components of expressions which are syntactically
+ significant to the parser (`&' `|' `<' `>' `(' `)') they
+ should be surrounded by spaces.
+
+ Also available in expressions as primitive operands are com-
+ mand executions enclosed in `{' and `}' and file enquiries
+ of the form `-_\bl name' where _\bl is one of:
+
+ r read access
+ w write access
+ x execute access
+ e existence
+ o ownership
+ z zero size
+ f plain file
+ d directory
+
+ The specified name is command and filename expanded and then
+ tested to see if it has the specified relationship to the
+ real user. If the file does not exist or is inaccessible
+ then all enquiries return false, i.e. `0'. Command execu-
+ tions succeed, returning true, i.e. `1', if the command
+ exits with status 0, otherwise they fail, returning false,
+ i.e. `0'. If more detailed status information is required
+ then the command should be executed outside of an expression
+ and the variable _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs examined.
+
+ C\bCo\bon\bnt\btr\bro\bol\bl f\bfl\blo\bow\bw
+
+ The shell contains a number of commands which can be used to
+ regulate the flow of control in command files (shell
+ scripts) and (in limited but useful ways) from terminal
+ input. These commands all operate by forcing the shell to
+ reread or skip in its input and, due to the implementation,
+ restrict the placement of some of the commands.
+
+ The _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh, _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh, and _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be statements, as well as the
+ _\bi_\bf-_\bt_\bh_\be_\bn-_\be_\bl_\bs_\be form of the _\bi_\bf statement require that the major
+ keywords appear in a single simple command on an input line
+ as shown below.
+
+ If the shell's input is not seekable, the shell buffers up
+ input whenever a loop is being read and performs seeks in
+ this internal buffer to accomplish the rereading implied by
+ the loop. (To the extent that this allows, backward goto's
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 14
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ will succeed on non-seekable inputs.)
+
+ B\bBu\bui\bil\blt\bti\bin\bn c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs
+
+ Builtin commands are executed within the shell. If a buil-
+ tin command occurs as any component of a pipeline except the
+ last then it is executed in a subshell.
+
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs name
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs name wordlist
+ The first form prints all aliases. The second form
+ prints the alias for name. The final form assigns the
+ specified _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt as the alias of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be; _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is
+ command and filename substituted. _\bN_\ba_\bm_\be is not allowed
+ to be _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs or _\bu_\bn_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs.
+
+ a\bal\bll\blo\boc\bc
+ Shows the amount of dynamic memory acquired, broken
+ down into used and free memory. With an argument shows
+ the number of free and used blocks in each size
+ category. The categories start at size 8 and double at
+ each step. This command's output may vary across sys-
+ tem types, since systems other than the VAX may use a
+ different memory allocator.
+
+ b\bbg\bg
+ b\bbg\bg %\b%job ...
+ Puts the current or specified jobs into the background,
+ continuing them if they were stopped.
+
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bk
+ Causes execution to resume after the _\be_\bn_\bd of the nearest
+ enclosing _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh or _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be. The remaining commands on
+ the current line are executed. Multi-level breaks are
+ thus possible by writing them all on one line.
+
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bks\bsw\bw
+ Causes a break from a _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh, resuming after the _\be_\bn_\bd_\bs_\bw.
+
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be label:
+ A label in a _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh statement as discussed below.
+
+ c\bcd\bd
+ c\bcd\bd name
+ c\bch\bhd\bdi\bir\br
+ c\bch\bhd\bdi\bir\br name
+ Change the shell's working directory to directory _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+ If no argument is given then change to the home direc-
+ tory of the user.
+ If _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is not found as a subdirectory of the current
+ directory (and does not begin with `/', `./' or `../'),
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 15
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ then each component of the variable _\bc_\bd_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh is checked
+ to see if it has a subdirectory _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. Finally, if all
+ else fails but _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is a shell variable whose value
+ begins with `/', then this is tried to see if it is a
+ directory.
+
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bti\bin\bnu\bue\be
+ Continue execution of the nearest enclosing _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be or
+ _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh. The rest of the commands on the current line
+ are executed.
+
+ d\bde\bef\bfa\bau\bul\blt\bt:\b:
+ Labels the default case in a _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh statement. The
+ default should come after all _\bc_\ba_\bs_\be labels.
+
+ d\bdi\bir\brs\bs
+ Prints the directory stack; the top of the stack is at
+ the left, the first directory in the stack being the
+ current directory.
+
+ e\bec\bch\bho\bo wordlist
+ e\bec\bch\bho\bo -\b-n\bn wordlist
+ The specified words are written to the shells standard
+ output, separated by spaces, and terminated with a new-
+ line unless the -\b-n\bn option is specified.
+
+ e\bel\bls\bse\be
+ e\ben\bnd\bd
+ e\ben\bnd\bdi\bif\bf
+ e\ben\bnd\bds\bsw\bw
+ See the description of the _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh, _\bi_\bf, _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh, and
+ _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be statements below.
+
+ e\bev\bva\bal\bl arg ...
+ (As in _\bs_\bh(1).) The arguments are read as input to the
+ shell and the resulting command(s) executed in the con-
+ text of the current shell. This is usually used to
+ execute commands generated as the result of command or
+ variable substitution, since parsing occurs before
+ these substitutions. See _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt(1) for an example of
+ using _\be_\bv_\ba_\bl.
+
+ e\bex\bxe\bec\bc command
+ The specified command is executed in place of the
+ current shell.
+
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt(expr)
+ The shell exits either with the value of the _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs
+ variable (first form) or with the value of the speci-
+ fied _\be_\bx_\bp_\br (second form).
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 16
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ f\bfg\bg
+ f\bfg\bg %\b%job ...
+ Brings the current or specified jobs into the fore-
+ ground, continuing them if they were stopped.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\bre\bea\bac\bch\bh name (wordlist)
+ ...
+ e\ben\bnd\bd
+ The variable _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is successively set to each member of
+ _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt and the sequence of commands between this com-
+ mand and the matching _\be_\bn_\bd are executed. (Both _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh
+ and _\be_\bn_\bd must appear alone on separate lines.)
+
+ The builtin command _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bu_\be may be used to continue
+ the loop prematurely and the builtin command _\bb_\br_\be_\ba_\bk to
+ terminate it prematurely. When this command is read
+ from the terminal, the loop is read up once prompting
+ with `?' before any statements in the loop are exe-
+ cuted. If you make a mistake typing in a loop at the
+ terminal you can rub it out.
+
+ g\bgl\blo\bob\bb wordlist
+ Like _\be_\bc_\bh_\bo but no `\' escapes are recognized and words
+ are delimited by null characters in the output. Useful
+ for programs which wish to use the shell to filename
+ expand a list of words.
+
+ g\bgo\bot\bto\bo word
+ The specified _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is filename and command expanded to
+ yield a string of the form `label'. The shell rewinds
+ its input as much as possible and searches for a line
+ of the form `label:' possibly preceded by blanks or
+ tabs. Execution continues after the specified line.
+
+ h\bha\bas\bsh\bhs\bst\bta\bat\bt
+ Print a statistics line indicating how effective the
+ internal hash table has been at locating commands (and
+ avoiding _\be_\bx_\be_\bc's). An _\be_\bx_\be_\bc is attempted for each com-
+ ponent of the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh where the hash function indicates a
+ possible hit, and in each component which does not
+ begin with a `/'.
+
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by _\bn
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by -\b-r\br _\bn
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by -\b-h\bh _\bn
+ Displays the history event list; if _\bn is given only the
+ _\bn most recent events are printed. The -\b-r\br option rev-
+ erses the order of printout to be most recent first
+ rather than oldest first. The -\b-h\bh option causes the
+ history list to be printed without leading numbers.
+ This is used to produce files suitable for sourceing
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 17
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ using the -h option to _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be.
+
+ i\bif\bf (expr) command
+ If the specified expression evaluates true, then the
+ single _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd with arguments is executed. Variable
+ substitution on _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd happens early, at the same time
+ it does for the rest of the _\bi_\bf command. _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd must
+ be a simple command, not a pipeline, a command list, or
+ a parenthesized command list. Input/output redirection
+ occurs even if _\be_\bx_\bp_\br is false, when command is n\bno\bot\bt exe-
+ cuted (this is a bug).
+
+ i\bif\bf (expr) t\bth\bhe\ben\bn
+ ...
+ e\bel\bls\bse\be i\bif\bf (expr2) t\bth\bhe\ben\bn
+ ...
+ e\bel\bls\bse\be
+ ...
+ e\ben\bnd\bdi\bif\bf
+ If the specified _\be_\bx_\bp_\br is true then the commands to the
+ first _\be_\bl_\bs_\be are executed; otherwise if _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2 is true
+ then the commands to the second _\be_\bl_\bs_\be are executed, etc.
+ Any number of _\be_\bl_\bs_\be-_\bi_\bf pairs are possible; only one
+ _\be_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bf is needed. The _\be_\bl_\bs_\be part is likewise optional.
+ (The words _\be_\bl_\bs_\be and _\be_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bf must appear at the beginning
+ of input lines; the _\bi_\bf must appear alone on its input
+ line or after an _\be_\bl_\bs_\be.)
+
+ j\bjo\bob\bbs\bs
+ j\bjo\bob\bbs\bs -\b-l\bl
+ Lists the active jobs; given the -\b-l\bl options lists pro-
+ cess id's in addition to the normal information.
+
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl %\b%job
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl -\b-sig %\b%job ...
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl pid
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl -\b-sig pid ...
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl -\b-l\bl
+ Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the speci-
+ fied signal to the specified jobs or processes. Sig-
+ nals are either given by number or by names (as given
+ in /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bi_\bn_\bc_\bl_\bu_\bd_\be/_\bs_\bi_\bg_\bn_\ba_\bl._\bh, stripped of the prefix
+ ``SIG''). The signal names are listed by ``kill -l''.
+ There is no default, saying just `kill' does not send a
+ signal to the current job. If the signal being sent is
+ TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), then the job or pro-
+ cess will be sent a CONT (continue) signal as well.
+
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-_\bu_\bs_\be
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 18
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-_\bu_\bs_\be
+ Limits the consumption by the current process and each
+ process it creates to not individually exceed _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-
+ _\bu_\bs_\be on the specified _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be. If no _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-_\bu_\bs_\be is
+ given, then the current limit is printed; if no
+ _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be is given, then all limitations are given. If
+ the -\b-h\bh flag is given, the hard limits are used instead
+ of the current limits. The hard limits impose a ceil-
+ ing on the values of the current limits. Only the
+ super-user may raise the hard limits, but a user may
+ lower or raise the current limits within the legal
+ range.
+
+ Resources controllable currently include _\bc_\bp_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be (the
+ maximum number of cpu-seconds to be used by each pro-
+ cess), _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be (the largest single file which can be
+ created), _\bd_\ba_\bt_\ba_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be (the maximum growth of the
+ data+stack region via _\bs_\bb_\br_\bk(2) beyond the end of the
+ program text), _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bc_\bk_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be (the maximum size of the
+ automatically-extended stack region), and _\bc_\bo_\br_\be_\bd_\bu_\bm_\bp_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be
+ (the size of the largest core dump that will be
+ created).
+
+ The _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-_\bu_\bs_\be may be given as a (floating point or
+ integer) number followed by a scale factor. For all
+ limits other than _\bc_\bp_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be the default scale is `k' or
+ `kilobytes' (1024 bytes); a scale factor of `m' or
+ `megabytes' may also be used. For _\bc_\bp_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be the default
+ scaling is `seconds', while `m' for minutes or `h' for
+ hours, or a time of the form `mm:ss' giving minutes and
+ seconds may be used.
+
+ For both _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be names and scale factors, unambiguous
+ prefixes of the names suffice.
+
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn
+ Terminate a login shell, replacing it with an instance
+ of /\b/b\bbi\bin\bn/\b/l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn.\b. This is one way to log off, included for
+ compatibility with _\bs_\bh(1).
+
+ l\blo\bog\bgo\bou\but\bt
+ Terminate a login shell. Especially useful if
+ _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\be_\bo_\bf is set.
+
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be +number
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be command
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be +number command
+ The first form sets the scheduling priority for this
+ shell to 4. The second form sets the priority to the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 19
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ given number. The final two forms run command at
+ priority 4 and _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br respectively. The greater the
+ number, the less cpu the process will get. The super-
+ user may specify negative priority by using `nice
+ -number ...'. Command is always executed in a sub-
+ shell, and the restrictions placed on commands in sim-
+ ple _\bi_\bf statements apply.
+
+ n\bno\boh\bhu\bup\bp
+ n\bno\boh\bhu\bup\bp command
+ The first form can be used in shell scripts to cause
+ hangups to be ignored for the remainder of the script.
+ The second form causes the specified command to be run
+ with hangups ignored. All processes detached with `&'
+ are effectively _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp'_\be_\bd.
+
+ n\bno\bot\bti\bif\bfy\by
+ n\bno\bot\bti\bif\bfy\by %\b%job ...
+ Causes the shell to notify the user asynchronously when
+ the status of the current or specified jobs changes;
+ normally notification is presented before a prompt.
+ This is automatic if the shell variable _\bn_\bo_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by is set.
+
+ o\bon\bni\bin\bnt\btr\br
+ o\bon\bni\bin\bnt\btr\br -
+ o\bon\bni\bin\bnt\btr\br label
+ Control the action of the shell on interrupts. The
+ first form restores the default action of the shell on
+ interrupts which is to terminate shell scripts or to
+ return to the terminal command input level. The second
+ form `onintr -' causes all interrupts to be ignored.
+ The final form causes the shell to execute a `goto
+ label' when an interrupt is received or a child process
+ terminates because it was interrupted.
+
+ In any case, if the shell is running detached and
+ interrupts are being ignored, all forms of _\bo_\bn_\bi_\bn_\bt_\br have
+ no meaning and interrupts continue to be ignored by the
+ shell and all invoked commands.
+
+ p\bpo\bop\bpd\bd
+ p\bpo\bop\bpd\bd +n
+ Pops the directory stack, returning to the new top
+ directory. With an argument `+_\bn' discards the _\bnth
+ entry in the stack. The elements of the directory
+ stack are numbered from 0 starting at the top.
+
+ p\bpu\bus\bsh\bhd\bd
+ p\bpu\bus\bsh\bhd\bd name
+ p\bpu\bus\bsh\bhd\bd +n
+ With no arguments, _\bp_\bu_\bs_\bh_\bd exchanges the top two elements
+ of the directory stack. Given a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be argument, _\bp_\bu_\bs_\bh_\bd
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 20
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ changes to the new directory (ala _\bc_\bd) and pushes the
+ old current working directory (as in _\bc_\bs_\bw) onto the
+ directory stack. With a numeric argument, rotates the
+ _\bnth argument of the directory stack around to be the
+ top element and changes to it. The members of the
+ directory stack are numbered from the top starting at
+ 0.
+
+ r\bre\beh\bha\bas\bsh\bh
+ Causes the internal hash table of the contents of the
+ directories in the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh variable to be recomputed.
+ This is needed if new commands are added to directories
+ in the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh while you are logged in. This should only
+ be necessary if you add commands to one of your own
+ directories, or if a systems programmer changes the
+ contents of one of the system directories.
+
+ r\bre\bep\bpe\bea\bat\bt count command
+ The specified _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd which is subject to the same res-
+ trictions as the _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd in the one line _\bi_\bf statement
+ above, is executed _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt times. I/O redirections occur
+ exactly once, even if _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is 0.
+
+ s\bse\bet\bt
+ s\bse\bet\bt name
+ s\bse\bet\bt name=word
+ s\bse\bet\bt name[index]=word
+ s\bse\bet\bt name=(wordlist)
+ The first form of the command shows the value of all
+ shell variables. Variables which have other than a
+ single word as value print as a parenthesized word
+ list. The second form sets _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the null string.
+ The third form sets _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the single _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd. The fourth
+ form sets the _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bx'_\bt_\bh component of name to word; this
+ component must already exist. The final form sets _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ to the list of words in _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. In all cases the
+ value is command and filename expanded.
+
+ These arguments may be repeated to set multiple values
+ in a single set command. Note however, that variable
+ expansion happens for all arguments before any setting
+ occurs.
+
+ s\bse\bet\bte\ben\bnv\bv
+ s\bse\bet\bte\ben\bnv\bv name value
+ s\bse\bet\bte\ben\bnv\bv name
+ The first form lists all current environment variables.
+ The last form sets the value of environment variable
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to be _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be, a single string. The second form
+ sets _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to an empty string. The most commonly used
+ environment variable USER, TERM, and PATH are automati-
+ cally imported to and exported from the _\bc_\bs_\bh variables
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 21
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bu_\bs_\be_\br, _\bt_\be_\br_\bm, and _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh; there is no need to use _\bs_\be_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv
+ for these.
+
+ s\bsh\bhi\bif\bft\bt
+ s\bsh\bhi\bif\bft\bt variable
+ The members of _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv are shifted to the left, discarding
+ _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv[_\b1]. It is an error for _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv not to be set or to
+ have less than one word as value. The second form per-
+ forms the same function on the specified variable.
+
+ s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be name
+ s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be -\b-h\bh name
+ The shell reads commands from _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. _\bS_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be commands may
+ be nested; if they are nested too deeply the shell may
+ run out of file descriptors. An error in a _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be at
+ any level terminates all nested _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be commands. Nor-
+ mally input during _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be commands is not placed on the
+ history list; the -h option causes the commands to be
+ placed in the history list without being executed.
+
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp %\b%job ...
+ Stops the current or specified job which is executing
+ in the background.
+
+ s\bsu\bus\bsp\bpe\ben\bnd\bd
+ Causes the shell to stop in its tracks, much as if it
+ had been sent a stop signal with ^\b^Z\bZ. This is most
+ often used to stop shells started by _\bs_\bu(1).
+
+ s\bsw\bwi\bit\btc\bch\bh (string)
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be str1:
+ ...
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bks\bsw\bw
+ ...
+ d\bde\bef\bfa\bau\bul\blt\bt:\b:
+ ...
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bks\bsw\bw
+ e\ben\bnd\bds\bsw\bw
+ Each case label is successively matched, against the
+ specified _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg which is first command and filename
+ expanded. The file metacharacters `*', `?' and `[...]'
+ may be used in the case labels, which are variable
+ expanded. If none of the labels match before a
+ `default' label is found, then the execution begins
+ after the default label. Each case label and the
+ default label must appear at the beginning of a line.
+ The command _\bb_\br_\be_\ba_\bk_\bs_\bw causes execution to continue after
+ the _\be_\bn_\bd_\bs_\bw. Otherwise control may fall through case
+ labels and default labels as in C. If no label matches
+ and there is no default, execution continues after the
+ _\be_\bn_\bd_\bs_\bw.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 22
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\be
+ t\bti\bim\bme\be command
+ With no argument, a summary of time used by this shell
+ and its children is printed. If arguments are given
+ the specified simple command is timed and a time sum-
+ mary as described under the _\bt_\bi_\bm_\be variable is printed.
+ If necessary, an extra shell is created to print the
+ time statistic when the command completes.
+
+ u\bum\bma\bas\bsk\bk
+ u\bum\bma\bas\bsk\bk value
+ The file creation mask is displayed (first form) or set
+ to the specified value (second form). The mask is
+ given in octal. Common values for the mask are 002
+ giving all access to the group and read and execute
+ access to others or 022 giving all access except no
+ write access for users in the group or others.
+
+ u\bun\bna\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs pattern
+ All aliases whose names match the specified pattern are
+ discarded. Thus all aliases are removed by `unalias
+ *'. It is not an error for nothing to be _\bu_\bn_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bd.
+
+ u\bun\bnh\bha\bas\bsh\bh
+ Use of the internal hash table to speed location of
+ executed programs is disabled.
+
+ u\bun\bnl\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt
+ u\bun\bnl\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be
+ u\bun\bnl\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh
+ u\bun\bnl\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be
+ Removes the limitation on _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be. If no _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be is
+ specified, then all _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be limitations are removed.
+ If -\b-h\bh is given, the corresponding hard limits are
+ removed. Only the super-user may do this.
+
+ u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bt pattern
+ All variables whose names match the specified pattern
+ are removed. Thus all variables are removed by `unset
+ *'; this has noticeably distasteful side-effects. It
+ is not an error for nothing to be _\bu_\bn_\bs_\be_\bt.
+
+ u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bte\ben\bnv\bv pattern
+ Removes all variables whose name match the specified
+ pattern from the environment. See also the _\bs_\be_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv com-
+ mand above and _\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv(1).
+
+ w\bwa\bai\bit\bt
+ All background jobs are waited for. It the shell is
+ interactive, then an interrupt can disrupt the wait, at
+ which time the shell prints names and job numbers of
+ all jobs known to be outstanding.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 23
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be (expr)
+ ...
+ e\ben\bnd\bd
+ While the specified expression evaluates non-zero, the
+ commands between the _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be and the matching end are
+ evaluated. _\bB_\br_\be_\ba_\bk and _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bu_\be may be used to terminate
+ or continue the loop prematurely. (The _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be and _\be_\bn_\bd
+ must appear alone on their input lines.) Prompting
+ occurs here the first time through the loop as for the
+ _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh statement if the input is a terminal.
+
+ %\b%job
+ Brings the specified job into the foreground.
+
+ %\b%job &\b&
+ Continues the specified job in the background.
+
+ @\b@
+ @\b@ name = expr
+ @\b@ name[index] = expr
+ The first form prints the values of all the shell vari-
+ ables. The second form sets the specified _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the
+ value of _\be_\bx_\bp_\br. If the expression contains `<', `>', `&'
+ or `|' then at least this part of the expression must
+ be placed within `(' `)'. The third form assigns the
+ value of _\be_\bx_\bp_\br to the _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bx'_\bt_\bh argument of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. Both
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be and its _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bx'_\bt_\bh component must already exist.
+
+ The operators `*=', `+=', etc are available as in C.
+ The space separating the name from the assignment
+ operator is optional. Spaces are, however, mandatory
+ in separating components of _\be_\bx_\bp_\br which would otherwise
+ be single words.
+
+ Special postfix `++' and `--' operators increment and
+ decrement _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be respectively, i.e. `@ i++'.
+
+ P\bPr\bre\be-\b-d\bde\bef\bfi\bin\bne\bed\bd a\ban\bnd\bd e\ben\bnv\bvi\bir\bro\bon\bnm\bme\ben\bnt\bt v\bva\bar\bri\bia\bab\bbl\ble\bes\bs
+
+ The following variables have special meaning to the shell.
+ Of these, _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv, _\bc_\bw_\bd, _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be, _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh, _\bp_\br_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bt, _\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl and _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs
+ are always set by the shell. Except for _\bc_\bw_\bd and _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs this
+ setting occurs only at initialization; these variables will
+ not then be modified unless this is done explicitly by the
+ user.
+
+ This shell copies the environment variable USER into the
+ variable _\bu_\bs_\be_\br, TERM into _\bt_\be_\br_\bm, and HOME into _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be, and
+ copies these back into the environment whenever the normal
+ shell variables are reset. The environment variable PATH is
+ likewise handled; it is not necessary to worry about its
+ setting other than in the file ._\bc_\bs_\bh_\br_\bc as inferior _\bc_\bs_\bh
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 24
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ processes will import the definition of _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh from the
+ environment, and re-export it if you then change it.
+
+ a\bar\brg\bgv\bv Set to the arguments to the shell, it is from
+ this variable that positional parameters are
+ substituted, i.e. `$1' is replaced by
+ `$argv[1]', etc.
+
+ c\bcd\bdp\bpa\bat\bth\bh Gives a list of alternate directories
+ searched to find subdirectories in _\bc_\bh_\bd_\bi_\br com-
+ mands.
+
+ c\bcw\bwd\bd The full pathname of the current directory.
+
+ e\bec\bch\bho\bo Set when the -\b-x\bx command line option is given.
+ Causes each command and its arguments to be
+ echoed just before it is executed. For non-
+ builtin commands all expansions occur before
+ echoing. Builtin commands are echoed before
+ command and filename substitution, since
+ these substitutions are then done selec-
+ tively.
+
+ f\bfi\bil\ble\bec\bc Enable file name completion.
+
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\btc\bch\bha\bar\brs\bs Can be given a string value to change the
+ characters used in history substitution. The
+ first character of its value is used as the
+ history substitution character, replacing the
+ default character !. The second character of
+ its value replaces the character |\b^ in quick
+ substitutions.
+
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by Can be given a numeric value to control the
+ size of the history list. Any command which
+ has been referenced in this many events will
+ not be discarded. Too large values of _\bh_\bi_\bs_\b-
+ _\bt_\bo_\br_\by may run the shell out of memory. The
+ last executed command is always saved on the
+ history list.
+
+ h\bho\bom\bme\be The home directory of the invoker, initial-
+ ized from the environment. The filename
+ expansion of `~\b~' refers to this variable.
+
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\bee\beo\bof\bf If set the shell ignores end-of-file from
+ input devices which are terminals. This
+ prevents shells from accidentally being
+ killed by control-D's.
+
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl The files where the shell checks for mail.
+ This is done after each command completion
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 25
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ which will result in a prompt, if a specified
+ interval has elapsed. The shell says `You
+ have new mail.' if the file exists with an
+ access time not greater than its modify time.
+
+ If the first word of the value of _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl is
+ numeric it specifies a different mail check-
+ ing interval, in seconds, than the default,
+ which is 10 minutes.
+
+ If multiple mail files are specified, then
+ the shell says `New mail in _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be' when there
+ is mail in the file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+
+ n\bno\boc\bcl\blo\bob\bbb\bbe\ber\br As described in the section on _\bI_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt/_\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt,
+ restrictions are placed on output redirection
+ to insure that files are not accidentally
+ destroyed, and that `>>' redirections refer
+ to existing files.
+
+ n\bno\bog\bgl\blo\bob\bb If set, filename expansion is inhibited.
+ This is most useful in shell scripts which
+ are not dealing with filenames, or after a
+ list of filenames has been obtained and
+ further expansions are not desirable.
+
+ n\bno\bon\bno\bom\bma\bat\btc\bch\bh If set, it is not an error for a filename
+ expansion to not match any existing files;
+ rather the primitive pattern is returned. It
+ is still an error for the primitive pattern
+ to be malformed, i.e. `echo [' still gives
+ an error.
+
+ n\bno\bot\bti\bif\bfy\by If set, the shell notifies asynchronously of
+ job completions. The default is to rather
+ present job completions just before printing
+ a prompt.
+
+ p\bpa\bat\bth\bh Each word of the path variable specifies a
+ directory in which commands are to be sought
+ for execution. A null word specifies the
+ current directory. If there is no _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh vari-
+ able then only full path names will execute.
+ The usual search path is `.', `/bin' and
+ `/usr/bin', but this may vary from system to
+ system. For the super-user the default
+ search path is `/etc', `/bin' and `/usr/bin'.
+ A shell which is given neither the -\b-c\bc nor the
+ -\b-t\bt option will normally hash the contents of
+ the directories in the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh variable after
+ reading ._\bc_\bs_\bh_\br_\bc, and each time the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh vari-
+ able is reset. If new commands are added to
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 26
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ these directories while the shell is active,
+ it may be necessary to give the _\br_\be_\bh_\ba_\bs_\bh or the
+ commands may not be found.
+
+ p\bpr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bt The string which is printed before each com-
+ mand is read from an interactive terminal
+ input. If a `!' appears in the string it
+ will be replaced by the current event number
+ unless a preceding `\' is given. Default is
+ `% ', or `# ' for the super-user.
+
+ s\bsa\bav\bve\beh\bhi\bis\bst\bt is given a numeric value to control the
+ number of entries of the history list that
+ are saved in ~/.history when the user logs
+ out. Any command which has been referenced
+ in this many events will be saved. During
+ start up the shell sources ~/.history into
+ the history list enabling history to be saved
+ across logins. Too large values of _\bs_\ba_\bv_\be_\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt
+ will slow down the shell during start up.
+
+ s\bsh\bhe\bel\bll\bl The file in which the shell resides. This is
+ used in forking shells to interpret files
+ which have execute bits set, but which are
+ not executable by the system. (See the
+ description of _\bN_\bo_\bn-_\bb_\bu_\bi_\bl_\bt_\bi_\bn _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd _\bE_\bx_\be_\bc_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ below.) Initialized to the (system-dependent)
+ home of the shell.
+
+ s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs The status returned by the last command. If
+ it terminated abnormally, then 0200 is added
+ to the status. Builtin commands which fail
+ return exit status `1', all other builtin
+ commands set status `0'.
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\be Controls automatic timing of commands. If
+ set, then any command which takes more than
+ this many cpu seconds will cause a line giv-
+ ing user, system, and real times and a utili-
+ zation percentage which is the ratio of user
+ plus system times to real time to be printed
+ when it terminates.
+
+ v\bve\ber\brb\bbo\bos\bse\be Set by the -\b-v\bv command line option, causes the
+ words of each command to be printed after
+ history substitution.
+
+ N\bNo\bon\bn-\b-b\bbu\bui\bil\blt\bti\bin\bn c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd e\bex\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ When a command to be executed is found to not be a builtin
+ command the shell attempts to execute the command via
+ _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2). Each word in the variable _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh names a directory
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 27
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ from which the shell will attempt to execute the command.
+ If it is given neither a -\b-c\bc nor a -\b-t\bt option, the shell will
+ hash the names in these directories into an internal table
+ so that it will only try an _\be_\bx_\be_\bc in a directory if there is
+ a possibility that the command resides there. This greatly
+ speeds command location when a large number of directories
+ are present in the search path. If this mechanism has been
+ turned off (via _\bu_\bn_\bh_\ba_\bs_\bh), or if the shell was given a -\b-c\bc or
+ -\b-t\bt argument, and in any case for each directory component of
+ _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh which does not begin with a `/', the shell concatenates
+ with the given command name to form a path name of a file
+ which it then attempts to execute.
+
+ Parenthesized commands are always executed in a subshell.
+ Thus `(cd ; pwd) ; pwd' prints the _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be directory; leaving
+ you where you were (printing this after the home directory),
+ while `cd ; pwd' leaves you in the _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be directory.
+ Parenthesized commands are most often used to prevent _\bc_\bh_\bd_\bi_\br
+ from affecting the current shell.
+
+ If the file has execute permissions but is not an executable
+ binary to the system, then it is assumed to be a file con-
+ taining shell commands and a new shell is spawned to read
+ it.
+
+ If there is an _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs for _\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl then the words of the alias
+ will be prepended to the argument list to form the shell
+ command. The first word of the _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs should be the full
+ path name of the shell (e.g. `$shell'). Note that this is a
+ special, late occurring, case of _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs substitution, and
+ only allows words to be prepended to the argument list
+ without modification.
+
+ A\bAr\brg\bgu\bum\bme\ben\bnt\bt l\bli\bis\bst\bt p\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bes\bss\bsi\bin\bng\bg
+
+ If argument 0 to the shell is `-' then this is a login
+ shell. The flag arguments are interpreted as follows:
+
+ -\b-b\bb This flag forces a ``break'' from option processing,
+ causing any further shell arguments to be treated as
+ non-option arguments. The remaining arguments will not
+ be interpreted as shell options. This may be used to
+ pass options to a shell script without confusion or
+ possible subterfuge. The shell will not run a set-user
+ ID script without this option.
+
+ -\b-c\bc Commands are read from the (single) following argument
+ which must be present. Any remaining arguments are
+ placed in _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv.
+
+ -\b-e\be The shell exits if any invoked command terminates
+ abnormally or yields a non-zero exit status.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 28
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-f\bf The shell will start faster, because it will neither
+ search for nor execute commands from the file `.cshrc'
+ in the invoker's home directory.
+
+ -\b-i\bi The shell is interactive and prompts for its top-level
+ input, even if it appears to not be a terminal. Shells
+ are interactive without this option if their inputs and
+ outputs are terminals.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Commands are parsed, but not executed. This aids in
+ syntactic checking of shell scripts.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Command input is taken from the standard input.
+
+ -\b-t\bt A single line of input is read and executed. A `\' may
+ be used to escape the newline at the end of this line
+ and continue onto another line.
+
+ -\b-v\bv Causes the _\bv_\be_\br_\bb_\bo_\bs_\be variable to be set, with the effect
+ that command input is echoed after history substitu-
+ tion.
+
+ -\b-x\bx Causes the _\be_\bc_\bh_\bo variable to be set, so that commands
+ are echoed immediately before execution.
+
+ -\b-V\bV Causes the _\bv_\be_\br_\bb_\bo_\bs_\be variable to be set even before
+ `.cshrc' is executed.
+
+ -\b-X\bX Is to -\b-x\bx as -\b-V\bV is to -\b-v\bv.\b.
+
+ After processing of flag arguments, if arguments remain but
+ none of the -\b-c\bc,\b, -\b-i\bi,\b, -\b-s\bs,\b, or -\b-t\bt options was given, the first
+ argument is taken as the name of a file of commands to be
+ executed. The shell opens this file, and saves its name for
+ possible resubstitution by `$0'. Since many systems use
+ either the standard version 6 or version 7 shells whose
+ shell scripts are not compatible with this shell, the shell
+ will execute such a `standard' shell if the first character
+ of a script is not a `#', i.e. if the script does not start
+ with a comment. Remaining arguments initialize the variable
+ _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv.
+
+ S\bSi\big\bgn\bna\bal\bl h\bha\ban\bnd\bdl\bli\bin\bng\bg
+
+ The shell normally ignores _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt signals. Jobs running
+ detached (either by `&' or the _\bb_\bg or %\b%.\b..\b..\b. &\b& commands) are
+ immune to signals generated from the keyboard, including
+ hangups. Other signals have the values which the shell
+ inherited from its parent. The shells handling of inter-
+ rupts and terminate signals in shell scripts can be con-
+ trolled by _\bo_\bn_\bi_\bn_\bt_\br. Login shells catch the _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bt_\be signal;
+ otherwise this signal is passed on to children from the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 29
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ state in the shell's parent. In no case are interrupts
+ allowed when a login shell is reading the file `.logout'.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ William Joy. Job control and directory stack features first
+ implemented by J.E. Kulp of I.I.A.S.A, Laxenburg, Austria,
+ with different syntax than that used now. File name comple-
+ tion code written by Ken Greer, HP Labs.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ ~/.cshrc Read at beginning of execution by each shell.
+ ~/.login Read by login shell, after `.cshrc' at login.
+ ~/.logout Read by login shell, at logout.
+ /bin/sh Standard shell, for shell scripts not starting with a `#'.
+ /tmp/sh* Temporary file for `<<'.
+ /etc/passwd Source of home directories for `~name'.
+
+L\bLI\bIM\bMI\bIT\bTA\bAT\bTI\bIO\bON\bNS\bS
+ Words can be no longer than 1024 characters. The system
+ limits argument lists to 10240 characters. The number of
+ arguments to a command which involves filename expansion is
+ limited to 1/6'th the number of characters allowed in an
+ argument list. Command substitutions may substitute no more
+ characters than are allowed in an argument list. To detect
+ looping, the shell restricts the number of _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs substitu-
+ tions on a single line to 20.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1), access(2), execve(2), fork(2), killpg(2), pipe(2),
+ sigvec(2), umask(2), setrlimit(2), wait(2), tty(4),
+ a.out(5), environ(7), `An introduction to the C shell'
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ When a command is restarted from a stop, the shell prints
+ the directory it started in if this is different from the
+ current directory; this can be misleading (i.e. wrong) as
+ the job may have changed directories internally.
+
+ Shell builtin functions are not stoppable/restartable. Com-
+ mand sequences of the form `a ; b ; c' are also not handled
+ gracefully when stopping is attempted. If you suspend `b',
+ the shell will then immediately execute `c'. This is espe-
+ cially noticeable if this expansion results from an _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs.
+ It suffices to place the sequence of commands in ()'s to
+ force it to a subshell, i.e. `( a ; b ; c )'.
+
+ Control over tty output after processes are started is prim-
+ itive; perhaps this will inspire someone to work on a good
+ virtual terminal interface. In a virtual terminal interface
+ much more interesting things could be done with output con-
+ trol.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 30
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ Alias substitution is most often used to clumsily simulate
+ shell procedures; shell procedures should be provided rather
+ than aliases.
+
+ Commands within loops, prompted for by `?', are not placed
+ in the _\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bo_\br_\by list. Control structure should be parsed
+ rather than being recognized as built-in commands. This
+ would allow control commands to be placed anywhere, to be
+ combined with `|', and to be used with `&' and `;' metasyn-
+ tax.
+
+ It should be possible to use the `:' modifiers on the output
+ of command substitutions. All and more than one `:' modif-
+ ier should be allowed on `$' substitutions.
+
+ The way the f\bfi\bil\ble\bec\bc facility is implemented is ugly and expen-
+ sive.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 31
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CTAGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CTAGS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ctags - create a tags file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bct\bta\bag\bgs\bs [ -\b-B\bBF\bFa\bad\bdt\btu\buw\bwv\bvx\bx ] [ -\b-f\bf _\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ] name ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs makes a tags file for _\be_\bx(1) from the specified C, Pas-
+ cal, Fortran, YACC, lex, and lisp sources. A tags file
+ gives the locations of specified objects in a group of
+ files. Each line of the tags file contains the object name,
+ the file in which it is defined, and a search pattern for
+ the object definition, separated by white-space. Using the
+ _\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs file, _\be_\bx(1) can quickly locate these object defini-
+ tions. Depending on the options provided to _\bc_\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs, objects
+ will consist of subroutines, typedefs, defines, structs,
+ enums and unions.
+
+ Yacc and lex files each have a special tag. _\bY_\by_\bp_\ba_\br_\bs_\be is the
+ start of the second section of the yacc file, and _\by_\by_\bl_\be_\bx is
+ the start of the second section of the lex file.
+
+ If the -\b-x\bx flag is given, _\bc_\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs produces a list of object
+ names, the line number and file name on which each is
+ defined, as well as the text of that line and prints this on
+ the standard output. This is a simple index which can be
+ printed out as an off-line readable function index.
+
+ If the -\b-v\bv flag is given, an index of the form expected by
+ _\bv_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd(1) is produced on the standard output. This listing
+ contains the object name, file name, and page number (assum-
+ ing 64 line pages). Since the output will be sorted into
+ lexicographic order, it may be desired to run the output
+ through s\bso\bor\brt\bt -\b-f\bf. Sample use:
+ ctags -v files | sort -f > index
+ vgrind -x index
+
+ Normally _\bc_\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs places the tag descriptions in a file called
+ _\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs; this may be overridden with the -\b-f\bf option.
+
+ Files whose names end in .\b.c\bc or .\b.h\bh are assumed to be C source
+ files and are searched for C style routine and macro defini-
+ tions. Files whose names end in .\b.y\by are assumed to be YACC
+ source files. Files whose names end in .\b.l\bl are assumed to be
+ lisp files if their first non-blank character is `;', `(',
+ or `[', otherwise, they are treated as lex files. Other
+ files are first examined to see if they contain any Pascal
+ or Fortran routine definitions, and, if not, are searched
+ for C style definitions.
+
+ Other options are:
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 16, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CTAGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CTAGS(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-F\bF use forward searching patterns (/.../) (the default).
+
+ -\b-B\bB use backward searching patterns (?...?).
+
+ -\b-a\ba append to _\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs file.
+
+ -\b-d\bd create tags for #_\bd_\be_\bf_\bi_\bn_\be_\bs that don't take arguments;
+ #_\bd_\be_\bf_\bi_\bn_\be_\bs that take arguments are tagged automatically.
+
+ -\b-t\bt create tags for typedefs, structs, unions, and enums.
+
+ -\b-w\bw suppress warning diagnostics.
+
+ -\b-u\bu update the specified files in the _\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs file, that is,
+ all references to them are deleted, and the new values
+ are appended to the file. (Beware: this option is
+ implemented in a way which is rather slow; it is usu-
+ ally faster to simply rebuild the _\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs file.)
+
+ The tag _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bn is treated specially in C programs. The tag
+ formed is created by prepending _\bM to the name of the file,
+ with the trailing .\b.c\bc and any leading pathname components
+ removed. This makes use of _\bc_\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs practical in directories
+ with more than one program.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ tags default output tags file
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ _\bC_\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs exits with a value of 1 if an error occurred, where
+ duplicate objects are not considered errors, 0 otherwise.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ex(1), vi(1)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Ken Arnold; FORTRAN added by Jim Kleckner; Bill Joy added
+ Pascal and -\b-x\bx, replacing _\bc_\bx_\br_\be_\bf; C typedefs added by Ed
+ Pelegri-Llopart.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Recognition of f\bfu\bun\bnc\bct\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs, s\bsu\bub\bbr\bro\bou\but\bti\bin\bne\bes\bs and p\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bed\bdu\bur\bre\bes\bs for
+ FORTRAN and Pascal is done is a very simpleminded way. No
+ attempt is made to deal with block structure; if you have
+ two Pascal procedures in different blocks with the same name
+ you lose. _\bC_\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs doesn't understand about Pascal types.
+
+ The method of deciding whether to look for C, Pascal or FOR-
+ TRAN functions is a hack.
+
+ _\bC_\bt_\ba_\bg_\bs relies on the input being well formed, and any syntac-
+ tical errors will completely confuse it. It also finds some
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 16, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CTAGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CTAGS(1)
+
+
+
+ legal syntax confusing; for example, as it doesn't under-
+ stand #_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf's, (incidentally, that's a feature, not a bug)
+ any code with unbalanced braces inside #_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf's will cause
+ it to become somewhat disoriented. In a similar fashion,
+ multiple line changes within a definition will cause it to
+ enter the last line of the object, rather than the first, as
+ the searching pattern. The last line of multiple line
+ _\bt_\by_\bp_\be_\bd_\be_\bf's will similarly be noted.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 16, 1987 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tip, cu - connect to a remote system
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bti\bip\bp [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-_\bs_\bp_\be_\be_\bd ] system-name
+ t\bti\bip\bp [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-_\bs_\bp_\be_\be_\bd ] phone-number
+ c\bcu\bu phone-number [ -\b-t\bt ] [ -\b-s\bs _\bs_\bp_\be_\be_\bd ] [ -\b-a\ba _\ba_\bc_\bu ] [ -\b-l\bl _\bl_\bi_\bn_\be ]
+ [ -\b-#\b# ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bi_\bp and _\bc_\bu establish a full-duplex connection to another
+ machine, giving the appearance of being logged in directly
+ on the remote cpu. It goes without saying that you must
+ have a login on the machine (or equivalent) to which you
+ wish to connect. The preferred interface is _\bt_\bi_\bp. The _\bc_\bu
+ interface is included for those people attached to the
+ ``call UNIX'' command of version 7. This manual page
+ describes only _\bt_\bi_\bp.
+
+ Typed characters are normally transmitted directly to the
+ remote machine (which does the echoing as well). A tilde
+ (`~') appearing as the first character of a line is an
+ escape signal; the following are recognized:
+
+ ~\b~^\b^D\bD ~\b~.\b. Drop the connection and exit (you may still be
+ logged in on the remote machine).
+
+ ~\b~c\bc [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Change directory to name (no argument implies
+ change to your home directory).
+
+ ~\b~!\b! Escape to a shell (exiting the shell will return
+ you to tip).
+
+ ~\b~>\b> Copy file from local to remote. _\bT_\bi_\bp prompts for
+ the name of a local file to transmit.
+
+ ~\b~<\b< Copy file from remote to local. _\bT_\bi_\bp prompts first
+ for the name of the file to be sent, then for a
+ command to be executed on the remote machine.
+
+ ~\b~p\bp _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm [ _\bt_\bo ]
+ Send a file to a remote UNIX host. The put com-
+ mand causes the remote UNIX system to run the com-
+ mand string ``cat > 'to''', while _\bt_\bi_\bp sends it the
+ ``from'' file. If the ``to'' file isn't specified
+ the ``from'' file name is used. This command is
+ actually a UNIX specific version of the ``~>''
+ command.
+
+ ~\b~t\bt _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm [ _\bt_\bo ]
+ Take a file from a remote UNIX host. As in the put
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ command the ``to'' file defaults to the ``from''
+ file name if it isn't specified. The remote host
+ executes the command string ``cat 'from';echo ^A''
+ to send the file to _\bt_\bi_\bp.
+
+ ~\b~|\b| Pipe the output from a remote command to a local
+ UNIX process. The command string sent to the
+ local UNIX system is processed by the shell.
+
+ ~\b~$\b$ Pipe the output from a local UNIX process to the
+ remote host. The command string sent to the local
+ UNIX system is processed by the shell.
+
+ ~\b~#\b# Send a BREAK to the remote system. For systems
+ which don't support the necessary _\bi_\bo_\bc_\bt_\bl call the
+ break is simulated by a sequence of line speed
+ changes and DEL characters.
+
+ ~\b~s\bs Set a variable (see the discussion below).
+
+ ~\b~^\b^Z\bZ Stop _\bt_\bi_\bp (only available with job control).
+
+ ~\b~^\b^Y\bY Stop only the ``local side'' of _\bt_\bi_\bp (only avail-
+ able with job control); the ``remote side'' of
+ _\bt_\bi_\bp, the side that displays output from the remote
+ host, is left running.
+
+ ~\b~?\b? Get a summary of the tilde escapes
+
+
+ _\bT_\bi_\bp uses the file /etc/remote to find how to reach a partic-
+ ular system and to find out how it should operate while
+ talking to the system; refer to _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be(5) for a full
+ description. Each system has a default baud rate with which
+ to establish a connection. If this value is not suitable,
+ the baud rate to be used may be specified on the command
+ line, e.g. ``tip -300 mds''.
+
+ When _\bt_\bi_\bp establishes a connection it sends out a connection
+ message to the remote system; the default value, if any, is
+ defined in /etc/remote.
+
+ When _\bt_\bi_\bp prompts for an argument (e.g. during setup of a
+ file transfer) the line typed may be edited with the stan-
+ dard erase and kill characters. A null line in response to
+ a prompt, or an interrupt, will abort the dialogue and
+ return you to the remote machine.
+
+ _\bT_\bi_\bp guards against multiple users connecting to a remote
+ system by opening modems and terminal lines with exclusive
+ access, and by honoring the locking protocol used by
+ _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp(1C).
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ During file transfers _\bt_\bi_\bp provides a running count of the
+ number of lines transferred. When using the ~> and ~< com-
+ mands, the ``eofread'' and ``eofwrite'' variables are used
+ to recognize end-of-file when reading, and specify end-of-
+ file when writing (see below). File transfers normally
+ depend on tandem mode for flow control. If the remote sys-
+ tem does not support tandem mode, ``echocheck'' may be set
+ to indicate _\bt_\bi_\bp should synchronize with the remote system on
+ the echo of each transmitted character.
+
+ When _\bt_\bi_\bp must dial a phone number to connect to a system it
+ will print various messages indicating its actions. _\bT_\bi_\bp
+ supports the DEC DN-11 and Racal-Vadic 831 auto-call-units;
+ the DEC DF02 and DF03, Ventel 212+, Racal-Vadic 3451, and
+ Bizcomp 1031 and 1032 integral call unit/modems.
+
+ V\bVA\bAR\bRI\bIA\bAB\bBL\bLE\bES\bS
+
+ _\bT_\bi_\bp maintains a set of _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be_\bs which control its opera-
+ tion. Some of these variable are read-only to normal users
+ (root is allowed to change anything of interest). Variables
+ may be displayed and set through the ``s'' escape. The syn-
+ tax for variables is patterned after _\bv_\bi(1) and _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl(1).
+ Supplying ``all'' as an argument to the set command displays
+ all variables readable by the user. Alternatively, the user
+ may request display of a particular variable by attaching a
+ `?' to the end. For example ``escape?'' displays the
+ current escape character.
+
+ Variables are numeric, string, character, or boolean values.
+ Boolean variables are set merely by specifying their name;
+ they may be reset by prepending a `!' to the name. Other
+ variable types are set by concatenating an `=' and the
+ value. The entire assignment must not have any blanks in
+ it. A single set command may be used to interrogate as well
+ as set a number of variables. Variables may be initialized
+ at run time by placing set commands (without the ``~s'' pre-
+ fix in a file ._\bt_\bi_\bp_\br_\bc in one's home directory). The -\b-v\bv
+ option causes _\bt_\bi_\bp to display the sets as they are made.
+ Certain common variables have abbreviations. The following
+ is a list of common variables, their abbreviations, and
+ their default values.
+
+ b\bbe\bea\bau\but\bti\bif\bfy\by
+ (bool) Discard unprintable characters when a session is
+ being scripted; abbreviated _\bb_\be.
+
+ b\bba\bau\bud\bdr\bra\bat\bte\be
+ (num) The baud rate at which the connection was esta-
+ blished; abbreviated _\bb_\ba.
+
+ d\bdi\bia\bal\blt\bti\bim\bme\beo\bou\but\bt
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ (num) When dialing a phone number, the time (in
+ seconds) to wait for a connection to be established;
+ abbreviated _\bd_\bi_\ba_\bl.
+
+ e\bec\bch\bho\boc\bch\bhe\bec\bck\bk
+ (bool) Synchronize with the remote host during file
+ transfer by waiting for the echo of the last character
+ transmitted; default is _\bo_\bf_\bf.
+
+ e\beo\bof\bfr\bre\bea\bad\bd
+ (str) The set of characters which signify and end-of-
+ tranmission during a ~< file transfer command; abbrevi-
+ ated _\be_\bo_\bf_\br.
+
+ e\beo\bof\bfw\bwr\bri\bit\bte\be
+ (str) The string sent to indicate end-of-transmission
+ during a ~> file transfer command; abbreviated _\be_\bo_\bf_\bw.
+
+ e\beo\bol\bl
+ (str) The set of characters which indicate an end-of-
+ line. _\bT_\bi_\bp will recognize escape characters only after
+ an end-of-line.
+
+ e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be
+ (char) The command prefix (escape) character; abbrevi-
+ ated _\be_\bs; default value is `~'.
+
+ e\bex\bxc\bce\bep\bpt\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs
+ (str) The set of characters which should not be dis-
+ carded due to the beautification switch; abbreviated
+ _\be_\bx; default value is ``\t\n\f\b''.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\brc\bce\be
+ (char) The character used to force literal data
+ transmission; abbreviated _\bf_\bo; default value is `^P'.
+
+ f\bfr\bra\bam\bme\bes\bsi\biz\bze\be
+ (num) The amount of data (in bytes) to buffer between
+ file system writes when receiving files; abbreviated
+ _\bf_\br.
+
+ h\bho\bos\bst\bt
+ (str) The name of the host to which you are connected;
+ abbreviated _\bh_\bo.
+
+ p\bpr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bt
+ (char) The character which indicates and end-of-line on
+ the remote host; abbreviated _\bp_\br; default value is `\n'.
+ This value is used to synchronize during data
+ transfers. The count of lines transferred during a
+ file transfer command is based on recipt of this char-
+ acter.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ r\bra\bai\bis\bse\be
+ (bool) Upper case mapping mode; abbreviated _\br_\ba; default
+ value is _\bo_\bf_\bf. When this mode is enabled, all lower
+ case letters will be mapped to upper case by _\bt_\bi_\bp for
+ transmission to the remote machine.
+
+ r\bra\bai\bis\bse\bec\bch\bha\bar\br
+ (char) The input character used to toggle upper case
+ mapping mode; abbreviated _\br_\bc; default value is `^A'.
+
+ r\bre\bec\bco\bor\brd\bd
+ (str) The name of the file in which a session script is
+ recorded; abbreviated _\br_\be_\bc; default value is
+ ``tip.record''.
+
+ s\bsc\bcr\bri\bip\bpt\bt
+ (bool) Session scripting mode; abbreviated _\bs_\bc; default
+ is _\bo_\bf_\bf. When _\bs_\bc_\br_\bi_\bp_\bt is _\bt_\br_\bu_\be, _\bt_\bi_\bp will record every-
+ thing transmitted by the remote machine in the script
+ record file specified in _\br_\be_\bc_\bo_\br_\bd. If the _\bb_\be_\ba_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by
+ switch is on, only printable ASCII characters will be
+ included in the script file (those characters betwee
+ 040 and 0177). The variable _\be_\bx_\bc_\be_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs is used to
+ indicate characters which are an exception to the nor-
+ mal beautification rules.
+
+ t\bta\bab\bbe\bex\bxp\bpa\ban\bnd\bd
+ (bool) Expand tabs to spaces during file transfers;
+ abbreviated _\bt_\ba_\bb; default value is _\bf_\ba_\bl_\bs_\be. Each tab is
+ expanded to 8 spaces.
+
+ v\bve\ber\brb\bbo\bos\bse\be
+ (bool) Verbose mode; abbreviated _\bv_\be_\br_\bb; default is _\bt_\br_\bu_\be.
+ When verbose mode is enabled, _\bt_\bi_\bp prints messages while
+ dialing, shows the current number of lines transferred
+ during a file transfer operations, and more.
+
+ S\bSH\bHE\bEL\bLL\bL
+ (str) The name of the shell to use for the ~! command;
+ default value is ``/bin/sh'', or taken from the
+ environment.
+
+ H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE
+ (str) The home directory to use for the ~c command;
+ default value is taken from the environment.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/remote global system descriptions
+ /etc/phones global phone number data base
+ ${REMOTE} private system descriptions
+ ${PHONES} private phone numbers
+ ~/.tiprc initialization file.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ /usr/spool/uucp/LCK..* lock file to avoid conflicts with _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Diagnostics are, hopefully, self explanatory.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ remote(5), phones(5)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The full set of variables is undocumented and should, prob-
+ ably, be paired down.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DATE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DATE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ date - print and set the date
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bda\bat\bte\be [-nu] [-d dst] [-t minutes_west] [yymmddhhmm [.\b.ss] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ If no arguments are given, the current date and time are
+ printed. Providing an argument will set the desired date;
+ only the superuser can set the date. The -_\bd and -_\bt flags set
+ the kernel's values for daylight savings time and minutes
+ west of GMT. If _\bd_\bs_\bt is non-zero, future calls to _\bg_\be_\bt_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be_\bo_\bf_\b-
+ _\bd_\ba_\by(2) will return a non-zero _\bt_\bz__\bd_\bs_\bt_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be. _\bM_\bi_\bn_\bu_\bt_\be_\bs__\bw_\be_\bs_\bt pro-
+ vides the number of minutes returned by future calls to _\bg_\be_\bt_\b-
+ _\bt_\bi_\bm_\be_\bo_\bf_\bd_\ba_\by(2) in _\bt_\bz__\bm_\bi_\bn_\bu_\bt_\be_\bs_\bw_\be_\bs_\bt. The -_\bu flag is used to
+ display or set the date in GMT (universal) time. _\by_\by
+ represents the last two digits of the year; the first _\bm_\bm is
+ the month number; _\bd_\bd is the day number; _\bh_\bh is the hour
+ number (24 hour system); the second _\bm_\bm is the minute number;
+ .\b._\bs_\bs is optional and represents the seconds. For example:
+
+ date 8506131627
+
+ sets the date to June 13 1985, 4:27 PM. The year, month and
+ day may be omitted; the default values will be the current
+ ones. The system operates in GMT. _\bD_\ba_\bt_\be takes care of the
+ conversion to and from local standard and daylight-saving
+ time.
+
+ If _\bt_\bi_\bm_\be_\bd(_\b8) is running to synchronize the clocks of machines
+ in a local area network, _\bd_\ba_\bt_\be sets the time globally on all
+ those machines unless the -\b-n\bn option is given.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/adm/wtmp to record time-setting. In /usr/adm/messages,
+ _\bd_\ba_\bt_\be records the name of the user setting the time.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ gettimeofday(2), utmp(5), timed(8),
+ _\bT_\bS_\bP: _\bT_\bh_\be _\bT_\bi_\bm_\be _\bS_\by_\bn_\bc_\bh_\br_\bo_\bn_\bi_\bz_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bP_\br_\bo_\bt_\bo_\bc_\bo_\bl _\bf_\bo_\br _\bU_\bN_\bI_\bX _\b4._\b3_\bB_\bS_\bD, R.
+ Gusella and S. Zatti
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Exit status is 0 on success, 1 on complete failure to set
+ the date, and 2 on successfully setting the local date but
+ failing globally.
+
+ Occasionally, when _\bt_\bi_\bm_\be_\bd synchronizes the time on many
+ hosts, the setting of a new time value may require more than
+ a few seconds. On these occasions, _\bd_\ba_\bt_\be prints: `Network
+ time being set'. The message `Communication error with
+ timed' occurs when the communication between _\bd_\ba_\bt_\be and _\bt_\bi_\bm_\be_\bd
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 1, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DATE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DATE(1)
+
+
+
+ fails.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The system attempts to keep the date in a format closely
+ compatible with VMS. VMS, however, uses local time (rather
+ than GMT) and does not understand daylight-saving time.
+ Thus, if you use both UNIX and VMS, VMS will be running on
+ GMT.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 1, 1987 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ dbx - debugger
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdb\bbx\bx [ -\b-r\br ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-k\bk ] [ -\b-I\bI _\bd_\bi_\br ] [ -\b-c\bc _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ] [ _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be [
+ _\bc_\bo_\br_\be_\bd_\bu_\bm_\bp ]]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\bb_\bx is a tool for source level debugging and execution of
+ programs under UNIX. The _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is an object file produced
+ by a compiler with the appropriate flag (usually ``-g'')
+ specified to produce symbol information in the object file.
+ Currently, _\bc_\bc(1), _\bf_\b7_\b7(1), _\bp_\bc(1), and the DEC Western
+ Research Laboratory Modula-2 compiler, _\bm_\bo_\bd(l), produce the
+ appropriate source information. The machine level facili-
+ ties of _\bd_\bb_\bx can be used on any program.
+
+ The object file contains a symbol table that includes the
+ name of the all the source files translated by the compiler
+ to create it. These files are available for perusal while
+ using the debugger.
+
+ If a file named ``core'' exists in the current directory or
+ a _\bc_\bo_\br_\be_\bd_\bu_\bm_\bp file is specified, _\bd_\bb_\bx can be used to examine the
+ state of the program when it faulted.
+
+ If the file ``.dbxinit'' exists in the current directory
+ then the debugger commands in it are executed. _\bD_\bb_\bx also
+ checks for a ``.dbxinit'' in the user's home directory if
+ there isn't one in the current directory.
+
+ The command line options and their meanings are:
+
+ -\b-r\br Execute _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be immediately. If it terminates suc-
+ cessfully _\bd_\bb_\bx exits. Otherwise the reason for ter-
+ mination will be reported and the user offered the
+ option of entering the debugger or letting the pro-
+ gram fault. _\bD_\bb_\bx will read from ``/dev/tty'' when -\b-r\br
+ is specified and standard input is not a terminal.
+
+ -\b-i\bi Force _\bd_\bb_\bx to act as though standard input is a ter-
+ minal.
+
+ -\b-k\bk Map memory addresses, useful for kernel debugging.
+
+ -\b-I\bI _\bd_\bi_\br Add _\bd_\bi_\br to the list of directories that are searched
+ when looking for a source file. Normally _\bd_\bb_\bx looks
+ for source files in the current directory and in the
+ directory where _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is located. The directory
+ search path can also be set with the u\bus\bse\be command.
+
+ -\b-c\bc _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be Execute the _\bd_\bb_\bx commands in the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be before reading
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1)
+
+
+
+ from standard input.
+
+
+ Unless -\b-r\br is specified, _\bd_\bb_\bx just prompts and waits for a
+ command.
+
+ E\bEx\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn a\ban\bnd\bd T\bTr\bra\bac\bci\bin\bng\bg C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs
+
+
+ r\bru\bun\bn [_\ba_\br_\bg_\bs] [<\b< _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be] [>\b> _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ r\bre\ber\bru\bun\bn [_\ba_\br_\bg_\bs] [<\b< _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be] [>\b> _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Start executing _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be, passing _\ba_\br_\bg_\bs as command line
+ arguments; <\b< or >\b> can be used to redirect input or out-
+ put in the usual manner. When r\bre\ber\bru\bun\bn is used without
+ any arguments the previous argument list is passed to
+ the program; otherwise it is identical to r\bru\bun\bn. If
+ _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be has been written since the last time the sym-
+ bolic information was read in, _\bd_\bb_\bx will read in the new
+ information.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be [i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn [i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn a\bat\bt _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be [i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ Have tracing information printed when the program is
+ executed. A number is associated with the command that
+ is used to turn the tracing off (see the d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be com-
+ mand).
+
+ The first argument describes what is to be traced. If
+ it is a _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br, then the line is printed
+ immediately prior to being executed. Source line
+ numbers in a file other than the current one must be
+ preceded by the name of the file in quotes and a colon,
+ e.g. "mumble.p":17.
+
+ If the argument is a procedure or function name then
+ every time it is called, information is printed telling
+ what routine called it, from what source line it was
+ called, and what parameters were passed to it. In
+ addition, its return is noted, and if it's a function
+ then the value it is returning is also printed.
+
+ If the argument is an _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn with an a\bat\bt clause then
+ the value of the expression is printed whenever the
+ identified source line is reached.
+
+ If the argument is a variable then the name and value
+ of the variable is printed whenever it changes. Execu-
+ tion is substantially slower during this form of trac-
+ ing.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1)
+
+
+
+ If no argument is specified then all source lines are
+ printed before they are executed. Execution is sub-
+ stantially slower during this form of tracing.
+
+ The clause ``i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn'' restricts tracing
+ information to be printed only while executing inside
+ the given procedure or function.
+
+ _\bC_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn is a boolean expression and is evaluated
+ prior to printing the tracing information; if it is
+ false then the information is not printed.
+
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp a\bat\bt _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ Stop execution when the given line is reached, pro-
+ cedure or function called, variable changed, or condi-
+ tion true.
+
+ s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs [>\b> _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Print out the currently active t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be and s\bst\bto\bop\bp commands.
+
+ d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br ...
+ The traces or stops corresponding to the given numbers
+ are removed. The numbers associated with traces and
+ stops are printed by the s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs command.
+
+ c\bca\bat\btc\bch\bh _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br
+ c\bca\bat\btc\bch\bh _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bn_\ba_\bl-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bn_\ba_\bl-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Start or stop trapping a signal before it is sent to
+ the program. This is useful when a program being
+ debugged handles signals such as interrupts. A signal
+ may be specified by number or by a name (e.g., SIGINT).
+ Signal names are case insensitive and the ``SIG'' pre-
+ fix is optional. By default all signals are trapped
+ except SIGCONT, SIGCHILD, SIGALRM and SIGKILL.
+
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bt _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\bg_\be_\br
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bt _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bn_\ba_\bl-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Continue execution from where it stopped. If a signal
+ is specified, the process continues as though it
+ received the signal. Otherwise, the process is contin-
+ ued as though it had not been stopped.
+
+ Execution cannot be continued if the process has ``fin-
+ ished'', that is, called the standard procedure ``exit''.
+ _\bD_\bb_\bx does not allow the process to exit, thereby letting the
+ user to examine the program state.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1)
+
+
+
+ s\bst\bte\bep\bp Execute one source line.
+
+ n\bne\bex\bxt\bt Execute up to the next source line. The difference
+ between this and s\bst\bte\bep\bp is that if the line contains a
+ call to a procedure or function the s\bst\bte\bep\bp command will
+ stop at the beginning of that block, while the n\bne\bex\bxt\bt
+ command will not.
+
+ r\bre\bet\btu\bur\brn\bn [_\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be]
+ Continue until a return to _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be is executed, or
+ until the current procedure returns if none is speci-
+ fied.
+
+ c\bca\bal\bll\bl _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be(_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs)
+ Execute the object code associated with the named pro-
+ cedure or function.
+
+
+ P\bPr\bri\bin\bnt\bti\bin\bng\bg V\bVa\bar\bri\bia\bab\bbl\ble\bes\bs a\ban\bnd\bd E\bEx\bxp\bpr\bre\bes\bss\bsi\bio\bon\bns\bs
+
+
+ Names are resolved first using the static scope of the
+ current function, then using the dynamic scope if the name
+ is not defined in the static scope. If static and dynamic
+ searches do not yield a result, an arbitrary symbol is
+ chosen and the message ``[using _\bq_\bu_\ba_\bl_\bi_\bf_\bi_\be_\bd _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]'' is
+ printed. The name resolution procedure may be overridden by
+ qualifying an identifier with a block name, e.g.,
+ ``_\bm_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bl_\be._\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be''. For C, source files are treated as
+ modules named by the file name without ``.c''.
+
+ Expressions are specified with an approximately common sub-
+ set of C and Pascal (or equivalently Modula-2) syntax.
+ Indirection can be denoted using either a prefix ``*'' or a
+ postfix ``^'' and array expressions are subscripted by
+ brackets (``[ ]''). The field reference operator (``.'')
+ can be used with pointers as well as records, making the C
+ operator ``->'' unnecessary (although it is supported).
+
+ Types of expressions are checked; the type of an expression
+ may be overridden by using ``_\bt_\by_\bp_\be-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be(_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn)''. When
+ there is no corresponding named type the special constructs
+ ``&_\bt_\by_\bp_\be-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be'' and ``$$_\bt_\ba_\bg-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be'' can be used to represent a
+ pointer to a named type or C structure tag.
+
+
+ a\bas\bss\bsi\big\bgn\bn _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be =\b= _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ Assign the value of the expression to the variable.
+
+ d\bdu\bum\bmp\bp [_\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be] [>\b> _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Print the names and values of variables in the given
+ procedure, or the current one if none is specified. If
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1)
+
+
+
+ the procedure given is ``.'', then the all active vari-
+ ables are dumped.
+
+ p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn [,\b, _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn ...]
+ Print out the values of the expressions.
+
+ w\bwh\bha\bat\bti\bis\bs _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Print the declaration of the given name, which may be
+ qualified with block names as above.
+
+ w\bwh\bhi\bic\bch\bh _\bi_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt_\bi_\bf_\bi_\be_\br
+ Print the full qualification of the given identifer,
+ i.e. the outer blocks that the identifier is associ-
+ ated with.
+
+ u\bup\bp [_\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt]
+ d\bdo\bow\bwn\bn [_\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt]
+ Move the current function, which is used for resolving
+ names, up or down the stack _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt levels. The default
+ _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is 1.
+
+ w\bwh\bhe\ber\bre\be
+ Print out a list of the active procedures and function.
+
+ w\bwh\bhe\ber\bre\bei\bis\bs _\bi_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt_\bi_\bf_\bi_\be_\br
+ Print the full qualification of all the symbols whose
+ name matches the given identifier. The order in which
+ the symbols are printed is not meaningful.
+
+
+ A\bAc\bcc\bce\bes\bss\bsi\bin\bng\bg S\bSo\bou\bur\brc\bce\be F\bFi\bil\ble\bes\bs
+
+
+ /_\br_\be_\bg_\bu_\bl_\ba_\br _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn[/]
+ ?_\br_\be_\bg_\bu_\bl_\ba_\br _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn[?]
+ Search forward or backward in the current source file
+ for the given pattern.
+
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt [_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Invoke an editor on _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be or the current source file
+ if none is specified. If a _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be or _\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn name
+ is specified, the editor is invoked on the file that
+ contains it. Which editor is invoked by default
+ depends on the installation. The default can be over-
+ ridden by setting the environment variable EDITOR to
+ the name of the desired editor.
+
+ f\bfi\bil\ble\be [_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Change the current source file name to _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. If
+ none is specified then the current source file name is
+ printed.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1)
+
+
+
+ f\bfu\bun\bnc\bc [_\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ Change the current function. If none is specified then
+ print the current function. Changing the current func-
+ tion implicitly changes the current source file to the
+ one that contains the function; it also changes the
+ current scope used for name resolution.
+
+ l\bli\bis\bst\bt [_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br [,\b, _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br]]
+ l\bli\bis\bst\bt _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ List the lines in the current source file from the
+ first line number to the second inclusive. If no lines
+ are specified, the next 10 lines are listed. If the
+ name of a procedure or function is given lines _\bn-_\bk to
+ _\bn+_\bk are listed where _\bn is the first statement in the
+ procedure or function and _\bk is small.
+
+ u\bus\bse\be _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by-_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt
+ Set the list of directories to be searched when looking
+ for source files.
+
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd A\bAl\bli\bia\bas\bse\bes\bs a\ban\bnd\bd V\bVa\bar\bri\bia\bab\bbl\ble\bes\bs
+
+
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ``_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg''
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be (_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs) ``_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg''
+ When commands are processed, dbx first checks to see if
+ the word is an alias for either a command or a string.
+ If it is an alias, then dbx treats the input as though
+ the corresponding string (with values substituted for
+ any parameters) had been entered. For example, to
+ define an alias ``rr'' for the command ``rerun'', one
+ can say
+
+ alias rr rerun
+
+ To define an alias called ``b'' that sets a stop at a
+ particular line one can say
+
+ alias b(x) ``stop at x''
+
+ Subsequently, the command ``b(12)'' will expand to
+ ``stop at 12''.
+
+ s\bse\bet\bt _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be [= _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ The s\bse\bet\bt command defines values for debugger variables.
+ The names of these variables cannot conflict with names
+ in the program being debugged, and are expanded to the
+ corresponding expression within other commands. The
+ following variables have a special meaning:
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1)
+
+
+
+ $frame
+ Setting this variable to an address causes dbx
+ to use the stack frame pointed to by the
+ address for doing stack traces and accessing
+ local variables. This facility is of particu-
+ lar use for kernel debugging.
+
+ $hexchars
+ $hexints
+ $hexoffsets
+ $hexstrings
+ When set, dbx prints out out characters,
+ integers, offsets from registers, or character
+ pointers respectively in hexadecimal.
+
+ $listwindow
+ The value of this variable specifies the number
+ of lines to list around a function or when the
+ l\bli\bis\bst\bt command is given without any parameters.
+ Its default value is 10.
+
+ $mapaddrs
+ Setting (unsetting) this variable causes dbx to
+ start (stop) mapping addresses. As with
+ ``$frame'', this is useful for kernel debug-
+ ging.
+
+ $unsafecall
+ $unsafeassign
+ When ``$unsafecall'' is set, strict type check-
+ ing is turned off for arguments to subroutine
+ or function calls (_\be._\bg. in the c\bca\bal\bll\bl statement).
+ When ``$unsafeassign'' is set, strict type
+ checking between the two sides of an a\bas\bss\bsi\big\bgn\bn
+ statement is turned off. These variables
+ should be used only with great care, because
+ they severely limit dbx's usefulness for
+ detecting errors.
+
+ u\bun\bna\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Remove the alias with the given name.
+
+ u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bt _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Delete the debugger variable associated with _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1)
+
+
+
+ M\bMa\bac\bch\bhi\bin\bne\be L\bLe\bev\bve\bel\bl C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs
+
+
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\bei\bi [_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\bei\bi [_\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be] [a\bat\bt _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd]
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bpi\bi [_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd]
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bpi\bi [a\bat\bt] [_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd]
+ Turn on tracing or set a stop using a machine instruc-
+ tion address.
+
+ s\bst\bte\bep\bpi\bi
+ n\bne\bex\bxt\bti\bi
+ Single step as in s\bst\bte\bep\bp or n\bne\bex\bxt\bt, but do a single
+ instruction rather than source line.
+
+ _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs ,\b,_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs/\b/ [_\bm_\bo_\bd_\be]
+ _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs /\b/ [_\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt] [_\bm_\bo_\bd_\be]
+ Print the contents of memory starting at the first
+ _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs and continuing up to the second _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs or
+ until _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt items are printed. If the address is
+ ``.'', the address following the one printed most
+ recently is used. The _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be specifies how memory is to
+ be printed; if it is omitted the previous mode speci-
+ fied is used. The initial mode is ``X''. The follow-
+ ing modes are supported:
+
+ i\bi print the machine instruction
+ d\bd print a short word in decimal
+ D\bD print a long word in decimal
+ o\bo print a short word in octal
+ O\bO print a long word in octal
+ x\bx print a short word in hexadecimal
+ X\bX print a long word in hexadecimal
+ b\bb print a byte in octal
+ c\bc print a byte as a character
+ s\bs print a string of characters terminated by a null
+ byte
+ f\bf print a single precision real number
+ g\bg print a double precision real number
+
+
+ Symbolic addresses are specified by preceding the name with
+ an ``&''. Registers are denoted by ``$rN'' where N is the
+ number of the register. Addresses may be expressions made
+ up of other addresses and the operators ``+'', ``-'', and
+ indirection (unary ``*'').
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DBX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DBX(1)
+
+
+
+ M\bMi\bis\bsc\bce\bel\bll\bla\ban\bne\beo\bou\bus\bs C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs
+
+
+ g\bgr\bri\bip\bpe\be
+ Invoke a mail program to send a message to the person
+ in charge of _\bd_\bb_\bx.
+
+ h\bhe\bel\blp\bp Print out a synopsis of _\bd_\bb_\bx commands.
+
+ q\bqu\bui\bit\bt Exit _\bd_\bb_\bx.
+
+ s\bsh\bh _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be
+ Pass the command line to the shell for execution. The
+ SHELL environment variable determines which shell is
+ used.
+
+ s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Read _\bd_\bb_\bx commands from the given _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ a.out object file
+ .dbxinit initial commands
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cc(1), f77(1), pc(1), mod(l)
+
+C\bCO\bOM\bMM\bME\bEN\bNT\bTS\bS
+ _\bD_\bb_\bx suffers from the same ``multiple include'' malady as did
+ _\bs_\bd_\bb. If you have a program consisting of a number of object
+ files and each is built from source files that include
+ header files, the symbolic information for the header files
+ is replicated in each object file. Since about one debugger
+ start-up is done for each link, having the linker (ld) re-
+ organize the symbol information would not save much time,
+ though it would reduce some of the disk space used.
+
+ This problem is an artifact of the unrestricted semantics of
+ #include's in C; for example an include file can contain
+ static declarations that are separate entities for each file
+ in which they are included. However, even with Modula-2
+ there is a substantial amount of duplication of symbol
+ information necessary for inter-module type checking.
+
+ Some problems remain with the support for individual
+ languages. Fortran problems include: inability to assign to
+ logical, logical*2, complex and double complex variables;
+ inability to represent parameter constants which are not
+ type integer or real; peculiar representation for the values
+ of dummy procedures (the value shown for a dummy procedure
+ is actually the first few bytes of the procedure text; to
+ find the location of the procedure, use ``&'' to take the
+ address of the variable).
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 12, 1986 9
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DC(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ dc - desk calculator
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdc\bc [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\bc is an arbitrary precision arithmetic package. Ordinarily
+ it operates on decimal integers, but one may specify an
+ input base, output base, and a number of fractional digits
+ to be maintained. The overall structure of _\bd_\bc is a stacking
+ (reverse Polish) calculator. If an argument is given, input
+ is taken from that file until its end, then from the stan-
+ dard input. The following constructions are recognized:
+
+ number
+ The value of the number is pushed on the stack. A
+ number is an unbroken string of the digits 0-9. It
+ may be preceded by an underscore _ to input a negative
+ number. Numbers may contain decimal points.
+
+ + - / * % ^
+ The top two values on the stack are added (+), sub-
+ tracted (-), multiplied (*), divided (/), remaindered
+ (%), or exponentiated (^). The two entries are popped
+ off the stack; the result is pushed on the stack in
+ their place. Any fractional part of an exponent is
+ ignored.
+
+ s\bs_\bx The top of the stack is popped and stored into a
+ register named _\bx, where _\bx may be any character. If
+ the s\bs is capitalized, _\bx is treated as a stack and the
+ value is pushed on it.
+
+ l\bl_\bx The value in register _\bx is pushed on the stack. The
+ register _\bx is not altered. All registers start with
+ zero value. If the l\bl is capitalized, register _\bx is
+ treated as a stack and its top value is popped onto
+ the main stack.
+
+ d\bd The top value on the stack is duplicated.
+
+ p\bp The top value on the stack is printed. The top value
+ remains unchanged. P\bP interprets the top of the stack
+ as an ascii string, removes it, and prints it.
+
+ f\bf All values on the stack and in registers are printed.
+
+ q\bq exits the program. If executing a string, the recur-
+ sion level is popped by two. If q\bq is capitalized, the
+ top value on the stack is popped and the string execu-
+ tion level is popped by that value.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DC(1)
+
+
+
+ x\bx treats the top element of the stack as a character
+ string and executes it as a string of dc commands.
+
+ X\bX replaces the number on the top of the stack with its
+ scale factor.
+
+ [\b[ .\b..\b..\b. ]\b]
+ puts the bracketed ascii string onto the top of the
+ stack.
+
+ <_\bx >_\bx =_\bx
+ The top two elements of the stack are popped and com-
+ pared. Register _\bx is executed if they obey the stated
+ relation.
+
+ v\bv replaces the top element on the stack by its square
+ root. Any existing fractional part of the argument is
+ taken into account, but otherwise the scale factor is
+ ignored.
+
+ !\b! interprets the rest of the line as a UNIX command.
+
+ c\bc All values on the stack are popped.
+
+ i\bi The top value on the stack is popped and used as the
+ number radix for further input. I\bI pushes the input
+ base on the top of the stack.
+
+ o\bo The top value on the stack is popped and used as the
+ number radix for further output.
+
+ O\bO pushes the output base on the top of the stack.
+
+ k\bk the top of the stack is popped, and that value is used
+ as a non-negative scale factor: the appropriate number
+ of places are printed on output, and maintained during
+ multiplication, division, and exponentiation. The
+ interaction of scale factor, input base, and output
+ base will be reasonable if all are changed together.
+
+ z\bz The stack level is pushed onto the stack.
+
+ Z\bZ replaces the number on the top of the stack with its
+ length.
+
+ ?\b? A line of input is taken from the input source (usu-
+ ally the terminal) and executed.
+
+ ;\b; :\b: are used by _\bb_\bc for array operations.
+
+ An example which prints the first ten values of n! is
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DC(1)
+
+
+
+ [la1+dsa*pla10>y]sy
+ 0sa1
+ lyx
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ bc(1), which is a preprocessor for _\bd_\bc providing infix nota-
+ tion and a C-like syntax which implements functions and rea-
+ sonable control structures for programs.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ `x is unimplemented' where x is an octal number.
+ `stack empty' for not enough elements on the stack to do
+ what was asked.
+ `Out of space' when the free list is exhausted (too many
+ digits).
+ `Out of headers' for too many numbers being kept around.
+ `Out of pushdown' for too many items on the stack.
+ `Nesting Depth' for too many levels of nested execution.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ dd - convert and copy a file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdd\bd [option=value] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\bd copies the specified input file to the specified output
+ with possible conversions. The standard input and output
+ are used by default. The input and output block size may be
+ specified to take advantage of raw physical I/O.
+
+ _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be_\bs
+ if= input file name; standard input is default
+ of= output file name; standard output is default
+ ibs=_\bn input block size _\bn bytes (default 512)
+ obs=_\bn output block size (default 512)
+ bs=_\bn set both input and output block size,
+ superseding _\bi_\bb_\bs and _\bo_\bb_\bs; also, if no conver-
+ sion is specified, it is particularly effi-
+ cient since no copy need be done
+ cbs=_\bn conversion buffer size
+ skip=_\bn skip _\bn input records before starting copy
+ files=_\bn copy _\bn input files before terminating (makes
+ sense only where input is a magtape or simi-
+ lar device).
+ seek=_\bn seek _\bn records from beginning of output file
+ before copying
+ count=_\bn copy only _\bn input records
+ conv=ascii convert EBCDIC to ASCII
+ ebcdic convert ASCII to EBCDIC
+ ibm slightly different map of ASCII to EBCDIC
+ block convert variable length records to fixed
+ length
+ unblock convert fixed length records to variable
+ length
+ lcase map alphabetics to lower case
+ ucase map alphabetics to upper case
+ swab swap every pair of bytes
+ noerror do not stop processing on an error
+ sync pad every input record to _\bi_\bb_\bs
+ ... , ... several comma-separated conversions
+
+ Where sizes are specified, a number of bytes is expected. A
+ number may end with k\bk,\b, b\bb or w\bw to specify multiplication by
+ 1024, 512, or 2 respectively; a pair of numbers may be
+ separated by x\bx to indicate a product.
+
+ _\bC_\bb_\bs is used only if _\ba_\bs_\bc_\bi_\bi, _\bu_\bn_\bb_\bl_\bo_\bc_\bk, _\be_\bb_\bc_\bd_\bi_\bc, _\bi_\bb_\bm, or _\bb_\bl_\bo_\bc_\bk
+ conversion is specified. In the first two cases, _\bc_\bb_\bs char-
+ acters are placed into the conversion buffer, any specified
+ character mapping is done, trailing blanks trimmed and new-
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DD(1)
+
+
+
+ line added before sending the line to the output. In the
+ latter three cases, characters are read into the conversion
+ buffer, and blanks added to make up an output record of size
+ _\bc_\bb_\bs.
+
+ After completion, _\bd_\bd reports the number of whole and partial
+ input and output blocks.
+
+ For example, to read an EBCDIC tape blocked ten 80-byte
+ EBCDIC card images per record into the ASCII file _\bx:
+
+
+ dd if=/dev/rmt0 of=x ibs=800 cbs=80 conv=ascii,lcase
+
+ Note the use of raw magtape. _\bD_\bd is especially suited to I/O
+ on the raw physical devices because it allows reading and
+ writing in arbitrary record sizes.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cp(1), tr(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ f+p records in(out): numbers of full and partial records
+ read(written)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The ASCII/EBCDIC conversion tables are taken from the 256
+ character standard in the CACM Nov, 1968. The `ibm' conver-
+ sion, while less blessed as a standard, corresponds better
+ to certain IBM print train conventions. There is no univer-
+ sal solution.
+ One must specify ``conv=noerror,sync'' when copying raw
+ disks with bad sectors to insure _\bd_\bd stays synchronized.
+
+ Certain combinations of arguments to _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bv= are permitted.
+ However, the _\bb_\bl_\bo_\bc_\bk or _\bu_\bn_\bb_\bl_\bo_\bc_\bk option cannot be combined with
+ _\ba_\bs_\bc_\bi_\bi, _\be_\bb_\bc_\bd_\bi_\bc or _\bi_\bb_\bm. Invalid combinations _\bs_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\bt_\bl_\by _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be
+ all but the last mutually-exclusive keyword.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DEROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DEROFF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ deroff - remove nroff, troff, tbl and eqn constructs
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bde\ber\bro\bof\bff\bf [ -\b-w\bw ] file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\be_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf reads each file in sequence and removes all _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf and
+ _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf command lines, backslash constructions, macro defini-
+ tions, _\be_\bq_\bn constructs (between `.EQ' and `.EN' lines or
+ between delimiters), and table descriptions and writes the
+ remainder on the standard output. _\bD_\be_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf follows chains of
+ included files (`.so' and `.nx' commands); if a file has
+ already been included, a `.so' is ignored and a `.nx' ter-
+ minates execution. If no input file is given, _\bd_\be_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf reads
+ from the standard input file.
+
+ If the -\b-w\bw flag is given, the output is a word list, one
+ `word' (string of letters, digits, and apostrophes, begin-
+ ning with a letter; apostrophes are removed) per line, and
+ all other characters ignored. Otherwise, the output follows
+ the original, with the deletions mentioned above.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ troff(1), eqn(1), tbl(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bD_\be_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf is not a complete _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf interpreter, so it can be
+ confused by subtle constructs. Most errors result in too
+ much rather than too little output.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ df - disk free
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdf\bf [ -\b-i\bi ] [ filesystem ... ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\bf prints out the amount of free disk space available on the
+ specified _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm, e.g. ``/dev/rp0a'', or on the filesys-
+ tem in which the specified _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be, e.g. ``$HOME'', is con-
+ tained. If no file system is specified, the free space on
+ all of the normally mounted file systems is printed. The
+ reported numbers are in kilobytes.
+
+ Other options are:
+
+ -\b-i\bi Report also the number of inodes which are used and
+ free.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/fstab list of normally mounted filesystems
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ fstab(5), icheck(8), quot(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DICTION(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DICTION(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ diction, explain - print wordy sentences; thesaurus for dic-
+ tion
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdi\bic\bct\bti\bio\bon\bn [ -\b-m\bml\bl ] [ -\b-m\bmm\bm ] [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-f\bf pfile ] file ...
+ e\bex\bxp\bpl\bla\bai\bin\bn
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\bi_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn finds all sentences in a document that contain
+ phrases from a data base of bad or wordy diction. Each
+ phrase is bracketed with [ ]. Because _\bd_\bi_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn runs _\bd_\be_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf
+ before looking at the text, formatting header files should
+ be included as part of the input. The default macro package
+ -\b-m\bms\bs may be overridden with the flag -\b-m\bmm\bm.\b. The flag -\b-m\bml\bl which
+ causes d\bde\ber\bro\bof\bff\bf to skip lists, should be used if the document
+ contains many lists of non-sentences. The user may supply
+ her/his own pattern file to be used in addition to the
+ default file with -\b-f\bf _\bp_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. If the flag -\b-n\bn is also supplied
+ the default file will be suppressed.
+
+ _\bE_\bx_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bi_\bn is an interactive thesaurus for the phrases found by
+ diction.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ deroff(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Use of non-standard formatting macros may cause incorrect
+ sentence breaks. In particular, _\bd_\bi_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn doesn't grok -\b-m\bme\be.\b.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ diff - differential file and directory comparator
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdi\bif\bff\bf [ -\b-l\bl ] [ -\b-r\br ] [ -\b-s\bs ] [ -\b-c\bce\bef\bfh\bhn\bn ] [ -\b-b\bbi\biw\bwt\bt ] dir1 dir2
+ d\bdi\bif\bff\bf [ -\b-c\bce\bef\bfh\bhn\bn ]\b] [\b[ -\b-b\bbi\biw\bwt\bt ] file1 file2
+ d\bdi\bif\bff\bf [ -\b-D\bD_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg ] [ -\b-b\bbi\biw\bw ] file1 file2
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ If both arguments are directories, _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf sorts the contents
+ of the directories by name, and then runs the regular file
+ _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf algorithm (described below) on text files which are
+ different. Binary files which differ, common subdirec-
+ tories, and files which appear in only one directory are
+ listed. Options when comparing directories are:
+
+ -\b-l\bl long output format; each text file _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf is piped
+ through _\bp_\br(1) to paginate it, other differences are
+ remembered and summarized after all text file differ-
+ ences are reported.
+
+ -\b-r\br causes application of _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf recursively to common sub-
+ directories encountered.
+
+ -\b-s\bs causes _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf to report files which are the same, which
+ are otherwise not mentioned.
+
+ -\b-S\bSn\bna\bam\bme\be
+ starts a directory _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf in the middle beginning with
+ file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+
+ When run on regular files, and when comparing text files
+ which differ during directory comparison, _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf tells what
+ lines must be changed in the files to bring them into agree-
+ ment. Except in rare circumstances, _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf finds a smallest
+ sufficient set of file differences. If neither _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 nor
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 is a directory, then either may be given as `-', in
+ which case the standard input is used. If _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 is a direc-
+ tory, then a file in that directory whose file-name is the
+ same as the file-name of _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 is used (and vice versa).
+
+ There are several options for output format; the default
+ output format contains lines of these forms:
+
+ _\bn_\b1 a _\bn_\b3,_\bn_\b4
+ _\bn_\b1,_\bn_\b2 d _\bn_\b3
+ _\bn_\b1,_\bn_\b2 c _\bn_\b3,_\bn_\b4
+
+ These lines resemble _\be_\bd commands to convert _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 into
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2. The numbers after the letters pertain to _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2. In
+ fact, by exchanging `a' for `d' and reading backward one may
+ ascertain equally how to convert _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 into _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1. As in
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
+
+
+
+ _\be_\bd, identical pairs where _\bn_\b1 = _\bn_\b2 or _\bn_\b3 = _\bn_\b4 are abbreviated
+ as a single number.
+
+ Following each of these lines come all the lines that are
+ affected in the first file flagged by `<', then all the
+ lines that are affected in the second file flagged by `>'.
+
+ Except for -\b-b\bb,\b, -\b-w\bw,\b, -\b-i\bi or -\b-t\bt which may be given with any of
+ the others, the following options are mutually exclusive:
+
+ -\b-e\be produces a script of _\ba, _\bc and _\bd commands for the
+ editor _\be_\bd, which will recreate _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 from _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1.
+ In connection with -\b-e\be, the following shell program
+ may help maintain multiple versions of a file.
+ Only an ancestral file ($1) and a chain of
+ version-to-version _\be_\bd scripts ($2,$3,...) made by
+ _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf need be on hand. A `latest version' appears
+ on the standard output.
+
+ (shift; cat $*; echo '1,$p') | ed - $1
+
+ Extra commands are added to the output when compar-
+ ing directories with -\b-e\be,\b, so that the result is a
+ _\bs_\bh(1) script for converting text files which are
+ common to the two directories from their state in
+ _\bd_\bi_\br_\b1 to their state in _\bd_\bi_\br_\b2.
+
+ -\b-f\bf produces a script similar to that of -\b-e\be,\b, not useful
+ with _\be_\bd, and in the opposite order.
+
+ -\b-n\bn produces a script similar to that of -\b-e\be,\b, but in the
+ opposite order and with a count of changed lines on
+ each insert or delete command. This is the form
+ used by _\br_\bc_\bs_\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf(1).
+
+ -\b-c\bc produces a diff with lines of context. The default
+ is to present 3 lines of context and may be
+ changed, e.g to 10, by -\b-c\bc1\b10\b0. With -\b-c\bc the output
+ format is modified slightly: the output beginning
+ with identification of the files involved and their
+ creation dates and then each change is separated by
+ a line with a dozen *'s. The lines removed from
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 are marked with `- '; those added to _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2
+ are marked `+ '. Lines which are changed from one
+ file to the other are marked in both files with
+ with `! '.
+
+ Changes which lie within <context> lines of each
+ other are grouped together on output. (This is a
+ change from the previous ``diff -c'' but the
+ resulting output is usually much easier to inter-
+ pret.)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-h\bh does a fast, half-hearted job. It works only when
+ changed stretches are short and well separated, but
+ does work on files of unlimited length.
+
+ -\b-D\bDs\bst\btr\bri\bin\bng\bg causes _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf to create a merged version of _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 and
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 on the standard output, with C preprocessor
+ controls included so that a compilation of the
+ result without defining _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg is equivalent to
+ compiling _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1, while defining _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg will yield
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2.
+
+ -\b-b\bb causes trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) to be
+ ignored, and other strings of blanks to compare
+ equal.
+
+ -\b-w\bw is similar to -\b-b\bb but causes whitespace (blanks and
+ tabs) to be totally ignored. E.g.,
+ ``if ( a == b )'' will compare equal to
+ ``if(a==b)''.
+
+ -\b-i\bi ignores the case of letters. E.g., ``A'' will com-
+ pare equal to ``a''.
+
+ -\b-t\bt will expand tabs in output lines. Normal or -\b-c\bc
+ output adds character(s) to the front of each line
+ which may screw up the indentation of the original
+ source lines and make the output listing difficult
+ to interpret. This option will preserve the origi-
+ nal source's indentation.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/d?????
+ /usr/lib/diffh for -\b-h\bh
+ /bin/diff for directory diffs
+ /bin/pr
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cmp(1), cc(1), comm(1), ed(1), diff3(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Exit status is 0 for no differences, 1 for some, 2 for trou-
+ ble.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Editing scripts produced under the -\b-e\be or -\b-f\bf option are naive
+ about creating lines consisting of a single `.\b.'.
+
+ When comparing directories with the -\b-b\bb,\b, -\b-w\bw or -\b-i\bi options
+ specified, _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf first compares the files ala _\bc_\bm_\bp, and then
+ decides to run the _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf algorithm if they are not equal.
+ This may cause a small amount of spurious output if the
+ files then turn out to be identical because the only
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
+
+
+
+ differences are insignificant blank string or case differ-
+ ences.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DIFF3(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF3(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ diff3 - 3-way differential file comparison
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdi\bif\bff\bf3\b3 [ -\b-e\bex\bxE\bEX\bX3\b3 ] file1 file2 file3
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\bi_\bf_\bf_\b3 compares three versions of a file, and publishes
+ disagreeing ranges of text flagged with these codes:
+
+ ==== all three files differ
+
+ ====1 _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 is different
+
+ ====2 _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 is different
+
+ ====3 _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b3 is different
+
+ The type of change suffered in converting a given range of a
+ given file to some other is indicated in one of these ways:
+
+ _\bf :\b: _\bn_\b1 a\ba Text is to be appended after line number _\bn_\b1
+ in file _\bf, where _\bf = 1, 2, or 3.
+
+ _\bf :\b: _\bn_\b1 ,\b, _\bn_\b2 c\bc Text is to be changed in the range line _\bn_\b1
+ to line _\bn_\b2. If _\bn_\b1 = _\bn_\b2, the range may be
+ abbreviated to _\bn_\b1.
+
+ The original contents of the range follows immediately after
+ a c\bc indication. When the contents of two files are identi-
+ cal, the contents of the lower-numbered file is suppressed.
+
+ Under the -\b-e\be option, _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf_\b3 publishes a script for the editor
+ _\be_\bd that will incorporate into _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 all changes between
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 and _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b3, _\bi._\be. the changes that normally would be
+ flagged ==== and ====3. Option -\b-x\bx (-\b-3\b3) produces a script to
+ incorporate only changes flagged ==== (====3). The follow-
+ ing command will apply the resulting script to `file1'.
+
+ (cat script; echo '1,$p') | ed - file1
+
+ The -\b-E\bE and -\b-X\bX are similar to -\b-e\be and -\b-x\bx, respectively, but
+ treat overlapping changes (i.e., changes that would be
+ flagged with ==== in the normal listing) differently. The
+ overlapping lines from both files will be inserted by the
+ edit script, bracketed by "<<<<<<" and ">>>>>>" lines.
+
+ For example, suppose lines 7-8 are changed in both file1 and
+ file2. Applying the edit script generated by the command
+ "diff3 -E file1 file2 file3"
+ to file1 results in the file:
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 August 20, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DIFF3(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF3(1)
+
+
+
+ lines 1-6
+ of file1
+ <<<<<<< file1
+ lines 7-8
+ of file1
+ =======
+ lines 7-8
+ of file3
+ >>>>>>> file3
+ rest of file1
+
+ The -\b-E\bE option is used by RCS _\bm_\be_\br_\bg_\be(1) to insure that over-
+ lapping changes in the merged files are preserved and
+ brought to someone's attention.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/d3?????
+ /usr/lib/diff3
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ diff(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Text lines that consist of a single `.' will defeat -\b-e\be.\b.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 August 20, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ diff - differential file and directory comparator
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdi\bif\bff\bf [ -\b-l\bl ] [ -\b-r\br ] [ -\b-s\bs ] [ -\b-c\bce\bef\bfh\bhn\bn ] [ -\b-b\bbi\biw\bwt\bt ] dir1 dir2
+ d\bdi\bif\bff\bf [ -\b-c\bce\bef\bfh\bhn\bn ]\b] [\b[ -\b-b\bbi\biw\bwt\bt ] file1 file2
+ d\bdi\bif\bff\bf [ -\b-D\bD_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg ] [ -\b-b\bbi\biw\bw ] file1 file2
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ If both arguments are directories, _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf sorts the contents
+ of the directories by name, and then runs the regular file
+ _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf algorithm (described below) on text files which are
+ different. Binary files which differ, common subdirec-
+ tories, and files which appear in only one directory are
+ listed. Options when comparing directories are:
+
+ -\b-l\bl long output format; each text file _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf is piped
+ through _\bp_\br(1) to paginate it, other differences are
+ remembered and summarized after all text file differ-
+ ences are reported.
+
+ -\b-r\br causes application of _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf recursively to common sub-
+ directories encountered.
+
+ -\b-s\bs causes _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf to report files which are the same, which
+ are otherwise not mentioned.
+
+ -\b-S\bSn\bna\bam\bme\be
+ starts a directory _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf in the middle beginning with
+ file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+
+ When run on regular files, and when comparing text files
+ which differ during directory comparison, _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf tells what
+ lines must be changed in the files to bring them into agree-
+ ment. Except in rare circumstances, _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf finds a smallest
+ sufficient set of file differences. If neither _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 nor
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 is a directory, then either may be given as `-', in
+ which case the standard input is used. If _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 is a direc-
+ tory, then a file in that directory whose file-name is the
+ same as the file-name of _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 is used (and vice versa).
+
+ There are several options for output format; the default
+ output format contains lines of these forms:
+
+ _\bn_\b1 a _\bn_\b3,_\bn_\b4
+ _\bn_\b1,_\bn_\b2 d _\bn_\b3
+ _\bn_\b1,_\bn_\b2 c _\bn_\b3,_\bn_\b4
+
+ These lines resemble _\be_\bd commands to convert _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 into
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2. The numbers after the letters pertain to _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2. In
+ fact, by exchanging `a' for `d' and reading backward one may
+ ascertain equally how to convert _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 into _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1. As in
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
+
+
+
+ _\be_\bd, identical pairs where _\bn_\b1 = _\bn_\b2 or _\bn_\b3 = _\bn_\b4 are abbreviated
+ as a single number.
+
+ Following each of these lines come all the lines that are
+ affected in the first file flagged by `<', then all the
+ lines that are affected in the second file flagged by `>'.
+
+ Except for -\b-b\bb,\b, -\b-w\bw,\b, -\b-i\bi or -\b-t\bt which may be given with any of
+ the others, the following options are mutually exclusive:
+
+ -\b-e\be produces a script of _\ba, _\bc and _\bd commands for the
+ editor _\be_\bd, which will recreate _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 from _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1.
+ In connection with -\b-e\be, the following shell program
+ may help maintain multiple versions of a file.
+ Only an ancestral file ($1) and a chain of
+ version-to-version _\be_\bd scripts ($2,$3,...) made by
+ _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf need be on hand. A `latest version' appears
+ on the standard output.
+
+ (shift; cat $*; echo '1,$p') | ed - $1
+
+ Extra commands are added to the output when compar-
+ ing directories with -\b-e\be,\b, so that the result is a
+ _\bs_\bh(1) script for converting text files which are
+ common to the two directories from their state in
+ _\bd_\bi_\br_\b1 to their state in _\bd_\bi_\br_\b2.
+
+ -\b-f\bf produces a script similar to that of -\b-e\be,\b, not useful
+ with _\be_\bd, and in the opposite order.
+
+ -\b-n\bn produces a script similar to that of -\b-e\be,\b, but in the
+ opposite order and with a count of changed lines on
+ each insert or delete command. This is the form
+ used by _\br_\bc_\bs_\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf(1).
+
+ -\b-c\bc produces a diff with lines of context. The default
+ is to present 3 lines of context and may be
+ changed, e.g to 10, by -\b-c\bc1\b10\b0. With -\b-c\bc the output
+ format is modified slightly: the output beginning
+ with identification of the files involved and their
+ creation dates and then each change is separated by
+ a line with a dozen *'s. The lines removed from
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 are marked with `- '; those added to _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2
+ are marked `+ '. Lines which are changed from one
+ file to the other are marked in both files with
+ with `! '.
+
+ Changes which lie within <context> lines of each
+ other are grouped together on output. (This is a
+ change from the previous ``diff -c'' but the
+ resulting output is usually much easier to inter-
+ pret.)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-h\bh does a fast, half-hearted job. It works only when
+ changed stretches are short and well separated, but
+ does work on files of unlimited length.
+
+ -\b-D\bDs\bst\btr\bri\bin\bng\bg causes _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf to create a merged version of _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 and
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 on the standard output, with C preprocessor
+ controls included so that a compilation of the
+ result without defining _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg is equivalent to
+ compiling _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1, while defining _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg will yield
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2.
+
+ -\b-b\bb causes trailing blanks (spaces and tabs) to be
+ ignored, and other strings of blanks to compare
+ equal.
+
+ -\b-w\bw is similar to -\b-b\bb but causes whitespace (blanks and
+ tabs) to be totally ignored. E.g.,
+ ``if ( a == b )'' will compare equal to
+ ``if(a==b)''.
+
+ -\b-i\bi ignores the case of letters. E.g., ``A'' will com-
+ pare equal to ``a''.
+
+ -\b-t\bt will expand tabs in output lines. Normal or -\b-c\bc
+ output adds character(s) to the front of each line
+ which may screw up the indentation of the original
+ source lines and make the output listing difficult
+ to interpret. This option will preserve the origi-
+ nal source's indentation.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/d?????
+ /usr/lib/diffh for -\b-h\bh
+ /bin/diff for directory diffs
+ /bin/pr
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cmp(1), cc(1), comm(1), ed(1), diff3(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Exit status is 0 for no differences, 1 for some, 2 for trou-
+ ble.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Editing scripts produced under the -\b-e\be or -\b-f\bf option are naive
+ about creating lines consisting of a single `.\b.'.
+
+ When comparing directories with the -\b-b\bb,\b, -\b-w\bw or -\b-i\bi options
+ specified, _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf first compares the files ala _\bc_\bm_\bp, and then
+ decides to run the _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf algorithm if they are not equal.
+ This may cause a small amount of spurious output if the
+ files then turn out to be identical because the only
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+DIFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DIFF(1)
+
+
+
+ differences are insignificant blank string or case differ-
+ ences.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 19, 1986 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DU(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DU(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ du - summarize disk usage
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdu\bu [ -\b-s\bs ] [ -\b-a\ba ] [ name ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\bu gives the number of kilobytes contained in all files and,
+ recursively, directories within each specified directory or
+ file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. If _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is missing, `.\b.' is used.
+
+ The argument -\b-s\bs causes only the grand total to be given.
+ The argument -\b-a\ba causes an entry to be generated for each
+ file. Absence of either causes an entry to be generated for
+ each directory only.
+
+ A file which has two links to it is only counted once.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ df(1), quot(8)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Non-directories given as arguments (not under -\b-a\ba option) are
+ not listed.
+ If there are too many distinct linked files, _\bd_\bu counts the
+ excess files multiply.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+ECHO(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ECHO(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ echo - echo arguments
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\bec\bch\bho\bo [ -\b-n\bn ] [ arg ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bc_\bh_\bo writes its arguments separated by blanks and terminated
+ by a newline on the standard output. If the flag -\b-n\bn is
+ used, no newline is added to the output.
+
+ _\bE_\bc_\bh_\bo is useful for producing diagnostics in shell programs
+ and for writing constant data on pipes. To send diagnostics
+ to the standard error file, do `echo ... 1>&2'.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ed - text editor
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\bed\bd [ -\b- ] [ -\b-x\bx ] [ name ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bd is the standard text editor.
+
+ If a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be argument is given, _\be_\bd simulates an _\be command (see
+ below) on the named file; that is to say, the file is read
+ into _\be_\bd'_\bs buffer so that it can be edited. If -\b-x\bx is
+ present, an _\bx command is simulated first to handle an
+ encrypted file. The optional -\b- suppresses the printing of
+ explanatory output and should be used when the standard
+ input is an editor script.
+
+ _\bE_\bd operates on a copy of any file it is editing; changes
+ made in the copy have no effect on the file until a _\bw
+ (write) command is given. The copy of the text being edited
+ resides in a temporary file called the _\bb_\bu_\bf_\bf_\be_\br.
+
+ Commands to _\be_\bd have a simple and regular structure: zero or
+ more _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\be_\bs followed by a single character _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd, pos-
+ sibly followed by parameters to the command. These
+ addresses specify one or more lines in the buffer. Missing
+ addresses are supplied by default.
+
+ In general, only one command may appear on a line. Certain
+ commands allow the addition of text to the buffer. While _\be_\bd
+ is accepting text, it is said to be in _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be. In this
+ mode, no commands are recognized; all input is merely col-
+ lected. Input mode is left by typing a period `.\b.' alone at
+ the beginning of a line.
+
+ _\bE_\bd supports a limited form of _\br_\be_\bg_\bu_\bl_\ba_\br _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn notation.
+ A regular expression specifies a set of strings of charac-
+ ters. A member of this set of strings is said to be _\bm_\ba_\bt_\bc_\bh_\be_\bd
+ by the regular expression. In the following specification
+ for regular expressions the word `character' means any char-
+ acter but newline.
+
+ 1. Any character except a special character matches
+ itself. Special characters are the regular expression
+ delimiter plus \[.\b. and sometimes ^*$.
+
+ 2. A .\b. matches any character.
+
+ 3. A \ followed by any character except a digit or ()
+ matches that character.
+
+ 4. A nonempty string _\bs bracketed [_\bs] (or [^_\bs]) matches any
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1)
+
+
+
+ character in (or not in) _\bs. In _\bs, \ has no special
+ meaning, and ] may only appear as the first letter. A
+ substring _\ba-_\bb, with _\ba and _\bb in ascending ASCII order,
+ stands for the inclusive range of ASCII characters.
+
+ 5. A regular expression of form 1-4 followed by * matches
+ a sequence of 0 or more matches of the regular expres-
+ sion.
+
+ 6. A regular expression, _\bx, of form 1-8, bracketed \(_\bx\)
+ matches what _\bx matches.
+
+ 7. A \ followed by a digit _\bn matches a copy of the string
+ that the bracketed regular expression beginning with
+ the _\bnth \( matched.
+
+ 8. A regular expression of form 1-8, _\bx, followed by a reg-
+ ular expression of form 1-7, _\by matches a match for _\bx
+ followed by a match for _\by, with the _\bx match being as
+ long as possible while still permitting a _\by match.
+
+ 9. A regular expression of form 1-8 preceded by ^ (or fol-
+ lowed by $), is constrained to matches that begin at
+ the left (or end at the right) end of a line.
+
+ 10. A regular expression of form 1-9 picks out the longest
+ among the leftmost matches in a line.
+
+ 11. An empty regular expression stands for a copy of the
+ last regular expression encountered.
+
+ Regular expressions are used in addresses to specify lines
+ and in one command (see _\bs below) to specify a portion of a
+ line which is to be replaced. If it is desired to use one
+ of the regular expression metacharacters as an ordinary
+ character, that character may be preceded by `\'. This also
+ applies to the character bounding the regular expression
+ (often `/') and to `\' itself.
+
+ To understand addressing in _\be_\bd it is necessary to know that
+ at any time there is a _\bc_\bu_\br_\br_\be_\bn_\bt _\bl_\bi_\bn_\be. Generally speaking, the
+ current line is the last line affected by a command; how-
+ ever, the exact effect on the current line is discussed
+ under the description of the command. Addresses are con-
+ structed as follows.
+
+ 1. The character `.\b.' addresses the current line.
+
+ 2. The character `$' addresses the last line of the
+ buffer.
+
+ 3. A decimal number _\bn addresses the _\bn-th line of the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1)
+
+
+
+ buffer.
+
+ 4. `'_\bx' addresses the line marked with the name _\bx, which
+ must be a lower-case letter. Lines are marked with the
+ _\bk command described below.
+
+ 5. A regular expression enclosed in slashes `/' addresses
+ the line found by searching forward from the current
+ line and stopping at the first line containing a string
+ that matches the regular expression. If necessary the
+ search wraps around to the beginning of the buffer.
+
+ 6. A regular expression enclosed in queries `?' addresses
+ the line found by searching backward from the current
+ line and stopping at the first line containing a string
+ that matches the regular expression. If necessary the
+ search wraps around to the end of the buffer.
+
+ 7. An address followed by a plus sign `+' or a minus sign
+ `-' followed by a decimal number specifies that address
+ plus (resp. minus) the indicated number of lines. The
+ plus sign may be omitted.
+
+ 8. If an address begins with `+' or `-' the addition or
+ subtraction is taken with respect to the current line;
+ e.g. `-5' is understood to mean `.\b.-5'.
+
+ 9. If an address ends with `+' or `-', then 1 is added
+ (resp. subtracted). As a consequence of this rule and
+ rule 8, the address `-' refers to the line before the
+ current line. Moreover, trailing `+' and `-' charac-
+ ters have cumulative effect, so `--' refers to the
+ current line less 2.
+
+ 10. To maintain compatibility with earlier versions of the
+ editor, the character `^' in addresses is equivalent to
+ `-'.
+
+ Commands may require zero, one, or two addresses. Commands
+ which require no addresses regard the presence of an address
+ as an error. Commands which accept one or two addresses
+ assume default addresses when insufficient are given. If
+ more addresses are given than such a command requires, the
+ last one or two (depending on what is accepted) are used.
+
+ Addresses are separated from each other typically by a comma
+ `,\b,'. They may also be separated by a semicolon `;\b;'. In
+ this case the current line `.\b.' is set to the previous
+ address before the next address is interpreted. This
+ feature can be used to determine the starting line for for-
+ ward and backward searches (`/', `?'). The second address
+ of any two-address sequence must correspond to a line
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1)
+
+
+
+ following the line corresponding to the first address. The
+ special form `%' is an abbreviation for the address pair
+ `1,$'.
+
+ In the following list of _\be_\bd commands, the default addresses
+ are shown in parentheses. The parentheses are not part of
+ the address, but are used to show that the given addresses
+ are the default.
+
+ As mentioned, it is generally illegal for more than one com-
+ mand to appear on a line. However, most commands may be
+ suffixed by `p' or by `l', in which case the current line is
+ either printed or listed respectively in the way discussed
+ below. Commands may also be suffixed by `n', meaning the
+ output of the command is to be line numbered. These suf-
+ fixes may be combined in any order.
+
+ (.\b.)a
+ <text>
+ .\b.
+ The append command reads the given text and appends it
+ after the addressed line. `.\b.' is left on the last line
+ input, if there were any, otherwise at the addressed
+ line. Address `0' is legal for this command; text is
+ placed at the beginning of the buffer.
+
+ (.\b., .\b.)c
+ <text>
+ .\b.
+ The change command deletes the addressed lines, then
+ accepts input text which replaces these lines. `.\b.' is
+ left at the last line input; if there were none, it is
+ left at the line preceding the deleted lines.
+
+ (.\b., .\b.)d
+ The delete command deletes the addressed lines from the
+ buffer. The line originally after the last line
+ deleted becomes the current line; if the lines deleted
+ were originally at the end, the new last line becomes
+ the current line.
+
+ e filename
+ The edit command causes the entire contents of the
+ buffer to be deleted, and then the named file to be
+ read in. `.\b.' is set to the last line of the buffer.
+ The number of characters read is typed. `filename' is
+ remembered for possible use as a default file name in a
+ subsequent _\br or _\bw command. If `filename' is missing,
+ the remembered name is used.
+
+ E filename
+ This command is the same as _\be, except that no
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1)
+
+
+
+ diagnostic results when no _\bw has been given since the
+ last buffer alteration.
+
+ f filename
+ The filename command prints the currently remembered
+ file name. If `filename' is given, the currently
+ remembered file name is changed to `filename'.
+
+ (1,$)g/regular expression/command list
+ In the global command, the first step is to mark every
+ line which matches the given regular expression. Then
+ for every such line, the given command list is executed
+ with `.\b.' initially set to that line. A single command
+ or the first of multiple commands appears on the same
+ line with the global command. All lines of a multi-
+ line list except the last line must be ended with `\'.
+ _\bA, _\bi, and _\bc commands and associated input are permit-
+ ted; the `.\b.' terminating input mode may be omitted if
+ it would be on the last line of the command list. The
+ commands _\bg and _\bv are not permitted in the command list.
+
+ (.\b.)i
+
+ <text>
+ .\b.
+ This command inserts the given text before the
+ addressed line. `.\b.' is left at the last line input,
+ or, if there were none, at the line before the
+ addressed line. This command differs from the _\ba com-
+ mand only in the placement of the text.
+
+ (.\b., .\b.+1)j
+ This command joins the addressed lines into a single
+ line; intermediate newlines simply disappear. `.\b.' is
+ left at the resulting line.
+
+ ( .\b. )k_\bx
+ The mark command marks the addressed line with name _\bx,
+ which must be a lower-case letter. The address form
+ `'_\bx' then addresses this line.
+
+ (.\b., .\b.)l
+ The list command prints the addressed lines in an unam-
+ biguous way: non-graphic characters are printed in
+ two-digit octal, and long lines are folded. The _\bl com-
+ mand may be placed on the same line after any non-i/o
+ command.
+
+ (.\b., .\b.)m_\ba
+ The move command repositions the addressed lines after
+ the line addressed by _\ba. The last of the moved lines
+ becomes the current line.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1)
+
+
+
+ (.\b., .\b.)p
+ The print command prints the addressed lines. `.\b.' is
+ left at the last line printed. The _\bp command may be
+ placed on the same line after any non-i/o command.
+
+ (.\b., .\b.)P
+ This command is a synonym for _\bp.
+
+ q The quit command causes _\be_\bd to exit. No automatic write
+ of a file is done.
+
+ Q This command is the same as _\bq, except that no diagnos-
+ tic results when no _\bw has been given since the last
+ buffer alteration.
+
+ ($)r filename
+ The read command reads in the given file after the
+ addressed line. If no file name is given, the remem-
+ bered file name, if any, is used (see _\be and _\bf com-
+ mands). The file name is remembered if there was no
+ remembered file name already. Address `0' is legal for
+ _\br and causes the file to be read at the beginning of
+ the buffer. If the read is successful, the number of
+ characters read is typed. `.\b.' is left at the last line
+ read in from the file.
+
+ ( .\b., .\b.)s/regular expression/replacement/ or,
+ ( .\b., .\b.)s/regular expression/replacement/g
+ The substitute command searches each addressed line for
+ an occurrence of the specified regular expression. On
+ each line in which a match is found, all matched
+ strings are replaced by the replacement specified, if
+ the global replacement indicator `g' appears after the
+ command. If the global indicator does not appear, only
+ the first occurrence of the matched string is replaced.
+ It is an error for the substitution to fail on all
+ addressed lines. Any punctuation character may be used
+ instead of `/' to delimit the regular expression and
+ the replacement. `.\b.' is left at the last line substi-
+ tuted.
+
+ An ampersand `&' appearing in the replacement is
+ replaced by the string matching the regular expression.
+ The special meaning of `&' in this context may be
+ suppressed by preceding it by `\'. The characters `_\b\_\bn'
+ where _\bn is a digit, are replaced by the text matched by
+ the _\bn-th regular subexpression enclosed between `\('
+ and `\)'. When nested, parenthesized subexpressions
+ are present, _\bn is determined by counting occurrences of
+ `\(' starting from the left.
+
+ Lines may be split by substituting new-line characters
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1)
+
+
+
+ into them. The new-line in the replacement string must
+ be escaped by preceding it by `\'.
+
+ One or two trailing delimiters may be omitted, implying
+ the `p' suffix. The special form `s' followed by _\bn_\bo
+ delimiters repeats the most recent substitute command
+ on the addressed lines. The `s' may be followed by the
+ letters r\br (use the most recent regular expression for
+ the left hand side, instead of the most recent left
+ hand side of a substitute command), p\bp (complement the
+ setting of the _\bp suffix from the previous substitu-
+ tion), or g\bg (complement the setting of the _\bg suffix).
+ These letters may be combined in any order.
+
+ (.\b., .\b.)t_\ba
+ This command acts just like the _\bm command, except that
+ a copy of the addressed lines is placed after address _\ba
+ (which may be 0). `.\b.' is left on the last line of the
+ copy.
+
+ (.\b., .\b.)u
+ The undo command restores the buffer to it's state
+ before the most recent buffer modifying command. The
+ current line is also restored. Buffer modifying com-
+ mands are _\ba, _\bc, _\bd, _\bg, _\bi, _\bk, and _\bv. For purposes of
+ undo, _\bg and _\bv are considered to be a single buffer
+ modifying command. Undo is its own inverse.
+
+ When _\be_\bd runs out of memory (at about 8000 lines on any
+ 16 bit mini-computer such as the PDP-11) This full undo
+ is not possible, and _\bu can only undo the effect of the
+ most recent substitute on the current line. This res-
+ tricted undo also applies to editor scripts when _\be_\bd is
+ invoked with the -\b- option.
+
+ (1, $)v/regular expression/command list
+ This command is the same as the global command _\bg except
+ that the command list is executed _\bg with `.\b.' initially
+ set to every line _\be_\bx_\bc_\be_\bp_\bt those matching the regular
+ expression.
+
+ (1, $)w filename
+ The write command writes the addressed lines onto the
+ given file. If the file does not exist, it is created.
+ The file name is remembered if there was no remembered
+ file name already. If no file name is given, the
+ remembered file name, if any, is used (see _\be and _\bf com-
+ mands). `.\b.' is unchanged. If the command is success-
+ ful, the number of characters written is printed.
+
+ (1, $)W filename
+ This command is the same as _\bw, except that the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1)
+
+
+
+ addressed lines are appended to the file.
+
+ (1, $)wq filename
+ This command is the same as _\bw except that afterwards a
+ _\bq command is done, exiting the editor after the file is
+ written.
+
+ x A key string is demanded from the standard input.
+ Later _\br, _\be and _\bw commands will encrypt and decrypt the
+ text with this key by the algorithm of _\bc_\br_\by_\bp_\bt(1). An
+ explicitly empty key turns off encryption.
+ (.\b.+1)z or,
+ (.\b.+1)z_\bn
+ This command scrolls through the buffer starting at the
+ addressed line. 22 (or _\bn, if given) lines are printed.
+ The last line printed becomes the current line. The
+ value _\bn is sticky, in that it becomes the default for
+ future _\bz commands.
+
+ ($)= The line number of the addressed line is typed. `.\b.' is
+ unchanged by this command.
+
+ !<shell command>
+ The remainder of the line after the `!' is sent to
+ _\bs_\bh(1) to be interpreted as a command. `.\b.' is
+ unchanged.
+
+ (.\b.+1,.\b.+1)<newline>
+ An address alone on a line causes the addressed line to
+ be printed. A blank line alone is equivalent to
+ `.+1p'; it is useful for stepping through text. If two
+ addresses are present with no intervening semicolon, _\be_\bd
+ prints the range of lines. If they are separated by a
+ semicolon, the second line is printed.
+
+ If an interrupt signal (ASCII DEL) is sent, _\be_\bd prints
+ `?interrupted' and returns to its command level.
+
+ Some size limitations: 512 characters per line, 256 charac-
+ ters per global command list, 64 characters per file name,
+ and, on mini computers, 128K characters in the temporary
+ file. The limit on the number of lines depends on the
+ amount of core: each line takes 2 words.
+
+ When reading a file, _\be_\bd discards ASCII NUL characters and
+ all characters after the last newline. It refuses to read
+ files containing non-ASCII characters.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/e*
+ edhup: work is saved here if terminal hangs up
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ED(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ B. W. Kernighan, _\bA _\bT_\bu_\bt_\bo_\br_\bi_\ba_\bl _\bI_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bt_\bo _\bt_\bh_\be _\bE_\bD _\bT_\be_\bx_\bt _\bE_\bd_\bi_\b-
+ _\bt_\bo_\br
+ B. W. Kernighan, _\bA_\bd_\bv_\ba_\bn_\bc_\be_\bd _\be_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bo_\bn _\bU_\bN_\bI_\bX
+ ex(1), sed(1), crypt(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ `?name' for inaccessible file; `?self-explanatory message'
+ for other errors.
+
+ To protect against throwing away valuable work, a _\bq or _\be
+ command is considered to be in error, unless a _\bw has
+ occurred since the last buffer change. A second _\bq or _\be will
+ be obeyed regardless.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The _\bl command mishandles DEL.
+ The _\bu_\bn_\bd_\bo command causes marks to be lost on affected lines.
+ The _\bx command, -\b-x\bx option, and special treatment of hangups
+ only work on UNIX.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 9
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+EX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EX(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ex, edit - text editor
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\bex\bx [ -\b- ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-t\bt tag ] [ -\b-r\br ] [ +\b+_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd ] [ -\b-l\bl ] name
+ ...
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt [ ex options ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bx is the root of a family of editors: _\be_\bd_\bi_\bt, _\be_\bx and _\bv_\bi. _\bE_\bx
+ is a superset of _\be_\bd, with the most notable extension being a
+ display editing facility. Display based editing is the
+ focus of _\bv_\bi.
+
+ If you have not used _\be_\bd, or are a casual user, you will find
+ that the editor _\be_\bd_\bi_\bt is convenient for you. It avoids some
+ of the complexities of _\be_\bx used mostly by systems programmers
+ and persons very familiar with _\be_\bd.
+
+ If you have a CRT terminal, you may wish to use a display
+ based editor; in this case see _\bv_\bi(1), which is a command
+ which focuses on the display editing portion of _\be_\bx.
+
+D\bDO\bOC\bCU\bUM\bME\bEN\bNT\bTA\bAT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The document _\bE_\bd_\bi_\bt: _\bA _\bt_\bu_\bt_\bo_\br_\bi_\ba_\bl (USD:14) provides a comprehen-
+ sive introduction to _\be_\bd_\bi_\bt assuming no previous knowledge of
+ computers or the UNIX system.
+
+ The _\bE_\bx _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br_\be_\bn_\bc_\be _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl - _\bV_\be_\br_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn _\b3._\b7 (USD:16) is a
+ comprehensive and complete manual for the command mode
+ features of _\be_\bx, but you cannot learn to use the editor by
+ reading it. For an introduction to more advanced forms of
+ editing using the command mode of _\be_\bx see the editing docu-
+ ments written by Brian Kernighan for the editor _\be_\bd; the
+ material in the introductory and advanced documents works
+ also with _\be_\bx.
+
+ _\bA_\bn _\bI_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bt_\bo _\bD_\bi_\bs_\bp_\bl_\ba_\by _\bE_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bw_\bi_\bt_\bh _\bV_\bi (USD:15) intro-
+ duces the display editor _\bv_\bi and provides reference material
+ on _\bv_\bi. In addition, the _\bV_\bi _\bQ_\bu_\bi_\bc_\bk _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br_\be_\bn_\bc_\be card summarizes
+ the commands of _\bv_\bi in a useful, functional way, and is use-
+ ful with the _\bI_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/ex?.?strings error messages
+ /usr/lib/ex?.?recover recover command
+ /usr/lib/ex?.?preserve preserve command
+ /etc/termcap describes capabilities of terminals
+ ~/.exrc editor startup file
+ /tmp/Ex_\bn_\bn_\bn_\bn_\bn editor temporary
+ /tmp/Rx_\bn_\bn_\bn_\bn_\bn named buffer temporary
+ /usr/preserve preservation directory
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EX(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ awk(1), ed(1), grep(1), sed(1), grep(1), vi(1), termcap(5),
+ environ(7)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Originally written by William Joy
+ Mark Horton has maintained the editor since version 2.7,
+ adding macros, support for many unusual terminals, and other
+ features such as word abbreviation mode.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The _\bu_\bn_\bd_\bo command causes all marks to be lost on lines
+ changed and then restored if the marked lines were changed.
+
+ _\bU_\bn_\bd_\bo never clears the buffer modified condition.
+
+ The _\bz command prints a number of logical rather than physi-
+ cal lines. More than a screen full of output may result if
+ long lines are present.
+
+ File input/output errors don't print a name if the command
+ line `\b`-\b-'\b' option is used.
+
+ There is no easy way to do a single scan ignoring case.
+
+ The editor does not warn if text is placed in named buffers
+ and not used before exiting the editor.
+
+ Null characters are discarded in input files, and cannot
+ appear in resultant files.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+EFL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EFL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ efl - Extended Fortran Language
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\bef\bfl\bl [ option ... ] [ filename ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bf_\bl compiles a program written in the EFL language into
+ clean Fortran. _\bE_\bf_\bl provides the same control flow con-
+ structs as does _\br_\ba_\bt_\bf_\bo_\br(1), which are essentially identical
+ to those in C:
+
+ statement grouping with braces;
+ decision-making with if, if-else, and switch-case;
+ while, for, Fortran do, repeat, and repeat...until
+ loops; multi-level break and next. In addition, EFL
+ has C-like data structures, and more uniform and con-
+ venient input/output syntax, generic functions. EFL
+ also provides some syntactic sugar to make programs
+ easier to read and write:
+
+ free form input:
+ multiple statements/line; automatic continuation state-
+ ment label names (not just numbers),
+
+ comments:
+ # this is a comment
+
+ translation of relationals:
+ >, >=, etc., become .GT., .GE., etc.
+
+ return (expression)
+ returns expression to caller from function
+
+ define:
+ define name replacement
+
+ include:
+ include filename
+
+ The Efl command option -\b-w\bw suppresses warning messages. The
+ option -\b-C\bC causes comments to be copied through to the For-
+ tran output (default); -\b-#\b# prevents comments from being
+ copied through. If a command argument contains an embedded
+ equal sign, that argument is treated as if it had appeared
+ in an o\bop\bpt\bti\bio\bon\bn statement at the beginning of the program. _\bE_\bf_\bl
+ is best used with _\bf_\b7_\b7(1).
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ f77(1), ratfor(1).
+ S. I. Feldman, _\bT_\bh_\be _\bP_\br_\bo_\bg_\br_\ba_\bm_\bm_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bL_\ba_\bn_\bg_\bu_\ba_\bg_\be _\bE_\bF_\bL, Bell Labs Com-
+ puting Science Technical Report #78.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ grep, egrep, fgrep - search a file for a pattern
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ g\bgr\bre\bep\bp [ option ] ... expression [ file ] ...
+
+ e\beg\bgr\bre\bep\bp [ option ] ... [ expression ] [ file ] ...
+
+ f\bfg\bgr\bre\bep\bp [ option ] ... [ strings ] [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ Commands of the _\bg_\br_\be_\bp family search the input _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs (standard
+ input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each
+ line found is copied to the standard output. _\bG_\br_\be_\bp patterns
+ are limited regular expressions in the style of _\be_\bx(1); it
+ uses a compact nondeterministic algorithm. _\bE_\bg_\br_\be_\bp patterns
+ are full regular expressions; it uses a fast deterministic
+ algorithm that sometimes needs exponential space. _\bF_\bg_\br_\be_\bp
+ patterns are fixed strings; it is fast and compact. The
+ following options are recognized.
+
+ -\b-v\bv All lines but those matching are printed.
+
+ -\b-x\bx (Exact) only lines matched in their entirety are
+ printed (_\bf_\bg_\br_\be_\bp only).
+
+ -\b-c\bc Only a count of matching lines is printed.
+
+ -\b-l\bl The names of files with matching lines are listed
+ (once) separated by newlines.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Each line is preceded by its relative line number in
+ the file.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Each line is preceded by the block number on which it
+ was found. This is sometimes useful in locating disk
+ block numbers by context.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Never print filename headers with output lines.
+
+ -\b-o\bo Always print filename headers with output lines.
+
+ -\b-i\bi The case of letters is ignored in making comparisons -
+ that is, upper and lower case are considered identical.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Silent mode. Nothing is printed (except error mes-
+ sages). This is useful for checking the error status.
+
+ -\b-w\bw The expression is searched for as a word (as if sur-
+ rounded by `\<' and `\>', see _\be_\bx(1).) (_\bg_\br_\be_\bp only)
+
+ -\b-e\be _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
+
+
+
+ Same as a simple _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn argument, but useful when
+ the _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn begins with a -.
+
+ -\b-f\bf _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ The regular expression (_\be_\bg_\br_\be_\bp) or string list (_\bf_\bg_\br_\be_\bp)
+ is taken from the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+ In all cases the file name is shown if there is more than
+ one input file. Care should be taken when using the charac-
+ ters $ * [ ^ | ( ) and \ in the _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn as they are also
+ meaningful to the Shell. It is safest to enclose the entire
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn argument in single quotes ' '.
+
+ _\bF_\bg_\br_\be_\bp searches for lines that contain one of the (newline-
+ separated) _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs.
+
+ _\bE_\bg_\br_\be_\bp accepts extended regular expressions. In the follow-
+ ing description `character' excludes newline:
+
+ A \ followed by a single character other than newline
+ matches that character.
+
+ The character ^ matches the beginning of a line.
+
+ The character $ matches the end of a line.
+
+ A .\b. (period) matches any character.
+
+ A single character not otherwise endowed with special
+ meaning matches that character.
+
+ A string enclosed in brackets [] matches any single
+ character from the string. Ranges of ASCII character
+ codes may be abbreviated as in `a-z0-9'. A ] may occur
+ only as the first character of the string. A literal -
+ must be placed where it can't be mistaken as a range
+ indicator.
+
+ A regular expression followed by an * (asterisk)
+ matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the regular
+ expression. A regular expression followed by a +
+ (plus) matches a sequence of 1 or more matches of the
+ regular expression. A regular expression followed by a
+ ? (question mark) matches a sequence of 0 or 1 matches
+ of the regular expression.
+
+ Two regular expressions concatenated match a match of
+ the first followed by a match of the second.
+
+ Two regular expressions separated by | or newline match
+ either a match for the first or a match for the second.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
+
+
+
+ A regular expression enclosed in parentheses matches a
+ match for the regular expression.
+
+ The order of precedence of operators at the same parenthesis
+ level is [] then *+? then concatenation then | and newline.
+
+ Ideally there should be only one _\bg_\br_\be_\bp, but we don't know a
+ single algorithm that spans a wide enough range of space-
+ time tradeoffs.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ex(1), sed(1), sh(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, 1 if none, 2 for
+ syntax errors or inaccessible files.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Lines are limited to 256 characters; longer lines are trun-
+ cated.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+XSEND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSEND(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ xsend, xget, enroll - secret mail
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ x\bxs\bse\ben\bnd\bd person
+ x\bxg\bge\bet\bt
+ e\ben\bnr\bro\bol\bll\bl
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ These commands implement a secure communication channel; it
+ is like _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(1), but no one can read the messages except the
+ intended recipient. The method embodies a public-key cryp-
+ tosystem using knapsacks.
+
+ To receive messages, use _\be_\bn_\br_\bo_\bl_\bl; it asks you for a password
+ that you must subsequently quote in order to receive secret
+ mail.
+
+ To receive secret mail, use _\bx_\bg_\be_\bt. It asks for your pass-
+ word, then gives you the messages.
+
+ To send secret mail, use _\bx_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd in the same manner as the
+ ordinary mail command. (However, it will accept only one
+ target). A message announcing the receipt of secret mail is
+ also sent by ordinary mail.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/secretmail/*.key: keys
+ /usr/spool/secretmail/*.[0-9]: messages
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mail (1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ It should be integrated with ordinary mail. The announce-
+ ment of secret mail makes traffic analysis possible.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ eqn, neqn, checkeq - typeset mathematics
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\beq\bqn\bn [ -\b-d\bdxy ] [ -\b-p\bpn ] [ -\b-s\bsn ] [ -\b-f\bfn ] [ file ] ...
+ c\bch\bhe\bec\bck\bke\beq\bq [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bq_\bn is a troff(1) preprocessor for typesetting mathematics
+ on a Graphic Systems phototypesetter, _\bn_\be_\bq_\bn on terminals.
+ Usage is almost always
+
+ eqn file ... | troff
+ neqn file ... | nroff
+
+ If no files are specified, these programs reads from the
+ standard input. A line beginning with `.EQ' marks the start
+ of an equation; the end of an equation is marked by a line
+ beginning with `.EN'. Neither of these lines is altered, so
+ they may be defined in macro packages to get centering,
+ numbering, etc. It is also possible to set two characters
+ as `delimiters'; subsequent text between delimiters is also
+ treated as _\be_\bq_\bn input. Delimiters may be set to characters _\bx
+ and _\by with the command-line argument -\b-d\bd_\bx_\by or (more commonly)
+ with `delim _\bx_\by' between .EQ and .EN. The left and right
+ delimiters may be identical. Delimiters are turned off by
+ `delim off'. All text that is neither between delimiters
+ nor between .EQ and .EN is passed through untouched.
+
+ The program _\bc_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\be_\bq reports missing or unbalanced delimiters
+ and .EQ/.EN pairs.
+
+ Tokens within _\be_\bq_\bn are separated by spaces, tabs, newlines,
+ braces, double quotes, tildes or circumflexes. Braces {}
+ are used for grouping; generally speaking, anywhere a single
+ character like _\bx could appear, a complicated construction
+ enclosed in braces may be used instead. Tilde ~ represents
+ a full space in the output, circumflex ^ half as much.
+
+ Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords
+ s\bsu\bub\bb and s\bsu\bup\bp.\b. Thus _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi makes _\bx_\bi, _\ba _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 produces
+ _\ba_\bi
+ 2
+ , and _\be _\bs_\bu_\bp {_\bx _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 + _\by _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2} gives _\be
+ _\bx2+_\by2
+ .
+
+
+ Fractions are made with o\bov\bve\ber\br: _\ba _\bo_\bv_\be_\br _\bb yields
+ _\bb
+
+ _\ba\b_.
+
+
+ s\bsq\bqr\brt\bt makes square roots: _\b1 _\bo_\bv_\be_\br _\bs_\bq_\br_\bt {_\ba_\bx _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 +_\bb_\bx+_\bc}
+
+ results in
+ v\b/~~~~~~~~\b\b\b\b\b\b\b\b_\ba_\bx
+ 2
+ +_\bb_\bx+_\bc
+
+ 1\b\b\b\b\b_________ .
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1)
+
+
+
+ The keywords f\bfr\bro\bom\bm and t\bto\bo introduce lower and upper limits on
+
+ arbitrary things:
+ _\bn->oo
+ lim
+ 0
+ _\b>\b_\b~
+ _\bn
+ _\bx_\bi is made with _\bl_\bi_\bm _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm {_\bn-> _\bi_\bn_\bf }
+
+ _\bs_\bu_\bm _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm _\b0 _\bt_\bo _\bn _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi.
+
+ Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height
+ are made with l\ble\bef\bft\bt and r\bri\big\bgh\bht\bt:\b: _\bl_\be_\bf_\bt [ _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 + _\by _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 _\bo_\bv_\be_\br
+
+ _\ba_\bl_\bp_\bh_\ba _\br_\bi_\bg_\bh_\bt ] ~=~_\b1 produces
+ |\b
+ |\b
+ |
+ _\bx
+ 2
+ +
+ _\bo\b(
+
+ _\by
+ 2
+ __
+ |\b
+ |\b
+ |
+ = 1. The r\bri\big\bgh\bht\bt clause
+
+ is optional. Legal characters after l\ble\bef\bft\bt and r\bri\big\bgh\bht\bt are
+ braces, brackets, bars, c\bc and f\bf for ceiling and floor, and
+ "" for nothing at all (useful for a right-side-only
+ bracket).
+
+ Vertical piles of things are made with p\bpi\bil\ble\be, l\blp\bpi\bil\ble\be, c\bcp\bpi\bil\ble\be,
+
+ and r\brp\bpi\bil\ble\be: _\bp_\bi_\bl_\be {_\ba _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be _\bb _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be _\bc} produces
+ _\bc
+ _\bb
+ _\ba
+
+ . There can
+
+ be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. l\blp\bpi\bil\ble\be left-
+ justifies, p\bpi\bil\ble\be and c\bcp\bpi\bil\ble\be center, with different vertical
+ spacing, and r\brp\bpi\bil\ble\be right justifies.
+
+ Matrices are made with m\bma\bat\btr\bri\bix\bx: _\bm_\ba_\bt_\br_\bi_\bx { _\bl_\bc_\bo_\bl { _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be
+
+ _\by _\bs_\bu_\bb _\b2 } _\bc_\bc_\bo_\bl { _\b1 _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be _\b2 } } produces
+ _\by2
+
+ _\bx_\bi
+
+
+ 2
+
+ 1
+
+ . In addition,
+
+ there is r\brc\bco\bol\bl for a right-justified column.
+
+ Diacritical marks are made with d\bdo\bot\bt, d\bdo\bot\btd\bdo\bot\bt, h\bha\bat\bt, t\bti\bil\bld\bde\be,
+ b\bba\bar\br, v\bve\bec\bc, d\bdy\bya\bad\bd, and u\bun\bnd\bde\ber\br: _\bx _\bd_\bo_\bt = _\bf(_\bt) _\bb_\ba_\br is _\bx\b.=_\bf(_\bt)\b\b\b\b~~~~, _\by
+ _\bd_\bo_\bt_\bd_\bo_\bt _\bb_\ba_\br ~=~ _\bn _\bu_\bn_\bd_\be_\br is _\by\b..\b\b~ = _\bn\b_, and _\bx _\bv_\be_\bc ~=~ _\by _\bd_\by_\ba_\bd is
+ _\bx\b->= _\by\b<-\b\b->\b.
+
+ Sizes and font can be changed with s\bsi\biz\bze\be _\bn or s\bsi\biz\bze\be +\b+\b\b\b_\b__\bn, r\bro\bom\bma\ban\bn,
+ i\bit\bta\bal\bli\bic\bc, b\bbo\bol\bld\bd, and f\bfo\bon\bnt\bt _\bn. Size and fonts can be changed glo-
+ bally in a document by g\bgs\bsi\biz\bze\be _\bn and g\bgf\bfo\bon\bnt\bt _\bn, or by the
+ command-line arguments -\b-s\bs_\bn and -\b-f\bf_\bn.
+
+ Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by 3 point
+ sizes from the previous size; this may be changed by the
+ command-line argument -\b-p\bp_\bn.
+
+ Successive display arguments can be lined up. Place m\bma\bar\brk\bk
+ before the desired lineup point in the first equation; place
+ l\bli\bin\bne\beu\bup\bp at the place that is to line up vertically in subse-
+ quent equations.
+
+ Shorthands may be defined or existing keywords redefined
+ with d\bde\bef\bfi\bin\bne\be: _\bd_\be_\bf_\bi_\bn_\be _\bt_\bh_\bi_\bn_\bg % _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt % defines a new
+ token called _\bt_\bh_\bi_\bn_\bg which will be replaced by _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1)
+
+
+
+ whenever it appears thereafter. The % may be any character
+ that does not occur in _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt.
+
+ Keywords like _\bs_\bu_\bm (_\b>\b_\b~) _\bi_\bn_\bt () _\bi_\bn_\bf (oo) and shorthands like >=
+ (>\b_) -> (->), and != (=\b/) are recognized. Greek letters are
+ spelled out in the desired case, as in _\ba_\bl_\bp_\bh_\ba or _\bG_\bA_\bM_\bM_\bA.
+ Mathematical words like sin, cos, log are made Roman
+ automatically. _\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1) four-character escapes like \(bs ()
+ can be used anywhere. Strings enclosed in double quotes
+ "..." are passed through untouched; this permits keywords to
+ be entered as text, and can be used to communicate with
+ _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf when all else fails.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ troff(1), tbl(1), ms(7), eqnchar(7)
+ B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, _\bT_\by_\bp_\be_\bs_\be_\bt_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bM_\ba_\bt_\bh_\be_\bm_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bc_\bs-
+ _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bG_\bu_\bi_\bd_\be
+ J. F. Ossanna, _\bN_\bR_\bO_\bF_\bF/_\bT_\bR_\bO_\bF_\bF _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ To embolden digits, parens, etc., it is necessary to quote
+ them, as in `bold "12.3"'.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+ERROR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ERROR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ error - analyze and disperse compiler error messages
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\ber\brr\bro\bor\br [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-s\bs ] [ -\b-q\bq ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-t\bt suffixlist ] [ -\b-I\bI
+ ignorefile ] [ name ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br analyzes and optionally disperses the diagnostic error
+ messages produced by a number of compilers and language pro-
+ cessors to the source file and line where the errors
+ occurred. It can replace the painful, traditional methods
+ of scribbling abbreviations of errors on paper, and permits
+ error messages and source code to be viewed simultaneously
+ without machinations of multiple windows in a screen editor.
+
+ _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br looks at the error messages, either from the specified
+ file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be or from the standard input, and attempts to deter-
+ mine which language processor produced each error message,
+ determines the source file and line number to which the
+ error message refers, determines if the error message is to
+ be ignored or not, and inserts the (possibly slightly modi-
+ fied) error message into the source file as a comment on the
+ line preceding to which the line the error message refers.
+ Error messages which can't be categorized by language pro-
+ cessor or content are not inserted into any file, but are
+ sent to the standard output. _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br touches source files
+ only after all input has been read. By specifying the -\b-q\bq
+ query option, the user is asked to confirm any potentially
+ dangerous (such as touching a file) or verbose action. Oth-
+ erwise _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br proceeds on its merry business. If the -\b-t\bt
+ touch option and associated suffix list is given, _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br will
+ restrict itself to touch only those files with suffices in
+ the suffix list. Error also can be asked (by specifying -\b-v\bv)\b)
+ to invoke _\bv_\bi(1) on the files in which error messages were
+ inserted; this obviates the need to remember the names of
+ the files with errors.
+
+ _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br is intended to be run with its standard input con-
+ nected via a pipe to the error message source. Some
+ language processors put error messages on their standard
+ error file; others put their messages on the standard out-
+ put. Hence, both error sources should be piped together
+ into _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br. For example, when using the _\bc_\bs_\bh syntax,
+
+ make -s lint |& error -q -v
+
+ will analyze all the error messages produced by whatever
+ programs _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be runs when making lint.
+
+ _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br knows about the error messages produced by: _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be, _\bc_\bc,
+ _\bc_\bp_\bp, _\bc_\bc_\bo_\bm, _\ba_\bs, _\bl_\bd, _\bl_\bi_\bn_\bt, _\bp_\bi, _\bp_\bc, _\bf_\b7_\b7, and _\bD_\bE_\bC _\bW_\be_\bs_\bt_\be_\br_\bn
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ERROR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ERROR(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bR_\be_\bs_\be_\ba_\br_\bc_\bh _\bM_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bl_\ba-_\b2. _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br knows a standard format for error
+ messages produced by the language processors, so is sensi-
+ tive to changes in these formats. For all languages except
+ _\bP_\ba_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bl, error messages are restricted to be on one line.
+ Some error messages refer to more than one line in more than
+ one files; _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br will duplicate the error message and insert
+ it at all of the places referenced.
+
+ _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br will do one of six things with error messages.
+
+ _\bs_\by_\bn_\bc_\bh_\br_\bo_\bn_\bi_\bz_\be
+ Some language processors produce short errors
+ describing which file it is processing. _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br
+ uses these to determine the file name for
+ languages that don't include the file name in each
+ error message. These synchronization messages are
+ consumed entirely by _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br.
+
+ _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bc_\ba_\br_\bd Error messages from _\bl_\bi_\bn_\bt that refer to one of the
+ two _\bl_\bi_\bn_\bt libraries, /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\bl_\bl_\bi_\bb-_\bl_\bc and
+ /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\bl_\bl_\bi_\bb-_\bp_\bo_\br_\bt are discarded, to prevent
+ accidently touching these libraries. Again, these
+ error messages are consumed entirely by _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br.
+
+ _\bn_\bu_\bl_\bl_\bi_\bf_\by Error messages from _\bl_\bi_\bn_\bt can be nullified if they
+ refer to a specific function, which is known to
+ generate diagnostics which are not interesting.
+ Nullified error messages are not inserted into the
+ source file, but are written to the standard out-
+ put. The names of functions to ignore are taken
+ from either the file named ._\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br_\br_\bc in the users's
+ home directory, or from the file named by the -\b-I\bI
+ option. If the file does not exist, no error mes-
+ sages are nullified. If the file does exist,
+ there must be one function name per line.
+
+ _\bn_\bo_\bt _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be _\bs_\bp_\be_\bc_\bi_\bf_\bi_\bc
+ Error messages that can't be intuited are grouped
+ together, and written to the standard output
+ before any files are touched. They will not be
+ inserted into any source file.
+
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be _\bs_\bp_\be_\bc_\bi_\bf_\bi_\bc
+ Error message that refer to a specific file, but
+ to no specific line, are written to the standard
+ output when that file is touched.
+
+ _\bt_\br_\bu_\be _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br_\bs
+ Error messages that can be intuited are candidates
+ for insertion into the file to which they refer.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ERROR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ERROR(1)
+
+
+
+ Only true error messages are candidates for inserting into
+ the file they refer to. Other error messages are consumed
+ entirely by _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br or are written to the standard output.
+ _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br inserts the error messages into the source file on the
+ line preceding the line the language processor found in
+ error. Each error message is turned into a one line comment
+ for the language, and is internally flagged with the string
+ ``###'' at the beginning of the error, and ``%%%'' at the
+ end of the error. This makes pattern searching for errors
+ easier with an editor, and allows the messages to be easily
+ removed. In addition, each error message contains the
+ source line number for the line the message refers to. A
+ reasonably formatted source program can be recompiled with
+ the error messages still in it, without having the error
+ messages themselves cause future errors. For poorly format-
+ ted source programs in free format languages, such as C or
+ Pascal, it is possible to insert a comment into another com-
+ ment, which can wreak havoc with a future compilation. To
+ avoid this, programs with comments and source on the same
+ line should be formatted so that language statements appear
+ before comments.
+
+ Options available with _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br are:
+
+ -\b-n\bn Do _\bn_\bo_\bt touch any files; all error messages are sent to
+ the standard output.
+
+ -\b-q\bq The user is _\bq_\bu_\be_\br_\bi_\be_\bd whether s/he wants to touch the
+ file. A ``y'' or ``n'' to the question is necessary to
+ continue. Absence of the -\b-q\bq option implies that all
+ referenced files (except those referring to discarded
+ error messages) are to be touched.
+
+ -\b-v\bv After all files have been touched, overlay the visual
+ editor _\bv_\bi with it set up to edit all files touched, and
+ positioned in the first touched file at the first
+ error. If _\bv_\bi can't be found, try _\be_\bx or _\be_\bd from stan-
+ dard places.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Take the following argument as a suffix list. Files
+ whose suffixes do not appear in the suffix list are not
+ touched. The suffix list is dot separated, and ``*''
+ wildcards work. Thus the suffix list:
+
+ ".c.y.foo*.h"
+
+ allows _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br to touch files ending with ``.c'', ``.y'',
+ ``.foo*'' and ``.y''.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Print out _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bi_\bc_\bs regarding the error categoriza-
+ tion. Not too useful.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ERROR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ERROR(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br catches interrupt and terminate signals, and if in the
+ insertion phase, will orderly terminate what it is doing.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Robert Henry
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ ~/.errorrc function names to ignore for _\bl_\bi_\bn_\bt error
+ messages
+ /dev/tty user's teletype
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Opens the teletype directly to do user querying.
+
+ Source files with links make a new copy of the file with
+ only one link to it.
+
+ Changing a language processor's format of error messages may
+ cause _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br to not understand the error message.
+
+ _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br, since it is purely mechanical, will not filter out
+ subsequent errors caused by `floodgating' initiated by one
+ syntactically trivial error. Humans are still much better
+ at discarding these related errors.
+
+ Pascal error messages belong after the lines affected (error
+ puts them before). The alignment of the `|' marking the
+ point of error is also disturbed by _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br.
+
+ _\bE_\br_\br_\bo_\br was designed for work on CRT's at reasonably high
+ speed. It is less pleasant on slow speed terminals, and has
+ never been used on hardcopy terminals.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+EX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EX(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ex, edit - text editor
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\bex\bx [ -\b- ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-t\bt tag ] [ -\b-r\br ] [ +\b+_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd ] [ -\b-l\bl ] name
+ ...
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt [ ex options ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bx is the root of a family of editors: _\be_\bd_\bi_\bt, _\be_\bx and _\bv_\bi. _\bE_\bx
+ is a superset of _\be_\bd, with the most notable extension being a
+ display editing facility. Display based editing is the
+ focus of _\bv_\bi.
+
+ If you have not used _\be_\bd, or are a casual user, you will find
+ that the editor _\be_\bd_\bi_\bt is convenient for you. It avoids some
+ of the complexities of _\be_\bx used mostly by systems programmers
+ and persons very familiar with _\be_\bd.
+
+ If you have a CRT terminal, you may wish to use a display
+ based editor; in this case see _\bv_\bi(1), which is a command
+ which focuses on the display editing portion of _\be_\bx.
+
+D\bDO\bOC\bCU\bUM\bME\bEN\bNT\bTA\bAT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The document _\bE_\bd_\bi_\bt: _\bA _\bt_\bu_\bt_\bo_\br_\bi_\ba_\bl (USD:14) provides a comprehen-
+ sive introduction to _\be_\bd_\bi_\bt assuming no previous knowledge of
+ computers or the UNIX system.
+
+ The _\bE_\bx _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br_\be_\bn_\bc_\be _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl - _\bV_\be_\br_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn _\b3._\b7 (USD:16) is a
+ comprehensive and complete manual for the command mode
+ features of _\be_\bx, but you cannot learn to use the editor by
+ reading it. For an introduction to more advanced forms of
+ editing using the command mode of _\be_\bx see the editing docu-
+ ments written by Brian Kernighan for the editor _\be_\bd; the
+ material in the introductory and advanced documents works
+ also with _\be_\bx.
+
+ _\bA_\bn _\bI_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bt_\bo _\bD_\bi_\bs_\bp_\bl_\ba_\by _\bE_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bw_\bi_\bt_\bh _\bV_\bi (USD:15) intro-
+ duces the display editor _\bv_\bi and provides reference material
+ on _\bv_\bi. In addition, the _\bV_\bi _\bQ_\bu_\bi_\bc_\bk _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br_\be_\bn_\bc_\be card summarizes
+ the commands of _\bv_\bi in a useful, functional way, and is use-
+ ful with the _\bI_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/ex?.?strings error messages
+ /usr/lib/ex?.?recover recover command
+ /usr/lib/ex?.?preserve preserve command
+ /etc/termcap describes capabilities of terminals
+ ~/.exrc editor startup file
+ /tmp/Ex_\bn_\bn_\bn_\bn_\bn editor temporary
+ /tmp/Rx_\bn_\bn_\bn_\bn_\bn named buffer temporary
+ /usr/preserve preservation directory
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EX(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ awk(1), ed(1), grep(1), sed(1), grep(1), vi(1), termcap(5),
+ environ(7)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Originally written by William Joy
+ Mark Horton has maintained the editor since version 2.7,
+ adding macros, support for many unusual terminals, and other
+ features such as word abbreviation mode.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The _\bu_\bn_\bd_\bo command causes all marks to be lost on lines
+ changed and then restored if the marked lines were changed.
+
+ _\bU_\bn_\bd_\bo never clears the buffer modified condition.
+
+ The _\bz command prints a number of logical rather than physi-
+ cal lines. More than a screen full of output may result if
+ long lines are present.
+
+ File input/output errors don't print a name if the command
+ line `\b`-\b-'\b' option is used.
+
+ There is no easy way to do a single scan ignoring case.
+
+ The editor does not warn if text is placed in named buffers
+ and not used before exiting the editor.
+
+ Null characters are discarded in input files, and cannot
+ appear in resultant files.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+EXPAND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EXPAND(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ expand, unexpand - expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\bex\bxp\bpa\ban\bnd\bd [ -tabstop ] [ -tab1,tab2,...,tabn ] [ file ... ]
+ u\bun\bne\bex\bxp\bpa\ban\bnd\bd [ -\b-a\ba ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bx_\bp_\ba_\bn_\bd processes the named files or the standard input writ-
+ ing the standard output with tabs changed into blanks.
+ Backspace characters are preserved into the output and
+ decrement the column count for tab calculations. _\bE_\bx_\bp_\ba_\bn_\bd is
+ useful for pre-processing character files (before sorting,
+ looking at specific columns, etc.) that contain tabs.
+
+ If a single _\bt_\ba_\bb_\bs_\bt_\bo_\bp argument is given, then tabs are set
+ _\bt_\ba_\bb_\bs_\bt_\bo_\bp spaces apart instead of the default 8. If multiple
+ tabstops are given then the tabs are set at those specific
+ columns.
+
+ _\bU_\bn_\be_\bx_\bp_\ba_\bn_\bd puts tabs back into the data from the standard
+ input or the named files and writes the result on the stan-
+ dard output. By default, only leading blanks and tabs are
+ reconverted to maximal strings of tabs. If the -\b-a\ba option is
+ given, then tabs are inserted whenever they would compress
+ the resultant file by replacing two or more characters.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+DICTION(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual DICTION(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ diction, explain - print wordy sentences; thesaurus for dic-
+ tion
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ d\bdi\bic\bct\bti\bio\bon\bn [ -\b-m\bml\bl ] [ -\b-m\bmm\bm ] [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-f\bf pfile ] file ...
+ e\bex\bxp\bpl\bla\bai\bin\bn
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bD_\bi_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn finds all sentences in a document that contain
+ phrases from a data base of bad or wordy diction. Each
+ phrase is bracketed with [ ]. Because _\bd_\bi_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn runs _\bd_\be_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf
+ before looking at the text, formatting header files should
+ be included as part of the input. The default macro package
+ -\b-m\bms\bs may be overridden with the flag -\b-m\bmm\bm.\b. The flag -\b-m\bml\bl which
+ causes d\bde\ber\bro\bof\bff\bf to skip lists, should be used if the document
+ contains many lists of non-sentences. The user may supply
+ her/his own pattern file to be used in addition to the
+ default file with -\b-f\bf _\bp_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. If the flag -\b-n\bn is also supplied
+ the default file will be suppressed.
+
+ _\bE_\bx_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bi_\bn is an interactive thesaurus for the phrases found by
+ diction.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ deroff(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Use of non-standard formatting macros may cause incorrect
+ sentence breaks. In particular, _\bd_\bi_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn doesn't grok -\b-m\bme\be.\b.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+EXPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EXPR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ expr - evaluate arguments as an expression
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\bex\bxp\bpr\br arg .\b..\b..\b.
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The arguments are taken as an expression. After evaluation,
+ the result is written on the standard output. Each token of
+ the expression is a separate argument.
+
+ The operators and keywords are listed below. The list is in
+ order of increasing precedence, with equal precedence opera-
+ tors grouped.
+
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br | _\be_\bx_\bp_\br
+ yields the first _\be_\bx_\bp_\br if it is neither null nor `0',
+ otherwise yields the second _\be_\bx_\bp_\br.
+
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br & _\be_\bx_\bp_\br
+ yields the first _\be_\bx_\bp_\br if neither _\be_\bx_\bp_\br is null or `0',
+ otherwise yields `0'.
+
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br _\br_\be_\bl_\bo_\bp _\be_\bx_\bp_\br
+ where _\br_\be_\bl_\bo_\bp _\bi_\bs _\bo_\bn_\be _\bo_\bf < <= = != >= >, yields `1' if the
+ indicated comparison is true, `0' if false. The com-
+ parison is numeric if both _\be_\bx_\bp_\br are integers, otherwise
+ lexicographic.
+
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br + _\be_\bx_\bp_\br
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br - _\be_\bx_\bp_\br
+ addition or subtraction of the arguments.
+
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br * _\be_\bx_\bp_\br
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br / _\be_\bx_\bp_\br
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br % _\be_\bx_\bp_\br
+ multiplication, division, or remainder of the argu-
+ ments.
+
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br : _\be_\bx_\bp_\br
+ The matching operator compares the string first argu-
+ ment with the regular expression second argument; regu-
+ lar expression syntax is the same as that of _\be_\bd(1).
+ The \\b\(\b(.\b..\b..\b.\\b\)\b) pattern symbols can be used to select a
+ portion of the first argument. Otherwise, the matching
+ operator yields the number of characters matched (`0'
+ on failure).
+
+ ( _\be_\bx_\bp_\br )
+ parentheses for grouping.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EXPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EXPR(1)
+
+
+
+ Examples:
+
+ To add 1 to the Shell variable _\ba:
+
+ a=`expr $a + 1`
+
+ To find the filename part (least significant part) of the
+ pathname stored in variable _\ba, which may or may not contain
+ `/':
+
+ expr $a : '.*/\(.*\)' '|' $a
+
+ Note the quoted Shell metacharacters.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1), test(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ _\bE_\bx_\bp_\br returns the following exit codes:
+
+ 0 if the expression is neither null nor `0',
+ 1 if the expression is null or `0',
+ 2 for invalid expressions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+F77(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual F77(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ f77 - Fortran 77 compiler
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bf7\b77\b7 [ option ] ... file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bF_\b7_\b7 is the UNIX Fortran 77 compiler. It accepts several
+ types of arguments:
+
+ Arguments whose names end with `.f' are taken to be Fortran
+ 77 source programs; they are compiled, and each object pro-
+ gram is left on the file in the current directory whose name
+ is that of the source with `.o' substituted for '.f'.
+
+ Arguments whose names end with `.F' are also taken to be
+ Fortran 77 source programs; these are first processed by the
+ C preprocessor before being compiled by _\bf_\b7_\b7.
+
+ Arguments whose names end with `.r' or `.e' are taken to be
+ Ratfor or EFL source programs respectively; these are first
+ transformed by the appropriate preprocessor, then compiled
+ by f77.
+
+ Arguments whose names end with `.c' or `.s' are taken to be
+ C or assembly source programs and are compiled or assembled,
+ producing a `.o' file.
+
+ The following options have the same meaning as in _\bc_\bc(1).
+ See _\bl_\bd(1) for load-time options.
+
+ -\b-c\bc Suppress loading and produce `.o' files for each source
+ file.
+
+ -\b-g\bg Produce additional symbol table information for _\bd_\bb_\bx(1)
+ and pass the -\b-l\blg\bg flag to _\bl_\bd(1) so that on abnormal ter-
+ minations, the memory image is written to file _\bc_\bo_\br_\be.
+ Incompatible with -\b-O\bO.
+
+ -\b-o\bo output
+ Name the final output file _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt instead of `a.out'.
+
+ -\b-p\bp Prepare object files for profiling, see _\bp_\br_\bo_\bf(1).
+
+ -\b-p\bpg\bg Causes the compiler to produce counting code in the
+ manner of -\b-p\bp,\b, but invokes a run-time recording mechan-
+ ism that keeps more extensive statistics and produces a
+ _\bg_\bm_\bo_\bn._\bo_\bu_\bt file at normal termination. An execution pro-
+ file can then be generated by use of _\bg_\bp_\br_\bo_\bf(1).
+
+ -\b-w\bw Suppress all warning messages. If the option is
+ `-w66', only Fortran 66 compatibility warnings are
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+F77(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual F77(1)
+
+
+
+ suppressed.
+
+ -\b-D\bD_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=_\bd_\be_\bf
+
+ -\b-D\bD_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Define the _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the C preprocessor, as if by
+ `#define'. If no definition is given, the name is
+ defined as "1". (`.F' suffix files only).
+
+ -\b-I\bI_\bd_\bi_\br
+ `#include' files whose names do not begin with `/' are
+ always sought first in the directory of the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be argu-
+ ment, then in directories named in -\b-I\bI options, then in
+ directories on a standard list. (`.F' suffix files
+ only).
+
+ -\b-O\bO Invoke an object-code optimizer. Incompatible with -\b-g\bg.
+
+ -\b-S\bS Compile the named programs, and leave the assembler-
+ language output on corresponding files suffixed `.s'.
+ (No `.o' is created.).
+
+ The following options are peculiar to _\bf_\b7_\b7.
+
+ -\b-d\bd Used for debugging the compiler.
+
+ -\b-i\bi2\b2 On machines which support short integers, make the
+ default integer constants and variables short. (-\b-i\bi4\b4 is
+ the standard value of this option). All logical quanti-
+ ties will be short.
+
+ -\b-q\bq Suppress printing of file names and program unit names
+ during compilation.
+
+ -\b-m\bm Apply the M4 preprocessor to each `.r' file before
+ transforming it with the Ratfor or EFL preprocessor.
+
+ -\b-o\bon\bne\bet\btr\bri\bip\bp
+
+ -\b-1\b1 Compile DO loops that are performed at least once if
+ reached. (Fortran 77 DO loops are not performed at all
+ if the upper limit is smaller than the lower limit.)
+
+ -\b-r\br8\b8 Treat all floating point variables, constants, func-
+ tions and intrinsics as double precision and all com-
+ plex quantities as double complex.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Make the default type of a variable `undefined' rather
+ than using the default Fortran rules.
+
+ -\b-v\bv Print the version number of the compiler, and the name
+ of each pass as it executes.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+F77(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual F77(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-C\bC Compile code to check that subscripts are within
+ declared array bounds. For multi-dimensional arrays,
+ only the equivalent linear subscript is checked.
+
+ -\b-F\bF Apply the C preprocessor to `.F' files, and the EFL, or
+ Ratfor preprocessors to `.e' and `.r' files, put the
+ result in the file with the suffix changed to `.f', but
+ do not compile.
+
+ -\b-E\bE_\bx Use the string _\bx as an EFL option in processing `.e'
+ files.
+
+ -\b-R\bR_\bx Use the string _\bx as a Ratfor option in processing `.r'
+ files.
+
+ -\b-N\bN[q\bqx\bxs\bsc\bcn\bn]_\bn_\bn_\bn
+ Make static tables in the compiler bigger. The compiler
+ will complain if it overflows its tables and suggest
+ you apply one or more of these flags. These flags have
+ the following meanings:
+
+ q\bq Maximum number of equivalenced variables. Default
+ is 150.
+
+ x\bx Maximum number of external names (common block
+ names, subroutine and function names). Default is
+ 200.
+
+ s\bs Maximum number of statement numbers. Default is
+ 401.
+
+ c\bc Maximum depth of nesting for control statements
+ (e.g. DO loops). Default is 20.
+
+ n\bn Maximum number of identifiers. Default is 1009.
+
+ -\b-U\bU Do not convert upper case letters to lower case. The
+ default is to convert Fortran programs to lower case
+ except within character string constants.
+
+ Other arguments are taken to be either loader option argu-
+ ments, or F77-compatible object programs, typically produced
+ by an earlier run, or perhaps libraries of F77-compatible
+ routines. These programs, together with the results of any
+ compilations specified, are loaded (in the order given) to
+ produce an executable program with name `a.out'.
+
+ Programs compiled with _\bf_\b7_\b7 produce memory dumps in file _\bc_\bo_\br_\be
+ upon abnormal termination if the -\b-g\bg flag was specified dur-
+ ing loading. If the environment variable _\bf_\b7_\b7__\bd_\bu_\bm_\bp__\bf_\bl_\ba_\bg is
+ set to a value beginning with y\by or n\bn, dumps for abnormal
+ terminations are respectively forced or suppressed.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+F77(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual F77(1)
+
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ file.[fFresc] input file
+ file.o object file
+ a.out loaded output
+ /usr/lib/f77pass1 compiler
+ /lib/f1 pass 2
+ /lib/c2 optional optimizer
+ /lib/cpp C preprocessor
+ /usr/lib/libF77.a intrinsic function library
+ /usr/lib/libI77.a Fortran I/O library
+ /usr/lib/libU77.a UNIX interface library
+ /usr/lib/libm.a math library
+ /lib/libc.a C library, see section 3
+ /usr/lib/libF77_p.a profiling intrinsic function library
+ /usr/lib/libI77_p.a profiling Fortran I/O library
+ /usr/lib/libU77_p.a profiling UNIX interface library
+ /usr/lib/libm_p.a profiling math library
+ /usr/lib/libc_p.a profiling C library, see section 3
+ mon.out file produced for analysis by prof(1).
+ gmon.out file produced for analysis by gprof(1).
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ S. I. Feldman, P. J. Weinberger, J. Berkman, _\bA _\bP_\bo_\br_\bt_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be _\bF_\bo_\br_\b-
+ _\bt_\br_\ba_\bn _\b7_\b7 _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bi_\bl_\be_\br
+ D. L. Wasley, J. Berkman, _\bI_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bt_\bo _\bt_\bh_\be _\bf_\b7_\b7 _\bI/_\bO
+ _\bL_\bi_\bb_\br_\ba_\br_\by
+ fpr(1), fsplit(1), ld(1), ar(1), ranlib(1), dbx(1),
+ intro(3f)
+ efl(1), ratfor(1), struct(1), prof(1), gprof(1), cc(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ The diagnostics produced by _\bf_\b7_\b7 itself are intended to be
+ self-explanatory. Occasional messages may be produced by
+ the loader.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Files longer than about 50,000 lines must be split up to be
+ compiled.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FALSE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FALSE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ false, true - provide truth values
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btr\bru\bue\be
+
+ f\bfa\bal\bls\bse\be
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\br_\bu_\be and _\bf_\ba_\bl_\bs_\be are usually used in a Bourne shell script.
+ They test for the appropriate status "true" or "false"
+ before running (or failing to run) a list of commands.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bE
+
+ while false
+ do
+ command list
+ done
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), sh(1), true(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ _\bF_\ba_\bl_\bs_\be has exit status nonzero.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ grep, egrep, fgrep - search a file for a pattern
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ g\bgr\bre\bep\bp [ option ] ... expression [ file ] ...
+
+ e\beg\bgr\bre\bep\bp [ option ] ... [ expression ] [ file ] ...
+
+ f\bfg\bgr\bre\bep\bp [ option ] ... [ strings ] [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ Commands of the _\bg_\br_\be_\bp family search the input _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs (standard
+ input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each
+ line found is copied to the standard output. _\bG_\br_\be_\bp patterns
+ are limited regular expressions in the style of _\be_\bx(1); it
+ uses a compact nondeterministic algorithm. _\bE_\bg_\br_\be_\bp patterns
+ are full regular expressions; it uses a fast deterministic
+ algorithm that sometimes needs exponential space. _\bF_\bg_\br_\be_\bp
+ patterns are fixed strings; it is fast and compact. The
+ following options are recognized.
+
+ -\b-v\bv All lines but those matching are printed.
+
+ -\b-x\bx (Exact) only lines matched in their entirety are
+ printed (_\bf_\bg_\br_\be_\bp only).
+
+ -\b-c\bc Only a count of matching lines is printed.
+
+ -\b-l\bl The names of files with matching lines are listed
+ (once) separated by newlines.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Each line is preceded by its relative line number in
+ the file.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Each line is preceded by the block number on which it
+ was found. This is sometimes useful in locating disk
+ block numbers by context.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Never print filename headers with output lines.
+
+ -\b-o\bo Always print filename headers with output lines.
+
+ -\b-i\bi The case of letters is ignored in making comparisons -
+ that is, upper and lower case are considered identical.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Silent mode. Nothing is printed (except error mes-
+ sages). This is useful for checking the error status.
+
+ -\b-w\bw The expression is searched for as a word (as if sur-
+ rounded by `\<' and `\>', see _\be_\bx(1).) (_\bg_\br_\be_\bp only)
+
+ -\b-e\be _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
+
+
+
+ Same as a simple _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn argument, but useful when
+ the _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn begins with a -.
+
+ -\b-f\bf _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ The regular expression (_\be_\bg_\br_\be_\bp) or string list (_\bf_\bg_\br_\be_\bp)
+ is taken from the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+ In all cases the file name is shown if there is more than
+ one input file. Care should be taken when using the charac-
+ ters $ * [ ^ | ( ) and \ in the _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn as they are also
+ meaningful to the Shell. It is safest to enclose the entire
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn argument in single quotes ' '.
+
+ _\bF_\bg_\br_\be_\bp searches for lines that contain one of the (newline-
+ separated) _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs.
+
+ _\bE_\bg_\br_\be_\bp accepts extended regular expressions. In the follow-
+ ing description `character' excludes newline:
+
+ A \ followed by a single character other than newline
+ matches that character.
+
+ The character ^ matches the beginning of a line.
+
+ The character $ matches the end of a line.
+
+ A .\b. (period) matches any character.
+
+ A single character not otherwise endowed with special
+ meaning matches that character.
+
+ A string enclosed in brackets [] matches any single
+ character from the string. Ranges of ASCII character
+ codes may be abbreviated as in `a-z0-9'. A ] may occur
+ only as the first character of the string. A literal -
+ must be placed where it can't be mistaken as a range
+ indicator.
+
+ A regular expression followed by an * (asterisk)
+ matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the regular
+ expression. A regular expression followed by a +
+ (plus) matches a sequence of 1 or more matches of the
+ regular expression. A regular expression followed by a
+ ? (question mark) matches a sequence of 0 or 1 matches
+ of the regular expression.
+
+ Two regular expressions concatenated match a match of
+ the first followed by a match of the second.
+
+ Two regular expressions separated by | or newline match
+ either a match for the first or a match for the second.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
+
+
+
+ A regular expression enclosed in parentheses matches a
+ match for the regular expression.
+
+ The order of precedence of operators at the same parenthesis
+ level is [] then *+? then concatenation then | and newline.
+
+ Ideally there should be only one _\bg_\br_\be_\bp, but we don't know a
+ single algorithm that spans a wide enough range of space-
+ time tradeoffs.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ex(1), sed(1), sh(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, 1 if none, 2 for
+ syntax errors or inaccessible files.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Lines are limited to 256 characters; longer lines are trun-
+ cated.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FILE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FILE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ file - determine file type
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bfi\bil\ble\be file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bF_\bi_\bl_\be performs a series of tests on each argument in an
+ attempt to classify it. If an argument appears to be ascii,
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be examines the first 512 bytes and tries to guess its
+ language.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ It often makes mistakes. In particular it often suggests
+ that command files are C programs.
+
+ Does not recognize Pascal or LISP.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FINGER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FINGER(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ finger - user information lookup program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bfi\bin\bng\bge\ber\br [ options ] name ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ By default _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br lists the login name, full name, terminal
+ name and write status (as a `*' before the terminal name if
+ write permission is denied), idle time, login time, and
+ office location and phone number (if they are known) for
+ each current UNIX user. (Idle time is minutes if it is a
+ single integer, hours and minutes if a ':' is present, or
+ days and hours if a 'd' is present.)
+
+ A longer format also exists and is used by _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br whenever a
+ list of people's names is given. (Account names as well as
+ first and last names of users are accepted.) This format is
+ multi-line, and includes all the information described above
+ as well as the user's home directory and login shell, any
+ plan which the person has placed in the file ._\bp_\bl_\ba_\bn in their
+ home directory, and the project on which they are working
+ from the file ._\bp_\br_\bo_\bj_\be_\bc_\bt also in the home directory.
+
+ _\bF_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br may be used to lookup users on a remote machine. The
+ format is to specify the user as ``user@host.'' If the user
+ name is left off, the standard format listing is provided on
+ the remote machine.
+
+ _\bF_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br options include:
+
+ -\b-m\bm Match arguments only on user name.
+
+ -\b-l\bl Force long output format.
+
+ -\b-p\bp Suppress printing of the ._\bp_\bl_\ba_\bn files
+
+ -\b-s\bs Force short output format.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/utmp who file
+ /etc/passwd for users names, offices, ...
+ /usr/adm/lastlog last login times
+ ~/.plan plans
+ ~/.project projects
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ chfn(1), w(1), who(1)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Earl T. Cohen
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FINGER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FINGER(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Only the first line of the ._\bp_\br_\bo_\bj_\be_\bc_\bt file is printed.
+
+ The encoding of the gcos field is UCB dependent - it knows
+ that an office `197MC' is `197M Cory Hall', and that `529BE'
+ is `529B Evans Hall'. It also knows that a four digit
+ office phone number should have a ``x2-'' prepended.
+
+ There is no way to pass arguments to the remote machine as
+ _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br uses an internet standard port.
+
+ A user information data base is in the works and will radi-
+ cally alter the way the information that _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br uses is
+ stored. Finger will require extensive modification when
+ this is implemented.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FMT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FMT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ fmt - simple text formatter
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bfm\bmt\bt [ name ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bF_\bm_\bt is a simple text formatter which reads the concatenation
+ of input files (or standard input if none are given) and
+ produces on standard output a version of its input with
+ lines as close to 72 characters long as possible. The spac-
+ ing at the beginning of the input lines is preserved in the
+ output, as are blank lines and interword spacing.
+
+ _\bF_\bm_\bt is meant to format mail messages prior to sending, but
+ may also be useful for other simple tasks. For instance,
+ within visual mode of the _\be_\bx editor (e.g. _\bv_\bi) the command
+ !}fmt
+ will reformat a paragraph, evening the lines.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ nroff(1), mail(1)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Kurt Shoens
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The program was designed to be simple and fast - for more
+ complex operations, the standard text processors are likely
+ to be more appropriate.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FOLD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FOLD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ fold - fold long lines for finite width output device
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bfo\bol\bld\bd [ -width ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bF_\bo_\bl_\bd is a filter which will fold the contents of the speci-
+ fied files, or the standard input if no files are specified,
+ breaking the lines to have maximum width _\bw_\bi_\bd_\bt_\bh. The default
+ for _\bw_\bi_\bd_\bt_\bh is 80. _\bW_\bi_\bd_\bt_\bh should be a multiple of 8 if tabs
+ are present, or the tabs should be expanded using _\be_\bx_\bp_\ba_\bn_\bd(1)
+ before coming to _\bf_\bo_\bl_\bd.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ expand(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If underlining is present it may be messed up by folding.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sh, for, case, if, while, :\b:, .\b., break, continue, cd, eval,
+ exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift,
+ times, trap, umask, wait - command language
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsh\bh [ -\b-c\bce\bei\bik\bkn\bnr\brs\bst\btu\buv\bvx\bx ] [ arg ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bh is a command programming language that executes commands
+ read from a terminal or a file. See i\bin\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn for the
+ meaning of arguments to the shell.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ A _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is a sequence of non blank _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bs separated
+ by blanks (a blank is a t\bta\bab\bb or a s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be). The first word
+ specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as
+ specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments
+ to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu-
+ ment 0 (see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2)). The _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be of a simple-command is
+ its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs if
+ it terminates abnormally (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2) for a list of status
+ values).
+
+ A _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be is a sequence of one or more _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd_\bs separated
+ by |\b|.\b. The standard output of each command but the last is
+ connected by a _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be(2) to the standard input of the next
+ command. Each command is run as a separate process; the
+ shell waits for the last command to terminate.
+
+ A _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is a sequence of one or more _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bs separated by
+ ;\b;, &\b&, &\b&&\b& or |\b||\b| and optionally terminated by ;\b; or &\b&. ;\b; and &\b&
+ have equal precedence which is lower than that of &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b|,
+ &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes
+ sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding
+ _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be to be executed without waiting for it to finish.
+ The symbol &\b&&\b& (|\b||\b|) causes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following to be executed
+ only if the preceding _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be returns a zero (non zero)
+ value. Newlines may appear in a _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt, instead of semi-
+ colons, to delimit commands.
+
+ A _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is either a simple-command or one of the follow-
+ ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last
+ simple-command executed in the command.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\br _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be [i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ...] d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ Each time a f\bfo\bor\br command is executed _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is set to the
+ next word in the f\bfo\bor\br word list. If i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ... is
+ omitted, i\bin\bn "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is assumed. Execution ends when there
+ are no more words in the list.
+
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd i\bin\bn [_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn [ |\b| _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn ] ... )\b) _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt ;\b;;\b;] ... e\bes\bsa\bac\bc
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ A c\bca\bas\bse\be command executes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt associated with the
+ first pattern that matches _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd. The form of the pat-
+ terns is the same as that used for file name genera-
+ tion.
+
+ i\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [e\bel\bli\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] ... [e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] f\bfi\bi
+ The _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following i\bif\bf is executed and if it returns
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Otherwise,
+ the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following e\bel\bli\bif\bf is executed and if its value is
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Failing that
+ the e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is executed.
+
+ w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ A w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be command repeatedly executes the w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt and
+ if its value is zero executes the d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt; otherwise
+ the loop terminates. The value returned by a w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ command is that of the last executed command in the d\bdo\bo
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl may be used in place of w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be to negate the
+ loop termination test.
+
+ (\b( _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt )\b)
+ Execute _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt in a subshell.
+
+ {\b{ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt }\b}
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is simply executed.
+
+ The following words are only recognized as the first word of
+ a command and when not quoted.
+
+ i\bif\bf t\bth\bhe\ben\bn e\bel\bls\bse\be e\bel\bli\bif\bf f\bfi\bi c\bca\bas\bse\be i\bin\bn e\bes\bsa\bac\bc f\bfo\bor\br w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl d\bdo\bo
+ d\bdo\bon\bne\be {\b{ }\b}
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of
+ back quotes (`\b``\b`) may be used as part or all of a word;
+ trailing newlines are removed.
+
+ P\bPa\bar\bra\bam\bme\bet\bte\ber\br s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The character $\b$ is used to introduce substitutable parame-
+ ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by s\bse\bet\bt.
+ Variables may be set by writing
+
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be ] ...
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br}\b}
+ A _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is a sequence of letters, digits or under-
+ scores (a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be), a digit, or any of the characters *\b* @\b@
+ #\b# ?\b? -\b- $\b$ !\b!.\b. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub-
+ stituted. The braces are required only when _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br
+ is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is
+ not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\b-
+ _\bt_\be_\br is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is *\b* or @\b@ then all the positional parameters,
+ starting with $\b$1\b1, are substituted separated by spaces.
+ $\b$0\b0 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br-_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise
+ substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br=_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is not set, set it to _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; the value of
+ the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame-
+ ters may not be assigned to in this way.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br?_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise,
+ print _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd and exit from the shell. If _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is omit-
+ ted, a standard message is printed.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br+_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; otherwise substi-
+ tute nothing.
+
+ In the above _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is not evaluated unless it is to be used
+ as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo
+ ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _\bp_\bw_\bd if _\bd is unset.)
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are automatically set by the shell.
+
+ #\b# The number of positional parameters in decimal.
+ -\b- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by
+ s\bse\bet\bt.
+ ?\b? The value returned by the last executed command in
+ decimal.
+ $\b$ The process number of this shell.
+ !\b! The process number of the last background command
+ invoked.
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are used but not set by the shell.
+
+ H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE The default argument (home directory) for the c\bcd\bd
+ command.
+ P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH The search path for commands (see e\bex\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn).
+ M\bMA\bAI\bIL\bL If this variable is set to the name of a mail
+ file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of
+ mail in the specified file.
+ P\bPS\bS1\b1 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '.
+ P\bPS\bS2\b2 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '.
+ I\bIF\bFS\bS Internal field separators, normally s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be, t\bta\bab\bb,
+ and n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be. I\bIF\bFS\bS is ignored if _\bs_\bh is running as
+ root or if the effective user id differs from the
+ real user id.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ B\bBl\bla\ban\bnk\bk i\bin\bnt\bte\ber\brp\bpr\bre\bet\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ After parameter and command substitution, any results of
+ substitution are scanned for internal field separator char-
+ acters (those found in $\b$I\bIF\bFS\bS) and split into distinct argu-
+ ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu-
+ ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments
+ (those resulting from _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs that have no values) are
+ removed.
+
+ F\bFi\bil\ble\be n\bna\bam\bme\be g\bge\ben\bne\ber\bra\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the
+ characters *\b*, ?\b? and [\b[.\b. If one of these characters appears,
+ the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced
+ with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat-
+ tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern,
+ the word is left unchanged. The character .\b. at the start of
+ a file name or immediately following a /\b/, and the character
+ /\b/, must be matched explicitly.
+
+ *\b* Matches any string, including the null string.
+ ?\b? Matches any single character.
+ [\b[.\b..\b..\b.]\b]
+ Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of
+ characters separated by -\b- matches any character lexi-
+ cally between the pair.
+
+ Q\bQu\buo\bot\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ The following characters have a special meaning to the shell
+ and cause termination of a word unless quoted.
+
+ ;\b; &\b& (\b( )\b) |\b| <\b< >\b> n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be t\bta\bab\bb
+
+ A character may be _\bq_\bu_\bo_\bt_\be_\bd by preceding it with a \\b\.\b. \\b\n\bne\bew\bw-\b-
+ l\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of
+ quote marks ('\b''\b'), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside
+ double quotes ("\b""\b") parameter and command substitution occurs
+ and \\b\ quotes the characters \\b\ '\b' "\b" and $\b$.
+
+ "\b"$\b$*\b*"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1 $\b$2\b2 .\b..\b..\b."\b" whereas
+ "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1"\b" "\b"$\b$2\b2"\b" .\b..\b..\b. .\b.
+
+ P\bPr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of
+ PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is
+ typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the
+ secondary prompt ($\b$P\bPS\bS2\b2) is issued.
+
+ I\bIn\bnp\bpu\but\bt o\bou\but\btp\bpu\but\bt.\b.
+ Before a command is executed its input and output may be
+ redirected using a special notation interpreted by the
+ shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple-
+ command or may precede or follow a _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd and are not
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs
+ before _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd or _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt is used.
+
+ <_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard input (file descriptor 0).
+
+ >_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output (file descriptor 1).
+ If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it
+ is truncated to zero length.
+
+ >>_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output. If the file exists,
+ output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise
+ the file is created.
+
+ <<_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ The shell input is read up to a line the same as _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd,
+ or end of file. The resulting document becomes the
+ standard input. If any character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is quoted, no
+ interpretation is placed upon the characters of the
+ document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution
+ occurs, \\b\n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored, and \\b\ is used to quote the
+ characters \\b\ $\b$ '\b' and the first character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ <&_\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt
+ The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor
+ _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt; see _\bd_\bu_\bp(2). Similarly for the standard output
+ using >.
+
+ <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan-
+ dard output using >.
+
+ If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file
+ descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead
+ of the default 0 or 1). For example,
+
+ ... 2>&1
+
+ creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip-
+ tor 1.
+
+ If a command is followed by &\b& then the default standard
+ input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other-
+ wise, the environment for the execution of a command con-
+ tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified
+ by input output specifications.
+
+ E\bEn\bnv\bvi\bir\bro\bon\bnm\bme\ben\bnt\bt.\b.
+ The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed
+ to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument
+ list; see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2) and _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7). The shell interacts
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the
+ shell scans the environment and creates a _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br for each
+ name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed
+ commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies
+ the values of these _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs or creates new ones, none of
+ these affects the environment unless the e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt command is
+ used to bind the shell's _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br to the environment. The
+ environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of
+ any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the
+ shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which
+ must be noted in e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt commands.
+
+ The environment for any _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd may be augmented by
+ prefixing it with one or more assignments to _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs.
+ Thus these two lines are equivalent
+
+ TERM=450 cmd args
+ (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args)
+
+ If the -\b-k\bk flag is set, _\ba_\bl_\bl keyword arguments are placed in
+ the environment, even if the occur after the command name.
+ The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c':
+ echo a=b c
+ set -k
+ echo a=b c
+
+ S\bSi\big\bgn\bna\bal\bls\bs.\b.
+ The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are
+ ignored if the command is followed by &\b&; otherwise signals
+ have the values inherited by the shell from its parent.
+ (But see also t\btr\bra\bap\bp.\b.)
+
+ E\bEx\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are
+ carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below
+ a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute
+ the command via an _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2).
+
+ The shell parameter $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH defines the search path for the
+ directory containing the command. Each alternative direc-
+ tory name is separated by a colon (:\b:). The default path is
+ :\b:/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn:\b:/\b/u\bus\bsr\br/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn. If the command name contains a /, the
+ search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the
+ path is searched for an executable file. If the file has
+ execute permission but is not an _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt file, it is assumed
+ to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a
+ separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized
+ command is also executed in a subshell.
+
+ S\bSp\bpe\bec\bci\bia\bal\bl c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ The following commands are executed in the shell process and
+ except where specified no input output redirection is
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ permitted for such commands.
+
+ #\b# For non-interactive shells, everything following the #\b#
+ is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is
+ ignored. For interactive shells, the #\b# has no special
+ effect.
+
+ :\b: No effect; the command does nothing.
+ .\b. _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Read and execute commands from _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be and return. The
+ search path $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH is used to find the directory con-
+ taining _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bk [_\bn]
+ Exit from the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be loop, if any. If
+ _\bn is specified, break _\bn levels.
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bti\bin\bnu\bue\be [_\bn]
+ Resume the next iteration of the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ loop. If _\bn is specified, resume at the _\bn-th enclosing
+ loop.
+ c\bcd\bd [_\ba_\br_\bg]
+ Change the current directory to _\ba_\br_\bg. The shell parame-
+ ter $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE is the default _\ba_\br_\bg.
+ e\bev\bva\bal\bl [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The arguments are read as input to the shell and the
+ resulting command(s) executed.
+ e\bex\bxe\bec\bc [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The command specified by the arguments is executed in
+ place of this shell without creating a new process.
+ Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu-
+ ments are given cause the shell input output to be
+ modified.
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit
+ status specified by _\bn. If _\bn is omitted, the exit status
+ is that of the last command executed. (An end of file
+ will also exit from the shell.)
+ e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked for automatic export to the
+ _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt of subsequently-executed commands. If no
+ arguments are given, a list of exportable names is
+ printed.
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bd _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...
+ One line is read from the standard input; successive
+ words of the input are assigned to the variables _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ in order, with leftover words to the last variable.
+ The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun-
+ tered.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bdo\bon\bnl\bly\by [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked readonly and the values of
+ the these names may not be changed by subsequent
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all
+ readonly names is printed.
+ s\bse\bet\bt [-\b-e\bek\bkn\bnp\bpt\btu\buv\bvx\bx [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]]
+ -\b-e\be If non interactive, exit immediately if a command
+ fails.
+ -\b-k\bk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment
+ for a command, not just those that precede the com-
+ mand name.
+ -\b-n\bn Read commands but do not execute them.
+ -\b-t\bt Exit after reading and executing one command.
+ -\b-u\bu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting.
+ -\b-v\bv Print shell input lines as they are read.
+ -\b-x\bx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe-
+ cuted.
+ -\b- Turn off the -\b-x\bx and -\b-v\bv options.
+
+ These flags can also be used upon invocation of the
+ shell. The current set of flags may be found in $\b$-\b-.
+
+ Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are
+ assigned, in order, to $\b$1\b1, $\b$2\b2, etc. If no arguments
+ are given, the values of all names are printed.
+
+ s\bsh\bhi\bif\bft\bt
+ The positional parameters from $\b$2\b2... are renamed $\b$1\b1...
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\bes\bs
+ Print the accumulated user and system times for
+ processes run from the shell.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bap\bp [_\ba_\br_\bg] [_\bn] ...
+ _\bA_\br_\bg is a command to be read and executed when the shell
+ receives signal(s) _\bn. (Note that _\ba_\br_\bg is scanned once
+ when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.)
+ Trap commands are executed in order of signal number.
+ If _\ba_\br_\bg is absent, all trap(s) _\bn are reset to their ori-
+ ginal values. If _\ba_\br_\bg is the null string, this signal
+ is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _\bn
+ is 0, the command _\ba_\br_\bg is executed on exit from the
+ shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _\bn as numbered
+ in _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2). _\bT_\br_\ba_\bp with no arguments prints a list of
+ commands associated with each signal number.
+
+ u\bum\bma\bas\bsk\bk [ _\bn_\bn_\bn ]
+ The user file creation mask is set to the octal value
+ _\bn_\bn_\bn (see _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk(2)). If _\bn_\bn_\bn is omitted, the current
+ value of the mask is printed.
+
+ w\bwa\bai\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Wait for the specified process and report its termina-
+ tion status. If _\bn is not given, all currently active
+ child processes are waited for. The return code from
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ this command is that of the process waited for.
+
+ I\bIn\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ If the first character of argument zero is -\b-, commands are
+ read from $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE/\b/.\b.p\bpr\bro\bof\bfi\bil\ble\be, if such a file exists. Commands
+ are then read as described below. The following flags are
+ interpreted by the shell when it is invoked.
+ -\b-c\bc _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg If the -\b-c\bc flag is present, commands are read from
+ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg.
+ -\b-s\bs If the -\b-s\bs flag is present or if no arguments
+ remain then commands are read from the standard
+ input. Shell output is written to file descrip-
+ tor 2.
+ -\b-i\bi If the -\b-i\bi flag is present or if the shell input
+ and output are attached to a terminal (as told by
+ _\bg_\bt_\bt_\by) then this shell is _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\ba_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bv_\be. In this
+ case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2))
+ is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an
+ interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG-
+ INT is caught and ignored (so that w\bwa\bai\bit\bt is inter-
+ ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by
+ the shell.
+
+ The remaining flags and arguments are described under the
+ s\bse\bet\bt command.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ $HOME/.\b.profile
+ /tmp/sh*
+ /dev/null
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause
+ the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is
+ being used non interactively then execution of the shell
+ file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit
+ status of the last command executed (see also e\bex\bxi\bit\bt).
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous
+ process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming
+ the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and
+ the shell complains about not being able to find the file by
+ another name.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ fp - Functional Programming language compiler/interpreter
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bfp\bp
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bF_\bp is an interpreter/compiler that implements the applica-
+ tive language proposed by John Backus. It is written in
+ F\bFR\bRA\bAN\bNZ\bZ L\bLI\bIS\bSP\bP.
+
+ In a functional programming language intent is expressed in
+ a mathematical style devoid of assignment statements and
+ variables. Functions compute by value only; there are no
+ side-effects since the result of a computation depends
+ solely on the inputs.
+
+ _\bF_\bp "programs" consist of _\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\ba_\bl _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs - primitive
+ and user-defined _\bf_\bp functions combined by _\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\ba_\bl _\bf_\bo_\br_\bm_\bs.
+ These forms take functional arguments and return functional
+ results. For example, the composition operator '@' takes
+ two functional arguments and returns a function which
+ represents their composition.
+
+ There exists a single operation in _\bf_\bp - _\ba_\bp_\bp_\bl_\bi_\bc_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn. This
+ operation causes the system to evaluate the indicated func-
+ tion using the single argument as input (all functions are
+ monadic).
+
+G\bGE\bET\bTT\bTI\bIN\bNG\bG S\bST\bTA\bAR\bRT\bTE\bED\bD
+ _\bF_\bp invokes the system. _\bF_\bp compiles functions into _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bp(1)
+ source code; _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bp(1) interprets this code (the user may com-
+ pile this code using the liszt (1) compiler to gain a factor
+ of 10 in performance). _\bC_\bo_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bl _\bD exits back to the shell.
+ _\bB_\br_\be_\ba_\bk terminates any computation in progress and resets any
+ open file units. )_\bh_\be_\bl_\bp provides a short summary of all user
+ commands.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/ucb/lisp the FRANZ LISP interpreter
+ /usr/ucb/liszt the liszt compiler
+ /usr/doc/fp the User's Guide
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lisp(1), liszt(1).
+
+ _\bT_\bh_\be _\bB_\be_\br_\bk_\be_\bl_\be_\by _\bF_\bP _\bu_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bm_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl, available on-line. The
+ language is described in the August 1978 issue of _\bC_\bA_\bC_\bM
+ (Turing award lecture by John Backus).
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FP(1)
+
+
+
+ If a non-terminating function is applied as the result of
+ loading a file, then control is returned to the user immedi-
+ ately, everything after that position in the file is
+ ignored.
+
+ FP incorrectly marks the location of a syntax error on
+ large, multi-line function definitions or applications.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Scott B. Baden
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FPR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ fpr - print Fortran file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bfp\bpr\br
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bF_\bp_\br is a filter that transforms files formatted according to
+ Fortran's carriage control conventions into files formatted
+ according to UNIX line printer conventions.
+
+ _\bF_\bp_\br copies its input onto its output, replacing the carriage
+ control characters with characters that will produce the
+ intended effects when printed using _\bl_\bp_\br(1). The first char-
+ acter of each line determines the vertical spacing as fol-
+ lows:
+
+ +---------------+--------------------------------+
+ | Character | Vertical Space Before Printing |
+ |---------------+--------------------------------|
+ | Blank | One line |
+ | 0 | Two lines |
+ | 1 | To first line of next page |
+ | + | No advance |
+ +---------------+--------------------------------+
+
+
+ A blank line is treated as if its first character is a
+ blank. A blank that appears as a carriage control character
+ is deleted. A zero is changed to a newline. A one is
+ changed to a form feed. The effects of a "+" are simulated
+ using backspaces.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bES\bS
+ a.out | fpr | lpr
+
+ fpr < f77.output | lpr
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Results are undefined for input lines longer than 170 char-
+ acters.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FROM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FROM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ from - who is my mail from?
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bfr\bro\bom\bm [ -\b-s\bs sender ] [ user ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bF_\br_\bo_\bm prints out the mail header lines in your mailbox file
+ to show you who your mail is from. If _\bu_\bs_\be_\br is specified,
+ then _\bu_\bs_\be_\br's mailbox is examined instead of your own. If the
+ -s option is given, then only headers for mail sent by
+ _\bs_\be_\bn_\bd_\be_\br are printed.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/mail/*
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ biff(1), mail(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 20, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FSPLIT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual FSPLIT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ fsplit - split a multi-routine Fortran file into individual
+ files
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bfs\bsp\bpl\bli\bit\bt [ -\b-e\be efile] ... [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ F\bFs\bsp\bpl\bli\bit\bt takes as input either a file or standard input con-
+ taining Fortran source code. It attempts to split the input
+ into separate routine files of the form _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be._\bf, where _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ is the name of the program unit (e.g. function, subroutine,
+ block data or program). The name for unnamed block data
+ subprograms has the form _\bb_\bl_\bk_\bd_\bt_\ba_\bN_\bN_\bN._\bf where NNN is three
+ digits and a file of this name does not already exist. For
+ unnamed main programs the name has the form _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bn_\bN_\bN_\bN._\bf. If
+ there is an error in classifying a program unit, or if
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be._\bf already exists, the program unit will be put in a
+ file of the form _\bz_\bz_\bz_\bN_\bN_\bN._\bf where _\bz_\bz_\bz_\bN_\bN_\bN._\bf does not already
+ exist.
+
+ Normally each subprogram unit is split into a separate file.
+ When the -_\be option is used, only the specified subprogram
+ units are split into separate files. E.g.:
+ fsplit -e readit -e doit prog.f
+ will split readit and doit into separate files.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ If names specified via the -_\be option are not found, a diag-
+ nostic is written to _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bn_\bd_\ba_\br_\bd _\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Asa Romberger and Jerry Berkman
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bF_\bs_\bp_\bl_\bi_\bt assumes the subprogram name is on the first noncom-
+ ment line of the subprogram unit. Nonstandard source for-
+ mats may confuse _\bf_\bs_\bp_\bl_\bi_\bt.
+
+ It is hard to use -_\be for unnamed main programs and block
+ data subprograms since you must predict the created file
+ name.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ftp - ARPANET file transfer program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ f\bft\btp\bp [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-d\bd ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-g\bg ] [ h\bho\bos\bst\bt ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bF_\bt_\bp is the user interface to the ARPANET standard File
+ Transfer Protocol. The program allows a user to transfer
+ files to and from a remote network site.
+
+ The client host with which _\bf_\bt_\bp is to communicate may be
+ specified on the command line. If this is done, _\bf_\bt_\bp will
+ immediately attempt to establish a connection to an FTP
+ server on that host; otherwise, _\bf_\bt_\bp will enter its command
+ interpreter and await instructions from the user. When _\bf_\bt_\bp
+ is awaiting commands from the user the prompt "ftp>" is pro-
+ vided to the user. The following commands are recognized by
+ _\bf_\bt_\bp:
+
+ !\b! [ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd [ _\ba_\br_\bg_\bs ] ]
+ Invoke an interactive shell on the local machine. If
+ there are arguments, the first is taken to be a command
+ to execute directly, with the rest of the arguments as
+ its arguments.
+
+ $\b$ _\bm_\ba_\bc_\br_\bo-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be [ _\ba_\br_\bg_\bs ]
+ Execute the macro _\bm_\ba_\bc_\br_\bo-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be that was defined with the
+ m\bma\bac\bcd\bde\bef\bf command. Arguments are passed to the macro
+ unglobbed.
+
+ a\bac\bcc\bco\bou\bun\bnt\bt [ _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd ]
+ Supply a supplemental password required by a remote
+ system for access to resources once a login has been
+ successfully completed. If no argument is included,
+ the user will be prompted for an account password in a
+ non-echoing input mode.
+
+ a\bap\bpp\bpe\ben\bnd\bd _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be [ _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ]
+ Append a local file to a file on the remote machine.
+ If _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is left unspecified, the local file name
+ is used in naming the remote file after being altered
+ by any _\bn_\bt_\br_\ba_\bn_\bs or _\bn_\bm_\ba_\bp setting. File transfer uses the
+ current settings for _\bt_\by_\bp_\be, _\bf_\bo_\br_\bm_\ba_\bt, _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be, and _\bs_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bu_\br_\be.
+
+ a\bas\bsc\bci\bii\bi
+ Set the file transfer _\bt_\by_\bp_\be to network ASCII. This is
+ the default type.
+
+ b\bbe\bel\bll\bl Arrange that a bell be sounded after each file transfer
+ command is completed.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ b\bbi\bin\bna\bar\bry\by
+ Set the file transfer _\bt_\by_\bp_\be to support binary image
+ transfer.
+
+ b\bby\bye\be Terminate the FTP session with the remote server and
+ exit _\bf_\bt_\bp. An end of file will also terminate the ses-
+ sion and exit.
+
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be Toggle remote computer file name case mapping during
+ m\bmg\bge\bet\bt commands. When c\bca\bas\bse\be is on (default is off),
+ remote computer file names with all letters in upper
+ case are written in the local directory with the
+ letters mapped to lower case.
+
+ c\bcd\bd _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by
+ Change the working directory on the remote machine to
+ _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by.
+
+ c\bcd\bdu\bup\bp Change the remote machine working directory to the
+ parent of the current remote machine working directory.
+
+ c\bcl\blo\bos\bse\be
+ Terminate the FTP session with the remote server, and
+ return to the command interpreter. Any defined macros
+ are erased.
+
+ c\bcr\br Toggle carriage return stripping during ascii type file
+ retrieval. Records are denoted by a carriage
+ return/linefeed sequence during ascii type file
+ transfer. When c\bcr\br is on (the default), carriage
+ returns are stripped from this sequence to conform with
+ the UNIX single linefeed record delimiter. Records on
+ non-UNIX remote systems may contain single linefeeds;
+ when an ascii type transfer is made, these linefeeds
+ may be distinguished from a record delimiter only when
+ c\bcr\br is off.
+
+ d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Delete the file _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be on the remote machine.
+
+ d\bde\beb\bbu\bug\bg [ _\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg-_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be ]
+ Toggle debugging mode. If an optional _\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg-_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be is
+ specified it is used to set the debugging level. When
+ debugging is on, _\bf_\bt_\bp prints each command sent to the
+ remote machine, preceded by the string "-->".
+
+ d\bdi\bir\br [ _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by ] [ _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ]
+ Print a listing of the directory contents in the direc-
+ tory, _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by, and, optionally, placing the
+ output in _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. If interactive prompting is on,
+ _\bf_\bt_\bp will prompt the user to verify that the last argu-
+ ment is indeed the target local file for receiving d\bdi\bir\br
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ output. If no directory is specified, the current
+ working directory on the remote machine is used. If no
+ local file is specified, or _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is -\b-, output
+ comes to the terminal.
+
+ d\bdi\bis\bsc\bco\bon\bnn\bne\bec\bct\bt
+ A synonym for c\bcl\blo\bos\bse\be.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\brm\bm _\bf_\bo_\br_\bm_\ba_\bt
+ Set the file transfer _\bf_\bo_\br_\bm to _\bf_\bo_\br_\bm_\ba_\bt. The default for-
+ mat is "file".
+
+ g\bge\bet\bt _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be [ _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ]
+ Retrieve the _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be and store it on the local
+ machine. If the local file name is not specified, it
+ is given the same name it has on the remote machine,
+ subject to alteration by the current _\bc_\ba_\bs_\be, _\bn_\bt_\br_\ba_\bn_\bs, and
+ _\bn_\bm_\ba_\bp settings. The current settings for _\bt_\by_\bp_\be, _\bf_\bo_\br_\bm,
+ _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be, and _\bs_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bu_\br_\be are used while transferring the
+ file.
+
+ g\bgl\blo\bob\bb Toggle filename expansion for m\bmd\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be, m\bmg\bge\bet\bt and m\bmp\bpu\but\bt.
+ If globbing is turned off with g\bgl\blo\bob\bb, the file name
+ arguments are taken literally and not expanded. Glob-
+ bing for m\bmp\bpu\but\bt is done as in c\bcs\bsh\bh(1). For m\bmd\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be and
+ m\bmg\bge\bet\bt, each remote file name is expanded separately on
+ the remote machine and the lists are not merged.
+ Expansion of a directory name is likely to be different
+ from expansion of the name of an ordinary file: the
+ exact result depends on the foreign operating system
+ and ftp server, and can be previewed by doing
+ `m\bml\bls\bs _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs -\b-'. Note: m\bmg\bge\bet\bt and m\bmp\bpu\but\bt are not
+ meant to transfer entire directory subtrees of files.
+ That can be done by transferring a t\bta\bar\br(1) archive of
+ the subtree (in binary mode).
+
+ h\bha\bas\bsh\bh Toggle hash-sign (``#'') printing for each data block
+ transferred. The size of a data block is 1024 bytes.
+
+ h\bhe\bel\blp\bp [ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd ]
+ Print an informative message about the meaning of _\bc_\bo_\bm_\b-
+ _\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd. If no argument is given, _\bf_\bt_\bp prints a list of
+ the known commands.
+
+ l\blc\bcd\bd [ _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by ]
+ Change the working directory on the local machine. If
+ no _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by is specified, the user's home directory is
+ used.
+
+ l\bls\bs [ _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by ] [ _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ]
+ Print an abbreviated listing of the contents of a
+ directory on the remote machine. If _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ is left unspecified, the current working directory is
+ used. If interactive prompting is on, _\bf_\bt_\bp will prompt
+ the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
+ target local file for receiving l\bls\bs output. If no local
+ file is specified, or if _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is -\b-, the output is
+ sent to the terminal.
+
+ m\bma\bac\bcd\bde\bef\bf _\bm_\ba_\bc_\br_\bo-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Define a macro. Subsequent lines are stored as the
+ macro _\bm_\ba_\bc_\br_\bo-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be; a null line (consecutive newline
+ characters in a file or carriage returns from the ter-
+ minal) terminates macro input mode. There is a limit
+ of 16 macros and 4096 total characters in all defined
+ macros. Macros remain defined until a c\bcl\blo\bos\bse\be command is
+ executed. The macro processor interprets '$' and '\'
+ as special characters. A '$' followed by a number (or
+ numbers) is replaced by the corresponding argument on
+ the macro invocation command line. A '$' followed by
+ an 'i' signals that macro processor that the executing
+ macro is to be looped. On the first pass '$i' is
+ replaced by the first argument on the macro invocation
+ command line, on the second pass it is replaced by the
+ second argument, and so on. A '\' followed by any
+ character is replaced by that character. Use the '\'
+ to prevent special treatment of the '$'.
+
+ m\bmd\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be [ _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs ]
+ Delete the _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs on the remote machine.
+
+ m\bmd\bdi\bir\br _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Like d\bdi\bir\br, except multiple remote files may be speci-
+ fied. If interactive prompting is on, _\bf_\bt_\bp will prompt
+ the user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
+ target local file for receiving m\bmd\bdi\bir\br output.
+
+ m\bmg\bge\bet\bt _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs
+ Expand the _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs on the remote machine and do a
+ g\bge\bet\bt for each file name thus produced. See g\bgl\blo\bob\bb for
+ details on the filename expansion. Resulting file
+ names will then be processed according to _\bc_\ba_\bs_\be, _\bn_\bt_\br_\ba_\bn_\bs,
+ and _\bn_\bm_\ba_\bp settings. Files are transferred into the
+ local working directory, which can be changed with
+ `l\blc\bcd\bd directory'; new local directories can be created
+ with `!\b! mkdir directory'.
+
+ m\bmk\bkd\bdi\bir\br _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Make a directory on the remote machine.
+
+ m\bml\bls\bs _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Like l\bls\bs, except multiple remote files may be specified.
+ If interactive prompting is on, _\bf_\bt_\bp will prompt the
+ user to verify that the last argument is indeed the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ target local file for receiving m\bml\bls\bs output.
+
+ m\bmo\bod\bde\be [ _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ]
+ Set the file transfer _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be to _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. The default
+ mode is "stream" mode.
+
+ m\bmp\bpu\but\bt _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs
+ Expand wild cards in the list of local files given as
+ arguments and do a p\bpu\but\bt for each file in the resulting
+ list. See g\bgl\blo\bob\bb for details of filename expansion.
+ Resulting file names will then be processed according
+ to _\bn_\bt_\br_\ba_\bn_\bs and _\bn_\bm_\ba_\bp settings.
+
+ n\bnm\bma\bap\bp [ _\bi_\bn_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn ]
+ Set or unset the filename mapping mechanism. If no
+ arguments are specified, the filename mapping mechanism
+ is unset. If arguments are specified, remote filenames
+ are mapped during m\bmp\bpu\but\bt commands and p\bpu\but\bt commands issued
+ without a specified remote target filename. If argu-
+ ments are specified, local filenames are mapped during
+ m\bmg\bge\bet\bt commands and g\bge\bet\bt commands issued without a speci-
+ fied local target filename. This command is useful
+ when connecting to a non-UNIX remote computer with dif-
+ ferent file naming conventions or practices. The map-
+ ping follows the pattern set by _\bi_\bn_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn and _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\ba_\bt_\b-
+ _\bt_\be_\br_\bn. _\bI_\bn_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn is a template for incoming filenames
+ (which may have already been processed according to the
+ n\bnt\btr\bra\ban\bns\bs and c\bca\bas\bse\be settings). Variable templating is
+ accomplished by including the sequences '$1', '$2',
+ ..., '$9' in _\bi_\bn_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn. Use '\' to prevent this spe-
+ cial treatment of the '$' character. All other charac-
+ ters are treated literally, and are used to determine
+ the n\bnm\bma\bap\bp _\bi_\bn_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn variable values. For exmaple, given
+ _\bi_\bn_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn $1.$2 and the remote file name "mydata.data",
+ $1 would have the value "mydata", and $2 would have the
+ value "data". The _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn determines the resulting
+ mapped filename. The sequences '$1', '$2', ...., '$9'
+ are replaced by any value resulting from the _\bi_\bn_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn
+ template. The sequence '$0' is replace by the original
+ filename. Additionally, the sequence '[_\bs_\be_\bq_\b1,_\bs_\be_\bq_\b2]' is
+ replaced by _\bs_\be_\bq_\b1 if _\bs_\be_\bq_\b1 is not a null string; other-
+ wise it is replaced by _\bs_\be_\bq_\b2. For example, the command
+ "nmap $1.$2.$3 [$1,$2].[$2,file]" would yield the out-
+ put filename "myfile.data" for input filenames
+ "myfile.data" and "myfile.data.old", "myfile.file" for
+ the input filename "myfile", and "myfile.myfile" for
+ the input filename ".myfile". Spaces may be included
+ in _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn, as in the example: nmap $1 |sed "s/
+ *$//" > $1 . Use the '\' character to prevent special
+ treatment of the '$', '[', ']', and ',' characters.
+
+ n\bnt\btr\bra\ban\bns\bs [ _\bi_\bn_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs [ _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs ] ]
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ Set or unset the filename character translation mechan-
+ ism. If no arguments are specified, the filename char-
+ acter translation mechanism is unset. If arguments are
+ specified, characters in remote filenames are
+ translated during m\bmp\bpu\but\bt commands and p\bpu\but\bt commands issued
+ without a specified remote target filename. If argu-
+ ments are specified, characters in local filenames are
+ translated during m\bmg\bge\bet\bt commands and g\bge\bet\bt commands issued
+ without a specified local target filename. This com-
+ mand is useful when connecting to a non-UNIX remote
+ computer with different file naming conventions or
+ practices. Characters in a filename matching a charac-
+ ter in _\bi_\bn_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs are replaced with the corresponding
+ character in _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs. If the character's position in
+ _\bi_\bn_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs is longer than the length of _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs, the
+ character is deleted from the file name.
+
+ o\bop\bpe\ben\bn _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt [ _\bp_\bo_\br_\bt ]
+ Establish a connection to the specified _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt FTP
+ server. An optional port number may be supplied, in
+ which case, _\bf_\bt_\bp will attempt to contact an FTP server
+ at that port. If the _\ba_\bu_\bt_\bo-_\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn option is on
+ (default), _\bf_\bt_\bp will also attempt to automatically log
+ the user in to the FTP server (see below).
+
+ p\bpr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bt
+ Toggle interactive prompting. Interactive prompting
+ occurs during multiple file transfers to allow the user
+ to selectively retrieve or store files. If prompting
+ is turned off (default is on), any m\bmg\bge\bet\bt or m\bmp\bpu\but\bt will
+ transfer all files, and any m\bmd\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be will delete all
+ files.
+
+ p\bpr\bro\box\bxy\by _\bf_\bt_\bp-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd
+ Execute an ftp command on a secondary control connec-
+ tion. This command allows simultaneous connection to
+ two remote ftp servers for transferring files between
+ the two servers. The first p\bpr\bro\box\bxy\by command should be an
+ o\bop\bpe\ben\bn, to establish the secondary control connection.
+ Enter the command "proxy ?" to see other ftp commands
+ executable on the secondary connection. The following
+ commands behave differently when prefaced by p\bpr\bro\box\bxy\by:
+ o\bop\bpe\ben\bn will not define new macros during the auto-login
+ process, c\bcl\blo\bos\bse\be will not erase existing macro defini-
+ tions, g\bge\bet\bt and m\bmg\bge\bet\bt transfer files from the host on the
+ primary control connection to the host on the secondary
+ control connection, and p\bpu\but\bt, m\bmp\bpu\but\bt, and a\bap\bpp\bpe\ben\bnd\bd transfer
+ files from the host on the secondary control connection
+ to the host on the primary control connection. Third
+ party file transfers depend upon support of the ftp
+ protocol PASV command by the server on the secondary
+ control connection.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ p\bpu\but\bt _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be [ _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ]
+ Store a local file on the remote machine. If _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is left unspecified, the local file name is used
+ after processing according to any _\bn_\bt_\br_\ba_\bn_\bs or _\bn_\bm_\ba_\bp set-
+ tings in naming the remote file. File transfer uses
+ the current settings for _\bt_\by_\bp_\be, _\bf_\bo_\br_\bm_\ba_\bt, _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be, and _\bs_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\b-
+ _\bt_\bu_\br_\be.
+
+ p\bpw\bwd\bd Print the name of the current working directory on the
+ remote machine.
+
+ q\bqu\bui\bit\bt A synonym for b\bby\bye\be.
+
+ q\bqu\buo\bot\bte\be _\ba_\br_\bg_\b1 _\ba_\br_\bg_\b2 ...
+ The arguments specified are sent, verbatim, to the
+ remote FTP server.
+
+ r\bre\bec\bcv\bv _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be [ _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ]
+ A synonym for get.
+
+ r\bre\bem\bmo\bot\bte\beh\bhe\bel\blp\bp [ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ]
+ Request help from the remote FTP server. If a
+ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is specified it is supplied to the server
+ as well.
+
+ r\bre\ben\bna\bam\bme\be [ _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm ] [ _\bt_\bo ]
+ Rename the file _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm on the remote machine, to the file
+ _\bt_\bo.
+
+ r\bre\bes\bse\bet\bt
+ Clear reply queue. This command re-synchronizes
+ command/reply sequencing with the remote ftp server.
+ Resynchronization may be neccesary following a viola-
+ tion of the ftp protocol by the remote server.
+
+ r\brm\bmd\bdi\bir\br _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Delete a directory on the remote machine.
+
+ r\bru\bun\bni\biq\bqu\bue\be
+ Toggle storing of files on the local system with unique
+ filenames. If a file already exists with a name equal
+ to the target local filename for a g\bge\bet\bt or m\bmg\bge\bet\bt command,
+ a ".1" is appended to the name. If the resulting name
+ matches another existing file, a ".2" is appended to
+ the original name. If this process continues up to
+ ".99", an error message is printed, and the transfer
+ does not take place. The generated unique filename
+ will be reported. Note that r\bru\bun\bni\biq\bqu\bue\be will not affect
+ local files generated from a shell command (see below).
+ The default value is off.
+
+ s\bse\ben\bnd\bd _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be [ _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ]
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ A synonym for put.
+
+ s\bse\ben\bnd\bdp\bpo\bor\brt\bt
+ Toggle the use of PORT commands. By default, _\bf_\bt_\bp will
+ attempt to use a PORT command when establishing a con-
+ nection for each data transfer. The use of PORT com-
+ mands can prevent delays when performing multiple file
+ transfers. If the PORT command fails, _\bf_\bt_\bp will use the
+ default data port. When the use of PORT commands is
+ disabled, no attempt will be made to use PORT commands
+ for each data transfer. This is useful for certain FTP
+ implementations which do ignore PORT commands but,
+ incorrectly, indicate they've been accepted.
+
+ s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs
+ Show the current status of _\bf_\bt_\bp.
+
+ s\bst\btr\bru\buc\bct\bt [ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\bt-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ]
+ Set the file transfer _\bs_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bu_\br_\be to _\bs_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\bt-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. By
+ default "stream" structure is used.
+
+ s\bsu\bun\bni\biq\bqu\bue\be
+ Toggle storing of files on remote machine under unique
+ file names. Remote ftp server must support ftp proto-
+ col STOU command for successful completion. The remote
+ server will report unique name. Default value is off.
+
+ t\bte\ben\bne\bex\bx
+ Set the file transfer type to that needed to talk to
+ TENEX machines.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be
+ Toggle packet tracing.
+
+ t\bty\byp\bpe\be [ _\bt_\by_\bp_\be-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ]
+ Set the file transfer _\bt_\by_\bp_\be to _\bt_\by_\bp_\be-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. If no type is
+ specified, the current type is printed. The default
+ type is network ASCII.
+
+ u\bus\bse\ber\br _\bu_\bs_\be_\br-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be [ _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ] [ _\ba_\bc_\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt ]
+ Identify yourself to the remote FTP server. If the
+ password is not specified and the server requires it,
+ _\bf_\bt_\bp will prompt the user for it (after disabling local
+ echo). If an account field is not specified, and the
+ FTP server requires it, the user will be prompted for
+ it. If an account field is specified, an account com-
+ mand will be relayed to the remote server after the
+ login sequence is completed if the remote server did
+ not require it for logging in. Unless _\bf_\bt_\bp is invoked
+ with "auto-login" disabled, this process is done
+ automatically on initial connection to the FTP server.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ v\bve\ber\brb\bbo\bos\bse\be
+ Toggle verbose mode. In verbose mode, all responses
+ from the FTP server are displayed to the user. In
+ addition, if verbose is on, when a file transfer com-
+ pletes, statistics regarding the efficiency of the
+ transfer are reported. By default, verbose is on.
+
+ ?\b? [ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd ]
+ A synonym for help.
+
+ Command arguments which have embedded spaces may be quoted
+ with quote (") marks.
+
+A\bAB\bBO\bOR\bRT\bTI\bIN\bNG\bG A\bA F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bE T\bTR\bRA\bAN\bNS\bSF\bFE\bER\bR
+ To abort a file transfer, use the terminal interrupt key
+ (usually Ctrl-C). Sending transfers will be immediately
+ halted. Receiving transfers will be halted by sending a ftp
+ protocol ABOR command to the remote server, and discarding
+ any further data received. The speed at which this is
+ accomplished depends upon the remote server's support for
+ ABOR processing. If the remote server does not support the
+ ABOR command, an "ftp>" prompt will not appear until the
+ remote server has completed sending the requested file.
+
+ The terminal interrupt key sequence will be ignored when _\bf_\bt_\bp
+ has completed any local processing and is awaiting a reply
+ from the remote server. A long delay in this mode may
+ result from the ABOR processing described above, or from
+ unexpected behavior by the remote server, including viola-
+ tions of the ftp protocol. If the delay results from unex-
+ pected remote server behavior, the local _\bf_\bt_\bp program must be
+ killed by hand.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bE N\bNA\bAM\bMI\bIN\bNG\bG C\bCO\bON\bNV\bVE\bEN\bNT\bTI\bIO\bON\bNS\bS
+ Files specified as arguments to _\bf_\bt_\bp commands are processed
+ according to the following rules.
+
+ 1) If the file name "-" is specified, the s\bst\btd\bdi\bin\bn (for read-
+ ing) or s\bst\btd\bdo\bou\but\bt (for writing) is used.
+
+ 2) If the first character of the file name is "|", the
+ remainder of the argument is interpreted as a shell
+ command. _\bF_\bt_\bp then forks a shell, using _\bp_\bo_\bp_\be_\bn(3) with
+ the argument supplied, and reads (writes) from the
+ stdout (stdin). If the shell command includes spaces,
+ the argument must be quoted; e.g. ""| ls -lt"". A par-
+ ticularly useful example of this mechanism is: "dir
+ |more".
+
+ 3) Failing the above checks, if ``globbing'' is enabled,
+ local file names are expanded according to the rules
+ used in the _\bc_\bs_\bh(1); c.f. the _\bg_\bl_\bo_\bb command. If the _\bf_\bt_\bp
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 9
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ command expects a single local file ( .e.g. p\bpu\but\bt), only
+ the first filename generated by the "globbing" opera-
+ tion is used.
+
+ 4) For m\bmg\bge\bet\bt commands and g\bge\bet\bt commands with unspecified
+ local file names, the local filename is the remote
+ filename, which may be altered by a c\bca\bas\bse\be, n\bnt\btr\bra\ban\bns\bs, or
+ n\bnm\bma\bap\bp setting. The resulting filename may then be
+ altered if r\bru\bun\bni\biq\bqu\bue\be is on.
+
+ 5) For m\bmp\bpu\but\bt commands and p\bpu\but\bt commands with unspecified
+ remote file names, the remote filename is the local
+ filename, which may be altered by a n\bnt\btr\bra\ban\bns\bs or n\bnm\bma\bap\bp set-
+ ting. The resulting filename may then be altered by
+ the remote server if s\bsu\bun\bni\biq\bqu\bue\be is on.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bE T\bTR\bRA\bAN\bNS\bSF\bFE\bER\bR P\bPA\bAR\bRA\bAM\bME\bET\bTE\bER\bRS\bS
+ The FTP specification specifies many parameters which may
+ affect a file transfer. The _\bt_\by_\bp_\be may be one of "ascii",
+ "image" (binary), "ebcdic", and "local byte size" (for PDP-
+ 10's and PDP-20's mostly). _\bF_\bt_\bp supports the ascii and image
+ types of file transfer, plus local byte size 8 for t\bte\ben\bne\bex\bx
+ mode transfers.
+
+ _\bF_\bt_\bp supports only the default values for the remaining file
+ transfer parameters: _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be, _\bf_\bo_\br_\bm, and _\bs_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\bt.
+
+O\bOP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bNS\bS
+ Options may be specified at the command line, or to the com-
+ mand interpreter.
+
+ The -\b-v\bv (verbose on) option forces _\bf_\bt_\bp to show all responses
+ from the remote server, as well as report on data transfer
+ statistics.
+
+ The -\b-n\bn option restrains _\bf_\bt_\bp from attempting "auto-login"
+ upon initial connection. If auto-login is enabled, _\bf_\bt_\bp will
+ check the ._\bn_\be_\bt_\br_\bc (see below) file in the user's home direc-
+ tory for an entry describing an account on the remote
+ machine. If no entry exists, _\bf_\bt_\bp will prompt for the remote
+ machine login name (default is the user identity on the
+ local machine), and, if necessary, prompt for a password and
+ an account with which to login.
+
+ The -\b-i\bi option turns off interactive prompting during multi-
+ ple file transfers.
+
+ The -\b-d\bd option enables debugging.
+
+ The -\b-g\bg option disables file name globbing.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 10
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+T\bTH\bHE\bE .\b.n\bne\bet\btr\brc\bc F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bE
+ The .netrc file contains login and initialization informa-
+ tion used by the auto-login process. It resides in the
+ user's home directory. The following tokens are recognized;
+ they may be separated by spaces, tabs, or new-lines:
+
+ m\bma\bac\bch\bhi\bin\bne\be _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Identify a remote machine name. The auto-login process
+ searches the .netrc file for a m\bma\bac\bch\bhi\bin\bne\be token that
+ matches the remote machine specified on the _\bf_\bt_\bp command
+ line or as an o\bop\bpe\ben\bn command argument. Once a match is
+ made, the subsequent .netrc tokens are processed, stop-
+ ping when the end of file is reached or another m\bma\bac\bch\bhi\bin\bne\be
+ token is encountered.
+
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Identify a user on the remote machine. If this token
+ is present, the auto-login process will initiate a
+ login using the specified name.
+
+ p\bpa\bas\bss\bsw\bwo\bor\brd\bd _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg
+ Supply a password. If this token is present, the
+ auto-login process will supply the specified string if
+ the remote server requires a password as part of the
+ login process. Note that if this token is present in
+ the .netrc file, _\bf_\bt_\bp will abort the auto-login process
+ if the .netrc is readable by anyone besides the user.
+
+ a\bac\bcc\bco\bou\bun\bnt\bt _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg
+ Supply an additional account password. If this token
+ is present, the auto-login process will supply the
+ specified string if the remote server requires an addi-
+ tional account password, or the auto-login process will
+ initiate an ACCT command if it does not.
+
+ m\bma\bac\bcd\bde\bef\bf _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Define a macro. This token functions like the _\bf_\bt_\bp m\bma\bac\bc-\b-
+ d\bde\bef\bf command functions. A macro is defined with the
+ specified name; its contents begin with the next .netrc
+ line and continue until a null line (consecutive new-
+ line characters) is encountered. If a macro named _\bi_\bn_\bi_\bt
+ is defined, it is automatically executed as the last
+ step in the auto-login process.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ftpd(8)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Correct execution of many commands depends upon proper
+ behavior by the remote server.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 11
+
+
+
+
+
+
+FTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual FTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ An error in the treatment of carriage returns in the 4.2BSD
+ UNIX ascii-mode transfer code has been corrected. This
+ correction may result in incorrect transfers of binary files
+ to and from 4.2BSD servers using the ascii type. Avoid this
+ problem by using the binary image type.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 12
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+GCORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GCORE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ gcore - get core images of running processes
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ g\bgc\bco\bor\bre\be process-id ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bG_\bc_\bo_\br_\be creates a core image of each specified process, suit-
+ able for use with _\ba_\bd_\bb(1) or _\bd_\bb_\bx(1).
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ core.<process-id> core images
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Paging activity that occurs while _\bg_\bc_\bo_\br_\be is running may cause
+ the program to become confused. For best results, the
+ desired processes should be stopped.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+GPROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GPROF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ gprof - display call graph profile data
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ g\bgp\bpr\bro\bof\bf [ options ] [ a.out [ gmon.out ... ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bg_\bp_\br_\bo_\bf produces an execution profile of C, Pascal, or For-
+ tran77 programs. The effect of called routines is incor-
+ porated in the profile of each caller. The profile data is
+ taken from the call graph profile file (_\bg_\bm_\bo_\bn._\bo_\bu_\bt default)
+ which is created by programs that are compiled with the -\b-p\bpg\bg
+ option of _\bc_\bc, _\bp_\bc, and _\bf_\b7_\b7. The -\b-p\bpg\bg option also links in
+ versions of the library routines that are compiled for pro-
+ filing. The symbol table in the named object file (_\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt
+ default) is read and correlated with the call graph profile
+ file. If more than one profile file is specified, the _\bg_\bp_\br_\bo_\bf
+ output shows the sum of the profile information in the given
+ profile files.
+
+ _\bG_\bp_\br_\bo_\bf calculates the amount of time spent in each routine.
+ Next, these times are propagated along the edges of the call
+ graph. Cycles are discovered, and calls into a cycle are
+ made to share the time of the cycle. The first listing
+ shows the functions sorted according to the time they
+ represent including the time of their call graph descen-
+ dents. Below each function entry is shown its (direct) call
+ graph children, and how their times are propagated to this
+ function. A similar display above the function shows how
+ this function's time and the time of its descendents is pro-
+ pagated to its (direct) call graph parents.
+
+ Cycles are also shown, with an entry for the cycle as a
+ whole and a listing of the members of the cycle and their
+ contributions to the time and call counts of the cycle.
+
+ Second, a flat profile is given, similar to that provided by
+ _\bp_\br_\bo_\bf(1). This listing gives the total execution times, the
+ call counts, the number of milliseconds per call in the rou-
+ tine itself, and the number of milliseconds per call in the
+ routine itself including its descendents.
+
+ Finally, an index of the function names is provided.
+
+ The following options are available:
+
+ -\b-a\ba suppresses the printing of statically declared func-
+ tions. If this option is given, all relevant informa-
+ tion about the static function (_\be._\bg., time samples,
+ calls to other functions, calls from other functions)
+ belongs to the function loaded just before the static
+ function in the _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt file.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GPROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GPROF(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-b\bb suppresses the printing of a description of each field
+ in the profile.
+
+ -\b-c\bc the static call graph of the program is discovered by a
+ heuristic that examines the text space of the object
+ file. Static-only parents or children are shown with
+ call counts of 0.
+
+ -\b-e\be _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ suppresses the printing of the graph profile entry for
+ routine _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be and all its descendants (unless they have
+ other ancestors that aren't suppressed). More than one
+ -\b-e\be option may be given. Only one _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be may be given
+ with each -\b-e\be option.
+
+ -\b-E\bE _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ suppresses the printing of the graph profile entry for
+ routine _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be (and its descendants) as -\b-e\be, above, and
+ also excludes the time spent in _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be (and its descen-
+ dants) from the total and percentage time computations.
+ (For example, -\b-E\bE _\bm_\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt -\b-E\bE _\bm_\bc_\bl_\be_\ba_\bn_\bu_\bp is the default.)
+
+ -\b-f\bf _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ prints the graph profile entry of only the specified
+ routine _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be and its descendants. More than one -\b-f\bf
+ option may be given. Only one _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be may be given with
+ each -\b-f\bf option.
+
+ -\b-F\bF _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ prints the graph profile entry of only the routine _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ and its descendants (as -\b-f\bf,\b, above) and also uses only
+ the times of the printed routines in total time and
+ percentage computations. More than one -\b-F\bF option may
+ be given. Only one _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be may be given with each -\b-F\bF
+ option. The -\b-F\bF option overrides the -\b-E\bE option.
+
+ -\b-k\bk _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be _\bt_\bo_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ will delete any arcs from routine _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to routine
+ _\bt_\bo_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. This can be used to break undesired cycles.
+ More than one -\b-k\bk option may be given. Only one pair of
+ routine names may be given with each -\b-k\bk option.
+
+ -\b-s\bs a profile file _\bg_\bm_\bo_\bn._\bs_\bu_\bm is produced that represents the
+ sum of the profile information in all the specified
+ profile files. This summary profile file may be given
+ to later executions of gprof (probably also with a -\b-s\bs)
+ to accumulate profile data across several runs of an
+ _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt file.
+
+ -\b-z\bz displays routines that have zero usage (as shown by
+ call counts and accumulated time). This is useful with
+ the -\b-c\bc option for discovering which routines were never
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GPROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GPROF(1)
+
+
+
+ called.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt the namelist and text space.
+ _\bg_\bm_\bo_\bn._\bo_\bu_\bt dynamic call graph and profile.
+ _\bg_\bm_\bo_\bn._\bs_\bu_\bm summarized dynamic call graph and profile.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ monitor(3), profil(2), cc(1), prof(1)
+ ``gprof: A Call Graph Execution Profiler'', by Graham, S.L.,
+ Kessler, P.B., McKusick, M.K.; _\bP_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\be_\bd_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs _\bo_\bf _\bt_\bh_\be _\bS_\bI_\bG_\bP_\bL_\bA_\bN
+ '_\b8_\b2 _\bS_\by_\bm_\bp_\bo_\bs_\bi_\bu_\bm _\bo_\bn _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bi_\bl_\be_\br _\bC_\bo_\bn_\bs_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn, SIGPLAN Notices,
+ Vol. 17, No. 6, pp. 120-126, June 1982.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Beware of quantization errors. The granularity of the sam-
+ pling is shown, but remains statistical at best. We assume
+ that the time for each execution of a function can be
+ expressed by the total time for the function divided by the
+ number of times the function is called. Thus the time pro-
+ pagated along the call graph arcs to the function's parents
+ is directly proportional to the number of times that arc is
+ traversed.
+
+ Parents that are not themselves profiled will have the time
+ of their profiled children propagated to them, but they will
+ appear to be spontaneously invoked in the call graph list-
+ ing, and will not have their time propagated further. Simi-
+ larly, signal catchers, even though profiled, will appear to
+ be spontaneous (although for more obscure reasons). Any
+ profiled children of signal catchers should have their times
+ propagated properly, unless the signal catcher was invoked
+ during the execution of the profiling routine, in which case
+ all is lost.
+
+ The profiled program must call _\be_\bx_\bi_\bt(2) or return normally
+ for the profiling information to be saved in the gmon.out
+ file.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+GRAPH(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual GRAPH(1G)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ graph - draw a graph
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ g\bgr\bra\bap\bph\bh [ option ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bG_\br_\ba_\bp_\bh with no options takes pairs of numbers from the stan-
+ dard input as abscissas and ordinates of a graph. Succes-
+ sive points are connected by straight lines. The graph is
+ encoded on the standard output for display by the _\bp_\bl_\bo_\bt(1G)
+ filters.
+
+ If the coordinates of a point are followed by a nonnumeric
+ string, that string is printed as a label beginning on the
+ point. Labels may be surrounded with quotes "...", in which
+ case they may be empty or contain blanks and numbers; labels
+ never contain newlines.
+
+ The following options are recognized, each as a separate
+ argument.
+
+ -\b-a\ba Supply abscissas automatically (they are missing from
+ the input); spacing is given by the next argument
+ (default 1). A second optional argument is the start-
+ ing point for automatic abscissas (default 0 or lower
+ limit given by -\b-x\bx).
+
+ -\b-b\bb Break (disconnect) the graph after each label in the
+ input.
+
+ -\b-c\bc Character string given by next argument is default
+ label for each point.
+
+ -\b-g\bg Next argument is grid style, 0 no grid, 1 frame with
+ ticks, 2 full grid (default).
+
+ -\b-l\bl Next argument is label for graph.
+
+ -\b-m\bm Next argument is mode (style) of connecting lines: 0
+ disconnected, 1 connected (default). Some devices give
+ distinguishable line styles for other small integers.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Save screen, don't erase before plotting.
+
+ -\b-x\bx [ l\bl ]
+ If l\bl is present, x axis is logarithmic. Next 1 (or 2)
+ arguments are lower (and upper) _\bx limits. Third argu-
+ ment, if present, is grid spacing on _\bx axis. Normally
+ these quantities are determined automatically.
+
+ -\b-y\by [ l\bl ]
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GRAPH(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual GRAPH(1G)
+
+
+
+ Similarly for _\by.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Next argument is fraction of space for height.
+
+ -\b-w\bw Similarly for width.
+
+ -\b-r\br Next argument is fraction of space to move right before
+ plotting.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Similarly to move up before plotting.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Transpose horizontal and vertical axes. (Option -\b-x\bx now
+ applies to the vertical axis.)
+
+ A legend indicating grid range is produced with a grid
+ unless the -\b-s\bs option is present.
+
+ If a specified lower limit exceeds the upper limit, the axis
+ is reversed.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ spline(1G), plot(1G)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bG_\br_\ba_\bp_\bh stores all points internally and drops those for which
+ there isn't room.
+ Segments that run out of bounds are dropped, not windowed.
+ Logarithmic axes may not be reversed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ grep, egrep, fgrep - search a file for a pattern
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ g\bgr\bre\bep\bp [ option ] ... expression [ file ] ...
+
+ e\beg\bgr\bre\bep\bp [ option ] ... [ expression ] [ file ] ...
+
+ f\bfg\bgr\bre\bep\bp [ option ] ... [ strings ] [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ Commands of the _\bg_\br_\be_\bp family search the input _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs (standard
+ input default) for lines matching a pattern. Normally, each
+ line found is copied to the standard output. _\bG_\br_\be_\bp patterns
+ are limited regular expressions in the style of _\be_\bx(1); it
+ uses a compact nondeterministic algorithm. _\bE_\bg_\br_\be_\bp patterns
+ are full regular expressions; it uses a fast deterministic
+ algorithm that sometimes needs exponential space. _\bF_\bg_\br_\be_\bp
+ patterns are fixed strings; it is fast and compact. The
+ following options are recognized.
+
+ -\b-v\bv All lines but those matching are printed.
+
+ -\b-x\bx (Exact) only lines matched in their entirety are
+ printed (_\bf_\bg_\br_\be_\bp only).
+
+ -\b-c\bc Only a count of matching lines is printed.
+
+ -\b-l\bl The names of files with matching lines are listed
+ (once) separated by newlines.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Each line is preceded by its relative line number in
+ the file.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Each line is preceded by the block number on which it
+ was found. This is sometimes useful in locating disk
+ block numbers by context.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Never print filename headers with output lines.
+
+ -\b-o\bo Always print filename headers with output lines.
+
+ -\b-i\bi The case of letters is ignored in making comparisons -
+ that is, upper and lower case are considered identical.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Silent mode. Nothing is printed (except error mes-
+ sages). This is useful for checking the error status.
+
+ -\b-w\bw The expression is searched for as a word (as if sur-
+ rounded by `\<' and `\>', see _\be_\bx(1).) (_\bg_\br_\be_\bp only)
+
+ -\b-e\be _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
+
+
+
+ Same as a simple _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn argument, but useful when
+ the _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn begins with a -.
+
+ -\b-f\bf _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ The regular expression (_\be_\bg_\br_\be_\bp) or string list (_\bf_\bg_\br_\be_\bp)
+ is taken from the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+ In all cases the file name is shown if there is more than
+ one input file. Care should be taken when using the charac-
+ ters $ * [ ^ | ( ) and \ in the _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn as they are also
+ meaningful to the Shell. It is safest to enclose the entire
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn argument in single quotes ' '.
+
+ _\bF_\bg_\br_\be_\bp searches for lines that contain one of the (newline-
+ separated) _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs.
+
+ _\bE_\bg_\br_\be_\bp accepts extended regular expressions. In the follow-
+ ing description `character' excludes newline:
+
+ A \ followed by a single character other than newline
+ matches that character.
+
+ The character ^ matches the beginning of a line.
+
+ The character $ matches the end of a line.
+
+ A .\b. (period) matches any character.
+
+ A single character not otherwise endowed with special
+ meaning matches that character.
+
+ A string enclosed in brackets [] matches any single
+ character from the string. Ranges of ASCII character
+ codes may be abbreviated as in `a-z0-9'. A ] may occur
+ only as the first character of the string. A literal -
+ must be placed where it can't be mistaken as a range
+ indicator.
+
+ A regular expression followed by an * (asterisk)
+ matches a sequence of 0 or more matches of the regular
+ expression. A regular expression followed by a +
+ (plus) matches a sequence of 1 or more matches of the
+ regular expression. A regular expression followed by a
+ ? (question mark) matches a sequence of 0 or 1 matches
+ of the regular expression.
+
+ Two regular expressions concatenated match a match of
+ the first followed by a match of the second.
+
+ Two regular expressions separated by | or newline match
+ either a match for the first or a match for the second.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+GREP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GREP(1)
+
+
+
+ A regular expression enclosed in parentheses matches a
+ match for the regular expression.
+
+ The order of precedence of operators at the same parenthesis
+ level is [] then *+? then concatenation then | and newline.
+
+ Ideally there should be only one _\bg_\br_\be_\bp, but we don't know a
+ single algorithm that spans a wide enough range of space-
+ time tradeoffs.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ex(1), sed(1), sh(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Exit status is 0 if any matches are found, 1 if none, 2 for
+ syntax errors or inaccessible files.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Lines are limited to 256 characters; longer lines are trun-
+ cated.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 8, 1987 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+GROUPS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual GROUPS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ groups - show group memberships
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ g\bgr\bro\bou\bup\bps\bs [\b[u\bus\bse\ber\br]\b]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The _\bg_\br_\bo_\bu_\bp_\bs command shows the groups to which you or the
+ optionally specified user belong. Each user belongs to a
+ group specified in the password file /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd and possi-
+ bly to other groups as specified in the file /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bg_\br_\bo_\bu_\bp. If
+ you do not own a file but belong to the group which it is
+ owned by then you are granted group access to the file.
+
+ When a new file is created it is given the group of the con-
+ taining directory.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ setgroups(2)
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/passwd, /etc/group
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ More groups should be allowed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+HEAD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual HEAD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ head - give first few lines
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ h\bhe\bea\bad\bd [ -\b-count ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ This filter gives the first _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt lines of each of the
+ specified files, or of the standard input. If _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is
+ omitted it defaults to 10.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ tail(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+HOSTID(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual HOSTID(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ h\bho\bos\bst\bti\bid\bd - set or print identifier of current host system
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ h\bho\bos\bst\bti\bid\bd [hexnum or internet address]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bH_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bi_\bd prints the identifier of the current host in hexade-
+ cimal. This numeric value is expected to be unique across
+ all hosts and is commonly set to the host's Internet
+ address. The super-user can set the hostid by giving a hex-
+ adecimal argument or the hostname; this is usually done in
+ the startup script /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\br_\bt.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ gethostid(2), sethostid(2)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+HOSTNAME(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual HOSTNAME(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ h\bho\bos\bst\btn\bna\bam\bme\be - set or print name of current host system
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ h\bho\bos\bst\btn\bna\bam\bme\be [-s] [nameofhost]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bH_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be prints the name of the current host. The super-
+ user can set the hostname by supplying an argument; this is
+ usually done in the network initialization script
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\br_\bt, normally run at boot time. The -_\bs option
+ trims any domain information from the printed name.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ gethostname(2), sethostname(2)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sh, for, case, if, while, :\b:, .\b., break, continue, cd, eval,
+ exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift,
+ times, trap, umask, wait - command language
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsh\bh [ -\b-c\bce\bei\bik\bkn\bnr\brs\bst\btu\buv\bvx\bx ] [ arg ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bh is a command programming language that executes commands
+ read from a terminal or a file. See i\bin\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn for the
+ meaning of arguments to the shell.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ A _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is a sequence of non blank _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bs separated
+ by blanks (a blank is a t\bta\bab\bb or a s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be). The first word
+ specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as
+ specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments
+ to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu-
+ ment 0 (see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2)). The _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be of a simple-command is
+ its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs if
+ it terminates abnormally (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2) for a list of status
+ values).
+
+ A _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be is a sequence of one or more _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd_\bs separated
+ by |\b|.\b. The standard output of each command but the last is
+ connected by a _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be(2) to the standard input of the next
+ command. Each command is run as a separate process; the
+ shell waits for the last command to terminate.
+
+ A _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is a sequence of one or more _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bs separated by
+ ;\b;, &\b&, &\b&&\b& or |\b||\b| and optionally terminated by ;\b; or &\b&. ;\b; and &\b&
+ have equal precedence which is lower than that of &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b|,
+ &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes
+ sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding
+ _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be to be executed without waiting for it to finish.
+ The symbol &\b&&\b& (|\b||\b|) causes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following to be executed
+ only if the preceding _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be returns a zero (non zero)
+ value. Newlines may appear in a _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt, instead of semi-
+ colons, to delimit commands.
+
+ A _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is either a simple-command or one of the follow-
+ ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last
+ simple-command executed in the command.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\br _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be [i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ...] d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ Each time a f\bfo\bor\br command is executed _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is set to the
+ next word in the f\bfo\bor\br word list. If i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ... is
+ omitted, i\bin\bn "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is assumed. Execution ends when there
+ are no more words in the list.
+
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd i\bin\bn [_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn [ |\b| _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn ] ... )\b) _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt ;\b;;\b;] ... e\bes\bsa\bac\bc
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ A c\bca\bas\bse\be command executes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt associated with the
+ first pattern that matches _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd. The form of the pat-
+ terns is the same as that used for file name genera-
+ tion.
+
+ i\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [e\bel\bli\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] ... [e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] f\bfi\bi
+ The _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following i\bif\bf is executed and if it returns
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Otherwise,
+ the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following e\bel\bli\bif\bf is executed and if its value is
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Failing that
+ the e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is executed.
+
+ w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ A w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be command repeatedly executes the w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt and
+ if its value is zero executes the d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt; otherwise
+ the loop terminates. The value returned by a w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ command is that of the last executed command in the d\bdo\bo
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl may be used in place of w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be to negate the
+ loop termination test.
+
+ (\b( _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt )\b)
+ Execute _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt in a subshell.
+
+ {\b{ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt }\b}
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is simply executed.
+
+ The following words are only recognized as the first word of
+ a command and when not quoted.
+
+ i\bif\bf t\bth\bhe\ben\bn e\bel\bls\bse\be e\bel\bli\bif\bf f\bfi\bi c\bca\bas\bse\be i\bin\bn e\bes\bsa\bac\bc f\bfo\bor\br w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl d\bdo\bo
+ d\bdo\bon\bne\be {\b{ }\b}
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of
+ back quotes (`\b``\b`) may be used as part or all of a word;
+ trailing newlines are removed.
+
+ P\bPa\bar\bra\bam\bme\bet\bte\ber\br s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The character $\b$ is used to introduce substitutable parame-
+ ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by s\bse\bet\bt.
+ Variables may be set by writing
+
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be ] ...
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br}\b}
+ A _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is a sequence of letters, digits or under-
+ scores (a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be), a digit, or any of the characters *\b* @\b@
+ #\b# ?\b? -\b- $\b$ !\b!.\b. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub-
+ stituted. The braces are required only when _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br
+ is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is
+ not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\b-
+ _\bt_\be_\br is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is *\b* or @\b@ then all the positional parameters,
+ starting with $\b$1\b1, are substituted separated by spaces.
+ $\b$0\b0 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br-_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise
+ substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br=_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is not set, set it to _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; the value of
+ the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame-
+ ters may not be assigned to in this way.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br?_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise,
+ print _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd and exit from the shell. If _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is omit-
+ ted, a standard message is printed.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br+_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; otherwise substi-
+ tute nothing.
+
+ In the above _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is not evaluated unless it is to be used
+ as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo
+ ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _\bp_\bw_\bd if _\bd is unset.)
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are automatically set by the shell.
+
+ #\b# The number of positional parameters in decimal.
+ -\b- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by
+ s\bse\bet\bt.
+ ?\b? The value returned by the last executed command in
+ decimal.
+ $\b$ The process number of this shell.
+ !\b! The process number of the last background command
+ invoked.
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are used but not set by the shell.
+
+ H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE The default argument (home directory) for the c\bcd\bd
+ command.
+ P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH The search path for commands (see e\bex\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn).
+ M\bMA\bAI\bIL\bL If this variable is set to the name of a mail
+ file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of
+ mail in the specified file.
+ P\bPS\bS1\b1 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '.
+ P\bPS\bS2\b2 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '.
+ I\bIF\bFS\bS Internal field separators, normally s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be, t\bta\bab\bb,
+ and n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be. I\bIF\bFS\bS is ignored if _\bs_\bh is running as
+ root or if the effective user id differs from the
+ real user id.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ B\bBl\bla\ban\bnk\bk i\bin\bnt\bte\ber\brp\bpr\bre\bet\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ After parameter and command substitution, any results of
+ substitution are scanned for internal field separator char-
+ acters (those found in $\b$I\bIF\bFS\bS) and split into distinct argu-
+ ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu-
+ ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments
+ (those resulting from _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs that have no values) are
+ removed.
+
+ F\bFi\bil\ble\be n\bna\bam\bme\be g\bge\ben\bne\ber\bra\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the
+ characters *\b*, ?\b? and [\b[.\b. If one of these characters appears,
+ the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced
+ with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat-
+ tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern,
+ the word is left unchanged. The character .\b. at the start of
+ a file name or immediately following a /\b/, and the character
+ /\b/, must be matched explicitly.
+
+ *\b* Matches any string, including the null string.
+ ?\b? Matches any single character.
+ [\b[.\b..\b..\b.]\b]
+ Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of
+ characters separated by -\b- matches any character lexi-
+ cally between the pair.
+
+ Q\bQu\buo\bot\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ The following characters have a special meaning to the shell
+ and cause termination of a word unless quoted.
+
+ ;\b; &\b& (\b( )\b) |\b| <\b< >\b> n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be t\bta\bab\bb
+
+ A character may be _\bq_\bu_\bo_\bt_\be_\bd by preceding it with a \\b\.\b. \\b\n\bne\bew\bw-\b-
+ l\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of
+ quote marks ('\b''\b'), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside
+ double quotes ("\b""\b") parameter and command substitution occurs
+ and \\b\ quotes the characters \\b\ '\b' "\b" and $\b$.
+
+ "\b"$\b$*\b*"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1 $\b$2\b2 .\b..\b..\b."\b" whereas
+ "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1"\b" "\b"$\b$2\b2"\b" .\b..\b..\b. .\b.
+
+ P\bPr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of
+ PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is
+ typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the
+ secondary prompt ($\b$P\bPS\bS2\b2) is issued.
+
+ I\bIn\bnp\bpu\but\bt o\bou\but\btp\bpu\but\bt.\b.
+ Before a command is executed its input and output may be
+ redirected using a special notation interpreted by the
+ shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple-
+ command or may precede or follow a _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd and are not
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs
+ before _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd or _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt is used.
+
+ <_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard input (file descriptor 0).
+
+ >_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output (file descriptor 1).
+ If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it
+ is truncated to zero length.
+
+ >>_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output. If the file exists,
+ output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise
+ the file is created.
+
+ <<_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ The shell input is read up to a line the same as _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd,
+ or end of file. The resulting document becomes the
+ standard input. If any character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is quoted, no
+ interpretation is placed upon the characters of the
+ document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution
+ occurs, \\b\n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored, and \\b\ is used to quote the
+ characters \\b\ $\b$ '\b' and the first character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ <&_\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt
+ The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor
+ _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt; see _\bd_\bu_\bp(2). Similarly for the standard output
+ using >.
+
+ <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan-
+ dard output using >.
+
+ If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file
+ descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead
+ of the default 0 or 1). For example,
+
+ ... 2>&1
+
+ creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip-
+ tor 1.
+
+ If a command is followed by &\b& then the default standard
+ input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other-
+ wise, the environment for the execution of a command con-
+ tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified
+ by input output specifications.
+
+ E\bEn\bnv\bvi\bir\bro\bon\bnm\bme\ben\bnt\bt.\b.
+ The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed
+ to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument
+ list; see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2) and _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7). The shell interacts
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the
+ shell scans the environment and creates a _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br for each
+ name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed
+ commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies
+ the values of these _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs or creates new ones, none of
+ these affects the environment unless the e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt command is
+ used to bind the shell's _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br to the environment. The
+ environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of
+ any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the
+ shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which
+ must be noted in e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt commands.
+
+ The environment for any _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd may be augmented by
+ prefixing it with one or more assignments to _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs.
+ Thus these two lines are equivalent
+
+ TERM=450 cmd args
+ (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args)
+
+ If the -\b-k\bk flag is set, _\ba_\bl_\bl keyword arguments are placed in
+ the environment, even if the occur after the command name.
+ The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c':
+ echo a=b c
+ set -k
+ echo a=b c
+
+ S\bSi\big\bgn\bna\bal\bls\bs.\b.
+ The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are
+ ignored if the command is followed by &\b&; otherwise signals
+ have the values inherited by the shell from its parent.
+ (But see also t\btr\bra\bap\bp.\b.)
+
+ E\bEx\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are
+ carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below
+ a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute
+ the command via an _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2).
+
+ The shell parameter $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH defines the search path for the
+ directory containing the command. Each alternative direc-
+ tory name is separated by a colon (:\b:). The default path is
+ :\b:/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn:\b:/\b/u\bus\bsr\br/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn. If the command name contains a /, the
+ search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the
+ path is searched for an executable file. If the file has
+ execute permission but is not an _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt file, it is assumed
+ to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a
+ separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized
+ command is also executed in a subshell.
+
+ S\bSp\bpe\bec\bci\bia\bal\bl c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ The following commands are executed in the shell process and
+ except where specified no input output redirection is
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ permitted for such commands.
+
+ #\b# For non-interactive shells, everything following the #\b#
+ is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is
+ ignored. For interactive shells, the #\b# has no special
+ effect.
+
+ :\b: No effect; the command does nothing.
+ .\b. _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Read and execute commands from _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be and return. The
+ search path $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH is used to find the directory con-
+ taining _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bk [_\bn]
+ Exit from the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be loop, if any. If
+ _\bn is specified, break _\bn levels.
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bti\bin\bnu\bue\be [_\bn]
+ Resume the next iteration of the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ loop. If _\bn is specified, resume at the _\bn-th enclosing
+ loop.
+ c\bcd\bd [_\ba_\br_\bg]
+ Change the current directory to _\ba_\br_\bg. The shell parame-
+ ter $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE is the default _\ba_\br_\bg.
+ e\bev\bva\bal\bl [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The arguments are read as input to the shell and the
+ resulting command(s) executed.
+ e\bex\bxe\bec\bc [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The command specified by the arguments is executed in
+ place of this shell without creating a new process.
+ Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu-
+ ments are given cause the shell input output to be
+ modified.
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit
+ status specified by _\bn. If _\bn is omitted, the exit status
+ is that of the last command executed. (An end of file
+ will also exit from the shell.)
+ e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked for automatic export to the
+ _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt of subsequently-executed commands. If no
+ arguments are given, a list of exportable names is
+ printed.
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bd _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...
+ One line is read from the standard input; successive
+ words of the input are assigned to the variables _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ in order, with leftover words to the last variable.
+ The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun-
+ tered.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bdo\bon\bnl\bly\by [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked readonly and the values of
+ the these names may not be changed by subsequent
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all
+ readonly names is printed.
+ s\bse\bet\bt [-\b-e\bek\bkn\bnp\bpt\btu\buv\bvx\bx [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]]
+ -\b-e\be If non interactive, exit immediately if a command
+ fails.
+ -\b-k\bk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment
+ for a command, not just those that precede the com-
+ mand name.
+ -\b-n\bn Read commands but do not execute them.
+ -\b-t\bt Exit after reading and executing one command.
+ -\b-u\bu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting.
+ -\b-v\bv Print shell input lines as they are read.
+ -\b-x\bx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe-
+ cuted.
+ -\b- Turn off the -\b-x\bx and -\b-v\bv options.
+
+ These flags can also be used upon invocation of the
+ shell. The current set of flags may be found in $\b$-\b-.
+
+ Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are
+ assigned, in order, to $\b$1\b1, $\b$2\b2, etc. If no arguments
+ are given, the values of all names are printed.
+
+ s\bsh\bhi\bif\bft\bt
+ The positional parameters from $\b$2\b2... are renamed $\b$1\b1...
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\bes\bs
+ Print the accumulated user and system times for
+ processes run from the shell.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bap\bp [_\ba_\br_\bg] [_\bn] ...
+ _\bA_\br_\bg is a command to be read and executed when the shell
+ receives signal(s) _\bn. (Note that _\ba_\br_\bg is scanned once
+ when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.)
+ Trap commands are executed in order of signal number.
+ If _\ba_\br_\bg is absent, all trap(s) _\bn are reset to their ori-
+ ginal values. If _\ba_\br_\bg is the null string, this signal
+ is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _\bn
+ is 0, the command _\ba_\br_\bg is executed on exit from the
+ shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _\bn as numbered
+ in _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2). _\bT_\br_\ba_\bp with no arguments prints a list of
+ commands associated with each signal number.
+
+ u\bum\bma\bas\bsk\bk [ _\bn_\bn_\bn ]
+ The user file creation mask is set to the octal value
+ _\bn_\bn_\bn (see _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk(2)). If _\bn_\bn_\bn is omitted, the current
+ value of the mask is printed.
+
+ w\bwa\bai\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Wait for the specified process and report its termina-
+ tion status. If _\bn is not given, all currently active
+ child processes are waited for. The return code from
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ this command is that of the process waited for.
+
+ I\bIn\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ If the first character of argument zero is -\b-, commands are
+ read from $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE/\b/.\b.p\bpr\bro\bof\bfi\bil\ble\be, if such a file exists. Commands
+ are then read as described below. The following flags are
+ interpreted by the shell when it is invoked.
+ -\b-c\bc _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg If the -\b-c\bc flag is present, commands are read from
+ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg.
+ -\b-s\bs If the -\b-s\bs flag is present or if no arguments
+ remain then commands are read from the standard
+ input. Shell output is written to file descrip-
+ tor 2.
+ -\b-i\bi If the -\b-i\bi flag is present or if the shell input
+ and output are attached to a terminal (as told by
+ _\bg_\bt_\bt_\by) then this shell is _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\ba_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bv_\be. In this
+ case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2))
+ is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an
+ interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG-
+ INT is caught and ignored (so that w\bwa\bai\bit\bt is inter-
+ ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by
+ the shell.
+
+ The remaining flags and arguments are described under the
+ s\bse\bet\bt command.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ $HOME/.\b.profile
+ /tmp/sh*
+ /dev/null
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause
+ the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is
+ being used non interactively then execution of the shell
+ file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit
+ status of the last command executed (see also e\bex\bxi\bit\bt).
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous
+ process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming
+ the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and
+ the shell complains about not being able to find the file by
+ another name.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ indent - indent and format C program source
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ i\bin\bnd\bde\ben\bnt\bt [ _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be [ _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be ] ] [ -\b-b\bba\bad\bd | -\b-n\bnb\bba\bad\bd ]
+ [ -\b-b\bba\bap\bp | -\b-n\bnb\bba\bap\bp ] [ -\b-b\bbb\bbb\bb | -\b-n\bnb\bbb\bbb\bb ] [ -\b-b\bbc\bc | -\b-n\bnb\bbc\bc ]
+ [ -\b-b\bbl\bl | -\b-b\bbr\br ] [ -\b-c\bc_\bn ] [ -\b-c\bcd\bd_\bn ] [ -\b-c\bcd\bdb\bb | -\b-n\bnc\bcd\bdb\bb ]
+ [ -\b-c\bce\be | -\b-n\bnc\bce\be ] [ -\b-c\bci\bi_\bn ] [ -\b-c\bcl\bli\bi_\bn ] [ -\b-d\bd_\bn ] [ -\b-d\bdi\bi_\bn ]
+ [ -\b-d\bdj\bj | -\b-n\bnd\bdj\bj ] [ -\b-e\bei\bi | -\b-n\bne\bei\bi ] [ -\b-f\bfc\bc1\b1 | -\b-n\bnf\bfc\bc1\b1 ]
+ [ -\b-i\bi_\bn ] [ -\b-i\bip\bp | -\b-n\bni\bip\bp ] [ -\b-l\bl_\bn ] [ -\b-l\blc\bc_\bn ]
+ [ -\b-l\blp\bp | -\b-n\bnl\blp\bp ] [ -\b-n\bnp\bpr\bro\bo ] [ -\b-p\bpc\bcs\bs | -\b-n\bnp\bpc\bcs\bs ]
+ [ -\b-p\bps\bs | -\b-n\bnp\bps\bs ] [ -\b-p\bps\bsl\bl | -\b-n\bnp\bps\bsl\bl ] [ -\b-s\bsc\bc | -\b-n\bns\bsc\bc ]
+ [ -\b-s\bso\bob\bb | -\b-n\bns\bso\bob\bb ] [ -\b-s\bst\bt ] [ -\b-t\btr\bro\bof\bff\bf ] [ -\b-v\bv | -\b-n\bnv\bv ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bI_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt is a C\bC program formatter. It reformats the C\bC program
+ in the _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be according to the switches. The switches
+ which can be specified are described below. They may appear
+ before or after the file names.
+
+ N\bNO\bOT\bTE\bE: If you only specify an _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be, the formatting is
+ done `in-place', that is, the formatted file is written back
+ into _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be and a backup copy of _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is written
+ in the current directory. If _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is named
+ `/blah/blah/file', the backup file is named file._\bB_\bA_\bK.
+
+ If _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is specified, _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt checks to make sure it
+ is different from _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt-_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+O\bOP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bNS\bS
+ The options listed below control the formatting style
+ imposed by _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt.
+
+ -\b-b\bba\bad\bd,-\b-n\bnb\bba\bad\bd If -\b-b\bba\bad\bd is specified, a blank line is forced
+ after every block of declarations. Default:
+ -\b-n\bnb\bba\bad\bd.
+
+ -\b-b\bba\bap\bp,-\b-n\bnb\bba\bap\bp If -\b-b\bba\bap\bp is specified, a blank line is forced
+ after every procedure body. Default: -\b-n\bnb\bba\bap\bp.\b.
+
+ -\b-b\bbb\bbb\bb,-\b-n\bnb\bbb\bbb\bb If -\b-b\bbb\bbb\bb is specified, a blank line is forced
+ before every block comment. Default: -\b-n\bnb\bbb\bbb\bb.\b.
+
+ -\b-b\bbc\bc,-\b-n\bnb\bbc\bc If -\b-b\bbc\bc is specified, then a newline is forced
+ after each comma in a declaration. -\b-n\bnb\bbc\bc turns
+ off this option. The default is -\b-n\bnb\bbc\bc.
+
+ -\b-b\bbr\br,-\b-b\bbl\bl Specifying -\b-b\bbl\bl lines up compound statements
+ like this:
+ if (...)
+ {
+ code
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1)
+
+
+
+ }
+ Specifying -\b-b\bbr\br (the default) makes them look
+ like this:
+ if (...) {
+ code
+ }
+
+ -\b-c\bc_\bn The column in which comments on code start.
+ The default is 33.
+
+ -\b-c\bcd\bd_\bn The column in which comments on declarations
+ start. The default is for these comments to
+ start in the same column as those on code.
+
+ -\b-c\bcd\bdb\bb,-\b-n\bnc\bcd\bdb\bb Enables (disables) the placement of comment
+ delimiters on blank lines. With this option
+ enabled, comments look like this:
+ /*
+ * this is a comment
+ */
+ Rather than like this:
+ /* this is a comment */
+ This only affects block comments, not com-
+ ments to the right of code. The default is
+ -\b-c\bcd\bdb\bb.
+
+ -\b-c\bce\be,-\b-n\bnc\bce\be Enables (disables) forcing `else's to cuddle
+ up to the immediately preceding `}'. The
+ default is -\b-c\bce\be.
+
+ -\b-c\bci\bi_\bn Sets the continuation indent to be _\bn. Con-
+ tinuation lines will be indented that far
+ from the beginning of the first line of the
+ statement. Parenthesized expressions have
+ extra indentation added to indicate the nest-
+ ing, unless -\b-l\blp\bp is in effect. -\b-c\bci\bi defaults
+ to the same value as -\b-i\bi.
+
+ -\b-c\bcl\bli\bi_\bn Causes case labels to be indented _\bn tab stops
+ to the right of the containing s\bsw\bwi\bit\btc\bch\bh state-
+ ment. -\b-c\bcl\bli\bi0\b0.\b.5\b5 causes case labels to be
+ indented half a tab stop. The default is
+ -\b-c\bcl\bli\bi0\b0. (This is the only option that takes a
+ fractional argument.)
+
+ -\b-d\bd_\bn Controls the placement of comments which are
+ not to the right of code. Specifying -\b-d\bd1\b1
+ means that such comments are placed one
+ indentation level to the left of code. The
+ default -\b-d\bd0\b0 lines up these comments with the
+ code. See the section on comment indentation
+ below.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-d\bdi\bi_\bn Specifies the indentation, in character posi-
+ tions, from a declaration keyword to the fol-
+ lowing identifier. The default is -\b-d\bdi\bi1\b16\b6.
+
+ -\b-d\bdj\bj,-\b-n\bnd\bdj\bj -\b-d\bdj\bj left justifies declarations. -\b-n\bnd\bdj\bj
+ indents declarations the same as code. The
+ default is -\b-n\bnd\bdj\bj.
+
+ -\b-e\bei\bi,-\b-n\bne\bei\bi Enables (disables) special e\bel\bls\bse\be-\b-i\bif\bf process-
+ ing. If enabled, i\bif\bfs following e\bel\bls\bse\bes will
+ have the same indentation as the preceding i\bif\bf
+ statement. The default is -\b-e\bei\bi.
+
+ -\b-f\bfc\bc1\b1,-\b-n\bnf\bfc\bc1\b1 Enables (disables) the formatting of comments
+ that start in column 1. Often, comments
+ whose leading `/' is in column 1 have been
+ carefully hand formatted by the programmer.
+ In such cases, -\b-n\bnf\bfc\bc1\b1 should be used. The
+ default is -\b-f\bfc\bc1\b1.
+
+ -\b-i\bi_\bn The number of spaces for one indentation
+ level. The default is 8.
+
+ -\b-i\bip\bp,-\b-n\bni\bip\bp Enables (disables) the indentation of parame-
+ ter declarations from the left margin. The
+ default is -\b-i\bip\bp.
+
+ -\b-l\bl_\bn Maximum length of an output line. The
+ default is 78.
+
+ -\b-l\blp\bp,-\b-n\bnl\blp\bp Lines up code surrounded by parenthesis in
+ continuation lines. If a line has a left
+ paren which is not closed on that line, then
+ continuation lines will be lined up to start
+ at the character position just after the left
+ paren. For example, here is how a piece of
+ continued code looks with -\b-n\bnl\blp\bp in effect:
+ p1 = first_procedure(second_procedure(p2, p3),
+ third_procedure(p4, p5));
+ With -\b-l\blp\bp in effect (the default) the code
+ looks somewhat clearer:
+ p1 = first_procedure(second_procedure(p2, p3),
+ third_procedure(p4, p5));
+ Inserting two more newlines we get:
+ p1 = first_procedure(second_procedure(p2,
+ p3),
+ third_procedure(p4,
+ p5));
+
+ -\b-n\bnp\bpr\bro\bo Causes the profile files, `./.indent.pro' and
+ `~/.indent.pro', to be ignored.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-p\bpc\bcs\bs,-\b-n\bnp\bpc\bcs\bs If true (-\b-p\bpc\bcs\bs) all procedure calls will have
+ a space inserted between the name and the
+ `('. The default is -\b-n\bnp\bpc\bcs\bs.
+
+ -\b-p\bps\bs,-\b-n\bnp\bps\bs If true (-\b-p\bps\bs) the pointer following operator
+ `->' will be surrounded by spaces on either
+ side. The default is -\b-n\bnp\bps\bs.
+
+ -\b-p\bps\bsl\bl,-\b-n\bnp\bps\bsl\bl If true (-\b-p\bps\bsl\bl) the names of procedures being
+ defined are placed in column 1 - their types,
+ if any, will be left on the previous lines.
+ The default is -\b-p\bps\bsl\bl.
+
+ -\b-s\bsc\bc,-\b-n\bns\bsc\bc Enables (disables) the placement of asterisks
+ (`*'s) at the left edge of all comments. The
+ default is -\b-s\bsc\bc.
+
+ -\b-s\bso\bob\bb,-\b-n\bns\bso\bob\bb If -\b-s\bso\bob\bb is specified, indent will swallow
+ optional blank lines. You can use this to
+ get rid of blank lines after declarations.
+ Default: -\b-n\bns\bso\bob\bb.
+
+ -\b-s\bst\bt Causes i\bin\bnd\bde\ben\bnt\bt to take its input from stdin,
+ and put its output to stdout.
+
+ -\b-T\bT_\bt_\by_\bp_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be Adds _\bt_\by_\bp_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the list of type keywords.
+ Names accumulate: -\b-T\bT can be specified more
+ than once. You need to specify all the
+ typenames that appear in your program that
+ are defined by t\bty\byp\bpe\bed\bde\bef\bfs - nothing will be
+ harmed if you miss a few, but the program
+ won't be formatted as nicely as it should.
+ This sounds like a painful thing to have to
+ do, but it's really a symptom of a problem in
+ C: t\bty\byp\bpe\bed\bde\bef\bf causes a syntactic change in the
+ language and _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt can't find all t\bty\byp\bpe\bed\bde\bef\bfs.
+
+ -\b-t\btr\bro\bof\bff\bf Causes i\bin\bnd\bde\ben\bnt\bt to format the program for pro-
+ cessing by troff. It will produce a fancy
+ listing in much the same spirit as v\bvg\bgr\bri\bin\bnd\bd.
+ If the output file is not specified, the
+ default is standard output, rather than for-
+ matting in place.
+
+ -\b-v\bv,-\b-n\bnv\bv -\b-v\bv turns on `verbose' mode; -\b-n\bnv\bv turns it off.
+ When in verbose mode, _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt reports when it
+ splits one line of input into two or more
+ lines of output, and gives some size statis-
+ tics at completion. The default is -\b-n\bnv\bv.
+
+F\bFU\bUR\bRT\bTH\bHE\bER\bR D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1)
+
+
+
+ You may set up your own `profile' of defaults to _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt by
+ creating a file called .\b._\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt.\b._\bp_\br_\bo in either your login
+ directory and/or the current directory and including what-
+ ever switches you like. Switches in `.indent.pro' in the
+ current directory override those in your login directory
+ (with the exception of -\b-T\bT type definitions, which just accu-
+ mulate). If _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt is run and a profile file exists, then
+ it is read to set up the program's defaults. The switches
+ should be separated by spaces, tabs or newlines. Switches
+ on the command line, however, override profile switches.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bme\ben\bnt\bts\bs
+
+ `_\bB_\bo_\bx' _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt_\bs. _\bI_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt assumes that any comment with a dash
+ or star immediately after the start of comment (that is,
+ `/*-' or `/**') is a comment surrounded by a box of stars.
+ Each line of such a comment is left unchanged, except that
+ its indentation may be adjusted to account for the change in
+ indentation of the first line of the comment.
+
+ _\bS_\bt_\br_\ba_\bi_\bg_\bh_\bt _\bt_\be_\bx_\bt. All other comments are treated as straight
+ text. _\bI_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt fits as many words (separated by blanks, tabs,
+ or newlines) on a line as possible. Blank lines break para-
+ graphs.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bme\ben\bnt\bt i\bin\bnd\bde\ben\bnt\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ If a comment is on a line with code it is started in the
+ `comment column', which is set by the -\b-c\bc_\bn command line
+ parameter. Otherwise, the comment is started at _\bn indenta-
+ tion levels less than where code is currently being placed,
+ where _\bn is specified by the -\b-d\bd_\bn command line parameter. If
+ the code on a line extends past the comment column, the com-
+ ment starts further to the right, and the right margin may
+ be automatically extended in extreme cases.
+
+ P\bPr\bre\bep\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bes\bss\bso\bor\br l\bli\bin\bne\bes\bs
+
+ In general, _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt leaves preprocessor lines alone. The
+ only reformatting that it will do is to straighten up trail-
+ ing comments. It leaves embedded comments alone. Condi-
+ tional compilation (#\b#i\bif\bfd\bde\bef\bf.\b..\b..\b.#\b#e\ben\bnd\bdi\bif\bf) is recognized and
+ _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt attempts to correctly compensate for the syntactic
+ peculiarities introduced.
+
+ C\bC s\bsy\byn\bnt\bta\bax\bx
+
+ _\bI_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt understands a substantial amount about the syntax of
+ C, but it has a `forgiving' parser. It attempts to cope
+ with the usual sorts of incomplete and misformed syntax. In
+ particular, the use of macros like:
+ #define forever for(;;)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+INDENT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INDENT(1)
+
+
+
+ is handled properly.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ ./.indent.pro profile file
+ ~/.indent.pro profile file
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bI_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt has even more switches than _\bl_\bs.
+
+ A common mistake that often causes grief is typing:
+ indent *.c
+ to the shell in an attempt to indent all the C\bC programs in a
+ directory. This is probably a bug, not a feature.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1985 6
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LOOKBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOKBIB(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ indxbib, lookbib - build inverted index for a bibliography,
+ find references in a bibliography
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ i\bin\bnd\bdx\bxb\bbi\bib\bb database ...
+ l\blo\boo\bok\bkb\bbi\bib\bb [ -\b-n\bn ] database
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bI_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb makes an inverted index to the named _\bd_\ba_\bt_\ba_\bb_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs (or
+ files) for use by _\bl_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb(1) and _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br(1). These files con-
+ tain bibliographic references (or other kinds of informa-
+ tion) separated by blank lines.
+
+ A bibliographic reference is a set of lines, constituting
+ fields of bibliographic information. Each field starts on a
+ line beginning with a ``%'', followed by a key-letter, then
+ a blank, and finally the contents of the field, which may
+ continue until the next line starting with ``%''.
+
+ _\bI_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb is a shell script that calls /usr/lib/refer/mkey and
+ /usr/lib/refer/inv. The first program, _\bm_\bk_\be_\by, truncates
+ words to 6 characters, and maps upper case to lower case.
+ It also discards words shorter than 3 characters, words
+ among the 100 most common English words, and numbers (dates)
+ < 1900 or > 2000. These parameters can be changed; see page
+ 4 of the _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br document by Mike Lesk. The second program,
+ _\bi_\bn_\bv, creates an entry file (.ia), a posting file (.ib), and
+ a tag file (.ic), all in the working directory.
+
+ _\bL_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb uses an inverted index made by _\bi_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb to find sets
+ of bibliographic references. It reads keywords typed after
+ the ``>'' prompt on the terminal, and retrieves records con-
+ taining all these keywords. If nothing matches, nothing is
+ returned except another ``>'' prompt.
+
+ _\bL_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb will ask if you need instructions, and will print
+ some brief information if you reply ``y''. The ``-n'' flag
+ turns off the prompt for instructions.
+
+ It is possible to search multiple databases, as long as they
+ have a common index made by _\bi_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb. In that case, only the
+ first argument given to _\bi_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb is specified to _\bl_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb.
+
+ If _\bl_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb does not find the index files (the .i[abc]
+ files), it looks for a reference file with the same name as
+ the argument, without the suffixes. It creates a file with
+ a '.ig' suffix, suitable for use with _\bf_\bg_\br_\be_\bp. It then uses
+ this fgrep file to find references. This method is simpler
+ to use, but the .ig file is slower to use than the .i[abc]
+ files, and does not allow the use of multiple reference
+ files.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LOOKBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOKBIB(1)
+
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ _\bx.ia, _\bx.ib, _\bx.ic, where _\bx is the first argument, or if these
+ are not present, then _\bx.ig, _\bx
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ refer(1), addbib(1), sortbib(1), roffbib(1), lookbib(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Probably all dates should be indexed, since many disciplines
+ refer to literature written in the 1800s or earlier.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+INSTALL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INSTALL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ install - install binaries
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ i\bin\bns\bst\bta\bal\bll\bl [ -\b-c\bc ] [ -\b-m\bm mode ] [ -\b-o\bo owner ] [ -\b-g\bg group ] [ -\b-s\bs ]
+ file1 file2; or file1 ... fileN directory
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The file(s) are moved (or copied if the -\b-c\bc option is speci-
+ fied) to the target file or directory. If the destination
+ is a directory, then the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is moved into _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by with
+ its original file-name. If the target file already exists,
+ it is overwritten.
+
+ The mode is set to 755; the -\b-m\bm option may be used to specify
+ an alternate mode.
+
+ The -\b-o\bo and -\b-g\bg options may be used to specify an owner and/or
+ group, respectively.
+
+ The -\b-s\bs option causes the file to be stripped. It is an
+ error to attempt to strip a file not in the _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt format,
+ but not to attempt to strip a file that has already been
+ stripped.
+
+ _\bI_\bn_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bl_\bl refuses to move a file onto itself.
+
+ Installing ``/dev/null'' creates an empty file.
+
+R\bRE\bET\bTU\bUR\bRN\bN V\bVA\bAL\bLU\bUE\bE
+ Upon successful completion a value of 0 is returned. Other-
+ wise, a value of 1 is returned.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ chgrp(1), chmod(1), cp(1), mv(1), strip(1), a.out(5),
+ chown(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+INTRO(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual INTRO(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ intro - introduction to commands
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ This section describes publicly accessible commands in
+ alphabetic order. Certain distinctions of purpose are made
+ in the headings:
+
+ (1) Commands of general utility.
+
+ (1C) Commands for communication with other systems.
+
+ (1G) Commands used primarily for graphics and computer-aided
+ design.
+
+ N.B.: Commands related to system maintenance used to appear
+ in section 1 manual pages and were distinguished by (1M) at
+ the top of the page. These manual pages now appear in sec-
+ tion 8.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ Section (6) for computer games.
+
+ _\bH_\bo_\bw _\bt_\bo _\bg_\be_\bt _\bs_\bt_\ba_\br_\bt_\be_\bd, in the Introduction.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Upon termination each command returns two bytes of status,
+ one supplied by the system giving the cause for termination,
+ and (in the case of `normal' termination) one supplied by
+ the program, see _\bw_\ba_\bi_\bt and _\be_\bx_\bi_\bt(2). The former byte is 0 for
+ normal termination, the latter is customarily 0 for success-
+ ful execution, nonzero to indicate troubles such as errone-
+ ous parameters, bad or inaccessible data, or other inability
+ to cope with the task at hand. It is called variously `exit
+ code', `exit status' or `return code', and is described only
+ where special conventions are involved.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+IOSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual IOSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ iostat - report I/O statistics
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ i\bio\bos\bst\bta\bat\bt [ drives ] [ interval [ count ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bI_\bo_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt iteratively reports the number of characters read and
+ written to terminals per second, and, for each disk, the
+ number of transfers per second, kilobytes transferred per
+ second, and the milliseconds per average seek. It also
+ gives the percentage of time the system has spent in user
+ mode, in user mode running low priority (niced) processes,
+ in system mode, and idling.
+
+ To compute this information, for each disk, seeks and data
+ transfer completions and number of words transferred are
+ counted; for terminals collectively, the number of input and
+ output characters are counted. Also, each sixtieth of a
+ second, the state of each disk is examined and a tally is
+ made if the disk is active. From these numbers and given
+ the transfer rates of the devices it is possible to deter-
+ mine average seek times for each device.
+
+ The optional _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bv_\ba_\bl argument causes _\bi_\bo_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt to report once
+ each _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bv_\ba_\bl seconds. The first report is for all time
+ since a reboot and each subsequent report is for the last
+ interval only.
+
+ The optional _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt argument restricts the number of reports.
+
+ If more than 4 disk drives are configured in the system,
+ _\bi_\bo_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt displays only the first 4 drives, with priority given
+ to Massbus disk drives (i.e. if both Unibus and Massbus
+ drives are present and the total number of drives exceeds 4,
+ then some number of Unibus drives will not be displayed in
+ favor of the Massbus drives). To force _\bi_\bo_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt to display
+ specific drives, their names may be supplied on the command
+ line.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /dev/kmem
+ /vmunix
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ vmstat(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+JOIN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual JOIN(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ join - relational database operator
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ j\bjo\boi\bin\bn [ options ] file1 file2
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bJ_\bo_\bi_\bn forms, on the standard output, a join of the two rela-
+ tions specified by the lines of _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 and _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2. If _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1
+ is `-', the standard input is used.
+
+ _\bF_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 and _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 must be sorted in increasing ASCII collating
+ sequence on the fields on which they are to be joined, nor-
+ mally the first in each line.
+
+ There is one line in the output for each pair of lines in
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 and _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 that have identical join fields. The output
+ line normally consists of the common field, then the rest of
+ the line from _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1, then the rest of the line from _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2.
+
+ Fields are normally separated by blank, tab or newline. In
+ this case, multiple separators count as one, and leading
+ separators are discarded.
+
+ These options are recognized:
+
+ -\b-a\ba_\bn In addition to the normal output, produce a line for
+ each unpairable line in file _\bn, where _\bn is 1 or 2.
+
+ -\b-e\be _\bs Replace empty output fields by string _\bs.
+
+ -\b-j\bj_\bn _\bm
+ Join on the _\bmth field of file _\bn. If _\bn is missing, use
+ the _\bmth field in each file.
+
+ -\b-o\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt
+ Each output line comprises the fields specified in
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt, each element of which has the form _\bn._\bm, where _\bn
+ is a file number and _\bm is a field number.
+
+ -\b-t\bt_\bc Use character _\bc as a separator (tab character). Every
+ appearance of _\bc in a line is significant.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sort(1), comm(1), awk(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ With default field separation, the collating sequence is
+ that of _\bs_\bo_\br_\bt -_\bb; with -\b-t\bt, the sequence is that of a plain
+ sort.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+JOIN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual JOIN(1)
+
+
+
+ The conventions of _\bj_\bo_\bi_\bn, _\bs_\bo_\br_\bt, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm, _\bu_\bn_\bi_\bq, _\bl_\bo_\bo_\bk and _\ba_\bw_\bk(1)
+ are wildly incongruous.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+KILL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual KILL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ kill - terminate a process with extreme prejudice
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl [ -\b-sig ] processid ...
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl -\b-l\bl
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bK_\bi_\bl_\bl sends the TERM (terminate, 15) signal to the specified
+ processes. If a signal name or number preceded by `-' is
+ given as first argument, that signal is sent instead of ter-
+ minate (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2)). The signal names are listed by
+ `kill -l', and are as given in /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bi_\bn_\bc_\bl_\bu_\bd_\be/_\bs_\bi_\bg_\bn_\ba_\bl._\bh,
+ stripped of the common SIG prefix.
+
+ The terminate signal will kill processes that do not catch
+ the signal; `kill -9 ...' is a sure kill, as the KILL (9)
+ signal cannot be caught. By convention, if process number 0
+ is specified, all members in the process group (i.e.
+ processes resulting from the current login) are signaled
+ (but beware: this works only if you use _\bs_\bh(1); not if you
+ use _\bc_\bs_\bh(1).) Negative process numbers also have special
+ meanings; see _\bk_\bi_\bl_\bl(2) for details.
+
+ The killed processes must belong to the current user unless
+ he is the super-user.
+
+ The process number of an asynchronous process started with
+ `&' is reported by the shell. Process numbers can also be
+ found by using _\bp_\bs(1). _\bK_\bi_\bl_\bl is a built-in to _\bc_\bs_\bh(1); it
+ allows job specifiers of the form ``%...'' as arguments so
+ process id's are not as often used as _\bk_\bi_\bl_\bl arguments. See
+ _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) for details.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), ps(1), kill(2), sigvec(2)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ A replacement for ``kill 0'' for _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) users should be pro-
+ vided.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 20, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LAST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LAST(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ last - indicate last logins of users and ttys
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\bla\bas\bst\bt [-#] [-f file] [-h host] [-t tty] [user ...]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\ba_\bs_\bt will list the sessions of specified _\bu_\bs_\be_\br_\bs, _\bt_\bt_\by_\bs, and
+ _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bs, in reverse time order. Each line of output contains
+ the user name, the tty from which the session was conducted,
+ any hostname, the start and stop times for the session, and
+ the duration of the session. If the session is still con-
+ tinuing or was cut short by a crash or shutdown, _\bl_\ba_\bs_\bt will
+ so indicate.
+
+ _\bL_\ba_\bs_\bt reads the file _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be, or by default, /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\ba_\bd_\bm/_\bw_\bt_\bm_\bp. The
+ -\b-#\b# option limits the report to #\b# lines.
+
+ Other arguments specify _\bu_\bs_\be_\br_\bs, _\bt_\bt_\by_\bs or _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bs of interest.
+ Tty names may be given fully or abbreviated, e.g., ``last -t
+ 03'' is equivalent to ``last -t tty03''. Host names may be
+ internet numbers. If multiple arguments are given, the
+ information which applies to any of the arguments is
+ printed, e.g., ``last root -t console'' would list all of
+ ``root's'' sessions as well as all sessions on the console
+ terminal. If no users, hostnames or terminals are specified,
+ _\bl_\ba_\bs_\bt prints a record of all logins and logouts.
+
+ The pseudo-user r\bre\beb\bbo\boo\bot\bt logs in at reboots of the system,
+ thus ``last reboot'' will give an indication of mean time
+ between reboot.
+
+ If _\bl_\ba_\bs_\bt is interrupted, it indicates to what date the search
+ has progressed. If interrupted with a quit signal _\bl_\ba_\bs_\bt
+ indicates how far the search has progressed and then contin-
+ ues.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/adm/wtmp login data base
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lastcomm(1), utmp(5), ac(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 10, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LASTCOMM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LASTCOMM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lastcomm - show last commands executed in reverse order
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\bla\bas\bst\btc\bco\bom\bmm\bm [ -f file ] [ command name ] ... [user name] ...
+ [terminal name] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\ba_\bs_\bt_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm gives information on previously executed commands.
+ With no arguments, _\bl_\ba_\bs_\bt_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm prints information about all the
+ commands recorded during the current accounting file's life-
+ time. The -_\bf option causes _\bl_\ba_\bs_\bt_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm to read from a file
+ other than the default accounting file. If called with
+ arguments, only accounting entries with a matching command
+ name, user name, or terminal name are printed. So, for
+ example,
+ lastcomm a.out root ttyd0
+ would produce a listing of all the executions of commands
+ named _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt by user _\br_\bo_\bo_\bt on the terminal _\bt_\bt_\by_\bd_\b0.
+
+ For each process entry, the following are printed.
+ The name of the user who ran the process.
+ Flags, as accumulated by the accounting facilities in
+ the system.
+ The command name under which the process was called.
+ The amount of cpu time used by the process (in
+ seconds).
+ The time the process exited.
+
+ The flags are encoded as follows: ``S'' indicates the com-
+ mand was executed by the super-user, ``F'' indicates the
+ command ran after a fork, but without a following _\be_\bx_\be_\bc,
+ ``C'' indicates the command was run in PDP-11 compatibility
+ mode (VAX only), ``D'' indicates the command terminated with
+ the generation of a _\bc_\bo_\br_\be file, and ``X'' indicates the com-
+ mand was terminated with a signal.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/adm/acct
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ last(1), sigvec(2), acct(8), core(5)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 8, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ld - link editor
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\bld\bd [ option ] ... file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bd combines several object programs into one, resolves
+ external references, and searches libraries. In the sim-
+ plest case several object _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs are given, and _\bl_\bd combines
+ them, producing an object module which can be either exe-
+ cuted or become the input for a further _\bl_\bd run. (In the
+ latter case, the -\b-r\br option must be given to preserve the
+ relocation bits.) The output of _\bl_\bd is left on a\ba.\b.o\bou\but\bt. This
+ file is made executable only if no errors occurred during
+ the load.
+
+ The argument routines are concatenated in the order speci-
+ fied. The entry point of the output is the beginning of the
+ first routine (unless the -\b-e\be option is specified).
+
+ If any argument is a library, it is searched exactly once at
+ the point it is encountered in the argument list. Only
+ those routines defining an unresolved external reference are
+ loaded. If a routine from a library references another rou-
+ tine in the library, and the library has not been processed
+ by _\br_\ba_\bn_\bl_\bi_\bb(1), the referenced routine must appear after the
+ referencing routine in the library. Thus the order of pro-
+ grams within libraries may be important. The first member
+ of a library should be a file named `__.SYMDEF', which is
+ understood to be a dictionary for the library as produced by
+ _\br_\ba_\bn_\bl_\bi_\bb(1); the dictionary is searched iteratively to satisfy
+ as many references as possible.
+
+ The symbols `_etext', `_edata' and `_end' (`etext', `edata'
+ and `end' in C) are reserved, and if referred to, are set to
+ the first location above the program, the first location
+ above initialized data, and the first location above all
+ data respectively. It is erroneous to define these symbols.
+
+ _\bL_\bd understands several options. Except for -\b-l\bl, they should
+ appear before the file names.
+
+ -\b-A\bA This option specifies incremental loading, i.e. link-
+ ing is to be done in a manner so that the resulting
+ object may be read into an already executing program.
+ The next argument is the name of a file whose symbol
+ table will be taken as a basis on which to define addi-
+ tional symbols. Only newly linked material will be
+ entered into the text and data portions of a\ba.\b.o\bou\but\bt,\b, but
+ the new symbol table will reflect every symbol defined
+ before and after the incremental load. This argument
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LD(1)
+
+
+
+ must appear before any other object file in the argu-
+ ment list. The -\b-T\bT option may be used as well, and will
+ be taken to mean that the newly linked segment will
+ commence at the corresponding address (which must be a
+ multiple of 1024). The default value is the old value
+ of _end.
+
+ -\b-D\bD Take the next argument as a hexadecimal number and pad
+ the data segment with zero bytes to the indicated
+ length.
+
+ -\b-d\bd Force definition of common storage even if the -\b-r\br flag
+ is present.
+
+ -\b-e\be The following argument is taken to be the name of the
+ entry point of the loaded program; location 0 is the
+ default.
+
+ -\b-L\bL_\bd_\bi_\br
+ Add _\bd_\bi_\br to the list of directories in which libraries
+ are searched for. Directories specified with -\b-L\bL are
+ searched before the standard directories.
+
+ -\b-l\bl_\bx This option is an abbreviation for the library name
+ `lib_\bx.a', where _\bx is a string. _\bL_\bd searches for
+ libraries first in any directories specified with -\b-L\bL
+ options, then in the standard directories `/lib',
+ `/usr/lib', and `/usr/local/lib'. A library is
+ searched when its name is encountered, so the placement
+ of a -\b-l\bl is significant.
+
+ -\b-M\bM produce a primitive load map, listing the names of the
+ files which will be loaded.
+
+ -\b-N\bN Do not make the text portion read only or sharable.
+ (Use "magic number" 0407.)
+
+ -\b-n\bn Arrange (by giving the output file a 0410 "magic
+ number") that when the output file is executed, the
+ text portion will be read-only and shared among all
+ users executing the file. This involves moving the
+ data areas up to the first possible 1024 byte boundary
+ following the end of the text.
+
+ -\b-o\bo The _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be argument after -\b-o\bo is used as the name of the
+ _\bl_\bd output file, instead of a\ba.\b.o\bou\but\bt.
+
+ -\b-r\br Generate relocation bits in the output file so that it
+ can be the subject of another _\bl_\bd run. This flag also
+ prevents final definitions from being given to common
+ symbols, and suppresses the `undefined symbol' diagnos-
+ tics.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LD(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-S\bS `Strip' the output by removing all symbols except
+ locals and globals.
+
+ -\b-s\bs `Strip' the output, that is, remove the symbol table
+ and relocation bits to save space (but impair the use-
+ fulness of the debuggers). This information can also
+ be removed by _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bp(1).
+
+ -\b-T\bT The next argument is a hexadecimal number which sets
+ the text segment origin. The default origin is 0.
+
+ -\b-t\bt ("trace") Print the name of each file as it is pro-
+ cessed.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Take the following argument as a symbol and enter it as
+ undefined in the symbol table. This is useful for
+ loading wholly from a library, since initially the sym-
+ bol table is empty and an unresolved reference is
+ needed to force the loading of the first routine.
+
+ -\b-X\bX Save local symbols except for those whose names begin
+ with `L'. This option is used by _\bc_\bc(1) to discard
+ internally-generated labels while retaining symbols
+ local to routines.
+
+ -\b-x\bx Do not preserve local (non-.globl) symbols in the out-
+ put symbol table; only enter external symbols. This
+ option saves some space in the output file.
+
+ -\b-y\by_\bs_\by_\bm
+ Indicate each file in which _\bs_\by_\bm appears, its type and
+ whether the file defines or references it. Many such
+ options may be given to trace many symbols. (It is
+ usually necessary to begin _\bs_\by_\bm with an `_', as external
+ C, FORTRAN and Pascal variables begin with under-
+ scores.)
+
+ -\b-z\bz Arrange for the process to be loaded on demand from the
+ resulting executable file (413 format) rather than
+ preloaded. This is the default. Results in a 1024
+ byte header on the output file followed by a text and
+ data segment each of which have size a multiple of 1024
+ bytes (being padded out with nulls in the file if
+ necessary). With this format the first few BSS segment
+ symbols may actually appear (from the output of
+ _\bs_\bi_\bz_\be(1)) to live in the data segment; this to avoid
+ wasting the space resulting from data segment size
+ roundup.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /lib/lib*.a libraries
+ /usr/lib/lib*.a more libraries
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LD(1)
+
+
+
+ /usr/local/lib/lib*.a still more libraries
+ a.out output file
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ as(1), ar(1), cc(1), ranlib(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ There is no way to force data to be page aligned. _\bL_\bd pads
+ images which are to be demand loaded from the file system to
+ the next page boundary to avoid a bug in the system.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LEARN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEARN(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ learn - computer aided instruction about UNIX
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\ble\bea\bar\brn\bn [ -\b-directory ] [ subject [ lesson ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\be_\ba_\br_\bn gives Computer Aided Instruction courses and practice
+ in the use of UNIX, the C Shell, and the Berkeley text edi-
+ tors. To get started simply type l\ble\bea\bar\brn\bn. If you had used
+ _\bl_\be_\ba_\br_\bn before and left your last session without completing a
+ subject, the program will use information in $HOME/.learnrc
+ to start you up in the same place you left off. Your first
+ time through, _\bl_\be_\ba_\br_\bn will ask questions to find out what you
+ want to do. Some questions may be bypassed by naming a _\bs_\bu_\bb_\b-
+ _\bj_\be_\bc_\bt, and more yet by naming a _\bl_\be_\bs_\bs_\bo_\bn. You may enter the
+ _\bl_\be_\bs_\bs_\bo_\bn as a number that _\bl_\be_\ba_\br_\bn gave you in a previous ses-
+ sion. If you do not know the lesson number, you may enter
+ the _\bl_\be_\bs_\bs_\bo_\bn as a word, and _\bl_\be_\ba_\br_\bn will look for the first les-
+ son containing it. If the _\bl_\be_\bs_\bs_\bo_\bn is `-\b-', _\bl_\be_\ba_\br_\bn prompts for
+ each lesson; this is useful for debugging.
+
+ The _\bs_\bu_\bb_\bj_\be_\bc_\bt's presently handled are
+
+ files
+ editor
+ vi
+ morefiles
+ macros
+ eqn
+ C
+
+ There are a few special commands. The command `bye' ter-
+ minates a _\bl_\be_\ba_\br_\bn session and `where' tells you of your pro-
+ gress, with `where m' telling you more. The command `again'
+ re-displays the text of the lesson and `again _\bl_\be_\bs_\bs_\bo_\bn' lets
+ you review _\bl_\be_\bs_\bs_\bo_\bn. There is no way for _\bl_\be_\ba_\br_\bn to tell you
+ the answers it expects in English, however, the command
+ `hint' prints the last part of the lesson script used to
+ evaluate a response, while `hint m' prints the whole lesson
+ script. This is useful for debugging lessons and might pos-
+ sibly give you an idea about what it expects.
+
+ The -\b-_\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by option allows one to exercise a script in a
+ nonstandard place.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/learn subtree for all dependent directories and
+ files
+ /usr/tmp/pl* playpen directories
+ $HOME/.learnrc startup information
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 15, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LEARN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEARN(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), ex(1)
+ B. W. Kernighan and M. E. Lesk, _\bL_\bE_\bA_\bR_\bN - _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bu_\bt_\be_\br-_\bA_\bi_\bd_\be_\bd
+ _\bI_\bn_\bs_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bo_\bn _\bU_\bN_\bI_\bX
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The main strength of _\bl_\be_\ba_\br_\bn, that it asks the student to use
+ the real UNIX, also makes possible baffling mistakes. It is
+ helpful, especially for nonprogrammers, to have a UNIX ini-
+ tiate near at hand during the first sessions.
+
+ Occasionally lessons are incorrect, sometimes because the
+ local version of a command operates in a non-standard way.
+ Occasionally a lesson script does not recognize all the dif-
+ ferent correct responses, in which case the `hint' command
+ may be useful. Such lessons may be skipped with the `skip'
+ command, but it takes some sophistication to recognize the
+ situation.
+
+ To find a _\bl_\be_\bs_\bs_\bo_\bn given as a word, _\bl_\be_\ba_\br_\bn does a simple
+ _\bf_\bg_\br_\be_\bp(1) through the lessons. It is unclear whether this
+ sort of subject indexing is better than none.
+
+ Spawning a new shell is required for each of many user and
+ internal functions.
+
+ The `vi' lessons are provided separately from the others.
+ To use them see your system administrator.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 15, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LEAVE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEAVE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ leave - remind you when you have to leave
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\ble\bea\bav\bve\be [ [+]hhmm ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\be_\ba_\bv_\be waits until the specified time, then reminds you that
+ you have to leave. You are reminded 5 minutes and 1 minute
+ before the actual time, at the time, and every minute
+ thereafter. When you log off, _\bl_\be_\ba_\bv_\be exits just before it
+ would have printed the next message.
+
+ The time of day is in the form hhmm where hh is a time in
+ hours (on a 12 or 24 hour clock). All times are converted
+ to a 12 hour clock, and assumed to be in the next 12 hours.
+
+ If the time is preceeded by `+', the alarm will go off in
+ hours and minutes from the current time.
+
+ If no argument is given, _\bl_\be_\ba_\bv_\be prompts with "When do you
+ have to leave?". A reply of newline causes _\bl_\be_\ba_\bv_\be to exit,
+ otherwise the reply is assumed to be a time. This form is
+ suitable for inclusion in a ._\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn or ._\bp_\br_\bo_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+ Leave ignores interrupts, quits, and terminates. To get rid
+ of it you should either log off or use ``kill -9'' giving
+ its process id.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ calendar(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LEX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEX(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lex - generator of lexical analysis programs
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\ble\bex\bx [ -\b-t\btv\bvf\bfn\bn ] [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\be_\bx generates programs to be used in simple lexical analyis
+ of text. The input _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs (standard input default) contain
+ regular expressions to be searched for, and actions written
+ in C to be executed when expressions are found.
+
+ A C source program, 'lex.yy.c' is generated, to be compiled
+ thus:
+
+ cc lex.yy.c -ll
+
+ This program, when run, copies unrecognized portions of the
+ input to the output, and executes the associated C action
+ for each regular expression that is recognized.
+
+ The options have the following meanings.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Place the result on the standard output instead of in
+ file "lex.yy.c".
+
+ -\b-v\bv Print a one-line summary of statistics of the generated
+ analyzer.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Opposite of -\b-v\bv; -\b-n\bn is default.
+
+ -\b-f\bf "Faster" compilation: don't bother to pack the result-
+ ing tables; limited to small programs.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bE
+ lex lexcommands
+
+ would draw _\bl_\be_\bx instructions from the file _\bl_\be_\bx_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd_\bs, and
+ place the output in _\bl_\be_\bx._\by_\by._\bc
+
+
+ %%
+ [A-Z] putchar(yytext[0]+'a'-'A');
+ [ ]+$ ;
+ [ ]+ putchar(' ');
+
+ is an example of a _\bl_\be_\bx program that would be put into a _\bl_\be_\bx
+ command file. This program converts upper case to lower,
+ removes blanks at the end of lines, and replaces multiple
+ blanks by single blanks.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 14, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LEX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LEX(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ yacc(1), sed(1)
+ M. E. Lesk and E. Schmidt, _\bL_\bE_\bX - _\bL_\be_\bx_\bi_\bc_\ba_\bl _\bA_\bn_\ba_\bl_\by_\bz_\be_\br _\bG_\be_\bn_\be_\br_\ba_\bt_\bo_\br
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 14, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ csh - a shell (command interpreter) with C-like syntax
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bcs\bsh\bh [ -\b-c\bce\bef\bfi\bin\bns\bst\btv\bvV\bVx\bxX\bX ] [ arg ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bs_\bh is a first implementation of a command language inter-
+ preter incorporating a history mechanism (see H\bHi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by S\bSu\bub\bb-\b-
+ s\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs), job control facilities (see J\bJo\bob\bbs\bs), interactive
+ file name and user name completion (see F\bFi\bil\ble\be N\bNa\bam\bme\be C\bCo\bom\bmp\bpl\ble\be-\b-
+ t\bti\bio\bon\bn), and a C-like syntax. So as to be able to use its job
+ control facilities, users of _\bc_\bs_\bh must (and automatically)
+ use the new tty driver fully described in _\bt_\bt_\by(4). This new
+ tty driver allows generation of interrupt characters from
+ the keyboard to tell jobs to stop. See _\bs_\bt_\bt_\by(1) for details
+ on setting options in the new tty driver.
+
+ An instance of _\bc_\bs_\bh begins by executing commands from the
+ file `.cshrc' in the _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be directory of the invoker. If this
+ is a login shell then it also executes commands from the
+ file `.login' there. It is typical for users on crt's to
+ put the command ``stty crt'' in their ._\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn file, and to
+ also invoke _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt(1) there.
+
+ In the normal case, the shell will then begin reading com-
+ mands from the terminal, prompting with `% '. Processing of
+ arguments and the use of the shell to process files contain-
+ ing command scripts will be described later.
+
+ The shell then repeatedly performs the following actions: a
+ line of command input is read and broken into _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bs. This
+ sequence of words is placed on the command history list and
+ then parsed. Finally each command in the current line is
+ executed.
+
+ When a login shell terminates it executes commands from the
+ file `.logout' in the users home directory.
+
+ L\bLe\bex\bxi\bic\bca\bal\bl s\bst\btr\bru\buc\bct\btu\bur\bre\be
+
+ The shell splits input lines into words at blanks and tabs
+ with the following exceptions. The characters `&' `|' `;'
+ `<' `>' `(' `)' form separate words. If doubled in `&&',
+ `||', `<<' or `>>' these pairs form single words. These
+ parser metacharacters may be made part of other words, or
+ prevented their special meaning, by preceding them with `\'.
+ A newline preceded by a `\' is equivalent to a blank.
+
+ In addition strings enclosed in matched pairs of quotations,
+ `'', ``' or `"', form parts of a word; metacharacters in
+ these strings, including blanks and tabs, do not form
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ separate words. These quotations have semantics to be
+ described subsequently. Within pairs of `'' or `"' charac-
+ ters a newline preceded by a `\' gives a true newline char-
+ acter.
+
+ When the shell's input is not a terminal, the character `#'
+ introduces a comment which continues to the end of the input
+ line. It is prevented this special meaning when preceded by
+ `\' and in quotations using ``', `'', and `"'.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs
+
+ A simple command is a sequence of words, the first of which
+ specifies the command to be executed. A simple command or a
+ sequence of simple commands separated by `|' characters
+ forms a pipeline. The output of each command in a pipeline
+ is connected to the input of the next. Sequences of pipe-
+ lines may be separated by `;', and are then executed sequen-
+ tially. A sequence of pipelines may be executed without
+ immediately waiting for it to terminate by following it with
+ an `&'.
+
+ Any of the above may be placed in `(' `)' to form a simple
+ command (which may be a component of a pipeline, etc.) It is
+ also possible to separate pipelines with `||' or `&&' indi-
+ cating, as in the C language, that the second is to be exe-
+ cuted only if the first fails or succeeds respectively. (See
+ _\bE_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs.)
+
+ J\bJo\bob\bbs\bs
+
+ The shell associates a _\bj_\bo_\bb with each pipeline. It keeps a
+ table of current jobs, printed by the _\bj_\bo_\bb_\bs command, and
+ assigns them small integer numbers. When a job is started
+ asynchronously with `&', the shell prints a line which looks
+ like:
+
+ [1] 1234
+
+ indicating that the job which was started asynchronously was
+ job number 1 and had one (top-level) process, whose process
+ id was 1234.
+
+ If you are running a job and wish to do something else you
+ may hit the key ^\b^Z\bZ (control-Z) which sends a STOP signal to
+ the current job. The shell will then normally indicate that
+ the job has been `Stopped', and print another prompt. You
+ can then manipulate the state of this job, putting it in the
+ background with the _\bb_\bg command, or run some other commands
+ and then eventually bring the job back into the foreground
+ with the foreground command _\bf_\bg. A ^\b^Z\bZ takes effect immedi-
+ ately and is like an interrupt in that pending output and
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ unread input are discarded when it is typed. There is
+ another special key ^\b^Y\bY which does not generate a STOP signal
+ until a program attempts to _\br_\be_\ba_\bd(2) it. This can usefully
+ be typed ahead when you have prepared some commands for a
+ job which you wish to stop after it has read them.
+
+ A job being run in the background will stop if it tries to
+ read from the terminal. Background jobs are normally
+ allowed to produce output, but this can be disabled by giv-
+ ing the command ``stty tostop''. If you set this tty
+ option, then background jobs will stop when they try to pro-
+ duce output like they do when they try to read input.
+
+ There are several ways to refer to jobs in the shell. The
+ character `%' introduces a job name. If you wish to refer
+ to job number 1, you can name it as `%1'. Just naming a job
+ brings it to the foreground; thus `%1' is a synonym for `fg
+ %1', bringing job 1 back into the foreground. Similarly
+ saying `%1 &' resumes job 1 in the background. Jobs can
+ also be named by prefixes of the string typed in to start
+ them, if these prefixes are unambiguous, thus `%ex' would
+ normally restart a suspended _\be_\bx(1) job, if there were only
+ one suspended job whose name began with the string `ex'. It
+ is also possible to say `%?string' which specifies a job
+ whose text contains _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg, if there is only one such job.
+
+ The shell maintains a notion of the current and previous
+ jobs. In output pertaining to jobs, the current job is
+ marked with a `+' and the previous job with a `-'. The
+ abbreviation `%+' refers to the current job and `%-' refers
+ to the previous job. For close analogy with the syntax of
+ the _\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bo_\br_\by mechanism (described below), `%%' is also a
+ synonym for the current job.
+
+ S\bSt\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs r\bre\bep\bpo\bor\brt\bti\bin\bng\bg
+
+ This shell learns immediately whenever a process changes
+ state. It normally informs you whenever a job becomes
+ blocked so that no further progress is possible, but only
+ just before it prints a prompt. This is done so that it
+ does not otherwise disturb your work. If, however, you set
+ the shell variable _\bn_\bo_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by, the shell will notify you immedi-
+ ately of changes of status in background jobs. There is
+ also a shell command _\bn_\bo_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by which marks a single process so
+ that its status changes will be immediately reported. By
+ default _\bn_\bo_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by marks the current process; simply say
+ `notify' after starting a background job to mark it.
+
+ When you try to leave the shell while jobs are stopped, you
+ will be warned that `You have stopped jobs.' You may use
+ the _\bj_\bo_\bb_\bs command to see what they are. If you do this or
+ immediately try to exit again, the shell will not warn you a
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ second time, and the suspended jobs will be terminated.
+
+ F\bFi\bil\ble\be N\bNa\bam\bme\be C\bCo\bom\bmp\bpl\ble\bet\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ When the file name completion feature is enabled by setting
+ the shell variable _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bc (see s\bse\bet\bt), _\bc_\bs_\bh will interactively
+ complete file names and user names from unique prefixes,
+ when they are input from the terminal followed by the escape
+ character (the escape key, or control-[). For example, if
+ the current directory looks like
+ DSC.OLD bin cmd lib xmpl.c
+ DSC.NEW chaosnet cmtest mail xmpl.o
+ bench class dev mbox xmpl.out
+ and the input is
+ % vi ch<escape>
+ _\bc_\bs_\bh will complete the prefix ``ch'' to the only matching
+ file name ``chaosnet'', changing the input line to
+ % vi chaosnet
+ However, given
+ % vi D<escape>
+ _\bc_\bs_\bh will only expand the input to
+ % vi DSC.
+ and will sound the terminal bell to indicate that the expan-
+ sion is incomplete, since there are two file names matching
+ the prefix ``D''.
+
+ If a partial file name is followed by the end-of-file char-
+ acter (usually control-D), then, instead of completing the
+ name, _\bc_\bs_\bh will list all file names matching the prefix. For
+ example, the input
+ % vi D<control-D>
+ causes all files beginning with ``D'' to be listed:
+ DSC.NEW DSC.OLD
+ while the input line remains unchanged.
+
+ The same system of escape and end-of-file can also be used
+ to expand partial user names, if the word to be completed
+ (or listed) begins with the character ``~''. For example,
+ typing
+ cd ~ro<escape>
+ may produce the expansion
+ cd ~root
+
+ The use of the terminal bell to signal errors or multiple
+ matches can be inhibited by setting the variable _\bn_\bo_\bb_\be_\be_\bp.
+
+ Normally, all files in the particular directory are candi-
+ dates for name completion. Files with certain suffixes can
+ be excluded from consideration by setting the variable _\bf_\bi_\bg_\b-
+ _\bn_\bo_\br_\be to the list of suffixes to be ignored. Thus, if _\bf_\bi_\bg_\b-
+ _\bn_\bo_\br_\be is set by the command
+ % set fignore = (.o .out)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ then typing
+ % vi x<escape>
+ would result in the completion to
+ % vi xmpl.c
+ ignoring the files "xmpl.o" and "xmpl.out". However, if the
+ only completion possible requires not ignoring these suf-
+ fixes, then they are not ignored. In addition, _\bf_\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be does
+ not affect the listing of file names by control-D. All
+ files are listed regardless of their suffixes.
+
+ S\bSu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs
+
+ We now describe the various transformations the shell per-
+ forms on the input in the order in which they occur.
+
+ H\bHi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs
+
+ History substitutions place words from previous command
+ input as portions of new commands, making it easy to repeat
+ commands, repeat arguments of a previous command in the
+ current command, or fix spelling mistakes in the previous
+ command with little typing and a high degree of confidence.
+ History substitutions begin with the character `!' and may
+ begin a\ban\bny\byw\bwh\bhe\ber\bre\be in the input stream (with the proviso that
+ they d\bdo\bo n\bno\bot\bt nest.) This `!' may be preceded by an `\' to
+ prevent its special meaning; for convenience, a `!' is
+ passed unchanged when it is followed by a blank, tab, new-
+ line, `=' or `('. (History substitutions also occur when an
+ input line begins with `^'. This special abbreviation will
+ be described later.) Any input line which contains history
+ substitution is echoed on the terminal before it is executed
+ as it could have been typed without history substitution.
+
+ Commands input from the terminal which consist of one or
+ more words are saved on the history list. The history sub-
+ stitutions reintroduce sequences of words from these saved
+ commands into the input stream. The size of which is con-
+ trolled by the _\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bo_\br_\by variable; the previous command is
+ always retained, regardless of its value. Commands are num-
+ bered sequentially from 1.
+
+ For definiteness, consider the following output from the
+ _\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bo_\br_\by command:
+
+ 9 write michael
+ 10 ex write.c
+ 11 cat oldwrite.c
+ 12 diff *write.c
+
+ The commands are shown with their event numbers. It is not
+ usually necessary to use event numbers, but the current
+ event number can be made part of the _\bp_\br_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bt by placing an
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ `!' in the prompt string.
+
+ With the current event 13 we can refer to previous events by
+ event number `!11', relatively as in `!-2' (referring to the
+ same event), by a prefix of a command word as in `!d' for
+ event 12 or `!wri' for event 9, or by a string contained in
+ a word in the command as in `!?mic?' also referring to event
+ 9. These forms, without further modification, simply rein-
+ troduce the words of the specified events, each separated by
+ a single blank. As a special case `!!' refers to the previ-
+ ous command; thus `!!' alone is essentially a _\br_\be_\bd_\bo.
+
+ To select words from an event we can follow the event
+ specification by a `:' and a designator for the desired
+ words. The words of an input line are numbered from 0, the
+ first (usually command) word being 0, the second word (first
+ argument) being 1, etc. The basic word designators are:
+
+ 0 first (command) word
+ _\bn _\bn'th argument
+ ^ first argument, i.e. `1'
+ $ last argument
+ % word matched by (immediately preceding) ?_\bs? search
+ _\bx-_\by range of words
+ -_\by abbreviates `0-_\by'
+ * abbreviates `^-$', or nothing if only 1 word in event
+ _\bx* abbreviates `_\bx-$'
+ _\bx- like `_\bx*' but omitting word `$'
+
+ The `:' separating the event specification from the word
+ designator can be omitted if the argument selector begins
+ with a `^', `$', `*' `-' or `%'. After the optional word
+ designator can be placed a sequence of modifiers, each pre-
+ ceded by a `:'. The following modifiers are defined:
+
+ h Remove a trailing pathname component, leaving the head.
+ r Remove a trailing `.xxx' component, leaving the root name.
+ e Remove all but the extension `.xxx' part.
+ s/_\bl/_\br/ Substitute _\bl for _\br
+ t Remove all leading pathname components, leaving the tail.
+ & Repeat the previous substitution.
+ g Apply the change globally, prefixing the above, e.g. `g&'.
+ p Print the new command line but do not execute it.
+ q Quote the substituted words, preventing further substitutions.
+ x Like q, but break into words at blanks, tabs and newlines.
+
+ Unless preceded by a `g' the modification is applied only to
+ the first modifiable word. With substitutions, it is an
+ error for no word to be applicable.
+
+ The left hand side of substitutions are not regular expres-
+ sions in the sense of the editors, but rather strings. Any
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ character may be used as the delimiter in place of `/'; a
+ `\' quotes the delimiter into the _\bl and _\br strings. The
+ character `&' in the right hand side is replaced by the text
+ from the left. A `\' quotes `&' also. A null _\bl uses the
+ previous string either from a _\bl or from a contextual scan
+ string _\bs in `!?_\bs?'. The trailing delimiter in the substitu-
+ tion may be omitted if a newline follows immediately as may
+ the trailing `?' in a contextual scan.
+
+ A history reference may be given without an event specifica-
+ tion, e.g. `!$'. In this case the reference is to the pre-
+ vious command unless a previous history reference occurred
+ on the same line in which case this form repeats the previ-
+ ous reference. Thus `!?foo?^ !$' gives the first and last
+ arguments from the command matching `?foo?'.
+
+ A special abbreviation of a history reference occurs when
+ the first non-blank character of an input line is a `^'.
+ This is equivalent to `!:s^' providing a convenient short-
+ hand for substitutions on the text of the previous line.
+ Thus `^lb^lib' fixes the spelling of `lib' in the previous
+ command. Finally, a history substitution may be surrounded
+ with `{' and `}' if necessary to insulate it from the char-
+ acters which follow. Thus, after `ls -ld ~paul' we might do
+ `!{l}a' to do `ls -ld ~paula', while `!la' would look for a
+ command starting `la'.
+
+ Q\bQu\buo\bot\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs w\bwi\bit\bth\bh '\b' a\ban\bnd\bd "\b"
+
+ The quotation of strings by `'' and `"' can be used to
+ prevent all or some of the remaining substitutions. Strings
+ enclosed in `'' are prevented any further interpretation.
+ Strings enclosed in `"' may be expanded as described below.
+
+ In both cases the resulting text becomes (all or part of) a
+ single word; only in one special case (see _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd _\bS_\bu_\bb_\bs_\bt_\bi_\bt_\bi_\b-
+ _\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn below) does a `"' quoted string yield parts of more
+ than one word; `'' quoted strings never do.
+
+ A\bAl\bli\bia\bas\bs s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ The shell maintains a list of aliases which can be esta-
+ blished, displayed and modified by the _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs and _\bu_\bn_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs
+ commands. After a command line is scanned, it is parsed
+ into distinct commands and the first word of each command,
+ left-to-right, is checked to see if it has an alias. If it
+ does, then the text which is the alias for that command is
+ reread with the history mechanism available as though that
+ command were the previous input line. The resulting words
+ replace the command and argument list. If no reference is
+ made to the history list, then the argument list is left
+ unchanged.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ Thus if the alias for `ls' is `ls -l' the command `ls /usr'
+ would map to `ls -l /usr', the argument list here being
+ undisturbed. Similarly if the alias for `lookup' was `grep
+ !^ /etc/passwd' then `lookup bill' would map to `grep bill
+ /etc/passwd'.
+
+ If an alias is found, the word transformation of the input
+ text is performed and the aliasing process begins again on
+ the reformed input line. Looping is prevented if the first
+ word of the new text is the same as the old by flagging it
+ to prevent further aliasing. Other loops are detected and
+ cause an error.
+
+ Note that the mechanism allows aliases to introduce parser
+ metasyntax. Thus we can `alias print 'pr \!* | lpr'' to
+ make a command which _\bp_\br'_\bs its arguments to the line printer.
+
+ V\bVa\bar\bri\bia\bab\bbl\ble\be s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ The shell maintains a set of variables, each of which has as
+ value a list of zero or more words. Some of these variables
+ are set by the shell or referred to by it. For instance,
+ the _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv variable is an image of the shell's argument list,
+ and words of this variable's value are referred to in spe-
+ cial ways.
+
+ The values of variables may be displayed and changed by
+ using the _\bs_\be_\bt and _\bu_\bn_\bs_\be_\bt commands. Of the variables referred
+ to by the shell a number are toggles; the shell does not
+ care what their value is, only whether they are set or not.
+ For instance, the _\bv_\be_\br_\bb_\bo_\bs_\be variable is a toggle which causes
+ command input to be echoed. The setting of this variable
+ results from the -\b-v\bv command line option.
+
+ Other operations treat variables numerically. The `@' com-
+ mand permits numeric calculations to be performed and the
+ result assigned to a variable. Variable values are, how-
+ ever, always represented as (zero or more) strings. For the
+ purposes of numeric operations, the null string is con-
+ sidered to be zero, and the second and subsequent words of
+ multiword values are ignored.
+
+ After the input line is aliased and parsed, and before each
+ command is executed, variable substitution is performed
+ keyed by `$' characters. This expansion can be prevented by
+ preceding the `$' with a `\' except within `"'s where it
+ a\bal\blw\bwa\bay\bys\bs occurs, and within `''s where it n\bne\bev\bve\ber\br occurs.
+ Strings quoted by ``' are interpreted later (see _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd
+ _\bs_\bu_\bb_\bs_\bt_\bi_\bt_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn below) so `$' substitution does not occur there
+ until later, if at all. A `$' is passed unchanged if fol-
+ lowed by a blank, tab, or end-of-line.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ Input/output redirections are recognized before variable
+ expansion, and are variable expanded separately. Otherwise,
+ the command name and entire argument list are expanded
+ together. It is thus possible for the first (command) word
+ to this point to generate more than one word, the first of
+ which becomes the command name, and the rest of which become
+ arguments.
+
+ Unless enclosed in `"' or given the `:q' modifier the
+ results of variable substitution may eventually be command
+ and filename substituted. Within `"', a variable whose
+ value consists of multiple words expands to a (portion of) a
+ single word, with the words of the variables value separated
+ by blanks. When the `:q' modifier is applied to a substitu-
+ tion the variable will expand to multiple words with each
+ word separated by a blank and quoted to prevent later com-
+ mand or filename substitution.
+
+ The following metasequences are provided for introducing
+ variable values into the shell input. Except as noted, it
+ is an error to reference a variable which is not set.
+
+ $name
+ ${name}
+ Are replaced by the words of the value of variable
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be, each separated by a blank. Braces insulate _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ from following characters which would otherwise be part
+ of it. Shell variables have names consisting of up to
+ 20 letters and digits starting with a letter. The
+ underscore character is considered a letter.
+ If _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is not a shell variable, but is set in the
+ environment, then that value is returned (but :\b: modif-
+ iers and the other forms given below are not available
+ in this case).
+
+ $name[selector]
+ ${name[selector]}
+ May be used to select only some of the words from the
+ value of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. The selector is subjected to `$' substi-
+ tution and may consist of a single number or two
+ numbers separated by a `-'. The first word of a vari-
+ ables value is numbered `1'. If the first number of a
+ range is omitted it defaults to `1'. If the last
+ member of a range is omitted it defaults to `$#name'.
+ The selector `*' selects all words. It is not an error
+ for a range to be empty if the second argument is omit-
+ ted or in range.
+
+ $#name
+ ${#name}
+ Gives the number of words in the variable. This is
+ useful for later use in a `[selector]'.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 9
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ $0
+ Substitutes the name of the file from which command
+ input is being read. An error occurs if the name is
+ not known.
+
+ $number
+ ${number}
+ Equivalent to `$argv[number]'.
+
+ $*
+ Equivalent to `$argv[*]'.
+
+ The modifiers `:e', `:h', `:t', `:r', `:q' and `:x' may be
+ applied to the substitutions above as may `:gh', `:gt' and
+ `:gr'. If braces `{' '}' appear in the command form then
+ the modifiers must appear within the braces. T\bTh\bhe\be c\bcu\bur\brr\bre\ben\bnt\bt
+ i\bim\bmp\bpl\ble\bem\bme\ben\bnt\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn a\bal\bll\blo\bow\bws\bs o\bon\bnl\bly\by o\bon\bne\be `\b`:\b:'\b' m\bmo\bod\bdi\bif\bfi\bie\ber\br o\bon\bn e\bea\bac\bch\bh `\b`$\b$'\b'
+ e\bex\bxp\bpa\ban\bns\bsi\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+
+ The following substitutions may not be modified with `:'
+ modifiers.
+
+ $?name
+ ${?name}
+ Substitutes the string `1' if name is set, `0' if it is
+ not.
+
+ $?0
+ Substitutes `1' if the current input filename is known,
+ `0' if it is not.
+
+ $$
+ Substitute the (decimal) process number of the (parent)
+ shell.
+
+ $<
+ Substitutes a line from the standard input, with no
+ further interpretation thereafter. It can be used to
+ read from the keyboard in a shell script.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd a\ban\bnd\bd f\bfi\bil\ble\ben\bna\bam\bme\be s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ The remaining substitutions, command and filename substitu-
+ tion, are applied selectively to the arguments of builtin
+ commands. This means that portions of expressions which are
+ not evaluated are not subjected to these expansions. For
+ commands which are not internal to the shell, the command
+ name is substituted separately from the argument list. This
+ occurs very late, after input-output redirection is per-
+ formed, and in a child of the main shell.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 10
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ Command substitution is indicated by a command enclosed in
+ ``'. The output from such a command is normally broken into
+ separate words at blanks, tabs and newlines, with null words
+ being discarded, this text then replacing the original
+ string. Within `"'s, only newlines force new words; blanks
+ and tabs are preserved.
+
+ In any case, the single final newline does not force a new
+ word. Note that it is thus possible for a command substitu-
+ tion to yield only part of a word, even if the command out-
+ puts a complete line.
+
+ F\bFi\bil\ble\ben\bna\bam\bme\be s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ If a word contains any of the characters `*', `?', `[' or
+ `{' or begins with the character `~', then that word is a
+ candidate for filename substitution, also known as `glob-
+ bing'. This word is then regarded as a pattern, and
+ replaced with an alphabetically sorted list of file names
+ which match the pattern. In a list of words specifying
+ filename substitution it is an error for no pattern to match
+ an existing file name, but it is not required for each pat-
+ tern to match. Only the metacharacters `*', `?' and `['
+ imply pattern matching, the characters `~' and `{' being
+ more akin to abbreviations.
+
+ In matching filenames, the character `.' at the beginning of
+ a filename or immediately following a `/', as well as the
+ character `/' must be matched explicitly. The character `*'
+ matches any string of characters, including the null string.
+ The character `?' matches any single character. The
+ sequence `[...]' matches any one of the characters enclosed.
+ Within `[...]', a pair of characters separated by `-'
+ matches any character lexically between the two.
+
+ The character `~' at the beginning of a filename is used to
+ refer to home directories. Standing alone, i.e. `~' it
+ expands to the invokers home directory as reflected in the
+ value of the variable _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be. When followed by a name consist-
+ ing of letters, digits and `-' characters the shell searches
+ for a user with that name and substitutes their home direc-
+ tory; thus `~ken' might expand to `/usr/ken' and
+ `~ken/chmach' to `/usr/ken/chmach'. If the character `~' is
+ followed by a character other than a letter or `/' or
+ appears not at the beginning of a word, it is left undis-
+ turbed.
+
+ The metanotation `a{b,c,d}e' is a shorthand for `abe ace
+ ade'. Left to right order is preserved, with results of
+ matches being sorted separately at a low level to preserve
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 11
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ this order. This construct may be nested. Thus
+ `~source/s1/{oldls,ls}.c' expands to `/usr/source/s1/oldls.c
+ /usr/source/s1/ls.c' whether or not these files exist
+ without any chance of error if the home directory for
+ `source' is `/usr/source'. Similarly `../{memo,*box}' might
+ expand to `../memo ../box ../mbox'. (Note that `memo' was
+ not sorted with the results of matching `*box'.) As a spe-
+ cial case `{', `}' and `{}' are passed undisturbed.
+
+ I\bIn\bnp\bpu\but\bt/\b/o\bou\but\btp\bpu\but\bt
+
+ The standard input and standard output of a command may be
+ redirected with the following syntax:
+
+ < name
+ Open file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be (which is first variable, command and
+ filename expanded) as the standard input.
+
+ << word
+ Read the shell input up to a line which is identical to
+ _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd. _\bW_\bo_\br_\bd is not subjected to variable, filename or
+ command substitution, and each input line is compared
+ to _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd before any substitutions are done on this input
+ line. Unless a quoting `\', `"', `'' or ``' appears in
+ _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd variable and command substitution is performed on
+ the intervening lines, allowing `\' to quote `$', `\'
+ and ``'. Commands which are substituted have all
+ blanks, tabs, and newlines preserved, except for the
+ final newline which is dropped. The resultant text is
+ placed in an anonymous temporary file which is given to
+ the command as standard input.
+
+ > name
+ >! name
+ >& name
+ >&! name
+ The file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is used as standard output. If the file
+ does not exist then it is created; if the file exists,
+ its is truncated, its previous contents being lost.
+
+ If the variable _\bn_\bo_\bc_\bl_\bo_\bb_\bb_\be_\br is set, then the file must
+ not exist or be a character special file (e.g. a termi-
+ nal or `/dev/null') or an error results. This helps
+ prevent accidental destruction of files. In this case
+ the `!' forms can be used and suppress this check.
+
+ The forms involving `&' route the diagnostic output
+ into the specified file as well as the standard output.
+ _\bN_\ba_\bm_\be is expanded in the same way as `<' input filenames
+ are.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 12
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ >> name
+ >>& name
+ >>! name
+ >>&! name
+ Uses file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be as standard output like `>' but places
+ output at the end of the file. If the variable
+ _\bn_\bo_\bc_\bl_\bo_\bb_\bb_\be_\br is set, then it is an error for the file not
+ to exist unless one of the `!' forms is given. Other-
+ wise similar to `>'.
+
+ A command receives the environment in which the shell was
+ invoked as modified by the input-output parameters and the
+ presence of the command in a pipeline. Thus, unlike some
+ previous shells, commands run from a file of shell commands
+ have no access to the text of the commands by default;
+ rather they receive the original standard input of the
+ shell. The `<<' mechanism should be used to present inline
+ data. This permits shell command scripts to function as
+ components of pipelines and allows the shell to block read
+ its input. Note that the default standard input for a com-
+ mand run detached is n\bno\bot\bt modified to be the empty file
+ `/dev/null'; rather the standard input remains as the origi-
+ nal standard input of the shell. If this is a terminal and
+ if the process attempts to read from the terminal, then the
+ process will block and the user will be notified (see J\bJo\bob\bbs\bs
+ above).
+
+ Diagnostic output may be directed through a pipe with the
+ standard output. Simply use the form `|&' rather than just
+ `|'.
+
+ E\bEx\bxp\bpr\bre\bes\bss\bsi\bio\bon\bns\bs
+
+ A number of the builtin commands (to be described subse-
+ quently) take expressions, in which the operators are simi-
+ lar to those of C, with the same precedence. These expres-
+ sions appear in the @, _\be_\bx_\bi_\bt, _\bi_\bf, and _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be commands. The
+ following operators are available:
+
+ || && | ^ & == != =~ !~ <= >= < > << >>
+ + - * / % ! ~ ( )
+
+ Here the precedence increases to the right, `==' `!=' `=~'
+ and `!~', `<=' `>=' `<' and `>', `<<' and `>>', `+' and `-',
+ `*' `/' and `%' being, in groups, at the same level. The
+ `==' `!=' `=~' and `!~' operators compare their arguments as
+ strings; all others operate on numbers. The operators `=~'
+ and `!~' are like `!=' and `==' except that the right hand
+ side is a _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn (containing, e.g. `*'s, `?'s and instances
+ of `[...]') against which the left hand operand is matched.
+ This reduces the need for use of the _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh statement in
+ shell scripts when all that is really needed is pattern
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 13
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ matching.
+
+ Strings which begin with `0' are considered octal numbers.
+ Null or missing arguments are considered `0'. The result of
+ all expressions are strings, which represent decimal
+ numbers. It is important to note that no two components of
+ an expression can appear in the same word; except when adja-
+ cent to components of expressions which are syntactically
+ significant to the parser (`&' `|' `<' `>' `(' `)') they
+ should be surrounded by spaces.
+
+ Also available in expressions as primitive operands are com-
+ mand executions enclosed in `{' and `}' and file enquiries
+ of the form `-_\bl name' where _\bl is one of:
+
+ r read access
+ w write access
+ x execute access
+ e existence
+ o ownership
+ z zero size
+ f plain file
+ d directory
+
+ The specified name is command and filename expanded and then
+ tested to see if it has the specified relationship to the
+ real user. If the file does not exist or is inaccessible
+ then all enquiries return false, i.e. `0'. Command execu-
+ tions succeed, returning true, i.e. `1', if the command
+ exits with status 0, otherwise they fail, returning false,
+ i.e. `0'. If more detailed status information is required
+ then the command should be executed outside of an expression
+ and the variable _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs examined.
+
+ C\bCo\bon\bnt\btr\bro\bol\bl f\bfl\blo\bow\bw
+
+ The shell contains a number of commands which can be used to
+ regulate the flow of control in command files (shell
+ scripts) and (in limited but useful ways) from terminal
+ input. These commands all operate by forcing the shell to
+ reread or skip in its input and, due to the implementation,
+ restrict the placement of some of the commands.
+
+ The _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh, _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh, and _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be statements, as well as the
+ _\bi_\bf-_\bt_\bh_\be_\bn-_\be_\bl_\bs_\be form of the _\bi_\bf statement require that the major
+ keywords appear in a single simple command on an input line
+ as shown below.
+
+ If the shell's input is not seekable, the shell buffers up
+ input whenever a loop is being read and performs seeks in
+ this internal buffer to accomplish the rereading implied by
+ the loop. (To the extent that this allows, backward goto's
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 14
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ will succeed on non-seekable inputs.)
+
+ B\bBu\bui\bil\blt\bti\bin\bn c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs
+
+ Builtin commands are executed within the shell. If a buil-
+ tin command occurs as any component of a pipeline except the
+ last then it is executed in a subshell.
+
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs name
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs name wordlist
+ The first form prints all aliases. The second form
+ prints the alias for name. The final form assigns the
+ specified _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt as the alias of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be; _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is
+ command and filename substituted. _\bN_\ba_\bm_\be is not allowed
+ to be _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs or _\bu_\bn_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs.
+
+ a\bal\bll\blo\boc\bc
+ Shows the amount of dynamic memory acquired, broken
+ down into used and free memory. With an argument shows
+ the number of free and used blocks in each size
+ category. The categories start at size 8 and double at
+ each step. This command's output may vary across sys-
+ tem types, since systems other than the VAX may use a
+ different memory allocator.
+
+ b\bbg\bg
+ b\bbg\bg %\b%job ...
+ Puts the current or specified jobs into the background,
+ continuing them if they were stopped.
+
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bk
+ Causes execution to resume after the _\be_\bn_\bd of the nearest
+ enclosing _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh or _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be. The remaining commands on
+ the current line are executed. Multi-level breaks are
+ thus possible by writing them all on one line.
+
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bks\bsw\bw
+ Causes a break from a _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh, resuming after the _\be_\bn_\bd_\bs_\bw.
+
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be label:
+ A label in a _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh statement as discussed below.
+
+ c\bcd\bd
+ c\bcd\bd name
+ c\bch\bhd\bdi\bir\br
+ c\bch\bhd\bdi\bir\br name
+ Change the shell's working directory to directory _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+ If no argument is given then change to the home direc-
+ tory of the user.
+ If _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is not found as a subdirectory of the current
+ directory (and does not begin with `/', `./' or `../'),
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 15
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ then each component of the variable _\bc_\bd_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh is checked
+ to see if it has a subdirectory _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. Finally, if all
+ else fails but _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is a shell variable whose value
+ begins with `/', then this is tried to see if it is a
+ directory.
+
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bti\bin\bnu\bue\be
+ Continue execution of the nearest enclosing _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be or
+ _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh. The rest of the commands on the current line
+ are executed.
+
+ d\bde\bef\bfa\bau\bul\blt\bt:\b:
+ Labels the default case in a _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh statement. The
+ default should come after all _\bc_\ba_\bs_\be labels.
+
+ d\bdi\bir\brs\bs
+ Prints the directory stack; the top of the stack is at
+ the left, the first directory in the stack being the
+ current directory.
+
+ e\bec\bch\bho\bo wordlist
+ e\bec\bch\bho\bo -\b-n\bn wordlist
+ The specified words are written to the shells standard
+ output, separated by spaces, and terminated with a new-
+ line unless the -\b-n\bn option is specified.
+
+ e\bel\bls\bse\be
+ e\ben\bnd\bd
+ e\ben\bnd\bdi\bif\bf
+ e\ben\bnd\bds\bsw\bw
+ See the description of the _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh, _\bi_\bf, _\bs_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bc_\bh, and
+ _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be statements below.
+
+ e\bev\bva\bal\bl arg ...
+ (As in _\bs_\bh(1).) The arguments are read as input to the
+ shell and the resulting command(s) executed in the con-
+ text of the current shell. This is usually used to
+ execute commands generated as the result of command or
+ variable substitution, since parsing occurs before
+ these substitutions. See _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt(1) for an example of
+ using _\be_\bv_\ba_\bl.
+
+ e\bex\bxe\bec\bc command
+ The specified command is executed in place of the
+ current shell.
+
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt(expr)
+ The shell exits either with the value of the _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs
+ variable (first form) or with the value of the speci-
+ fied _\be_\bx_\bp_\br (second form).
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 16
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ f\bfg\bg
+ f\bfg\bg %\b%job ...
+ Brings the current or specified jobs into the fore-
+ ground, continuing them if they were stopped.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\bre\bea\bac\bch\bh name (wordlist)
+ ...
+ e\ben\bnd\bd
+ The variable _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is successively set to each member of
+ _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt and the sequence of commands between this com-
+ mand and the matching _\be_\bn_\bd are executed. (Both _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh
+ and _\be_\bn_\bd must appear alone on separate lines.)
+
+ The builtin command _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bu_\be may be used to continue
+ the loop prematurely and the builtin command _\bb_\br_\be_\ba_\bk to
+ terminate it prematurely. When this command is read
+ from the terminal, the loop is read up once prompting
+ with `?' before any statements in the loop are exe-
+ cuted. If you make a mistake typing in a loop at the
+ terminal you can rub it out.
+
+ g\bgl\blo\bob\bb wordlist
+ Like _\be_\bc_\bh_\bo but no `\' escapes are recognized and words
+ are delimited by null characters in the output. Useful
+ for programs which wish to use the shell to filename
+ expand a list of words.
+
+ g\bgo\bot\bto\bo word
+ The specified _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is filename and command expanded to
+ yield a string of the form `label'. The shell rewinds
+ its input as much as possible and searches for a line
+ of the form `label:' possibly preceded by blanks or
+ tabs. Execution continues after the specified line.
+
+ h\bha\bas\bsh\bhs\bst\bta\bat\bt
+ Print a statistics line indicating how effective the
+ internal hash table has been at locating commands (and
+ avoiding _\be_\bx_\be_\bc's). An _\be_\bx_\be_\bc is attempted for each com-
+ ponent of the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh where the hash function indicates a
+ possible hit, and in each component which does not
+ begin with a `/'.
+
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by _\bn
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by -\b-r\br _\bn
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by -\b-h\bh _\bn
+ Displays the history event list; if _\bn is given only the
+ _\bn most recent events are printed. The -\b-r\br option rev-
+ erses the order of printout to be most recent first
+ rather than oldest first. The -\b-h\bh option causes the
+ history list to be printed without leading numbers.
+ This is used to produce files suitable for sourceing
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 17
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ using the -h option to _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be.
+
+ i\bif\bf (expr) command
+ If the specified expression evaluates true, then the
+ single _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd with arguments is executed. Variable
+ substitution on _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd happens early, at the same time
+ it does for the rest of the _\bi_\bf command. _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd must
+ be a simple command, not a pipeline, a command list, or
+ a parenthesized command list. Input/output redirection
+ occurs even if _\be_\bx_\bp_\br is false, when command is n\bno\bot\bt exe-
+ cuted (this is a bug).
+
+ i\bif\bf (expr) t\bth\bhe\ben\bn
+ ...
+ e\bel\bls\bse\be i\bif\bf (expr2) t\bth\bhe\ben\bn
+ ...
+ e\bel\bls\bse\be
+ ...
+ e\ben\bnd\bdi\bif\bf
+ If the specified _\be_\bx_\bp_\br is true then the commands to the
+ first _\be_\bl_\bs_\be are executed; otherwise if _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2 is true
+ then the commands to the second _\be_\bl_\bs_\be are executed, etc.
+ Any number of _\be_\bl_\bs_\be-_\bi_\bf pairs are possible; only one
+ _\be_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bf is needed. The _\be_\bl_\bs_\be part is likewise optional.
+ (The words _\be_\bl_\bs_\be and _\be_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bf must appear at the beginning
+ of input lines; the _\bi_\bf must appear alone on its input
+ line or after an _\be_\bl_\bs_\be.)
+
+ j\bjo\bob\bbs\bs
+ j\bjo\bob\bbs\bs -\b-l\bl
+ Lists the active jobs; given the -\b-l\bl options lists pro-
+ cess id's in addition to the normal information.
+
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl %\b%job
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl -\b-sig %\b%job ...
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl pid
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl -\b-sig pid ...
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl -\b-l\bl
+ Sends either the TERM (terminate) signal or the speci-
+ fied signal to the specified jobs or processes. Sig-
+ nals are either given by number or by names (as given
+ in /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bi_\bn_\bc_\bl_\bu_\bd_\be/_\bs_\bi_\bg_\bn_\ba_\bl._\bh, stripped of the prefix
+ ``SIG''). The signal names are listed by ``kill -l''.
+ There is no default, saying just `kill' does not send a
+ signal to the current job. If the signal being sent is
+ TERM (terminate) or HUP (hangup), then the job or pro-
+ cess will be sent a CONT (continue) signal as well.
+
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-_\bu_\bs_\be
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 18
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be
+ l\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-_\bu_\bs_\be
+ Limits the consumption by the current process and each
+ process it creates to not individually exceed _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-
+ _\bu_\bs_\be on the specified _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be. If no _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-_\bu_\bs_\be is
+ given, then the current limit is printed; if no
+ _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be is given, then all limitations are given. If
+ the -\b-h\bh flag is given, the hard limits are used instead
+ of the current limits. The hard limits impose a ceil-
+ ing on the values of the current limits. Only the
+ super-user may raise the hard limits, but a user may
+ lower or raise the current limits within the legal
+ range.
+
+ Resources controllable currently include _\bc_\bp_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be (the
+ maximum number of cpu-seconds to be used by each pro-
+ cess), _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be (the largest single file which can be
+ created), _\bd_\ba_\bt_\ba_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be (the maximum growth of the
+ data+stack region via _\bs_\bb_\br_\bk(2) beyond the end of the
+ program text), _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bc_\bk_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be (the maximum size of the
+ automatically-extended stack region), and _\bc_\bo_\br_\be_\bd_\bu_\bm_\bp_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be
+ (the size of the largest core dump that will be
+ created).
+
+ The _\bm_\ba_\bx_\bi_\bm_\bu_\bm-_\bu_\bs_\be may be given as a (floating point or
+ integer) number followed by a scale factor. For all
+ limits other than _\bc_\bp_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be the default scale is `k' or
+ `kilobytes' (1024 bytes); a scale factor of `m' or
+ `megabytes' may also be used. For _\bc_\bp_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be the default
+ scaling is `seconds', while `m' for minutes or `h' for
+ hours, or a time of the form `mm:ss' giving minutes and
+ seconds may be used.
+
+ For both _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be names and scale factors, unambiguous
+ prefixes of the names suffice.
+
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn
+ Terminate a login shell, replacing it with an instance
+ of /\b/b\bbi\bin\bn/\b/l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn.\b. This is one way to log off, included for
+ compatibility with _\bs_\bh(1).
+
+ l\blo\bog\bgo\bou\but\bt
+ Terminate a login shell. Especially useful if
+ _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\be_\bo_\bf is set.
+
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be +number
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be command
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be +number command
+ The first form sets the scheduling priority for this
+ shell to 4. The second form sets the priority to the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 19
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ given number. The final two forms run command at
+ priority 4 and _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br respectively. The greater the
+ number, the less cpu the process will get. The super-
+ user may specify negative priority by using `nice
+ -number ...'. Command is always executed in a sub-
+ shell, and the restrictions placed on commands in sim-
+ ple _\bi_\bf statements apply.
+
+ n\bno\boh\bhu\bup\bp
+ n\bno\boh\bhu\bup\bp command
+ The first form can be used in shell scripts to cause
+ hangups to be ignored for the remainder of the script.
+ The second form causes the specified command to be run
+ with hangups ignored. All processes detached with `&'
+ are effectively _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp'_\be_\bd.
+
+ n\bno\bot\bti\bif\bfy\by
+ n\bno\bot\bti\bif\bfy\by %\b%job ...
+ Causes the shell to notify the user asynchronously when
+ the status of the current or specified jobs changes;
+ normally notification is presented before a prompt.
+ This is automatic if the shell variable _\bn_\bo_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by is set.
+
+ o\bon\bni\bin\bnt\btr\br
+ o\bon\bni\bin\bnt\btr\br -
+ o\bon\bni\bin\bnt\btr\br label
+ Control the action of the shell on interrupts. The
+ first form restores the default action of the shell on
+ interrupts which is to terminate shell scripts or to
+ return to the terminal command input level. The second
+ form `onintr -' causes all interrupts to be ignored.
+ The final form causes the shell to execute a `goto
+ label' when an interrupt is received or a child process
+ terminates because it was interrupted.
+
+ In any case, if the shell is running detached and
+ interrupts are being ignored, all forms of _\bo_\bn_\bi_\bn_\bt_\br have
+ no meaning and interrupts continue to be ignored by the
+ shell and all invoked commands.
+
+ p\bpo\bop\bpd\bd
+ p\bpo\bop\bpd\bd +n
+ Pops the directory stack, returning to the new top
+ directory. With an argument `+_\bn' discards the _\bnth
+ entry in the stack. The elements of the directory
+ stack are numbered from 0 starting at the top.
+
+ p\bpu\bus\bsh\bhd\bd
+ p\bpu\bus\bsh\bhd\bd name
+ p\bpu\bus\bsh\bhd\bd +n
+ With no arguments, _\bp_\bu_\bs_\bh_\bd exchanges the top two elements
+ of the directory stack. Given a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be argument, _\bp_\bu_\bs_\bh_\bd
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 20
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ changes to the new directory (ala _\bc_\bd) and pushes the
+ old current working directory (as in _\bc_\bs_\bw) onto the
+ directory stack. With a numeric argument, rotates the
+ _\bnth argument of the directory stack around to be the
+ top element and changes to it. The members of the
+ directory stack are numbered from the top starting at
+ 0.
+
+ r\bre\beh\bha\bas\bsh\bh
+ Causes the internal hash table of the contents of the
+ directories in the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh variable to be recomputed.
+ This is needed if new commands are added to directories
+ in the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh while you are logged in. This should only
+ be necessary if you add commands to one of your own
+ directories, or if a systems programmer changes the
+ contents of one of the system directories.
+
+ r\bre\bep\bpe\bea\bat\bt count command
+ The specified _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd which is subject to the same res-
+ trictions as the _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd in the one line _\bi_\bf statement
+ above, is executed _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt times. I/O redirections occur
+ exactly once, even if _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is 0.
+
+ s\bse\bet\bt
+ s\bse\bet\bt name
+ s\bse\bet\bt name=word
+ s\bse\bet\bt name[index]=word
+ s\bse\bet\bt name=(wordlist)
+ The first form of the command shows the value of all
+ shell variables. Variables which have other than a
+ single word as value print as a parenthesized word
+ list. The second form sets _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the null string.
+ The third form sets _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the single _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd. The fourth
+ form sets the _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bx'_\bt_\bh component of name to word; this
+ component must already exist. The final form sets _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ to the list of words in _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. In all cases the
+ value is command and filename expanded.
+
+ These arguments may be repeated to set multiple values
+ in a single set command. Note however, that variable
+ expansion happens for all arguments before any setting
+ occurs.
+
+ s\bse\bet\bte\ben\bnv\bv
+ s\bse\bet\bte\ben\bnv\bv name value
+ s\bse\bet\bte\ben\bnv\bv name
+ The first form lists all current environment variables.
+ The last form sets the value of environment variable
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to be _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be, a single string. The second form
+ sets _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to an empty string. The most commonly used
+ environment variable USER, TERM, and PATH are automati-
+ cally imported to and exported from the _\bc_\bs_\bh variables
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 21
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bu_\bs_\be_\br, _\bt_\be_\br_\bm, and _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh; there is no need to use _\bs_\be_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv
+ for these.
+
+ s\bsh\bhi\bif\bft\bt
+ s\bsh\bhi\bif\bft\bt variable
+ The members of _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv are shifted to the left, discarding
+ _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv[_\b1]. It is an error for _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv not to be set or to
+ have less than one word as value. The second form per-
+ forms the same function on the specified variable.
+
+ s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be name
+ s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be -\b-h\bh name
+ The shell reads commands from _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. _\bS_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be commands may
+ be nested; if they are nested too deeply the shell may
+ run out of file descriptors. An error in a _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be at
+ any level terminates all nested _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be commands. Nor-
+ mally input during _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be commands is not placed on the
+ history list; the -h option causes the commands to be
+ placed in the history list without being executed.
+
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp %\b%job ...
+ Stops the current or specified job which is executing
+ in the background.
+
+ s\bsu\bus\bsp\bpe\ben\bnd\bd
+ Causes the shell to stop in its tracks, much as if it
+ had been sent a stop signal with ^\b^Z\bZ. This is most
+ often used to stop shells started by _\bs_\bu(1).
+
+ s\bsw\bwi\bit\btc\bch\bh (string)
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be str1:
+ ...
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bks\bsw\bw
+ ...
+ d\bde\bef\bfa\bau\bul\blt\bt:\b:
+ ...
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bks\bsw\bw
+ e\ben\bnd\bds\bsw\bw
+ Each case label is successively matched, against the
+ specified _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg which is first command and filename
+ expanded. The file metacharacters `*', `?' and `[...]'
+ may be used in the case labels, which are variable
+ expanded. If none of the labels match before a
+ `default' label is found, then the execution begins
+ after the default label. Each case label and the
+ default label must appear at the beginning of a line.
+ The command _\bb_\br_\be_\ba_\bk_\bs_\bw causes execution to continue after
+ the _\be_\bn_\bd_\bs_\bw. Otherwise control may fall through case
+ labels and default labels as in C. If no label matches
+ and there is no default, execution continues after the
+ _\be_\bn_\bd_\bs_\bw.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 22
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\be
+ t\bti\bim\bme\be command
+ With no argument, a summary of time used by this shell
+ and its children is printed. If arguments are given
+ the specified simple command is timed and a time sum-
+ mary as described under the _\bt_\bi_\bm_\be variable is printed.
+ If necessary, an extra shell is created to print the
+ time statistic when the command completes.
+
+ u\bum\bma\bas\bsk\bk
+ u\bum\bma\bas\bsk\bk value
+ The file creation mask is displayed (first form) or set
+ to the specified value (second form). The mask is
+ given in octal. Common values for the mask are 002
+ giving all access to the group and read and execute
+ access to others or 022 giving all access except no
+ write access for users in the group or others.
+
+ u\bun\bna\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs pattern
+ All aliases whose names match the specified pattern are
+ discarded. Thus all aliases are removed by `unalias
+ *'. It is not an error for nothing to be _\bu_\bn_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bd.
+
+ u\bun\bnh\bha\bas\bsh\bh
+ Use of the internal hash table to speed location of
+ executed programs is disabled.
+
+ u\bun\bnl\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt
+ u\bun\bnl\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be
+ u\bun\bnl\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh
+ u\bun\bnl\bli\bim\bmi\bit\bt -\b-h\bh _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be
+ Removes the limitation on _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be. If no _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be is
+ specified, then all _\br_\be_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be limitations are removed.
+ If -\b-h\bh is given, the corresponding hard limits are
+ removed. Only the super-user may do this.
+
+ u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bt pattern
+ All variables whose names match the specified pattern
+ are removed. Thus all variables are removed by `unset
+ *'; this has noticeably distasteful side-effects. It
+ is not an error for nothing to be _\bu_\bn_\bs_\be_\bt.
+
+ u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bte\ben\bnv\bv pattern
+ Removes all variables whose name match the specified
+ pattern from the environment. See also the _\bs_\be_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv com-
+ mand above and _\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv(1).
+
+ w\bwa\bai\bit\bt
+ All background jobs are waited for. It the shell is
+ interactive, then an interrupt can disrupt the wait, at
+ which time the shell prints names and job numbers of
+ all jobs known to be outstanding.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 23
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be (expr)
+ ...
+ e\ben\bnd\bd
+ While the specified expression evaluates non-zero, the
+ commands between the _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be and the matching end are
+ evaluated. _\bB_\br_\be_\ba_\bk and _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bu_\be may be used to terminate
+ or continue the loop prematurely. (The _\bw_\bh_\bi_\bl_\be and _\be_\bn_\bd
+ must appear alone on their input lines.) Prompting
+ occurs here the first time through the loop as for the
+ _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\ba_\bc_\bh statement if the input is a terminal.
+
+ %\b%job
+ Brings the specified job into the foreground.
+
+ %\b%job &\b&
+ Continues the specified job in the background.
+
+ @\b@
+ @\b@ name = expr
+ @\b@ name[index] = expr
+ The first form prints the values of all the shell vari-
+ ables. The second form sets the specified _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the
+ value of _\be_\bx_\bp_\br. If the expression contains `<', `>', `&'
+ or `|' then at least this part of the expression must
+ be placed within `(' `)'. The third form assigns the
+ value of _\be_\bx_\bp_\br to the _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bx'_\bt_\bh argument of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. Both
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be and its _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bx'_\bt_\bh component must already exist.
+
+ The operators `*=', `+=', etc are available as in C.
+ The space separating the name from the assignment
+ operator is optional. Spaces are, however, mandatory
+ in separating components of _\be_\bx_\bp_\br which would otherwise
+ be single words.
+
+ Special postfix `++' and `--' operators increment and
+ decrement _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be respectively, i.e. `@ i++'.
+
+ P\bPr\bre\be-\b-d\bde\bef\bfi\bin\bne\bed\bd a\ban\bnd\bd e\ben\bnv\bvi\bir\bro\bon\bnm\bme\ben\bnt\bt v\bva\bar\bri\bia\bab\bbl\ble\bes\bs
+
+ The following variables have special meaning to the shell.
+ Of these, _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv, _\bc_\bw_\bd, _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be, _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh, _\bp_\br_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bt, _\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl and _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs
+ are always set by the shell. Except for _\bc_\bw_\bd and _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs this
+ setting occurs only at initialization; these variables will
+ not then be modified unless this is done explicitly by the
+ user.
+
+ This shell copies the environment variable USER into the
+ variable _\bu_\bs_\be_\br, TERM into _\bt_\be_\br_\bm, and HOME into _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be, and
+ copies these back into the environment whenever the normal
+ shell variables are reset. The environment variable PATH is
+ likewise handled; it is not necessary to worry about its
+ setting other than in the file ._\bc_\bs_\bh_\br_\bc as inferior _\bc_\bs_\bh
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 24
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ processes will import the definition of _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh from the
+ environment, and re-export it if you then change it.
+
+ a\bar\brg\bgv\bv Set to the arguments to the shell, it is from
+ this variable that positional parameters are
+ substituted, i.e. `$1' is replaced by
+ `$argv[1]', etc.
+
+ c\bcd\bdp\bpa\bat\bth\bh Gives a list of alternate directories
+ searched to find subdirectories in _\bc_\bh_\bd_\bi_\br com-
+ mands.
+
+ c\bcw\bwd\bd The full pathname of the current directory.
+
+ e\bec\bch\bho\bo Set when the -\b-x\bx command line option is given.
+ Causes each command and its arguments to be
+ echoed just before it is executed. For non-
+ builtin commands all expansions occur before
+ echoing. Builtin commands are echoed before
+ command and filename substitution, since
+ these substitutions are then done selec-
+ tively.
+
+ f\bfi\bil\ble\bec\bc Enable file name completion.
+
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\btc\bch\bha\bar\brs\bs Can be given a string value to change the
+ characters used in history substitution. The
+ first character of its value is used as the
+ history substitution character, replacing the
+ default character !. The second character of
+ its value replaces the character |\b^ in quick
+ substitutions.
+
+ h\bhi\bis\bst\bto\bor\bry\by Can be given a numeric value to control the
+ size of the history list. Any command which
+ has been referenced in this many events will
+ not be discarded. Too large values of _\bh_\bi_\bs_\b-
+ _\bt_\bo_\br_\by may run the shell out of memory. The
+ last executed command is always saved on the
+ history list.
+
+ h\bho\bom\bme\be The home directory of the invoker, initial-
+ ized from the environment. The filename
+ expansion of `~\b~' refers to this variable.
+
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\bee\beo\bof\bf If set the shell ignores end-of-file from
+ input devices which are terminals. This
+ prevents shells from accidentally being
+ killed by control-D's.
+
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl The files where the shell checks for mail.
+ This is done after each command completion
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 25
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ which will result in a prompt, if a specified
+ interval has elapsed. The shell says `You
+ have new mail.' if the file exists with an
+ access time not greater than its modify time.
+
+ If the first word of the value of _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl is
+ numeric it specifies a different mail check-
+ ing interval, in seconds, than the default,
+ which is 10 minutes.
+
+ If multiple mail files are specified, then
+ the shell says `New mail in _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be' when there
+ is mail in the file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+
+ n\bno\boc\bcl\blo\bob\bbb\bbe\ber\br As described in the section on _\bI_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt/_\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt,
+ restrictions are placed on output redirection
+ to insure that files are not accidentally
+ destroyed, and that `>>' redirections refer
+ to existing files.
+
+ n\bno\bog\bgl\blo\bob\bb If set, filename expansion is inhibited.
+ This is most useful in shell scripts which
+ are not dealing with filenames, or after a
+ list of filenames has been obtained and
+ further expansions are not desirable.
+
+ n\bno\bon\bno\bom\bma\bat\btc\bch\bh If set, it is not an error for a filename
+ expansion to not match any existing files;
+ rather the primitive pattern is returned. It
+ is still an error for the primitive pattern
+ to be malformed, i.e. `echo [' still gives
+ an error.
+
+ n\bno\bot\bti\bif\bfy\by If set, the shell notifies asynchronously of
+ job completions. The default is to rather
+ present job completions just before printing
+ a prompt.
+
+ p\bpa\bat\bth\bh Each word of the path variable specifies a
+ directory in which commands are to be sought
+ for execution. A null word specifies the
+ current directory. If there is no _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh vari-
+ able then only full path names will execute.
+ The usual search path is `.', `/bin' and
+ `/usr/bin', but this may vary from system to
+ system. For the super-user the default
+ search path is `/etc', `/bin' and `/usr/bin'.
+ A shell which is given neither the -\b-c\bc nor the
+ -\b-t\bt option will normally hash the contents of
+ the directories in the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh variable after
+ reading ._\bc_\bs_\bh_\br_\bc, and each time the _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh vari-
+ able is reset. If new commands are added to
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 26
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ these directories while the shell is active,
+ it may be necessary to give the _\br_\be_\bh_\ba_\bs_\bh or the
+ commands may not be found.
+
+ p\bpr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bt The string which is printed before each com-
+ mand is read from an interactive terminal
+ input. If a `!' appears in the string it
+ will be replaced by the current event number
+ unless a preceding `\' is given. Default is
+ `% ', or `# ' for the super-user.
+
+ s\bsa\bav\bve\beh\bhi\bis\bst\bt is given a numeric value to control the
+ number of entries of the history list that
+ are saved in ~/.history when the user logs
+ out. Any command which has been referenced
+ in this many events will be saved. During
+ start up the shell sources ~/.history into
+ the history list enabling history to be saved
+ across logins. Too large values of _\bs_\ba_\bv_\be_\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt
+ will slow down the shell during start up.
+
+ s\bsh\bhe\bel\bll\bl The file in which the shell resides. This is
+ used in forking shells to interpret files
+ which have execute bits set, but which are
+ not executable by the system. (See the
+ description of _\bN_\bo_\bn-_\bb_\bu_\bi_\bl_\bt_\bi_\bn _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd _\bE_\bx_\be_\bc_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ below.) Initialized to the (system-dependent)
+ home of the shell.
+
+ s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs The status returned by the last command. If
+ it terminated abnormally, then 0200 is added
+ to the status. Builtin commands which fail
+ return exit status `1', all other builtin
+ commands set status `0'.
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\be Controls automatic timing of commands. If
+ set, then any command which takes more than
+ this many cpu seconds will cause a line giv-
+ ing user, system, and real times and a utili-
+ zation percentage which is the ratio of user
+ plus system times to real time to be printed
+ when it terminates.
+
+ v\bve\ber\brb\bbo\bos\bse\be Set by the -\b-v\bv command line option, causes the
+ words of each command to be printed after
+ history substitution.
+
+ N\bNo\bon\bn-\b-b\bbu\bui\bil\blt\bti\bin\bn c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd e\bex\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn
+
+ When a command to be executed is found to not be a builtin
+ command the shell attempts to execute the command via
+ _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2). Each word in the variable _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh names a directory
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 27
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ from which the shell will attempt to execute the command.
+ If it is given neither a -\b-c\bc nor a -\b-t\bt option, the shell will
+ hash the names in these directories into an internal table
+ so that it will only try an _\be_\bx_\be_\bc in a directory if there is
+ a possibility that the command resides there. This greatly
+ speeds command location when a large number of directories
+ are present in the search path. If this mechanism has been
+ turned off (via _\bu_\bn_\bh_\ba_\bs_\bh), or if the shell was given a -\b-c\bc or
+ -\b-t\bt argument, and in any case for each directory component of
+ _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh which does not begin with a `/', the shell concatenates
+ with the given command name to form a path name of a file
+ which it then attempts to execute.
+
+ Parenthesized commands are always executed in a subshell.
+ Thus `(cd ; pwd) ; pwd' prints the _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be directory; leaving
+ you where you were (printing this after the home directory),
+ while `cd ; pwd' leaves you in the _\bh_\bo_\bm_\be directory.
+ Parenthesized commands are most often used to prevent _\bc_\bh_\bd_\bi_\br
+ from affecting the current shell.
+
+ If the file has execute permissions but is not an executable
+ binary to the system, then it is assumed to be a file con-
+ taining shell commands and a new shell is spawned to read
+ it.
+
+ If there is an _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs for _\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl then the words of the alias
+ will be prepended to the argument list to form the shell
+ command. The first word of the _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs should be the full
+ path name of the shell (e.g. `$shell'). Note that this is a
+ special, late occurring, case of _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs substitution, and
+ only allows words to be prepended to the argument list
+ without modification.
+
+ A\bAr\brg\bgu\bum\bme\ben\bnt\bt l\bli\bis\bst\bt p\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bes\bss\bsi\bin\bng\bg
+
+ If argument 0 to the shell is `-' then this is a login
+ shell. The flag arguments are interpreted as follows:
+
+ -\b-b\bb This flag forces a ``break'' from option processing,
+ causing any further shell arguments to be treated as
+ non-option arguments. The remaining arguments will not
+ be interpreted as shell options. This may be used to
+ pass options to a shell script without confusion or
+ possible subterfuge. The shell will not run a set-user
+ ID script without this option.
+
+ -\b-c\bc Commands are read from the (single) following argument
+ which must be present. Any remaining arguments are
+ placed in _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv.
+
+ -\b-e\be The shell exits if any invoked command terminates
+ abnormally or yields a non-zero exit status.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 28
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-f\bf The shell will start faster, because it will neither
+ search for nor execute commands from the file `.cshrc'
+ in the invoker's home directory.
+
+ -\b-i\bi The shell is interactive and prompts for its top-level
+ input, even if it appears to not be a terminal. Shells
+ are interactive without this option if their inputs and
+ outputs are terminals.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Commands are parsed, but not executed. This aids in
+ syntactic checking of shell scripts.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Command input is taken from the standard input.
+
+ -\b-t\bt A single line of input is read and executed. A `\' may
+ be used to escape the newline at the end of this line
+ and continue onto another line.
+
+ -\b-v\bv Causes the _\bv_\be_\br_\bb_\bo_\bs_\be variable to be set, with the effect
+ that command input is echoed after history substitu-
+ tion.
+
+ -\b-x\bx Causes the _\be_\bc_\bh_\bo variable to be set, so that commands
+ are echoed immediately before execution.
+
+ -\b-V\bV Causes the _\bv_\be_\br_\bb_\bo_\bs_\be variable to be set even before
+ `.cshrc' is executed.
+
+ -\b-X\bX Is to -\b-x\bx as -\b-V\bV is to -\b-v\bv.\b.
+
+ After processing of flag arguments, if arguments remain but
+ none of the -\b-c\bc,\b, -\b-i\bi,\b, -\b-s\bs,\b, or -\b-t\bt options was given, the first
+ argument is taken as the name of a file of commands to be
+ executed. The shell opens this file, and saves its name for
+ possible resubstitution by `$0'. Since many systems use
+ either the standard version 6 or version 7 shells whose
+ shell scripts are not compatible with this shell, the shell
+ will execute such a `standard' shell if the first character
+ of a script is not a `#', i.e. if the script does not start
+ with a comment. Remaining arguments initialize the variable
+ _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv.
+
+ S\bSi\big\bgn\bna\bal\bl h\bha\ban\bnd\bdl\bli\bin\bng\bg
+
+ The shell normally ignores _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt signals. Jobs running
+ detached (either by `&' or the _\bb_\bg or %\b%.\b..\b..\b. &\b& commands) are
+ immune to signals generated from the keyboard, including
+ hangups. Other signals have the values which the shell
+ inherited from its parent. The shells handling of inter-
+ rupts and terminate signals in shell scripts can be con-
+ trolled by _\bo_\bn_\bi_\bn_\bt_\br. Login shells catch the _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bt_\be signal;
+ otherwise this signal is passed on to children from the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 29
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ state in the shell's parent. In no case are interrupts
+ allowed when a login shell is reading the file `.logout'.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ William Joy. Job control and directory stack features first
+ implemented by J.E. Kulp of I.I.A.S.A, Laxenburg, Austria,
+ with different syntax than that used now. File name comple-
+ tion code written by Ken Greer, HP Labs.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ ~/.cshrc Read at beginning of execution by each shell.
+ ~/.login Read by login shell, after `.cshrc' at login.
+ ~/.logout Read by login shell, at logout.
+ /bin/sh Standard shell, for shell scripts not starting with a `#'.
+ /tmp/sh* Temporary file for `<<'.
+ /etc/passwd Source of home directories for `~name'.
+
+L\bLI\bIM\bMI\bIT\bTA\bAT\bTI\bIO\bON\bNS\bS
+ Words can be no longer than 1024 characters. The system
+ limits argument lists to 10240 characters. The number of
+ arguments to a command which involves filename expansion is
+ limited to 1/6'th the number of characters allowed in an
+ argument list. Command substitutions may substitute no more
+ characters than are allowed in an argument list. To detect
+ looping, the shell restricts the number of _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs substitu-
+ tions on a single line to 20.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1), access(2), execve(2), fork(2), killpg(2), pipe(2),
+ sigvec(2), umask(2), setrlimit(2), wait(2), tty(4),
+ a.out(5), environ(7), `An introduction to the C shell'
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ When a command is restarted from a stop, the shell prints
+ the directory it started in if this is different from the
+ current directory; this can be misleading (i.e. wrong) as
+ the job may have changed directories internally.
+
+ Shell builtin functions are not stoppable/restartable. Com-
+ mand sequences of the form `a ; b ; c' are also not handled
+ gracefully when stopping is attempted. If you suspend `b',
+ the shell will then immediately execute `c'. This is espe-
+ cially noticeable if this expansion results from an _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs.
+ It suffices to place the sequence of commands in ()'s to
+ force it to a subshell, i.e. `( a ; b ; c )'.
+
+ Control over tty output after processes are started is prim-
+ itive; perhaps this will inspire someone to work on a good
+ virtual terminal interface. In a virtual terminal interface
+ much more interesting things could be done with output con-
+ trol.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 30
+
+
+
+
+
+
+CSH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual CSH(1)
+
+
+
+ Alias substitution is most often used to clumsily simulate
+ shell procedures; shell procedures should be provided rather
+ than aliases.
+
+ Commands within loops, prompted for by `?', are not placed
+ in the _\bh_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bo_\br_\by list. Control structure should be parsed
+ rather than being recognized as built-in commands. This
+ would allow control commands to be placed anywhere, to be
+ combined with `|', and to be used with `&' and `;' metasyn-
+ tax.
+
+ It should be possible to use the `:' modifiers on the output
+ of command substitutions. All and more than one `:' modif-
+ ier should be allowed on `$' substitutions.
+
+ The way the f\bfi\bil\ble\bec\bc facility is implemented is ugly and expen-
+ sive.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1988 31
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LINT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LINT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lint - a C program verifier
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\bli\bin\bnt\bt [ -\b-a\bab\bbc\bch\bhn\bnp\bpu\buv\bvx\bx ] file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bi_\bn_\bt attempts to detect features of the C program _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs
+ which are likely to be bugs, or non-portable, or wasteful.
+ It also checks the type usage of the program more strictly
+ than the compilers. Among the things which are currently
+ found are unreachable statements, loops not entered at the
+ top, automatic variables declared and not used, and logical
+ expressions whose value is constant. Moreover, the usage of
+ functions is checked to find functions which return values
+ in some places and not in others, functions called with
+ varying numbers of arguments, and functions whose values are
+ not used.
+
+ By default, it is assumed that all the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs are to be
+ loaded together; they are checked for mutual compatibility.
+ Function definitions for certain libraries are available to
+ _\bl_\bi_\bn_\bt; these libraries are referred to by a conventional
+ name, such as `-lm', in the style of _\bl_\bd(1). Arguments end-
+ ing in ._\bl_\bn are also treated as library files. To create
+ lint libraries, use the -\b-C\bC option:
+
+ lint -Cfoo files . . .
+
+ where _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs are the C sources of library _\bf_\bo_\bo. The result is
+ a file _\bl_\bl_\bi_\bb-_\bl_\bf_\bo_\bo._\bl_\bn in the correct library format suitable
+ for linting programs using _\bf_\bo_\bo.
+
+ Any number of the options in the following list may be used.
+ The -\b-D\bD, -\b-U\bU, and -\b-I\bI options of _\bc_\bc(1) are also recognized as
+ separate arguments.
+
+ p\bp Attempt to check portability to the _\bI_\bB_\bM and _\bG_\bC_\bO_\bS
+ dialects of C.
+
+ h\bh Apply a number of heuristic tests to attempt to intuit
+ bugs, improve style, and reduce waste.
+
+ b\bb Report _\bb_\br_\be_\ba_\bk statements that cannot be reached. (This
+ is not the default because, unfortunately, most _\bl_\be_\bx and
+ many _\by_\ba_\bc_\bc outputs produce dozens of such comments.)
+
+ v\bv Suppress complaints about unused arguments in func-
+ tions.
+
+ x\bx Report variables referred to by extern declarations,
+ but never used.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 17, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LINT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LINT(1)
+
+
+
+ a\ba Report assignments of long values to int variables.
+
+ c\bc Complain about casts which have questionable portabil-
+ ity.
+
+ u\bu Do not complain about functions and variables used and
+ not defined, or defined and not used (this is suitable
+ for running _\bl_\bi_\bn_\bt on a subset of files out of a larger
+ program).
+
+ n\bn Do not check compatibility against the standard
+ library.
+
+ z\bz Do not complain about structures that are never defined
+ (e.g. using a structure pointer without knowing its
+ contents.).
+
+ _\bE_\bx_\bi_\bt(2) and other functions which do not return are not
+ understood; this causes various lies.
+
+ Certain conventional comments in the C source will change
+ the behavior of _\bl_\bi_\bn_\bt:
+
+ /*NOTREACHED*/
+ at appropriate points stops comments about unreachable
+ code.
+
+ /*VARARGS_\bn*/
+ suppresses the usual checking for variable numbers of
+ arguments in the following function declaration. The
+ data types of the first _\bn arguments are checked; a
+ missing _\bn is taken to be 0.
+
+ /*NOSTRICT*/
+ shuts off strict type checking in the next expression.
+
+ /*ARGSUSED*/
+ turns on the -\b-v\bv option for the next function.
+
+ /*LINTLIBRARY*/
+ at the beginning of a file shuts off complaints about
+ unused functions in this file.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ S.C. Johnson. Lint library construction implemented by
+ Edward Wang.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/lint/lint[12] programs
+ /usr/lib/lint/llib-lc.ln declarations for standard func-
+ tions
+ /usr/lib/lint/llib-lc human readable version of above
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 17, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LINT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LINT(1)
+
+
+
+ /usr/lib/lint/llib-port.ln declarations for portable func-
+ tions
+ /usr/lib/lint/llib-port human readable . . .
+ llib-l*.ln library created with -\b-C\bC
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cc(1)
+ S. C. Johnson, _\bL_\bi_\bn_\bt, _\ba _\bC _\bP_\br_\bo_\bg_\br_\ba_\bm _\bC_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\be_\br
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ There are some things you just c\bca\ban\bn'\b't\bt get lint to shut up
+ about.
+
+ /*NOSTRICT*/ is not implemented in the current version
+ (alas).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 17, 1986 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LISP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LISP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lisp - lisp interpreter
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\bli\bis\bsp\bp
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bi_\bs_\bp is a lisp interpreter for a dialect which closely
+ resembles MIT's MACLISP. This lisp, known as FRANZ LISP,
+ features an I/O facility which allows the user to change the
+ input and output syntax, add macro characters, and maintain
+ compatibility with upper-case only lisp systems; infinite
+ precision integer arithmetic, and an error facility which
+ allows the user to trap system errors in many different
+ ways. Interpreted functions may be mixed with code compiled
+ by _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bz_\bt(1) and both may be debugged using the ``Joseph Lis-
+ ter'' trace package. A _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bp containing compiled and inter-
+ preted code may be dumped into a file for later use.
+
+ There are too many functions to list here; one should refer
+ to the manuals listed below.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bRS\bS
+ An early version was written by Jeff Levinsky, Mike Curry,
+ and John Breedlove. Keith Sklower wrote and is maintaining
+ the current version, with the assistance of John Foderaro.
+ The garbage collector was implemented by Bill Rowan.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/lisp/trace.l Joseph Lister trace package
+ /usr/lib/lisp/toplevel.ltop level read-eval-print loop
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ liszt(1), lxref(1)
+ `FRANZ LISP Manual, Version 1' by John K. Foderaro
+ MACLISP Manual
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The error system is in a state of flux and not all error
+ messages are as informative as they could be.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LISZT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LISZT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ liszt - compile a Franz Lisp program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\bli\bis\bsz\bzt\bt [ -\b-m\bmp\bpq\bqr\bru\buw\bwx\bxC\bCQ\bQS\bST\bT ] [ -\b-e\be form ] [ -\b-o\bo objfile ] [ name ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bi_\bs_\bz_\bt takes a file whose names ends in `.l' and compiles the
+ FRANZ LISP code there leaving an object program on the file
+ whose name is that of the source with `.o' substituted for
+ `.l'.
+
+ The following options are interpreted by _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bz_\bt.
+
+ -\b-e\be Evaluate the given form before compilation begins.
+
+ -\b-m\bm Compile a MACLISP file, by changing the readtable to
+ conform to MACLISP syntax and including a macro-defined
+ compatibility package.
+
+ -\b-o\bo Put the object code in the specified file, rather than
+ the default `.o' file.
+
+ -\b-p\bp places profiling code at the beginning of each non-
+ local function. If the lisp system is also created
+ with profiling in it, this allows function calling fre-
+ quency to be determined (see _\bp_\br_\bo_\bf(1).)
+
+ -\b-q\bq Only print warning and error messages. Compilation
+ statistics and notes on correct but unusual constructs
+ will not be printed.
+
+ -\b-r\br place bootstrap code at the beginning of the object
+ file, which when the object file is executed will cause
+ a lisp system to be invoked and the object file fasl'ed
+ in.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Compile a UCI-lispfile, by changing the readtable to
+ conform to UCI-Lisp syntax and including a macro-
+ defined compatibility package.
+
+ -\b-w\bw Suppress warning diagnostics.
+
+ -\b-x\bx Create a lisp cross reference file with the same name
+ as the source file but with `.x' appended. The pro-
+ gram _\bl_\bx_\br_\be_\bf(1) reads this file and creates a human read-
+ able cross reference listing.
+
+ -\b-C\bC put comments in the assembler output of the compiler.
+ Useful for debugging the compiler.
+
+ -\b-Q\bQ Print compilation statistics and warn of strange
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LISZT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LISZT(1)
+
+
+
+ constructs. This is the default.
+
+ -\b-S\bS Compile the named program and leave the assembler-
+ language output on the corresponding file suffixed
+ `.s'. This will also prevent the assembler language
+ file from being assembled.
+
+ -\b-T\bT send the assembler output to standard output.
+
+ If no source file is specified, then the compiler will run
+ interactively. You will find yourself talking to the
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bp(1) top-level command interpreter. You can compile a
+ file by using the function _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bz_\bt (an nlambda) with the same
+ arguments as you use on the command line. For example to
+ compile `foo', a MACLISP file, you would use:
+
+ (liszt -m foo)
+
+ Note that _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bz_\bt supplies the ``.l'' extension for you.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/lisp/machacks.lMACLISP compatibility package
+ /usr/lib/lisp/syscall.l macro definitions of Unix system calls
+ /usr/lib/lisp/ucifnc.l UCI Lisp compatibility package
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ John Foderaro
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lisp(1), lxref(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LN(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ln - make links
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\bln\bn [ -\b-s\bs ] sourcename [ targetname ]
+ l\bln\bn [ -\b-s\bs ] sourcename1 sourcename2 [ sourcename3 ... ] tar-
+ getdirectory
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ A link is a directory entry referring to a file; the same
+ file (together with its size, all its protection informa-
+ tion, etc.) may have several links to it. There are two
+ kinds of links: hard links and symbolic links.
+
+ By default _\bl_\bn makes hard links. A hard link to a file is
+ indistinguishable from the original directory entry; any
+ changes to a file are effective independent of the name used
+ to reference the file. Hard links may not refer to direc-
+ tories (unless the proper incantations are supplied) and may
+ not span file systems.
+
+ The -\b-s\bs option causes _\bl_\bn to create symbolic links. A sym-
+ bolic link contains the name of the file to which it is
+ linked. The referenced file is used when an _\bo_\bp_\be_\bn(2) opera-
+ tion is performed on the link. A _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(2) on a symbolic link
+ will return the linked-to file; an _\bl_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(2) must be done to
+ obtain information about the link. The _\br_\be_\ba_\bd_\bl_\bi_\bn_\bk(2) call may
+ be used to read the contents of a symbolic link. Symbolic
+ links may span file systems and may refer to directories.
+
+ Given one or two arguments, _\bl_\bn creates a link to an existing
+ file _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. If _\bt_\ba_\br_\bg_\be_\bt_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is given, the link has that
+ name; _\bt_\ba_\br_\bg_\be_\bt_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be may also be a directory in which to place
+ the link; otherwise it is placed in the current directory.
+ If only the directory is specified, the link will be made to
+ the last component of _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+
+ Given more than two arguments, _\bl_\bn makes links in _\bt_\ba_\br_\bg_\be_\bt_\b-
+ _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by to all the named source files. The links made
+ will have the same name as the files being linked to.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ rm(1), cp(1), mv(1), link(2), readlink(2), stat(2), sym-
+ link(2)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 November 26, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LOCK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOCK(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lock - reserve a terminal
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blo\boc\bck\bk [ -\b-p\bp ] [ -\b-n\bnu\bum\bmb\bbe\ber\br ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bo_\bc_\bk requests a password from the user, reads it again for
+ verification and then it will normally not relinquish the
+ terminal until the password is repeated. There are three
+ other conditions under which it will terminate: it accepts
+ the password for root as an alternative to the one given by
+ the user, it will timeout after some interval of time, and
+ it may be killed by somebody with the appropriate permis-
+ sion. The default time limit is 15 minutes but it may be
+ changed with the -_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br option where _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br is the time
+ limit in minutes. The -_\bp option has _\bl_\bo_\bc_\bk use the user's
+ standard password instead of requesting another one.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 26, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LOGGER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOGGER(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ logger - make entries in the system log
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blo\bog\bgg\bge\ber\br [ -\b-t\bt tag ] [ -\b-p\bp pri ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-f\bf file ] [ message
+ ... ]
+
+A\bAR\bRG\bGU\bUM\bME\bEN\bNT\bTS\bS
+ -\b-t\bt _\bt_\ba_\bg Mark every line in the log with the specified
+ _\bt_\ba_\bg.
+
+ -\b-p\bp _\bp_\br_\bi Enter the message with the specified priority.
+ The priority may be specified numerically or as
+ a ``facility.level'' pair. For example, ``-p
+ local3.info'' logs the message(s) as
+ _\bi_\bn_\bf_\bormational level in the _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\b3 facility. The
+ default is ``user.notice.''
+
+ -\b-i\bi Log the process id of the logger process with
+ each line.
+
+ -\b-f\bf _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be Log the specified file.
+
+ message The message to log; if not specified, and the -\b-f\bf
+ flag is not provided, standard input is logged.
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bo_\bg_\bg_\be_\br provides a program interface to the _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bo_\bg(3) system
+ log module.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bES\bS
+ logger System rebooted
+
+ logger -p local0.notice -t HOSTIDM -f /dev/idmc
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ syslog(3), syslogd(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LOGIN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOGIN(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ login - sign on
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn [ -\b-p\bp ] [ username ]
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn [ -\b-p\bp ] [ -\b-h\bh hostname ] [ -\b-f\bf ] [ username ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn command is used when a user initially signs on.
+ It may also be used at any time to change from one user to
+ another. This case is the one summarized first above and
+ described here. See "How to Get Started" for how to connect
+ initially. The invocation of _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn for initial sign-on is
+ made by a system program or server using the latter form of
+ the command and is described below.
+
+ If _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn is invoked without an argument, it asks for a user
+ name, and, if appropriate, a password. Echoing is turned
+ off (if possible) during the typing of the password, so it
+ will not appear on the written record of the session.
+
+ After a successful login, accounting files are updated and
+ the user is informed of the existence of mail. The message
+ of the day is printed, as is the time of his last login.
+ Both are suppressed if he has a ".hushlogin" file in his
+ home directory; this is mostly used to make life easier for
+ non-human users, such as _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp.
+
+ _\bL_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn initializes the user and group IDs and the working
+ directory, then executes a command interpreter (usually
+ _\bc_\bs_\bh(1)) according to specifications found in a password
+ file. Argument 0 of the command interpreter is the name of
+ the command interpreter with a leading dash ("-").
+
+ Login also modifies the environment _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7) with informa-
+ tion specifying home directory, command interpreter, termi-
+ nal type (if available) and user name. The `-p' argument
+ causes the remainder of the environment to be preserved,
+ otherwise any previous environment is discarded.
+
+ If the file /etc/nologin exists, _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn prints its contents
+ on the user's terminal and exits. This is used by _\bs_\bh_\bu_\bt_\b-
+ _\bd_\bo_\bw_\bn(8) to stop users logging in when the system is about to
+ go down.
+
+ Login is recognized by _\bs_\bh(1) and _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) and executed
+ directly (without forking).
+
+ There are several additional options to _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn for use at
+ initial login. With one exception, these options are avail-
+ able only to the superuser. The -\b-h\bh option is used by
+ _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt_\bd(8C) and other servers to list the host from which
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 14, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LOGIN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOGIN(1)
+
+
+
+ the connection was received. The -\b-f\bf option is used with a
+ username on the command line to indicate that proper authen-
+ tication has already been done and that no password need be
+ requested. This option may be used by the superuser or by
+ the user specified on the command line.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/utmp accounting
+ /usr/adm/wtmp accounting
+ /usr/spool/mail/* mail
+ /etc/motd message-of-the-day
+ /etc/passwd password file
+ /etc/nologin stops logins
+ .hushlogin makes login quieter
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mail(1), passwd(1), rlogin(1), getpass(3), passwd(5),
+ utmp(5), environ(7), init(8), getty(8), shutdown(8),
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ "Login incorrect," if the name or the password is bad.
+ "No Shell", "cannot open password file", "no directory":
+ consult a programming counselor.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ An undocumented option, -\b-r\br is used by the remote login
+ server, _\br_\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn_\bd(8) to force _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn to enter into an initial
+ connection protocol.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 14, 1987 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LOOK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOK(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ look - find lines in a sorted list
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blo\boo\bok\bk [ -\b-d\bdf\bf ] string [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bo_\bo_\bk consults a sorted _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be and prints all lines that begin
+ with _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg. It uses binary search.
+
+ The options d\bd and f\bf affect comparisons as in _\bs_\bo_\br_\bt(1):
+
+ d\bd `Dictionary' order: only letters, digits, tabs and
+ blanks participate in comparisons.
+
+ f\bf Fold. Upper case letters compare equal to lower case.
+
+ If no _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is specified, /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bd_\bi_\bc_\bt/_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bs is assumed with
+ collating sequence -\b-d\bdf\bf.\b.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/dict/words
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sort(1), grep(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LOOKBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOKBIB(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ indxbib, lookbib - build inverted index for a bibliography,
+ find references in a bibliography
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ i\bin\bnd\bdx\bxb\bbi\bib\bb database ...
+ l\blo\boo\bok\bkb\bbi\bib\bb [ -\b-n\bn ] database
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bI_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb makes an inverted index to the named _\bd_\ba_\bt_\ba_\bb_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs (or
+ files) for use by _\bl_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb(1) and _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br(1). These files con-
+ tain bibliographic references (or other kinds of informa-
+ tion) separated by blank lines.
+
+ A bibliographic reference is a set of lines, constituting
+ fields of bibliographic information. Each field starts on a
+ line beginning with a ``%'', followed by a key-letter, then
+ a blank, and finally the contents of the field, which may
+ continue until the next line starting with ``%''.
+
+ _\bI_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb is a shell script that calls /usr/lib/refer/mkey and
+ /usr/lib/refer/inv. The first program, _\bm_\bk_\be_\by, truncates
+ words to 6 characters, and maps upper case to lower case.
+ It also discards words shorter than 3 characters, words
+ among the 100 most common English words, and numbers (dates)
+ < 1900 or > 2000. These parameters can be changed; see page
+ 4 of the _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br document by Mike Lesk. The second program,
+ _\bi_\bn_\bv, creates an entry file (.ia), a posting file (.ib), and
+ a tag file (.ic), all in the working directory.
+
+ _\bL_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb uses an inverted index made by _\bi_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb to find sets
+ of bibliographic references. It reads keywords typed after
+ the ``>'' prompt on the terminal, and retrieves records con-
+ taining all these keywords. If nothing matches, nothing is
+ returned except another ``>'' prompt.
+
+ _\bL_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb will ask if you need instructions, and will print
+ some brief information if you reply ``y''. The ``-n'' flag
+ turns off the prompt for instructions.
+
+ It is possible to search multiple databases, as long as they
+ have a common index made by _\bi_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb. In that case, only the
+ first argument given to _\bi_\bn_\bd_\bx_\bb_\bi_\bb is specified to _\bl_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb.
+
+ If _\bl_\bo_\bo_\bk_\bb_\bi_\bb does not find the index files (the .i[abc]
+ files), it looks for a reference file with the same name as
+ the argument, without the suffixes. It creates a file with
+ a '.ig' suffix, suitable for use with _\bf_\bg_\br_\be_\bp. It then uses
+ this fgrep file to find references. This method is simpler
+ to use, but the .ig file is slower to use than the .i[abc]
+ files, and does not allow the use of multiple reference
+ files.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LOOKBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LOOKBIB(1)
+
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ _\bx.ia, _\bx.ib, _\bx.ic, where _\bx is the first argument, or if these
+ are not present, then _\bx.ig, _\bx
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ refer(1), addbib(1), sortbib(1), roffbib(1), lookbib(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Probably all dates should be indexed, since many disciplines
+ refer to literature written in the 1800s or earlier.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LORDER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LORDER(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lorder - find ordering relation for an object library
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blo\bor\brd\bde\ber\br file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The input is one or more object or library archive (see
+ _\ba_\br(1)) _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs. The standard output is a list of pairs of
+ object file names, meaning that the first file of the pair
+ refers to external identifiers defined in the second. The
+ output may be processed by _\bt_\bs_\bo_\br_\bt(1) to find an ordering of a
+ library suitable for one-pass access by _\bl_\bd(1).
+
+ This brash one-liner intends to build a new library from
+ existing `.o' files.
+
+ ar cr library `lorder *.o | tsort`
+
+ The need for lorder may be vitiated by use of _\br_\ba_\bn_\bl_\bi_\bb(1),
+ which converts an ordered archive into a randomly accessed
+ library.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ *symref, *symdef
+ nm(1), sed(1), sort(1), join(1)
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ tsort(1), ld(1), ar(1), ranlib(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The names of object files, in and out of libraries, must end
+ with `.o'; nonsense results otherwise.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LPQ(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPQ(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lpq - spool queue examination program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blp\bpq\bq [ -l ] [ -Pprinter ] [ job # ... ] [ user ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bl_\bp_\bq examines the spooling area used by _\bl_\bp_\bd(8) for printing
+ files on the line printer, and reports the status of the
+ specified jobs or all jobs associated with a user. _\bl_\bp_\bq
+ invoked without any arguments reports on any jobs currently
+ in the queue. A -\b-P\bP flag may be used to specify a particular
+ printer, otherwise the default line printer is used (or the
+ value of the PRINTER variable in the environment). All other
+ arguments supplied are interpreted as user names or job
+ numbers to filter out only those jobs of interest.
+
+ For each job submitted (i.e. invocation of _\bl_\bp_\br(1)) _\bl_\bp_\bq
+ reports the user's name, current rank in the queue, the
+ names of files comprising the job, the job identifier (a
+ number which may be supplied to _\bl_\bp_\br_\bm(1) for removing a
+ specific job), and the total size in bytes. The -\b-l\bl option
+ causes information about each of the files comprising the
+ job to be printed. Normally, only as much information as
+ will fit on one line is displayed. Job ordering is depen-
+ dent on the algorithm used to scan the spooling directory
+ and is supposed to be FIFO (First in First Out). File names
+ comprising a job may be unavailable (when _\bl_\bp_\br(1) is used as
+ a sink in a pipeline) in which case the file is indicated as
+ ``(standard input)".
+
+ If _\bl_\bp_\bq warns that there is no daemon present (i.e. due to
+ some malfunction), the _\bl_\bp_\bc(8) command can be used to restart
+ the printer daemon.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/termcap for manipulating the screen for repeated display
+ /etc/printcap to determine printer characteristics
+ /usr/spool/* the spooling directory, as determined from printcap
+ /usr/spool/*/cf* control files specifying jobs
+ /usr/spool/*/lock the lock file to obtain the currently active job
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lpr(1), lprm(1), lpc(8), lpd(8)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Due to the dynamic nature of the information in the spooling
+ directory lpq may report unreliably. Output formatting is
+ sensitive to the line length of the terminal; this can
+ results in widely spaced columns.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 30, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LPQ(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPQ(1)
+
+
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Unable to open various files. The lock file being mal-
+ formed. Garbage files when there is no daemon active, but
+ files in the spooling directory.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 30, 1987 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lpr - off line print
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blp\bpr\br [ -\b-P\bP_\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br ] [ -\b-#\b#_\bn_\bu_\bm ] [ -\b-C\bC _\bc_\bl_\ba_\bs_\bs ] [ -\b-J\bJ _\bj_\bo_\bb ] [ -\b-T\bT
+ _\bt_\bi_\bt_\bl_\be ] [ -\b-i\bi [ _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bc_\bo_\bl_\bs ]] [ -\b-1\b12\b23\b34\b4 _\bf_\bo_\bn_\bt ] [ -\b-w\bw_\bn_\bu_\bm ] [
+ -\b-p\bpl\blt\btn\bnd\bdg\bgv\bvc\bcf\bfr\brm\bmh\bhs\bs ] [ name ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ L\bLp\bpr\br uses a spooling daemon to print the named files when
+ facilities become available. If no names appear, the stan-
+ dard input is assumed. The -\b-P\bP option may be used to force
+ output to a specific printer. Normally, the default printer
+ is used (site dependent), or the value of the environment
+ variable PRINTER is used.
+
+ The following single letter options are used to notify the
+ line printer spooler that the files are not standard text
+ files. The spooling daemon will use the appropriate filters
+ to print the data accordingly.
+
+ -\b-p\bp Use _\bp_\br(1) to format the files (equivalent to _\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt).
+
+ -\b-l\bl Use a filter which allows control characters to be
+ printed and suppresses page breaks.
+
+ -\b-t\bt The files are assumed to contain data from _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1)
+ (cat phototypesetter commands).
+
+ -\b-n\bn The files are assumed to contain data from _\bd_\bi_\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf
+ (device independent troff).
+
+ -\b-d\bd The files are assumed to contain data from _\bt_\be_\bx(l) (DVI
+ format from Stanford).
+
+ -\b-g\bg The files are assumed to contain standard plot data as
+ produced by the _\bp_\bl_\bo_\bt(3X) routines (see also _\bp_\bl_\bo_\bt(1G)
+ for the filters used by the printer spooler).
+
+ -\b-v\bv The files are assumed to contain a raster image for
+ devices like the Benson Varian.
+
+ -\b-c\bc The files are assumed to contain data produced by
+ _\bc_\bi_\bf_\bp_\bl_\bo_\bt(l).
+
+ -\b-f\bf Use a filter which interprets the first character of
+ each line as a standard FORTRAN carriage control char-
+ acter.
+
+ The remaining single letter options have the following mean-
+ ing.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPR(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-r\br Remove the file upon completion of spooling or upon
+ completion of printing (with the -\b-s\bs option).
+
+ -\b-m\bm Send mail upon completion.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Suppress the printing of the burst page.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Use symbolic links. Usually files are copied to the
+ spool directory.
+
+ The -\b-C\bC option takes the following argument as a job classif-
+ ication for use on the burst page. For example,
+
+ lpr -C EECS foo.c
+
+ causes the system name (the name returned by _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be(1)) to
+ be replaced on the burst page by EECS, and the file foo.c to
+ be printed.
+
+ The -\b-J\bJ option takes the following argument as the job name
+ to print on the burst page. Normally, the first file's name
+ is used.
+
+ The -\b-T\bT option uses the next argument as the title used by
+ _\bp_\br(1) instead of the file name.
+
+ To get multiple copies of output, use the -\b-#\b#_\bn_\bu_\bm option,
+ where _\bn_\bu_\bm is the number of copies desired of each file
+ named. For example,
+
+ lpr -#3 foo.c bar.c more.c
+
+ would result in 3 copies of the file foo.c, followed by 3
+ copies of the file bar.c, etc. On the other hand,
+
+ cat foo.c bar.c more.c | lpr -#3
+
+ will give three copies of the concatenation of the files.
+
+ The -\b-i\bi option causes the output to be indented. If the next
+ argument is numeric, it is used as the number of blanks to
+ be printed before each line; otherwise, 8 characters are
+ printed.
+
+ The -\b-w\bw option takes the immediately following number to be
+ the page width for _\bp_\br.
+
+ The -\b-s\bs option will use _\bs_\by_\bm_\bl_\bi_\bn_\bk(2) to link data files rather
+ than trying to copy them so large files can be printed.
+ This means the files should not be modified or removed until
+ they have been printed.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LPR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPR(1)
+
+
+
+ The option -\b-1\b12\b23\b34\b4 Specifies a font to be mounted on font
+ position _\bi. The daemon will construct a ._\br_\ba_\bi_\bl_\bm_\ba_\bg file
+ referencing /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\bv_\bf_\bo_\bn_\bt/_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be._\bs_\bi_\bz_\be.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/passwd personal identification
+ /etc/printcap printer capabilities data base
+ /usr/lib/lpd* line printer daemons
+ /usr/spool/* directories used for spooling
+ /usr/spool/*/cf* daemon control files
+ /usr/spool/*/df* data files specified in "cf" files
+ /usr/spool/*/tf* temporary copies of "cf" files
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lpq(1), lprm(1), pr(1), symlink(2), printcap(5), lpc(8),
+ lpd(8)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ If you try to spool too large a file, it will be truncated.
+ _\bL_\bp_\br will object to printing binary files. If a user other
+ than root prints a file and spooling is disabled, _\bl_\bp_\br will
+ print a message saying so and will not put jobs in the
+ queue. If a connection to _\bl_\bp_\bd on the local machine cannot
+ be made, _\bl_\bp_\br will say that the daemon cannot be started.
+ Diagnostics may be printed in the daemon's log file regard-
+ ing missing spool files by _\bl_\bp_\bd.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Fonts for _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf and _\bt_\be_\bx reside on the host with the printer.
+ It is currently not possible to use local font libraries.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LPRM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPRM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lprm - remove jobs from the line printer spooling queue
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blp\bpr\brm\bm [ -\b-P\bP_\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br ] [ -\b- ] [ job # ... ] [ user ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bp_\br_\bm will remove a job, or jobs, from a printer's spool
+ queue. Since the spooling directory is protected from
+ users, using _\bl_\bp_\br_\bm is normally the only method by which a
+ user may remove a job.
+
+ _\bL_\bp_\br_\bm without any arguments will delete the currently active
+ job if it is owned by the user who invoked _\bl_\bp_\br_\bm.
+
+ If the -\b- flag is specified, _\bl_\bp_\br_\bm will remove all jobs which
+ a user owns. If the super-user employs this flag, the spool
+ queue will be emptied entirely. The owner is determined by
+ the user's login name and host name on the machine where the
+ _\bl_\bp_\br command was invoked.
+
+ Specifying a user's name, or list of user names, will cause
+ _\bl_\bp_\br_\bm to attempt to remove any jobs queued belonging to that
+ user (or users). This form of invoking _\bl_\bp_\br_\bm is useful only
+ to the super-user.
+
+ A user may dequeue an individual job by specifying its job
+ number. This number may be obtained from the _\bl_\bp_\bq(1) pro-
+ gram, e.g.
+
+ % lpq -l
+
+ 1st: ken [job #013ucbarpa]
+ (standard input) 100 bytes
+ % lprm 13
+
+ _\bL_\bp_\br_\bm will announce the names of any files it removes and is
+ silent if there are no jobs in the queue which match the
+ request list.
+
+ _\bL_\bp_\br_\bm will kill off an active daemon, if necessary, before
+ removing any spooling files. If a daemon is killed, a new
+ one is automatically restarted upon completion of file remo-
+ vals.
+
+ The -\b-P\bP option may be usd to specify the queue associated
+ with a specific printer (otherwise the default printer, or
+ the value of the PRINTER variable in the environment is
+ used).
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/printcap printer characteristics file
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LPRM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPRM(1)
+
+
+
+ /usr/spool/* spooling directories
+ /usr/spool/*/lock lock file used to obtain the pid of the current
+ daemon and the job number of the currently active job
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lpr(1), lpq(1), lpd(8)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ ``Permission denied" if the user tries to remove files other
+ than his own.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Since there are race conditions possible in the update of
+ the lock file, the currently active job may be incorrectly
+ identified.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LPTEST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LPTEST(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lptest - generate lineprinter ripple pattern
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blp\bpt\bte\bes\bst\bt [ l\ble\ben\bng\bgt\bth\bh [ c\bco\bou\bun\bnt\bt ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bp_\bt_\be_\bs_\bt writes the traditional "ripple test" pattern on stan-
+ dard output. In 96 lines, this pattern will print all 96
+ printable ASCII characters in each position. While origi-
+ nally created to test printers, it is quite useful for test-
+ ing terminals, driving terminal ports for debugging pur-
+ poses, or any other task where a quick supply of random data
+ is needed.
+
+ The _\bl_\be_\bn_\bg_\bt_\bh argument specifies the output line length if the
+ the default length of 79 is inappropriate.
+
+ The _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt argument specifies the number of output lines to
+ be generated if the default count of 200 is inappropriate.
+ Note that if _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is to be specified, _\bl_\be_\bn_\bg_\bt_\bh must be also
+ be specified.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ls - list contents of directory
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\bls\bs [ -\b-a\bac\bcd\bdf\bfg\bgi\bil\blq\bqr\brs\bst\btu\bu1\b1A\bAC\bCL\bLF\bFR\bR ] name ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ For each directory argument, _\bl_\bs lists the contents of the
+ directory; for each file argument, _\bl_\bs repeats its name and
+ any other information requested. By default, the output is
+ sorted alphabetically. When no argument is given, the
+ current directory is listed. When several arguments are
+ given, the arguments are first sorted appropriately, but
+ file arguments are processed before directories and their
+ contents.
+
+ There are a large number of options:
+
+ -\b-l\bl List in long format, giving mode, number of links,
+ owner, size in bytes, and time of last modification for
+ each file. (See below.) If the file is a special file
+ the size field will instead contain the major and minor
+ device numbers. If the file is a symbolic link the
+ pathname of the linked-to file is printed preceded by
+ ``->''.
+
+ -\b-g\bg Include the group ownership of the file in a long out-
+ put.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Sort by time modified (latest first) instead of by
+ name.
+
+ -\b-a\ba List all entries; in the absence of this option,
+ entries whose names begin with a period (.\b.) are _\bn_\bo_\bt
+ listed.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Give size in kilobytes of each file.
+
+ -\b-d\bd If argument is a directory, list only its name; often
+ used with -\b-l\bl to get the status of a directory.
+
+ -\b-L\bL If argument is a symbolic link, list the file or direc-
+ tory the link references rather than the link itself.
+
+ -\b-r\br Reverse the order of sort to get reverse alphabetic or
+ oldest first as appropriate.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Use time of last access instead of last modification
+ for sorting (with the -\b-t\bt option) and/or printing (with
+ the -\b-l\bl option).
+
+ -\b-c\bc Use time when file status was last changed for sorting
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LS(1)
+
+
+
+ or printing.
+
+ -\b-i\bi For each file, print the i-number in the first column
+ of the report.
+
+ -\b-f\bf Force each argument to be interpreted as a directory
+ and list the name found in each slot. This option
+ turns off -\b-l\bl,\b, -\b-t\bt,\b, -\b-s\bs,\b, and -\b-r\br,\b, and turns on -\b-a\ba;\b; the
+ order is the order in which entries appear in the
+ directory.
+
+ -\b-F\bF cause directories to be marked with a trailing `/',
+ sockets with a trailing `=', symbolic links with a
+ trailing `@', and executable files with a trailing `*'.
+
+ -\b-R\bR recursively list subdirectories encountered.
+
+ -\b-1\b1 force one entry per line output format; this is the
+ default when output is not to a terminal.
+
+ -\b-C\bC force multi-column output; this is the default when
+ output is to a terminal.
+
+ -\b-q\bq force printing of non-graphic characters in file names
+ as the character `?'; this is the default when output
+ is to a terminal.
+
+ The mode printed under the -\b-l\bl option contains 11 characters
+ which are interpreted as follows: the first character is
+
+ d\bd if the entry is a directory;
+ b\bb if the entry is a block-type special file;
+ c\bc if the entry is a character-type special file;
+ l\bl if the entry is a symbolic link;
+ s\bs if the entry is a socket, or
+ -\b- if the entry is a plain file.
+
+ The next 9 characters are interpreted as three sets of three
+ bits each. The first set refers to owner permissions; the
+ next refers to permissions to others in the same user-group;
+ and the last to all others. Within each set the three char-
+ acters indicate permission respectively to read, to write,
+ or to execute the file as a program. For a directory, `exe-
+ cute' permission is interpreted to mean permission to search
+ the directory. The permissions are indicated as follows:
+
+ r\br if the file is readable;
+ w\bw if the file is writable;
+ x\bx if the file is executable;
+ -\b- if the indicated permission is not granted.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+LS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LS(1)
+
+
+
+ The group-execute permission character is given as s\bs if the
+ file has the set-group-id bit set; likewise the user-execute
+ permission character is given as s\bs if the file has the set-
+ user-id bit set. These are given as S\bS (capitalized) if the
+ corresponding execute permission is NOT set.
+
+ The last character of the mode (normally `x' or `-') is t\bt if
+ the 1000 bit of the mode is on. See _\bc_\bh_\bm_\bo_\bd(1) for the mean-
+ ing of this mode. This is given as T\bT (capitalized) if the
+ corresponding execute permission is NOT set.
+
+ When the sizes of the files in a directory are listed, a
+ total count of blocks, including indirect blocks is printed.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/passwd to get user id's for `ls -l'.
+ /etc/group to get group id's for `ls -g'.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Newline and tab are considered printing characters in file
+ names.
+
+ The output device is assumed to be 80 columns wide.
+
+ The option setting based on whether the output is a teletype
+ is undesirable as ``ls -s'' is much different than
+ ``ls -s | lpr''. On the other hand, not doing this setting
+ would make old shell scripts which used _\bl_\bs almost certain
+ losers.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+LXREF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual LXREF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ lxref - lisp cross reference program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ l\blx\bxr\bre\bef\bf [ -\b-N\bN ] xref-file ... [ -\b-a\ba source-file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bL_\bx_\br_\be_\bf reads cross reference file(s) written by the lisp com-
+ piler _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bz_\bt and prints a cross reference listing on the
+ standard output. _\bL_\bi_\bs_\bz_\bt will create a cross reference file
+ during compilation when it is given the -\b-x\bx switch. Cross
+ reference files usually end in `.x' and consequently _\bl_\bx_\br_\be_\bf
+ will append a `.x' to the file names given if necessary.
+ The first option to _\bl_\bx_\br_\be_\bf is a decimal integer, N, which
+ sets the _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\bl_\be_\bv_\be_\bl. If a function is called more than
+ _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\bl_\be_\bv_\be_\bl times, the cross reference listing will just
+ print the number of calls instead of listing each one of
+ them. The default for _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\bl_\be_\bv_\be_\bl is 50.
+
+ The -\b-a\ba option causes _\bl_\bx_\br_\be_\bf to put limited cross reference
+ information in the sources named. _\bl_\bx_\br_\be_\bf will scan the
+ source and when it comes across a definition of a function
+ (that is a line beginning with `(_\bd_\be_\bf' it will preceed that
+ line with a list of the functions which call this function,
+ written as a comment preceeded by `;.. ' . All existing
+ lines beginning with `;.. ' will be removed from the file.
+ If the source file contains a line beginning `;.-' then this
+ will disable this annotation process from this point on
+ until a `;.+' is seen (however, lines beginning with `;.. '
+ will continue to be deleted). After the annoation is done,
+ the original file `_\bf_\bo_\bo._\bl' is renamed to " `#._\bf_\bo_\bo._\bl'" and the
+ new file with annotation is named `_\bf_\bo_\bo._\bl'
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ John Foderaro
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lisp(1), liszt(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+M4(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual M4(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ m4 - macro processor
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bm4\b4 [ files ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\b4 is a macro processor intended as a front end for Ratfor,
+ C, and other languages. Each of the argument files is pro-
+ cessed in order; if there are no arguments, or if an argu-
+ ment is `-', the standard input is read. The processed text
+ is written on the standard output.
+
+ Macro calls have the form
+
+ name(arg1,arg2, . . . , argn)
+
+ The `(' must immediately follow the name of the macro. If a
+ defined macro name is not followed by a `(', it is deemed to
+ have no arguments. Leading unquoted blanks, tabs, and new-
+ lines are ignored while collecting arguments. Potential
+ macro names consist of alphabetic letters, digits, and
+ underscore `_', where the first character is not a digit.
+
+ Left and right single quotes (`') are used to quote strings.
+ The value of a quoted string is the string stripped of the
+ quotes.
+
+ When a macro name is recognized, its arguments are collected
+ by searching for a matching right parenthesis. Macro
+ evaluation proceeds normally during the collection of the
+ arguments, and any commas or right parentheses which happen
+ to turn up within the value of a nested call are as effec-
+ tive as those in the original input text. After argument
+ collection, the value of the macro is pushed back onto the
+ input stream and rescanned.
+
+ _\bM_\b4 makes available the following built-in macros. They may
+ be redefined, but once this is done the original meaning is
+ lost. Their values are null unless otherwise stated.
+
+ d\bde\bef\bfi\bin\bne\be The second argument is installed as the value of
+ the macro whose name is the first argument. Each
+ occurrence of $_\bn in the replacement text, where _\bn
+ is a digit, is replaced by the _\bn-th argument.
+ Argument 0 is the name of the macro; missing argu-
+ ments are replaced by the null string.
+
+ u\bun\bnd\bde\bef\bfi\bin\bne\be removes the definition of the macro named in its
+ argument.
+
+ i\bif\bfd\bde\bef\bf If the first argument is defined, the value is the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+M4(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual M4(1)
+
+
+
+ second argument, otherwise the third. If there is
+ no third argument, the value is null. The word
+ _\bu_\bn_\bi_\bx is predefined on UNIX versions of _\bm_\b4.
+
+ c\bch\bha\ban\bng\bge\beq\bqu\buo\bot\bte\be
+ Change quote characters to the first and second
+ arguments. _\bC_\bh_\ba_\bn_\bg_\be_\bq_\bu_\bo_\bt_\be without arguments restores
+ the original values (i.e., `').
+
+ d\bdi\biv\bve\ber\brt\bt _\bM_\b4 maintains 10 output streams, numbered 0-9. The
+ final output is the concatenation of the streams
+ in numerical order; initially stream 0 is the
+ current stream. The _\bd_\bi_\bv_\be_\br_\bt macro changes the
+ current output stream to its (digit-string) argu-
+ ment. Output diverted to a stream other than 0
+ through 9 is discarded.
+
+ u\bun\bnd\bdi\biv\bve\ber\brt\bt causes immediate output of text from diversions
+ named as arguments, or all diversions if no argu-
+ ment. Text may be undiverted into another diver-
+ sion. Undiverting discards the diverted text.
+
+ d\bdi\biv\bvn\bnu\bum\bm returns the value of the current output stream.
+
+ d\bdn\bnl\bl reads and discards characters up to and including
+ the next newline.
+
+ i\bif\bfe\bel\bls\bse\be has three or more arguments. If the first argu-
+ ment is the same string as the second, then the
+ value is the third argument. If not, and if there
+ are more than four arguments, the process is
+ repeated with arguments 4, 5, 6 and 7. Otherwise,
+ the value is either the fourth string, or, if it
+ is not present, null.
+
+ i\bin\bnc\bcr\br returns the value of its argument incremented by
+ 1. The value of the argument is calculated by
+ interpreting an initial digit-string as a decimal
+ number.
+
+ e\bev\bva\bal\bl evaluates its argument as an arithmetic expres-
+ sion, using 32-bit arithmetic. Operators include
+ +, -, *, /, %, ^ (exponentiation); relationals;
+ parentheses.
+
+ l\ble\ben\bn returns the number of characters in its argument.
+
+ i\bin\bnd\bde\bex\bx returns the position in its first argument where
+ the second argument begins (zero origin), or -1 if
+ the second argument does not occur.
+
+ s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\btr\br returns a substring of its first argument. The
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+M4(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual M4(1)
+
+
+
+ second argument is a zero origin number selecting
+ the first character; the third argument indicates
+ the length of the substring. A missing third
+ argument is taken to be large enough to extend to
+ the end of the first string.
+
+ t\btr\bra\ban\bns\bsl\bli\bit\bt transliterates the characters in its first argu-
+ ment from the set given by the second argument to
+ the set given by the third. No abbreviations are
+ permitted.
+
+ i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be returns the contents of the file named in the
+ argument.
+
+ s\bsi\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be is identical to _\bi_\bn_\bc_\bl_\bu_\bd_\be, except that it says noth-
+ ing if the file is inaccessible.
+
+ s\bsy\bys\bsc\bcm\bmd\bd executes the UNIX command given in the first argu-
+ ment. No value is returned.
+
+ m\bma\bak\bke\bet\bte\bem\bmp\bp fills in a string of XXXXX in its argument with
+ the current process id.
+
+ e\ber\brr\brp\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt prints its argument on the diagnostic output file.
+
+ d\bdu\bum\bmp\bpd\bde\bef\bf prints current names and definitions, for the
+ named items, or for all if no arguments are given.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ B. W. Kernighan and D. M. Ritchie, _\bT_\bh_\be _\bM_\b4 _\bM_\ba_\bc_\br_\bo _\bP_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bs_\bs_\bo_\br
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ mail - send and receive mail
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-s\bs subject ] [ user ... ]
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-n\bn ] -\b-f\bf [ name ]
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-n\bn ] -\b-u\bu user
+
+I\bIN\bNT\bTR\bRO\bOD\bDU\bUC\bCT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl is a intelligent mail processing system, which has a
+ command syntax reminiscent of _\be_\bd with lines replaced by mes-
+ sages.
+
+ The -\b-v\bv flag puts mail into verbose mode; the details of
+ delivery are displayed on the users terminal. The -\b-i\bi flag
+ causes tty interrupt signals to be ignored. This is particu-
+ larly useful when using _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl on noisy phone lines. The -\b-n\bn
+ flag inhibits the reading of /usr/lib/Mail.rc.
+
+ _\bS_\be_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. To send a message to one or more people, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl
+ can be invoked with arguments which are the names of people
+ to whom the mail will be sent. You are then expected to
+ type in your message, followed by an EOT (control-D) at the
+ beginning of a line. A subject may be specified on the com-
+ mand line by using the -\b-s\bs flag. (Only the first argument
+ after the -\b-s\bs flag is used as a subject; be careful to quote
+ subjects containing spaces.) The section below, labeled
+ _\bR_\be_\bp_\bl_\by_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bt_\bo _\bo_\br _\bo_\br_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl, describes some features of
+ _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl available to help you compose your letter.
+
+ _\bR_\be_\ba_\bd_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. In normal usage _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl is given no arguments
+ and checks your mail out of the post office, then prints out
+ a one line header of each message there. The current mes-
+ sage is initially the first message (numbered 1) and can be
+ printed using the p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt command (which can be abbreviated
+ p\bp). You can move among the messages much as you move
+ between lines in _\be_\bd, with the commands `+' and `-' moving
+ backwards and forwards, and simple numbers.
+
+ _\bD_\bi_\bs_\bp_\bo_\bs_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bo_\bf _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. After examining a message you can d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be
+ (d\bd) the message or r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by (r\br) to it. Deletion causes the
+ _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl program to forget about the message. This is not
+ irreversible; the message can be u\bun\bnd\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\bed\bd (u\bu) by giving its
+ number, or the _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl session can be aborted by giving the
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt (x\bx) command. Deleted messages will, however, usually
+ disappear never to be seen again.
+
+ _\bS_\bp_\be_\bc_\bi_\bf_\by_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\be_\bs_\bs_\ba_\bg_\be_\bs. Commands such as p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt and d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be can
+ be given a list of message numbers as arguments to apply to
+ a number of messages at once. Thus ``delete 1 2'' deletes
+ messages 1 and 2, while ``delete 1-5'' deletes messages 1
+ through 5. The special name ``*'' addresses all messages,
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ and ``$'' addresses the last message; thus the command t\bto\bop\bp
+ which prints the first few lines of a message could be used
+ in ``top *'' to print the first few lines of all messages.
+
+ _\bR_\be_\bp_\bl_\by_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bt_\bo _\bo_\br _\bo_\br_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. You can use the r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by com-
+ mand to set up a response to a message, sending it back to
+ the person who it was from. Text you then type in, up to an
+ end-of-file, defines the contents of the message. While you
+ are composing a message, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl treats lines beginning with
+ the character `~' specially. For instance, typing ``~m''
+ (alone on a line) will place a copy of the current message
+ into the response right shifting it by a tabstop. Other
+ escapes will set up subject fields, add and delete reci-
+ pients to the message and allow you to escape to an editor
+ to revise the message or to a shell to run some commands.
+ (These options are given in the summary below.)
+
+ _\bE_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bn_\bg _\ba _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bs_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn. You can end a _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl ses-
+ sion with the q\bqu\bui\bit\bt (q\bq) command. Messages which have been
+ examined go to your _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx file unless they have been deleted
+ in which case they are discarded. Unexamined messages go
+ back to the post office. The -\b-f\bf option causes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl to read
+ in the contents of your _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx (or the specified file) for
+ processing; when you q\bqu\bui\bit\bt, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl writes undeleted messages
+ back to this file. The -\b-u\bu flag is a short way of doing
+ "mail -\b-f\bf /usr/spool/mail/user".
+
+ _\bP_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn_\ba_\bl _\ba_\bn_\bd _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm_\bw_\bi_\bd_\be _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bb_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bs. It is also pos-
+ sible to create a personal distribution lists so that, for
+ instance, you can send mail to ``cohorts'' and have it go to
+ a group of people. Such lists can be defined by placing a
+ line like
+
+ alias cohorts bill ozalp jkf mark kridle@ucbcory
+
+ in the file .mailrc in your home directory. The current
+ list of such aliases can be displayed with the a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs (\b(a\ba)\b)
+ command in _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. System wide distribution lists can be
+ created by editing /usr/lib/aliases, see _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs(5) and
+ _\bs_\be_\bn_\bd_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(8); these are kept in a different syntax. In mail
+ you send, personal aliases will be expanded in mail sent to
+ others so that they will be able to r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by to the recipients.
+ System wide _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs are not expanded when the mail is sent,
+ but any reply returned to the machine will have the system
+ wide alias expanded as all mail goes through _\bs_\be_\bn_\bd_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl.
+
+ _\bN_\be_\bt_\bw_\bo_\br_\bk _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl (_\bA_\bR_\bP_\bA, _\bU_\bU_\bC_\bP, _\bB_\be_\br_\bk_\bn_\be_\bt) See _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br(_\b7) for a
+ description of network addresses.
+
+ _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl has a number of options which can be set in the ._\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl_\br_\bc
+ file to alter its behavior; thus ``set askcc'' enables the
+ ``askcc'' feature. (These options are summarized below.)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSU\bUM\bMM\bMA\bAR\bRY\bY
+ (Adapted from the `Mail Reference Manual')
+
+ Each command is typed on a line by itself, and may take
+ arguments following the command word. The command need not
+ be typed in its entirety - the first command which matches
+ the typed prefix is used. For commands which take message
+ lists as arguments, if no message list is given, then the
+ next message forward which satisfies the command's require-
+ ments is used. If there are no messages forward of the
+ current message, the search proceeds backwards, and if there
+ are no good messages at all, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl types ``No applicable mes-
+ sages'' and aborts the command.
+
+ -\b- Goes to the previous message and prints it out.
+ If given a numeric argument _\bn, goes to the _\bn-th
+ previous message and prints it.
+
+ ?\b? Prints a brief summary of commands.
+
+ !\b! Executes the UNIX shell command which follows.
+
+ P\bPr\bri\bin\bnt\bt (P\bP) Like p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt but also prints out ignored
+ header fields. See also p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt , i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be and
+ r\bre\bet\bta\bai\bin\bn.\b.
+
+ R\bRe\bep\bpl\bly\by (R\bR) Reply to originator. Does not reply to other
+ recipients of the original message.
+
+ T\bTy\byp\bpe\be (T\bT) Identical to the P\bPr\bri\bin\bnt\bt command.
+
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs (a\ba) With no arguments, prints out all
+ currently-defined aliases. With one argument,
+ prints out that alias. With more than one argu-
+ ment, creates an new or changes an on old alias.
+
+ a\bal\blt\bte\ber\brn\bna\bat\bte\bes\bs (a\bal\blt\bt) The a\bal\blt\bte\ber\brn\bna\bat\bte\bes\bs command is useful if you
+ have accounts on several machines. It can be
+ used to inform _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl that the listed addresses
+ are really you. When you r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by to messages, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl
+ will not send a copy of the message to any of
+ the addresses listed on the _\ba_\bl_\bt_\be_\br_\bn_\ba_\bt_\be_\bs list. If
+ the a\bal\blt\bte\ber\brn\bna\bat\bte\bes\bs command is given with no argu-
+ ment, the current set of alternate names is
+ displayed.
+
+ c\bch\bhd\bdi\bir\br (c\bc) Changes the user's working directory to that
+ specified, if given. If no directory is given,
+ then changes to the user's login directory.
+
+ c\bco\bop\bpy\by (c\bco\bo) The c\bco\bop\bpy\by command does the same thing that
+ s\bsa\bav\bve\be does, except that it does not mark the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ messages it is used on for deletion when you
+ quit.
+
+ d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be (d\bd) Takes a list of messages as argument and
+ marks them all as deleted. Deleted messages
+ will not be saved in _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx, nor will they be
+ available for most other commands.
+
+ d\bdp\bp (also d\bdt\bt) Deletes the current message and prints
+ the next message. If there is no next message,
+ _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl says ``at EOF.''
+
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt (e\be) Takes a list of messages and points the text
+ editor at each one in turn. On return from the
+ editor, the message is read back in.
+
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt (e\bex\bx or x\bx) Effects an immediate return to the
+ Shell without modifying the user's system mail-
+ box, his _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx file, or his edit file in -\b-f\bf.
+
+ f\bfi\bil\ble\be (f\bfi\bi) The same as f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\br.
+
+ f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\brs\bs List the names of the folders in your folder
+ directory.
+
+ f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\br (f\bfo\bo) The f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\br command switches to a new mail
+ file or folder. With no arguments, it tells you
+ which file you are currently reading. If you
+ give it an argument, it will write out changes
+ (such as deletions) you have made in the current
+ file and read in the new file. Some special con-
+ ventions are recognized for the name. # means
+ the previous file, % means your system mailbox,
+ %user means user's system mailbox, & means your
+ ~/mbox file, and +folder means a file in your
+ folder directory.
+
+ f\bfr\bro\bom\bm (f\bf) Takes a list of messages and prints their
+ message headers.
+
+ h\bhe\bea\bad\bde\ber\brs\bs (h\bh) Lists the current range of headers, which is
+ an 18 message group. If a ``+'' argument is
+ given, then the next 18 message group is
+ printed, and if a ``-'' argument is given, the
+ previous 18 message group is printed.
+
+ h\bhe\bel\blp\bp A synonym for ?
+
+ h\bho\bol\bld\bd (h\bho\bo, also p\bpr\bre\bes\bse\ber\brv\bve\be) Takes a message list and
+ marks each message therein to be saved in the
+ user's system mailbox instead of in _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx. Does
+ not override the d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be command.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be N\bN.\b.B\bB.\b.:\b: _\bI_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be has been superseded by _\br_\be_\bt_\ba_\bi_\bn.
+ Add the list of header fields named to the
+ _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\bd _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. Header fields in the ignore list
+ are not printed on your terminal when you print
+ a message. This command is very handy for
+ suppression of certain machine-generated header
+ fields. The T\bTy\byp\bpe\be and P\bPr\bri\bin\bnt\bt commands can be used
+ to print a message in its entirety, including
+ ignored fields. If i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be is executed with no
+ arguments, it lists the current set of ignored
+ fields.
+
+ m\bma\bai\bil\bl (m\bm) Takes as argument login names and distribu-
+ tion group names and sends mail to those people.
+
+ m\bmb\bbo\box\bx Indicate that a list of messages be sent to _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx
+ in your home directory when you quit. This is
+ the default action for messages if you do _\bn_\bo_\bt
+ have the _\bh_\bo_\bl_\bd option set.
+
+ n\bne\bex\bxt\bt (n\bn like +\b+ or CR) Goes to the next message in
+ sequence and types it. With an argument list,
+ types the next matching message.
+
+ p\bpr\bre\bes\bse\ber\brv\bve\be (p\bpr\bre\be) A synonym for h\bho\bol\bld\bd.
+
+ p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt (p\bp) Takes a message list and types out each mes-
+ sage on the user's terminal.
+
+ q\bqu\bui\bit\bt (q\bq) Terminates the session, saving all
+ undeleted, unsaved messages in the user's _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx
+ file in his login directory, preserving all mes-
+ sages marked with h\bho\bol\bld\bd or p\bpr\bre\bes\bse\ber\brv\bve\be or never
+ referenced in his system mailbox, and removing
+ all other messages from his system mailbox. If
+ new mail has arrived during the session, the
+ message ``You have new mail'' is given. If
+ given while editing a mailbox file with the -\b-f\bf
+ flag, then the edit file is rewritten. A return
+ to the Shell is effected, unless the rewrite of
+ edit file fails, in which case the user can
+ escape with the e\bex\bxi\bit\bt command.
+
+ r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by (r\br) Takes a message list and sends mail to the
+ sender and all recipients of the specified mes-
+ sage. The default message must not be deleted.
+
+ r\bre\bes\bsp\bpo\bon\bnd\bd A synonym for r\bre\bep\bpl\bly\by.
+
+ r\bre\bet\bta\bai\bin\bn Add the list of header fields named to the
+ _\br_\be_\bt_\ba_\bi_\bn_\be_\bd _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. Only the header fields in the
+ retain list are shown on your terminal when you
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ print a message. All other header fields are
+ suppressed. The T\bTy\byp\bpe\be and P\bPr\bri\bin\bnt\bt commands can be
+ used to print a message in its entirety. If
+ r\bre\bet\bta\bai\bin\bn is executed with no arguments, it lists
+ the current set of retained fields.
+
+ s\bsa\bav\bve\be (s\bs) Takes a message list and a filename and
+ appends each message in turn to the end of the
+ file. The filename in quotes, followed by the
+ line count and character count is echoed on the
+ user's terminal.
+
+ s\bse\bet\bt (s\bse\be) With no arguments, prints all variable
+ values. Otherwise, sets option. Arguments are
+ of the form ``option=value'' (no space before or
+ after =) or ``option.''
+
+ s\bsh\bhe\bel\bll\bl (s\bsh\bh) Invokes an interactive version of the
+ shell.
+
+ s\bsi\biz\bze\be Takes a message list and prints out the size in
+ characters of each message.
+
+ s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be (s\bso\bo) The s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be command reads _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl commands from
+ a file.
+
+ t\bto\bop\bp Takes a message list and prints the top few
+ lines of each. The number of lines printed is
+ controlled by the variable t\bto\bop\bpl\bli\bin\bne\bes\bs and defaults
+ to five.
+
+ t\bty\byp\bpe\be (t\bt) A synonym for p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt.
+
+ u\bun\bna\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs Takes a list of names defined by a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs commands
+ and discards the remembered groups of users.
+ The group names no longer have any significance.
+
+ u\bun\bnd\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be (u\bu) Takes a message list and marks each message
+ as _\bn_\bo_\bt being deleted.
+
+ u\bun\bnr\bre\bea\bad\bd (U\bU) Takes a message list and marks each message
+ as _\bn_\bo_\bt having been read.
+
+ u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bt Takes a list of option names and discards their
+ remembered values; the inverse of s\bse\bet\bt.
+
+ v\bvi\bis\bsu\bua\bal\bl (v\bv) Takes a message list and invokes the display
+ editor on each message.
+
+ w\bwr\bri\bit\bte\be (w\bw) Similar to s\bsa\bav\bve\be, except that _\bo_\bn_\bl_\by the mes-
+ sage body (_\bw_\bi_\bt_\bh_\bo_\bu_\bt the header) is saved.
+ Extremely useful for such tasks as sending and
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ receiving source program text over the message
+ system.
+
+ x\bxi\bit\bt (x\bx) A synonym for e\bex\bxi\bit\bt.
+
+ z\bz _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl presents message headers in windowfuls as
+ described under the h\bhe\bea\bad\bde\ber\brs\bs command. You can
+ move _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl's attention forward to the next window
+ with the z\bz command. Also, you can move to the
+ previous window by using z\bz-\b-.
+
+ Here is a summary of the tilde escapes, which are used when
+ composing messages to perform special functions. Tilde
+ escapes are only recognized at the beginning of lines. The
+ name ``tilde escape'' is somewhat of a misnomer since the
+ actual escape character can be set by the option e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be.\b.
+
+ ~\b~!\b!command Execute the indicated shell command, then return
+ to the message.
+
+ ~\b~b\bb name ... Add the given names to the list of carbon copy
+ recipients but do not make the names visible in
+ the Cc: line ("blind" carbon copy).
+
+ ~\b~c\bc name ... Add the given names to the list of carbon copy
+ recipients.
+
+ ~\b~d\bd Read the file ``dead.letter'' from your home
+ directory into the message.
+
+ ~\b~e\be Invoke the text editor on the message collected
+ so far. After the editing session is finished,
+ you may continue appending text to the message.
+
+ ~\b~f\bf messages Read the named messages into the message being
+ sent. If no messages are specified, read in the
+ current message.
+
+ ~\b~h\bh Edit the message header fields by typing each
+ one in turn and allowing the user to append text
+ to the end or modify the field by using the
+ current terminal erase and kill characters.
+
+ ~\b~m\bm messages Read the named messages into the message being
+ sent, shifted right one tab. If no messages are
+ specified, read the current message.
+
+ ~\b~p\bp Print out the message collected so far, prefaced
+ by the message header fields.
+
+ ~\b~q\bq Abort the message being sent, copying the mes-
+ sage to ``dead.letter'' in your home directory
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ if s\bsa\bav\bve\be is set.
+
+ ~\b~r\br filename Read the named file into the message.
+
+ ~\b~s\bs string Cause the named string to become the current
+ subject field.
+
+ ~\b~t\bt name ... Add the given names to the direct recipient
+ list.
+
+ ~\b~v\bv Invoke an alternate editor (defined by the
+ VISUAL option) on the message collected so far.
+ Usually, the alternate editor will be a screen
+ editor. After you quit the editor, you may
+ resume appending text to the end of your mes-
+ sage.
+
+ ~\b~w\bw filename Write the message onto the named file.
+
+ ~\b~|\b|command Pipe the message through the command as a
+ filter. If the command gives no output or ter-
+ minates abnormally, retain the original text of
+ the message. The command _\bf_\bm_\bt(1) is often used
+ as _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd to rejustify the message.
+
+ ~\b~~\b~string Insert the string of text in the message pre-
+ faced by a single ~. If you have changed the
+ escape character, then you should double that
+ character in order to send it.
+
+ Options are controlled via the s\bse\bet\bt and u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bt commands.
+ Options may be either binary, in which case it is only sig-
+ nificant to see whether they are set or not; or string, in
+ which case the actual value is of interest. The binary
+ options include the following:
+
+ a\bap\bpp\bpe\ben\bnd\bd Causes messages saved in _\bm_\bb_\bo_\bx to be appended
+ to the end rather than prepended. (This is
+ set in /usr/lib/Mail.rc on version 7 sys-
+ tems.)
+
+ a\bas\bsk\bk Causes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl to prompt you for the subject of
+ each message you send. If you respond with
+ simply a newline, no subject field will be
+ sent.
+
+ a\bas\bsk\bkc\bcc\bc Causes you to be prompted for additional car-
+ bon copy recipients at the end of each mes-
+ sage. Responding with a newline indicates
+ your satisfaction with the current list.
+
+ a\bau\but\bto\bop\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt Causes the d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be command to behave like d\bdp\bp -
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ thus, after deleting a message, the next one
+ will be typed automatically.
+
+ d\bde\beb\bbu\bug\bg Setting the binary option _\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg is the same
+ as specifying -\b-d\bd on the command line and
+ causes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl to output all sorts of informa-
+ tion useful for debugging _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl.
+
+ d\bdo\bot\bt The binary option _\bd_\bo_\bt causes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl to inter-
+ pret a period alone on a line as the termina-
+ tor of a message you are sending.
+
+ h\bho\bol\bld\bd This option is used to hold messages in the
+ system mailbox by default.
+
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\be Causes interrupt signals from your terminal
+ to be ignored and echoed as @'s.
+
+ i\big\bgn\bno\bor\bre\bee\beo\bof\bf An option related to _\bd_\bo_\bt is _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\be_\bo_\bf which
+ makes _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl refuse to accept a control-d as
+ the end of a message. _\bI_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be_\be_\bo_\bf also applies
+ to _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl command mode.
+
+ m\bme\bet\bto\boo\bo Usually, when a group is expanded that con-
+ tains the sender, the sender is removed from
+ the expansion. Setting this option causes
+ the sender to be included in the group.
+
+ n\bno\bos\bsa\bav\bve\be Normally, when you abort a message with two
+ RUBOUT, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl copies the partial letter to the
+ file ``dead.letter'' in your home directory.
+ Setting the binary option _\bn_\bo_\bs_\ba_\bv_\be prevents
+ this.
+
+ R\bRe\bep\bpl\bly\bya\bal\bll\bl Reverses the sense of _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\by and _\bR_\be_\bp_\bl_\by com-
+ mands.
+
+ q\bqu\bui\bie\bet\bt Suppresses the printing of the version when
+ first invoked.
+
+ v\bve\ber\brb\bbo\bos\bse\be Setting the option _\bv_\be_\br_\bb_\bo_\bs_\be is the same as
+ using the -\b-v\bv flag on the command line. When
+ mail runs in verbose mode, the actual
+ delivery of messages is displayed on he users
+ terminal.
+
+ The following options have string values:
+
+ EDITOR Pathname of the text editor to use in the
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt command and ~e escape. If not defined,
+ then a default editor is used.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 9
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ PAGER Pathname of the program to use in the m\bmo\bor\bre\be
+ command or when _\bc_\br_\bt variable is set. A
+ default paginator is used if this option is
+ not defined.
+
+ SHELL Pathname of the shell to use in the !\b! command
+ and the ~! escape. A default shell is used
+ if this option is not defined.
+
+ VISUAL Pathname of the text editor to use in the
+ v\bvi\bis\bsu\bua\bal\bl command and ~v escape.
+
+ c\bcr\brt\bt The valued option _\bc_\br_\bt is used as a threshold
+ to determine how long a message must be
+ before P\bPA\bAG\bGE\bER\bR is used to read it.
+
+ e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be If defined, the first character of this
+ option gives the character to use in the
+ place of ~ to denote escapes.
+
+ f\bfo\bol\bld\bde\ber\br The name of the directory to use for storing
+ folders of messages. If this name begins with
+ a `/', _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl considers it to be an absolute
+ pathname; otherwise, the folder directory is
+ found relative to your home directory.
+
+ r\bre\bec\bco\bor\brd\bd If defined, gives the pathname of the file
+ used to record all outgoing mail. If not
+ defined, then outgoing mail is not so saved.
+
+ t\bto\bop\bpl\bli\bin\bne\bes\bs If defined, gives the number of lines of a
+ message to be printed out with the t\bto\bop\bp com-
+ mand; normally, the first five lines are
+ printed.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/mail/* post office
+ ~/mbox your old mail
+ ~/.mailrc file giving initial mail commands
+ /tmp/R# temporary for editor escape
+ /usr/lib/Mail.help* help files
+ /usr/lib/Mail.rc system initialization file
+ Message* temporary for editing messages
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ binmail(1), fmt(1), newaliases(1), aliases(5),
+ mailaddr(7), sendmail(8)
+ `The Mail Reference Manual'
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ There are many flags that are not documented here. Most are
+ not useful to the general user.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 10
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAIL(1)
+
+
+
+ Usually, _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl is just a link to _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl, which can be confus-
+ ing.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Kurt Shoens
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 11
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MAKE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAKE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ make - maintain program groups
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bma\bak\bke\be [ -\b-f\bf makefile ] [ option ] ... file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\ba_\bk_\be executes commands in _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be to update one or more
+ target _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be_\bs. _\bN_\ba_\bm_\be is typically a program. If no -\b-f\bf option
+ is present, `makefile' and `Makefile' are tried in order.
+ If _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is `-', the standard input is taken. More than
+ one -\b-f\bf option may appear.
+
+ _\bM_\ba_\bk_\be updates a target if it depends on prerequisite files
+ that have been modified since the target was last modified,
+ or if the target does not exist.
+
+ _\bM_\ba_\bk_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be contains a sequence of entries that specify depen-
+ dencies. The first line of an entry is a blank-separated
+ list of targets, then a colon, then a list of prerequisite
+ files. Text following a semicolon, and all following lines
+ that begin with a tab, are shell commands to be executed to
+ update the target. If a name appears on the left of more
+ than one `colon' line, then it depends on all of the names
+ on the right of the colon on those lines, but only one com-
+ mand sequence may be specified for it. If a name appears on
+ a line with a double colon :\b::\b: then the command sequence fol-
+ lowing that line is performed only if the name is out of
+ date with respect to the names to the right of the double
+ colon, and is not affected by other double colon lines on
+ which that name may appear.
+
+ Two special forms of a name are recognized. A name like
+ _\ba(_\bb) means the file named _\bb stored in the archive named _\ba. A
+ name like _\ba((_\bb)) means the file stored in archive _\ba contain-
+ ing the entry point _\bb.
+
+ Sharp and newline surround comments.
+
+ The following makefile says that `pgm' depends on two files
+ `a.o' and `b.o', and that they in turn depend on `.c' files
+ and a common file `incl'.
+
+ pgm: a.o b.o
+ cc a.o b.o -lm -o pgm
+ a.o: incl a.c
+ cc -c a.c
+ b.o: incl b.c
+ cc -c b.c
+
+ _\bM_\ba_\bk_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be entries of the form
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 August 24, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAKE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAKE(1)
+
+
+
+ string1 = string2
+
+ are macro definitions. Subsequent appearances of $(_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1)
+ or ${_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1} are replaced by _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b2. If _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1 is a sin-
+ gle character, the parentheses or braces are optional.
+
+ _\bM_\ba_\bk_\be infers prerequisites for files for which _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be gives
+ no construction commands. For example, a `.c' file may be
+ inferred as prerequisite for a `.o' file and be compiled to
+ produce the `.o' file. Thus the preceding example can be
+ done more briefly:
+
+ pgm: a.o b.o
+ cc a.o b.o -lm -o pgm
+ a.o b.o: incl
+
+ Prerequisites are inferred according to selected suffixes
+ listed as the `prerequisites' for the special name `.SUF-
+ FIXES'; multiple lists accumulate; an empty list clears what
+ came before. Order is significant; the first possible name
+ for which both a file and a rule as described in the next
+ paragraph exist is inferred. The default list is
+
+ .SUFFIXES: .out .o .c .e .r .f .y .l .s .p
+
+ The rule to create a file with suffix _\bs_\b2 that depends on a
+ similarly named file with suffix _\bs_\b1 is specified as an entry
+ for the `target' _\bs_\b1_\bs_\b2. In such an entry, the special macro
+ $* stands for the target name with suffix deleted, $@ for
+ the full target name, $< for the complete list of prere-
+ quisites, and $? for the list of prerequisites that are out
+ of date. For example, a rule for making optimized `.o'
+ files from `.c' files is
+
+ .c.o: ; cc -c -O -o $@ $*.c
+
+ Certain macros are used by the default inference rules to
+ communicate optional arguments to any resulting compila-
+ tions. In particular, `CFLAGS' is used for _\bc_\bc(1) options,
+ `FFLAGS' for _\bf_\b7_\b7(1) options, `PFLAGS' for _\bp_\bc(1) options, and
+ `LFLAGS' and `YFLAGS' for _\bl_\be_\bx and _\by_\ba_\bc_\bc(1) options. In addi-
+ tion, the macro `MFLAGS' is filled in with the initial com-
+ mand line options supplied to _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be. This simplifies main-
+ taining a hierarchy of makefiles as one may then invoke _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be
+ on makefiles in subdirectories and pass along useful options
+ such as -\b-k\bk.
+
+ The environment is read by _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be. All variables are assumed
+ to be macro definitions and processed as such. The environ-
+ mental variables are processed before any makefile and after
+ the internal rules; thus, macro assignments in a makefile
+ override environmental variables. The -\b-e\be option causes the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 August 24, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAKE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAKE(1)
+
+
+
+ environment to override the macro assignments in a makefile.
+ As with macro assignments, environmental variables are
+ always overriden by the command line.
+
+ Another special macro is `VPATH'. The `VPATH' macro should
+ be set to a list of directories separated by colons. When
+ _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be searches for a file as a result of a dependency rela-
+ tion, it will first search the current directory and then
+ each of the directories on the `VPATH' list. If the file is
+ found, the actual path to the file will be used, rather than
+ just the filename. If `VPATH' is not defined, then only the
+ current directory is searched.
+
+ One use for `VPATH' is when one has several programs that
+ compile from the same source. The source can be kept in one
+ directory and each set of object files (along with a
+ separate _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be) would be in a separate subdirectory. The
+ `VPATH' macro would point to the source directory in this
+ case.
+
+ Command lines are executed one at a time, each by its own
+ shell. A line is printed when it is executed unless the
+ special target `.SILENT' is in _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be, or the first char-
+ acter of the command is `@'.
+
+ Commands returning nonzero status (see _\bi_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo(1)) cause _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be
+ to terminate unless the special target `.IGNORE' is in
+ _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be or the command begins with <tab><hyphen>.
+
+ Interrupt and quit cause the target to be deleted unless the
+ target is a directory or depends on the special name `.PRE-
+ CIOUS'.
+
+ Other options:
+
+ -\b-e\be Environmental variables override assignments within
+ makefiles.
+
+ -\b-i\bi Equivalent to the special entry `.IGNORE:'.
+
+ -\b-k\bk When a command returns nonzero status, abandon work on
+ the current entry, but continue on branches that do not
+ depend on the current entry.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Trace and print, but do not execute the commands needed
+ to update the targets.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Touch, i.e. update the modified date of targets,
+ without executing any commands.
+
+ -\b-r\br Equivalent to an initial special entry `.SUFFIXES:'
+ with no list.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 August 24, 1987 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAKE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAKE(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-s\bs Equivalent to the special entry `.SILENT:'.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ makefile, Makefile
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1), touch(1), f77(1), pc(1), getenv(3)
+ S. I. Feldman _\bM_\ba_\bk_\be - _\bA _\bP_\br_\bo_\bg_\br_\ba_\bm _\bf_\bo_\br _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bn_\bt_\ba_\bi_\bn_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bu_\bt_\be_\br _\bP_\br_\bo_\b-
+ _\bg_\br_\ba_\bm_\bs
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Some commands return nonzero status inappropriately. Use -\b-i\bi
+ to overcome the difficulty.
+ Commands that are directly executed by the shell, notably
+ _\bc_\bd(1), are ineffectual across newlines in _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be.
+
+ `VPATH' is intended to act like the System V `VPATH' sup-
+ port, but there is no guarantee that it functions identi-
+ cally.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 August 24, 1987 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MAN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAN(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ man - print out the manual
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bma\ban\bn [ -\b- ] [ -\b-a\ba ] [ -\b-M\bM _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh ] [ section ] title ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\ba_\bn is the program which provides on-line access to the UNIX
+ manual. If a _\bs_\be_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn specifier is given, _\bm_\ba_\bn looks in that
+ section of the manual for the given _\bt_\bi_\bt_\bl_\be(s). _\bS_\be_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn is
+ either an Arabic section number (``3'' for example), or one
+ of the words ``local'', ``new,'' or ``old''. (The abbrevia-
+ tions ``l'', ``n'', and ``o'' are also allowed.) If _\bs_\be_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ is omitted, _\bm_\ba_\bn searches all sections of the manual, giving
+ preference to commands over library subroutines, and
+ displays the first manual page it finds, if any. If the -_\ba
+ option is supplied, _\bm_\ba_\bn displays all applicable manual
+ pages.
+
+ Normally _\bm_\ba_\bn checks in standard locations (/usr/man and
+ /usr/local/man) for manual information. This can be changed
+ by supplying a search path (a la the Bourne shell) with the
+ -\b-M\bM flag. The search path is a colon (``:'') separated list
+ of directories in which _\bm_\ba_\bn expects to find the standard
+ manual subdirectories. This search path can also be set
+ with the environmental variable _\bM_\bA_\bN_\bP_\bA_\bT_\bH.
+
+ Since some manual pages are intended for use only on certain
+ machines, _\bm_\ba_\bn only searches those directories applicable to
+ the current machine. _\bM_\ba_\bn's determination of the current
+ machine type can be overridden by setting the environmental
+ variable _\bM_\bA_\bC_\bH_\bI_\bN_\bE.
+
+ If the standard output is a teletype, and the -\b- flag is not
+ provided, _\bm_\ba_\bn uses _\bm_\bo_\br_\be(1), or the pager provided by the
+ environmental variable _\bP_\bA_\bG_\bE_\bR, to display the manual page.
+
+ The FORTRAN version of section 3 of the manual may be speci-
+ fied by supplying _\bm_\ba_\bn with the _\bs_\be_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn ``3f''. Also, a
+ specific section of the local manual may be specified by
+ appending a number to the _\bs_\be_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn, i.e. ``l5'' would indi-
+ cate section 5 of the local manual.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/man standard manual area
+ /usr/man/cat?/* directories containing standard manual pages
+ /usr/local/man/cat?/* directories containing local manual pages
+ /usr/src/man directories containing unformatted manual pages
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ apropos(1), more(1), whatis(1), whereis(1)
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 19, 1988 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MAN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MAN(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The manual is supposed to be reproducible either on the pho-
+ totypesetter or on a typewriter, however, on a typewriter,
+ some information is necessarily lost.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 19, 1988 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MESG(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MESG(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ mesg - permit or deny messages
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bme\bes\bsg\bg [ n\bn ] [ y\by ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\be_\bs_\bg with argument n\bn forbids messages via _\bw_\br_\bi_\bt_\be and _\bt_\ba_\bl_\bk by
+ revoking non-user write permission on the user's terminal.
+ _\bM_\be_\bs_\bg with argument y\by reinstates permission. _\bM_\be_\bs_\bg without
+ arguments reports the current state without changing it.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /dev/tty*
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ write(1), talk(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Exit status is 0 if messages are receivable, 1 if not, -1 on
+ error.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MKDEP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MKDEP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ mkdep - construct Makefile dependency list
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bmk\bkd\bde\bep\bp [ -\b-f\bf m\bma\bak\bke\bef\bfi\bil\ble\be ] [ -\b-p\bp ] [ flags ] file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\bk_\bd_\be_\bp takes a set of flags for the C compiler and a list of
+ C source files as arguments and constructs a set of include
+ file dependencies. It attaches this dependency list to the
+ end of the file ``Makefile''. An example of its use in a
+ makefile might be:
+
+ CFLAGS= -O -I../include -I.
+ SRCS= file1.c file2.c
+
+ depend:
+ mkdep ${CFLAGS} ${SRCS}
+
+ where the macro SRCS is the list of C source files and the macro
+ CFLAGS is the list of flags for the C compiler. The -\b-f\bf option
+ provides _\bm_\bk_\bd_\be_\bp with a name other than ``Makefile'' to be edited.
+ If the -\b-p\bp option is provided, _\bm_\bk_\bd_\be_\bp produces dependencies
+ of the form ``program: program.c'' so that subsequent makes will
+ produce _\bp_\br_\bo_\bg_\br_\ba_\bm directly from its C module rather than using an
+ intermediate ._\bo module. This is useful in directories that
+ contain many programs, each of whose source is contained in a single
+ C module.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cc(1), make(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MKDIR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MKDIR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ mkdir - make a directory
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bmk\bkd\bdi\bir\br dirname ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\bk_\bd_\bi_\br creates specified directories in mode 777. Standard
+ entries, `.\b.', for the directory itself, and `\b`..'\b' for its
+ parent, are made automatically.
+
+ _\bM_\bk_\bd_\bi_\br requires write permission in the parent directory.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ rmdir(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MKSTR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MKSTR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ mkstr - create an error message file by massaging C source
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bmk\bks\bst\btr\br [ -\b- ] messagefile prefix file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\bk_\bs_\bt_\br is used to create files of error messages. Its use
+ can make programs with large numbers of error diagnostics
+ much smaller, and reduce system overhead in running the pro-
+ gram as the error messages do not have to be constantly
+ swapped in and out.
+
+ _\bM_\bk_\bs_\bt_\br will process each of the specified _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs, placing a
+ massaged version of the input file in a file whose name con-
+ sists of the specified _\bp_\br_\be_\bf_\bi_\bx and the original name. A typ-
+ ical usage of _\bm_\bk_\bs_\bt_\br would be
+
+ mkstr pistrings xx *.c
+
+ This command would cause all the error messages from the C
+ source files in the current directory to be placed in the
+ file _\bp_\bi_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs and processed copies of the source for these
+ files to be placed in files whose names are prefixed with
+ _\bx_\bx.
+
+ To process the error messages in the source to the message
+ file _\bm_\bk_\bs_\bt_\br keys on the string `error("' in the input stream.
+ Each time it occurs, the C string starting at the `"' is
+ placed in the message file followed by a null character and
+ a new-line character; the null character terminates the mes-
+ sage so it can be easily used when retrieved, the new-line
+ character makes it possible to sensibly _\bc_\ba_\bt the error mes-
+ sage file to see its contents. The massaged copy of the
+ input file then contains a _\bl_\bs_\be_\be_\bk pointer into the file which
+ can be used to retrieve the message, i.e.:
+
+
+ c\bch\bha\bar\br efilname[] = "/usr/lib/pi_strings";
+ i\bin\bnt\bt efil = -1;
+
+ error(a1, a2, a3, a4)
+ {
+ c\bch\bha\bar\br buf[256];
+
+ i\bif\bf (efil < 0) {
+ efil = open(efilname, 0);
+ i\bif\bf (efil < 0) {
+ oops:
+ perror(efilname);
+ exit(1);
+ }
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MKSTR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MKSTR(1)
+
+
+
+ }
+ i\bif\bf (lseek(efil, (long) a1, 0) || read(efil, buf, 256) <= 0)
+ g\bgo\bot\bto\bo oops;
+ printf(buf, a2, a3, a4);
+ }
+
+ The optional -\b- causes the error messages to be placed at the
+ end of the specified message file for recompiling part of a
+ large _\bm_\bk_\bs_\bt_\bred program.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lseek(2), xstr(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ more, page - file perusal filter for crt viewing
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bmo\bor\bre\be [ -\b-c\bcd\bdf\bfl\bls\bsu\bu ] [ -\b-_\bn ] [ +\b+_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br ] [ +\b+/\b/_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn ] [ name
+ ... ]
+
+ p\bpa\bag\bge\be _\bm_\bo_\br_\be _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\bo_\br_\be is a filter which allows examination of a continuous
+ text one screenful at a time on a soft-copy terminal. It
+ normally pauses after each screenful, printing --More-- at
+ the bottom of the screen. If the user then types a carriage
+ return, one more line is displayed. If the user hits a
+ space, another screenful is displayed. Other possibilities
+ are enumerated later.
+
+ The command line options are:
+
+ -_\bn An integer which is the size (in lines) of the window
+ which _\bm_\bo_\br_\be will use instead of the default.
+
+ -\b-c\bc _\bM_\bo_\br_\be will draw each page by beginning at the top of the
+ screen and erasing each line just before it draws on
+ it. This avoids scrolling the screen, making it easier
+ to read while _\bm_\bo_\br_\be is writing. This option will be
+ ignored if the terminal does not have the ability to
+ clear to the end of a line.
+
+ -\b-d\bd _\bM_\bo_\br_\be will prompt the user with the message "Press space
+ to continue, 'q' to quit." at the end of each screen-
+ ful, and will respond to subsequent illegal user input
+ by printing "Press 'h' for instructions." instead of
+ ringing the bell. This is useful if _\bm_\bo_\br_\be is being used
+ as a filter in some setting, such as a class, where
+ many users may be unsophisticated.
+
+ -\b-f\bf This causes _\bm_\bo_\br_\be to count logical, rather than screen
+ lines. That is, long lines are not folded. This
+ option is recommended if _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf output is being piped
+ through _\bu_\bl, since the latter may generate escape
+ sequences. These escape sequences contain characters
+ which would ordinarily occupy screen positions, but
+ which do not print when they are sent to the terminal
+ as part of an escape sequence. Thus _\bm_\bo_\br_\be may think
+ that lines are longer than they actually are, and fold
+ lines erroneously.
+
+ -\b-l\bl Do not treat ^L (form feed) specially. If this option
+ is not given, _\bm_\bo_\br_\be will pause after any line that con-
+ tains a ^L, as if the end of a screenful had been
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+ reached. Also, if a file begins with a form feed, the
+ screen will be cleared before the file is printed.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Squeeze multiple blank lines from the output, producing
+ only one blank line. Especially helpful when viewing
+ _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf output, this option maximizes the useful informa-
+ tion present on the screen.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Normally, _\bm_\bo_\br_\be will handle underlining such as produced
+ by _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf in a manner appropriate to the particular ter-
+ minal: if the terminal can perform underlining or has
+ a stand-out mode, _\bm_\bo_\br_\be will output appropriate escape
+ sequences to enable underlining or stand-out mode for
+ underlined information in the source file. The -_\bu
+ option suppresses this processing.
+
+ +\b+_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br
+ Start up at _\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br.
+
+ +\b+/\b/_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn
+ Start up two lines before the line containing the regu-
+ lar expression _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn.
+
+ If the program is invoked as _\bp_\ba_\bg_\be, then the screen is
+ cleared before each screenful is printed (but only if a full
+ screenful is being printed), and _\bk - 1 rather than _\bk - 2
+ lines are printed in each screenful, where _\bk is the number
+ of lines the terminal can display.
+
+ _\bM_\bo_\br_\be looks in the file /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp to determine terminal
+ characteristics, and to determine the default window size.
+ On a terminal capable of displaying 24 lines, the default
+ window size is 22 lines.
+
+ _\bM_\bo_\br_\be looks in the environment variable _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE to pre-set any
+ flags desired. For example, if you prefer to view files
+ using the -_\bc mode of operation, the _\bc_\bs_\bh command _\bs_\be_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE
+ -_\bc or the _\bs_\bh command sequence _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE='-_\bc' ; _\be_\bx_\bp_\bo_\br_\bt _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE would
+ cause all invocations of _\bm_\bo_\br_\be , including invocations by
+ programs such as _\bm_\ba_\bn and _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs , to use this mode. Normally,
+ the user will place the command sequence which sets up the
+ _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE environment variable in the ._\bc_\bs_\bh_\br_\bc or ._\bp_\br_\bo_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be file.
+
+ If _\bm_\bo_\br_\be is reading from a file, rather than a pipe, then a
+ percentage is displayed along with the --More-- prompt.
+ This gives the fraction of the file (in characters, not
+ lines) that has been read so far.
+
+ Other sequences which may be typed when _\bm_\bo_\br_\be pauses, and
+ their effects, are as follows (_\bi is an optional integer
+ argument, defaulting to 1) :
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bi<space>
+ display _\bi more lines, (or another screenful if no argu-
+ ment is given)
+
+ ^D display 11 more lines (a ``scroll''). If _\bi is given,
+ then the scroll size is set to _\bi.
+
+ d same as ^D (control-D)
+
+ _\biz same as typing a space except that _\bi, if present,
+ becomes the new window size.
+
+ _\bis skip _\bi lines and print a screenful of lines
+
+ _\bif skip _\bi screenfuls and print a screenful of lines
+
+ _\bib skip back _\bi screenfuls and print a screenful of lines
+
+ _\bi^B same as b
+
+ q or Q
+ Exit from _\bm_\bo_\br_\be.
+
+ = Display the current line number.
+
+ v Start up the editor _\bv_\bi at the current line.
+
+ h Help command; give a description of all the _\bm_\bo_\br_\be com-
+ mands.
+
+ _\bi/expr
+ search for the _\bi-th occurrence of the regular expres-
+ sion _\be_\bx_\bp_\br. If there are less than _\bi occurrences of
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br, and the input is a file (rather than a pipe),
+ then the position in the file remains unchanged. Oth-
+ erwise, a screenful is displayed, starting two lines
+ before the place where the expression was found. The
+ user's erase and kill characters may be used to edit
+ the regular expression. Erasing back past the first
+ column cancels the search command.
+
+ _\bin search for the _\bi-th occurrence of the last regular
+ expression entered.
+
+ ' (single quote) Go to the point from which the last
+ search started. If no search has been performed in the
+ current file, this command goes back to the beginning
+ of the file.
+
+ !command
+ invoke a shell with _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd. The characters `%' and `!'
+ in "command" are replaced with the current file name
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+ and the previous shell command respectively. If there
+ is no current file name, `%' is not expanded. The
+ sequences "\%" and "\!" are replaced by "%" and "!"
+ respectively.
+
+ _\bi:n skip to the _\bi-th next file given in the command line
+ (skips to last file if n doesn't make sense)
+
+ _\bi:p skip to the _\bi-th previous file given in the command
+ line. If this command is given in the middle of print-
+ ing out a file, then _\bm_\bo_\br_\be goes back to the beginning of
+ the file. If _\bi doesn't make sense, _\bm_\bo_\br_\be skips back to
+ the first file. If _\bm_\bo_\br_\be is not reading from a file,
+ the bell is rung and nothing else happens.
+
+ :f display the current file name and line number.
+
+ :q or :Q
+ exit from _\bm_\bo_\br_\be (same as q or Q).
+
+ . (dot) repeat the previous command.
+
+ The commands take effect immediately, i.e., it is not neces-
+ sary to type a carriage return. Up to the time when the
+ command character itself is given, the user may hit the line
+ kill character to cancel the numerical argument being
+ formed. In addition, the user may hit the erase character
+ to redisplay the --More--(xx%) message.
+
+ At any time when output is being sent to the terminal, the
+ user can hit the quit key (normally control-\). _\bM_\bo_\br_\be will
+ stop sending output, and will display the usual --More--
+ prompt. The user may then enter one of the above commands
+ in the normal manner. Unfortunately, some output is lost
+ when this is done, due to the fact that any characters wait-
+ ing in the terminal's output queue are flushed when the quit
+ signal occurs.
+
+ The terminal is set to _\bn_\bo_\be_\bc_\bh_\bo mode by this program so that
+ the output can be continuous. What you type will thus not
+ show on your terminal, except for the / and ! commands.
+
+ If the standard output is not a teletype, then _\bm_\bo_\br_\be acts
+ just like _\bc_\ba_\bt, except that a header is printed before each
+ file (if there is more than one).
+
+ A sample usage of _\bm_\bo_\br_\be in previewing _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf output would be
+
+ nroff -ms +2 doc.n | more -s
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/termcap Terminal data base
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+ /usr/lib/more.help Help file
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), man(1), msgs(1), script(1), sh(1), environ(7)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Skipping backwards is too slow on large files.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MSET(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ mset - retrieve ASCII to IBM 3270 keyboard map
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bms\bse\bet\bt
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\bs_\be_\bt retrieves mapping information for the ASCII keyboard to
+ IBM 3270 terminal special functions. Normally, these map-
+ pings are found in /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bm_\ba_\bp_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 (see _\bm_\ba_\bp_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0(5)). This
+ information is used by the _\bt_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 command (see _\bt_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0(1)).
+
+ _\bM_\bs_\be_\bt can be used store the mapping information in the pro-
+ cess environment in order to avoid scanning /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bm_\ba_\bp_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0
+ each time _\bt_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 is invoked. To do this, place the follow-
+ ing command in your ._\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn file:
+
+ set noglob; setenv MAP3270 "`mset`"; unset noglob
+
+ _\bM_\bs_\be_\bt first determines the user's terminal type from the
+ environment variable T\bTE\bER\bRM\bM. Normally _\bm_\bs_\be_\bt then uses the file
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bm_\ba_\bp_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 to find the keyboard mapping for that terminal.
+ However, if the environment variable M\bMA\bAP\bP3\b32\b27\b70\b0 exists and con-
+ tains the entry for the specified terminal, then that defin-
+ ition is used. If the value of M\bMA\bAP\bP3\b32\b27\b70\b0 begins with a slash
+ (`/') then it is assumed to be the full pathname of an
+ alternate mapping file and that file is searched first. In
+ any case, if the mapping for the terminal is not found in
+ the environment, nor in an alternate map file, nor in the
+ standard map file, then the same search is performed for an
+ entry for a terminal type of u\bun\bnk\bkn\bno\bow\bwn\bn.\b. If that search also
+ fails, then a default mapping is used.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/map3270 keyboard mapping for known terminals
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ tn3270(1), map3270(5)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If the entry for the specific terminal exceeds 1024 bytes,
+ _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) will fail to set the environment variable. _\bM_\bs_\be_\bt
+ should probably detect this case and output the path to the
+ _\bm_\ba_\bp_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 file instead of the terminal entry.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 11, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MSGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MSGS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ msgs - system messages and junk mail program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bms\bsg\bgs\bs [ -\b-f\bfh\bhl\blp\bpq\bq ] [ number ] [ -number ]
+
+ m\bms\bsg\bgs\bs -\b-s\bs
+
+ m\bms\bsg\bgs\bs -\b-c\bc [ -days ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\bs_\bg_\bs is used to read system messages. These messages are
+ sent by mailing to the login `msgs' and should be short
+ pieces of information which are suitable to be read once by
+ most users of the system.
+
+ _\bM_\bs_\bg_\bs is normally invoked each time you login, by placing it
+ in the file ._\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn (._\bp_\br_\bo_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be if you use /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bs_\bh). It will
+ then prompt you with the source and subject of each new mes-
+ sage. If there is no subject line, the first few non-blank
+ lines of the message will be displayed. If there is more to
+ the message, you will be told how long it is and asked
+ whether you wish to see the rest of the message. The possi-
+ ble responses are:
+
+ y\by type the rest of the message.
+
+ RETURN synonym for y.
+
+ n\bn skip this message and go on to the next message.
+
+ -\b- redisplay the last message.
+
+ q\bq drops you out of _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs; the next time you run the pro-
+ gram it will pick up where you left off.
+
+ s\bs append the current message to the file ``Messages''
+ in the current directory; `s-' will save the previ-
+ ously displayed message. A `s' or `s-' may be fol-
+ lowed by a space and a file name to receive the mes-
+ sage replacing the default ``Messages''.
+
+ m\bm or `m-' causes a copy of the specified message to be
+ placed in a temporary mailbox and _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(1) to be
+ invoked on that mailbox. Both `m' and `s' accept a
+ numeric argument in place of the `-'.
+
+ _\bM_\bs_\bg_\bs keeps track of the next message you will see by a
+ number in the file ._\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs_\br_\bc in your home directory. In the
+ directory /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs it keeps a set of files whose names are
+ the (sequential) numbers of the messages they represent.
+ The file /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs/_\bb_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bd_\bs shows the low and high number of
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MSGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MSGS(1)
+
+
+
+ the messages in the directory so that _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs can quickly
+ determine if there are no messages for you. If the contents
+ of _\bb_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bd_\bs is incorrect it can be fixed by removing it; _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs
+ will make a new _\bb_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bd_\bs file the next time it is run.
+
+ The -\b-s\bs option is used for setting up the posting of mes-
+ sages. The line
+
+ msgs: "| /usr/ucb/msgs -s"
+
+ should be include in /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs to enable posting of
+ messages.
+
+ The -\b-c\bc option is used for performing cleanup on /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs.
+ An entry with the -\b-c\bc option should be placed in
+ /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\bc_\br_\bo_\bn_\bt_\ba_\bb to run every night. This will remove all
+ messages over 21 days old. A different expiration may be
+ specified on the command line to override the default.
+
+ Options when reading messages include:
+
+ -\b-f\bf which causes it not to say ``No new messages.''.
+ This is useful in your ._\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn file since this is
+ often the case here.
+
+ -\b-q\bq Queries whether there are messages, printing ``There
+ are new messages.'' if there are. The command ``msgs
+ -q'' is often used in login scripts.
+
+ -\b-h\bh causes _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs to print the first part of messages only.
+
+ -\b-l\bl option causes only locally originated messages to be
+ reported.
+
+ _\bn_\bu_\bm A message number can be given on the command line,
+ causing _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs to start at the specified message rather
+ than at the next message indicated by your ._\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs_\br_\bc
+ file. Thus
+
+ msgs -h 1
+
+ prints the first part of all messages.
+
+ -_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br
+ will cause _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs to start _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br messages back from
+ the one indicated by your ._\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs_\br_\bc file, useful for
+ reviews of recent messages.
+
+ -\b-p\bp causes long messages to be piped through _\bm_\bo_\br_\be(1).
+
+ Within _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs you can also go to any specific message by typ-
+ ing its number when _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs requests input as to what to do.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MSGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MSGS(1)
+
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/msgs/* database
+ ~/.msgsrc number of next message to be presented
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bRS\bS
+ William Joy
+ David Wasley
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ aliases(5), crontab(5), mail(1), more(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ mt - magnetic tape manipulating program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bmt\bt [ -\b-f\bf _\bt_\ba_\bp_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ] _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd [ _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\bt is used to give commands to a magnetic tape drive. If a
+ tape name is not specified, the environment variable TAPE is
+ used; if TAPE does not exist, _\bm_\bt uses the device
+ /_\bd_\be_\bv/_\br_\bm_\bt_\b1_\b2. Note that _\bt_\ba_\bp_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be must reference a raw (not
+ block) tape device. By default _\bm_\bt performs the requested
+ operation once. Operations may be performed multiple times
+ by specifying _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt.
+
+ The available commands are listed below. Only as many char-
+ acters as are required to uniquely identify a command need
+ be specified.
+
+ e\beo\bof\bf, w\bwe\beo\bof\bf
+ Write _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt end-of-file marks at the current position
+ on the tape.
+
+ f\bfs\bsf\bf Forward space _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt files.
+
+ f\bfs\bsr\br Forward space _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt records.
+
+ b\bbs\bsf\bf Back space _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt files.
+
+ b\bbs\bsr\br Back space _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt records.
+
+ r\bre\bew\bwi\bin\bnd\bd
+ Rewind the tape (_\bC_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is ignored).
+
+ o\bof\bff\bfl\bli\bin\bne\be, r\bre\bew\bwo\bof\bff\bfl\bl
+ Rewind the tape and place the tape unit off-line (_\bC_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt
+ is ignored).
+
+ s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs
+ Print status information about the tape unit.
+
+ _\bM_\bt returns a 0 exit status when the operation(s) were suc-
+ cessful, 1 if the command was unrecognized, and 2 if an
+ operation failed.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /dev/rmt* Raw magnetic tape interface
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mtio(4), dd(1), ioctl(2), environ(7)
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MV(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MV(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ mv - move or rename files
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bmv\bv [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b- ] file1 file2
+
+ m\bmv\bv [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b- ] file ... directory
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\bv moves (changes the name of) _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 to _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2.
+
+ If _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 already exists, it is removed before _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 is
+ moved. If _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 has a mode which forbids writing, _\bm_\bv prints
+ the mode (see _\bc_\bh_\bm_\bo_\bd(2)) and reads the standard input to
+ obtain a line; if the line begins with y\by,\b, the move takes
+ place; if not, _\bm_\bv exits.
+
+ In the second form, one or more _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs (plain files or direc-
+ tories) are moved to the _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by with their original
+ file-names.
+
+ _\bM_\bv refuses to move a file onto itself.
+
+ Options:
+
+ -\b-i\bi stands for interactive mode. Whenever a move is to
+ supercede an existing file, the user is prompted by the
+ name of the file followed by a question mark. If he
+ answers with a line starting with 'y', the move contin-
+ ues. Any other reply prevents the move from occurring.
+
+ -\b-f\bf stands for force. This option overrides any mode res-
+ trictions or the -i switch.
+
+ -\b- means interpret all the following arguments to _\bm_\bv as
+ file names. This allows file names starting with
+ minus.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cp(1), ln(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 and _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 lie on different file systems, _\bm_\bv must
+ copy the file and delete the original. In this case the
+ owner name becomes that of the copying process and any link-
+ ing relationship with other files is lost.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ eqn, neqn, checkeq - typeset mathematics
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\beq\bqn\bn [ -\b-d\bdxy ] [ -\b-p\bpn ] [ -\b-s\bsn ] [ -\b-f\bfn ] [ file ] ...
+ c\bch\bhe\bec\bck\bke\beq\bq [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bq_\bn is a troff(1) preprocessor for typesetting mathematics
+ on a Graphic Systems phototypesetter, _\bn_\be_\bq_\bn on terminals.
+ Usage is almost always
+
+ eqn file ... | troff
+ neqn file ... | nroff
+
+ If no files are specified, these programs reads from the
+ standard input. A line beginning with `.EQ' marks the start
+ of an equation; the end of an equation is marked by a line
+ beginning with `.EN'. Neither of these lines is altered, so
+ they may be defined in macro packages to get centering,
+ numbering, etc. It is also possible to set two characters
+ as `delimiters'; subsequent text between delimiters is also
+ treated as _\be_\bq_\bn input. Delimiters may be set to characters _\bx
+ and _\by with the command-line argument -\b-d\bd_\bx_\by or (more commonly)
+ with `delim _\bx_\by' between .EQ and .EN. The left and right
+ delimiters may be identical. Delimiters are turned off by
+ `delim off'. All text that is neither between delimiters
+ nor between .EQ and .EN is passed through untouched.
+
+ The program _\bc_\bh_\be_\bc_\bk_\be_\bq reports missing or unbalanced delimiters
+ and .EQ/.EN pairs.
+
+ Tokens within _\be_\bq_\bn are separated by spaces, tabs, newlines,
+ braces, double quotes, tildes or circumflexes. Braces {}
+ are used for grouping; generally speaking, anywhere a single
+ character like _\bx could appear, a complicated construction
+ enclosed in braces may be used instead. Tilde ~ represents
+ a full space in the output, circumflex ^ half as much.
+
+ Subscripts and superscripts are produced with the keywords
+ s\bsu\bub\bb and s\bsu\bup\bp.\b. Thus _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi makes _\bx_\bi, _\ba _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 produces
+ _\ba_\bi
+ 2
+ , and _\be _\bs_\bu_\bp {_\bx _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 + _\by _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2} gives _\be
+ _\bx2+_\by2
+ .
+
+
+ Fractions are made with o\bov\bve\ber\br: _\ba _\bo_\bv_\be_\br _\bb yields
+ _\bb
+
+ _\ba\b_.
+
+
+ s\bsq\bqr\brt\bt makes square roots: _\b1 _\bo_\bv_\be_\br _\bs_\bq_\br_\bt {_\ba_\bx _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 +_\bb_\bx+_\bc}
+
+ results in
+ v\b/~~~~~~~~\b\b\b\b\b\b\b\b_\ba_\bx
+ 2
+ +_\bb_\bx+_\bc
+
+ 1\b\b\b\b\b_________ .
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1)
+
+
+
+ The keywords f\bfr\bro\bom\bm and t\bto\bo introduce lower and upper limits on
+
+ arbitrary things:
+ _\bn->oo
+ lim
+ 0
+ _\b>\b_\b~
+ _\bn
+ _\bx_\bi is made with _\bl_\bi_\bm _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm {_\bn-> _\bi_\bn_\bf }
+
+ _\bs_\bu_\bm _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm _\b0 _\bt_\bo _\bn _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi.
+
+ Left and right brackets, braces, etc., of the right height
+ are made with l\ble\bef\bft\bt and r\bri\big\bgh\bht\bt:\b: _\bl_\be_\bf_\bt [ _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 + _\by _\bs_\bu_\bp _\b2 _\bo_\bv_\be_\br
+
+ _\ba_\bl_\bp_\bh_\ba _\br_\bi_\bg_\bh_\bt ] ~=~_\b1 produces
+ |\b
+ |\b
+ |
+ _\bx
+ 2
+ +
+ _\bo\b(
+
+ _\by
+ 2
+ __
+ |\b
+ |\b
+ |
+ = 1. The r\bri\big\bgh\bht\bt clause
+
+ is optional. Legal characters after l\ble\bef\bft\bt and r\bri\big\bgh\bht\bt are
+ braces, brackets, bars, c\bc and f\bf for ceiling and floor, and
+ "" for nothing at all (useful for a right-side-only
+ bracket).
+
+ Vertical piles of things are made with p\bpi\bil\ble\be, l\blp\bpi\bil\ble\be, c\bcp\bpi\bil\ble\be,
+
+ and r\brp\bpi\bil\ble\be: _\bp_\bi_\bl_\be {_\ba _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be _\bb _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be _\bc} produces
+ _\bc
+ _\bb
+ _\ba
+
+ . There can
+
+ be an arbitrary number of elements in a pile. l\blp\bpi\bil\ble\be left-
+ justifies, p\bpi\bil\ble\be and c\bcp\bpi\bil\ble\be center, with different vertical
+ spacing, and r\brp\bpi\bil\ble\be right justifies.
+
+ Matrices are made with m\bma\bat\btr\bri\bix\bx: _\bm_\ba_\bt_\br_\bi_\bx { _\bl_\bc_\bo_\bl { _\bx _\bs_\bu_\bb _\bi _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be
+
+ _\by _\bs_\bu_\bb _\b2 } _\bc_\bc_\bo_\bl { _\b1 _\ba_\bb_\bo_\bv_\be _\b2 } } produces
+ _\by2
+
+ _\bx_\bi
+
+
+ 2
+
+ 1
+
+ . In addition,
+
+ there is r\brc\bco\bol\bl for a right-justified column.
+
+ Diacritical marks are made with d\bdo\bot\bt, d\bdo\bot\btd\bdo\bot\bt, h\bha\bat\bt, t\bti\bil\bld\bde\be,
+ b\bba\bar\br, v\bve\bec\bc, d\bdy\bya\bad\bd, and u\bun\bnd\bde\ber\br: _\bx _\bd_\bo_\bt = _\bf(_\bt) _\bb_\ba_\br is _\bx\b.=_\bf(_\bt)\b\b\b\b~~~~, _\by
+ _\bd_\bo_\bt_\bd_\bo_\bt _\bb_\ba_\br ~=~ _\bn _\bu_\bn_\bd_\be_\br is _\by\b..\b\b~ = _\bn\b_, and _\bx _\bv_\be_\bc ~=~ _\by _\bd_\by_\ba_\bd is
+ _\bx\b->= _\by\b<-\b\b->\b.
+
+ Sizes and font can be changed with s\bsi\biz\bze\be _\bn or s\bsi\biz\bze\be +\b+\b\b\b_\b__\bn, r\bro\bom\bma\ban\bn,
+ i\bit\bta\bal\bli\bic\bc, b\bbo\bol\bld\bd, and f\bfo\bon\bnt\bt _\bn. Size and fonts can be changed glo-
+ bally in a document by g\bgs\bsi\biz\bze\be _\bn and g\bgf\bfo\bon\bnt\bt _\bn, or by the
+ command-line arguments -\b-s\bs_\bn and -\b-f\bf_\bn.
+
+ Normally subscripts and superscripts are reduced by 3 point
+ sizes from the previous size; this may be changed by the
+ command-line argument -\b-p\bp_\bn.
+
+ Successive display arguments can be lined up. Place m\bma\bar\brk\bk
+ before the desired lineup point in the first equation; place
+ l\bli\bin\bne\beu\bup\bp at the place that is to line up vertically in subse-
+ quent equations.
+
+ Shorthands may be defined or existing keywords redefined
+ with d\bde\bef\bfi\bin\bne\be: _\bd_\be_\bf_\bi_\bn_\be _\bt_\bh_\bi_\bn_\bg % _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt % defines a new
+ token called _\bt_\bh_\bi_\bn_\bg which will be replaced by _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+EQN(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EQN(1)
+
+
+
+ whenever it appears thereafter. The % may be any character
+ that does not occur in _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt.
+
+ Keywords like _\bs_\bu_\bm (_\b>\b_\b~) _\bi_\bn_\bt () _\bi_\bn_\bf (oo) and shorthands like >=
+ (>\b_) -> (->), and != (=\b/) are recognized. Greek letters are
+ spelled out in the desired case, as in _\ba_\bl_\bp_\bh_\ba or _\bG_\bA_\bM_\bM_\bA.
+ Mathematical words like sin, cos, log are made Roman
+ automatically. _\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1) four-character escapes like \(bs ()
+ can be used anywhere. Strings enclosed in double quotes
+ "..." are passed through untouched; this permits keywords to
+ be entered as text, and can be used to communicate with
+ _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf when all else fails.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ troff(1), tbl(1), ms(7), eqnchar(7)
+ B. W. Kernighan and L. L. Cherry, _\bT_\by_\bp_\be_\bs_\be_\bt_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bM_\ba_\bt_\bh_\be_\bm_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bc_\bs-
+ _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bG_\bu_\bi_\bd_\be
+ J. F. Ossanna, _\bN_\bR_\bO_\bF_\bF/_\bT_\bR_\bO_\bF_\bF _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ To embolden digits, parens, etc., it is necessary to quote
+ them, as in `bold "12.3"'.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+NETSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NETSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ netstat - show network status
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ n\bne\bet\bts\bst\bta\bat\bt [ -\b-A\bAa\ban\bn ] [ -\b-f\bf _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs__\bf_\ba_\bm_\bi_\bl_\by ] [ _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm ] [ _\bc_\bo_\br_\be ]
+ n\bne\bet\bts\bst\bta\bat\bt [ -\b-h\bhi\bim\bmn\bnr\brs\bs ] [ -\b-f\bf _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs__\bf_\ba_\bm_\bi_\bl_\by ] [ _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm ] [ _\bc_\bo_\br_\be
+ ]
+ n\bne\bet\bts\bst\bta\bat\bt [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-I\bI _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bf_\ba_\bc_\be ] _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bv_\ba_\bl [ _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm ] [ _\bc_\bo_\br_\be ]
+ n\bne\bet\bts\bst\bta\bat\bt [ -\b-p\bp _\bp_\br_\bo_\bt_\bo_\bc_\bo_\bl ] [ _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm ] [ _\bc_\bo_\br_\be ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The _\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt command symbolically displays the contents of
+ various network-related data structures. There are a number
+ of output formats, depending on the options for the informa-
+ tion presented. The first form of the command displays a
+ list of active sockets for each protocol. The second form
+ presents the contents of one of the other network data
+ structures according to the option selected. Using the
+ third form, with an _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bv_\ba_\bl specified, _\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt will con-
+ tinuously display the information regarding packet traffic
+ on the configured network interfaces. The fourth form
+ displays statistics about the named protocol.
+
+ The options have the following meaning:
+
+ -\b-A\bA With the default display, show the address of any pro-
+ tocol control blocks associated with sockets; used for
+ debugging.
+
+ -\b-a\ba With the default display, show the state of all sock-
+ ets; normally sockets used by server processes are not
+ shown. -\b-d\bd With either interface display (option -\b-i\bi or
+ an interval, as described below), show the number of
+ dropped packets.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Show the state of the IMP host table.
+
+ -\b-i\bi Show the state of interfaces which have been auto-
+ configured (interfaces statically configured into a
+ system, but not located at boot time are not shown).
+
+ -\b-I\bI _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bf_\ba_\bc_\be
+ Show information only about this interface; used with
+ an _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bv_\ba_\bl as described below.
+
+ -\b-m\bm Show statistics recorded by the memory management rou-
+ tines (the network manages a private pool of memory
+ buffers).
+
+ -\b-n\bn Show network addresses as numbers (normally _\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt
+ interprets addresses and attempts to display them sym-
+ bolically). This option may be used with any of the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 14, 1988 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NETSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NETSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+ display formats.
+
+ -\b-p\bp _\bp_\br_\bo_\bt_\bo_\bc_\bo_\bl
+ Show statistics about _\bp_\br_\bo_\bt_\bo_\bc_\bo_\bl, which is either a
+ well-known name for a protocol or an alias for it.
+ Some protocol names and aliases are listed in the file
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bp_\br_\bo_\bt_\bo_\bc_\bo_\bl_\bs. A null response typically means that
+ there are no interesting numbers to report. The pro-
+ gram will complain if _\bp_\br_\bo_\bt_\bo_\bc_\bo_\bl is unknown or if there
+ is no statistics routine for it.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Show per-protocol statistics.
+
+ -\b-r\br Show the routing tables. When -\b-s\bs is also present, show
+ routing statistics instead.
+
+ -\b-f\bf _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs__\bf_\ba_\bm_\bi_\bl_\by
+ Limit statistics or address control block reports to
+ those of the specified _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs _\bf_\ba_\bm_\bi_\bl_\by. The following
+ address families are recognized: _\bi_\bn_\be_\bt, for A\bAF\bF_\b_I\bIN\bNE\bET\bT, _\bn_\bs,
+ for A\bAF\bF_\b_N\bNS\bS, and _\bu_\bn_\bi_\bx, for A\bAF\bF_\b_U\bUN\bNI\bIX\bX.
+
+ The arguments, _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm and _\bc_\bo_\br_\be allow substitutes for the
+ defaults ``/vmunix'' and ``/dev/kmem''.
+
+ The default display, for active sockets, shows the local and
+ remote addresses, send and receive queue sizes (in bytes),
+ protocol, and the internal state of the protocol. Address
+ formats are of the form ``host.port'' or ``network.port'' if
+ a socket's address specifies a network but no specific host
+ address. When known the host and network addresses are
+ displayed symbolically according to the data bases
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bs and /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bn_\be_\bt_\bw_\bo_\br_\bk_\bs, respectively. If a symbolic
+ name for an address is unknown, or if the -\b-n\bn option is
+ specified, the address is printed numerically, according to
+ the address family. For more information regarding the
+ Internet ``dot format,'' refer to _\bi_\bn_\be_\bt(3N). Unspecified, or
+ ``wildcard'', addresses and ports appear as ``*''.
+
+ The interface display provides a table of cumulative statis-
+ tics regarding packets transferred, errors, and collisions.
+ The network addresses of the interface and the maximum
+ transmission unit (``mtu'') are also displayed.
+
+ The routing table display indicates the available routes and
+ their status. Each route consists of a destination host or
+ network and a gateway to use in forwarding packets. The
+ flags field shows the state of the route (``U'' if ``up''),
+ whether the route is to a gateway (``G''), whether the route
+ was created dynamically by a redirect (``D''), and whether
+ the route has been modified by a redirect (``M''). Direct
+ routes are created for each interface attached to the local
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 14, 1988 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NETSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NETSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+ host; the gateway field for such entries shows the address
+ of the outgoing interface. The refcnt field gives the
+ current number of active uses of the route. Connection
+ oriented protocols normally hold on to a single route for
+ the duration of a connection while connectionless protocols
+ obtain a route while sending to the same destination. The
+ use field provides a count of the number of packets sent
+ using that route. The interface entry indicates the network
+ interface utilized for the route.
+
+ When _\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt is invoked with an _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bv_\ba_\bl argument, it
+ displays a running count of statistics related to network
+ interfaces. This display consists of a column for the pri-
+ mary interface (the first interface found during autoconfi-
+ guration) and a column summarizing information for all
+ interfaces. The primary interface may be replaced with
+ another interface with the -_\bI option. The first line of
+ each screen of information contains a summary since the sys-
+ tem was last rebooted. Subsequent lines of output show
+ values accumulated over the preceding interval.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ iostat(1), vmstat(1), hosts(5), networks(5), protocols(5),
+ services(5), trpt(8C)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The notion of errors is ill-defined. Collisions mean some-
+ thing else for the IMP.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 14, 1988 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+NEWALIASES(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NEWALIASES(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ newaliases - rebuild the data base for the mail aliases file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ n\bne\bew\bwa\bal\bli\bia\bas\bse\bes\bs
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bN_\be_\bw_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs rebuilds the random access data base for the mail
+ aliases file /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs. It must be run each time
+ /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs_\be_\bs is changed in order for the change to take
+ effect.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ aliases(5), sendmail(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+NICE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NICE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ nice, nohup - run a command at low priority (_\bs_\bh only)
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be [ -\b-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br ] command [ arguments ]
+
+ n\bno\boh\bhu\bup\bp command [ arguments ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bN_\bi_\bc_\be executes _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd with low scheduling priority. If the
+ _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br argument is present, the priority is incremented
+ (higher numbers mean lower priorities) by that amount up to
+ a limit of 20. The default _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br is 10.
+
+ The super-user may run commands with priority higher than
+ normal by using a negative priority, e.g. `--10'.
+
+ _\bN_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp executes _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd immune to hangup and terminate sig-
+ nals from the controlling terminal. The priority is incre-
+ mented by 5. _\bN_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp should be invoked from the shell with
+ `&' in order to prevent it from responding to interrupts by
+ or stealing the input from the next person who logs in on
+ the same terminal.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ nohup.out standard output and standard error file under
+ _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), setpriority(2), renice(8)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ _\bN_\bi_\bc_\be returns the exit status of the subject command.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bN_\bi_\bc_\be and _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp are particular to _\bs_\bh(1). If you use _\bc_\bs_\bh(1),
+ then commands executed with ``&'' are automatically immune
+ to hangup signals while in the background. There is a buil-
+ tin command _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp which provides immunity from terminate,
+ but it does not redirect output to _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp._\bo_\bu_\bt.
+
+ _\bN_\bi_\bc_\be is built into _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) with a slightly different syntax
+ than described here. The form ``nice +10'' nices to posi-
+ tive nice, and ``nice -10'' can be used by the super-user to
+ give a process more of the processor.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+NM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ nm - print name list
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ n\bnm\bm [ -\b-a\bag\bgn\bno\bop\bpr\bru\bu ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bN_\bm prints the name list (symbol table) of each object _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ in the argument list. If an argument is an archive, a list-
+ ing for each object file in the archive will be produced.
+ If no _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is given, the symbols in "a.out" are listed.
+
+ Each symbol name is preceded by its value (blanks if unde-
+ fined) and one of the letters U\bU (undefined), A\bA (absolute), T\bT
+ (text segment symbol), D\bD (data segment symbol), B\bB (bss seg-
+ ment symbol), C\bC (common symbol), f\bf file name, or -\b- for
+ debugger symbol table entries (see -\b-a\ba below). If the symbol
+ is local (non-external) the type letter is in lower case.
+ The output is sorted alphabetically.
+
+ Options are:
+
+ -\b-a\ba Print symbol table entries inserted for use by
+ debuggers.
+
+ -\b-g\bg Print only global (external) symbols.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Sort numerically rather than alphabetically.
+
+ -\b-o\bo Prepend file or archive element name to each output
+ line rather than only once.
+
+ -\b-p\bp Don't sort; print in symbol-table order.
+
+ -\b-r\br Sort in reverse order.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Print only undefined symbols.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ar(1), ar(5), a.out(5), stab(5)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+NICE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NICE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ nice, nohup - run a command at low priority (_\bs_\bh only)
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ n\bni\bic\bce\be [ -\b-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br ] command [ arguments ]
+
+ n\bno\boh\bhu\bup\bp command [ arguments ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bN_\bi_\bc_\be executes _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd with low scheduling priority. If the
+ _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br argument is present, the priority is incremented
+ (higher numbers mean lower priorities) by that amount up to
+ a limit of 20. The default _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br is 10.
+
+ The super-user may run commands with priority higher than
+ normal by using a negative priority, e.g. `--10'.
+
+ _\bN_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp executes _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd immune to hangup and terminate sig-
+ nals from the controlling terminal. The priority is incre-
+ mented by 5. _\bN_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp should be invoked from the shell with
+ `&' in order to prevent it from responding to interrupts by
+ or stealing the input from the next person who logs in on
+ the same terminal.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ nohup.out standard output and standard error file under
+ _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), setpriority(2), renice(8)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ _\bN_\bi_\bc_\be returns the exit status of the subject command.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bN_\bi_\bc_\be and _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp are particular to _\bs_\bh(1). If you use _\bc_\bs_\bh(1),
+ then commands executed with ``&'' are automatically immune
+ to hangup signals while in the background. There is a buil-
+ tin command _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp which provides immunity from terminate,
+ but it does not redirect output to _\bn_\bo_\bh_\bu_\bp._\bo_\bu_\bt.
+
+ _\bN_\bi_\bc_\be is built into _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) with a slightly different syntax
+ than described here. The form ``nice +10'' nices to posi-
+ tive nice, and ``nice -10'' can be used by the super-user to
+ give a process more of the processor.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 8, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+NROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NROFF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ nroff - text formatting
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ n\bnr\bro\bof\bff\bf [ option ] ... [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bN_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf formats text in the named _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs for typewriter-like
+ devices. See also _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(_\b1). The full capabilities of _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf
+ are described in the _\bN_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf/_\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl.
+
+ If no _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be argument is present, the standard input is read.
+ An argument consisting of a single minus (-\b-) is taken to be
+ a file name corresponding to the standard input.
+
+ The options, which may appear in any order so long as they
+ appear _\bb_\be_\bf_\bo_\br_\be the files, are:
+
+ -\b-o\bo_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt Print only pages whose page numbers appear in the
+ comma-separated _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt of numbers and ranges. A range
+ _\bN-\b-_\bM means pages _\bN through _\bM; an initial -_\bN means from
+ the beginning to page _\bN; and a final _\bN- means from _\bN
+ to the end.
+
+ -\b-n\bn_\bN Number first generated page _\bN.
+
+ -\b-s\bs_\bN Stop every _\bN pages. _\bN_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf will halt prior to every _\bN
+ pages (default _\bN=1) to allow paper loading or chang-
+ ing, and will resume upon receipt of a newline.
+
+ -\b-m\bm_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be Prepend the macro file /\b/u\bus\bsr\br/\b/l\bli\bib\bb/\b/t\btm\bma\bac\bc/\b/t\btm\bma\bac\bc.\b._\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the
+ input _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs.
+
+ -\b-r\br_\ba_\bN Set register _\ba (one-character) to _\bN.
+
+ -\b-i\bi Read standard input after the input files are
+ exhausted.
+
+ -\b-q\bq Invoke the simultaneous input-output mode of the r\brd\bd
+ request.
+
+ -\b-T\bT_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be Prepare output for specified terminal. Known _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be_\bs
+ are:
+
+ 3\b37\b7 for the Teletype Corporation Model 37 terminal,
+
+ c\bcr\brt\bt the default; linked to lpr and tn300, for the GE
+ TermiNet 300 (or any terminal without reverse-line
+ or half-line capability),
+
+ 3\b30\b00\b0 for the DTC 300,
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 17, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+NROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual NROFF(1)
+
+
+
+ 3\b30\b02\b2 for the DTC 302S and the DTC 300S,
+
+ 3\b38\b82\b2 for the DTC 382,
+
+ 4\b45\b50\b0 for the DTC 450 and the IPSI 1622,
+
+ 8\b83\b33\b3 for the AJ 832/833,
+
+ e\bep\bps\bso\bon\bn
+ for the Epson FX80,
+
+ i\bit\bto\boh\bh for the C:ITOH Prowriter
+
+ n\bne\bec\bc for the NEC-55?0/77?0 Spinwriter, with the
+ Courier-72/Manifold thimble,
+
+ n\bne\bec\bc-\b-t\bt
+ for the NEC-55?0/77?0 Spinwriter, with the Tech-
+ Math/Times-Roman thimble,
+
+ n\bne\bec\bc2\b25\b5-\b-t\bt
+ for the NEC-5525/7725 Spinwriter, with the Tech-
+ Math/Times-Roman thimble,
+
+ q\bqu\bum\bme\be for the Qume Sprint 5 or 9,
+
+ x\bx-\b-e\bec\bcs\bs
+ for the Xerox/Diablo 1730/630, extended character
+ set,
+
+ x\bxe\ber\bro\box\bx
+ for the Xerox 17?0 or the Diablo 16?0.
+
+ Most of these also have versions for 12 pitch; see
+ /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\bt_\be_\br_\bm/_\bR_\bE_\bA_\bD_\bM_\bE for more information.
+
+ -\b-e\be Produce equally-spaced words in adjusted lines, using
+ full terminal resolution.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Use output tabs during horizontal spacing to speed out-
+ put and reduce output character count. Tab settings
+ are assumed to be every 8 nominal character widths.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/ta* temporary file
+ /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.* standard macro files
+ /usr/lib/term/* terminal driving tables for _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ J. F. Ossanna, _\bN_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf/_\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf _\bu_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bm_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl
+ B. W. Kernighan, _\bA _\bT_\bR_\bO_\bF_\bF _\bT_\bu_\bt_\bo_\br_\bi_\ba_\bl
+ troff(1), eqn(1), tbl(1), ms(7), me(7), man(7), col(1)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 17, 1987 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+OD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual OD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ od - octal, decimal, hex, ascii dump
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ o\bod\bd [ -format ] [ file ] [ [+\b+]offset[.\b.][b\bb] [label] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bO_\bd displays _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be, or it's standard input, in one or more
+ dump formats as selected by the first argument. If the
+ first argument is missing, -\b-o\bo is the default. Dumping con-
+ tinues until end-of-file.
+
+ The meanings of the format argument characters are:
+
+ a\ba Interpret bytes as characters and display them with
+ their ACSII names. If the p\bp character is given also,
+ then bytes with even parity are underlined. The P\bP
+ character causes bytes with odd parity to be under-
+ lined. Otherwise the parity bit is ignored.
+
+ b\bb Interpret bytes as unsigned octal.
+
+ c\bc Interpret bytes as ASCII characters. Certain non-
+ graphic characters appear as C escapes: null=\0,
+ backspace=\b, formfeed=\f, newline=\n, return=\r,
+ tab=\t; others appear as 3-digit octal numbers. Bytes
+ with the parity bit set are displayed in octal.
+
+ d\bd Interpret (short) words as unsigned decimal.
+
+ f\bf Interpret long words as floating point.
+
+ h\bh Interpret (short) words as unsigned hexadecimal.
+
+ i\bi Interpret (short) words as signed decimal.
+
+ l\bl Interpret long words as signed decimal.
+
+ o\bo Interpret (short) words as unsigned octal.
+
+ s\bs[n] Look for strings of ascii graphic characters, ter-
+ minated with a null byte. _\bN specifies the minimum
+ length string to be recognized. By default, the
+ minimum length is 3 characters.
+
+ v\bv Show all data. By default, display lines that are
+ identical to the last line shown are not output, but
+ are indicated with an ``*'' in column 1.
+
+ w\bw[n] Specifies the number of input bytes to be interpreted
+ and displayed on each output line. If w\bw is not speci-
+ fied, 16 bytes are read for each display line. If _\bn is
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+OD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual OD(1)
+
+
+
+ not specified, it defaults to 32.
+
+ x\bx Interpret (short) words as hexadecimal.
+
+ An upper case format character implies the long or double
+ precision form of the object.
+
+ The _\bo_\bf_\bf_\bs_\be_\bt argument specifies the byte offset into the file
+ where dumping is to commence. By default this argument is
+ interpreted in octal. A different radix can be specified;
+ If ``.\b.'' is appended to the argument, then _\bo_\bf_\bf_\bs_\be_\bt is inter-
+ preted in decimal. If _\bo_\bf_\bf_\bs_\be_\bt begins with ``x\bx'' or ``0\b0x\bx'',
+ it is interpreted in hexadecimal. If ``b\bb'' (``B\bB'') is
+ appended, the offset is interpreted as a block count, where
+ a block is 512 (1024) bytes. If the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be argument is omit-
+ ted, an _\bo_\bf_\bf_\bs_\be_\bt argument must be preceded by ``+\b+''.
+
+ The radix of the displayed address will be the same as the
+ radix of the _\bo_\bf_\bf_\bs_\be_\bt, if specified; otherwise it will be
+ octal.
+
+ _\bL_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl will be interpreted as a pseudo-address for the first
+ byte displayed. It will be shown in ``()'' following the
+ file offset. It is intended to be used with core images to
+ indicate the real memory address. The syntax for _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl is
+ identical to that for _\bo_\bf_\bf_\bs_\be_\bt.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ adb(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ A file name argument can't start with ``+''. A hexadecimal
+ offset can't be a block count. Only one file name argument
+ can be given.
+
+ It is an historical botch to require specification of
+ object, radix, and sign representation in a single character
+ argument.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ more, page - file perusal filter for crt viewing
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ m\bmo\bor\bre\be [ -\b-c\bcd\bdf\bfl\bls\bsu\bu ] [ -\b-_\bn ] [ +\b+_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br ] [ +\b+/\b/_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn ] [ name
+ ... ]
+
+ p\bpa\bag\bge\be _\bm_\bo_\br_\be _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bM_\bo_\br_\be is a filter which allows examination of a continuous
+ text one screenful at a time on a soft-copy terminal. It
+ normally pauses after each screenful, printing --More-- at
+ the bottom of the screen. If the user then types a carriage
+ return, one more line is displayed. If the user hits a
+ space, another screenful is displayed. Other possibilities
+ are enumerated later.
+
+ The command line options are:
+
+ -_\bn An integer which is the size (in lines) of the window
+ which _\bm_\bo_\br_\be will use instead of the default.
+
+ -\b-c\bc _\bM_\bo_\br_\be will draw each page by beginning at the top of the
+ screen and erasing each line just before it draws on
+ it. This avoids scrolling the screen, making it easier
+ to read while _\bm_\bo_\br_\be is writing. This option will be
+ ignored if the terminal does not have the ability to
+ clear to the end of a line.
+
+ -\b-d\bd _\bM_\bo_\br_\be will prompt the user with the message "Press space
+ to continue, 'q' to quit." at the end of each screen-
+ ful, and will respond to subsequent illegal user input
+ by printing "Press 'h' for instructions." instead of
+ ringing the bell. This is useful if _\bm_\bo_\br_\be is being used
+ as a filter in some setting, such as a class, where
+ many users may be unsophisticated.
+
+ -\b-f\bf This causes _\bm_\bo_\br_\be to count logical, rather than screen
+ lines. That is, long lines are not folded. This
+ option is recommended if _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf output is being piped
+ through _\bu_\bl, since the latter may generate escape
+ sequences. These escape sequences contain characters
+ which would ordinarily occupy screen positions, but
+ which do not print when they are sent to the terminal
+ as part of an escape sequence. Thus _\bm_\bo_\br_\be may think
+ that lines are longer than they actually are, and fold
+ lines erroneously.
+
+ -\b-l\bl Do not treat ^L (form feed) specially. If this option
+ is not given, _\bm_\bo_\br_\be will pause after any line that con-
+ tains a ^L, as if the end of a screenful had been
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+ reached. Also, if a file begins with a form feed, the
+ screen will be cleared before the file is printed.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Squeeze multiple blank lines from the output, producing
+ only one blank line. Especially helpful when viewing
+ _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf output, this option maximizes the useful informa-
+ tion present on the screen.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Normally, _\bm_\bo_\br_\be will handle underlining such as produced
+ by _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf in a manner appropriate to the particular ter-
+ minal: if the terminal can perform underlining or has
+ a stand-out mode, _\bm_\bo_\br_\be will output appropriate escape
+ sequences to enable underlining or stand-out mode for
+ underlined information in the source file. The -_\bu
+ option suppresses this processing.
+
+ +\b+_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br
+ Start up at _\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br.
+
+ +\b+/\b/_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn
+ Start up two lines before the line containing the regu-
+ lar expression _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn.
+
+ If the program is invoked as _\bp_\ba_\bg_\be, then the screen is
+ cleared before each screenful is printed (but only if a full
+ screenful is being printed), and _\bk - 1 rather than _\bk - 2
+ lines are printed in each screenful, where _\bk is the number
+ of lines the terminal can display.
+
+ _\bM_\bo_\br_\be looks in the file /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp to determine terminal
+ characteristics, and to determine the default window size.
+ On a terminal capable of displaying 24 lines, the default
+ window size is 22 lines.
+
+ _\bM_\bo_\br_\be looks in the environment variable _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE to pre-set any
+ flags desired. For example, if you prefer to view files
+ using the -_\bc mode of operation, the _\bc_\bs_\bh command _\bs_\be_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE
+ -_\bc or the _\bs_\bh command sequence _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE='-_\bc' ; _\be_\bx_\bp_\bo_\br_\bt _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE would
+ cause all invocations of _\bm_\bo_\br_\be , including invocations by
+ programs such as _\bm_\ba_\bn and _\bm_\bs_\bg_\bs , to use this mode. Normally,
+ the user will place the command sequence which sets up the
+ _\bM_\bO_\bR_\bE environment variable in the ._\bc_\bs_\bh_\br_\bc or ._\bp_\br_\bo_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be file.
+
+ If _\bm_\bo_\br_\be is reading from a file, rather than a pipe, then a
+ percentage is displayed along with the --More-- prompt.
+ This gives the fraction of the file (in characters, not
+ lines) that has been read so far.
+
+ Other sequences which may be typed when _\bm_\bo_\br_\be pauses, and
+ their effects, are as follows (_\bi is an optional integer
+ argument, defaulting to 1) :
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bi<space>
+ display _\bi more lines, (or another screenful if no argu-
+ ment is given)
+
+ ^D display 11 more lines (a ``scroll''). If _\bi is given,
+ then the scroll size is set to _\bi.
+
+ d same as ^D (control-D)
+
+ _\biz same as typing a space except that _\bi, if present,
+ becomes the new window size.
+
+ _\bis skip _\bi lines and print a screenful of lines
+
+ _\bif skip _\bi screenfuls and print a screenful of lines
+
+ _\bib skip back _\bi screenfuls and print a screenful of lines
+
+ _\bi^B same as b
+
+ q or Q
+ Exit from _\bm_\bo_\br_\be.
+
+ = Display the current line number.
+
+ v Start up the editor _\bv_\bi at the current line.
+
+ h Help command; give a description of all the _\bm_\bo_\br_\be com-
+ mands.
+
+ _\bi/expr
+ search for the _\bi-th occurrence of the regular expres-
+ sion _\be_\bx_\bp_\br. If there are less than _\bi occurrences of
+ _\be_\bx_\bp_\br, and the input is a file (rather than a pipe),
+ then the position in the file remains unchanged. Oth-
+ erwise, a screenful is displayed, starting two lines
+ before the place where the expression was found. The
+ user's erase and kill characters may be used to edit
+ the regular expression. Erasing back past the first
+ column cancels the search command.
+
+ _\bin search for the _\bi-th occurrence of the last regular
+ expression entered.
+
+ ' (single quote) Go to the point from which the last
+ search started. If no search has been performed in the
+ current file, this command goes back to the beginning
+ of the file.
+
+ !command
+ invoke a shell with _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd. The characters `%' and `!'
+ in "command" are replaced with the current file name
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+ and the previous shell command respectively. If there
+ is no current file name, `%' is not expanded. The
+ sequences "\%" and "\!" are replaced by "%" and "!"
+ respectively.
+
+ _\bi:n skip to the _\bi-th next file given in the command line
+ (skips to last file if n doesn't make sense)
+
+ _\bi:p skip to the _\bi-th previous file given in the command
+ line. If this command is given in the middle of print-
+ ing out a file, then _\bm_\bo_\br_\be goes back to the beginning of
+ the file. If _\bi doesn't make sense, _\bm_\bo_\br_\be skips back to
+ the first file. If _\bm_\bo_\br_\be is not reading from a file,
+ the bell is rung and nothing else happens.
+
+ :f display the current file name and line number.
+
+ :q or :Q
+ exit from _\bm_\bo_\br_\be (same as q or Q).
+
+ . (dot) repeat the previous command.
+
+ The commands take effect immediately, i.e., it is not neces-
+ sary to type a carriage return. Up to the time when the
+ command character itself is given, the user may hit the line
+ kill character to cancel the numerical argument being
+ formed. In addition, the user may hit the erase character
+ to redisplay the --More--(xx%) message.
+
+ At any time when output is being sent to the terminal, the
+ user can hit the quit key (normally control-\). _\bM_\bo_\br_\be will
+ stop sending output, and will display the usual --More--
+ prompt. The user may then enter one of the above commands
+ in the normal manner. Unfortunately, some output is lost
+ when this is done, due to the fact that any characters wait-
+ ing in the terminal's output queue are flushed when the quit
+ signal occurs.
+
+ The terminal is set to _\bn_\bo_\be_\bc_\bh_\bo mode by this program so that
+ the output can be continuous. What you type will thus not
+ show on your terminal, except for the / and ! commands.
+
+ If the standard output is not a teletype, then _\bm_\bo_\br_\be acts
+ just like _\bc_\ba_\bt, except that a header is printed before each
+ file (if there is more than one).
+
+ A sample usage of _\bm_\bo_\br_\be in previewing _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf output would be
+
+ nroff -ms +2 doc.n | more -s
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/termcap Terminal data base
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+MORE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual MORE(1)
+
+
+
+ /usr/lib/more.help Help file
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), man(1), msgs(1), script(1), sh(1), environ(7)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Skipping backwards is too slow on large files.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PAGESIZE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PAGESIZE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pagesize - print system page size
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpa\bag\bge\bes\bsi\biz\bze\be
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\ba_\bg_\be_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be prints the size of a page of memory in bytes, as
+ returned by _\bg_\be_\bt_\bp_\ba_\bg_\be_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be(2). This program is useful in con-
+ structing portable shell scripts.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ getpagesize(2)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ chfn, chsh, passwd - change password file information
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpa\bas\bss\bsw\bwd\bd [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-s\bs ] [ name ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ This command changes (or installs) a password, login shell
+ (-\b-s\bs option), or GECOS information field (-\b-f\bf option) associ-
+ ated with the user _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be (your own name by default).
+
+ When altering a password, the program prompts for the
+ current password and then for the new one. The caller must
+ supply both. The new password must be typed twice to fore-
+ stall mistakes.
+
+ New passwords must be at least four characters long if they
+ use a sufficiently rich alphabet and at least six characters
+ long if monocase. These rules are relaxed if you are
+ insistent enough.
+
+ Only the owner of the name or the super-user may change a
+ password; the owner must prove he knows the old password.
+
+ When altering a login shell, _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd displays the current
+ login shell and then prompts for the new one. The new login
+ shell must be one of the approved shells listed in
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl_\bs unless you are the super-user. If /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl_\bs
+ does not exist, the only shells that may be specified are
+ /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bs_\bh and /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bc_\bs_\bh.
+
+ The super-user may change anyone's login shell; normal users
+ may only change their own login shell.
+
+ When altering the GECOS information field, _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd displays
+ the current information, broken into fields, as interpreted
+ by the _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br(1) program, among others, and prompts for new
+ values. These fields include a user's ``real life'' name,
+ office room number, office phone number, and home phone
+ number. Included in each prompt is a default value, which
+ is enclosed between brackets. The default value is accepted
+ simply by typing a carriage return. To enter a blank field,
+ the word ``none'' may be typed. Below is a sample run:
+
+ N\bNa\bam\bme\be [\b[B\bBi\bif\bff\bf S\bSt\btu\bud\bds\bsw\bwo\bor\brt\bth\bh I\bII\bI]\b]:\b:
+ R\bRo\boo\bom\bm n\bnu\bum\bmb\bbe\ber\br (\b(E\bEx\bxs\bs:\b: 5\b59\b97\b7E\bE o\bor\br 1\b19\b97\b7C\bC)\b) [\b[]\b]:\b: 521E
+ O\bOf\bff\bfi\bic\bce\be P\bPh\bho\bon\bne\be (\b(E\bEx\bx:\b: 1\b16\b63\b32\b2)\b) [\b[]\b]:\b: 1863
+ H\bHo\bom\bme\be P\bPh\bho\bon\bne\be (\b(E\bEx\bx:\b: 9\b98\b87\b75\b53\b32\b2)\b) [\b[5\b57\b77\b71\b15\b54\b46\b6]\b]:\b: none
+
+
+ _\bP_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd allows phone numbers to be entered with or without
+ hyphens. It is a good idea to run _\bf_\bi_\bn_\bg_\be_\br after changing the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PASSWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PASSWD(1)
+
+
+
+ GECOS information to make sure everything is setup properly.
+
+ The super-user may change anyone's GECOS information; normal
+ users may only change their own.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/passwd The file containing all of this information
+ /etc/shells The list of approved shells
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ login(1), finger(1), passwd(5), crypt(3)
+ Robert Morris and Ken Thompson, _\bU_\bN_\bI_\bX _\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd _\bs_\be_\bc_\bu_\br_\bi_\bt_\by
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PC(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pc - Pascal compiler
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpc\bc [ option ] [ -\b-i\bi name ... ] name ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bc is a Pascal compiler. If given an argument file ending
+ with .\b.p\bp, it will compile the file and load it into an exe-
+ cutable file called, by default, _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt.
+
+ A program may be separated into more than one .\b.p\bp file. _\bP_\bc
+ will compile a number of argument .\b.p\bp files into object files
+ (with the extension .\b.o\bo in place of .\b.p\bp). Object files may
+ then be loaded into an executable _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt file. Exactly one
+ object file must supply a p\bpr\bro\bog\bgr\bra\bam\bm statement to successfully
+ create an executable a.out file. The rest of the files must
+ consist only of declarations which logically nest within the
+ program. References to objects shared between separately
+ compiled files are allowed if the objects are declared in
+ i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\bed header files, whose names must end with .\b.h\bh. Header
+ files may only be included at the outermost level, and thus
+ declare only globally available objects. To allow f\bfu\bun\bnc\bct\bti\bio\bon\bns
+ and p\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bed\bdu\bur\bre\bes to be declared, an e\bex\bxt\bte\ber\brn\bna\bal\bl directive has
+ been added, whose use is similar to the f\bfo\bor\brw\bwa\bar\brd\bd directive
+ but restricted to appear only in .\b.h\bh files. F\bFu\bun\bnc\bct\bti\bio\bon\bn and
+ p\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bed\bdu\bur\bre\be bodies may not appear in .\b.h\bh files. A binding
+ phase of the compiler checks that declarations are used con-
+ sistently, to enforce the type checking rules of Pascal.
+
+ Object files created by other language processors may be
+ loaded together with object files created by _\bp_\bc. The f\bfu\bun\bnc\bc-\b-
+ t\bti\bio\bon\bns and p\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bed\bdu\bur\bre\bes they define must have been declared in
+ .\b.h\bh files included by all the .\b.p\bp files which call those rou-
+ tines. Calling conventions are as in C, with v\bva\bar\br parameters
+ passed by address.
+
+ See the Berkeley Pascal User's Manual for details.
+
+ The following options have the same meaning as in _\bc_\bc(1) and
+ _\bf_\b7_\b7(1). See _\bl_\bd(1) for load-time options.
+
+ -\b-c\bc Suppress loading and produce `.o' file(s) from source
+ file(s).
+
+ -\b-g\bg Have the compiler produce additional symbol table
+ information for _\bd_\bb_\bx(1).
+
+ -\b-w\bw Suppress warning messages.
+
+ -\b-p\bp Prepare object files for profiling, see _\bp_\br_\bo_\bf(1).
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PC(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-O\bO Invoke an object-code improver.
+
+ -\b-S\bS Compile the named program, and leave the assembler-
+ language output on the corresponding file suffixed
+ `.s'. (No `.o' is created.).
+
+ -\b-o\bo output
+ Name the final output file _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt instead of _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt.
+
+ The following options are peculiar to _\bp_\bc.
+
+ -\b-C\bC Compile code to perform runtime checks, verify a\bas\bss\bse\ber\brt\bt
+ calls, and initialize all variables to zero as in _\bp_\bi.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Block buffer the file _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt.
+
+ -\b-i\bi Produce a listing for the specified procedures, func-
+ tions and i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be files.
+
+ -\b-l\bl Make a program listing during translation.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Accept standard Pascal only; non-standard constructs
+ cause warning diagnostics.
+
+ -\b-t\bt directory
+ Use the given _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by for compiler temporary files.
+
+ -\b-z\bz Allow execution profiling with _\bp_\bx_\bp by generating
+ statement counters, and arranging for the creation of
+ the profile data file _\bp_\bm_\bo_\bn._\bo_\bu_\bt when the resulting
+ object is executed.
+
+ Other arguments are taken to be loader option arguments,
+ perhaps libraries of _\bp_\bc compatible routines. Certain flags
+ can also be controlled in comments within the program as
+ described in the _\bB_\be_\br_\bk_\be_\bl_\be_\by _\bP_\ba_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bl _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ file.p pascal source files
+ /usr/lib/pc0 compiler
+ /lib/f1 code generator
+ /usr/lib/pc2 runtime integrator (inline
+ expander)
+ /lib/c2 peephole optimizer
+ /usr/lib/pc3 separate compilation consistency
+ checker
+ /usr/lib/pc2.*strings text of the error messages
+ /usr/lib/how_pc basic usage explanation
+ /usr/lib/libpc.a intrinsic functions and I/O library
+ /usr/lib/libm.a math library
+ /lib/libc.a standard library, see _\bi_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo(3)
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PC(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ Berkeley Pascal User's Manual
+ pi(1), pxp(1), pxref(1), sdb(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ For a basic explanation do
+
+ p\bpc\bc
+
+ See _\bp_\bi(1). for an explanation of the error message format.
+ Internal errors cause messages containing the word SNARK.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bRS\bS
+ Charles B. Haley, William N. Joy, and Ken Thompson
+ Retargetted to the second pass of the portable _\bC compiler by
+ Peter Kessler
+ Runtime library and inline optimizer by M. Kirk McKusick
+ Separate compilation consistency checking by Louise Madrid
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The keyword p\bpa\bac\bck\bke\bed\bd is recognized but has no effect.
+
+ The binder is not as strict as described here, with regard
+ to the rules about external declarations only in `.h' files
+ and including `.h' files only at the outermost level. It
+ will be made to perform these checks in its next incarna-
+ tion, so users are warned not to be sloppy.
+
+ The -\b-z\bz flag doesn't work for separately compiled files.
+
+ Because the -\b-s\bs option is usurped by the compiler, it is not
+ possible to pass the strip option to the loader. Thus pro-
+ grams which are to be stripped, must be run through _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bp(1)
+ after they are compiled.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pdx - pascal debugger
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ pdx [-\b-r\br] [_\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bd_\bx is a tool for source level debugging and execution of
+ Pascal programs. The _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is an object file produced by
+ the Pascal translator _\bp_\bi(1). If no _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is specified,
+ _\bp_\bd_\bx looks for a file named ``obj'' in the current directory.
+ The object file contains a symbol table which includes the
+ name of the all the source files translated by _\bp_\bi to create
+ it. These files are available for perusal while using the
+ debugger.
+
+ If the file ``.pdxinit'' exists in the current directory,
+ then the debugger commands in it are executed.
+
+ The -\b-r\br option causes the _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be to be executed immediately;
+ if it terminates successfully _\bp_\bd_\bx exits. Otherwise it
+ reports the reason for termination and offers the user the
+ option of entering the debugger or simply letting _\bp_\bx con-
+ tinue with a traceback. If -\b-r\br is not specified, _\bp_\bd_\bx just
+ prompts and waits for a command.
+
+ The commands are:
+
+ r\bru\bun\bn [_\ba_\br_\bg_\bs] [<\b< _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be] [>\b> _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Start executing _\bo_\bb_\bj_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be, passing _\ba_\br_\bg_\bs as command line
+ arguments; <\b< or >\b> can be used to redirect input or out-
+ put in the usual manner.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be [i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn [i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn a\bat\bt _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be [i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ Have tracing information printed when the program is
+ executed. A number is associated with the command that
+ is used to turn the tracing off (see the d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be com-
+ mand).
+
+ The first argument describes what is to be traced. If
+ it is a _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br, then the line is printed
+ immediately prior to being executed. Source line
+ numbers in a file other than the current one must be
+ preceded by the name of the file and a colon, e.g.
+ ``mumble.p:17''.
+
+ If the argument is a procedure or function name then
+ every time it is called, information is printed telling
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1)
+
+
+
+ what routine called it, from what source line it was
+ called, and what parameters were passed to it. In
+ addition, its return is noted, and if it's a function
+ then the value it is returning is also printed.
+
+ If the argument is an _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn with an a\bat\bt clause then
+ the value of the expression is printed whenever the
+ identified source line is reached.
+
+ If the argument is a variable then the name and value
+ of the variable is printed whenever it changes. Execu-
+ tion is substantially slower during this form of trac-
+ ing.
+
+ If no argument is specified then all source lines are
+ printed before they are executed. Execution is sub-
+ stantially slower during this form of tracing.
+
+ The clause ``i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn'' restricts tracing
+ information to be printed only while executing inside
+ the given procedure or function.
+
+ _\bC_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn is a Pascal boolean expression and is
+ evaluated prior to printing the tracing information; if
+ it is false then the information is not printed.
+
+ There is no restriction on the amount of information
+ that can be traced.
+
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp a\bat\bt _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp i\bin\bn _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn]
+ Stop execution when the given line is reached, pro-
+ cedure or function called, variable changed, or condi-
+ tion true.
+
+ d\bde\bel\ble\bet\bte\be _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br
+ The trace or stop corresponding to the given number is
+ removed. The numbers associated with traces and stops
+ are printed by the s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs command.
+
+ s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs [>\b> _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Print out the currently active t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be and s\bst\bto\bop\bp commands.
+
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bt Continue execution from where it stopped. This can
+ only be done when the program was stopped by an inter-
+ rupt or through use of the s\bst\bto\bop\bp command.
+
+ s\bst\bte\bep\bp Execute one source line.
+
+ n\bne\bex\bxt\bt Execute up to the next source line. The difference
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1)
+
+
+
+ between this and s\bst\bte\bep\bp is that if the line contains a
+ call to a procedure or function the s\bst\bte\bep\bp command will
+ stop at the beginning of that block, while the n\bne\bex\bxt\bt
+ command will not.
+
+ p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bt _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn [,\b, _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn ...]
+ Print out the values of the Pascal expressions. Vari-
+ ables declared in an outer block but having the same
+ identifier as one in the current block may be refer-
+ enced as ``_\bb_\bl_\bo_\bc_\bk-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be .\b. _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be''.
+
+ w\bwh\bha\bat\bti\bis\bs _\bi_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt_\bi_\bf_\bi_\be_\br
+ Print the declaration of the given identifier.
+
+ w\bwh\bhi\bic\bch\bh _\bi_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt_\bi_\bf_\bi_\be_\br
+ Print the full qualification of the given identifer,
+ i.e. the outer blocks that the identifier is associ-
+ ated with.
+
+ a\bas\bss\bsi\big\bgn\bn _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ Assign the value of the expression to the variable.
+
+ c\bca\bal\bll\bl _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be(_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs)
+ Execute the object code associated with the named pro-
+ cedure or function.
+
+ h\bhe\bel\blp\bp Print out a synopsis of _\bp_\bd_\bx commands.
+
+ g\bgr\bri\bip\bpe\be
+ Invokes a mail program to send a message to the person
+ in charge of _\bp_\bd_\bx.
+
+ w\bwh\bhe\ber\bre\be
+ Print out a list of the active procedures and functions
+ and the respective source line where they are called.
+
+ s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Read _\bp_\bd_\bx commands from the given _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. Especially
+ useful when the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be has been created by redirect-
+ ing a s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs command from an earlier debugging session.
+
+ d\bdu\bum\bmp\bp [>\b> _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Print the names and values of all active data.
+
+ l\bli\bis\bst\bt [_\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br [,\b, _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br]]
+ l\bli\bis\bst\bt _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn
+ List the lines in the current source file from the
+ first line number to the second inclusive. As in the
+ editor ``$'' can be used to refer to the last line. If
+ no lines are specified, the entire file is listed. If
+ the name of a procedure or function is given lines _\bn-_\bk
+ to _\bn+_\bk are listed where _\bn is the first statement in the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1)
+
+
+
+ procedure or function and _\bk is small.
+
+ f\bfi\bil\ble\be [_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Change the current source file name to _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. If
+ none is specified then the current source file name is
+ printed.
+
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt [_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ e\bed\bdi\bit\bt _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be/_\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Invoke an editor on _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be or the current source file
+ if none is specified. If a _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be or _\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn name
+ is specified, the editor is invoked on the file that
+ contains it. Which editor is invoked by default
+ depends on the installation. The default can be over-
+ ridden by setting the environment variable EDITOR to
+ the name of the desired editor.
+
+ p\bpi\bi Recompile the program and read in the new symbol table
+ information.
+
+ s\bsh\bh _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be
+ Pass the command line to the shell for execution. The
+ SHELL environment variable determines which shell is
+ used.
+
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs _\bn_\be_\bw-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be _\bo_\bl_\bd-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ This command makes _\bp_\bd_\bx respond to _\bn_\be_\bw-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be the
+ way it used to respond to _\bo_\bl_\bd-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+
+ q\bqu\bui\bit\bt Exit _\bp_\bd_\bx.
+
+
+
+
+
+ The following commands deal with the program at the _\bp_\bx
+ instruction level rather than source level. They are not
+ intended for general use.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\bei\bi [_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd]
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\bei\bi [_\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be] [a\bat\bt _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd]
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bpi\bi [_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd]
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bpi\bi [a\bat\bt] [_\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs] [i\bif\bf _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bd]
+ Turn on tracing or set a stop using a _\bp_\bx machine
+ instruction addresses.
+
+ x\bxi\bi _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs [,\b, _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs]
+ Print the instructions starting at the first _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs.
+ Instructions up to the second _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs are printed.
+
+ x\bxd\bd _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs [,\b, _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs]
+ Print in octal the specified data location(s).
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PDX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PDX(1)
+
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ obj Pascal object file
+ .pdxinit _\bP_\bd_\bx initialization file
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ pi(1), px(1)
+ _\bA_\bn _\bI_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bt_\bo _\bP_\bd_\bx
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bP_\bd_\bx does not understand sets, and provides no information
+ about files.
+
+ The _\bw_\bh_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bs command doesn't quite work for variant records.
+
+ Bad things will happen if a procedure invoked with the c\bca\bal\bll\bl
+ command does a non-local goto.
+
+ The commands s\bst\bte\bep\bp and n\bne\bex\bxt\bt should be able to take a _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt
+ that specifies how many lines to execute.
+
+ There should be commands s\bst\bte\bep\bpi\bi and n\bne\bex\bxt\bti\bi that correspond to
+ s\bst\bte\bep\bp and n\bne\bex\bxt\bt but work at the instruction level.
+
+ There should be a way to get an address associated with a
+ line number, procedure or function, and variable.
+
+ Most of the command names are too long.
+
+ The alias facility is quite weak.
+
+ A _\bc_\bs_\bh-like history capability would improve the situation.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 5
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PI(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PI(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pi - Pascal interpreter code translator
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpi\bi [ o\bop\bpt\bti\bio\bon\bn ] [ -\b-i\bi name ... ] name.p
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bi translates the program in the file _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be._\bp leaving inter-
+ preter code in the file _\bo_\bb_\bj in the current directory. The
+ interpreter code can be executed using _\bp_\bx. _\bP_\bi_\bx performs the
+ functions of _\bp_\bi and _\bp_\bx for `load and go' Pascal.
+
+ The following flags are interpreted by _\bp_\bi; the associated
+ options can also be controlled in comments within the pro-
+ gram as described in the _\bB_\be_\br_\bk_\be_\bl_\be_\by _\bP_\ba_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bl _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Block buffer the file _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt.
+
+ -\b-i\bi Enable the listing for any specified procedures and
+ functions and while processing any specified i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be
+ files.
+
+ -\b-l\bl Make a program listing during translation.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Begin each listed i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be file on a new page with a
+ banner line.
+
+ -\b-p\bp Suppress the post-mortem control flow backtrace if an
+ error occurs; suppress statement limit counting.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Accept standard Pascal only; non-standard constructs
+ cause warning diagnostics.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Suppress runtime tests of subrange variables and treat
+ a\bas\bss\bse\ber\brt\bt statements as comments.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Card image mode; only the first 72 characters of input
+ lines are used.
+
+ -\b-w\bw Suppress warning diagnostics.
+
+ -\b-z\bz Allow execution profiling with _\bp_\bx_\bp by generating
+ statement counters, and arranging for the creation of
+ the profile data file _\bp_\bm_\bo_\bn._\bo_\bu_\bt when the resulting
+ object is executed.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ file.p input file
+ file.i i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be file(s)
+ /usr/lib/pi2.*strings text of the error messages
+ /usr/lib/how_pi* basic usage explanation
+ obj interpreter code output
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PI(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PI(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ Berkeley Pascal User's Manual
+ pix(1), px(1), pxp(1), pxref(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ For a basic explanation do
+
+ p\bpi\bi
+
+ In the diagnostic output of the translator, lines containing
+ syntax errors are listed with a flag indicating the point of
+ error. Diagnostic messages indicate the action which the
+ recovery mechanism took in order to be able to continue
+ parsing. Some diagnostics indicate only that the input is
+ `malformed.' This occurs if the recovery can find no simple
+ correction to make the input syntactically valid.
+
+ Semantic error diagnostics indicate a line in the source
+ text near the point of error. Some errors evoke more than
+ one diagnostic to help pinpoint the error; the follow-up
+ messages begin with an ellipsis `...'.
+
+ The first character of each error message indicates its
+ class:
+
+ E Fatal error; no code will be generated.
+ e Non-fatal error.
+ w Warning - a potential problem.
+ s Non-standard Pascal construct warning.
+
+ If a severe error occurs which inhibits further processing,
+ the translator will give a diagnostic and then `QUIT'.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bRS\bS
+ Charles B. Haley, William N. Joy, and Ken Thompson
+ Ported to VAX-11 by Peter Kessler
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The keyword p\bpa\bac\bck\bke\bed\bd is recognized but has no effect.
+
+ For clarity, semantic errors should be flagged at an
+ appropriate place in the source text, and multiple instances
+ of the `same' semantic error should be summarized at the end
+ of a p\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bed\bdu\bur\bre\be or f\bfu\bun\bnc\bct\bti\bio\bon\bn rather than evoking many diagnos-
+ tics.
+
+ When i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be files are present, diagnostics relating to the
+ last procedure in one file may appear after the beginning of
+ the listing of the next.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PIX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PIX(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pix - Pascal interpreter and executor
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpi\bix\bx [ -\b-b\bbl\bln\bnp\bps\bst\btu\buw\bwz\bz ] [ -\b-i\bi name ... ] name.p [ argument ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bi_\bx is a `load and go' version of Pascal which combines the
+ functions of the interpreter code translator _\bp_\bi and the exe-
+ cutor _\bp_\bx. It uses _\bp_\bi to translate the program in the file
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be._\bp and, if there were no fatal errors during transla-
+ tion, causes the resulting interpreter code to be executed
+ by _\bp_\bx with the specified arguments. A temporary file is
+ used for the object code; the file _\bo_\bb_\bj is neither created
+ nor destroyed.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/ucb/pi Pascal translator
+ /usr/ucb/px Pascal executor
+ /tmp/pix* temporary
+ /usr/lib/how_pix basic explanation
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ Berkeley Pascal User's Manual
+ pi(1), px(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ For a basic explanation do
+
+ p\bpi\bix\bx
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PLOT(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual PLOT(1G)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ plot - graphics filters
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpl\blo\bot\bt [ -\b-T\bTterminal ] [ -\b-r\brresolution ] [ files... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ These commands read plotting instructions (see _\bp_\bl_\bo_\bt(5)) from
+ the standard input or the specified _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs, and in general
+ produce plotting instructions suitable for a particular _\bt_\be_\br_\b-
+ _\bm_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bl on the standard output. The -\b-r\br flag may be used to
+ specify the device's output resolution (currently only the
+ Imagen laser printer understands this option).
+
+ If no _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bl type is specified, the environment parameter
+ $TERM (see _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7)) is used. Known _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bl_\bs are:
+
+ 4\b40\b01\b13\b3 Tektronix 4013 storage scope.
+
+ 4\b40\b01\b14\b4 or t\bte\bek\bk
+ Tektronix 4014 or 4015 storage scope with Enhanced
+ Graphics Module. (Use 4013 for Tektronix 4014 or 4015
+ without the Enhanced Graphics Module).
+
+ 4\b45\b50\b0 DASI Hyterm 450 terminal (Diablo mechanism).
+
+ 3\b30\b00\b0 DASI 300 or GSI terminal (Diablo mechanism).
+
+ 3\b30\b00\b0S\bS DASI 300S terminal (Diablo mechanism).
+
+ a\bae\bed\bd AED 512 color graphics terminal.
+
+ b\bbi\bit\btg\bgr\bra\bap\bph\bh or b\bbg\bg
+ BBN bitgraph graphics terminal.
+
+ i\bim\bma\bag\bge\ben\bn o\bor\br i\bip\bp
+ Imagen laser printer (default 240 dots-per-inch resolu-
+ tion).
+
+ c\bcr\brt\bt Any crt terminal capable of running _\bv_\bi(1).
+
+ d\bdu\bum\bmb\bb Dumb terminals without cursor addressing or line
+ printers.
+
+ v\bvt\bt1\b12\b25\b5
+ DEC vt125 terminal.
+
+ h\bhp\bp2\b26\b64\b48\b8 or h\bhp\bp or h\bhp\bp8\b8
+ Hewlett Packard 2648 graphics terminal.
+
+ v\bve\ber\br Versatec D1200A printer-plotter.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 21, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PLOT(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual PLOT(1G)
+
+
+
+ v\bva\bar\br Benson Varian printer-plotter.
+
+ These versions of _\bp_\bl_\bo_\bt use the -\b-g\bg option of _\bl_\bp_\br(1) to
+ send the result directly to the plotter device rather
+ than to the standard output.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/bin/t4013
+ /usr/bin/tek
+ /usr/bin/t450
+ /usr/bin/t300
+ /usr/bin/t300s
+ /usr/bin/aedplot
+ /usr/bin/bgplot
+ /usr/bin/crtplot
+ /usr/bin/dumbplot
+ /usr/bin/gigiplot
+ /usr/bin/hpplot
+ /usr/bin/implot
+ /usr/ucb/lpr
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ plot(3X), plot(3F), plot(5), lpr(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 21, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PMERGE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PMERGE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pmerge - pascal file merger
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpm\bme\ber\brg\bge\be name.p ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bm_\be_\br_\bg_\be assembles the named Pascal files into a single stan-
+ dard Pascal program. The resulting program is listed on the
+ standard output. It is intended to be used to merge a col-
+ lection of separately compiled modules so that they can be
+ run through p\bpi\bi , or exported to other sites.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/tmp/MG* default temporary files
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ pc(1), pi(1),
+ Auxiliary documentation _\bB_\be_\br_\bk_\be_\bl_\be_\by _\bP_\ba_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bl _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ M. Kirk McKusick
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Very minimal error checking is done, so incorrect programs
+ will produce unpredictable results. Block comments should
+ be placed after the keyword to which they refer or they are
+ likely to end up in bizarre places.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pr - print file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpr\br [ option ] ... [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\br produces a printed listing of one or more _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs. The out-
+ put is separated into pages headed by a date, the name of
+ the file or a specified header, and the page number. If
+ there are no file arguments, _\bp_\br prints its standard input.
+
+ Options apply to all following files but may be reset
+ between files:
+
+ -\b-_\bn Produce _\bn-column output.
+
+ +\b+_\bn Begin printing with page _\bn.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Take the next argument as a page header.
+
+ -\b-w\bw_\bn For purposes of multi-column output, take the width of
+ the page to be _\bn characters instead of the default 72.
+
+ -\b-f\bf Use formfeeds instead of newlines to separate pages. A
+ formfeed is assumed to use up two blank lines at the
+ top of a page. (Thus this option does not affect the
+ effective page length.)
+
+ -\b-l\bl_\bn Take the length of the page to be _\bn lines instead of
+ the default 66.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Do not print the 5-line header or the 5-line trailer
+ normally supplied for each page.
+
+ -\b-s\bs_\bc Separate columns by the single character _\bc instead of
+ by the appropriate amount of white space. A missing _\bc
+ is taken to be a tab.
+
+ -\b-m\bm Print all _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs simultaneously, each in one column,
+
+ Inter-terminal messages via _\bw_\br_\bi_\bt_\be(1) are forbidden during a
+ _\bp_\br.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /dev/tty? to suspend messages.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cat(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ There are no diagnostics when _\bp_\br is printing on a terminal.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PRINTENV(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PRINTENV(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ printenv - print out the environment
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpr\bri\bin\bnt\bte\ben\bnv\bv [ name ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv prints out the values of the variables in the
+ environment. If a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is specified, only its value is
+ printed.
+
+ If a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is specified and it is not defined in the environ-
+ ment, _\bp_\br_\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\bn_\bv returns exit status 1, else it returns status
+ 0.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1), environ(7), csh(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PROF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ prof - display profile data
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpr\bro\bof\bf [ -\b-a\ba ] [ -\b-l\bl ] [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-z\bz ] [ -\b-s\bs ] [ -\b-v\bv [ -\b-_\bl_\bo_\bw [ -\b-_\bh_\bi_\bg_\bh
+ ] ] ] [ a.out [ mon.out ... ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\br_\bo_\bf interprets the file produced by the _\bm_\bo_\bn_\bi_\bt_\bo_\br subroutine.
+ Under default modes, the symbol table in the named object
+ file (_\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt default) is read and correlated with the profile
+ file (_\bm_\bo_\bn._\bo_\bu_\bt default). For each external symbol, the per-
+ centage of time spent executing between that symbol and the
+ next is printed (in decreasing order), together with the
+ number of times that routine was called and the number of
+ milliseconds per call. If more than one profile file is
+ specified, the output represents the sum of the profiles.
+
+ In order for the number of calls to a routine to be tallied,
+ the -\b-p\bp option of _\bc_\bc, _\bf_\b7_\b7 or _\bp_\bc must have been given when the
+ file containing the routine was compiled. This option also
+ arranges for the profile file to be produced automatically.
+
+ Options are:
+
+ -\b-a\ba all symbols are reported rather than just external sym-
+ bols.
+
+ -\b-l\bl the output is sorted by symbol value.
+
+ -\b-n\bn the output is sorted by number of calls
+
+ -\b-s\bs a summary profile file is produced in _\bm_\bo_\bn._\bs_\bu_\bm. This is
+ really only useful when more than one profile file is
+ specified.
+
+ -\b-v\bv all printing is suppressed and a graphic version of the
+ profile is produced on the standard output for display
+ by the _\bp_\bl_\bo_\bt(1) filters. When plotting, the numbers _\bl_\bo_\bw
+ and _\bh_\bi_\bg_\bh, by default 0 and 100, may be given to cause a
+ selected percentage of the profile to be plotted with
+ accordingly higher resolution.
+
+ -\b-z\bz routines which have zero usage (as indicated by call
+ counts and accumulated time) are nevertheless printed
+ in the output.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ mon.out for profile
+ a.out for namelist
+ mon.sum for summary profile
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PROF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PROF(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ monitor(3), profil(2), cc(1), plot(1G)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Beware of quantization errors.
+
+ Is confused by _\bf_\b7_\b7 which puts the entry points at the bottom
+ of subroutines and functions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ps - process status
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bps\bs [ a\bac\bce\beg\bgk\bkl\bln\bns\bst\btu\buv\bvw\bwx\bxU\bU#\b# ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bs prints information about processes. Normally, only your
+ processes are candidates to be printed by _\bp_\bs; specifying a\ba
+ causes other users' processes to be candidates to be
+ printed; specifying x\bx includes processes without control
+ terminals in the candidate pool.
+
+ All output formats include, for each process, the process id
+ PID, control terminal of the process TT, cpu time used by
+ the process TIME (this includes both user and system time),
+ the state STAT of the process, and an indication of the COM-
+ MAND which is running. The state is given by a sequence of
+ letters, e.g. ``RWNA''. The first letter indicates the run-
+ nability of the process: R for runnable processes, T for
+ stopped processes, P for processes in page wait, D for those
+ in disk (or other short term) waits, S for those sleeping
+ for less than about 20 seconds, and I for idle (sleeping
+ longer than about 20 seconds) processes. Additional charac-
+ ters after these, if any, indicate additional state informa-
+ tion. The letter W indicates that a process is swapped out,
+ showing W if it is, or a blank if it is loaded (in-core). A
+ process which has specified a soft limit on memory require-
+ ments and which is exceeding that limit shows >; such a pro-
+ cess is (necessarily) not swapped. An additional letter may
+ indicate whether a process is running with altered CPU
+ scheduling priority (nice); if the process priority is
+ reduced, an N is shown, if the process priority has been
+ artificially raised then a `<' is shown. The final optional
+ letter indicates any special treatment of the process for
+ virtual memory replacement; the letters correspond to
+ options to the _\bv_\ba_\bd_\bv_\bi_\bs_\be(2) call; currently the possibilities
+ are A standing for VA_ANOM and S for VA_SEQL. An A typi-
+ cally represents a _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bp(1) in garbage collection, and S is
+ typical of large image processing programs which are using
+ virtual memory to sequentially address voluminous data.
+
+ Here are the options:
+
+ a\ba asks for information about all processes with terminals
+ (ordinarily only one's own processes are displayed).
+
+ c\bc prints the command name, as stored internally in the
+ system for purposes of accounting, rather than the com-
+ mand arguments, which are kept in the process' address
+ space. This is more reliable, if less informative,
+ since the process is free to destroy the latter
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 10, 1988 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PS(1)
+
+
+
+ information.
+
+ e\be Asks for the environment to be printed as well as the
+ arguments to the command.
+
+ g\bg Asks for all processes. Without this option, _\bp_\bs only
+ prints ``interesting'' processes. Processes are deemed
+ to be uninteresting if they are process group leaders.
+ This normally eliminates top-level command interpreters
+ and processes waiting for users to login on free termi-
+ nals.
+
+ k\bk causes the file /_\bv_\bm_\bc_\bo_\br_\be is used in place of /_\bd_\be_\bv/_\bk_\bm_\be_\bm
+ and /_\bd_\be_\bv/_\bm_\be_\bm. This is used for postmortem system
+ debugging.
+
+ l\bl asks for a long listing, with fields PPID, CP, PRI, NI,
+ ADDR, SIZE, RSS and WCHAN as described below.
+
+ n\bn Asks for numerical output. In a long listing, the
+ WCHAN field is printed numerically rather than symboli-
+ cally, or, in a user listing, the USER field is
+ replaced by a UID field.
+
+ s\bs Adds the size SSIZ of the kernel stack of each process
+ (for use by system maintainers) to the basic output
+ format.
+
+ t\bt_\bx restricts output to processes whose controlling tty is
+ _\bx (which should be specified as printed by _\bp_\bs, e.g. _\bt_\b3
+ for tty3, _\bt_\bc_\bo for console, _\bt_\bd_\b0 for ttyd0, _\bt? for
+ processes with no tty, _\bt for processes at the current
+ tty, etc). This option must be the last one given.
+
+ u\bu A user oriented output is produced. This includes
+ fields USER, %CPU, NICE, SIZE, and RSS as described
+ below.
+
+ v\bv A version of the output containing virtual memory
+ statistics is output. This includes fields RE, SL,
+ PAGEIN, SIZE, RSS, LIM, TSIZ, TRS, %CPU and %MEM,
+ described below.
+
+ w\bw Use a wide output format (132 columns rather than 80);
+ if repeated, e.g. ww, use arbitrarily wide output.
+ This information is used to decide how much of long
+ commands to print.
+
+ x\bx asks even about processes with no terminal.
+
+ U\bU causes ps to update a private database where it keeps
+ system information. Thus ``ps U'' should be included
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 10, 1988 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PS(1)
+
+
+
+ in the /etc/rc file.
+
+ #\b# A process number may be given, (indicated here by #),
+ in which case the output is restricted to that process.
+ This option must also be last.
+
+ A second argument is taken to be the file containing the
+ system's namelist. Otherwise, /vmunix is used. A third
+ argument tells _\bp_\bs where to look for _\bc_\bo_\br_\be if the k\bk option is
+ given, instead of /vmcore. If a fourth argument is given,
+ it is taken to be the name of a swap file to use instead of
+ the default /dev/drum.
+
+ Fields which are not common to all output formats:
+ USER name of the owner of the process
+ %CPU cpu utilization of the process; this is a decaying
+ average over up to a minute of previous (real)
+ time. Since the time base over which this is com-
+ puted varies (since processes may be very young)
+ it is possible for the sum of all %CPU fields to
+ exceed 100%.
+ NICE (or NI) process scheduling increment (see _\bs_\be_\bt_\b-
+ _\bp_\br_\bi_\bo_\br_\bi_\bt_\by(2))
+ SIZE virtual size of the process (in 1024 byte units)
+ RSS real memory (resident set) size of the process (in
+ 1024 byte units)
+ LIM soft limit on memory used, specified via a call to
+ _\bs_\be_\bt_\br_\bl_\bi_\bm_\bi_\bt(2); if no limit has been specified then
+ shown as _\bx_\bx
+ TSIZ size of text (shared program) image
+ TRS size of resident (real memory) set of text
+ %MEM percentage of real memory used by this process.
+ RE residency time of the process (seconds in core)
+ SL sleep time of the process (seconds blocked)
+ PAGEIN number of disk i/o's resulting from references by
+ the process to pages not loaded in core.
+ UID numerical user-id of process owner
+ PPID numerical id of parent of process
+ CP short-term cpu utilization factor (used in
+ scheduling)
+ PRI process priority (non-positive when in non-
+ interruptible wait)
+ ADDR swap address of the process
+ WCHAN event on which process is waiting (an address in
+ the system). A symbol is chosen that classifies
+ the address, unless numerical output is requested
+ (see the n\bn flag). In this case, the initial part
+ of the address is trimmed off and is printed hexa-
+ decimally, e.g., 0x80004000 prints as 4000.
+
+ F flags associated with process as in <_\bs_\by_\bs/_\bp_\br_\bo_\bc._\bh>:
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 10, 1988 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PS(1)
+
+
+
+ SLOAD 000001 in core
+ SSYS 000002 swapper or pager process
+ SLOCK 000004 process being swapped out
+ SSWAP 000008 save area flag
+ STRC 000010 process is being traced
+ SWTED 000020 another tracing flag
+ SULOCK 000040 user settable lock in core
+ SPAGE 000080 process in page wait state
+ SKEEP 000100 another flag to prevent swap out
+ SDLYU 000200 delayed unlock of pages
+ SWEXIT 000400 working on exiting
+ SPHYSIO 000800 doing physical i/o (bio.c)
+ SVFORK 001000 process resulted from vfork()
+ SVFDONE 002000 another vfork flag
+ SNOVM 004000 no vm, parent in a vfork()
+ SPAGI 008000 init data space on demand from inode
+ SANOM 010000 system detected anomalous vm behavior
+ SUANOM 020000 user warned of anomalous vm behavior
+ STIMO 040000 timing out during sleep
+ SDETACH 080000 detached inherited by init
+ SOUSIG 100000 using old signal mechanism
+
+ A process that has exited and has a parent that has not yet
+ waited for the process is marked <defunct>; a process which
+ is blocked trying to exit is marked <exiting>; _\bP_\bs makes an
+ educated guess as to the file name and arguments given when
+ the process was created by examining memory or the swap
+ area. The method is inherently somewhat unreliable and in
+ any event a process is entitled to destroy this information,
+ so the names cannot be counted on too much.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /vmunix system namelist
+ /dev/kmem kernel memory
+ /dev/drum swap device
+ /vmcore core file
+ /dev searched to find swap device and tty names
+ /etc/psdatabase system namelist, device, and wait channel
+ information
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ kill(1), w(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Things can change while _\bp_\bs is running; the picture it gives
+ is only a close approximation to reality.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 March 10, 1988 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PTX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PTX(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ptx - permuted index
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpt\btx\bx [ option ] ... [ input [ output ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bt_\bx generates a permuted index to file _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt on file _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt
+ (standard input and output default). It has three phases:
+ the first does the permutation, generating one line for each
+ keyword in an input line. The keyword is rotated to the
+ front. The permuted file is then sorted. Finally, the
+ sorted lines are rotated so the keyword comes at the middle
+ of the page. _\bP_\bt_\bx produces output in the form:
+
+ .xx "tail" "before keyword" "keyword and after" "head"
+
+ where .xx may be an _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf or _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1) macro for user-defined
+ formatting. The _\bb_\be_\bf_\bo_\br_\be _\bk_\be_\by_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd and _\bk_\be_\by_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd _\ba_\bn_\bd _\ba_\bf_\bt_\be_\br fields
+ incorporate as much of the line as will fit around the key-
+ word when it is printed at the middle of the page. _\bT_\ba_\bi_\bl and
+ _\bh_\be_\ba_\bd, at least one of which is an empty string "", are
+ wrapped-around pieces small enough to fit in the unused
+ space at the opposite end of the line. When original text
+ must be discarded, `/' marks the spot.
+
+ The following options can be applied:
+
+ -\b-f\bf Fold upper and lower case letters for sorting.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Prepare the output for the phototypesetter; the default
+ line length is 100 characters.
+
+ -\b-w\bw _\bn Use the next argument, _\bn, as the width of the output
+ line. The default line length is 72 characters.
+
+ -\b-g\bg _\bn Use the next argument, _\bn, as the number of characters
+ to allow for each gap among the four parts of the line
+ as finally printed. The default gap is 3 characters.
+
+ -\b-o\bo only
+ Use as keywords only the words given in the _\bo_\bn_\bl_\by file.
+
+ -\b-i\bi ignore
+ Do not use as keywords any words given in the _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be
+ file. If the -\b-i\bi and -\b-o\bo options are missing, use
+ /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\bl_\bi_\bb/_\be_\bi_\bg_\bn as the _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be file.
+
+ -\b-b\bb break
+ Use the characters in the _\bb_\br_\be_\ba_\bk file to separate words.
+ In any case, tab, newline, and space characters are
+ always used as break characters.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PTX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PTX(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-r\br Take any leading nonblank characters of each input line
+ to be a reference identifier (as to a page or chapter)
+ separate from the text of the line. Attach that iden-
+ tifier as a 5th field on each output line.
+
+ The index for this manual was generated using _\bp_\bt_\bx.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/bin/sort
+ /usr/lib/eign
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Line length counts do not account for overstriking or pro-
+ portional spacing.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PWD(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PWD(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pwd - working directory name
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpw\bwd\bd
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bw_\bd prints the pathname of the working (current) directory.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cd(1), csh(1), getwd(3)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ In _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) the command _\bd_\bi_\br_\bs is always faster (although it can
+ give a different answer in the rare case that the current
+ directory or a containing directory was moved after the
+ shell descended into it).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PX(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ px - Pascal interpreter
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpx\bx [ obj [ argument ... ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bx interprets the abstract machine code generated by _\bp_\bi. The
+ first argument is the file to be interpreted, and defaults
+ to _\bo_\bb_\bj; remaining arguments are available to the Pascal pro-
+ gram using the built-ins _\ba_\br_\bg_\bv and _\ba_\br_\bg_\bc. _\bP_\bx is also invoked
+ by _\bp_\bi_\bx when running `load and go'.
+
+ If the program terminates abnormally an error message and a
+ control flow backtrace are printed. The number of state-
+ ments executed and total execution time are printed after
+ normal termination. The p\bp option of _\bp_\bi suppresses all of
+ this except the message indicating the cause of abnormal
+ termination.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ obj default object file
+ pmon.out profile data file
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ Berkeley Pascal User's Manual
+ pi(1), pix(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Most run-time error messages are self-explanatory. Some of
+ the more unusual ones are:
+
+ Reference to an inactive file
+ A file other than _\bi_\bn_\bp_\bu_\bt or _\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt was used before a
+ call to _\br_\be_\bs_\be_\bt or _\br_\be_\bw_\br_\bi_\bt_\be.
+
+ Statement count limit exceeded
+ The limit of 500,000 executed statements (which
+ prevents excessive looping or recursion) has been
+ exceeded.
+
+ Bad data found on integer read
+ Bad data found on real read
+ Usually, non-numeric input was found for a number.
+ For reals, Pascal requires digits before and after the
+ decimal point so that numbers like `.1' or `21.' evoke
+ the second diagnostic.
+
+ panic: _\bS_\bo_\bm_\be _\bm_\be_\bs_\bs_\ba_\bg_\be
+ Indicates an internal inconsistency detected in _\bp_\bx
+ probably due to a Pascal system bug.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PX(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PX(1)
+
+
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bRS\bS
+ Charles B. Haley, William Joy, and Ken Thompson
+ VAX-11 version by Kirk McKusick
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Post-mortem traceback is not limited; infinite recursion
+ leads to almost infinite traceback.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PXP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PXP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pxp - Pascal execution profiler
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpx\bxp\bp [ -\b-a\bac\bcd\bde\bef\bfj\bjn\bns\bst\btu\buw\bw_\b_ ] [ -\b-2\b23\b34\b45\b56\b67\b78\b89\b9 ] [ -\b-z\bz [ name ... ] ]
+ name.p
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bx_\bp can be used to obtain execution profiles of Pascal pro-
+ grams or as a pretty-printer. To produce an execution pro-
+ file all that is necessary is to translate the program
+ specifying the z\bz option to _\bp_\bi or _\bp_\bi_\bx, to execute the pro-
+ gram, and to then issue the command
+
+ p\bpx\bxp\bp -\b-z\bz name.p
+
+ A reformatted listing is output if none of the c\bc, t\bt, or z\bz
+ options are specified; thus
+
+ p\bpx\bxp\bp old.p > new.p
+
+ places a pretty-printed version of the program in `old.p' in
+ the file `new.p'.
+
+ The use of the following options of _\bp_\bx_\bp is discussed in sec-
+ tions 2.6, 5.4, 5.5 and 5.10 of the _\bB_\be_\br_\bk_\be_\bl_\be_\by _\bP_\ba_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bl _\bU_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs
+ _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl.
+
+ -\b-a\ba Print the bodies of all procedures and functions in
+ the profile; even those which were never executed.
+
+ -\b-c\bc Extract profile data from the file _\bc_\bo_\br_\be.
+
+ -\b-d\bd Include declaration parts in a profile.
+
+ -\b-e\be Eliminate i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be directives when reformatting a file;
+ the i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be is replaced by the reformatted contents of
+ the specified file.
+
+ -\b-f\bf Fully parenthesize expressions.
+
+ -\b-j\bj Left justify all procedures and functions.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Eject a new page as each file is included; in pro-
+ files, print a blank line at the top of the page.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Strip comments from the input text.
+
+ -\b-t\bt Print a table summarizing p\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bed\bdu\bur\bre\be and f\bfu\bun\bnc\bct\bti\bio\bon\bn call
+ counts.
+
+ -\b-u\bu Card image mode; only the first 72 characters of input
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+PXP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PXP(1)
+
+
+
+ lines are used.
+
+ -\b-w\bw Suppress warning diagnostics.
+
+ -\b-z\bz Generate an execution profile. If no _\bn_\ba_\bm_\bes, are given
+ the profile is of the entire program. If a list of
+ names is given, then only any specified p\bpr\bro\boc\bce\bed\bdu\bur\bre\bes or
+ f\bfu\bun\bnc\bct\bti\bio\bon\bns and the contents of any specified i\bin\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be
+ files will appear in the profile.
+
+ -\b-_\b_ Underline keywords.
+
+ -\b-_\bd With _\bd a digit, 2 <\b_ _\bd <\b_ 9, causes _\bp_\bx_\bp to use _\bd spaces
+ as the basic indenting unit. The default is 4.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ name.p input file
+ name.i include file(s)
+ pmon.out profile data
+ core profile data source with -\b-c\bc
+ /usr/lib/how_pxp information on basic usage
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ Berkeley Pascal User's Manual
+ pi(1), px(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ For a basic explanation do
+
+ p\bpx\bxp\bp
+
+ Error diagnostics include `No profile data in file' with the
+ c\bc option if the z\bz option was not enabled to _\bp_\bi; `Not a Pas-
+ cal system core file' if the core is not from a _\bp_\bx execu-
+ tion; `Program and count data do not correspond' if the pro-
+ gram was changed after compilation, before profiling; or if
+ the wrong program is specified.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ William Joy
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Does not place multiple statements per line.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+PXREF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual PXREF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ pxref - Pascal cross-reference program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ p\bpx\bxr\bre\bef\bf [ -\b- ] name
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bP_\bx_\br_\be_\bf makes a line numbered listing and a cross-reference of
+ identifier usage for the program in _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be. The optional `-\b-'
+ argument suppresses the listing. The keywords g\bgo\bot\bto\bo and
+ l\bla\bab\bbe\bel\bl are treated as identifiers for the purpose of the
+ cross-reference. I\bIn\bnc\bcl\blu\bud\bde\be directives are not processed, but
+ cause the placement of an entry indexed by `#include' in the
+ cross-reference.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ Berkeley Pascal User's Manual
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Niklaus Wirth
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Identifiers are trimmed to 10 characters.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+QUOTA(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual QUOTA(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ quota - display disc usage and limits
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ q\bqu\buo\bot\bta\ba [ -\b-q\bqv\bv ] [ user ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bQ_\bu_\bo_\bt_\ba displays users' disc usage and limits. Only the
+ super-user may use the optional _\bu_\bs_\be_\br argument to view the
+ limits of users other than himself.
+
+ The -\b-q\bq flag prints a more terse message, containing only
+ information on file systems where usage is over quota.
+
+ If a -\b-v\bv flag is supplied, _\bq_\bu_\bo_\bt_\ba will also display user's
+ quotas on file systems where no storage is allocated.
+
+ _\bQ_\bu_\bo_\bt_\ba reports only on file systems which have disc quotas.
+ If _\bq_\bu_\bo_\bt_\ba exits with a non-zero status, one or more file sys-
+ tems are over quota.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ quota(2), quotaon(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RANLIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RANLIB(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ranlib - convert archives to random libraries
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\bra\ban\bnl\bli\bib\bb [ -\b-t\bt ] archive ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\ba_\bn_\bl_\bi_\bb converts each _\ba_\br_\bc_\bh_\bi_\bv_\be to a form which the loader can
+ load more rapidly. _\bR_\ba_\bn_\bl_\bi_\bb does this by adding a table of
+ contents called _\b__\b_.\b.S\bSY\bYM\bMD\bDE\bEF\bF to the beginning of the archive.
+ _\bR_\ba_\bn_\bl_\bi_\bb uses _\ba_\br(1) to reconstruct the archive, so that suffi-
+ cient temporary file space must be available in the file
+ system which contains the current directory.
+
+ If given the -\b-t\bt option, ranlib only "touches" the archives
+ and does not modify them. This is useful after copying an
+ archive or using the -\b-t\bt option of _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be(1) in order to avoid
+ having _\bl_\bd(1) complain about an "out of date" symbol table.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ld(1), ar(1), lorder(1), make(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Because generation of a library by _\ba_\br and randomization of
+ the library by _\br_\ba_\bn_\bl_\bi_\bb are separate processes, phase errors
+ are possible. The loader, _\bl_\bd, warns when the modification
+ date of a library is more recent than the creation date of
+ its dictionary; but this means that you get the warning
+ even if you only copy the library.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 3, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RATFOR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RATFOR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ratfor - rational Fortran dialect
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\bra\bat\btf\bfo\bor\br [ option ... ] [ filename ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\ba_\bt_\bf_\bo_\br converts a rational dialect of Fortran into ordinary
+ irrational Fortran. _\bR_\ba_\bt_\bf_\bo_\br provides control flow constructs
+ essentially identical to those in C:
+
+ statement grouping:
+ { statement; statement; statement }
+
+ decision-making:
+ if (condition) statement [ else statement ]
+ switch (integer value) {
+ case integer: statement
+ ...
+ [ default: ] statement
+ }
+
+ loops:
+ while (condition) statement
+ for (expression; condition; expression) statement
+ do limits statement
+ repeat statement [ until (condition) ]
+ break
+ next
+
+ and some syntactic sugar to make programs easier to read and write:
+
+ free form input:
+ multiple statements/line; automatic continuation
+
+ comments:
+ # this is a comment
+
+ translation of relationals:
+ >, >=, etc., become .GT., .GE., etc.
+
+ return (expression)
+ returns expression to caller from function
+
+ define:
+ define name replacement
+
+ include:
+ include filename
+
+ _\bR_\ba_\bt_\bf_\bo_\br is best used with _\bf_\b7_\b7(1).
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RATFOR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RATFOR(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ f77(1)
+ B. W. Kernighan and P. J. Plauger, _\bS_\bo_\bf_\bt_\bw_\ba_\br_\be _\bT_\bo_\bo_\bl_\bs, Addison-
+ Wesley, 1976.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RCP(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ rcp - remote file copy
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\brc\bcp\bp [ -\b-p\bp ] file1 file2
+ r\brc\bcp\bp [ -\b-p\bp ] [ -\b-r\br ] file ... directory
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\bc_\bp copies files between machines. Each _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be or _\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by
+ argument is either a remote file name of the form
+ ``rhost:path'', or a local file name (containing no `:'
+ characters, or a `/' before any `:'s).
+
+ If the -\b-r\br option is specified and any of the source files
+ are directories, _\br_\bc_\bp copies each subtree rooted at that
+ name; in this case the destination must be a directory.
+
+ By default, the mode and owner of _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 are preserved if it
+ already existed; otherwise the mode of the source file modi-
+ fied by the _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk(2) on the destination host is used. The
+ -\b-p\bp option causes _\br_\bc_\bp to attempt to preserve (duplicate) in
+ its copies the modification times and modes of the source
+ files, ignoring the _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk.
+
+ If _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh is not a full path name, it is interpreted relative
+ to your login directory on _\br_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt. A _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh on a remote host
+ may be quoted (using \, ", or ') so that the metacharacters
+ are interpreted remotely.
+
+ _\bR_\bc_\bp does not prompt for passwords; your current local user
+ name must exist on _\br_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt and allow remote command execution
+ via _\br_\bs_\bh(1C).
+
+ _\bR_\bc_\bp handles third party copies, where neither source nor
+ target files are on the current machine. Hostnames may also
+ take the form ``rname@rhost'' to use _\br_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be rather than the
+ current user name on the remote host.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ cp(1), ftp(1C), rsh(1C), rlogin(1C)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Doesn't detect all cases where the target of a copy might be
+ a file in cases where only a directory should be legal.
+
+ Is confused by any output generated by commands in a .login,
+ .profile, or .cshrc file on the remote host.
+
+ The destination user and hostname may have to be specified
+ as ``rhost.rname'' when the destination machine is running
+ the 4.2BSD version of _\br_\bc_\bp.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 16, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RCP(1C)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 16, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ rdist - remote file distribution program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\brd\bdi\bis\bst\bt [ -nqbRhivwy ] [ -f distfile ] [ -d var=value ] [ -m
+ host ] [ name ... ]
+
+ r\brd\bdi\bis\bst\bt [ -nqbRhivwy ] -c name ... [login@]host[:dest]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt is a program to maintain identical copies of files
+ over multiple hosts. It preserves the owner, group, mode,
+ and mtime of files if possible and can update programs that
+ are executing. _\bR_\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt reads commands from _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be to direct
+ the updating of files and/or directories. If _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is
+ `-', the standard input is used. If no -\b-f\bf option is
+ present, the program looks first for `distfile', then `Dist-
+ file' to use as the input. If no names are specified on the
+ command line, _\br_\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt will update all of the files and direc-
+ tories listed in _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. Otherwise, the argument is taken
+ to be the name of a file to be updated or the label of a
+ command to execute. If label and file names conflict, it is
+ assumed to be a label. These may be used together to update
+ specific files using specific commands.
+
+ The -\b-c\bc option forces _\br_\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt to interpret the remaining argu-
+ ments as a small _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. The equivalent distfile is as
+ follows.
+
+ ( _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ) -> [_\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn@]_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt
+ install [_\bd_\be_\bs_\bt] ;
+
+
+ Other options:
+
+ -\b-d\bd Define _\bv_\ba_\br to have _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be. The -\b-d\bd option is used to
+ define or override variable definitions in the _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\b-
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. _\bV_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be can be the empty string, one name, or a
+ list of names surrounded by parentheses and separated
+ by tabs and/or spaces.
+
+ -\b-m\bm Limit which machines are to be updated. Multiple -\b-m\bm
+ arguments can be given to limit updates to a subset of
+ the hosts listed the _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Print the commands without executing them. This option
+ is useful for debugging _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+ -\b-q\bq Quiet mode. Files that are being modified are normally
+ printed on standard output. The -\b-q\bq option suppresses
+ this.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-R\bR Remove extraneous files. If a directory is being
+ updated, any files that exist on the remote host that
+ do not exist in the master directory are removed. This
+ is useful for maintaining truely identical copies of
+ directories.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Follow symbolic links. Copy the file that the link
+ points to rather than the link itself.
+
+ -\b-i\bi Ignore unresolved links. _\bR_\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt will normally try to
+ maintain the link structure of files being transfered
+ and warn the user if all the links cannot be found.
+
+ -\b-v\bv Verify that the files are up to date on all the hosts.
+ Any files that are out of date will be displayed but no
+ files will be changed nor any mail sent.
+
+ -\b-w\bw Whole mode. The whole file name is appended to the des-
+ tination directory name. Normally, only the last com-
+ ponent of a name is used when renaming files. This
+ will preserve the directory structure of the files
+ being copied instead of flattening the directory struc-
+ ture. For example, renaming a list of files such as (
+ dir1/f1 dir2/f2 ) to dir3 would create files
+ dir3/dir1/f1 and dir3/dir2/f2 instead of dir3/f1 and
+ dir3/f2.
+
+ -\b-y\by Younger mode. Files are normally updated if their _\bm_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be
+ and _\bs_\bi_\bz_\be (see _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(2)) disagree. The -\b-y\by option causes
+ _\br_\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt not to update files that are younger than the
+ master copy. This can be used to prevent newer copies
+ on other hosts from being replaced. A warning message
+ is printed for files which are newer than the master
+ copy.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Binary comparison. Perform a binary comparison and
+ update files if they differ rather than comparing dates
+ and sizes.
+
+ _\bD_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be contains a sequence of entries that specify the
+ files to be copied, the destination hosts, and what opera-
+ tions to perform to do the updating. Each entry has one of
+ the following formats.
+
+ <variable name> `=' <name list>
+ [ label: ] <source list> `->' <destination list> <command list>
+ [ label: ] <source list> `::' <time_stamp file> <command list>
+
+ The first format is used for defining variables. The second
+ format is used for distributing files to other hosts. The
+ third format is used for making lists of files that have
+ been changed since some given date. The _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1)
+
+
+
+ specifies a list of files and/or directories on the local
+ host which are to be used as the master copy for distribu-
+ tion. The _\bd_\be_\bs_\bt_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is the list of hosts to which
+ these files are to be copied. Each file in the source list
+ is added to a list of changes if the file is out of date on
+ the host which is being updated (second format) or the file
+ is newer than the time stamp file (third format).
+
+ Labels are optional. They are used to identify a command for
+ partial updates.
+
+ Newlines, tabs, and blanks are only used as separators and
+ are otherwise ignored. Comments begin with `#' and end with
+ a newline.
+
+ Variables to be expanded begin with `$' followed by one
+ character or a name enclosed in curly braces (see the exam-
+ ples at the end).
+
+ The source and destination lists have the following format:
+
+ <name>
+ or
+ `(' <zero or more names separated by white-space> `)'
+
+ The shell meta-characters `[', `]', `{', `}', `*', and `?'
+ are recognized and expanded (on the local host only) in the
+ same way as _\bc_\bs_\bh(1). They can be escaped with a backslash.
+ The `~' character is also expanded in the same way as _\bc_\bs_\bh
+ but is expanded separately on the local and destination
+ hosts. When the -\b-w\bw option is used with a file name that
+ begins with `~', everything except the home directory is
+ appended to the destination name. File names which do not
+ begin with `/' or `~' use the destination user's home direc-
+ tory as the root directory for the rest of the file name.
+
+ The command list consists of zero or more commands of the
+ following format.
+
+ `install' <options> opt_dest_name `;'
+ `notify' <name list> `;'
+ `except' <name list> `;'
+ `except_pat' <pattern list>`;'
+ `special' <name list> string `;'
+
+
+ The _\bi_\bn_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bl_\bl command is used to copy out of date files and/or
+ directories. Each source file is copied to each host in the
+ destination list. Directories are recursively copied in the
+ same way. _\bO_\bp_\bt__\bd_\be_\bs_\bt__\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is an optional parameter to rename
+ files. If no _\bi_\bn_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bl_\bl command appears in the command list or
+ the destination name is not specified, the source file name
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1)
+
+
+
+ is used. Directories in the path name will be created if
+ they do not exist on the remote host. To help prevent
+ disasters, a non-empty directory on a target host will never
+ be replaced with a regular file or a symbolic link. How-
+ ever, under the `-R' option a non-empty directory will be
+ removed if the corresponding filename is completely absent
+ on the master host. The _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs are `-R', `-h', `-i', `-v',
+ `-w', `-y', and `-b' and have the same semantics as options
+ on the command line except they only apply to the files in
+ the source list. The login name used on the destination
+ host is the same as the local host unless the destination
+ name is of the format ``login@host".
+
+ The _\bn_\bo_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by command is used to mail the list of files updated
+ (and any errors that may have occured) to the listed names.
+ If no `@' appears in the name, the destination host is
+ appended to the name (e.g., name1@host, name2@host, ...).
+
+ The _\be_\bx_\bc_\be_\bp_\bt command is used to update all of the files in the
+ source list e\bex\bxc\bce\bep\bpt\bt for the files listed in _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. This
+ is usually used to copy everything in a directory except
+ certain files.
+
+ The _\be_\bx_\bc_\be_\bp_\bt__\bp_\ba_\bt command is like the _\be_\bx_\bc_\be_\bp_\bt command except
+ that _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is a list of regular expressions (see
+ _\be_\bd(1) for details). If one of the patterns matches some
+ string within a file name, that file will be ignored. Note
+ that since `\' is a quote character, it must be doubled to
+ become part of the regular expression. Variables are
+ expanded in _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt but not shell file pattern matching
+ characters. To include a `$', it must be escaped with `\'.
+
+ The _\bs_\bp_\be_\bc_\bi_\ba_\bl command is used to specify _\bs_\bh(1) commands that
+ are to be executed on the remote host after the file in _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is updated or installed. If the _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is omitted
+ then the shell commands will be executed for every file
+ updated or installed. The shell variable `FILE' is set to
+ the current filename before executing the commands in
+ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg. _\bS_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg starts and ends with `"' and can cross mul-
+ tiple lines in _\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. Multiple commands to the shell
+ should be separated by `;'. Commands are executed in the
+ user's home directory on the host being updated. The _\bs_\bp_\be_\b-
+ _\bc_\bi_\ba_\bl command can be used to rebuild private databases, etc.
+ after a program has been updated.
+
+ The following is a small example.
+
+ HOSTS = ( matisse root@arpa)
+
+ FILES = ( /bin /lib /usr/bin /usr/games
+ /usr/include/{*.h,{stand,sys,vax*,pascal,machine}/*.h}
+ /usr/lib /usr/man/man? /usr/ucb /usr/local/rdist )
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1)
+
+
+
+ EXLIB = ( Mail.rc aliases aliases.dir aliases.pag crontab dshrc
+ sendmail.cf sendmail.fc sendmail.hf sendmail.st uucp vfont )
+
+ ${FILES} -> ${HOSTS}
+ install -R ;
+ except /usr/lib/${EXLIB} ;
+ except /usr/games/lib ;
+ special /usr/lib/sendmail "/usr/lib/sendmail -bz" ;
+
+ srcs:
+ /usr/src/bin -> arpa
+ except_pat ( \\.o\$ /SCCS\$ ) ;
+
+ IMAGEN = (ips dviimp catdvi)
+
+ imagen:
+ /usr/local/${IMAGEN} -> arpa
+ install /usr/local/lib ;
+ notify ralph ;
+
+ ${FILES} :: stamp.cory
+ notify root@cory ;
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ distfile input command file
+ /tmp/rdist* temporary file for update lists
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1), csh(1), stat(2)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ A complaint about mismatch of rdist version numbers may
+ really stem from some problem with starting your shell,
+ e.g., you are in too many groups.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Source files must reside on the local host where rdist is
+ executed.
+
+ There is no easy way to have a special command executed
+ after all files in a directory have been updated.
+
+ Variable expansion only works for name lists; there should
+ be a general macro facility.
+
+ _\bR_\bd_\bi_\bs_\bt aborts on files which have a negative mtime (before
+ Jan 1, 1970).
+
+ There should be a `force' option to allow replacement of
+ non-empty directories by regular files or symlinks. A means
+ of updating file modes and owners of otherwise identical
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RDIST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RDIST(1)
+
+
+
+ files is also needed.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 13, 1986 6
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+REFER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual REFER(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ refer - find and insert literature references in documents
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\bre\bef\bfe\ber\br [ -\b-a\ba ] [ -\b-b\bb ] [ -\b-c\bc ] [ -\b-e\be ] [ -\b-f\bf_\bn ] [ -\b-k\bk_\bx ] [ -\b-l\bl_\bm,_\bn ]
+ [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-p\bp bib ] [ -\b-s\bs_\bk_\be_\by_\bs ] [ -\b-B\bB_\bl._\bm ] [ -\b-P\bP ] [ -\b-S\bS ] [ file
+ ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br is a preprocessor for _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf or _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1) that finds and
+ formats references for footnotes or endnotes. It is also
+ the base for a series of programs designed to index, search,
+ sort, and print stand-alone bibliographies, or other data
+ entered in the appropriate form.
+
+ Given an incomplete citation with sufficiently precise key-
+ words, _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br will search a bibliographic database for refer-
+ ences containing these keywords anywhere in the title,
+ author, journal, etc. The input file (or standard input) is
+ copied to standard output, except for lines between .[ and
+ .] delimiters, which are assumed to contain keywords, and
+ are replaced by information from the bibliographic database.
+ The user may also search different databases, override par-
+ ticular fields, or add new fields. The reference data, from
+ whatever source, are assigned to a set of _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf strings.
+ Macro packages such as _\bm_\bs(7) print the finished reference
+ text from these strings. By default references are flagged
+ by footnote numbers.
+
+ The following options are available:
+
+ -\b-a\ba_\bn Reverse the first _\bn author names (Jones, J. A. instead
+ of J. A. Jones). If _\bn is omitted all author names are
+ reversed.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Bare mode: do not put any flags in text (neither
+ numbers nor labels).
+
+ -\b-c\bc_\bk_\be_\by_\bs
+ Capitalize (with CAPS SMALL CAPS) the fields whose
+ key-letters are in _\bk_\be_\by_\bs.
+
+ -\b-e\be Instead of leaving the references where encountered,
+ accumulate them until a sequence of the form
+ .[
+ $LIST$
+ .]
+ is encountered, and then write out all references col-
+ lected so far. Collapse references to same source.
+
+ -\b-f\bf_\bn Set the footnote number to _\bn instead of the default of
+ 1 (one). With labels rather than numbers, this flag
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+REFER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual REFER(1)
+
+
+
+ is a no-op.
+
+ -\b-k\bk_\bx Instead of numbering references, use labels as speci-
+ fied in a reference data line beginning %_\bx; by default
+ _\bx is L\bL.\b.
+
+ -\b-l\bl_\bm,\b,_\bn Instead of numbering references, use labels made from
+ the senior author's last name and the year of publica-
+ tion. Only the first _\bm letters of the last name and
+ the last _\bn digits of the date are used. If either _\bm
+ or _\bn is omitted the entire name or date respectively
+ is used.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Do not search the default file /usr/dict/papers/Ind.
+ If there is a REFER environment variable, the speci-
+ fied file will be searched instead of the default
+ file; in this case the -\b-n\bn flag has no effect.
+
+ -\b-p\bp _\bb_\bi_\bb
+ Take the next argument _\bb_\bi_\bb as a file of references to
+ be searched. The default file is searched last.
+
+ -\b-s\bs_\bk_\be_\by_\bs
+ Sort references by fields whose key-letters are in the
+ _\bk_\be_\by_\bs string; permute reference numbers in text accord-
+ ingly. Implies -\b-e\be. The key-letters in _\bk_\be_\by_\bs may be
+ followed by a number to indicate how many such fields
+ are used, with +\b+ taken as a very large number. The
+ default is A\bAD\bD which sorts on the senior author and
+ then date; to sort, for example, on all authors and
+ then title, use -\b-s\bsA\bA+\b+T\bT.
+
+ -\b-B\bB_\bl._\bm Bibliography mode. Take a file composed of records
+ separated by blank lines, and turn them into _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf
+ input. Label _\bl will be turned into the macro ._\bm with
+ _\bl defaulting to %\b%X\bX and ._\bm defaulting to .\b.A\bAP\bP (annota-
+ tion paragraph).
+
+ -\b-P\bP Place punctuation marks .,:;?! after the reference
+ signal, rather than before. (Periods and commas used
+ to be done with strings.)
+
+ -\b-S\bS Produce references in the Natural or Social Science
+ format.
+
+ To use your own references, put them in the format described
+ below. They can be searched more rapidly by running _\bi_\bn_\bd_\bx_\b-
+ _\bb_\bi_\bb(1) on them before using _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br; failure to index results
+ in a linear search. When _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br is used with the _\be_\bq_\bn, _\bn_\be_\bq_\bn
+ or _\bt_\bb_\bl preprocessors _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br should be first, to minimize the
+ volume of data passed through pipes.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+REFER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual REFER(1)
+
+
+
+ The _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br preprocessor and associated programs expect input
+ from a file of references composed of records separated by
+ blank lines. A record is a set of lines (fields), each con-
+ taining one kind of information. Fields start on a line
+ beginning with a ``%'', followed by a key-letter, then a
+ blank, and finally the contents of the field, and continue
+ until the next line starting with ``%''. The output order-
+ ing and formatting of fields is controlled by the macros
+ specified for _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf/_\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf (for footnotes and endnotes) or
+ _\br_\bo_\bf_\bf_\bb_\bi_\bb (for stand-alone bibliographies). For a list of the
+ most common key-letters and their corresponding fields, see
+ _\ba_\bd_\bd_\bb_\bi_\bb(1). An example of a _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br entry is given below.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bE
+ %A M. E. Lesk
+ %T Some Applications of Inverted Indexes on the UNIX System
+ %B UNIX Programmer's Manual
+ %V 2b
+ %I Bell Laboratories
+ %C Murray Hill, NJ
+ %D 1978
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/dict/papers directory of default publication lists
+ /usr/lib/refer directory of companion programs
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ addbib(1), sortbib(1), roffbib(1), indxbib(1), lookbib(1)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Mike Lesk
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Blank spaces at the end of lines in bibliography fields will
+ cause the records to sort and reverse incorrectly. Sorting
+ large numbers of references causes a core dump.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tset - terminal dependent initialization
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bts\bse\bet\bt [ options ] [ -\b-m\bm [ident][test baudrate]:type ] ... [
+ type ]
+
+ r\bre\bes\bse\bet\bt [ options ] [ -\b-m\bm [ident][test baudrate]:type ] ... [
+ type ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bs_\be_\bt sets up your terminal when you first log in to a UNIX
+ system. It does terminal dependent processing such as set-
+ ting erase and kill characters, setting or resetting delays,
+ sending any sequences needed to properly initialized the
+ terminal, and the like. It first determines the _\bt_\by_\bp_\be of
+ terminal involved, and then does necessary initializations
+ and mode settings. The type of terminal attached to each
+ UNIX port is specified in the /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs(5) database. Type
+ names for terminals may be found in the _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp(5) database.
+ If a port is not wired permanently to a specific terminal
+ (not hardwired) it will be given an appropriate generic
+ identifier such as _\bd_\bi_\ba_\bl_\bu_\bp.
+
+ In the case where no arguments are specified, _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt simply
+ reads the terminal type out of the environment variable TERM
+ and re-initializes the terminal. The rest of this manual
+ concerns itself with mode and environment initialization,
+ typically done once at login, and options used at initiali-
+ zation time to determine the terminal type and set up termi-
+ nal modes.
+
+ When used in a startup script (._\bp_\br_\bo_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be for _\bs_\bh(1) users or
+ ._\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn for _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) users) it is desirable to give information
+ about the type of terminal you will usually use on ports
+ which are not hardwired. These ports are identified in
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs as _\bd_\bi_\ba_\bl_\bu_\bp or _\bp_\bl_\bu_\bg_\bb_\bo_\ba_\br_\bd or _\ba_\br_\bp_\ba_\bn_\be_\bt, etc. To
+ specify what terminal type you usually use on these ports,
+ the -\b-m\bm (map) option flag is followed by the appropriate port
+ type identifier, an optional baud rate specification, and
+ the terminal type. (The effect is to ``map'' from some con-
+ ditions to a terminal type, that is, to tell _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt ``If I'm
+ on this kind of port, guess that I'm on that kind of termi-
+ nal''.) If more than one mapping is specified, the first
+ applicable mapping prevails. A missing port type identifier
+ matches all identifiers. Any of the alternate generic names
+ given in _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp may be used for the identifier.
+
+ A _\bb_\ba_\bu_\bd_\br_\ba_\bt_\be is specified as with _\bs_\bt_\bt_\by(1), and is compared
+ with the speed of the diagnostic output (which should be the
+ control terminal). The baud rate _\bt_\be_\bs_\bt may be any combina-
+ tion of: >\b>, @\b@, <\b<, and !\b!; @\b@ means ``at'' and !\b! inverts the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+ sense of the test. To avoid problems with metacharacters,
+ it is best to place the entire argument to -\b-m\bm within ``'''
+ characters; users of _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) must also put a ``\'' before any
+ ``!'' used here.
+
+ Thus
+
+ tset -m 'dialup>300:adm3a' -m dialup:dw2 -m
+ 'plugboard:?adm3a'
+
+ causes the terminal type to be set to an _\ba_\bd_\bm_\b3_\ba if the port
+ in use is a dialup at a speed greater than 300 baud; to a
+ _\bd_\bw_\b2 if the port is (otherwise) a dialup (i.e. at 300 baud or
+ less). (N\bNO\bOT\bTE\bE:\b: the examples given here appear to take up
+ more than one line, for text processing reasons. When you
+ type in real _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt commands, you must enter them entirely on
+ one line.) If the _\bt_\by_\bp_\be finally determined by _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt begins
+ with a question mark, the user is asked if s/he really wants
+ that type. A null response means to use that type; other-
+ wise, another type can be entered which will be used
+ instead. Thus, in the above case, the user will be queried
+ on a plugboard port as to whether they are actually using an
+ _\ba_\bd_\bm_\b3_\ba.
+
+ If no mapping applies and a final _\bt_\by_\bp_\be option, not preceded
+ by a -\b-m\bm, is given on the command line then that type is
+ used; otherwise the type found in the /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs database
+ will be taken to be the terminal type. This should always
+ be the case for hardwired ports.
+
+ It is usually desirable to return the terminal type, as
+ finally determined by _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt, and information about the
+ terminal's capabilities to a shell's environment. This can
+ be done using the -\b- option; using the Bourne shell, _\bs_\bh(1):
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs...`
+
+ or using the C shell, _\bc_\bs_\bh(1):
+
+ setenv TERM `tset - _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs...`
+
+ With _\bc_\bs_\bh it is preferable to use the following command in
+ your .login file to initialize the TERM and TERMCAP environ-
+ ment variables at the same time.
+
+ eval `tset -s _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs...`
+
+ It is also convenient to make an alias in your .cshrc:
+
+ alias tset 'eval `tset -s \!*`'
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+ This allows the command:
+
+ tset 2621
+
+ to be invoked at any time to set the terminal and environ-
+ ment. N\bNo\bot\bte\be t\bto\bo B\bBo\bou\bur\brn\bne\be S\bSh\bhe\bel\bll\bl u\bus\bse\ber\brs\bs:\b: It is n\bno\bot\bt possible to get
+ this aliasing effect with a shell script, because shell
+ scripts cannot set the environment of their parent. (If a
+ process could set its parent's environment, none of this
+ nonsense would be necessary in the first place.)
+
+ These commands cause _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt to place the name of your terminal
+ in the variable TERM in the environment; see _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7).
+
+ Once the terminal type is known, _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt engages in terminal
+ driver mode setting. This normally involves sending an ini-
+ tialization sequence to the terminal, setting the single
+ character erase (and optionally the line-kill (full line
+ erase)) characters, and setting special character delays.
+ Tab and newline expansion are turned off during transmission
+ of the terminal initialization sequence.
+
+ On terminals that can backspace but not overstrike (such as
+ a CRT), and when the erase character is the default erase
+ character (`#' on standard systems), the erase character is
+ changed to BACKSPACE (Control-H).
+
+ The options are:
+
+ -\b-e\be_\bc set the erase character to be the named character _\bc on
+ all terminals, the default being the backspace charac-
+ ter on the terminal, usually ^H. The character _\bc can
+ either be typed directly, or entered using the hat
+ notation used here.
+
+ -\b-k\bk_\bc is similar to -\b-e\be but for the line kill character rather
+ than the erase character; _\bc defaults to ^X (for purely
+ historical reasons). The kill characters is left alone
+ if -\b-k\bk is not specified. The hat notation can also be
+ used for this option.
+
+ -\b-i\bi_\bc is similar to -\b-e\be but for the interrupt character rather
+ than the erase character; _\bc defaults to ^C. The hat
+ notation can also be used for this option.
+
+ -\b- The name of the terminal finally decided upon is output
+ on the standard output. This is intended to be cap-
+ tured by the shell and placed in the environment vari-
+ able TERM.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Print the sequence of _\bc_\bs_\bh commands to initialize the
+ environment variables TERM and TERMCAP based on the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+ name of the terminal finally decided upon.
+
+ -\b-n\bn On systems with the Berkeley 4BSD tty driver, specifies
+ that the new tty driver modes should be initialized for
+ this terminal. For a CRT, the CRTERASE and CRTKILL
+ modes are set only if the baud rate is 1200 or greater.
+ See tty(4) for more detail.
+
+ -\b-I\bI suppresses transmitting terminal initialization
+ strings.
+
+ -\b-Q\bQ suppresses printing the ``Erase set to'' and ``Kill set
+ to'' messages.
+
+ If t\bts\bse\bet\bt is invoked as r\bre\bes\bse\bet\bt, it will set cooked and echo
+ modes, turn off cbreak and raw modes, turn on newline trans-
+ lation, and restore special characters to a sensible state
+ before any terminal dependent processing is done. Any spe-
+ cial character that is found to be NULL or ``-1'' is reset
+ to its default value. All arguments to _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt may be used
+ with reset.
+
+ This is most useful after a program dies leaving a terminal
+ in a funny state. You may have to type ``<LF>reset<LF>'' to
+ get it to work since <CR> may not work in this state. Often
+ none of this will echo.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bES\bS
+ These examples all assume the Bourne shell and use the -
+ option. If you use _\bc_\bs_\bh, use one of the variations described
+ above. Note that a typical use of _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt in a .profile or
+ .login will also use the -\b-e\be and -\b-k\bk options, and often the -\b-n\bn
+ or -\b-Q\bQ options as well. These options have not been included
+ here to keep the examples small. (N\bNO\bOT\bTE\bE:\b: some of the exam-
+ ples given here appear to take up more than one line, for
+ text processing reasons. When you type in real _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt com-
+ mands, you must enter them entirely on one line.)
+
+ At the moment, you are on a 2621. This is suitable for typ-
+ ing by hand but not for a .profile, unless you are _\ba_\bl_\bw_\ba_\by_\bs on
+ a 2621.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - 2621`
+
+ You have an h19 at home which you dial up on, but your
+ office terminal is hardwired and known in /etc/ttys.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m dialup:h19`
+
+ You have a switch which connects everything to everything,
+ making it nearly impossible to key on what port you are com-
+ ing in on. You use a vt100 in your office at 9600 baud, and
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+ dial up to switch ports at 1200 baud from home on a 2621.
+ Sometimes you use someone elses terminal at work, so you
+ want it to ask you to make sure what terminal type you have
+ at high speeds, but at 1200 baud you are always on a 2621.
+ Note the placement of the question mark, and the quotes to
+ protect the greater than and question mark from interpreta-
+ tion by the shell.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m 'switch>1200:?vt100' -m
+ 'switch<=1200:2621'
+
+ All of the above entries will fall back on the terminal type
+ specified in /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs if none of the conditions hold. The
+ following entry is appropriate if you always dial up, always
+ at the same baud rate, on many different kinds of terminals.
+ Your most common terminal is an adm3a. It always asks you
+ what kind of terminal you are on, defaulting to adm3a.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - ?adm3a`
+
+ If the file /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs is not properly installed and you want
+ to key entirely on the baud rate, the following can be used:
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m '>1200:vt100' 2621`
+
+ Here is a fancy example to illustrate the power of _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt and
+ to hopelessly confuse anyone who has made it this far. You
+ dial up at 1200 baud or less on a concept100, sometimes over
+ switch ports and sometimes over regular dialups. You use
+ various terminals at speeds higher than 1200 over switch
+ ports, most often the terminal in your office, which is a
+ vt100. However, sometimes you log in from the university
+ you used to go to, over the ARPANET; in this case you are on
+ an ALTO emulating a dm2500. You also often log in on vari-
+ ous hardwired ports, such as the console, all of which are
+ properly entered in /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs. You want your erase charac-
+ ter set to control H, your kill character set to control U,
+ and don't want _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt to print the ``Erase set to Backspace,
+ Kill set to Control U'' message.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset -e -k^U -Q - -m
+ 'switch<=1200:concept100' -m 'switch:?vt100' -m
+ dialup:concept100 -m arpanet:dm2500`
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/ttys port name to terminal type mapping database
+ /etc/termcap terminal capability database
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), sh(1), stty(1), ttys(5), termcap(5), environ(7)
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt command is one of the first commands a user must
+ master when getting started on a UNIX system. Unfor-
+ tunately, it is one of the most complex, largely because of
+ the extra effort the user must go through to get the
+ environment of the login shell set. Something needs to be
+ done to make all this simpler, either the _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn(1) program
+ should do this stuff, or a default shell alias should be
+ made, or a way to set the environment of the parent should
+ exist.
+
+ This program can't intuit personal choices for erase, inter-
+ rupt and line kill characters, so it leaves these set to the
+ local system standards.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+REV(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual REV(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ rev - reverse lines of a file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\bre\bev\bv [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\be_\bv copies the named files to the standard output, reversing
+ the order of characters in every line. If no file is speci-
+ fied, the standard input is copied.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RLOGIN(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RLOGIN(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ rlogin - remote login
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\brl\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn rhost [ -\b-e\be_\bc ] [ -\b-8\b8 ] [ -\b-L\bL ] [ -\b-l\bl username ]
+ rhost [ -\b-e\be_\bc ] [ -\b-8\b8 ] [ -\b-L\bL ] [ -\b-l\bl username ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn connects your terminal on the current local host sys-
+ tem _\bl_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt to the remote host system _\br_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt.
+
+ Each host has a file /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bs._\be_\bq_\bu_\bi_\bv which contains a list
+ of _\br_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt's with which it shares account names. (The host
+ names must be the standard names as described in _\br_\bs_\bh(1C).)
+ When you _\br_\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn as the same user on an equivalent host, you
+ don't need to give a password. Each user may also have a
+ private equivalence list in a file .rhosts in his login
+ directory. Each line in this file should contain an _\br_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt
+ and a _\bu_\bs_\be_\br_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be separated by a space, giving additional cases
+ where logins without passwords are to be permitted. If the
+ originating user is not equivalent to the remote user, then
+ a login and password will be prompted for on the remote
+ machine as in _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn(1). To avoid some security problems,
+ the .rhosts file must be owned by either the remote user or
+ root.
+
+ The remote terminal type is the same as your local terminal
+ type (as given in your environment TERM variable). The ter-
+ minal or window size is also copied to the remote system if
+ the server supports the option, and changes in size are
+ reflected as well. All echoing takes place at the remote
+ site, so that (except for delays) the rlogin is transparent.
+ Flow control via ^S and ^Q and flushing of input and output
+ on interrupts are handled properly. The optional argument
+ -\b-8\b8 allows an eight-bit input data path at all times; other-
+ wise parity bits are stripped except when the remote side's
+ stop and start characters are other than ^S/^Q. The argu-
+ ment -\b-L\bL allows the rlogin session to be run in litout mode.
+ A line of the form ``~.'' disconnects from the remote host,
+ where ``~'' is the escape character. Similarly, the line
+ ``~^Z'' (where ^Z, control-Z, is the suspend character) will
+ suspend the rlogin session. Substitution of the delayed-
+ suspend character (normally ^Y) for the suspend character
+ suspends the send portion of the rlogin, but allows output
+ from the remote system. A different escape character may be
+ specified by the -\b-e\be option. There is no space separating
+ this option flag and the argument character.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ rsh(1C)
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RLOGIN(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RLOGIN(1C)
+
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/hosts/* for _\br_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt version of the command
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ More of the environment should be propagated.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ rm, rmdir - remove (unlink) files or directories
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\brm\bm [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-r\br ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b- ] file ...
+
+ r\brm\bmd\bdi\bir\br dir ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\bm removes the entries for one or more files from a direc-
+ tory. If an entry was the last link to the file, the file
+ is destroyed. Removal of a file requires write permission
+ in its directory, but neither read nor write permission on
+ the file itself.
+
+ If a file has no write permission and the standard input is
+ a terminal, its permissions are printed and a line is read
+ from the standard input. If that line begins with `y' the
+ file is deleted, otherwise the file remains. No questions
+ are asked and no errors are reported when the -\b-f\bf (force)
+ option is given.
+
+ If a designated file is a directory, an error comment is
+ printed unless the optional argument -\b-r\br has been used. In
+ that case, _\br_\bm recursively deletes the entire contents of the
+ specified directory, and the directory itself.
+
+ If the -\b-i\bi (interactive) option is in effect, _\br_\bm asks whether
+ to delete each file, and, under -\b-r\br, whether to examine each
+ directory.
+
+ The null option -\b- indicates that all the arguments following
+ it are to be treated as file names. This allows the specif-
+ ication of file names starting with a minus.
+
+ _\bR_\bm_\bd_\bi_\br removes entries for the named directories, which must
+ be empty.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ rm(1), unlink(2), rmdir(2)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RMAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RMAIL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ rmail - handle remote mail received via uucp
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\brm\bma\bai\bil\bl user ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl interprets incoming mail received via _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp(1C), col-
+ lapsing ``From'' lines in the form generated by _\bb_\bi_\bn_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(1)
+ into a single line of the form ``return-path!sender'', and
+ passing the processed mail on to _\bs_\be_\bn_\bd_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(8).
+
+ _\bR_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl is explicitly designed for use with _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp and _\bs_\be_\bn_\bd_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ binmail(1), uucp(1C), sendmail(8)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bR_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl should not reside in /bin.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RMDIR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual RMDIR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ rmdir, rm - remove (unlink) directories or files
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\brm\bmd\bdi\bir\br dir ...
+
+ r\brm\bm [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-r\br ] [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b- ] file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\bm_\bd_\bi_\br removes entries for the named directories, which must
+ be empty.
+
+ _\bR_\bm removes the entries for one or more files from a direc-
+ tory. If an entry was the last link to the file, the file
+ is destroyed. Removal of a file requires write permission
+ in its directory, but neither read nor write permission on
+ the file itself.
+
+ If a file has no write permission and the standard input is
+ a terminal, its permissions are printed and a line is read
+ from the standard input. If that line begins with `y' the
+ file is deleted, otherwise the file remains. No questions
+ are asked and no errors are reported when the -\b-f\bf (force)
+ option is given.
+
+ If a designated file is a directory, an error comment is
+ printed unless the optional argument -\b-r\br has been used. In
+ that case, _\br_\bm recursively deletes the entire contents of the
+ specified directory, and the directory itself.
+
+ If the -\b-i\bi (interactive) option is in effect, _\br_\bm asks whether
+ to delete each file, and, under -\b-r\br, whether to examine each
+ directory.
+
+ The null option -\b- indicates that all the arguments following
+ it are to be treated as file names. This allows the specif-
+ ication of file names starting with a minus.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ rm(1), unlink(2), rmdir(2)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+ROFFBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual ROFFBIB(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ roffbib - run off bibliographic database
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\bro\bof\bff\bfb\bbi\bib\bb [ -\b-e\be ] [ -\b-h\bh ] [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-o\bo ] [ -\b-r\br ] [ -\b-s\bs ] [ -\b-T\bT_\bt_\be_\br_\bm ]
+ [ -\b-x\bx ] [ -\b-m\bm _\bm_\ba_\bc ] [ -\b-V\bV ] [ -\b-Q\bQ ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\bo_\bf_\bf_\bb_\bi_\bb prints out all records in a bibliographic database,
+ in bibliography format rather than as footnotes or endnotes.
+ Generally it is used in conjunction with _\bs_\bo_\br_\bt_\bb_\bi_\bb:
+
+ sortbib database | roffbib
+
+ _\bR_\bo_\bf_\bf_\bb_\bi_\bb accepts most of the options understood by _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1),
+ most importantly the -\b-T\bT flag to specify terminal type.
+
+ If abstracts or comments are entered following the %X field
+ key, _\br_\bo_\bf_\bf_\bb_\bi_\bb will format them into paragraphs for an anno-
+ tated bibliography. Several %X fields may be given if
+ several annotation paragraphs are desired. The -\b-x\bx flag will
+ suppress the printing of these abstracts.
+
+ A user-defined set of macros may be specified after the -\b-m\bm
+ option. There should be a space between the -\b-m\bm and the
+ macro filename. This set of macros will replace the ones
+ defined in /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.bib. The -\b-V\bV flag will send
+ output to the Versatec; the -\b-Q\bQ flag will queue output for
+ the phototypesetter.
+
+ Four command-line registers control formatting style of the
+ bibliography, much like the number registers of _\bm_\bs(7). The
+ command-line argument -\b-r\brN1 will number the references start-
+ ing at one (1). The flag -\b-r\brV2 will double space the biblio-
+ graphy, while -\b-r\brV1 will double space references but single
+ space annotation paragraphs. The line length can be changed
+ from the default 6.5 inches to 6 inches with the -\b-r\brL6i argu-
+ ment, and the page offset can be set from the default of 0
+ to one inch by specifying -\b-r\brO1i (capital O, not zero).
+ Note: with the -\b-V\bV and -\b-Q\bQ flags the default page offset is
+ already one inch.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.bib file of macros used by _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf/_\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ refer(1), addbib(1), sortbib(1), indxbib(1), lookbib(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Users have to rewrite macros to create customized formats.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RSH(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RSH(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ rsh - remote shell
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\brs\bsh\bh host [ -\b-l\bl username ] [ -\b-n\bn ] command
+ host [ -\b-l\bl username ] [ -\b-n\bn ] command
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\bs_\bh connects to the specified _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt, and executes the speci-
+ fied _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd. _\bR_\bs_\bh copies its standard input to the remote
+ command, the standard output of the remote command to its
+ standard output, and the standard error of the remote com-
+ mand to its standard error. Interrupt, quit and terminate
+ signals are propagated to the remote command; _\br_\bs_\bh normally
+ terminates when the remote command does.
+
+ The remote username used is the same as your local username,
+ unless you specify a different remote name with the -\b-l\bl
+ option. This remote name must be equivalent (in the sense
+ of _\br_\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn(1C)) to the originating account; no provision is
+ made for specifying a password with a command.
+
+ If you omit _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd, then instead of executing a single com-
+ mand, you will be logged in on the remote host using
+ _\br_\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn(1C).
+
+ Shell metacharacters which are not quoted are interpreted on
+ local machine, while quoted metacharacters are interpreted
+ on the remote machine. Thus the command
+
+ rsh otherhost cat remotefile >> localfile
+
+ appends the remote file _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be to the localfile _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\b-
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be, while
+
+ rsh otherhost cat remotefile ">>" otherremotefile
+
+ appends _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be to _\bo_\bt_\bh_\be_\br_\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+ Host names are given in the file /etc/hosts. Each host has
+ one standard name (the first name given in the file), which
+ is rather long and unambiguous, and optionally one or more
+ nicknames. The host names for local machines are also com-
+ mands in the directory /usr/hosts; if you put this directory
+ in your search path then the r\brs\bsh\bh can be omitted.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/hosts
+ /usr/hosts/*
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ rlogin(1C)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+RSH(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RSH(1C)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If you are using _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) and put a _\br_\bs_\bh(1C) in the background
+ without redirecting its input away from the terminal, it
+ will block even if no reads are posted by the remote com-
+ mand. If no input is desired you should redirect the input
+ of _\br_\bs_\bh to /dev/null using the -\b-n\bn option.
+
+ You cannot run an interactive command (like _\br_\bo_\bg_\bu_\be(6) or
+ _\bv_\bi(1)); use _\br_\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn(1C).
+
+ Stop signals stop the local _\br_\bs_\bh process only; this is argu-
+ ably wrong, but currently hard to fix for reasons too com-
+ plicated to explain here.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RUPTIME(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RUPTIME(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ruptime - show host status of local machines
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\bru\bup\bpt\bti\bim\bme\be [ -\b-a\ba ] [ -\b-r\br ] [ -\b-l\bl ] [ -\b-t\bt ] [ -\b-u\bu ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bR_\bu_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be gives a status line like _\bu_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be for each machine on
+ the local network; these are formed from packets broadcast
+ by each host on the network once a minute.
+
+ Machines for which no status report has been received for 11
+ minutes are shown as being down.
+
+ Users idle an hour or more are not counted unless the -\b-a\ba
+ flag is given.
+
+ Normally, the listing is sorted by host name. The -\b-l\bl ,\b, -\b-t\bt ,\b,
+ and -\b-u\bu flags specify sorting by load average, uptime, and
+ number of users, respectively. The -\b-r\br flag reverses the
+ sort order.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/rwho/whod.* data files
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ rwho(1C)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+RWHO(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual RWHO(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ rwho - who's logged in on local machines
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ r\brw\bwh\bho\bo [ -\b-a\ba ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The _\br_\bw_\bh_\bo command produces output similar to _\bw_\bh_\bo, but for all
+ machines on the local network. If no report has been
+ received from a machine for 5 minutes then _\br_\bw_\bh_\bo assumes the
+ machine is down, and does not report users last known to be
+ logged into that machine.
+
+ If a users hasn't typed to the system for a minute or more,
+ then _\br_\bw_\bh_\bo reports this idle time. If a user hasn't typed to
+ the system for an hour or more, then the user will be omit-
+ ted from the output of _\br_\bw_\bh_\bo unless the -\b-a\ba flag is given.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/rwho/whod.* information about other machines
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ruptime(1C), rwhod(8C)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ This is unwieldy when the number of machines on the local
+ net is large.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SCCS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCCS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sccs - front end for the SCCS subsystem
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsc\bcc\bcs\bs [ -\b-r\br ] [ -\b-d\bd_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh ] [ -\b-p\bp_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh ] command [ flags ] [ args ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bc_\bc_\bs is a front end to the SCCS programs that helps them
+ mesh more cleanly with the rest of UNIX. It also includes
+ the capability to run ``set user id'' to another user to
+ provide additional protection.
+
+ Basically, _\bs_\bc_\bc_\bs runs the _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd with the specified _\bf_\bl_\ba_\bg_\bs
+ and _\ba_\br_\bg_\bs. Each argument is normally modified to be prepended
+ with ``SCCS/s.''.
+
+ Flags to be interpreted by the _\bs_\bc_\bc_\bs program must be before
+ the _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd argument. Flags to be passed to the actual SCCS
+ program must come after the _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd argument. These flags
+ are specific to the command and are discussed in the docu-
+ mentation for that command.
+
+ Besides the usual SCCS commands, several ``pseudo-commands''
+ can be issued. These are:
+
+ edit Equivalent to ``get -e''.
+
+ delget Perform a delta on the named files and then get
+ new versions. The new versions will have id key-
+ words expanded, and will not be editable. The -m,
+ -p, -r, -s, and -y flags will be passed to delta,
+ and the -b, -c, -e, -i, -k, -l, -s, and -x flags
+ will be passed to get.
+
+ deledit Equivalent to ``delget'' except that the ``get''
+ phase includes the ``-e'' flag. This option is
+ useful for making a ``checkpoint'' of your current
+ editing phase. The same flags will be passed to
+ delta as described above, and all the flags listed
+ for ``get'' above except -e and -k are passed to
+ ``edit''.
+
+ create Creates an SCCS file, taking the initial contents
+ from the file of the same name. Any flags to
+ ``admin'' are accepted. If the creation is suc-
+ cessful, the files are renamed with a comma on the
+ front. These should be removed when you are con-
+ vinced that the SCCS files have been created suc-
+ cessfully.
+
+ fix Must be followed by a -\b-r\br flag. This command
+ essentially removes the named delta, but leaves
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SCCS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCCS(1)
+
+
+
+ you with a copy of the delta with the changes that
+ were in it. It is useful for fixing small com-
+ piler bugs, etc. Since it doesn't leave audit
+ trails, it should be used carefully.
+
+ clean This routine removes everything from the current
+ directory that can be recreated from SCCS files.
+ It will not remove any files being edited. If the
+ -\b-b\bb flag is given, branches are ignored in the
+ determination of whether they are being edited;
+ this is dangerous if you are keeping the branches
+ in the same directory.
+
+ unedit This is the opposite of an ``edit'' or a ``get
+ -e''. It should be used with extreme caution,
+ since any changes you made since the get will be
+ irretrievably lost.
+
+ info Gives a listing of all files being edited. If the
+ -\b-b\bb flag is given, branches (i.e., SID's with two
+ or fewer components) are ignored. If the -\b-u\bu flag
+ is given (with an optional argument) then only
+ files being edited by you (or the named user) are
+ listed.
+
+ check Like ``info'' except that nothing is printed if
+ nothing is being edited, and a non-zero exit
+ status is returned if anything is being edited.
+ The intent is to have this included in an
+ ``install'' entry in a makefile to insure that
+ everything is included into the SCCS file before a
+ version is installed.
+
+ tell Gives a newline-separated list of the files being
+ edited on the standard output. Takes the -\b-b\bb and
+ -\b-u\bu flags like ``info'' and ``check''.
+
+ diffs Gives a ``diff'' listing between the current ver-
+ sion of the program(s) you have out for editing
+ and the versions in SCCS format. The -\b-r\br,\b, -\b-c\bc,\b, -\b-i\bi,\b,
+ -\b-x\bx,\b, and -\b-t\bt flags are passed to _\bg_\be_\bt; the -\b-l\bl,\b, -\b-s\bs,\b,
+ -\b-e\be,\b, -\b-f\bf,\b, -\b-h\bh,\b, and -\b-b\bb options are passed to _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf. The
+ -\b-C\bC flag is passed to _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf as -\b-c\bc.\b.
+
+ print This command prints out verbose information about
+ the named files.
+
+ The -\b-r\br flag runs _\bs_\bc_\bc_\bs as the real user rather than as what-
+ ever effective user _\bs_\bc_\bc_\bs is ``set user id'' to. The -\b-d\bd flag
+ gives a root directory for the SCCS files. The default is
+ the current directory. The -\b-p\bp flag defines the pathname of
+ the directory in which the SCCS files will be found;
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SCCS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCCS(1)
+
+
+
+ ``SCCS'' is the default. The -\b-p\bp flag differs from the -\b-d\bd
+ flag in that the -\b-d\bd argument is prepended to the entire
+ pathname and the -\b-p\bp argument is inserted before the final
+ component of the pathname. For example, ``sccs -d/x -py get
+ a/b'' will convert to ``get /x/a/y/s.b''. The intent here
+ is to create aliases such as ``alias syssccs sccs
+ -d/usr/src'' which will be used as ``syssccs get
+ cmd/who.c''. Also, if the environment variable PROJECT is
+ set, its value is used to determine the -\b-d\bd f\bfl\bla\bag\bg.\b. If it
+ begins with a slash, it is taken directly; otherwise, the
+ home directory of a user of that name is examined for a sub-
+ directory ``src'' or ``source''. If such a directory is
+ found, it is used.
+
+ Certain commands (such as _\ba_\bd_\bm_\bi_\bn) cannot be run ``set user
+ id'' by all users, since this would allow anyone to change
+ the authorizations. These commands are always run as the
+ real user.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bES\bS
+ To get a file for editing, edit it, and produce a new delta:
+
+ sccs get -e file.c
+ ex file.c
+ sccs delta file.c
+
+ To get a file from another directory:
+
+ sccs -p/usr/src/sccs/s. get cc.c
+
+ or
+
+ sccs get /usr/src/sccs/s.cc.c
+
+ To make a delta of a large number of files in the current
+ directory:
+
+ sccs delta *.c
+
+ To get a list of files being edited that are not on
+ branches:
+
+ sccs info -b
+
+ To delta everything being edited by you:
+
+ sccs delta `sccs tell -u`
+
+ In a makefile, to get source files from an SCCS file if it
+ does not already exist:
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SCCS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCCS(1)
+
+
+
+ SRCS = <list of source files>
+ $(SRCS):
+ sccs get $(REL) $@
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ admin(SCCS), chghist(SCCS), comb(SCCS), delta(SCCS),
+ get(SCCS), help(SCCS), prt(SCCS), rmdel(SCCS),
+ sccsdiff(SCCS), what(SCCS)
+ Eric Allman, _\bA_\bn _\bI_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bt_\bo _\bt_\bh_\be _\bS_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be _\bC_\bo_\bd_\be _\bC_\bo_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bl _\bS_\by_\bs_\b-
+ _\bt_\be_\bm
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ It should be able to take directory arguments on pseudo-
+ commands like the SCCS commands do.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SCRIPT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SCRIPT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ script - make typescript of terminal session
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsc\bcr\bri\bip\bpt\bt [ -\b-a\ba ] [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bc_\br_\bi_\bp_\bt makes a typescript of everything printed on your ter-
+ minal. The typescript is written to _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be, or appended to
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be if the -\b-a\ba option is given. It can be sent to the line
+ printer later with _\bl_\bp_\br. If no file name is given, the
+ typescript is saved in the file _\bt_\by_\bp_\be_\bs_\bc_\br_\bi_\bp_\bt.
+
+ The script ends when the forked shell exits.
+
+ This program is useful when using a crt and a hard-copy
+ record of the dialog is desired, as for a student handing in
+ a program that was developed on a crt when hard-copy termi-
+ nals are in short supply.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bS_\bc_\br_\bi_\bp_\bt places e\bev\bve\ber\bry\byt\bth\bhi\bin\bng\bg in the log file. This is not what
+ the naive user expects.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SED(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sed - stream editor
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bse\bed\bd [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-e\be script ] [ -\b-f\bf sfile ] [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\be_\bd copies the named _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs (standard input default) to the
+ standard output, edited according to a script of commands.
+ The -\b-f\bf option causes the script to be taken from file _\bs_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be;
+ these options accumulate. If there is just one -\b-e\be option
+ and no -\b-f\bf's, the flag -\b-e\be may be omitted. The -\b-n\bn option
+ suppresses the default output.
+
+ A script consists of editing commands, one per line, of the
+ following form:
+
+ [address [, address] ] function [arguments]
+
+ In normal operation _\bs_\be_\bd cyclically copies a line of input
+ into a _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn _\bs_\bp_\ba_\bc_\be (unless there is something left after a
+ `D' command), applies in sequence all commands whose
+ _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\be_\bs select that pattern space, and at the end of the
+ script copies the pattern space to the standard output
+ (except under -\b-n\bn) and deletes the pattern space.
+
+ An _\ba_\bd_\bd_\br_\be_\bs_\bs is either a decimal number that counts input
+ lines cumulatively across files, a `$' that addresses the
+ last line of input, or a context address, `/regular expres-
+ sion/', in the style of _\be_\bd(1) modified thus:
+
+ The escape sequence `\n' matches a newline embedded in
+ the pattern space.
+
+ A command line with no addresses selects every pattern
+ space.
+
+ A command line with one address selects each pattern space
+ that matches the address.
+
+ A command line with two addresses selects the inclusive
+ range from the first pattern space that matches the first
+ address through the next pattern space that matches the
+ second. (If the second address is a number less than or
+ equal to the line number first selected, only one line is
+ selected.) Thereafter the process is repeated, looking again
+ for the first address.
+
+ Editing commands can be applied only to non-selected pattern
+ spaces by use of the negation function `!' (below).
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SED(1)
+
+
+
+ In the following list of functions the maximum number of
+ permissible addresses for each function is indicated in
+ parentheses.
+
+ An argument denoted _\bt_\be_\bx_\bt consists of one or more lines, all
+ but the last of which end with `\' to hide the newline.
+ Backslashes in text are treated like backslashes in the
+ replacement string of an `s' command, and may be used to
+ protect initial blanks and tabs against the stripping that
+ is done on every script line.
+
+ An argument denoted _\br_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be or _\bw_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be must terminate the com-
+ mand line and must be preceded by exactly one blank. Each
+ _\bw_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is created before processing begins. There can be at
+ most 10 distinct _\bw_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be arguments.
+
+ (1)a\
+ _\bt_\be_\bx_\bt
+ Append. Place _\bt_\be_\bx_\bt on the output before reading the
+ next input line.
+
+ (2)b _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl
+ Branch to the `:' command bearing the _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl. If _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl
+ is empty, branch to the end of the script.
+
+ (2)c\
+ _\bt_\be_\bx_\bt
+ Change. Delete the pattern space. With 0 or 1 address
+ or at the end of a 2-address range, place _\bt_\be_\bx_\bt on the
+ output. Start the next cycle.
+
+ (2)d Delete the pattern space. Start the next cycle.
+
+ (2)D Delete the initial segment of the pattern space through
+ the first newline. Start the next cycle.
+
+ (2)g Replace the contents of the pattern space by the con-
+ tents of the hold space.
+
+ (2)G Append the contents of the hold space to the pattern
+ space.
+
+ (2)h Replace the contents of the hold space by the contents
+ of the pattern space.
+
+ (2)H Append the contents of the pattern space to the hold
+ space.
+
+ (1)i\
+ _\bt_\be_\bx_\bt
+ Insert. Place _\bt_\be_\bx_\bt on the standard output.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SED(1)
+
+
+
+ (2)n Copy the pattern space to the standard output. Replace
+ the pattern space with the next line of input.
+
+ (2)N Append the next line of input to the pattern space with
+ an embedded newline. (The current line number
+ changes.)
+
+ (2)p Print. Copy the pattern space to the standard output.
+
+ (2)P Copy the initial segment of the pattern space through
+ the first newline to the standard output.
+
+ (1)q Quit. Branch to the end of the script. Do not start a
+ new cycle.
+
+ (2)r _\br_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Read the contents of _\br_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. Place them on the output
+ before reading the next input line.
+
+ (2)s/_\br_\be_\bg_\bu_\bl_\ba_\br _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn/_\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt/_\bf_\bl_\ba_\bg_\bs
+ Substitute the _\br_\be_\bp_\bl_\ba_\bc_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt string for instances of the
+ _\br_\be_\bg_\bu_\bl_\ba_\br _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn in the pattern space. Any character
+ may be used instead of `/'. For a fuller description
+ see _\be_\bd(1). _\bF_\bl_\ba_\bg_\bs is zero or more of
+
+ g Global. Substitute for all nonoverlapping
+ instances of the _\br_\be_\bg_\bu_\bl_\ba_\br _\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn rather than
+ just the first one.
+
+ p Print the pattern space if a replacement was made.
+
+ w _\bw_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Write. Append the pattern space to _\bw_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be if a
+ replacement was made.
+
+ (2)t _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl
+ Test. Branch to the `:' command bearing the _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl if
+ any substitutions have been made since the most recent
+ reading of an input line or execution of a `t'. If
+ _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl is empty, branch to the end of the script.
+
+ (2)w _\bw_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Write. Append the pattern space to _\bw_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+ (2)x Exchange the contents of the pattern and hold spaces.
+
+ (2)y/_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1/_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b2/
+ Transform. Replace all occurrences of characters in
+ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1 with the corresponding character in _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b2.
+ The lengths of _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1 and _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b2 must be equal.
+
+ (2)! _\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SED(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SED(1)
+
+
+
+ Don't. Apply the _\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn (or group, if _\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn is
+ `{') only to lines _\bn_\bo_\bt selected by the address(es).
+
+ (0): _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl
+ This command does nothing; it bears a _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl for `b' and
+ `t' commands to branch to.
+
+ (1)= Place the current line number on the standard output as
+ a line.
+
+ (2){ Execute the following commands through a matching `}'
+ only when the pattern space is selected.
+
+ (0) An empty command is ignored.
+
+ (0)# If a # appears as the first character on a line of a
+ script, then that entire line is treated as a comment,
+ with one exception. If the first line of the script
+ starts with the characters ``#n'', then the default
+ output will be suppressed. The rest of the line after
+ ``#n'' will also be ignored. A script file must con-
+ tain at least one non-comment line.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ed(1), grep(1), awk(1), lex(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SENDBUG(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SENDBUG(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sendbug - mail a system bug report to 4bsd-bugs
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bse\ben\bnd\bdb\bbu\bug\bg [\b[ a\bad\bdd\bdr\bre\bes\bss\bs ]\b]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ Bug reports sent to `4bsd-bugs@Berkeley.EDU' are intercepted
+ by a program which expects bug reports to conform to a stan-
+ dard format. _\bS_\be_\bn_\bd_\bb_\bu_\bg is a shell script to help the user
+ compose and mail bug reports in the correct format. _\bS_\be_\bn_\bd_\bb_\bu_\bg
+ works by invoking the editor specified by the environment
+ variable _\bE_\bD_\bI_\bT_\bO_\bR on a temporary copy of the bug report format
+ outline. The user must fill in the appropriate fields and
+ exit the editor. The default editor is _\bv_\bi(1). _\bS_\be_\bn_\bd_\bb_\bu_\bg then
+ mails the completed report to `4bsd-bugs@Berkeley.EDU' or
+ the address specified on the command line.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/ucb/bugformat contains the bug report outline
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ vi(1), environ(7), bugfiler(8), sendmail(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 26, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sh, for, case, if, while, :\b:, .\b., break, continue, cd, eval,
+ exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift,
+ times, trap, umask, wait - command language
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsh\bh [ -\b-c\bce\bei\bik\bkn\bnr\brs\bst\btu\buv\bvx\bx ] [ arg ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bh is a command programming language that executes commands
+ read from a terminal or a file. See i\bin\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn for the
+ meaning of arguments to the shell.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ A _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is a sequence of non blank _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bs separated
+ by blanks (a blank is a t\bta\bab\bb or a s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be). The first word
+ specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as
+ specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments
+ to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu-
+ ment 0 (see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2)). The _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be of a simple-command is
+ its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs if
+ it terminates abnormally (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2) for a list of status
+ values).
+
+ A _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be is a sequence of one or more _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd_\bs separated
+ by |\b|.\b. The standard output of each command but the last is
+ connected by a _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be(2) to the standard input of the next
+ command. Each command is run as a separate process; the
+ shell waits for the last command to terminate.
+
+ A _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is a sequence of one or more _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bs separated by
+ ;\b;, &\b&, &\b&&\b& or |\b||\b| and optionally terminated by ;\b; or &\b&. ;\b; and &\b&
+ have equal precedence which is lower than that of &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b|,
+ &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes
+ sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding
+ _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be to be executed without waiting for it to finish.
+ The symbol &\b&&\b& (|\b||\b|) causes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following to be executed
+ only if the preceding _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be returns a zero (non zero)
+ value. Newlines may appear in a _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt, instead of semi-
+ colons, to delimit commands.
+
+ A _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is either a simple-command or one of the follow-
+ ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last
+ simple-command executed in the command.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\br _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be [i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ...] d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ Each time a f\bfo\bor\br command is executed _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is set to the
+ next word in the f\bfo\bor\br word list. If i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ... is
+ omitted, i\bin\bn "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is assumed. Execution ends when there
+ are no more words in the list.
+
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd i\bin\bn [_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn [ |\b| _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn ] ... )\b) _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt ;\b;;\b;] ... e\bes\bsa\bac\bc
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ A c\bca\bas\bse\be command executes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt associated with the
+ first pattern that matches _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd. The form of the pat-
+ terns is the same as that used for file name genera-
+ tion.
+
+ i\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [e\bel\bli\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] ... [e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] f\bfi\bi
+ The _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following i\bif\bf is executed and if it returns
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Otherwise,
+ the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following e\bel\bli\bif\bf is executed and if its value is
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Failing that
+ the e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is executed.
+
+ w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ A w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be command repeatedly executes the w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt and
+ if its value is zero executes the d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt; otherwise
+ the loop terminates. The value returned by a w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ command is that of the last executed command in the d\bdo\bo
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl may be used in place of w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be to negate the
+ loop termination test.
+
+ (\b( _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt )\b)
+ Execute _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt in a subshell.
+
+ {\b{ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt }\b}
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is simply executed.
+
+ The following words are only recognized as the first word of
+ a command and when not quoted.
+
+ i\bif\bf t\bth\bhe\ben\bn e\bel\bls\bse\be e\bel\bli\bif\bf f\bfi\bi c\bca\bas\bse\be i\bin\bn e\bes\bsa\bac\bc f\bfo\bor\br w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl d\bdo\bo
+ d\bdo\bon\bne\be {\b{ }\b}
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of
+ back quotes (`\b``\b`) may be used as part or all of a word;
+ trailing newlines are removed.
+
+ P\bPa\bar\bra\bam\bme\bet\bte\ber\br s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The character $\b$ is used to introduce substitutable parame-
+ ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by s\bse\bet\bt.
+ Variables may be set by writing
+
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be ] ...
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br}\b}
+ A _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is a sequence of letters, digits or under-
+ scores (a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be), a digit, or any of the characters *\b* @\b@
+ #\b# ?\b? -\b- $\b$ !\b!.\b. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub-
+ stituted. The braces are required only when _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br
+ is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is
+ not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\b-
+ _\bt_\be_\br is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is *\b* or @\b@ then all the positional parameters,
+ starting with $\b$1\b1, are substituted separated by spaces.
+ $\b$0\b0 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br-_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise
+ substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br=_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is not set, set it to _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; the value of
+ the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame-
+ ters may not be assigned to in this way.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br?_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise,
+ print _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd and exit from the shell. If _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is omit-
+ ted, a standard message is printed.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br+_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; otherwise substi-
+ tute nothing.
+
+ In the above _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is not evaluated unless it is to be used
+ as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo
+ ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _\bp_\bw_\bd if _\bd is unset.)
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are automatically set by the shell.
+
+ #\b# The number of positional parameters in decimal.
+ -\b- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by
+ s\bse\bet\bt.
+ ?\b? The value returned by the last executed command in
+ decimal.
+ $\b$ The process number of this shell.
+ !\b! The process number of the last background command
+ invoked.
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are used but not set by the shell.
+
+ H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE The default argument (home directory) for the c\bcd\bd
+ command.
+ P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH The search path for commands (see e\bex\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn).
+ M\bMA\bAI\bIL\bL If this variable is set to the name of a mail
+ file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of
+ mail in the specified file.
+ P\bPS\bS1\b1 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '.
+ P\bPS\bS2\b2 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '.
+ I\bIF\bFS\bS Internal field separators, normally s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be, t\bta\bab\bb,
+ and n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be. I\bIF\bFS\bS is ignored if _\bs_\bh is running as
+ root or if the effective user id differs from the
+ real user id.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ B\bBl\bla\ban\bnk\bk i\bin\bnt\bte\ber\brp\bpr\bre\bet\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ After parameter and command substitution, any results of
+ substitution are scanned for internal field separator char-
+ acters (those found in $\b$I\bIF\bFS\bS) and split into distinct argu-
+ ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu-
+ ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments
+ (those resulting from _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs that have no values) are
+ removed.
+
+ F\bFi\bil\ble\be n\bna\bam\bme\be g\bge\ben\bne\ber\bra\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the
+ characters *\b*, ?\b? and [\b[.\b. If one of these characters appears,
+ the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced
+ with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat-
+ tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern,
+ the word is left unchanged. The character .\b. at the start of
+ a file name or immediately following a /\b/, and the character
+ /\b/, must be matched explicitly.
+
+ *\b* Matches any string, including the null string.
+ ?\b? Matches any single character.
+ [\b[.\b..\b..\b.]\b]
+ Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of
+ characters separated by -\b- matches any character lexi-
+ cally between the pair.
+
+ Q\bQu\buo\bot\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ The following characters have a special meaning to the shell
+ and cause termination of a word unless quoted.
+
+ ;\b; &\b& (\b( )\b) |\b| <\b< >\b> n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be t\bta\bab\bb
+
+ A character may be _\bq_\bu_\bo_\bt_\be_\bd by preceding it with a \\b\.\b. \\b\n\bne\bew\bw-\b-
+ l\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of
+ quote marks ('\b''\b'), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside
+ double quotes ("\b""\b") parameter and command substitution occurs
+ and \\b\ quotes the characters \\b\ '\b' "\b" and $\b$.
+
+ "\b"$\b$*\b*"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1 $\b$2\b2 .\b..\b..\b."\b" whereas
+ "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1"\b" "\b"$\b$2\b2"\b" .\b..\b..\b. .\b.
+
+ P\bPr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of
+ PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is
+ typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the
+ secondary prompt ($\b$P\bPS\bS2\b2) is issued.
+
+ I\bIn\bnp\bpu\but\bt o\bou\but\btp\bpu\but\bt.\b.
+ Before a command is executed its input and output may be
+ redirected using a special notation interpreted by the
+ shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple-
+ command or may precede or follow a _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd and are not
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs
+ before _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd or _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt is used.
+
+ <_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard input (file descriptor 0).
+
+ >_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output (file descriptor 1).
+ If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it
+ is truncated to zero length.
+
+ >>_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output. If the file exists,
+ output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise
+ the file is created.
+
+ <<_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ The shell input is read up to a line the same as _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd,
+ or end of file. The resulting document becomes the
+ standard input. If any character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is quoted, no
+ interpretation is placed upon the characters of the
+ document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution
+ occurs, \\b\n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored, and \\b\ is used to quote the
+ characters \\b\ $\b$ '\b' and the first character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ <&_\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt
+ The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor
+ _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt; see _\bd_\bu_\bp(2). Similarly for the standard output
+ using >.
+
+ <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan-
+ dard output using >.
+
+ If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file
+ descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead
+ of the default 0 or 1). For example,
+
+ ... 2>&1
+
+ creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip-
+ tor 1.
+
+ If a command is followed by &\b& then the default standard
+ input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other-
+ wise, the environment for the execution of a command con-
+ tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified
+ by input output specifications.
+
+ E\bEn\bnv\bvi\bir\bro\bon\bnm\bme\ben\bnt\bt.\b.
+ The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed
+ to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument
+ list; see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2) and _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7). The shell interacts
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the
+ shell scans the environment and creates a _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br for each
+ name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed
+ commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies
+ the values of these _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs or creates new ones, none of
+ these affects the environment unless the e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt command is
+ used to bind the shell's _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br to the environment. The
+ environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of
+ any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the
+ shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which
+ must be noted in e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt commands.
+
+ The environment for any _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd may be augmented by
+ prefixing it with one or more assignments to _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs.
+ Thus these two lines are equivalent
+
+ TERM=450 cmd args
+ (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args)
+
+ If the -\b-k\bk flag is set, _\ba_\bl_\bl keyword arguments are placed in
+ the environment, even if the occur after the command name.
+ The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c':
+ echo a=b c
+ set -k
+ echo a=b c
+
+ S\bSi\big\bgn\bna\bal\bls\bs.\b.
+ The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are
+ ignored if the command is followed by &\b&; otherwise signals
+ have the values inherited by the shell from its parent.
+ (But see also t\btr\bra\bap\bp.\b.)
+
+ E\bEx\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are
+ carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below
+ a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute
+ the command via an _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2).
+
+ The shell parameter $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH defines the search path for the
+ directory containing the command. Each alternative direc-
+ tory name is separated by a colon (:\b:). The default path is
+ :\b:/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn:\b:/\b/u\bus\bsr\br/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn. If the command name contains a /, the
+ search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the
+ path is searched for an executable file. If the file has
+ execute permission but is not an _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt file, it is assumed
+ to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a
+ separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized
+ command is also executed in a subshell.
+
+ S\bSp\bpe\bec\bci\bia\bal\bl c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ The following commands are executed in the shell process and
+ except where specified no input output redirection is
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ permitted for such commands.
+
+ #\b# For non-interactive shells, everything following the #\b#
+ is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is
+ ignored. For interactive shells, the #\b# has no special
+ effect.
+
+ :\b: No effect; the command does nothing.
+ .\b. _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Read and execute commands from _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be and return. The
+ search path $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH is used to find the directory con-
+ taining _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bk [_\bn]
+ Exit from the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be loop, if any. If
+ _\bn is specified, break _\bn levels.
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bti\bin\bnu\bue\be [_\bn]
+ Resume the next iteration of the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ loop. If _\bn is specified, resume at the _\bn-th enclosing
+ loop.
+ c\bcd\bd [_\ba_\br_\bg]
+ Change the current directory to _\ba_\br_\bg. The shell parame-
+ ter $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE is the default _\ba_\br_\bg.
+ e\bev\bva\bal\bl [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The arguments are read as input to the shell and the
+ resulting command(s) executed.
+ e\bex\bxe\bec\bc [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The command specified by the arguments is executed in
+ place of this shell without creating a new process.
+ Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu-
+ ments are given cause the shell input output to be
+ modified.
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit
+ status specified by _\bn. If _\bn is omitted, the exit status
+ is that of the last command executed. (An end of file
+ will also exit from the shell.)
+ e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked for automatic export to the
+ _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt of subsequently-executed commands. If no
+ arguments are given, a list of exportable names is
+ printed.
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bd _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...
+ One line is read from the standard input; successive
+ words of the input are assigned to the variables _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ in order, with leftover words to the last variable.
+ The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun-
+ tered.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bdo\bon\bnl\bly\by [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked readonly and the values of
+ the these names may not be changed by subsequent
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all
+ readonly names is printed.
+ s\bse\bet\bt [-\b-e\bek\bkn\bnp\bpt\btu\buv\bvx\bx [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]]
+ -\b-e\be If non interactive, exit immediately if a command
+ fails.
+ -\b-k\bk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment
+ for a command, not just those that precede the com-
+ mand name.
+ -\b-n\bn Read commands but do not execute them.
+ -\b-t\bt Exit after reading and executing one command.
+ -\b-u\bu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting.
+ -\b-v\bv Print shell input lines as they are read.
+ -\b-x\bx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe-
+ cuted.
+ -\b- Turn off the -\b-x\bx and -\b-v\bv options.
+
+ These flags can also be used upon invocation of the
+ shell. The current set of flags may be found in $\b$-\b-.
+
+ Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are
+ assigned, in order, to $\b$1\b1, $\b$2\b2, etc. If no arguments
+ are given, the values of all names are printed.
+
+ s\bsh\bhi\bif\bft\bt
+ The positional parameters from $\b$2\b2... are renamed $\b$1\b1...
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\bes\bs
+ Print the accumulated user and system times for
+ processes run from the shell.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bap\bp [_\ba_\br_\bg] [_\bn] ...
+ _\bA_\br_\bg is a command to be read and executed when the shell
+ receives signal(s) _\bn. (Note that _\ba_\br_\bg is scanned once
+ when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.)
+ Trap commands are executed in order of signal number.
+ If _\ba_\br_\bg is absent, all trap(s) _\bn are reset to their ori-
+ ginal values. If _\ba_\br_\bg is the null string, this signal
+ is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _\bn
+ is 0, the command _\ba_\br_\bg is executed on exit from the
+ shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _\bn as numbered
+ in _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2). _\bT_\br_\ba_\bp with no arguments prints a list of
+ commands associated with each signal number.
+
+ u\bum\bma\bas\bsk\bk [ _\bn_\bn_\bn ]
+ The user file creation mask is set to the octal value
+ _\bn_\bn_\bn (see _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk(2)). If _\bn_\bn_\bn is omitted, the current
+ value of the mask is printed.
+
+ w\bwa\bai\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Wait for the specified process and report its termina-
+ tion status. If _\bn is not given, all currently active
+ child processes are waited for. The return code from
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ this command is that of the process waited for.
+
+ I\bIn\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ If the first character of argument zero is -\b-, commands are
+ read from $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE/\b/.\b.p\bpr\bro\bof\bfi\bil\ble\be, if such a file exists. Commands
+ are then read as described below. The following flags are
+ interpreted by the shell when it is invoked.
+ -\b-c\bc _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg If the -\b-c\bc flag is present, commands are read from
+ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg.
+ -\b-s\bs If the -\b-s\bs flag is present or if no arguments
+ remain then commands are read from the standard
+ input. Shell output is written to file descrip-
+ tor 2.
+ -\b-i\bi If the -\b-i\bi flag is present or if the shell input
+ and output are attached to a terminal (as told by
+ _\bg_\bt_\bt_\by) then this shell is _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\ba_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bv_\be. In this
+ case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2))
+ is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an
+ interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG-
+ INT is caught and ignored (so that w\bwa\bai\bit\bt is inter-
+ ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by
+ the shell.
+
+ The remaining flags and arguments are described under the
+ s\bse\bet\bt command.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ $HOME/.\b.profile
+ /tmp/sh*
+ /dev/null
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause
+ the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is
+ being used non interactively then execution of the shell
+ file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit
+ status of the last command executed (see also e\bex\bxi\bit\bt).
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous
+ process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming
+ the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and
+ the shell complains about not being able to find the file by
+ another name.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SIZE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SIZE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ size - size of an object file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsi\biz\bze\be [ object ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bi_\bz_\be prints the (decimal) number of bytes required by the
+ text, data, and bss portions, and their sum in hex and
+ decimal, of each object-file argument. If no file is speci-
+ fied, a\ba.\b.o\bou\but\bt is used.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ a.out(5)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SLEEP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SLEEP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sleep - suspend execution for an interval
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsl\ble\bee\bep\bp time
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bl_\be_\be_\bp suspends execution for _\bt_\bi_\bm_\be seconds. It is used to
+ execute a command after a certain amount of time as in:
+
+ (sleep 105; command)&
+
+ or to execute a command every so often, as in:
+
+ while true
+ do
+ command
+ sleep 37
+ done
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ setitimer(2), alarm(3C), sleep(3)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bT_\bi_\bm_\be must be less than 2,147,483,647 seconds.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SOELIM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SOELIM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ soelim - eliminate .so's from nroff input
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bso\boe\bel\bli\bim\bm [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bo_\be_\bl_\bi_\bm reads the specified files or the standard input and
+ performs the textual inclusion implied by the _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf direc-
+ tives of the form
+
+ .so somefile
+
+ when they appear at the beginning of input lines. This is
+ useful since programs such as _\bt_\bb_\bl do not normally do this;
+ it allows the placement of individual tables in separate
+ files to be run as a part of a large document.
+
+ An argument consisting of a single minus (-\b-) is taken to be
+ a file name corresponding to the standard input.
+
+ Note that inclusion can be suppressed by using `'' instead
+ of `.', i.e.
+
+ 'so /usr/lib/tmac.s
+
+ A sample usage of _\bs_\bo_\be_\bl_\bi_\bm would be
+
+ soelim exum?.n | tbl | nroff -ms | col | lpr
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ colcrt(1), more(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The format of the source commands must involve no strange-
+ ness - exactly one blank must precede and no blanks follow
+ the file name.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SORT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SORT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sort - sort or merge files
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bso\bor\brt\bt [ -_\bm_\bu_\bb_\bd_\bf_\bi_\bn_\br_\bt_\bx ] [ +\b+_\bp_\bo_\bs_\b1 [ -\b-_\bp_\bo_\bs_\b2 ] ] ... [ -\b-o\bo name ] [
+ -\b-T\bT directory ] [ name ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bo_\br_\bt sorts lines of all the named files together and writes
+ the result on the standard output. The name `-' means the
+ standard input. If no input files are named, the standard
+ input is sorted.
+
+ The default sort key is an entire line. Default ordering is
+ lexicographic by bytes in machine collating sequence. The
+ ordering is affected globally by the following options, one
+ or more of which may appear.
+
+ b\bb Ignore leading blanks (spaces and tabs) in field com-
+ parisons.
+
+ d\bd `Dictionary' order: only letters, digits and blanks are
+ significant in comparisons.
+
+ f\bf Fold upper case letters onto lower case.
+
+ i\bi Ignore characters outside the ASCII range 040-0176 in
+ nonnumeric comparisons.
+
+ n\bn An initial numeric string, consisting of optional
+ blanks, optional minus sign, and zero or more digits
+ with optional decimal point, is sorted by arithmetic
+ value. (Note that -\b-0\b0 is considered equal to 0\b0.) Option
+ n\bn implies option b\bb.\b.
+
+ r\br Reverse the sense of comparisons.
+
+ t\bt_\bx `Tab character' separating fields is _\bx.
+
+ The notation +\b+_\bp_\bo_\bs_\b1 -\b-_\bp_\bo_\bs_\b2 restricts a sort key to a field
+ beginning at _\bp_\bo_\bs_\b1 and ending just before _\bp_\bo_\bs_\b2. _\bP_\bo_\bs_\b1 and
+ _\bp_\bo_\bs_\b2 each have the form _\bm.\b._\bn, optionally followed by one or
+ more of the flags b\bbd\bdf\bfi\bin\bnr\br,\b, where _\bm tells a number of fields
+ to skip from the beginning of the line and _\bn tells a number
+ of characters to skip further. If any flags are present
+ they override all the global ordering options for this key.
+ If the b\bb option is in effect _\bn is counted from the first
+ nonblank in the field; b\bb is attached independently to _\bp_\bo_\bs_\b2.
+ A missing .\b._\bn means .0; a missing -\b-_\bp_\bo_\bs_\b2 means the end of the
+ line. Under the -\b-t\bt_\bx option, fields are strings separated by
+ _\bx; otherwise fields are nonempty nonblank strings separated
+ by blanks.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SORT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SORT(1)
+
+
+
+ When there are multiple sort keys, later keys are compared
+ only after all earlier keys compare equal. Lines that oth-
+ erwise compare equal are ordered with all bytes significant.
+
+ These option arguments are also understood:
+
+ c\bc Check that the input file is sorted according to the
+ ordering rules; give no output unless the file is out
+ of sort.
+
+ m\bm Merge only, the input files are already sorted.
+
+ o\bo The next argument is the name of an output file to use
+ instead of the standard output. This file may be the
+ same as one of the inputs.
+
+ T\bT The next argument is the name of a directory in which
+ temporary files should be made.
+
+ u\bu Suppress all but one in each set of equal lines.
+ Ignored bytes and bytes outside keys do not participate
+ in this comparison.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bES\bS
+ Print in alphabetical order all the unique spellings in a
+ list of words. Capitalized words differ from uncapitalized.
+
+ sort -u +0f +0 list
+
+ Print the password file (_\bp_\ba_\bs_\bs_\bw_\bd(5)) sorted by user id number
+ (the 3rd colon-separated field).
+
+ sort -t: +2n /etc/passwd
+
+ Print the first instance of each month in an already sorted
+ file of (month day) entries. The options -\b-u\bum\bm with just one
+ input file make the choice of a unique representative from a
+ set of equal lines predictable.
+
+ sort -um +0 -1 dates
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/tmp/stm*, /tmp/* first and second tries for tem-
+ porary files
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ uniq(1), comm(1), rev(1), join(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Comments and exits with nonzero status for various trouble
+ conditions and for disorder discovered under option -\b-c\bc.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SORT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SORT(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Very long lines are silently truncated.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 30, 1987 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SORTBIB(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SORTBIB(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sortbib - sort bibliographic database
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bso\bor\brt\btb\bbi\bib\bb [ -\b-s\bsKEYS ] database ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bo_\br_\bt_\bb_\bi_\bb sorts files of records containing _\br_\be_\bf_\be_\br key-letters
+ by user-specified keys. Records may be separated by blank
+ lines, or by .[ and .] delimiters, but the two styles may
+ not be mixed together. This program reads through each
+ _\bd_\ba_\bt_\ba_\bb_\ba_\bs_\be and pulls out key fields, which are sorted
+ separately. The sorted key fields contain the file pointer,
+ byte offset, and length of corresponding records. These
+ records are delivered using disk seeks and reads, so _\bs_\bo_\br_\bt_\bb_\bi_\bb
+ may not be used in a pipeline to read standard input.
+
+ By default, _\bs_\bo_\br_\bt_\bb_\bi_\bb alphabetizes by the first %A and the %D
+ fields, which contain the senior author and date. The -\b-s\bs
+ option is used to specify new _\bK_\bE_\bY_\bS. For instance, -\b-s\bsATD
+ will sort by author, title, and date, while -\b-s\bsA+D will sort
+ by all authors, and date. Sort keys past the fourth are not
+ meaningful. No more than 16 databases may be sorted
+ together at one time. Records longer than 4096 characters
+ will be truncated.
+
+ _\bS_\bo_\br_\bt_\bb_\bi_\bb sorts on the last word on the %A line, which is
+ assumed to be the author's last name. A word in the final
+ position, such as ``jr.'' or ``ed.'', will be ignored if the
+ name beforehand ends with a comma. Authors with two-word
+ last names or unusual constructions can be sorted correctly
+ by using the _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf convention ``\0'' in place of a blank. A
+ %Q field is considered to be the same as %A, except sorting
+ begins with the first, not the last, word. _\bS_\bo_\br_\bt_\bb_\bi_\bb sorts on
+ the last word of the %D line, usually the year. It also
+ ignores leading articles (like ``A'' or ``The'') when sort-
+ ing by titles in the %T or %J fields; it will ignore arti-
+ cles of any modern European language. If a sort-significant
+ field is absent from a record, _\bs_\bo_\br_\bt_\bb_\bi_\bb places that record
+ before other records containing that field.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ refer(1), addbib(1), roffbib(1), indxbib(1), lookbib(1)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bRS\bS
+ Greg Shenaut, Bill Tuthill
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Records with missing author fields should probably be sorted
+ by title.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ spell, spellin, spellout - find spelling errors
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsp\bpe\bel\bll\bl [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-b\bb ] [ -\b-x\bx ] [ -\b-d\bd hlist ] [ -\b-s\bs hstop ] [ -\b-h\bh
+ spellhist ] [ file ] ...
+
+ s\bsp\bpe\bel\bll\bli\bin\bn [ list ]
+
+ s\bsp\bpe\bel\bll\blo\bou\but\bt [ -\b-d\bd ] list
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl collects words from the named documents, and looks
+ them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among
+ nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes
+ or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on
+ the standard output. If no files are named, words are col-
+ lected from the standard input.
+
+ _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl ignores most _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf, _\bt_\bb_\bl and _\be_\bq_\bn(1) constructions.
+
+ Under the -\b-v\bv option, all words not literally in the spelling
+ list are printed, and plausible derivations from spelling
+ list words are indicated.
+
+ Under the -\b-b\bb option, British spelling is checked. Besides
+ preferring _\bc_\be_\bn_\bt_\br_\be, _\bc_\bo_\bl_\bo_\bu_\br, _\bs_\bp_\be_\bc_\bi_\ba_\bl_\bi_\bt_\by, _\bt_\br_\ba_\bv_\be_\bl_\bl_\be_\bd, etc., this
+ option insists upon -_\bi_\bs_\be in words like _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bn_\bd_\ba_\br_\bd_\bi_\bs_\be, Fowler
+ and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding.
+
+ Under the -\b-x\bx option, every plausible stem is printed with
+ `=' for each word.
+
+ The spelling list is based on many sources. While it is
+ more haphazard than an ordinary dictionary, it is also more
+ effective with proper names and popular technical words.
+ Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medi-
+ cine and chemistry is light.
+
+ The auxiliary files used for the spelling list, stop list,
+ and history file may be specified by arguments following the
+ -\b-d\bd, -\b-s\bs, and -\b-h\bh options. The default files are indicated
+ below. Copies of all output may be accumulated in the his-
+ tory file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g.
+ thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise pass.
+
+ Two routines help maintain the hash lists used by _\bs_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl.
+ Both expect a set of words, one per line, from the standard
+ input. _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl_\bi_\bn combines the words from the standard input
+ and the preexisting _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt file and places a new list on the
+ standard output. If no _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt file is specified, the new list
+ is created from scratch. _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl_\bo_\bu_\bt looks up each word from
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1)
+
+
+
+ the standard input and prints on the standard output those
+ that are missing from (or present on, with option -\b-d\bd) the
+ hashed _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt file. For example, to verify that _\bh_\bo_\bo_\bk_\be_\by is not
+ on the default spelling list, add it to your own private
+ list, and then use it with _\bs_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl,
+
+ echo hookey | spellout /usr/dict/hlista
+ echo hookey | spellin /usr/dict/hlista > myhlist
+ spell -d myhlist huckfinn
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/dict/hlist[ab] hashed spelling lists, American & Brit-
+ ish, default for -\b-d\bd
+ /usr/dict/hstop hashed stop list, default for -\b-s\bs
+ /dev/null history file, default for -\b-h\bh
+ /tmp/spell.$$* temporary files
+ /usr/lib/spell
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ deroff(1), sort(1), tee(1), sed(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations
+ will probably wish to monitor the output for several months
+ to gather local additions.
+ British spelling was done by an American.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ spell, spellin, spellout - find spelling errors
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsp\bpe\bel\bll\bl [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-b\bb ] [ -\b-x\bx ] [ -\b-d\bd hlist ] [ -\b-s\bs hstop ] [ -\b-h\bh
+ spellhist ] [ file ] ...
+
+ s\bsp\bpe\bel\bll\bli\bin\bn [ list ]
+
+ s\bsp\bpe\bel\bll\blo\bou\but\bt [ -\b-d\bd ] list
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl collects words from the named documents, and looks
+ them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among
+ nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes
+ or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on
+ the standard output. If no files are named, words are col-
+ lected from the standard input.
+
+ _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl ignores most _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf, _\bt_\bb_\bl and _\be_\bq_\bn(1) constructions.
+
+ Under the -\b-v\bv option, all words not literally in the spelling
+ list are printed, and plausible derivations from spelling
+ list words are indicated.
+
+ Under the -\b-b\bb option, British spelling is checked. Besides
+ preferring _\bc_\be_\bn_\bt_\br_\be, _\bc_\bo_\bl_\bo_\bu_\br, _\bs_\bp_\be_\bc_\bi_\ba_\bl_\bi_\bt_\by, _\bt_\br_\ba_\bv_\be_\bl_\bl_\be_\bd, etc., this
+ option insists upon -_\bi_\bs_\be in words like _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bn_\bd_\ba_\br_\bd_\bi_\bs_\be, Fowler
+ and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding.
+
+ Under the -\b-x\bx option, every plausible stem is printed with
+ `=' for each word.
+
+ The spelling list is based on many sources. While it is
+ more haphazard than an ordinary dictionary, it is also more
+ effective with proper names and popular technical words.
+ Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medi-
+ cine and chemistry is light.
+
+ The auxiliary files used for the spelling list, stop list,
+ and history file may be specified by arguments following the
+ -\b-d\bd, -\b-s\bs, and -\b-h\bh options. The default files are indicated
+ below. Copies of all output may be accumulated in the his-
+ tory file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g.
+ thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise pass.
+
+ Two routines help maintain the hash lists used by _\bs_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl.
+ Both expect a set of words, one per line, from the standard
+ input. _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl_\bi_\bn combines the words from the standard input
+ and the preexisting _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt file and places a new list on the
+ standard output. If no _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt file is specified, the new list
+ is created from scratch. _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl_\bo_\bu_\bt looks up each word from
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1)
+
+
+
+ the standard input and prints on the standard output those
+ that are missing from (or present on, with option -\b-d\bd) the
+ hashed _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt file. For example, to verify that _\bh_\bo_\bo_\bk_\be_\by is not
+ on the default spelling list, add it to your own private
+ list, and then use it with _\bs_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl,
+
+ echo hookey | spellout /usr/dict/hlista
+ echo hookey | spellin /usr/dict/hlista > myhlist
+ spell -d myhlist huckfinn
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/dict/hlist[ab] hashed spelling lists, American & Brit-
+ ish, default for -\b-d\bd
+ /usr/dict/hstop hashed stop list, default for -\b-s\bs
+ /dev/null history file, default for -\b-h\bh
+ /tmp/spell.$$* temporary files
+ /usr/lib/spell
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ deroff(1), sort(1), tee(1), sed(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations
+ will probably wish to monitor the output for several months
+ to gather local additions.
+ British spelling was done by an American.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ spell, spellin, spellout - find spelling errors
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsp\bpe\bel\bll\bl [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-b\bb ] [ -\b-x\bx ] [ -\b-d\bd hlist ] [ -\b-s\bs hstop ] [ -\b-h\bh
+ spellhist ] [ file ] ...
+
+ s\bsp\bpe\bel\bll\bli\bin\bn [ list ]
+
+ s\bsp\bpe\bel\bll\blo\bou\but\bt [ -\b-d\bd ] list
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl collects words from the named documents, and looks
+ them up in a spelling list. Words that neither occur among
+ nor are derivable (by applying certain inflections, prefixes
+ or suffixes) from words in the spelling list are printed on
+ the standard output. If no files are named, words are col-
+ lected from the standard input.
+
+ _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl ignores most _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf, _\bt_\bb_\bl and _\be_\bq_\bn(1) constructions.
+
+ Under the -\b-v\bv option, all words not literally in the spelling
+ list are printed, and plausible derivations from spelling
+ list words are indicated.
+
+ Under the -\b-b\bb option, British spelling is checked. Besides
+ preferring _\bc_\be_\bn_\bt_\br_\be, _\bc_\bo_\bl_\bo_\bu_\br, _\bs_\bp_\be_\bc_\bi_\ba_\bl_\bi_\bt_\by, _\bt_\br_\ba_\bv_\be_\bl_\bl_\be_\bd, etc., this
+ option insists upon -_\bi_\bs_\be in words like _\bs_\bt_\ba_\bn_\bd_\ba_\br_\bd_\bi_\bs_\be, Fowler
+ and the OED to the contrary notwithstanding.
+
+ Under the -\b-x\bx option, every plausible stem is printed with
+ `=' for each word.
+
+ The spelling list is based on many sources. While it is
+ more haphazard than an ordinary dictionary, it is also more
+ effective with proper names and popular technical words.
+ Coverage of the specialized vocabularies of biology, medi-
+ cine and chemistry is light.
+
+ The auxiliary files used for the spelling list, stop list,
+ and history file may be specified by arguments following the
+ -\b-d\bd, -\b-s\bs, and -\b-h\bh options. The default files are indicated
+ below. Copies of all output may be accumulated in the his-
+ tory file. The stop list filters out misspellings (e.g.
+ thier=thy-y+ier) that would otherwise pass.
+
+ Two routines help maintain the hash lists used by _\bs_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl.
+ Both expect a set of words, one per line, from the standard
+ input. _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl_\bi_\bn combines the words from the standard input
+ and the preexisting _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt file and places a new list on the
+ standard output. If no _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt file is specified, the new list
+ is created from scratch. _\bS_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl_\bo_\bu_\bt looks up each word from
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SPELL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPELL(1)
+
+
+
+ the standard input and prints on the standard output those
+ that are missing from (or present on, with option -\b-d\bd) the
+ hashed _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt file. For example, to verify that _\bh_\bo_\bo_\bk_\be_\by is not
+ on the default spelling list, add it to your own private
+ list, and then use it with _\bs_\bp_\be_\bl_\bl,
+
+ echo hookey | spellout /usr/dict/hlista
+ echo hookey | spellin /usr/dict/hlista > myhlist
+ spell -d myhlist huckfinn
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/dict/hlist[ab] hashed spelling lists, American & Brit-
+ ish, default for -\b-d\bd
+ /usr/dict/hstop hashed stop list, default for -\b-s\bs
+ /dev/null history file, default for -\b-h\bh
+ /tmp/spell.$$* temporary files
+ /usr/lib/spell
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ deroff(1), sort(1), tee(1), sed(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The spelling list's coverage is uneven; new installations
+ will probably wish to monitor the output for several months
+ to gather local additions.
+ British spelling was done by an American.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SPLINE(1G) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPLINE(1G)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ spline - interpolate smooth curve
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsp\bpl\bli\bin\bne\be [ option ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bp_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be takes pairs of numbers from the standard input as
+ abcissas and ordinates of a function. It produces a similar
+ set, which is approximately equally spaced and includes the
+ input set, on the standard output. The cubic spline output
+ (R. W. Hamming, _\bN_\bu_\bm_\be_\br_\bi_\bc_\ba_\bl _\bM_\be_\bt_\bh_\bo_\bd_\bs _\bf_\bo_\br _\bS_\bc_\bi_\be_\bn_\bt_\bi_\bs_\bt_\bs _\ba_\bn_\bd
+ _\bE_\bn_\bg_\bi_\bn_\be_\be_\br_\bs, 2nd ed., 349ff) has two continuous derivatives,
+ and sufficiently many points to look smooth when plotted,
+ for example by _\bg_\br_\ba_\bp_\bh(1G).
+
+ The following options are recognized, each as a separate
+ argument.
+
+ -\b-a\ba Supply abscissas automatically (they are missing from
+ the input); spacing is given by the next argument, or
+ is assumed to be 1 if next argument is not a number.
+
+ -\b-k\bk The constant _\bk used in the boundary value computation
+
+
+ (2nd deriv. at end) = k*(2nd deriv. next to end)
+
+
+ is set by the next argument. By default _\bk = 0.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Space output points so that approximately _\bn intervals
+ occur between the lower and upper _\bx limits. (Default _\bn
+ = 100.)
+
+ -\b-p\bp Make output periodic, i.e. match derivatives at ends.
+ First and last input values should normally agree.
+
+ -\b-x\bx Next 1 (or 2) arguments are lower (and upper) _\bx limits.
+ Normally these limits are calculated from the data.
+ Automatic abcissas start at lower limit (default 0).
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ graph(1G), plot(1G)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ When data is not strictly monotone in _\bx, _\bs_\bp_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be reproduces
+ the input without interpolating extra points.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ A limit of 1000 input points is enforced silently.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SPLIT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SPLIT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ split - split a file into pieces
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsp\bpl\bli\bit\bt [ -n\bn ] [ -b\bb byte_cnt ] [ file [ name ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bp_\bl_\bi_\bt reads _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be and writes it in _\bn-line pieces or in
+ _\bb_\by_\bt_\be__\bc_\bn_\bt byte pieces to a set of output files. The default
+ is in 1000 line pieces. The name of the first output file
+ is _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be with "aa" appended, and so on, lexicographically, to
+ "zz". If no output name is given, "x" is the default, in
+ which case _\bs_\bp_\bl_\bi_\bt will create files from "xaa" to "zzz".
+
+ If no input file is given, or if -\b- is given in its stead,
+ then the standard input file is used.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If you provide _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be, _\bs_\bp_\bl_\bi_\bt can only create 676 separate
+ files. The default naming convention allows 2028 separate
+ files.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 November 20, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+STRINGS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STRINGS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ strings - find the printable strings in a file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bst\btr\bri\bin\bng\bgs\bs [ -\b-a\bao\bo ] [ -\b-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs looks for ascii strings in each of the specified
+ files, or from the standard input. A string is any sequence
+ of 4 or more printing characters. Unless the -\b-a\ba flag is
+ given, _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs only looks in the initialized data space of
+ object files. If the -\b-o\bo flag is given, then each string is
+ preceded by its decimal offset in the file. If the -\b-_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br
+ flag is given, then _\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br is used as the minimum string
+ length rather than 4.
+
+ _\bS_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs is useful for identifying random object files and
+ many other things.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ od(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The algorithm for identifying strings is extremely primi-
+ tive.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 December 3, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+STRIP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STRIP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ strip - remove symbols and relocation bits
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bst\btr\bri\bip\bp name ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bt_\br_\bi_\bp removes the symbol table and relocation bits ordi-
+ narily attached to the output of the assembler and loader.
+ This is useful to save space after a program has been
+ debugged.
+
+ The effect of _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bp is the same as use of the -\b-s\bs option of
+ _\bl_\bd.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/stm? temporary file
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ld(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+STRUCT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STRUCT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ struct - structure Fortran programs
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bst\btr\bru\buc\bct\bt [ option ] ... file
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bt_\br_\bu_\bc_\bt translates the Fortran program specified by _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ (standard input default) into a Ratfor program. Wherever
+ possible, Ratfor control constructs replace the original
+ Fortran. Statement numbers appear only where still neces-
+ sary. Cosmetic changes are made, including changing Holler-
+ ith strings into quoted strings and relational operators
+ into symbols (.e.g. ".GT." into ">"). The output is
+ appropriately indented.
+
+ The following options may occur in any order.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Input is accepted in standard format, i.e. comments
+ are specified by a c, C, or * in column 1, and con-
+ tinuation lines are specified by a nonzero, nonblank
+ character in column 6. Normally input is in the form
+ accepted by _\bf_\b7_\b7(1)
+
+ -\b-i\bi Do not turn computed goto statements into switches.
+ (Ratfor does not turn switches back into computed goto
+ statements.)
+
+ -\b-a\ba Turn sequences of else ifs into a non-Ratfor switch of
+ the form
+
+
+ switch
+ { case pred1: code
+ case pred2: code
+ case pred3: code
+ default: code
+ }
+
+ The case predicates are tested in order; the code
+ appropriate to only one case is executed. This gen-
+ eralized form of switch statement does not occur in
+ Ratfor.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Generate goto's instead of multilevel break statements.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Generate goto's instead of multilevel next statements.
+
+ -\b-t\bt_\bn Make the nonzero integer _\bn the lowest valued label in
+ the output program (default 10).
+
+ -\b-c\bc_\bn Increment successive labels in the output program by
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+STRUCT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STRUCT(1)
+
+
+
+ the nonzero integer _\bn (default 1).
+
+ -\b-e\be_\bn If _\bn is 0 (default), place code within a loop only if
+ it can lead to an iteration of the loop. If _\bn is
+ nonzero, admit a small code segments to a loop if oth-
+ erwise the loop would have exits to several places
+ including the segment, and the segment can be reached
+ only from the loop. `Small' is close to, but not equal
+ to, the number of statements in the code segment.
+ Values of n under 10 are suggested.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/struct*
+ /usr/lib/struct/*
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ f77(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Struct knows Fortran 66 syntax, but not full Fortran 77.
+ If an input Fortran program contains identifiers which are
+ reserved words in Ratfor, the structured version of the pro-
+ gram will not be a valid Ratfor program.
+ The labels generated cannot go above 32767.
+ If you get a goto without a target, try -\b-e\be .\b.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+STTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STTY(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ stty - set terminal options
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bst\btt\bty\by [ option ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bt_\bt_\by sets certain I/O options on the current output termi-
+ nal, placing its output on the diagnostic output. With no
+ argument, it reports the speed of the terminal and the set-
+ tings of the options which are different from their
+ defaults. Use of one of the following options modifies the
+ output as described:
+
+ a\bal\bll\bl All normally used option settings are reported.
+
+ e\bev\bve\ber\bry\byt\bth\bhi\bin\bng\bg
+ Everything _\bs_\bt_\bt_\by knows about is printed.
+
+ s\bsp\bpe\bee\bed\bd The terminal speed alone is printed on the stan-
+ dard output.
+
+ s\bsi\biz\bze\be The terminal (window) sizes are printed on the
+ standard output, first rows and then columns.
+
+ The option strings are selected from the following
+ set:
+
+ e\bev\bve\ben\bn allow even parity input
+ -\b-e\bev\bve\ben\bn disallow even parity input
+ o\bod\bdd\bd allow odd parity input
+ -\b-o\bod\bdd\bd disallow odd parity input
+ r\bra\baw\bw raw mode input (n\bno\bo input processing (erase, kill,
+ interrupt, ...); parity bit passed back)
+ -\b-r\bra\baw\bw negate raw mode
+ c\bco\boo\bok\bke\bed\bd same as `-raw'
+ c\bcb\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bk make each character available to _\br_\be_\ba_\bd(2) as
+ received; no erase and kill processing, but all
+ other processing (interrupt, suspend, ...) is per-
+ formed
+ -\b-c\bcb\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bk make characters available to _\br_\be_\ba_\bd only when new-
+ line is received
+ -\b-n\bnl\bl allow carriage return for new-line, and output
+ CR-LF for carriage return or new-line
+ n\bnl\bl accept only new-line to end lines
+ e\bec\bch\bho\bo echo back every character typed
+ -\b-e\bec\bch\bho\bo do not echo characters
+ l\blc\bca\bas\bse\be map upper case to lower case
+ -\b-l\blc\bca\bas\bse\be do not map case
+ t\bta\ban\bnd\bde\bem\bm enable flow control, so that the system sends out
+ the stop character when its internal queue is in
+ danger of overflowing on input, and sends the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+STTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STTY(1)
+
+
+
+ start character when it is ready to accept further
+ input
+ -\b-t\bta\ban\bnd\bde\bem\bm disable flow control
+ -\b-t\bta\bab\bbs\bs replace tabs by spaces when printing
+ t\bta\bab\bbs\bs preserve tabs
+ e\bek\bk set erase and kill characters to # and @
+ For the following commands which take a character argument
+ _\bc, you may also specify _\bc as the ``u'' or ``undef'', to set
+ the value to be undefined. A value of ``^x'', a 2 character
+ sequence, is also interpreted as a control character, with
+ ``^?'' representing delete.
+
+ e\ber\bra\bas\bse\be _\bc set erase character to _\bc (default `#', but often
+ reset to ^H.)
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl _\bc set kill character to _\bc (default `@', but often
+ reset to ^U.)
+ i\bin\bnt\btr\br _\bc set interrupt character to _\bc (default DEL or ^?
+ (delete), but often reset to ^C.)
+ q\bqu\bui\bit\bt _\bc set quit character to _\bc (default control \.)
+ s\bst\bta\bar\brt\bt _\bc set start character to _\bc (default control Q.)
+ s\bst\bto\bop\bp _\bc set stop character to _\bc (default control S.)
+ e\beo\bof\bf _\bc set end of file character to _\bc (default control
+ D.)
+ b\bbr\brk\bk _\bc set break character to _\bc (default undefined.) This
+ character is an additional character causing
+ wakeup.
+ c\bcr\br0\b0 c\bcr\br1\b1 c\bcr\br2\b2 c\bcr\br3\b3
+ select style of delay for carriage return (see
+ _\bi_\bo_\bc_\bt_\bl(2))
+ n\bnl\bl0\b0 n\bnl\bl1\b1 n\bnl\bl2\b2 n\bnl\bl3\b3
+ select style of delay for linefeed
+ t\bta\bab\bb0\b0 t\bta\bab\bb1\b1 t\bta\bab\bb2\b2 t\bta\bab\bb3\b3
+ select style of delay for tab
+ f\bff\bf0\b0 f\bff\bf1\b1 select style of delay for form feed
+ b\bbs\bs0\b0 b\bbs\bs1\b1 select style of delay for backspace
+
+ t\btt\bty\by3\b33\b3 set all modes suitable for the Teletype Corpora-
+ tion Model 33 terminal.
+ t\btt\bty\by3\b37\b7 set all modes suitable for the Teletype Corpora-
+ tion Model 37 terminal.
+ v\bvt\bt0\b05\b5 set all modes suitable for Digital Equipment Corp.
+ VT05 terminal
+ d\bde\bec\bc set all modes suitable for Digital Equipment Corp.
+ operating systems users; (erase, kill, and inter-
+ rupt characters to ^?, ^U, and ^C, decctlq and
+ ``newcrt''.)
+
+ t\btn\bn3\b30\b00\b0 set all modes suitable for a General Electric Ter-
+ miNet 300
+ t\bti\bi7\b70\b00\b0 set all modes suitable for Texas Instruments 700
+ series terminal
+ t\bte\bek\bk set all modes suitable for Tektronix 4014 terminal
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+STTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STTY(1)
+
+
+
+ 0\b0 hang up phone line immediately
+ 5\b50\b0 7\b75\b5 1\b11\b10\b0 1\b13\b34\b4 1\b15\b50\b0 2\b20\b00\b0 3\b30\b00\b0 6\b60\b00\b0 1\b12\b20\b00\b0 1\b18\b80\b00\b0 2\b24\b40\b00\b0 4\b48\b80\b00\b0 9\b96\b60\b00\b0 e\bex\bxt\bta\ba e\bex\bxt\btb\bb
+ Set terminal baud rate to the number given, if
+ possible. (These are the speeds supported by the
+ DH-11 interface).
+
+ r\bro\bow\bws\bs _\bn The terminal size is recorded as having _\bn rows.
+
+ c\bco\bol\blu\bum\bmn\bns\bs _\bn The terminal size is recorded as having _\bn columns.
+
+ c\bco\bol\bls\bs _\bn is an alias for _\bc_\bo_\bl_\bu_\bm_\bn_\bs.
+
+ A teletype driver which supports the job control processing
+ of _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) and more functionality than the basic driver is
+ fully described in _\bt_\bt_\by(4). The following options apply only
+ to it.
+
+ n\bne\bew\bw Use new driver (switching flushes typeahead).
+ c\bcr\brt\bt Set options for a CRT (crtbs, ctlecho and, if >=
+ 1200 baud, crterase and crtkill.)
+ c\bcr\brt\btb\bbs\bs Echo backspaces on erase characters.
+ p\bpr\brt\bte\ber\bra\bas\bse\be For printing terminal echo erased characters back-
+ wards within ``\'' and ``/''.
+ c\bcr\brt\bte\ber\bra\bas\bse\be Wipe out erased characters with ``backspace-
+ space-backspace.''
+ -\b-c\bcr\brt\bte\ber\bra\bas\bse\be Leave erased characters visible; just backspace.
+ c\bcr\brt\btk\bki\bil\bll\bl Wipe out input on like kill ala c\bcr\brt\bte\ber\bra\bas\bse\be.\b.
+ -\b-c\bcr\brt\btk\bki\bil\bll\bl Just echo line kill character and a newline on
+ line kill.
+ c\bct\btl\ble\bec\bch\bho\bo Echo control characters as ``^_\bx'' (and delete as
+ ``^?''.) Print two backspaces following the EOT
+ character (control D).
+ -\b-c\bct\btl\ble\bec\bch\bho\bo Control characters echo as themselves; in cooked
+ mode EOT (control-D) is not echoed.
+
+ d\bde\bec\bcc\bct\btl\blq\bq After output is suspended (normally by ^S), only a
+ start character (normally ^Q) will restart it.
+ This is compatible with DEC's vendor supplied sys-
+ tems.
+
+ -\b-d\bde\bec\bcc\bct\btl\blq\bq After output is suspended, any character typed
+ will restart it; the start character will restart
+ output without providing any input. (This is the
+ default.)
+ t\bto\bos\bst\bto\bop\bp Background jobs stop if they attempt terminal out-
+ put.
+ -\b-t\bto\bos\bst\bto\bop\bp Output from background jobs to the terminal is
+ allowed.
+ t\bti\bil\bld\bde\be Convert ``~'' to ```'' on output (for Hazeltine
+ terminals).
+ -\b-t\bti\bil\bld\bde\be Leave poor ``~'' alone.
+ f\bfl\blu\bus\bsh\bho\bo Output is being discarded usually because user hit
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+STTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STTY(1)
+
+
+
+ control O (internal state bit).
+ -\b-f\bfl\blu\bus\bsh\bho\bo Output is not being discarded.
+ p\bpe\ben\bnd\bdi\bin\bn Input is pending after a switch from cbreak to
+ cooked and will be re-input when a read becomes
+ pending or more input arrives (internal state
+ bit).
+ -\b-p\bpe\ben\bnd\bdi\bin\bn Input is not pending.
+ p\bpa\bas\bss\bs8\b8 Passes all 8 bits through on input, in any mode.
+ -\b-p\bpa\bas\bss\bs8\b8 Strips the 0200 bit on input except in raw mode.
+ m\bmd\bdm\bmb\bbu\buf\bf Start/stop output on carrier transitions (not
+ implemented).
+ -\b-m\bmd\bdm\bmb\bbu\buf\bf Return error if write attempted after carrier
+ drops.
+ l\bli\bit\bto\bou\but\bt Send output characters without any processing.
+ -\b-l\bli\bit\bto\bou\but\bt Do normal output processing, inserting delays,
+ etc.
+ n\bno\boh\bha\ban\bng\bg Don't send hangup signal if carrier drops.
+ -\b-n\bno\boh\bha\ban\bng\bg Send hangup signal to control process group when
+ carrier drops.
+ e\bet\btx\bxa\bac\bck\bk Diablo style etx/ack handshaking (not imple-
+ mented).
+
+ The following special characters are applicable only to the
+ new teletype driver and are not normally changed.
+
+ s\bsu\bus\bsp\bp _\bc set suspend process character to _\bc (default con-
+ trol Z).
+ d\bds\bsu\bus\bsp\bp _\bc set delayed suspend process character to _\bc
+ (default control Y).
+ r\brp\bpr\brn\bnt\bt _\bc set reprint line character to _\bc (default control
+ R).
+ f\bfl\blu\bus\bsh\bh _\bc set flush output character to _\bc (default control
+ O).
+ w\bwe\ber\bra\bas\bse\be _\bc set word erase character to _\bc (default control W).
+ l\bln\bne\bex\bxt\bt _\bc set literal next character to _\bc (default control
+ V).
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ioctl(2), tabs(1), tset(1), tty(4)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+STYLE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual STYLE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ style - analyze surface characteristics of a document
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bst\bty\byl\ble\be [ -\b-m\bml\bl ] [ -\b-m\bmm\bm ] [ -\b-a\ba ] [ -\b-e\be ] [ -\b-l\bl num ] [ -\b-r\br num ] [
+ -\b-p\bp ] [ -\b-P\bP ] file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bt_\by_\bl_\be analyzes the surface characteristics of the writing
+ style of a document. It reports on readability, sentence
+ length and structure, word length and usage, verb type, and
+ sentence openers. Because _\bs_\bt_\by_\bl_\be runs _\bd_\be_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf before looking
+ at the text, formatting header files should be included as
+ part of the input. The default macro package -\b-m\bms\bs may be
+ overridden with the flag -\b-m\bmm\bm.\b. The flag -\b-m\bml\bl, which causes
+ d\bde\ber\bro\bof\bff\bf to skip lists, should be used if the document con-
+ tains many lists of non-sentences. The other options are
+ used to locate sentences with certain characteristics.
+
+ -\b-a\ba print all sentences with their length and readability
+ index.
+
+ -\b-e\be print all sentences that begin with an expletive.
+
+ -\b-p\bp print all sentences that contain a passive verb.
+
+ -\b-l\bl_\bn_\bu_\bm
+ print all sentences longer than _\bn_\bu_\bm.
+
+ -\b-r\br_\bn_\bu_\bm
+ print all sentences whose readability index is greater
+ than _\bn_\bu_\bm.
+
+ -\b-P\bP print parts of speech of the words in the document.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ deroff(1), diction(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Use of non-standard formatting macros may cause incorrect
+ sentence breaks.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SU(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SU(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ su - substitute user id temporarily
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsu\bu [ -f ] [ - ] [ userid ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bu demands the password of the specified _\bu_\bs_\be_\br_\bi_\bd, and if it
+ is given, changes to that _\bu_\bs_\be_\br_\bi_\bd and invokes the Shell _\bs_\bh(1)
+ or _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) without changing the current directory. The user
+ environment is unchanged except for HOME and SHELL, which
+ are taken from the password file for the user being substi-
+ tuted (see _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7)). The new user ID stays in force
+ until the Shell exits.
+
+ If no _\bu_\bs_\be_\br_\bi_\bd is specified, ``root'' is assumed. Only users
+ in the ``wheel'' group (group 0) can _\bs_\bu to ``root'', even
+ with the root password. To remind the super-user of his
+ responsibilities, the Shell substitutes `#' for its usual
+ prompt.
+
+ The -\b-f\bf option prevents _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) from executing the .cshrc
+ file; thus making _\bs_\bu start up faster.
+
+ The -\b- option simulates a full login.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1), csh(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SUM(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SUM(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sum - sum and count blocks in a file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsu\bum\bm file
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bu_\bm calculates and prints a 16-bit checksum for the named
+ file, and also prints the number of blocks in the file. It
+ is typically used to look for bad spots, or to validate a
+ file communicated over some transmission line.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ wc(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ `Read error' is indistinguishable from end of file on most
+ devices; check the block count.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SYMORDER(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYMORDER(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ symorder - rearrange name list
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsy\bym\bmo\bor\brd\bde\ber\br orderlist symbolfile
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bO_\br_\bd_\be_\br_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is a file containing symbols to be found in sym-
+ bolfile, 1 symbol per line.
+
+ _\bS_\by_\bm_\bb_\bo_\bl_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is updated in place to put the requested symbols
+ first in the symbol table, in the order specified. This is
+ done by swapping the old symbols in the required spots with
+ the new ones. If all of the order symbols are not found, an
+ error is generated.
+
+ This program was specifically designed to cut down on the
+ overhead of getting symbols from /vmunix.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ nlist(3)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SYSLINE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSLINE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sysline - display system status on status line of a terminal
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsy\bys\bsl\bli\bin\bne\be [ -\b-b\bbc\bcd\bde\bew\bwh\bhD\bDi\bil\blm\bmp\bpq\bqr\brs\bsj\bj ] [ -\b-H\bH r\bre\bem\bmo\bot\bte\be ] [ +\b+N\bN ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be runs in the background and periodically displays
+ system status information on the status line of the termi-
+ nal. Not all terminals contain a status line. Those that
+ do include the h19, concept 108, Ann Arbor Ambassador,
+ vt100, Televideo 925/950 and Freedom 100. If no flags are
+ given, _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be displays the time of day, the current load
+ average, the change in load average in the last 5 minutes,
+ the number of users (followed by a `u'), the number of runn-
+ able process (followed by a `r')[VAX only], the number of
+ suspended processes (followed by a `s')[VAX only], and the
+ users who have logged on and off since the last status
+ report. Finally, if new mail has arrived, a summary of it
+ is printed. If there is unread mail in your mailbox, an
+ asterisk will appear after the display of the number of
+ users. The display is normally in reverse video (if your
+ terminal supports this in the status line) and is right jus-
+ tified to reduce distraction. Every fifth display is done
+ in normal video to give the screen a chance to rest.
+
+ If you have a file named .who in your home directory, then
+ the contents of that file is printed first. One common use
+ of this feature is to alias chdir, pushd, and popd to place
+ the current directory stack in ~/.who after it changes the
+ new directory.
+
+ The following flags may be given on the command line.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Beep once every half hour and twice every hour,
+ just like those obnoxious watches you keep hear-
+ ing.
+
+ -\b-c\bc Clear the status line for 5 seconds before each
+ redisplay.
+
+ -\b-d\bd Debug mode -- print status line data in human
+ readable format.
+
+ -\b-D\bD Print out the current day/date before the time.
+
+ -\b-e\be Print out only the information. Do not print
+ out the control commands necessary to put the
+ information on the bottom line. This option is
+ useful for putting the output of _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be onto
+ the mode line of an emacs window.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SYSLINE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSLINE(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-w\bw Window mode -- print the status on the current
+ line of the terminal, suitable for use inside a
+ one line window.
+
+ -\b-H\bH r\bre\bem\bmo\bot\bte\be Print the load average on the remote host _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be
+ [VAX only]. If the host is down, or is not
+ sending out _\br_\bw_\bh_\bo_\bd packets, then the down time is
+ printed instead. If the prefix "ucb" is
+ present, then it is removed.
+
+ -\b-h\bh Print out the host machine's name after the time
+ [VAX only].
+
+ -\b-l\bl Don't print the names of people who log in and
+ out.
+
+ -\b-m\bm Don't check for mail.
+
+ -\b-p\bp Don't report the number of process which are
+ runnable and suspended.
+
+ -\b-r\br Don't display in reverse video.
+
+ +\b+N\bN Update the status line every N seconds. The
+ default is 60 seconds.
+
+ -\b-q\bq Don't print out diagnostic messages if something
+ goes wrong when starting up.
+
+ -\b-i\bi Print out the process id of the _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be process
+ onto standard output upon startup. With this
+ information you can send the alarm signal to the
+ _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be process to cause it to update immedi-
+ ately. _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be writes to the standard error, so
+ you can redirect the standard output into a file
+ to catch the process id.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Print "short" form of line by left-justifying
+ _\bi_\bf_\bf escapes are not allowed in the status line.
+ Some terminals (the Televideos and Freedom 100
+ for example) do not allow cursor movement (or
+ other "intelligent" operations) in the status
+ line. For these terminals, _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be normally
+ uses blanks to cause right-justification. This
+ flag will disable the adding of the blanks.
+
+ -\b-j\bj Force the sysline output to be left justified
+ even on terminals capable of cursor movement on
+ the status line.
+
+ If you have a file .syslinelock in your home directory, then
+ _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be will not update its statistics and write on your
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SYSLINE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSLINE(1)
+
+
+
+ screen, it will just go to sleep for a minute. This is use-
+ ful if you want to momentarily disable _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be. Note that it
+ may take a few seconds from the time the lock file is
+ created until you are guaranteed that _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be will not write
+ on the screen.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/utmp names of people who are logged in
+ /dev/kmem contains process table [VAX only]
+ /usr/spool/rwho/whod.* who/uptime information for remote hosts [VAX only]
+ ${HOME}/.who information to print on bottom line
+ ${HOME}/.syslinelock when it exists, sysline will not print
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bRS\bS
+ John Foderaro
+ Tom Ferrin converted it to use termcap.
+ Mark Horton added terminfo capability.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If you interrupt the display then you may find your cursor
+ missing or stuck on the status line. The best thing to do
+ is reset the terminal.
+ If there is too much for one line, the excess is thrown
+ away.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ systat - display system statistics on a crt
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsy\bys\bst\bta\bat\bt [ -_\bd_\bi_\bs_\bp_\bl_\ba_\by ] [ refresh-interval ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ S\bSy\bys\bst\bta\bat\bt displays various system statistics in a screen
+ oriented fashion using the curses screen display library,
+ _\bc_\bu_\br_\bs_\be_\bs(3X).
+
+ While _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt is running the screen is usually divided into
+ two windows (an exception is the vmstat display which uses
+ the entire screen). The upper window depicts the current
+ system load average. The information displayed in the lower
+ window may vary, depending on user commands. The last line
+ on the screen is reserved for user input and error messages.
+
+ By default _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt displays the processes getting the largest
+ percentage of the processor in the lower window. Other
+ displays show swap space usage, disk i/o statistics (a la
+ _\bi_\bo_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(1)), virtual memory statistics (a la _\bv_\bm_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(1)), net-
+ work ``mbuf'' utilization, and network connections (a la
+ _\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(1)).
+
+ Input is interpreted at two different levels. A ``global''
+ command interpreter processes all keyboard input. If this
+ command interpreter fails to recognize a command, the input
+ line is passed to a per-display command interpreter. This
+ allows each display to have certain display-specific com-
+ mands.
+
+ Certain characters cause immediate action by _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt. These
+ are
+
+ ^L Refresh the screen.
+
+ ^G Print the name of the current ``display'' being shown
+ in the lower window and the refresh interval.
+
+ ^Z Stop _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt.
+
+ : Move the cursor to the command line and interpret the
+ input line typed as a command. While entering a com-
+ mand the current character erase, word erase, and line
+ kill characters may be used.
+
+ The following commands are interpreted by the ``global''
+ command interpreter.
+
+ help
+ Print the names of the available displays on the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+ command line.
+
+ load
+ Print the load average over the past 1, 5, and 15
+ minutes on the command line.
+
+ stop
+ Stop refreshing the screen.
+
+ [ start ] [ number ]
+ Start (continue) refreshing the screen. If a second,
+ numeric, argument is provided it is interpreted as a
+ refresh interval (in seconds). Supplying only a number
+ will set the refresh interval to this value.
+
+ quit
+ Exit _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt. (This may be abbreviated to _\bq.)
+
+ The available displays are:
+
+ pigs
+ Display, in the lower window, those processes resident
+ in main memory and getting the largest portion of the
+ processor (the default display). When less than 100% of
+ the processor is scheduled to user processes, the
+ remaining time is accounted to the ``idle'' process.
+
+ iostat
+ Display, in the lower window, statistics about proces-
+ sor use and disk throughput. Statistics on processor
+ use appear as bar graphs of the amount of time execut-
+ ing in user mode (``user''), in user mode running low
+ priority processes (``nice''), in system mode (``sys-
+ tem''), and idle (``idle''). Statistics on disk
+ throughput show, for each drive, kilobytes of data
+ transferred, number of disk transactions performed, and
+ average seek time (in milliseconds). This information
+ may be displayed as bar graphs or as rows of numbers
+ which scroll downward. Bar graphs are shown by
+ default; commands specific to this display are dis-
+ cussed below.
+
+ swap
+ Display, in the lower window, swap space in use on each
+ swap device configured. Two sets of bar graphs are
+ shown. The upper graph displays swap space allocated
+ to pure text segments (code), the lower graph displays
+ space allocated to stack and data segments. Allocated
+ space is sorted by its size into buckets of size dmmin,
+ dmmin*2, dmmin*4, up to dmmax (to reflect allocation
+ policies imposed by the system). The disk segment
+ size, in sectors, is displayed along the left hand side
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+ of the text, and data and stack graphs. Space allo-
+ cated to the user structure and page tables is not
+ currently accounted for.
+
+ mbufs
+ Display, in the lower window, the number of mbufs allo-
+ cated for particular uses, i.e. data, socket struc-
+ tures, etc.
+
+ vmstat
+ Take over the entire display and show a (rather
+ crowded) compendium of statistics related to virtual
+ memory usage, process scheduling, device interrupts,
+ system name translation cacheing, disk i/o, etc.
+
+ The upper left quadrant of the screen shows the number
+ of users logged in and the load average over the last
+ one, five, and fifteen minute intervals. Below this
+ line are statistics on memory utilization. The first
+ row of the table reports memory usage only among active
+ processes, that is processes that have run in the pre-
+ vious twenty seconds. The second row reports on memory
+ usage of all processes. The first column reports on
+ the number of physical pages claimed by processes. The
+ second column reports the number of physical pages that
+ are devoted to read only text pages. The third and
+ fourth columns report the same two figures for virtual
+ pages, that is the number of pages that would be needed
+ if all processes had all of their pages. Finally the
+ last column shows the number of physical pages on the
+ free list.
+
+ Below the memory display is the disk usage display. It
+ reports the number of seeks, transfers, and number of
+ kilobyte blocks transferred per second averaged over
+ the refresh period of the display (by default, five
+ seconds). For some disks it also reports the average
+ milliseconds per seek. Note that the system only keeps
+ statistics on at most four disks.
+
+ Below the disk display is a list of the average number
+ of processes (over the last refresh interval) that are
+ runnable (`r'), in page wait (`p'), in disk wait other
+ than paging (`d'), sleeping (`s'), and swapped out but
+ desiring to run (`w'). Below the queue length listing
+ is a numerical listing and a bar graph showing the
+ amount of system (shown as `='), user (shown as `>'),
+ nice (shown as `-'), and idle time (shown as ` ').
+
+ At the bottom left are statistics on name translations.
+ It lists the number of names translated in the previous
+ interval, the number and percentage of the translations
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+ that were handled by the system wide name translation
+ cache, and the number and percentage of the transla-
+ tions that were handled by the per process name trans-
+ lation cache.
+
+ Under the date in the upper right hand quadrant are
+ statistics on paging and swapping activity. The first
+ two columns report the average number of pages brought
+ in and out per second over the last refresh interval
+ due to page faults and the paging daemon. The third
+ and fourth columns report the average number of pages
+ brought in and out per second over the last refresh
+ interval due to swap requests initiated by the
+ scheduler. The first row of the display shows the
+ average number of disk transfers per second over the
+ last refresh interval; the second row of the display
+ shows the average number of pages transferred per
+ second over the last refresh interval.
+
+ Below the paging statistics is a line listing the aver-
+ age number of total reclaims ('Rec'), intransit block-
+ ing page faults (`It'), swap text pages found in free
+ list (`F/S'), file system text pages found in free list
+ (`F/F'), reclaims from free list (`RFL'), pages freed
+ by the clock daemon (`Fre'), and sequential process
+ pages freed (`SFr') per second over the refresh inter-
+ val.
+
+ Below this line are statistics on the average number of
+ zero filled pages (`zf') and demand filled text pages
+ (`xf') per second over the refresh period. The first
+ row indicates the number of requests that were
+ resolved, the second row shows the number that were set
+ up, and the last row shows the percentage of setup
+ requests were actually used. Note that this percentage
+ is usually less than 100%, however it may exceed 100%
+ if a large number of requests are actually used long
+ after they were set up during a period when no new
+ pages are being set up. Thus this figure is most
+ interesting when observed over a long time period, such
+ as from boot time (see below on getting such a
+ display).
+
+ Below the page fill statistics is a column that lists
+ the average number of context switches (`Csw'), traps
+ (`Trp'; includes page faults), system calls (`Sys'),
+ interrupts (`Int'), characters output to DZ ports using
+ pseudo-DMA (`Pdm'), network software interrupts
+ (`Sof'), page faults (`Flt'), pages scanned by the page
+ daemon (`Scn'), and revolutions of the page daemon's
+ hand (`Rev') per second over the refresh interval.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+ Running down the right hand side of the display is a
+ breakdown of the interrupts being handled by the sys-
+ tem. At the top of the list is the total interrupts
+ per second over the time interval. The rest of the
+ column breaks down the total on a device by device
+ basis. Only devices that have interrupted at least once
+ since boot time are shown.
+
+ netstat
+ Display, in the lower window, network connections. By
+ default, network servers awaiting requests are not
+ displayed. Each address is displayed in the format
+ ``host.port'', with each shown symbolically, when pos-
+ sible. It is possible to have addresses displayed
+ numerically, limit the display to a set of ports,
+ hosts, and/or protocols; see the list of commands
+ below.
+
+ Commands to switch between displays may be abbreviated to
+ the minimum unambiguous prefix; for example, ``io'' for
+ ``iostat''. Certain information may be discarded when the
+ screen size is insufficient for display. For example, on a
+ machine with 10 drives the _\bi_\bo_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt bar graph displays only 3
+ drives on a 24 line terminal. When a bar graph would over-
+ flow the allotted screen space it is truncated and the
+ actual value is printed ``over top'' of the bar.
+
+ The following commands are specific to the _\bi_\bo_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt display;
+ the minimum unambiguous prefix may be supplied.
+
+ numbers
+ Show the disk i/o statistics in numeric form. Values
+ are displayed in numeric columns which scroll downward.
+
+ bars Show the disk i/o statistics in bar graph form
+ (default).
+
+ msps Toggle the display of average seek time (the default is
+ to not display seek times).
+
+ The following commands are specific to the _\bv_\bm_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt display;
+ the minimum unambiguous prefix may be supplied.
+
+ boot Display cumulative statistics since the system was
+ booted.
+
+ run Display statistics as a running total from the point
+ this command is given.
+
+ time Display statistics averaged over the refresh interval
+ (the default).
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+ zero Reset running statistics to zero.
+
+ The following commands are common to each display which
+ shows information about disk drives. These commands are
+ used to select a set of drives to report on, should your
+ system have more drives configured than can normally be
+ displayed on the screen.
+
+ ignore [ drives ]
+ Do not display information about the drives indicated.
+ Multiple drives may be specified, separated by spaces.
+
+ display [ drives ]
+ Display information about the drives indicated. Multi-
+ ple drives may be specified, separated by spaces.
+
+ The following command is specific to the _\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt display;
+ the minimum unambiguous prefix may be supplied.
+
+ all Toggle the displaying of server processes awaiting
+ requests (this is the equivalent of the -\b-a\ba flag to
+ _\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(1)).
+
+ numbers
+ Display network addresses numerically.
+
+ names
+ Display network addresses symbolically.
+
+ The remaining commands are common to displays which report
+ network connections (currently only the _\bn_\be_\bt_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt display).
+ These commands may be used to select a specific set of con-
+ nections for _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt to report on.
+
+ _\bp_\br_\bo_\bt_\bo_\bc_\bo_\bl
+ Display only network connections using the indicated
+ protocol (currently either ``tcp'' or ``udp'').
+
+ ignore [items]
+ Do not display information about connections associated
+ with the specified hosts or ports. Hosts and ports may
+ be specified by name (``ucbmonet'', ``ftp''), or numer-
+ ically. Host addresses use the Internet dot notation
+ (``128.32.0.9''). Multiple items may be specified with
+ a single command by separating them with spaces.
+
+ display [items]
+ Display information about the connections associated
+ with the specified hosts or ports. As for _\bi_\bg_\bn_\bo_\br_\be,
+ _\bi_\bt_\be_\bm_\bs may be names or numbers.
+
+ show [ports|hosts]
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SYSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SYSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+ Show, on the command line, the currently selected pro-
+ tocols, hosts, and ports. Hosts and ports which are
+ being ignored are prefixed with a `!'. If _\bp_\bo_\br_\bt_\bs or
+ _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bs is supplied as an argument to _\bs_\bh_\bo_\bw, then only the
+ requested information will be displayed.
+
+ reset
+ Reset the port, host, and protocol matching mechanisms
+ to the default (any protocol, port, or host).
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /vmunix for the namelist
+ /dev/kmem for information in main memory
+ /dev/drum for information about swapped out processes
+ /etc/hosts for host names
+ /etc/networks for network names
+ /etc/services for port names
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ The unknown hacker. The _\bp_\bi_\bg_\bs display is derived from a pro-
+ gram of the same name written by Bill Reeves.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Takes 2-10 percent of the cpu. Certain displays presume a
+ 24 line by 80 character terminal. The swap space display
+ should account for space allocated to the user structure and
+ page tables. The _\bv_\bm_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt display looks out of place because
+ it is (it was added in as a separate display rather than
+ create a new program).
+
+ The whole thing is pretty hokey and was included in the dis-
+ tribution under serious duress.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 October 3, 1987 7
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TABS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TABS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tabs - set terminal tabs
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bta\bab\bbs\bs [ -\b-n\bn ] [ terminal ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\ba_\bb_\bs sets the tabs on a variety of terminals. Various ter-
+ minal names given in _\bt_\be_\br_\bm(7) are recognized; the default is,
+ however, suitable for most 300 baud terminals. If the -\b-n\bn
+ flag is present then the left margin is not indented as is
+ normal.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ stty(1), term(7)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ It's much better to use _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt(1).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TAIL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TAIL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tail - deliver the last part of a file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bta\bai\bil\bl [+\b+-\b-]n\bnu\bum\bmb\bbe\ber\br[l\blb\bbc\bc][r\brf\bf] [f\bfi\bil\ble\be]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\ba_\bi_\bl copies the named file to the standard output beginning
+ at a designated place. If no file is named, the standard
+ input is used.
+
+ Copying begins at distance +_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br from the beginning, or
+ -_\bn_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br from the end of the input. _\bN_\bu_\bm_\bb_\be_\br is counted in
+ units of lines, blocks or characters, according to the
+ appended option l\bl,\b, b\bb or c\bc.\b. When no units are specified,
+ counting is by lines.
+
+ Specifying r\br causes tail to print lines from the end of the
+ file in reverse order. The default for r\br is to print the
+ entire file this way. Specifying f\bf causes _\bt_\ba_\bi_\bl to not quit
+ at end of file, but rather wait and try to read repeatedly
+ in hopes that the file will grow.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ dd(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Tails relative to the end of the file are treasured up in a
+ buffer, and thus are limited in length.
+
+ Various kinds of anomalous behavior may happen with charac-
+ ter special files.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 29, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TALK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TALK(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ talk - talk to another user
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bta\bal\blk\bk person [ ttyname ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\ba_\bl_\bk is a visual communication program which copies lines
+ from your terminal to that of another user.
+
+ If you wish to talk to someone on your own machine, then
+ _\bp_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn is just the person's login name. If you wish to talk
+ to a user on another host, then _\bp_\be_\br_\bs_\bo_\bn is of the form
+ _\bu_\bs_\be_\br@_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt.
+
+ If you want to talk to a user who is logged in more than
+ once, the _\bt_\bt_\by_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be argument may be used to indicate the
+ appropriate terminal name, where _\bt_\bt_\by_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is of the form
+ ``ttyXX''.
+
+ When first called, _\bt_\ba_\bl_\bk sends the message
+
+ Message from TalkDaemon@his_machine...
+ talk: connection requested by your_name@your_machine.
+ talk: respond with: talk your_name@your_machine
+
+ to the user you wish to talk to. At this point, the reci-
+ pient of the message should reply by typing
+
+ talk your_name@your_machine
+
+ It doesn't matter from which machine the recipient replies,
+ as long as his login-name is the same. Once communication
+ is established, the two parties may type simultaneously,
+ with their output appearing in separate windows. Typing
+ control L (^L) will cause the screen to be reprinted, while
+ your erase, kill, and word kill characters will behave nor-
+ mally. To exit, just type your interrupt character; _\bt_\ba_\bl_\bk
+ then moves the cursor to the bottom of the screen and
+ restores the terminal to its previous state.
+
+ Permission to talk may be denied or granted by use of the
+ _\bm_\be_\bs_\bg command. At the outset talking is allowed. Certain
+ commands, in particular _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf and _\bp_\br, disallow messages in
+ order to prevent messy output.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/hosts to find the recipient's machine
+ /etc/utmp to find the recipient's tty
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mail(1), mesg(1), who(1), write(1)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 November 24, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TALK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TALK(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The version of _\bt_\ba_\bl_\bk(1) released with 4.3BSD uses a protocol
+ that is incompatible with the protocol used in the version
+ released with 4.2BSD.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 November 24, 1987 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TAR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tar - tape archiver
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bta\bar\br [ key ] [ name ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\ba_\br saves and restores multiple files on a single file (usu-
+ ally a magnetic tape, but it can be any file). _\bT_\ba_\br's actions
+ are controlled by the _\bk_\be_\by argument. The _\bk_\be_\by is a string of
+ characters containing at most one function letter and possi-
+ bly one or more function modifiers. Other arguments to _\bt_\ba_\br
+ are file or directory names specifying which files to dump
+ or restore. In all cases, appearance of a directory name
+ refers to the files and (recursively) subdirectories of that
+ directory.
+
+ The function portion of the key is specified by one of the
+ following letters:
+
+ r\br The named files are written on the end of the tape.
+ The c\bc function implies this.
+
+ x\bx The named files are extracted from the tape. If the
+ named file matches a directory whose contents had
+ been written onto the tape, this directory is
+ (recursively) extracted. The owner, modification
+ time, and mode are restored (if possible). If no
+ file argument is given, the entire content of the
+ tape is extracted. Note that if multiple entries
+ specifying the same file are on the tape, the last
+ one overwrites all earlier.
+
+ t\bt The names of the specified files are listed each
+ time they occur on the tape. If no file argument is
+ given, all of the names on the tape are listed.
+
+ u\bu The named files are added to the tape if either they
+ are not already there or have been modified since
+ last put on the tape.
+
+ c\bc Create a new tape; writing begins on the beginning
+ of the tape instead of after the last file. This
+ command implies r\br.
+
+ The following characters may be used in addition to the
+ letter which selects the function desired.
+
+ o\bo On output, tar normally places information speci-
+ fying owner and modes of directories in the
+ archive. Former versions of tar, when encounter-
+ ing this information will give error message of
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 23, 1988 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TAR(1)
+
+
+
+ the form
+ "<name>/: cannot create".
+ This modifier will suppress the directory informa-
+ tion.
+
+ p\bp This modifier says to restore files to their ori-
+ ginal modes, ignoring the present _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk(2).
+ Setuid and sticky information will also be
+ restored to the super-user.
+
+ 0\b0,\b, .\b..\b..\b.,\b, 9\b9 This modifier selects an alternate drive on which
+ the tape is mounted. The default is drive 0 at
+ 1600 bpi, which is normally /dev/rmt8.
+
+ v\bv Normally _\bt_\ba_\br does its work silently. The v\bv (ver-
+ bose) option makes _\bt_\ba_\br print the name of each file
+ it treats preceded by the function letter. With
+ the t\bt function, the verbose option gives more
+ information about the tape entries than just their
+ names.
+
+ w\bw _\bT_\ba_\br prints the action to be taken followed by file
+ name, then wait for user confirmation. If a word
+ beginning with `y' is given, the action is done.
+ Any other input means don't do it.
+
+ f\bf _\bT_\ba_\br uses the next argument as the name of the
+ archive instead of /dev/rmt?. If the name of the
+ file is `-', tar writes to standard output or
+ reads from standard input, whichever is appropri-
+ ate. Thus, _\bt_\ba_\br can be used as the head or tail of
+ a filter chain. _\bT_\ba_\br can also be used to move
+ hierarchies with the command
+ cd fromdir; tar cf - . | (cd todir; tar xf -)
+
+ b\bb _\bT_\ba_\br uses the next argument as the blocking factor
+ for tape records. The default is 20 (the maximum).
+ This option should only be used with raw magnetic
+ tape archives (See f\bf above). The block size is
+ determined automatically when reading tapes (key
+ letters `x' and `t').
+
+ s\bs tells tar to strip off any leading slashes from
+ pathnames.
+
+ l\bl tells _\bt_\ba_\br to complain if it cannot resolve all of
+ the links to the files dumped. If this is not
+ specified, no error messages are printed.
+
+ m\bm tells _\bt_\ba_\br not to restore the modification times.
+ The modification time will be the time of extrac-
+ tion.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 23, 1988 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TAR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TAR(1)
+
+
+
+ h\bh Force _\bt_\ba_\br to follow symbolic links as if they were
+ normal files or directories. Normally, _\bt_\ba_\br does
+ not follow symbolic links.
+
+ B\bB Forces input and output blocking to 20 blocks per
+ record. This option was added so that _\bt_\ba_\br can
+ work across a communications channel where the
+ blocking may not be maintained.
+
+ C\bC If a file name is preceded by -\b-C\bC, then _\bt_\ba_\br will
+ perform a _\bc_\bh_\bd_\bi_\br(2) to that file name. This allows
+ multiple directories not related by a close common
+ parent to be archived using short relative path
+ names. For example, to archive files from
+ /usr/include and from /etc, one might use
+ tar c -C /usr include -C / etc
+
+ Previous restrictions dealing with _\bt_\ba_\br's inability to prop-
+ erly handle blocked archives have been lifted.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /dev/rmt?
+ /tmp/tar*
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ tar(5)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Complaints about bad key characters and tape read/write
+ errors.
+ Complaints if enough memory is not available to hold the
+ link tables.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ There is no way to ask for the _\bn-th occurrence of a file.
+ Tape errors are handled ungracefully.
+ The u\bu option can be slow.
+ The current limit on file name length is 100 characters.
+ There is no way selectively to follow symbolic links.
+ When extracting tapes created with the r\br or u\bu options,
+ directory modification times may not be set correctly.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 23, 1988 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TBL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TBL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tbl - format tables for nroff or troff
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btb\bbl\bl [ files ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bb_\bl is a preprocessor for formatting tables for _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf or
+ _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1). The input files are copied to the standard out-
+ put, except for lines between and are reformatted. Details
+ are given in the _\bt_\bb_\bl(1) reference manual.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bE
+ As an example, letting \t represent a tab (which should be
+ typed as a genuine tab) the input
+
+ .TS
+ c s s
+ c c s
+ c c c
+ l n n.
+ Household Population
+ Town\tHouseholds
+ \tNumber\tSize
+ Bedminster\t789\t3.26
+ Bernards Twp.\t3087\t3.74
+ Bernardsville\t2018\t3.30
+ Bound Brook\t3425\t3.04
+ Branchburg\t1644\t3.49
+ Bridgewater\t7897\t3.81
+ Far Hills\t240\t3.19
+ .TE
+
+ yields
+
+
+ Household Population
+ Town Households
+ Number Size
+ Bedminster 789 3.26
+ Bernards Twp. 3087 3.74
+ Bernardsville 2018 3.30
+ Bound Brook 3425 3.04
+ Branchburg 1644 3.49
+ Bridgewater 7897 3.81
+ Far Hills 240 3.19
+
+ If no arguments are given, _\bt_\bb_\bl reads the standard input, so
+ it may be used as a filter. When _\bt_\bb_\bl is used with _\be_\bq_\bn or
+ _\bn_\be_\bq_\bn the _\bt_\bb_\bl command should be first, to minimize the volume
+ of data passed through pipes.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TBL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TBL(1)
+
+
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ troff(1), eqn(1)
+ M. E. Lesk, _\bT_\bB_\bL.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TC(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tc - photoypesetter simulator
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btc\bc [ -\b-t\bt ] [ -\b-s\bsN ] [ -\b-p\bpL ] [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bc interprets its input (standard input default) as device
+ codes for a Graphic Systems phototypesetter (cat). The
+ standard output of _\bt_\bc is intended for a Tektronix 4015 (a
+ 4014 terminal with ASCII and APL character sets). The six-
+ teen typesetter sizes are mapped into the 4014's four sizes;
+ the entire TROFF character set is drawn using the 4014's
+ character generator, using overstruck combinations where
+ necessary. Typical usage:
+
+ troff -t file | tc
+
+ At the end of each page _\bt_\bc waits for a newline (empty line)
+ from the keyboard before continuing on to the next page. In
+ this wait state, the command e\be will suppress the screen
+ erase before the next page; s\bsN will cause the next N pages
+ to be skipped; and !\b!line will send line to the shell.
+
+ The command line options are:
+
+ -\b-t\bt Don't wait between pages; for directing output into a
+ file.
+
+ -\b-s\bsN Skip the first N pages.
+
+ -\b-p\bpL Set page length to L. L may include the scale factors
+ p\bp (points), i\bi (inches), c\bc (centimeters), and P\bP (picas);
+ default is picas.
+
+ '\b'-\b-_\bl _\bw'\b'
+ Multiply the default aspect ratio, 1.5, of a displayed
+ page by _\bl/_\bw.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ troff(1), plot(1G)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Font distinctions are lost.
+ _\bt_\bc's character set is limited to ASCII in just one size.
+ The aspect ratio option is unbelievable.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TCOPY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TCOPY(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tcopy - copy and/or verify mag tapes
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btc\bco\bop\bpy\by [ -cv ] [ -s maxblk ] [src [ dest ]]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bc_\bo_\bp_\by is designed to copy magnetic tapes. The only assump-
+ tion made about the tape is that there are two tape marks at
+ the end. _\bT_\bc_\bo_\bp_\by with only a source tape (r\brm\bmt\bt0\b0 by default)
+ specified will print information about the sizes of records
+ and tape files. If a destination is specified a copy will
+ be made of the source tape. The blocking on the destination
+ tape will be identical to that used on the source tape.
+ Copying a tape will yield the same output as if just print-
+ ing the sizes.
+
+ The -\b-s\bs option allows you to specify a maximum block size.
+ The -\b-v\bv option verifies that two tapes are identical. The -\b-c\bc
+ option does the copy and then verifies that the two tapes
+ are identical.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mtio(4)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TEE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TEE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tee - pipe fitting
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bte\bee\be [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-a\ba ] [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\be_\be transcribes the standard input to the standard output
+ and makes copies in the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs. Option -\b-i\bi ignores interrupts;
+ option -\b-a\ba causes the output to be appended to the _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs
+ rather than overwriting them.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ telnet - user interface to the TELNET protocol
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ telnet [ host [ port ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is used to communicate with another host using the
+ T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT protocol. If _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is invoked without arguments, it
+ enters command mode, indicated by its prompt ("telnet>").
+ In this mode, it accepts and executes the commands listed
+ below. If it is invoked with arguments, it performs an o\bop\bpe\ben\bn
+ command (see below) with those arguments.
+
+ Once a connection has been opened, _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt enters an input
+ mode. The input mode entered will be either "character at a
+ time" or "line by line" depending on what the remote system
+ supports.
+
+ In "character at a time" mode, most text typed is immedi-
+ ately sent to the remote host for processing.
+
+ In "line by line" mode, all text is echoed locally, and
+ (normally) only completed lines are sent to the remote host.
+ The "local echo character" (initially "^E") may be used to
+ turn off and on the local echo (this would mostly be used to
+ enter passwords without the password being echoed).
+
+ In either mode, if the _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs toggle is TRUE (the
+ default in line mode; see below), the user's _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt, _\bi_\bn_\bt_\br, and
+ _\bf_\bl_\bu_\bs_\bh characters are trapped locally, and sent as T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT
+ protocol sequences to the remote side. There are options
+ (see t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be _\ba_\bu_\bt_\bo_\bf_\bl_\bu_\bs_\bh and t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be _\ba_\bu_\bt_\bo_\bs_\by_\bn_\bc_\bh below) which
+ cause this action to flush subsequent output to the terminal
+ (until the remote host acknowledges the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT sequence) and
+ flush previous terminal input (in the case of _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt and
+ _\bi_\bn_\bt_\br).
+
+ While connected to a remote host, _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt command mode may be
+ entered by typing the _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt "escape character" (initially
+ "^]"). When in command mode, the normal terminal editing
+ conventions are available.
+
+ C\bCO\bOM\bMM\bMA\bAN\bND\bDS\bS
+
+ The following commands are available. Only enough of each
+ command to uniquely identify it need be typed (this is also
+ true for arguments to the m\bmo\bod\bde\be, s\bse\bet\bt, t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be, and d\bdi\bis\bsp\bpl\bla\bay\by
+ commands).
+
+ o\bop\bpe\ben\bn _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt [ _\bp_\bo_\br_\bt ]
+ Open a connection to the named host. If no port number
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C)
+
+
+
+ is specified, _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt will attempt to contact a T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT
+ server at the default port. The host specification may
+ be either a host name (see _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bs(5)) or an Internet
+ address specified in the "dot notation" (see _\bi_\bn_\be_\bt(3N)).
+
+ c\bcl\blo\bos\bse\be
+ Close a T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT session and return to command mode.
+
+ q\bqu\bui\bit\bt
+ Close any open T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT session and exit _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt. An end
+ of file (in command mode) will also close a session and
+ exit.
+
+ z\bz
+ Suspend _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt. This command only works when the user
+ is using the _\bc_\bs_\bh(1).
+
+ m\bmo\bod\bde\be _\bt_\by_\bp_\be
+ _\bT_\by_\bp_\be is either _\bl_\bi_\bn_\be (for "line by line" mode) or _\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\b-
+ _\ba_\bc_\bt_\be_\br (for "character at a time" mode). The remote
+ host is asked for permission to go into the requested
+ mode. If the remote host is capable of entering that
+ mode, the requested mode will be entered.
+
+ s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs
+ Show the current status of _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt. This includes the
+ peer one is connected to, as well as the current mode.
+
+ d\bdi\bis\bsp\bpl\bla\bay\by [ _\ba_\br_\bg_\bu_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt... ]
+ Displays all, or some, of the s\bse\bet\bt and t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be values
+ (see below).
+
+ ?\b? [ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd ]
+ Get help. With no arguments, _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt prints a help sum-
+ mary. If a command is specified, _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt will print the
+ help information for just that command.
+
+ s\bse\ben\bnd\bd _\ba_\br_\bg_\bu_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt_\bs
+ Sends one or more special character sequences to the
+ remote host. The following are the arguments which may
+ be specified (more than one argument may be specified
+ at a time):
+
+ _\be_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bp_\be
+ Sends the current _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt escape character (ini-
+ tially "^]").
+
+ _\bs_\by_\bn_\bc_\bh
+ Sends the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT S\bSY\bYN\bNC\bCH\bH sequence. This sequence
+ causes the remote system to discard all previously
+ typed (but not yet read) input. This sequence is
+ sent as TCP urgent data (and may not work if the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C)
+
+
+
+ remote system is a 4.2 BSD system -- if it doesn't
+ work, a lower case "r" may be echoed on the termi-
+ nal).
+
+ _\bb_\br_\bk
+ Sends the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT B\bBR\bRK\bK (Break) sequence, which may
+ have significance to the remote system.
+
+ _\bi_\bp
+ Sends the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT I\bIP\bP (Interrupt Process) sequence,
+ which should cause the remote system to abort the
+ currently running process.
+
+ _\ba_\bo
+ Sends the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT A\bAO\bO (Abort Output) sequence, which
+ should cause the remote system to flush all output
+ f\bfr\bro\bom\bm the remote system t\bto\bo the user's terminal.
+
+ _\ba_\by_\bt
+ Sends the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT A\bAY\bYT\bT (Are You There) sequence, to
+ which the remote system may or may not choose to
+ respond.
+
+ _\be_\bc
+ Sends the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT E\bEC\bC (Erase Character) sequence,
+ which should cause the remote system to erase the
+ last character entered.
+
+ _\be_\bl
+ Sends the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT E\bEL\bL (Erase Line) sequence, which
+ should cause the remote system to erase the line
+ currently being entered.
+
+ _\bg_\ba
+ Sends the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT G\bGA\bA (Go Ahead) sequence, which
+ likely has no significance to the remote system.
+
+ _\bn_\bo_\bp
+ Sends the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT N\bNO\bOP\bP (No OPeration) sequence.
+
+ ?
+ Prints out help information for the s\bse\ben\bnd\bd command.
+
+ s\bse\bet\bt _\ba_\br_\bg_\bu_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be
+ Set any one of a number of _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt variables to a
+ specific value. The special value "off" turns off the
+ function associated with the variable. The values of
+ variables may be interrogated with the d\bdi\bis\bsp\bpl\bla\bay\by command.
+ The variables which may be specified are:
+
+ _\be_\bc_\bh_\bo
+ This is the value (initially "^E") which, when in
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C)
+
+
+
+ "line by line" mode, toggles between doing local
+ echoing of entered characters (for normal process-
+ ing), and suppressing echoing of entered charac-
+ ters (for entering, say, a password).
+
+ _\be_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bp_\be
+ This is the _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt escape character (initially
+ "^[") which causes entry into _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt command mode
+ (when connected to a remote system).
+
+ _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\br_\bu_\bp_\bt
+ If _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is in _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs mode (see t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\b-
+ _\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs below) and the _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\br_\bu_\bp_\bt character is typed,
+ a T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT I\bIP\bP sequence (see s\bse\ben\bnd\bd _\bi_\bp above) is sent
+ to the remote host. The initial value for the
+ interrupt character is taken to be the terminal's
+ i\bin\bnt\btr\br character.
+
+ _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt
+ If _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is in _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs mode (see t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\b-
+ _\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs below) and the _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt character is typed, a
+ T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT B\bBR\bRK\bK sequence (see s\bse\ben\bnd\bd _\bb_\br_\bk above) is sent
+ to the remote host. The initial value for the
+ quit character is taken to be the terminal's q\bqu\bui\bit\bt
+ character.
+
+ _\bf_\bl_\bu_\bs_\bh_\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt
+ If _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is in _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs mode (see t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\b-
+ _\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs below) and the _\bf_\bl_\bu_\bs_\bh_\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt character is
+ typed, a T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT A\bAO\bO sequence (see s\bse\ben\bnd\bd _\ba_\bo above) is
+ sent to the remote host. The initial value for
+ the flush character is taken to be the terminal's
+ f\bfl\blu\bus\bsh\bh character.
+
+ _\be_\br_\ba_\bs_\be
+ If _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is in _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs mode (see t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\b-
+ _\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs below), a\ban\bnd\bd if _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is operating in "char-
+ acter at a time" mode, then when this character is
+ typed, a T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT E\bEC\bC sequence (see s\bse\ben\bnd\bd _\be_\bc above) is
+ sent to the remote system. The initial value for
+ the erase character is taken to be the terminal's
+ e\ber\bra\bas\bse\be character.
+
+ _\bk_\bi_\bl_\bl
+ If _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is in _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs mode (see t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\b-
+ _\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs below), a\ban\bnd\bd if _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is operating in "char-
+ acter at a time" mode, then when this character is
+ typed, a T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT E\bEL\bL sequence (see s\bse\ben\bnd\bd _\be_\bl above) is
+ sent to the remote system. The initial value for
+ the kill character is taken to be the terminal's
+ k\bki\bil\bll\bl character.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C)
+
+
+
+ _\be_\bo_\bf
+ If _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt is operating in "line by line" mode,
+ entering this character as the first character on
+ a line will cause this character to be sent to the
+ remote system. The initial value of the eof char-
+ acter is taken to be the terminal's e\beo\bof\bf character.
+
+ t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be _\ba_\br_\bg_\bu_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt_\bs...
+ Toggle (between TRUE and FALSE) various flags that con-
+ trol how _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt responds to events. More than one
+ argument may be specified. The state of these flags
+ may be interrogated with the d\bdi\bis\bsp\bpl\bla\bay\by command. Valid
+ arguments are:
+
+ _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs
+ If this is TRUE, then the _\bf_\bl_\bu_\bs_\bh, _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\br_\bu_\bp_\bt, _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt,
+ _\be_\br_\ba_\bs_\be, and _\bk_\bi_\bl_\bl characters (see s\bse\bet\bt above) are
+ recognized locally, and transformed into (hope-
+ fully) appropriate T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT control sequences
+ (respectively _\ba_\bo, _\bi_\bp, _\bb_\br_\bk, _\be_\bc, and _\be_\bl; see s\bse\ben\bnd\bd
+ above). The initial value for this toggle is TRUE
+ in "line by line" mode, and FALSE in "character at
+ a time" mode.
+
+ _\ba_\bu_\bt_\bo_\bf_\bl_\bu_\bs_\bh
+ If _\ba_\bu_\bt_\bo_\bf_\bl_\bu_\bs_\bh and _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs are both TRUE, then
+ when the _\ba_\bo, _\bi_\bn_\bt_\br, or _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt characters are recog-
+ nized (and transformed into T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT sequences; see
+ s\bse\bet\bt above for details), _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt refuses to display
+ any data on the user's terminal until the remote
+ system acknowledges (via a T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT _\bT_\bi_\bm_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bM_\ba_\br_\bk
+ option) that it has processed those T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT
+ sequences. The initial value for this toggle is
+ TRUE if the terminal user had not done an "stty
+ noflsh", otherwise FALSE (see _\bs_\bt_\bt_\by(_\b1)).
+
+ _\ba_\bu_\bt_\bo_\bs_\by_\bn_\bc_\bh
+ If _\ba_\bu_\bt_\bo_\bs_\by_\bn_\bc_\bh and _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br_\bs are both TRUE, then
+ when either the _\bi_\bn_\bt_\br or _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt characters is typed
+ (see s\bse\bet\bt above for descriptions of the _\bi_\bn_\bt_\br and
+ _\bq_\bu_\bi_\bt characters), the resulting T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT sequence
+ sent is followed by the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT S\bSY\bYN\bNC\bCH\bH sequence.
+ This procedure s\bsh\bho\bou\bul\bld\bd cause the remote system to
+ begin throwing away all previously typed input
+ until both of the T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT sequences have been read
+ and acted upon. The initial value of this toggle
+ is FALSE.
+
+ _\bc_\br_\bm_\bo_\bd
+ Toggle carriage return mode. When this mode is
+ enabled, most carriage return characters received
+ from the remote host will be mapped into a
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TELNET(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TELNET(1C)
+
+
+
+ carriage return followed by a line feed. This
+ mode does not affect those characters typed by the
+ user, only those received from the remote host.
+ This mode is not very useful unless the remote
+ host only sends carriage return, but never line
+ feed. The initial value for this toggle is FALSE.
+
+ _\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg
+ Toggles socket level debugging (useful only to the
+ _\bs_\bu_\bp_\be_\bruser). The initial value for this toggle is
+ FALSE.
+
+ _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs
+ Toggles the display of some internal _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt proto-
+ col processing (having to do with T\bTE\bEL\bLN\bNE\bET\bT options).
+ The initial value for this toggle is FALSE.
+
+ _\bn_\be_\bt_\bd_\ba_\bt_\ba
+ Toggles the display of all network data (in hexa-
+ decimal format). The initial value for this tog-
+ gle is FALSE.
+
+ ?
+ Displays the legal t\bto\bog\bgg\bgl\ble\be commands.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ There is no adequate way for dealing with flow control.
+
+ On some remote systems, echo has to be turned off manually
+ when in "line by line" mode.
+
+ There is enough settable state to justify a ._\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt_\br_\bc file.
+
+ No capability for a ._\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt_\br_\bc file is provided.
+
+ In "line by line" mode, the terminal's _\be_\bo_\bf character is only
+ recognized (and sent to the remote system) when it is the
+ first character on a line.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 10, 1986 6
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TEST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TEST(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ test - condition command
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bte\bes\bst\bt expr
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bt_\be_\bs_\bt evaluates the expression _\be_\bx_\bp_\br, and if its value is true
+ then returns zero exit status; otherwise, a non zero exit
+ status is returned. _\bt_\be_\bs_\bt returns a non zero exit if there
+ are no arguments.
+
+ The following primitives are used to construct _\be_\bx_\bp_\br.
+
+ -\b-r\br file true if the file exists and is readable.
+
+ -\b-w\bw file true if the file exists and is writable.
+
+ -\b-f\bf file true if the file exists and is not a directory.
+
+ -\b-d\bd file true if the file exists and is a directory.
+
+ -\b-s\bs file true if the file exists and has a size greater than
+ zero.
+
+ -\b-t\bt [ fildes ]
+ true if the open file whose file descriptor number
+ is _\bf_\bi_\bl_\bd_\be_\bs (1 by default) is associated with a ter-
+ minal device.
+
+ -\b-z\bz s1 true if the length of string _\bs_\b1 is zero.
+
+ -\b-n\bn s1 true if the length of the string _\bs_\b1 is nonzero.
+
+ s1 =\b= s2 true if the strings _\bs_\b1 and _\bs_\b2 are equal.
+
+ s1 !\b!=\b= s2 true if the strings _\bs_\b1 and _\bs_\b2 are not equal.
+
+ s1 true if _\bs_\b1 is not the null string.
+
+ n1 -\b-e\beq\bq n2
+ true if the integers _\bn_\b1 and _\bn_\b2 are algebraically
+ equal. Any of the comparisons -\b-n\bne\be, -\b-g\bgt\bt, -\b-g\bge\be, -\b-l\blt\bt,
+ or -\b-l\ble\be may be used in place of -\b-e\beq\bq.
+
+ These primaries may be combined with the following opera-
+ tors:
+
+ !\b! unary negation operator
+
+ -\b-a\ba binary _\ba_\bn_\bd operator
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 22, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TEST(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TEST(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-o\bo binary _\bo_\br operator
+
+ (\b( expr )\b)
+ parentheses for grouping.
+
+ -\b-a\ba has higher precedence than -\b-o\bo.\b. Notice that all the opera-
+ tors and flags are separate arguments to _\bt_\be_\bs_\bt. Notice also
+ that parentheses are meaningful to the Shell and must be
+ escaped.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1), find(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 September 22, 1987 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TFTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TFTP(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tftp - trivial file transfer program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btf\bft\btp\bp [ host ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bf_\bt_\bp is the user interface to the Internet TFTP (Trivial
+ File Transfer Protocol), which allows users to transfer
+ files to and from a remote machine. The remote _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt may be
+ specified on the command line, in which case _\bt_\bf_\bt_\bp uses _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt
+ as the default host for future transfers (see the c\bco\bon\bnn\bne\bec\bct\bt
+ command below).
+
+C\bCO\bOM\bMM\bMA\bAN\bND\bDS\bS
+ Once _\bt_\bf_\bt_\bp is running, it issues the prompt t\btf\bft\btp\bp>\b> and recog-
+ nizes the following commands:
+
+ c\bco\bon\bnn\bne\bec\bct\bt _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be [ _\bp_\bo_\br_\bt ]
+ Set the _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt (and optionally _\bp_\bo_\br_\bt) for transfers. Note
+ that the TFTP protocol, unlike the FTP protocol, does
+ not maintain connections betweeen transfers; thus, the
+ _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bn_\be_\bc_\bt command does not actually create a connection,
+ but merely remembers what host is to be used for
+ transfers. You do not have to use the _\bc_\bo_\bn_\bn_\be_\bc_\bt command;
+ the remote host can be specified as part of the _\bg_\be_\bt or
+ _\bp_\bu_\bt commands.
+
+ m\bmo\bod\bde\be _\bt_\br_\ba_\bn_\bs_\bf_\be_\br-_\bm_\bo_\bd_\be
+ Set the mode for transfers; _\bt_\br_\ba_\bn_\bs_\bf_\be_\br-_\bm_\bo_\bd_\be may be one of
+ _\ba_\bs_\bc_\bi_\bi or _\bb_\bi_\bn_\ba_\br_\by. The default is _\ba_\bs_\bc_\bi_\bi.
+
+ p\bpu\but\bt _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ p\bpu\but\bt _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ p\bpu\but\bt _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 ... _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bN _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be-_\bd_\bi_\br_\be_\bc_\bt_\bo_\br_\by
+ Put a file or set of files to the specified remote file
+ or directory. The destination can be in one of two
+ forms: a filename on the remote host, if the host has
+ already been specified, or a string of the form
+ _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt:_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to specify both a host and filename at
+ the same time. If the latter form is used, the host-
+ name specified becomes the default for future
+ transfers. If the remote-directory form is used, the
+ remote host is assumed to be a _\bU_\bN_\bI_\bX machine.
+
+ g\bge\bet\bt _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ g\bge\bet\bt _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be _\bl_\bo_\bc_\ba_\bl_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ g\bge\bet\bt _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b1 _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\b2 ... _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bN
+ Get a file or set of files from the specified _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be_\bs.
+ _\bS_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be can be in one of two forms: a filename on the
+ remote host, if the host has already been specified, or
+ a string of the form _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt:_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to specify both a
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 20, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TFTP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TFTP(1C)
+
+
+
+ host and filename at the same time. If the latter form
+ is used, the last hostname specified becomes the
+ default for future transfers.
+
+ q\bqu\bui\bit\bt Exit _\bt_\bf_\bt_\bp. An end of file also exits.
+
+ v\bve\ber\brb\bbo\bos\bse\be
+ Toggle verbose mode.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bac\bce\be
+ Toggle packet tracing.
+
+ s\bst\bta\bat\btu\bus\bs
+ Show current status.
+
+ r\bre\bex\bxm\bmt\bt _\br_\be_\bt_\br_\ba_\bn_\bs_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn-_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be_\bo_\bu_\bt
+ Set the per-packet retransmission timeout, in seconds.
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\beo\bou\but\bt _\bt_\bo_\bt_\ba_\bl-_\bt_\br_\ba_\bn_\bs_\bm_\bi_\bs_\bs_\bi_\bo_\bn-_\bt_\bi_\bm_\be_\bo_\bu_\bt
+ Set the total transmission timeout, in seconds.
+
+ a\bas\bsc\bci\bii\bi
+ Shorthand for "mode ascii"
+
+ b\bbi\bin\bna\bar\bry\by
+ Shorthand for "mode binary"
+
+ ?\b? [ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+ Print help information.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Because there is no user-login or validation within the _\bT_\bF_\bT_\bP
+ protocol, the remote site will probably have some sort of
+ file-access restrictions in place. The exact methods are
+ specific to each site and therefore difficult to document
+ here.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 20, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TIME(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIME(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ time - time a command
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bti\bim\bme\be [-l] command
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The given command is executed; after it is complete, _\bt_\bi_\bm_\be
+ prints the elapsed time during the command, the time spent
+ in the system, and the time spent in execution of the com-
+ mand. Times are reported in seconds. If the -\b-l\bl option is
+ supplied, the contents of the _\br_\bu_\bs_\ba_\bg_\be structure are printed
+ as well.
+
+ On a PDP-11, the execution time can depend on what kind of
+ memory the program happens to land in; the user time in MOS
+ is often half what it is in core.
+
+ The times are printed on the diagnostic output stream,
+ ``stderr''.
+
+ _\bT_\bi_\bm_\be is a built-in command to _\bc_\bs_\bh(1), with a much different
+ syntax. This command is available as ``/bin/time'' to _\bc_\bs_\bh
+ users.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Elapsed time is accurate to the second, while the CPU times
+ are measured to the 100th second. Thus the sum of the CPU
+ times can be up to a second larger than the elapsed time.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ include/sys/h/resource.h
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 November 17, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tip, cu - connect to a remote system
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bti\bip\bp [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-_\bs_\bp_\be_\be_\bd ] system-name
+ t\bti\bip\bp [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-_\bs_\bp_\be_\be_\bd ] phone-number
+ c\bcu\bu phone-number [ -\b-t\bt ] [ -\b-s\bs _\bs_\bp_\be_\be_\bd ] [ -\b-a\ba _\ba_\bc_\bu ] [ -\b-l\bl _\bl_\bi_\bn_\be ]
+ [ -\b-#\b# ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bi_\bp and _\bc_\bu establish a full-duplex connection to another
+ machine, giving the appearance of being logged in directly
+ on the remote cpu. It goes without saying that you must
+ have a login on the machine (or equivalent) to which you
+ wish to connect. The preferred interface is _\bt_\bi_\bp. The _\bc_\bu
+ interface is included for those people attached to the
+ ``call UNIX'' command of version 7. This manual page
+ describes only _\bt_\bi_\bp.
+
+ Typed characters are normally transmitted directly to the
+ remote machine (which does the echoing as well). A tilde
+ (`~') appearing as the first character of a line is an
+ escape signal; the following are recognized:
+
+ ~\b~^\b^D\bD ~\b~.\b. Drop the connection and exit (you may still be
+ logged in on the remote machine).
+
+ ~\b~c\bc [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be]
+ Change directory to name (no argument implies
+ change to your home directory).
+
+ ~\b~!\b! Escape to a shell (exiting the shell will return
+ you to tip).
+
+ ~\b~>\b> Copy file from local to remote. _\bT_\bi_\bp prompts for
+ the name of a local file to transmit.
+
+ ~\b~<\b< Copy file from remote to local. _\bT_\bi_\bp prompts first
+ for the name of the file to be sent, then for a
+ command to be executed on the remote machine.
+
+ ~\b~p\bp _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm [ _\bt_\bo ]
+ Send a file to a remote UNIX host. The put com-
+ mand causes the remote UNIX system to run the com-
+ mand string ``cat > 'to''', while _\bt_\bi_\bp sends it the
+ ``from'' file. If the ``to'' file isn't specified
+ the ``from'' file name is used. This command is
+ actually a UNIX specific version of the ``~>''
+ command.
+
+ ~\b~t\bt _\bf_\br_\bo_\bm [ _\bt_\bo ]
+ Take a file from a remote UNIX host. As in the put
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ command the ``to'' file defaults to the ``from''
+ file name if it isn't specified. The remote host
+ executes the command string ``cat 'from';echo ^A''
+ to send the file to _\bt_\bi_\bp.
+
+ ~\b~|\b| Pipe the output from a remote command to a local
+ UNIX process. The command string sent to the
+ local UNIX system is processed by the shell.
+
+ ~\b~$\b$ Pipe the output from a local UNIX process to the
+ remote host. The command string sent to the local
+ UNIX system is processed by the shell.
+
+ ~\b~#\b# Send a BREAK to the remote system. For systems
+ which don't support the necessary _\bi_\bo_\bc_\bt_\bl call the
+ break is simulated by a sequence of line speed
+ changes and DEL characters.
+
+ ~\b~s\bs Set a variable (see the discussion below).
+
+ ~\b~^\b^Z\bZ Stop _\bt_\bi_\bp (only available with job control).
+
+ ~\b~^\b^Y\bY Stop only the ``local side'' of _\bt_\bi_\bp (only avail-
+ able with job control); the ``remote side'' of
+ _\bt_\bi_\bp, the side that displays output from the remote
+ host, is left running.
+
+ ~\b~?\b? Get a summary of the tilde escapes
+
+
+ _\bT_\bi_\bp uses the file /etc/remote to find how to reach a partic-
+ ular system and to find out how it should operate while
+ talking to the system; refer to _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be(5) for a full
+ description. Each system has a default baud rate with which
+ to establish a connection. If this value is not suitable,
+ the baud rate to be used may be specified on the command
+ line, e.g. ``tip -300 mds''.
+
+ When _\bt_\bi_\bp establishes a connection it sends out a connection
+ message to the remote system; the default value, if any, is
+ defined in /etc/remote.
+
+ When _\bt_\bi_\bp prompts for an argument (e.g. during setup of a
+ file transfer) the line typed may be edited with the stan-
+ dard erase and kill characters. A null line in response to
+ a prompt, or an interrupt, will abort the dialogue and
+ return you to the remote machine.
+
+ _\bT_\bi_\bp guards against multiple users connecting to a remote
+ system by opening modems and terminal lines with exclusive
+ access, and by honoring the locking protocol used by
+ _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp(1C).
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ During file transfers _\bt_\bi_\bp provides a running count of the
+ number of lines transferred. When using the ~> and ~< com-
+ mands, the ``eofread'' and ``eofwrite'' variables are used
+ to recognize end-of-file when reading, and specify end-of-
+ file when writing (see below). File transfers normally
+ depend on tandem mode for flow control. If the remote sys-
+ tem does not support tandem mode, ``echocheck'' may be set
+ to indicate _\bt_\bi_\bp should synchronize with the remote system on
+ the echo of each transmitted character.
+
+ When _\bt_\bi_\bp must dial a phone number to connect to a system it
+ will print various messages indicating its actions. _\bT_\bi_\bp
+ supports the DEC DN-11 and Racal-Vadic 831 auto-call-units;
+ the DEC DF02 and DF03, Ventel 212+, Racal-Vadic 3451, and
+ Bizcomp 1031 and 1032 integral call unit/modems.
+
+ V\bVA\bAR\bRI\bIA\bAB\bBL\bLE\bES\bS
+
+ _\bT_\bi_\bp maintains a set of _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be_\bs which control its opera-
+ tion. Some of these variable are read-only to normal users
+ (root is allowed to change anything of interest). Variables
+ may be displayed and set through the ``s'' escape. The syn-
+ tax for variables is patterned after _\bv_\bi(1) and _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl(1).
+ Supplying ``all'' as an argument to the set command displays
+ all variables readable by the user. Alternatively, the user
+ may request display of a particular variable by attaching a
+ `?' to the end. For example ``escape?'' displays the
+ current escape character.
+
+ Variables are numeric, string, character, or boolean values.
+ Boolean variables are set merely by specifying their name;
+ they may be reset by prepending a `!' to the name. Other
+ variable types are set by concatenating an `=' and the
+ value. The entire assignment must not have any blanks in
+ it. A single set command may be used to interrogate as well
+ as set a number of variables. Variables may be initialized
+ at run time by placing set commands (without the ``~s'' pre-
+ fix in a file ._\bt_\bi_\bp_\br_\bc in one's home directory). The -\b-v\bv
+ option causes _\bt_\bi_\bp to display the sets as they are made.
+ Certain common variables have abbreviations. The following
+ is a list of common variables, their abbreviations, and
+ their default values.
+
+ b\bbe\bea\bau\but\bti\bif\bfy\by
+ (bool) Discard unprintable characters when a session is
+ being scripted; abbreviated _\bb_\be.
+
+ b\bba\bau\bud\bdr\bra\bat\bte\be
+ (num) The baud rate at which the connection was esta-
+ blished; abbreviated _\bb_\ba.
+
+ d\bdi\bia\bal\blt\bti\bim\bme\beo\bou\but\bt
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ (num) When dialing a phone number, the time (in
+ seconds) to wait for a connection to be established;
+ abbreviated _\bd_\bi_\ba_\bl.
+
+ e\bec\bch\bho\boc\bch\bhe\bec\bck\bk
+ (bool) Synchronize with the remote host during file
+ transfer by waiting for the echo of the last character
+ transmitted; default is _\bo_\bf_\bf.
+
+ e\beo\bof\bfr\bre\bea\bad\bd
+ (str) The set of characters which signify and end-of-
+ tranmission during a ~< file transfer command; abbrevi-
+ ated _\be_\bo_\bf_\br.
+
+ e\beo\bof\bfw\bwr\bri\bit\bte\be
+ (str) The string sent to indicate end-of-transmission
+ during a ~> file transfer command; abbreviated _\be_\bo_\bf_\bw.
+
+ e\beo\bol\bl
+ (str) The set of characters which indicate an end-of-
+ line. _\bT_\bi_\bp will recognize escape characters only after
+ an end-of-line.
+
+ e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be
+ (char) The command prefix (escape) character; abbrevi-
+ ated _\be_\bs; default value is `~'.
+
+ e\bex\bxc\bce\bep\bpt\bti\bio\bon\bns\bs
+ (str) The set of characters which should not be dis-
+ carded due to the beautification switch; abbreviated
+ _\be_\bx; default value is ``\t\n\f\b''.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\brc\bce\be
+ (char) The character used to force literal data
+ transmission; abbreviated _\bf_\bo; default value is `^P'.
+
+ f\bfr\bra\bam\bme\bes\bsi\biz\bze\be
+ (num) The amount of data (in bytes) to buffer between
+ file system writes when receiving files; abbreviated
+ _\bf_\br.
+
+ h\bho\bos\bst\bt
+ (str) The name of the host to which you are connected;
+ abbreviated _\bh_\bo.
+
+ p\bpr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bt
+ (char) The character which indicates and end-of-line on
+ the remote host; abbreviated _\bp_\br; default value is `\n'.
+ This value is used to synchronize during data
+ transfers. The count of lines transferred during a
+ file transfer command is based on recipt of this char-
+ acter.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ r\bra\bai\bis\bse\be
+ (bool) Upper case mapping mode; abbreviated _\br_\ba; default
+ value is _\bo_\bf_\bf. When this mode is enabled, all lower
+ case letters will be mapped to upper case by _\bt_\bi_\bp for
+ transmission to the remote machine.
+
+ r\bra\bai\bis\bse\bec\bch\bha\bar\br
+ (char) The input character used to toggle upper case
+ mapping mode; abbreviated _\br_\bc; default value is `^A'.
+
+ r\bre\bec\bco\bor\brd\bd
+ (str) The name of the file in which a session script is
+ recorded; abbreviated _\br_\be_\bc; default value is
+ ``tip.record''.
+
+ s\bsc\bcr\bri\bip\bpt\bt
+ (bool) Session scripting mode; abbreviated _\bs_\bc; default
+ is _\bo_\bf_\bf. When _\bs_\bc_\br_\bi_\bp_\bt is _\bt_\br_\bu_\be, _\bt_\bi_\bp will record every-
+ thing transmitted by the remote machine in the script
+ record file specified in _\br_\be_\bc_\bo_\br_\bd. If the _\bb_\be_\ba_\bu_\bt_\bi_\bf_\by
+ switch is on, only printable ASCII characters will be
+ included in the script file (those characters betwee
+ 040 and 0177). The variable _\be_\bx_\bc_\be_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs is used to
+ indicate characters which are an exception to the nor-
+ mal beautification rules.
+
+ t\bta\bab\bbe\bex\bxp\bpa\ban\bnd\bd
+ (bool) Expand tabs to spaces during file transfers;
+ abbreviated _\bt_\ba_\bb; default value is _\bf_\ba_\bl_\bs_\be. Each tab is
+ expanded to 8 spaces.
+
+ v\bve\ber\brb\bbo\bos\bse\be
+ (bool) Verbose mode; abbreviated _\bv_\be_\br_\bb; default is _\bt_\br_\bu_\be.
+ When verbose mode is enabled, _\bt_\bi_\bp prints messages while
+ dialing, shows the current number of lines transferred
+ during a file transfer operations, and more.
+
+ S\bSH\bHE\bEL\bLL\bL
+ (str) The name of the shell to use for the ~! command;
+ default value is ``/bin/sh'', or taken from the
+ environment.
+
+ H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE
+ (str) The home directory to use for the ~c command;
+ default value is taken from the environment.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/remote global system descriptions
+ /etc/phones global phone number data base
+ ${REMOTE} private system descriptions
+ ${PHONES} private phone numbers
+ ~/.tiprc initialization file.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TIP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual TIP(1C)
+
+
+
+ /usr/spool/uucp/LCK..* lock file to avoid conflicts with _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Diagnostics are, hopefully, self explanatory.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ remote(5), phones(5)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The full set of variables is undocumented and should, prob-
+ ably, be paired down.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TK(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TK(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tk - paginator for the Tektronix 4014
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btk\bk [ -\b-t\bt ] [ -\b-_\bN ] [ -\b-p\bp_\bL ] [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ The output of _\bt_\bk is intended for a Tektronix 4014 terminal.
+ _\bT_\bk arranges for 66 lines to fit on the screen, divides the
+ screen into _\bN columns, and contributes an eight space page
+ offset in the (default) single-column case. Tabs, spaces,
+ and backspaces are collected and plotted when necessary.
+ Teletype Model 37 half- and reverse-line sequences are
+ interpreted and plotted. At the end of each page _\bt_\bk waits
+ for a newline (empty line) from the keyboard before continu-
+ ing on to the next page. In this wait state, the command
+ !\b!_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd will send the _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd to the shell.
+
+ The command line options are:
+
+ -\b-t\bt Don't wait between pages; for directing output into a
+ file.
+
+ -\b-_\bN Divide the screen into _\bN columns and wait after the
+ last column.
+
+ -\b-p\bp_\bL Set page length to _\bL lines.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ pr(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TN3270(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TN3270(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tn3270 - full-screen remote login to IBM VM/CMS
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btn\bn3\b32\b27\b70\b0 sysname
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 permits a full-screen, full-duplex connection from a
+ VAX UNIX machine to an IBM machine running VM/CMS giving the
+ appearance of being logged in directly to the remote machine
+ on an IBM 3270 terminal. Of course you must have an account
+ on the machine to which you wish to connect in order to log
+ in. _\bT_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 looks to the user in many respects like the Yale
+ ASCII Terminal Communication System II. _\bT_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 is actually
+ a modification of the Arpanet TELNET user interface (see
+ _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt(1)) that interprets and generates raw 3270 control
+ streams.
+
+ Emulation of the 3270 terminal is done in the Unix process.
+ This emulation involves mapping 3270-style commands from the
+ host into appropriate sequences to control the user's termi-
+ nal screen. _\bT_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 uses _\bc_\bu_\br_\bs_\be_\bs(3x) and the /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp
+ file to do this. The emulation also involves simulating the
+ special 3270 keyboard keys (program function keys, etc.) by
+ mapping sequences of keystrokes from the ASCII keyboard into
+ appropriate 3270 control strings. This mapping is terminal
+ dependent and is specified in a description file,
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bm_\ba_\bp_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0, (see _\bm_\ba_\bp_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0(5)) or in an environment variable
+ _\bM_\bA_\bP_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 (see _\bm_\bs_\be_\bt(1)). Any special function keys on the
+ ASCII keyboard are used whenever possible. If an entry for
+ the user's terminal is not found, _\bt_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 looks for an entry
+ for the terminal type u\bun\bnk\bkn\bno\bow\bwn\bn.\b. If this is not found, _\bt_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0
+ uses a default keyboard mapping (see _\bm_\ba_\bp_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0(5)).
+
+ The first character of each special keyboard mapping
+ sequence is either an ASCII escape (ESC), a control charac-
+ ter, or an ASCII delete (DEL). If the user types an
+ unrecognized function key sequence, _\bt_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 sends an ASCII
+ bell (BEL), or a visual bell if defined in the user's
+ termcap entry, to the user's terminal and nothing is sent to
+ the IBM host.
+
+ If _\bt_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 is invoked without specifying a remote host system
+ name, it enters local command mode, indicated by the prompt
+ ``tn3270>''. In this mode, _\bt_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 accepts and executes the
+ following commands:
+
+ open connect to a remote host
+ close close the current connection
+ quit exit tn3270
+ z suspend tn3270
+ status print connection status
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 11, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TN3270(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TN3270(1)
+
+
+
+ ? print help information
+
+ Other common _\bt_\be_\bl_\bn_\be_\bt commands are not available in _\bt_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0.
+ _\bT_\bn_\b3_\b2_\b7_\b0 command mode may also be entered, after connecting to
+ a host, by typing a special escape character (typically
+ control-C).
+
+ While in command mode, any host login session is still alive
+ but temporarily suspended. The host login session may be
+ resumed by entering an empty line (press the RETURN key) in
+ response to the command prompt. A session may be terminated
+ by logging off the foreign host, or by typing ``quit'' or
+ ``close'' while in local command mode.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/termcap
+ /etc/map3270
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Greg Minshall
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mset(1), telnet(1), termcap(3x), termcap(5), map3270(5),
+ _\bY_\ba_\bl_\be _\bA_\bS_\bC_\bI_\bI _\bT_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bl _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bm_\bu_\bn_\bi_\bc_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bS_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm _\bI_\bI _\bP_\br_\bo_\bg_\br_\ba_\bm
+ _\bD_\be_\bs_\bc_\br_\bi_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn/_\bO_\bp_\be_\br_\ba_\bt_\bo_\br'_\bs _\bM_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl (IBM SB30-1911)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Performance is slow and uses system resources prodigiously.
+
+ Not all 3270 functions are supported, nor all Yale enhance-
+ ments.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 11, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TOUCH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TOUCH(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ touch - update date last modified of a file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bto\bou\buc\bch\bh [ -\b-c\bc ] [ -\b-f\bf ] file ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bo_\bu_\bc_\bh attempts to set the modified date of each _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. If a
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be exists, this is done by reading a character from the
+ file and writing it back. If a _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be does not exist, an
+ attempt will be made to create it unless the -\b-c\bc option is
+ specified. The -\b-f\bf option will attempt to force the touch in
+ spite of read and write permissions on a _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ utimes(2)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tp - manipulate tape archive
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btp\bp [ key ] [ name ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bp saves and restores files on DECtape or magtape. Its
+ actions are controlled by the _\bk_\be_\by argument. The key is a
+ string of characters containing at most one function letter
+ and possibly one or more function modifiers. Other argu-
+ ments to the command are file or directory names specifying
+ which files are to be dumped, restored, or listed. In all
+ cases, appearance of a directory name refers to the files
+ and (recursively) subdirectories of that directory.
+
+ The function portion of the key is specified by one of the
+ following letters:
+
+ r\br The named files are written on the tape. If files
+ with the same names already exist, they are
+ replaced. `Same' is determined by string com-
+ parison, so `./abc' can never be the same as
+ `/usr/dmr/abc' even if `/usr/dmr' is the current
+ directory. If no file argument is given, `.\b.' is the
+ default.
+
+ u\bu updates the tape. u\bu is like r\br,\b, but a file is
+ replaced only if its modification date is later than
+ the date stored on the tape; that is to say, if it
+ has changed since it was dumped. u\bu is the default
+ command if none is given.
+
+ d\bd deletes the named files from the tape. At least one
+ name argument must be given. This function is not
+ permitted on magtapes.
+
+ x\bx extracts the named files from the tape to the file
+ system. The owner and mode are restored. If no
+ file argument is given, the entire contents of the
+ tape are extracted.
+
+ t\bt lists the names of the specified files. If no file
+ argument is given, the entire contents of the tape
+ is listed.
+
+ The following characters may be used in addition to the
+ letter which selects the function desired.
+
+ m\bm Specifies magtape as opposed to DECtape.
+
+ 0\b0,\b,.\b..\b..\b.,\b,7\b7 This modifier selects the drive on which the tape
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TP(1)
+
+
+
+ is mounted. For DECtape, x\bx is default; for
+ magtape `0' is the default.
+
+ v\bv Normally _\bt_\bp does its work silently. The v\bv (ver-
+ bose) option causes it to type the name of each
+ file it treats preceded by the function letter.
+ With the t\bt function, v\bv gives more information
+ about the tape entries than just the name.
+
+ c\bc means a fresh dump is being created; the tape
+ directory is cleared before beginning. Usable
+ only with r\br and u\bu.\b. This option is assumed with
+ magtape since it is impossible to selectively
+ overwrite magtape.
+
+ i\bi Errors reading and writing the tape are noted, but
+ no action is taken. Normally, errors cause a
+ return to the command level.
+
+ f\bf Use the first named file, rather than a tape, as
+ the archive. This option currently acts like m\bm;
+ _\bi._\be. r\br implies c\bc, and neither d\bd nor u\bu are permit-
+ ted.
+
+ w\bw causes _\bt_\bp to pause before treating each file, type
+ the indicative letter and the file name (as with
+ v\bv) and await the user's response. Response y\by
+ means `yes', so the file is treated. Null
+ response means `no', and the file does not take
+ part in whatever is being done. Response x\bx means
+ `exit'; the _\bt_\bp command terminates immediately. In
+ the x\bx function, files previously asked about have
+ been extracted already. With r\br,\b, u\bu,\b, and d\bd no
+ change has been made to the tape.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /dev/tap?
+ /dev/rmt?
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ar(1), tar(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Several; the non-obvious one is `Phase error', which means
+ the file changed after it was selected for dumping but
+ before it was dumped.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ A single file with several links to it is treated like
+ several files.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TP(1)
+
+
+
+ Binary-coded control information makes magnetic tapes writ-
+ ten by _\bt_\bp difficult to carry to other machines; _\bt_\ba_\br(1)
+ avoids the problem.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tr - translate characters
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btr\br [ -\b-c\bcd\bds\bs ] [ string1 [ string2 ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\br copies the standard input to the standard output with
+ substitution or deletion of selected characters. Input
+ characters found in _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1 are mapped into the correspond-
+ ing characters of _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b2. When _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b2 is short it is pad-
+ ded to the length of _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1 by duplicating its last charac-
+ ter. Any combination of the options -\b-c\bcd\bds\bs may be used: -\b-c\bc
+ complements the set of characters in _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1 with respect to
+ the universe of characters whose ASCII codes are 01 through
+ 0377 octal; -\b-d\bd deletes all input characters in _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1; -\b-s\bs
+ squeezes all strings of repeated output characters that are
+ in _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b2 to single characters.
+
+ In either string the notation _\ba-\b-_\bb means a range of charac-
+ ters from _\ba to _\bb in increasing ASCII order. The character
+ `\' followed by 1, 2 or 3 octal digits stands for the char-
+ acter whose ASCII code is given by those digits. A `\' fol-
+ lowed by any other character stands for that character.
+
+ The following example creates a list of all the words in
+ `file1' one per line in `file2', where a word is taken to be
+ a maximal string of alphabetics. The second string is
+ quoted to protect `\' from the Shell. 012 is the ASCII code
+ for newline.
+
+ tr -cs A-Za-z '\012' <file1 >file2
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ed(1), ascii(7), expand(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Won't handle ASCII NUL in _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b1 or _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\b2; always deletes
+ NUL from input.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TROFF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ troff, nroff - text formatting and typesetting
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btr\bro\bof\bff\bf [ option ] ... [ file ] ...
+
+ n\bnr\bro\bof\bff\bf [ option ] ... [ file ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf formats text in the named _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs for printing on a
+ Graphic Systems C/A/T phototypesetter; _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf is used for for
+ typewriter-like devices. Their capabilities are described
+ in the _\bN_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf/_\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf _\bu_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bm_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl.
+
+ If no _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be argument is present, the standard input is read.
+ An argument consisting of a single minus (-\b-) is taken to be
+ a file name corresponding to the standard input. The
+ options, which may appear in any order so long as they
+ appear before the files, are:
+
+ -\b-o\bo_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt Print only pages whose page numbers appear in the
+ comma-separated _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt of numbers and ranges. A range
+ _\bN-\b-_\bM means pages _\bN through _\bM; an initial -_\bN means from
+ the beginning to page _\bN; and a final _\bN- means from _\bN
+ to the end.
+
+ -\b-n\bn_\bN Number first generated page _\bN.
+
+ -\b-s\bs_\bN Stop every _\bN pages. _\bN_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf will halt prior to every _\bN
+ pages (default _\bN=1) to allow paper loading or chang-
+ ing, and will resume upon receipt of a newline.
+ _\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf will stop the phototypesetter every _\bN pages,
+ produce a trailer to allow changing cassettes, and
+ resume when the typesetter's start button is pressed.
+
+ -\b-m\bm_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be Prepend the macro file /\b/u\bus\bsr\br/\b/l\bli\bib\bb/\b/t\btm\bma\bac\bc/\b/t\btm\bma\bac\bc.\b._\bn_\ba_\bm_\be to the
+ input _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bs.
+
+ -\b-r\br_\ba_\bN Set register _\ba (one-character) to _\bN.
+
+ -\b-i\bi Read standard input after the input files are
+ exhausted.
+
+ -\b-q\bq Invoke the simultaneous input-output mode of the r\brd\bd
+ request.
+
+ _\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf _\bo_\bn_\bl_\by
+
+ -\b-t\bt Direct output to the standard output instead of the
+ phototypesetter.
+
+ -\b-f\bf Refrain from feeding out paper and stopping
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TROFF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TROFF(1)
+
+
+
+ phototypesetter at the end of the run.
+
+ -\b-w\bw Wait until phototypesetter is available, if currently
+ busy.
+
+ -\b-b\bb Report whether the phototypesetter is busy or avail-
+ able. No text processing is done.
+
+ -\b-a\ba Send a printable ASCII approximation of the results
+ to the standard output.
+
+ -\b-p\bpN Print all characters in point size _\bN while retaining
+ all prescribed spacings and motions, to reduce photo-
+ typesetter elapsed time.
+
+ -\b-F\bF_\bf_\bo_\bn_\bt_\bd_\bi_\br
+ The directory _\bf_\bo_\bn_\bt_\bd_\bi_\br contains the font width tables
+ instead of the default directory /usr/lib/fonts. This
+ option can be used to produce output for devices
+ besides the phototypesetter.
+
+ If the file /_\bu_\bs_\br/_\ba_\bd_\bm/_\bt_\br_\ba_\bc_\bc_\bt is writable, _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf keeps photo-
+ typesetter accounting records there. The integrity of that
+ file may be secured by making _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf a 'set user-id' program.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /tmp/ta* temporary file
+ /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.* standard macro files
+ /usr/lib/term/* terminal driving tables for _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf
+ /usr/lib/font/* font width tables for _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf
+ /dev/cat phototypesetter
+ /usr/adm/tracct accounting statistics for /dev/cat
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ J. F. Ossanna, _\bN_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf/_\bT_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf _\bu_\bs_\be_\br'_\bs _\bm_\ba_\bn_\bu_\ba_\bl
+ B. W. Kernighan, _\bA _\bT_\bR_\bO_\bF_\bF _\bT_\bu_\bt_\bo_\br_\bi_\ba_\bl
+ eqn(1), tbl(1), ms(7), me(7), man(7), col(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TRUE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TRUE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ true, false - provide truth values
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btr\bru\bue\be
+
+ f\bfa\bal\bls\bse\be
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\br_\bu_\be and _\bf_\ba_\bl_\bs_\be are usually used in a Bourne shell script.
+ They test for the appropriate status "true" or "false"
+ before running (or failing to run) a list of commands.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bE
+
+ while true
+ do
+ command list
+ done
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), sh(1), false(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ _\bT_\br_\bu_\be has exit status zero.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tset - terminal dependent initialization
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bts\bse\bet\bt [ options ] [ -\b-m\bm [ident][test baudrate]:type ] ... [
+ type ]
+
+ r\bre\bes\bse\bet\bt [ options ] [ -\b-m\bm [ident][test baudrate]:type ] ... [
+ type ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bs_\be_\bt sets up your terminal when you first log in to a UNIX
+ system. It does terminal dependent processing such as set-
+ ting erase and kill characters, setting or resetting delays,
+ sending any sequences needed to properly initialized the
+ terminal, and the like. It first determines the _\bt_\by_\bp_\be of
+ terminal involved, and then does necessary initializations
+ and mode settings. The type of terminal attached to each
+ UNIX port is specified in the /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs(5) database. Type
+ names for terminals may be found in the _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp(5) database.
+ If a port is not wired permanently to a specific terminal
+ (not hardwired) it will be given an appropriate generic
+ identifier such as _\bd_\bi_\ba_\bl_\bu_\bp.
+
+ In the case where no arguments are specified, _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt simply
+ reads the terminal type out of the environment variable TERM
+ and re-initializes the terminal. The rest of this manual
+ concerns itself with mode and environment initialization,
+ typically done once at login, and options used at initiali-
+ zation time to determine the terminal type and set up termi-
+ nal modes.
+
+ When used in a startup script (._\bp_\br_\bo_\bf_\bi_\bl_\be for _\bs_\bh(1) users or
+ ._\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn for _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) users) it is desirable to give information
+ about the type of terminal you will usually use on ports
+ which are not hardwired. These ports are identified in
+ /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs as _\bd_\bi_\ba_\bl_\bu_\bp or _\bp_\bl_\bu_\bg_\bb_\bo_\ba_\br_\bd or _\ba_\br_\bp_\ba_\bn_\be_\bt, etc. To
+ specify what terminal type you usually use on these ports,
+ the -\b-m\bm (map) option flag is followed by the appropriate port
+ type identifier, an optional baud rate specification, and
+ the terminal type. (The effect is to ``map'' from some con-
+ ditions to a terminal type, that is, to tell _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt ``If I'm
+ on this kind of port, guess that I'm on that kind of termi-
+ nal''.) If more than one mapping is specified, the first
+ applicable mapping prevails. A missing port type identifier
+ matches all identifiers. Any of the alternate generic names
+ given in _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp may be used for the identifier.
+
+ A _\bb_\ba_\bu_\bd_\br_\ba_\bt_\be is specified as with _\bs_\bt_\bt_\by(1), and is compared
+ with the speed of the diagnostic output (which should be the
+ control terminal). The baud rate _\bt_\be_\bs_\bt may be any combina-
+ tion of: >\b>, @\b@, <\b<, and !\b!; @\b@ means ``at'' and !\b! inverts the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+ sense of the test. To avoid problems with metacharacters,
+ it is best to place the entire argument to -\b-m\bm within ``'''
+ characters; users of _\bc_\bs_\bh(1) must also put a ``\'' before any
+ ``!'' used here.
+
+ Thus
+
+ tset -m 'dialup>300:adm3a' -m dialup:dw2 -m
+ 'plugboard:?adm3a'
+
+ causes the terminal type to be set to an _\ba_\bd_\bm_\b3_\ba if the port
+ in use is a dialup at a speed greater than 300 baud; to a
+ _\bd_\bw_\b2 if the port is (otherwise) a dialup (i.e. at 300 baud or
+ less). (N\bNO\bOT\bTE\bE:\b: the examples given here appear to take up
+ more than one line, for text processing reasons. When you
+ type in real _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt commands, you must enter them entirely on
+ one line.) If the _\bt_\by_\bp_\be finally determined by _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt begins
+ with a question mark, the user is asked if s/he really wants
+ that type. A null response means to use that type; other-
+ wise, another type can be entered which will be used
+ instead. Thus, in the above case, the user will be queried
+ on a plugboard port as to whether they are actually using an
+ _\ba_\bd_\bm_\b3_\ba.
+
+ If no mapping applies and a final _\bt_\by_\bp_\be option, not preceded
+ by a -\b-m\bm, is given on the command line then that type is
+ used; otherwise the type found in the /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs database
+ will be taken to be the terminal type. This should always
+ be the case for hardwired ports.
+
+ It is usually desirable to return the terminal type, as
+ finally determined by _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt, and information about the
+ terminal's capabilities to a shell's environment. This can
+ be done using the -\b- option; using the Bourne shell, _\bs_\bh(1):
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs...`
+
+ or using the C shell, _\bc_\bs_\bh(1):
+
+ setenv TERM `tset - _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs...`
+
+ With _\bc_\bs_\bh it is preferable to use the following command in
+ your .login file to initialize the TERM and TERMCAP environ-
+ ment variables at the same time.
+
+ eval `tset -s _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs...`
+
+ It is also convenient to make an alias in your .cshrc:
+
+ alias tset 'eval `tset -s \!*`'
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+ This allows the command:
+
+ tset 2621
+
+ to be invoked at any time to set the terminal and environ-
+ ment. N\bNo\bot\bte\be t\bto\bo B\bBo\bou\bur\brn\bne\be S\bSh\bhe\bel\bll\bl u\bus\bse\ber\brs\bs:\b: It is n\bno\bot\bt possible to get
+ this aliasing effect with a shell script, because shell
+ scripts cannot set the environment of their parent. (If a
+ process could set its parent's environment, none of this
+ nonsense would be necessary in the first place.)
+
+ These commands cause _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt to place the name of your terminal
+ in the variable TERM in the environment; see _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7).
+
+ Once the terminal type is known, _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt engages in terminal
+ driver mode setting. This normally involves sending an ini-
+ tialization sequence to the terminal, setting the single
+ character erase (and optionally the line-kill (full line
+ erase)) characters, and setting special character delays.
+ Tab and newline expansion are turned off during transmission
+ of the terminal initialization sequence.
+
+ On terminals that can backspace but not overstrike (such as
+ a CRT), and when the erase character is the default erase
+ character (`#' on standard systems), the erase character is
+ changed to BACKSPACE (Control-H).
+
+ The options are:
+
+ -\b-e\be_\bc set the erase character to be the named character _\bc on
+ all terminals, the default being the backspace charac-
+ ter on the terminal, usually ^H. The character _\bc can
+ either be typed directly, or entered using the hat
+ notation used here.
+
+ -\b-k\bk_\bc is similar to -\b-e\be but for the line kill character rather
+ than the erase character; _\bc defaults to ^X (for purely
+ historical reasons). The kill characters is left alone
+ if -\b-k\bk is not specified. The hat notation can also be
+ used for this option.
+
+ -\b-i\bi_\bc is similar to -\b-e\be but for the interrupt character rather
+ than the erase character; _\bc defaults to ^C. The hat
+ notation can also be used for this option.
+
+ -\b- The name of the terminal finally decided upon is output
+ on the standard output. This is intended to be cap-
+ tured by the shell and placed in the environment vari-
+ able TERM.
+
+ -\b-s\bs Print the sequence of _\bc_\bs_\bh commands to initialize the
+ environment variables TERM and TERMCAP based on the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+ name of the terminal finally decided upon.
+
+ -\b-n\bn On systems with the Berkeley 4BSD tty driver, specifies
+ that the new tty driver modes should be initialized for
+ this terminal. For a CRT, the CRTERASE and CRTKILL
+ modes are set only if the baud rate is 1200 or greater.
+ See tty(4) for more detail.
+
+ -\b-I\bI suppresses transmitting terminal initialization
+ strings.
+
+ -\b-Q\bQ suppresses printing the ``Erase set to'' and ``Kill set
+ to'' messages.
+
+ If t\bts\bse\bet\bt is invoked as r\bre\bes\bse\bet\bt, it will set cooked and echo
+ modes, turn off cbreak and raw modes, turn on newline trans-
+ lation, and restore special characters to a sensible state
+ before any terminal dependent processing is done. Any spe-
+ cial character that is found to be NULL or ``-1'' is reset
+ to its default value. All arguments to _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt may be used
+ with reset.
+
+ This is most useful after a program dies leaving a terminal
+ in a funny state. You may have to type ``<LF>reset<LF>'' to
+ get it to work since <CR> may not work in this state. Often
+ none of this will echo.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bES\bS
+ These examples all assume the Bourne shell and use the -
+ option. If you use _\bc_\bs_\bh, use one of the variations described
+ above. Note that a typical use of _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt in a .profile or
+ .login will also use the -\b-e\be and -\b-k\bk options, and often the -\b-n\bn
+ or -\b-Q\bQ options as well. These options have not been included
+ here to keep the examples small. (N\bNO\bOT\bTE\bE:\b: some of the exam-
+ ples given here appear to take up more than one line, for
+ text processing reasons. When you type in real _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt com-
+ mands, you must enter them entirely on one line.)
+
+ At the moment, you are on a 2621. This is suitable for typ-
+ ing by hand but not for a .profile, unless you are _\ba_\bl_\bw_\ba_\by_\bs on
+ a 2621.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - 2621`
+
+ You have an h19 at home which you dial up on, but your
+ office terminal is hardwired and known in /etc/ttys.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m dialup:h19`
+
+ You have a switch which connects everything to everything,
+ making it nearly impossible to key on what port you are com-
+ ing in on. You use a vt100 in your office at 9600 baud, and
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+ dial up to switch ports at 1200 baud from home on a 2621.
+ Sometimes you use someone elses terminal at work, so you
+ want it to ask you to make sure what terminal type you have
+ at high speeds, but at 1200 baud you are always on a 2621.
+ Note the placement of the question mark, and the quotes to
+ protect the greater than and question mark from interpreta-
+ tion by the shell.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m 'switch>1200:?vt100' -m
+ 'switch<=1200:2621'
+
+ All of the above entries will fall back on the terminal type
+ specified in /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs if none of the conditions hold. The
+ following entry is appropriate if you always dial up, always
+ at the same baud rate, on many different kinds of terminals.
+ Your most common terminal is an adm3a. It always asks you
+ what kind of terminal you are on, defaulting to adm3a.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - ?adm3a`
+
+ If the file /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs is not properly installed and you want
+ to key entirely on the baud rate, the following can be used:
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset - -m '>1200:vt100' 2621`
+
+ Here is a fancy example to illustrate the power of _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt and
+ to hopelessly confuse anyone who has made it this far. You
+ dial up at 1200 baud or less on a concept100, sometimes over
+ switch ports and sometimes over regular dialups. You use
+ various terminals at speeds higher than 1200 over switch
+ ports, most often the terminal in your office, which is a
+ vt100. However, sometimes you log in from the university
+ you used to go to, over the ARPANET; in this case you are on
+ an ALTO emulating a dm2500. You also often log in on vari-
+ ous hardwired ports, such as the console, all of which are
+ properly entered in /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\bt_\by_\bs. You want your erase charac-
+ ter set to control H, your kill character set to control U,
+ and don't want _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt to print the ``Erase set to Backspace,
+ Kill set to Control U'' message.
+
+ export TERM; TERM=`tset -e -k^U -Q - -m
+ 'switch<=1200:concept100' -m 'switch:?vt100' -m
+ dialup:concept100 -m arpanet:dm2500`
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/ttys port name to terminal type mapping database
+ /etc/termcap terminal capability database
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), sh(1), stty(1), ttys(5), termcap(5), environ(7)
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+TSET(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSET(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The _\bt_\bs_\be_\bt command is one of the first commands a user must
+ master when getting started on a UNIX system. Unfor-
+ tunately, it is one of the most complex, largely because of
+ the extra effort the user must go through to get the
+ environment of the login shell set. Something needs to be
+ done to make all this simpler, either the _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn(1) program
+ should do this stuff, or a default shell alias should be
+ made, or a way to set the environment of the parent should
+ exist.
+
+ This program can't intuit personal choices for erase, inter-
+ rupt and line kill characters, so it leaves these set to the
+ local system standards.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TSORT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TSORT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tsort - topological sort
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\bts\bso\bor\brt\bt [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bs_\bo_\br_\bt produces on the standard output a totally ordered list
+ of items consistent with a partial ordering of items men-
+ tioned in the input _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be. If no _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be is specified, the
+ standard input is understood.
+
+ The input consists of pairs of items (nonempty strings)
+ separated by blanks. Pairs of different items indicate ord-
+ ering. Pairs of identical items indicate presence, but not
+ ordering.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ lorder(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Odd data: there is an odd number of fields in the input
+ file.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Uses a quadratic algorithm; not worth fixing for the typical
+ use of ordering a library archive file.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+TTY(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual TTY(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ tty - get terminal name
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ t\btt\bty\by [ -s ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bT_\bt_\by prints the pathname of the user's terminal unless the -s
+ (silent) is given. In either case, the exit value is zero if
+ the standard input is a terminal and one if it is not.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ `not a tty' if the standard input file is not a terminal.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ ul - do underlining
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\bul\bl [ -\b-i\bi ] [ -\b-t\bt _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bi_\bn_\ba_\bl ] [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bl reads the named files (or standard input if none are
+ given) and translates occurrences of underscores to the
+ sequence which indicates underlining for the terminal in
+ use, as specified by the environment variable TERM. The -\b-t\bt
+ option overrides the terminal kind specified in the environ-
+ ment. The file /_\be_\bt_\bc/_\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp is read to determine the
+ appropriate sequences for underlining. If the terminal is
+ incapable of underlining, but is capable of a standout mode
+ then that is used instead. If the terminal can overstrike,
+ or handles underlining automatically, _\bu_\bl degenerates to
+ _\bc_\ba_\bt(1). If the terminal cannot underline, underlining is
+ ignored.
+
+ The -\b-i\bi option causes _\bu_\bl to indicate underlining onto by a
+ separate line containing appropriate dashes `-'; this is
+ useful when you want to look at the underlining which is
+ present in an _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf output stream on a crt-terminal.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ man(1), nroff(1), colcrt(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bN_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf usually outputs a series of backspaces and underlines
+ intermixed with the text to indicate underlining. No
+ attempt is made to optimize the backward motion.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ compress, uncompress, zcat - compress and expand data
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bco\bom\bmp\bpr\bre\bes\bss\bs [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-c\bc ] [ -\b-b\bb _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs ] [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+ u\bun\bnc\bco\bom\bmp\bpr\bre\bes\bss\bs [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-c\bc ] [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+ z\bzc\bca\bat\bt [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs reduces the size of the named files using adaptive
+ Lempel-Ziv coding. Whenever possible, each file is replaced
+ by one with the extension .\b.Z\bZ,\b, while keeping the same owner-
+ ship modes, access and modification times. If no files are
+ specified, the standard input is compressed to the standard
+ output. Compressed files can be restored to their original
+ form using _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs or _\bz_\bc_\ba_\bt.
+
+ The -\b-f\bf option will force compression of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be, even if it
+ does not actually shrink or the corresponding _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.Z file
+ already exists. Except when run in the background under
+ /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bs_\bh, if -\b-f\bf is not given the user is prompted as to
+ whether an existing _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.Z file should be overwritten.
+
+ The -\b-c\bc (``cat'') option makes _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs/_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs write to
+ the standard output; no files are changed. The nondestruc-
+ tive behavior of _\bz_\bc_\ba_\bt is identical to that of _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs -\b-c\bc.\b.
+
+ _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs uses the modified Lempel-Ziv algorithm popularized
+ in "A Technique for High Performance Data Compression",
+ Terry A. Welch, _\bI_\bE_\bE_\bE _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bu_\bt_\be_\br, vol. 17, no. 6 (June 1984),
+ pp. 8-19. Common substrings in the file are first replaced
+ by 9-bit codes 257 and up. When code 512 is reached, the
+ algorithm switches to 10-bit codes and continues to use more
+ bits until the limit specified by the -\b-b\bb flag is reached
+ (default 16). _\bB_\bi_\bt_\bs must be between 9 and 16. The default
+ can be changed in the source to allow _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs to be run on
+ a smaller machine.
+
+ After the _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs limit is attained, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs periodically
+ checks the compression ratio. If it is increasing, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs
+ continues to use the existing code dictionary. However, if
+ the compression ratio decreases, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs discards the table
+ of substrings and rebuilds it from scratch. This allows the
+ algorithm to adapt to the next "block" of the file.
+
+ Note that the -\b-b\bb flag is omitted for _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs, since the
+ _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs parameter specified during compression is encoded
+ within the output, along with a magic number to ensure that
+ neither decompression of random data nor recompression of
+ compressed data is attempted.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
+
+
+
+ The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of
+ the input, the number of _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs per code, and the distribution
+ of common substrings. Typically, text such as source code
+ or English is reduced by 50-60%. Compression is generally
+ much better than that achieved by Huffman coding (as used in
+ _\bp_\ba_\bc_\bk), or adaptive Huffman coding (_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\ba_\bc_\bt), and takes less
+ time to compute.
+
+ The -\b-v\bv option causes the printing of the percentage reduc-
+ tion of each file.
+
+ If an error occurs, exit status is 1, else if the last file
+ was not compressed because it became larger, the status is
+ 2; else the status is 0.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Usage: compress [-fvc] [-b maxbits] [file ...]
+ Invalid options were specified on the command line.
+ Missing maxbits
+ Maxbits must follow -\b-b\bb.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: not in compressed format
+ The file specified to _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs has not been
+ compressed.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: compressed with _\bx_\bx bits, can only handle _\by_\by bits
+ _\bF_\bi_\bl_\be was compressed by a program that could deal
+ with more _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs than the compress code on this
+ machine. Recompress the file with smaller _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: already has .Z suffix -- no change
+ The file is assumed to be already compressed.
+ Rename the file and try again.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: filename too long to tack on .Z
+ The file cannot be compressed because its name is
+ longer than 12 characters. Rename and try again.
+ This message does not occur on BSD systems.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)?
+ Respond "y" if you want the output file to be
+ replaced; "n" if not.
+ uncompress: corrupt input
+ A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means
+ that the input file is corrupted.
+ Compression: _\bx_\bx._\bx_\bx%
+ Percentage of the input saved by compression.
+ (Relevant only for -\b-v\bv.)
+ -- not a regular file: unchanged
+ When the input file is not a regular file, (e.g. a
+ directory), it is left unaltered.
+ -- has _\bx_\bx other links: unchanged
+ The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See
+ _\bl_\bn(1) for more information.
+ -- file unchanged
+ No savings is achieved by compression. The input
+ remains virgin.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Although compressed files are compatible between machines
+ with large memory, -\b-b\bb12 should be used for file transfer to
+ architectures with a small process data space (64KB or less,
+ as exhibited by the DEC PDP series, the Intel 80286, etc.)
+
+ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs should be more flexible about the existence of the
+ `.Z' suffix.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+EXPAND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual EXPAND(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ expand, unexpand - expand tabs to spaces, and vice versa
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ e\bex\bxp\bpa\ban\bnd\bd [ -tabstop ] [ -tab1,tab2,...,tabn ] [ file ... ]
+ u\bun\bne\bex\bxp\bpa\ban\bnd\bd [ -\b-a\ba ] [ file ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bE_\bx_\bp_\ba_\bn_\bd processes the named files or the standard input writ-
+ ing the standard output with tabs changed into blanks.
+ Backspace characters are preserved into the output and
+ decrement the column count for tab calculations. _\bE_\bx_\bp_\ba_\bn_\bd is
+ useful for pre-processing character files (before sorting,
+ looking at specific columns, etc.) that contain tabs.
+
+ If a single _\bt_\ba_\bb_\bs_\bt_\bo_\bp argument is given, then tabs are set
+ _\bt_\ba_\bb_\bs_\bt_\bo_\bp spaces apart instead of the default 8. If multiple
+ tabstops are given then the tabs are set at those specific
+ columns.
+
+ _\bU_\bn_\be_\bx_\bp_\ba_\bn_\bd puts tabs back into the data from the standard
+ input or the named files and writes the result on the stan-
+ dard output. By default, only leading blanks and tabs are
+ reconverted to maximal strings of tabs. If the -\b-a\ba option is
+ given, then tabs are inserted whenever they would compress
+ the resultant file by replacing two or more characters.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 9, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UNIFDEF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNIFDEF(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ unifdef - remove ifdef'ed lines
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\bun\bni\bif\bfd\bde\bef\bf [ -\b-t\bt -\b-l\bl -\b-c\bc -\b-D\bD_\bs_\by_\bm -\b-U\bU_\bs_\by_\bm -\b-i\bid\bd_\bs_\by_\bm -\b-i\biu\bu_\bs_\by_\bm ] ... [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bn_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf is useful for removing ifdef'ed lines from a file
+ while otherwise leaving the file alone. _\bU_\bn_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf is like a
+ stripped-down C preprocessor: it is smart enough to deal
+ with the nested ifdefs, comments, single and double quotes
+ of C syntax so that it can do its job, but it doesn't do any
+ including or interpretation of macros. Neither does it
+ strip out comments, though it recognizes and ignores them.
+ You specify which symbols you want defined -\b-D\bD_\bs_\by_\bm or unde-
+ fined -\b-U\bU_\bs_\by_\bm and the lines inside those ifdefs will be copied
+ to the output or removed as appropriate. The ifdef, ifndef,
+ else, and endif lines associated with _\bs_\by_\bm will also be
+ removed. Ifdefs involving symbols you don't specify are
+ untouched and copied out along with their associated ifdef,
+ else, and endif lines. If an ifdef X occurs nested inside
+ another ifdef X, then the inside ifdef is treated as if it
+ were an unrecognized symbol. If the same symbol appears in
+ more than one argument, only the first occurrence is signi-
+ ficant.
+
+ The -\b-l\bl option causes _\bu_\bn_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf to replace removed lines with
+ blank lines instead of deleting them.
+
+ If you use ifdefs to delimit non-C lines, such as comments
+ or code which is under construction, then you must tell
+ _\bu_\bn_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf which symbols are used for that purpose so that it
+ won't try to parse for quotes and comments in those ifdef'ed
+ lines. You specify that you want the lines inside certain
+ ifdefs to be ignored but copied out with -\b-i\bid\bd_\bs_\by_\bm and -\b-i\biu\bu_\bs_\by_\bm
+ similar to -\b-D\bD_\bs_\by_\bm and -\b-U\bU_\bs_\by_\bm above.
+
+ If you want to use _\bu_\bn_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf for plain text (not C code), use
+ the -\b-t\bt option. This makes _\bu_\bn_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf refrain from attempting
+ to recognize comments and single and double quotes.
+
+ _\bU_\bn_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf copies its output to _\bs_\bt_\bd_\bo_\bu_\bt and will take its input
+ from _\bs_\bt_\bd_\bi_\bn if no _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be argument is given. If the -\b-c\bc argument
+ is specified, then the operation of _\bu_\bn_\bi_\bf_\bd_\be_\bf is complemented,
+ i.e. the lines that would have been removed or blanked are
+ retained and vice versa.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ diff(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Premature EOF, inappropriate else or endif.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+UNIFDEF(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNIFDEF(1)
+
+
+
+ Exit status is 0 if output is exact copy of input, 1 if not,
+ 2 if trouble.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Does not know how to deal with _\bc_\bp_\bp consructs such as
+
+ #if defined(X) || defined(Y)
+
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Dave Yost
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UNIQ(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNIQ(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uniq - report repeated lines in a file
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\bun\bni\biq\bq [ -\b-u\bud\bdc\bc [ +\b+n ] [ -\b-n ] ] [ input [ output ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bn_\bi_\bq reads the input file comparing adjacent lines. In the
+ normal case, the second and succeeding copies of repeated
+ lines are removed; the remainder is written on the output
+ file. Note that repeated lines must be adjacent in order to
+ be found; see _\bs_\bo_\br_\bt(1). If the -\b-u\bu flag is used, just the
+ lines that are not repeated in the original file are output.
+ The -\b-d\bd option specifies that one copy of just the repeated
+ lines is to be written. The normal mode output is the union
+ of the -\b-u\bu and -\b-d\bd mode outputs.
+
+ The -\b-c\bc option supersedes -\b-u\bu and -\b-d\bd and generates an output
+ report in default style but with each line preceded by a
+ count of the number of times it occurred.
+
+ The _\bn arguments specify skipping an initial portion of each
+ line in the comparison:
+
+ -\b-_\bn The first _\bn fields together with any blanks before
+ each are ignored. A field is defined as a string of
+ non-space, non-tab characters separated by tabs and
+ spaces from its neighbors.
+
+ +\b+_\bn The first _\bn characters are ignored. Fields are
+ skipped before characters.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sort(1), comm(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UNITS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNITS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ units - conversion program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\bun\bni\bit\bts\bs
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bn_\bi_\bt_\bs converts quantities expressed in various standard
+ scales to their equivalents in other scales. It works
+ interactively in this fashion:
+
+ _\bY_\bo_\bu _\bh_\ba_\bv_\be: inch
+ _\bY_\bo_\bu _\bw_\ba_\bn_\bt: cm
+ * _\b2._\b5_\b4_\b0_\b0_\b0_\be+_\b0_\b0
+ / _\b3._\b9_\b3_\b7_\b0_\b1_\be-_\b0_\b1
+
+ A quantity is specified as a multiplicative combination of
+ units optionally preceded by a numeric multiplier. Powers
+ are indicated by suffixed positive integers, division by the
+ usual sign:
+
+ _\bY_\bo_\bu _\bh_\ba_\bv_\be: 15 pounds force/in2
+ _\bY_\bo_\bu _\bw_\ba_\bn_\bt: atm
+ * _\b1._\b0_\b2_\b0_\b6_\b9_\be+_\b0_\b0
+ / _\b9._\b7_\b9_\b7_\b3_\b0_\be-_\b0_\b1
+
+ _\bU_\bn_\bi_\bt_\bs only does multiplicative scale changes. Thus it can
+ convert Kelvin to Rankine, but not Centigrade to Fahrenheit.
+ Most familiar units, abbreviations, and metric prefixes are
+ recognized, together with a generous leavening of exotica
+ and a few constants of nature including:
+
+ pi ratio of circumference to diameter
+ c speed of light
+ e charge on an electron
+ g acceleration of gravity
+ force same as g
+ mole Avogadro's number
+ water pressure head per unit height of water
+ au astronomical unit
+
+ `Pound' is a unit of mass. Compound names are run together,
+ e.g. `lightyear'. British units that differ from their US
+ counterparts are prefixed thus: `brgallon'. Currency is
+ denoted `belgiumfranc', `britainpound', ...
+
+ For a complete list of units, `cat /usr/lib/units'.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/units
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+UNITS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UNITS(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Don't base your financial plans on the currency conversions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UPTIME(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual UPTIME(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uptime - show how long system has been up
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\bup\bpt\bti\bim\bme\be
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ Uptime prints the current time, the length of time the sys-
+ tem has been up, and the average number of jobs in the run
+ queue over the last 1, 5 and 15 minutes. It is, essen-
+ tially, the first line of a _\bw(1) command.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /vmunix system name list
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ w(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+USERS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual USERS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ users - compact list of users who are on the system
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\bus\bse\ber\brs\bs
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bs_\be_\br_\bs lists the login names of the users currently on the
+ system in a compact, one-line format.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/utmp
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ finger(1), last(1), who(1), utmp(5)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 28, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UUCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUCP(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uucp - unix to unix copy
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\buu\buc\bcp\bp [ -\b-a\bac\bcC\bCd\bdf\bfm\bmr\br ] [ -\b-n\bn_\bu_\bs_\be_\br ] [ -\b-g\bg_\bg_\br_\ba_\bd_\be ] [ -\b-s\bs_\bs_\bp_\bo_\bo_\bl ] [ -\b-x\bx_\bd_\be_\b-
+ _\bb_\bu_\bg ] source-file.... destination-file
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bu_\bc_\bp copies files named by the source-file arguments to the
+ destination-file argument. A file name may be a pathname on
+ your machine, or may have the form
+
+ system-name!pathname
+
+ where `system-name' is taken from a list of system names
+ that _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp knows about. Shell metacharacters ?*[] appearing
+ in the pathname part will be expanded on the appropriate
+ system.
+
+ Pathnames may be one of:
+
+ (1) a full pathname;
+
+ (2) a pathname preceded by ~\b~_\bu_\bs_\be_\br; where _\bu_\bs_\be_\br is a userid on
+ the specified system and is replaced by that user's
+ login directory;
+
+ (3) a pathname prefixed by ~\b~, where ~\b~ is expanded into the
+ system's public directory (usually
+ /usr/spool/uucppublic);
+
+ (4) a partial pathname, which is prefixed by the current
+ directory.
+
+ If the result is an erroneous pathname for the remote sys-
+ tem, the copy will fail. If the destination-file is a
+ directory, the last part of the source-file name is used.
+
+ _\bU_\bu_\bc_\bp preserves execute permissions across the transmission
+ and gives 0666 read and write permissions (see _\bc_\bh_\bm_\bo_\bd(2)).
+
+ The following options are interpreted by _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp.
+
+ -\b-a\ba Avoid doing a _\bg_\be_\bt_\bw_\bd to find the current directory.
+ (This is sometimes used for efficiency.)
+
+ -\b-c\bc Use the source file when copying out rather than copy-
+ ing the file to the spool directory. (This is the
+ default.)
+
+ -\b-C\bC Copy the source file to the spool directory and
+ transmit the copy.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+UUCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUCP(1C)
+
+
+
+ -\b-d\bd Make all necessary directories for the file copy.
+ (This is the default.)
+
+ -\b-f\bf Do not make intermediate directories for the file copy.
+
+ -\b-g\bg_\bg_\br_\ba_\bd_\be
+ _\bG_\br_\ba_\bd_\be is a single letter/number; lower ASCII sequence
+ characters will cause a job to be transmitted earlier
+ during a particular conversation. Default is `n'. By
+ way of comparison, _\bu_\bu_\bx(1C) defaults to `A'; mail is
+ usually sent at `C'.
+
+ -\b-m\bm Send mail to the requester when the copy is complete.
+
+ -\b-n\bn_\bu_\bs_\be_\br
+ Notify _\bu_\bs_\be_\br on remote system (i.e., send _\bu_\bs_\be_\br mail)
+ that a file was sent.
+
+ -\b-r\br Do not start the transfer, just queue the job.
+
+ -\b-s\bs_\bs_\bp_\bo_\bo_\bl
+ Use _\bs_\bp_\bo_\bo_\bl as the spool directory instead of the
+ default.
+
+ -\b-x\bx_\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg
+ Turn on the debugging at level _\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/uucp - spool directory
+ /usr/lib/uucp/* - other data and program files
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ uux(1C), mail(1)
+
+ D. A. Nowitz and M. E. Lesk, _\bA _\bD_\bi_\ba_\bl-_\bU_\bp _\bN_\be_\bt_\bw_\bo_\br_\bk _\bo_\bf _\bU_\bN_\bI_\bX _\bS_\by_\bs_\b-
+ _\bt_\be_\bm_\bs.
+
+ D. A. Nowitz, _\bU_\bu_\bc_\bp _\bI_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bD_\be_\bs_\bc_\br_\bi_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn.
+
+W\bWA\bAR\bRN\bNI\bIN\bNG\bG
+ The domain of remotely accessible files can (and for obvious
+ security reasons, usually should) be severely restricted.
+ You will very likely not be able to fetch files by pathname;
+ ask a responsible person on the remote system to send them
+ to you. For the same reasons you will probably not be able
+ to send files to arbitrary pathnames.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ All files received by _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp will be owned by the uucp
+ administrator (usually UID 5).
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+UUCP(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUCP(1C)
+
+
+
+ The -\b-m\bm option will only work sending files or receiving a
+ single file. (Receiving multiple files specified by special
+ shell characters ?*[] will not activate the -\b-m\bm option.)
+
+ At present _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp cannot copy to a system several "hops" away,
+ that is, a command of the form
+
+ uucp myfile system1!system2!system3!yourfile
+
+ is not permitted. Use _\bu_\bu_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd(1C) instead.
+
+ When invoking _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp from _\bc_\bs_\bh(1), the `!' character must be
+ prefixed by the `\' escape to inhibit _\bc_\bs_\bh's history mechan-
+ ism. (Quotes are not sufficient.)
+
+ _\bU_\bu_\bc_\bp refuses to copy a file that does not give read access
+ to ``other''; that is, the file must have at least 0444
+ modes.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UUENCODE(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUENCODE(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uuencode, uudecode - encode/decode a binary file for
+ transmission via mail
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\buu\bue\ben\bnc\bco\bod\bde\be [ source ] remotedest | m\bma\bai\bil\bl sys1!sys2!..!decode
+ u\buu\bud\bde\bec\bco\bod\bde\be [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bu_\be_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be and _\bu_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be are used to send a binary file via
+ uucp (or other) mail. This combination can be used over
+ indirect mail links even when _\bu_\bu_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd(1C) is not available.
+
+ _\bU_\bu_\be_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be takes the named source file (default standard
+ input) and produces an encoded version on the standard out-
+ put. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, and
+ includes the mode of the file and the _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be_\bd_\be_\bs_\bt for recrea-
+ tion on the remote system.
+
+ _\bU_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be reads an encoded file, strips off any leading and
+ trailing lines added by mailers, and recreates the original
+ file with the specified mode and name.
+
+ The intent is that all mail to the user ``decode'' should be
+ filtered through the _\bu_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be program. This way the file is
+ created automatically without human intervention. This is
+ possible on the uucp network by either using _\bs_\be_\bn_\bd_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl or by
+ making _\br_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl be a link to _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl instead of _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. In each
+ case, an alias must be created in a master file to get the
+ automatic invocation of _\bu_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be.
+
+ If these facilities are not available, the file can be sent
+ to a user on the remote machine who can uudecode it manu-
+ ally.
+
+ The encode file has an ordinary text form and can be edited
+ by any text editor to change the mode or remote name.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ atob(n), uusend(1C), uucp(1C), uux(1C), mail(1), uuencode(5)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The file is expanded by 35% (3 bytes become 4 plus control
+ information) causing it to take longer to transmit.
+
+ The user on the remote system who is invoking _\bu_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be
+ (often _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp) must have write permission on the specified
+ file.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UUENCODE(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUENCODE(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uuencode, uudecode - encode/decode a binary file for
+ transmission via mail
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\buu\bue\ben\bnc\bco\bod\bde\be [ source ] remotedest | m\bma\bai\bil\bl sys1!sys2!..!decode
+ u\buu\bud\bde\bec\bco\bod\bde\be [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bu_\be_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be and _\bu_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be are used to send a binary file via
+ uucp (or other) mail. This combination can be used over
+ indirect mail links even when _\bu_\bu_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd(1C) is not available.
+
+ _\bU_\bu_\be_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be takes the named source file (default standard
+ input) and produces an encoded version on the standard out-
+ put. The encoding uses only printing ASCII characters, and
+ includes the mode of the file and the _\br_\be_\bm_\bo_\bt_\be_\bd_\be_\bs_\bt for recrea-
+ tion on the remote system.
+
+ _\bU_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be reads an encoded file, strips off any leading and
+ trailing lines added by mailers, and recreates the original
+ file with the specified mode and name.
+
+ The intent is that all mail to the user ``decode'' should be
+ filtered through the _\bu_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be program. This way the file is
+ created automatically without human intervention. This is
+ possible on the uucp network by either using _\bs_\be_\bn_\bd_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl or by
+ making _\br_\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl be a link to _\bM_\ba_\bi_\bl instead of _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl. In each
+ case, an alias must be created in a master file to get the
+ automatic invocation of _\bu_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be.
+
+ If these facilities are not available, the file can be sent
+ to a user on the remote machine who can uudecode it manu-
+ ally.
+
+ The encode file has an ordinary text form and can be edited
+ by any text editor to change the mode or remote name.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ atob(n), uusend(1C), uucp(1C), uux(1C), mail(1), uuencode(5)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The file is expanded by 35% (3 bytes become 4 plus control
+ information) causing it to take longer to transmit.
+
+ The user on the remote system who is invoking _\bu_\bu_\bd_\be_\bc_\bo_\bd_\be
+ (often _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp) must have write permission on the specified
+ file.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UULOG(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UULOG(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uulog - display UUCP log files
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\buu\bul\blo\bog\bg [ -\b-s\bs _\bs_\by_\bs ] [ -\b-u\bu _\bu_\bs_\be_\br ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bu_\bl_\bo_\bg queries a log of _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp(1C) and _\bu_\bu_\bx(1C) transactions in
+ the file /\b/u\bus\bsr\br/\b/s\bsp\bpo\boo\bol\bl/\b/u\buu\buc\bcp\bp/\b/L\bLO\bOG\bGF\bFI\bIL\bLE\bE.\b.
+
+ The options command _\bu_\bu_\bl_\bo_\bg to print logging information:
+
+ -\b-s\bs_\bs_\by_\bs Print information about work involving system _\bs_\by_\bs.
+
+ -\b-u\bu_\bu_\bs_\be_\br Print information about work done for the specified
+ _\bu_\bs_\be_\br.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/uucp/LOGFILE
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ uucp(1C), uux(1C).
+
+N\bNO\bOT\bTE\bES\bS
+ Very early releases of UUCP used separate log files for each
+ of the UUCP utilities; _\bu_\bu_\bl_\bo_\bg was used to merge the indivi-
+ dual logs into a master file. This capability has not been
+ necessary for some time and is no longer supported.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ UUCP's recording of which user issued a request is unreli-
+ able.
+
+ _\bU_\bu_\bl_\bo_\bg is little more than an overspecialized version of
+ _\bg_\br_\be_\bp(1).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UUNAME(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUNAME(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uuname - list names of UUCP hosts
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\buu\bun\bna\bam\bme\be [ -\b-l\bl ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bu_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be lists the UUCP names of known systems. The -\b-l\bl option
+ returns the local system name; this may differ from the
+ _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be(1) for the system if the _\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is very long.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ uucp(1C), uux(1C).
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UUQ(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUQ(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uuq - examine or manipulate the uucp queue
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\buu\buq\bq [ -\b-l\bl ] [ -\b-h\bh ] [ -\b-s\bs_\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm ] [ -\b-u\bu_\bu_\bs_\be_\br ] [ -\b-d\bd_\bj_\bo_\bb_\bn_\bo ] [ -\b-
+ r\br_\bs_\bd_\bi_\br ] [ -\b-b\bb_\bb_\ba_\bu_\bd ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bu_\bq is used to examine (and possibly delete) entries in the
+ uucp queue.
+
+ When listing jobs, _\bu_\bu_\bq uses a format reminiscent of _\bl_\bs. For
+ the long format, information for each job listed includes
+ job number, number of files to transfer, user who spooled
+ the job, number of bytes to send, type of command requested
+ (S for sending files, R for receiving files, X for remote
+ uucp), and file or command desired.
+
+ Several options are available:
+
+ -\b-h\bh Print only the summary lines for each system.
+ Summary lines give system name, number of jobs for
+ the system, and total number of bytes to send.
+
+ -\b-l\bl Specifies a long format listing. The default is
+ to list only the job numbers sorted across the
+ page.
+
+ -\b-s\bs_\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm Limit output to jobs for systems whose system
+ names begin with _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm.
+
+ -\b-u\bu_\bu_\bs_\be_\br Limit output to jobs for users whose login names
+ begin with _\bu_\bs_\be_\br.
+
+ -\b-d\bd_\bj_\bo_\bb_\bn_\bo Delete job number _\bj_\bo_\bb_\bn_\bo (as obtained from a previ-
+ ous _\bu_\bu_\bq command) from the uucp queue. Only the
+ UUCP Administrator is permitted to delete jobs.
+
+ -\b-r\br_\bs_\bd_\bi_\br Look for files in the spooling directory _\bs_\bd_\bi_\br
+ instead of the default directory.
+
+ -\b-b\bb_\bb_\ba_\bu_\bd Use _\bb_\ba_\bu_\bd to compute the transfer time instead of
+ the default 1200 baud.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/uucp/ Default spool directory
+ /usr/spool/uucp/C./C.* Control files
+ /usr/spool/uucp/D_\bh_\bo_\bs_\bt_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be./D.* Outgoing data files
+ /usr/spool/uucp/X./X.* Outgoing execution files
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ uucp(1C), uux(1C), uulog(1C), uusnap(8C)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+UUQ(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUQ(1C)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ No information is available on work requested by the remote
+ machine.
+
+ The user who requests a remote uucp command is unknown.
+
+ U\bUu\buq\bq -\b-l\bl can be horrendously slow.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Lou Salkind, New York University
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UUSEND(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUSEND(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uusend - send a file to a remote host
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\buu\bus\bse\ben\bnd\bd [ -\b-m\bm mode ] sourcefile sys1!sys2!..!remotefile
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bu_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd sends a file to a given location on a remote system.
+ The system need not be directly connected to the local sys-
+ tem, but a chain of _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp(1) links needs to connect the two
+ systems.
+
+ If the -\b-m\bm option is specified, the mode of the file on the
+ remote end will be taken from the octal number given. Oth-
+ erwise, the mode of the input file will be used.
+
+ The sourcefile can be ``-'', meaning to use the standard
+ input. Both of these options are primarily intended for
+ internal use of _\bu_\bu_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd.
+
+ The remotefile can include the ~userid syntax.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ If anything goes wrong any further away than the first sys-
+ tem down the line, you will never hear about it.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ uux(1), uucp(1), uuencode(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ This command should not exist, since _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp should handle it.
+
+ All systems along the line must have the _\bu_\bu_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd command
+ available and allow remote execution of it.
+
+ Some uucp systems have a bug where binary files cannot be
+ the input to a _\bu_\bu_\bx command. If this bug exists in any sys-
+ tem along the line, the file will show up severly munged.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+UUX(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUX(1C)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ uux - unix to unix command execution
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ u\buu\bux\bx [ -\b- ] [ -\b-c\bcC\bCl\blL\bLn\bnp\bpr\brz\bz ] [ -\b-a\ba_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ] [ -\b-g\bg_\bg_\br_\ba_\bd_\be ] [ -\b-x\bx_\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg ]
+ command-string
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bU_\bu_\bx will gather zero or more files from various systems,
+ execute a command on a specified system and then send stan-
+ dard output to a file on a specified system.
+
+ The _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg is made up of one or more arguments that
+ look like a Shell command line, except that the command and
+ file names may be prefixed by _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be!\b!. A null _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm-
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is interpreted as the local system.
+
+ File names may be one of
+
+ (1) a full path name;
+
+ (2) a path name preceded by ~\b~_\bu_\bs_\be_\br where _\bu_\bs_\be_\br is a login
+ name on the specified system and is replaced by that
+ user's login directory;
+
+ (3) a path name prefixed by ~\b~;\b; where ~\b~ is expanded to
+ the system's public directory (usually
+ /usr/spool/uucppublic);
+
+ (4) a partial pathname, which is prefixed by the
+ current directory.
+
+ As an example, the command
+
+ uux "!diff usg!/usr/dan/file1 pwba!/a4/dan/file2 >
+ !~/dan/file.diff"
+
+ will get the f\bfi\bil\ble\be1\b1 and f\bfi\bil\ble\be2\b2 files from the ``usg'' and
+ ``pwba'' machines, execute a _\bd_\bi_\bf_\bf(1) command and put the
+ results in f\bfi\bil\ble\be.\b.d\bdi\bif\bff\bf in the local /usr/spool/uucppublic/dan/
+ directory.
+
+ Any special shell characters, such as <\b<>\b>;\b;|\b|, should be quoted
+ either by quoting the entire _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg, or quoting the
+ special characters as individual arguments.
+
+ _\bU_\bu_\bx will attempt to get all files to the execution system.
+ For files that are output files, the file name must be
+ escaped using parentheses. For example, the command
+
+ uux a!wc b!/usr/file1 \(c!/usr/file2 \)
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+UUX(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUX(1C)
+
+
+
+ get /\b/u\bus\bsr\br/\b/f\bfi\bil\ble\be1\b1 from system ``b'' and send it to system
+ ``a'', perform a _\bw_\bc command on that file and send the result
+ of the _\bw_\bc command to system ``c''.
+
+ _\bU_\bu_\bx will notify you by mail if the requested command on the
+ remote system was disallowed. This notification can be
+ turned off by the -\b-n\bn option.
+
+ The following _\bo_\bp_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn_\bs are interpreted by _\bu_\bu_\bx:
+
+ -\b- The standard input to _\bu_\bu_\bx is made the standard input to
+ the _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg.
+
+ -\b-a\ba_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ Use _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be as the user identification replacing the ini-
+ tiator user-id.
+
+ -\b-c\bc Do not copy local file to the spool directory for
+ transfer to the remote machine (this is the default).
+
+ -\b-C\bC Force the copy of local files to the spool directory
+ for transfer.
+
+ -\b-g\bg_\bg_\br_\ba_\bd_\be
+ _\bG_\br_\ba_\bd_\be is a single letter/number, from 0\b0 to 9\b9, A\bA to Z\bZ,
+ or a\ba to z\bz; 0\b0 is the highest, and z\bz is the lowest grade.
+ The default is A\bA; by comparison _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bp(1C) defaults to n\bn
+ and mail is usually sent at grade C\bC. Lower grades
+ should be specified for high-volume jobs, such as news.
+
+ -\b-l\bl Try and make a link from the original file to the spool
+ directory. If the link cannot be made, copy the file.
+
+ -\b-n\bn Do not notify the user when the command completes.
+
+ -\b-p\bp Same as -: The standard input to _\bu_\bu_\bx is made the stan-
+ dard input to the _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd-_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg.
+
+ -\b-r\br Do not start the file transfer, just queue the job.
+
+ -\b-x\bx_\bd_\be_\bb_\bu_\bg
+ Produce debugging output on stdout. The debug is a
+ number between 0 and 9; higher numbers give more
+ detailed information. Debugging is permitted only for
+ privileged users (specifically, those with read access
+ to _\bL._\bs_\by_\bs(5).
+
+ -\b-z\bz Notify the user only if the command fails.
+
+ -\b-L\bL Start up _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bi_\bc_\bo with the -\b-L\bL flag. This will force calls
+ to be made to local sites only (see _\bu_\bu_\bc_\bi_\bc_\bo(8C)).
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+UUX(1C) UNIX Programmer's Manual UUX(1C)
+
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/uucp spool directories
+ /usr/lib/uucp/* UUCP configuration data and daemons
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ uucp(1C), uucico(8C), uuxqt(8C).
+
+W\bWA\bAR\bRN\bNI\bIN\bNG\bG
+ For security reasons, many installations will limit the list
+ of commands executable on behalf of an incoming request from
+ _\bu_\bu_\bx. Many sites will permit little more than the receipt of
+ mail (see _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(1)) via _\bu_\bu_\bx.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Only the first command of a shell pipeline may have a
+ _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\be_\bm-_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be!\b!. All other commands are executed on the system
+ of the first command.
+
+ The use of the shell metacharacter *\b* will probably not do
+ what you want it to do.
+
+ The shell tokens <\b<<\b< and >\b>>\b> are not implemented.
+
+ When invoking _\bu_\bu_\bx from _\bc_\bs_\bh(1), the `!' character must be
+ prefixed by the `\' escape to inhibit _\bc_\bs_\bh's history mechan-
+ ism. (Quotes are not sufficient.)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 24, 1986 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+VACATION(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VACATION(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ vacation - return ``I am not here'' indication
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ v\bva\bac\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn -\b-i\bi
+ v\bva\bac\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn [ -\b-a\ba alias ] login
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bV_\ba_\bc_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn returns a message to the sender of a message tel-
+ ling them that you are currently not reading your mail. The
+ intended use is in a ._\bf_\bo_\br_\bw_\ba_\br_\bd file. For example, your ._\bf_\bo_\br_\b-
+ _\bw_\ba_\br_\bd file might have:
+
+ \eric, "|/usr/ucb/vacation -a allman eric"
+
+ which would send messages to you (assuming your login name
+ was eric) and reply to any messages for ``eric'' or ``all-
+ man''.
+
+ No message will be sent unless _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bn or an _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs supplied
+ using the -\b-a\ba option is a substring of either the ``To:'' or
+ ``Cc:'' headers of the mail. No messages from ``???-
+ REQUEST'', ``Postmaster'', ``UUCP'', ``MAILER'', or
+ ``MAILER-DAEMON'' will be replied to, nor is a notification
+ sent if a ``Precedence: bulk'' or ``Precedence: junk'' line
+ is included in the mail headers. Only one message per week
+ will be sent to each unique sender. The people who have
+ sent you messages are maintained as an _\bn_\bd_\bb_\bm(3) database in
+ the files ._\bv_\ba_\bc_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn._\bp_\ba_\bg and ._\bv_\ba_\bc_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn._\bd_\bi_\br in your home
+ directory.
+
+ The -\b-i\bi flag initializes the vacation database files. It
+ should be used before you modify your ._\bf_\bo_\br_\bw_\ba_\br_\bd file.
+
+ _\bV_\ba_\bc_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn expects a file ._\bv_\ba_\bc_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn._\bm_\bs_\bg, in your home direc-
+ tory, containing a message to be sent back to each sender.
+ It should be an entire message (including headers). For
+ example, it might say:
+
+ From: eric@ucbmonet.Berkeley.EDU (Eric Allman)
+ Subject: I am on vacation
+ Delivered-By-The-Graces-Of: The Vacation program
+ Precedence: bulk
+
+ I am on vacation until July 22. If you have something urgent,
+ please contact Joe Kalash <kalash@ucbingres.Berkeley.EDU>.
+ --eric
+
+ _\bV_\ba_\bc_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn reads the first line from the standard input for a
+ UNIX-style ``From'' line to determine the sender. _\bS_\be_\bn_\bd_\b-
+ _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(8) includes this ``From'' line automatically.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+VACATION(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VACATION(1)
+
+
+
+ Fatal errors, such as calling _\bv_\ba_\bc_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn with incorrect argu-
+ ments, or with non-existent _\bl_\bo_\bg_\bi_\bns, are logged in the system
+ log file, using _\bs_\by_\bs_\bl_\bo_\bg(8).
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ ~/.vacation.dir database file
+ ~/.vacation.msg message to send
+ ~/.vacation.pag database file
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sendmail(8), syslog(8)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 July 9, 1988 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+VGRIND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VGRIND(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ vgrind - grind nice listings of programs
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ v\bvg\bgr\bri\bin\bnd\bd [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b- ] [ -\b-t\bt ] [ -\b-n\bn ] [ -\b-x\bx ] [ -\b-W\bW ] [ -\b-s\bsn\bn ] [ -\b-h\bh
+ header ] [ -\b-d\bd file ] [ -\b-l\bl_\bl_\ba_\bn_\bg_\bu_\ba_\bg_\be ] name ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bV_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd formats the program sources which are arguments in a
+ nice style using _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1) Comments are placed in italics,
+ keywords in bold face, and the name of the current function
+ is listed down the margin of each page as it is encountered.
+
+ _\bV_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd runs in two basic modes, filter mode or regular mode.
+ In filter mode _\bv_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd acts as a filter in a manner similar
+ to _\bt_\bb_\bl(1). The standard input is passed directly to the
+ standard output except for lines bracketed by the _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf-_\bl_\bi_\bk_\be
+ macros:
+
+ .vS - starts processing
+
+ .vE - ends processing
+
+ These lines are formatted as described above. The output
+ from this filter can be passed to _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf for output. There
+ need be no particular ordering with _\be_\bq_\bn(1) or _\bt_\bb_\bl(1).
+
+ In regular mode _\bv_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd accepts input files, processes them,
+ and passes them to _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf(1) for output.
+
+ In both modes _\bv_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd passes any lines beginning with a
+ decimal point without conversion.
+
+ The options are:
+
+ -\b-f\bf forces filter mode
+
+ -\b- forces input to be taken from standard input (default
+ if -\b-f\bf is specified )
+
+ -\b-t\bt similar to the same option in _\bt_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf causing formatted
+ text to go to the standard output
+
+ -\b-n\bn forces no keyword bolding
+
+ -\b-x\bx outputs the index file in a ``pretty'' format. The
+ index file itself is produced whenever _\bv_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd is run
+ with a file called _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bx in the current directory. The
+ index of function definitions can then be run off by
+ giving _\bv_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd the -\b-x\bx option and the file _\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bx as argu-
+ ment.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+VGRIND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VGRIND(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-W\bW forces output to the (wide) Versatec printer rather
+ than the (narrow) Varian
+
+ -\b-s\bs specifies a point size to use on output (exactly the
+ same as the argument of a .ps)
+
+ -\b-h\bh specifies a particular header to put on every output
+ page (default is the file name)
+
+ -\b-d\bd specifies an alternate language definitions file
+ (default is /usr/lib/vgrindefs)
+
+ -\b-l\bl specifies the language to use. Currently known are
+ PASCAL (-\b-l\blp\bp), MODEL (-\b-l\blm\bm),C\bC (-\b-l\blc\bc or the default), CSH
+ (-\b-l\blc\bcs\bsh\bh), SHELL (-\b-l\bls\bsh\bh), RATFOR (-\b-l\blr\br), MODULA2 (-\b-l\blm\bmo\bod\bd2\b2),
+ YACC (-\b-l\bly\bya\bac\bcc\bc), ISP (-\b-l\bli\bis\bsp\bp), and ICON (-\b-l\blI\bI).
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ index file where source for index is created
+ /usr/lib/tmac/tmac.vgrindmacro package
+ /usr/lib/vfontedpr preprocessor
+ /usr/lib/vgrindefs language descriptions
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Dave Presotto & William Joy
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ vlp(1), vtroff(1), vgrindefs(5)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Vfontedpr assumes that a certain programming style is fol-
+ lowed:
+
+ For C\bC - function names can be preceded on a line only by
+ spaces, tabs, or an asterisk. The parenthesized arguments
+ must also be on the same line.
+
+ For P\bPA\bAS\bSC\bCA\bAL\bL - function names need to appear on the same line
+ as the keywords _\bf_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn or _\bp_\br_\bo_\bc_\be_\bd_\bu_\br_\be.
+
+ For M\bMO\bOD\bDE\bEL\bL - function names need to appear on the same line
+ as the keywords _\bi_\bs _\bb_\be_\bg_\bi_\bn_\bp_\br_\bo_\bc.
+
+ If these conventions are not followed, the indexing and mar-
+ ginal function name comment mechanisms will fail.
+
+ More generally, arbitrary formatting styles for programs
+ mostly look bad. The use of spaces to align source code
+ fails miserably; if you plan to _\bv_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd your program you
+ should use tabs. This is somewhat inevitable since the font
+ used by _\bv_\bg_\br_\bi_\bn_\bd is variable width.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+VGRIND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VGRIND(1)
+
+
+
+ The mechanism of ctags in recognizing functions should be
+ used here.
+
+ Filter mode does not work in documents using the -me or -ms
+ macros. (So what use is it anyway?)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+VI(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VI(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ vi - screen oriented (visual) display editor based on ex
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ v\bvi\bi [ -\b-t\bt tag ] [ -\b-r\br ] [ +\b+_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd ] [ -\b-l\bl ] [ -\b-w\bw_\bn ] name ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bV_\bi (visual) is a display oriented text editor based on
+ _\be_\bx(1). _\bE_\bx and _\bv_\bi run the same code; it is possible to get
+ to the command mode of _\be_\bx from within _\bv_\bi and vice-versa.
+
+ The _\bV_\bi _\bQ_\bu_\bi_\bc_\bk _\bR_\be_\bf_\be_\br_\be_\bn_\bc_\be card and the _\bI_\bn_\bt_\br_\bo_\bd_\bu_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bo_\bn _\bt_\bo _\bD_\bi_\bs_\bp_\bl_\ba_\by
+ _\bE_\bd_\bi_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\bw_\bi_\bt_\bh _\bV_\bi provide full details on using _\bv_\bi.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ See _\be_\bx(1).
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ ex (1), edit (1), ``Vi Quick Reference'' card, ``An Intro-
+ duction to Display Editing with Vi''.
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ William Joy
+ Mark Horton added macros to _\bv_\bi_\bs_\bu_\ba_\bl mode and is maintaining
+ version 3
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Software tabs using ^\b^T\bT work only immediately after the
+ _\ba_\bu_\bt_\bo_\bi_\bn_\bd_\be_\bn_\bt.
+
+ Left and right shifts on intelligent terminals don't make
+ use of insert and delete character operations in the termi-
+ nal.
+
+ The _\bw_\br_\ba_\bp_\bm_\ba_\br_\bg_\bi_\bn option can be fooled since it looks at output
+ columns when blanks are typed. If a long word passes
+ through the margin and onto the next line without a break,
+ then the line won't be broken.
+
+ Insert/delete within a line can be slow if tabs are present
+ on intelligent terminals, since the terminals need help in
+ doing this correctly.
+
+ Saving text on deletes in the named buffers is somewhat
+ inefficient.
+
+ The _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be command does not work when executed as :\b:s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be;
+ there is no way to use the :\b:a\bap\bpp\bpe\ben\bnd\bd, :\b:c\bch\bha\ban\bng\bge\be, and :\b:i\bin\bns\bse\ber\brt\bt
+ commands, since it is not possible to give more than one
+ line of input to a :\b: escape. To use these on a :\b:g\bgl\blo\bob\bba\bal\bl you
+ must Q\bQ to _\be_\bx command mode, execute them, and then reenter
+ the screen editor with _\bv_\bi or _\bo_\bp_\be_\bn.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+VLP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VLP(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ vlp - Format Lisp programs to be printed with nroff, vtroff,
+ or troff
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ v\bvl\blp\bp [ -\b-p\bp _\bp_\bo_\bi_\bn_\bt_\bs_\bi_\bz_\be ] [ -\b-d\bd ] [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-l\bl ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-T\bT _\bt_\bi_\bt_\bl_\be_\b1
+ ] file1 [ -\b-T\bT _\bt_\bi_\bt_\bl_\be_\b2 ] file2 ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bV_\bl_\bp formats the named files so that they can be run through
+ nroff, vtroff, or troff to produce listings that line-up and
+ are attractive. The first non-blank character of each line
+ is lined-up vertically, as in the source file. Comments
+ (text beginning with a semicolon) are printed in italics.
+ Each function's name is printed in bold face next to the
+ function. This format makes Lisp code look attractive when
+ it is printed with a variable width font.
+
+ Normally, _\bv_\bl_\bp works as a filter and sends its output to the
+ standard output. However, the -\b-v\bv switch pipes the output
+ directly to vtroff. If no files are specified, then _\bv_\bl_\bp
+ reads from the standard input.
+
+ The following options are available:
+
+ -\b-p\bp The -\b-p\bp switch changes the size of the text from its
+ default value of 8 points to one of 6, 8, 10, or 12
+ points. Once set, the point size is used for all sub-
+ sequent files. This point size does not apply to
+ embedded text (see -_\bf below).
+
+ -\b-d\bd The -\b-d\bd switch puts _\bv_\bl_\bp into debugging mode.
+
+ -\b-f\bf _\bV_\bl_\bp has a filtered mode in which all lines are passed
+ unmodified, except those lines between the directives
+ .\b.L\bLs\bs and .\b.L\bLe\be. This mode can be used to format Lisp code
+ that is embedded in a document. The directive .\b.L\bLs\bs
+ takes an optional argument that gives the point size
+ for the embedded code. If not size is specified, the
+ size of the surrounding text is used.
+
+ -\b-l\bl The -\b-l\bl switch prevents _\bv_\bl_\bp from placing labels next to
+ functions. This switch is useful for embedded Lisp
+ code, where the labels would be distracting.
+
+ -\b-v\bv This switch cause _\bv_\bl_\bp to send its output to vtroff
+ rather than the standard output.
+
+ -\b-T\bT A title to be printed on each page may be specified by
+ using the -\b-T\bT switch. The -\b-T\bT switch applies only to the
+ next file name given. Titles are not printed for
+ embedded text (see -\b-f\bf, above). This switch may not be
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+VLP(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VLP(1)
+
+
+
+ used if _\bv_\bl_\bp is reading from the standard input.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/lib/vlpmacs troff/nroff macros
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Originally written by John K. Foderaro, with additional
+ changes by Kevin Layer and James Larus.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ vgrind(1), lisp(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ _\bv_\bl_\bp transforms \ into \\ so that it will be printed out.
+ Hence, troff commands cannot be embedded in Lisp code.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+VMSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VMSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ vmstat - report virtual memory statistics
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ v\bvm\bms\bst\bta\bat\bt [ -\b-f\bfs\bsi\bim\bm ] [ drives ] [ interval [ count ] ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bV_\bm_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt delves into the system and normally reports certain
+ statistics kept about process, virtual memory, disk, trap
+ and cpu activity. If given a -\b-f\bf argument, it instead
+ reports on the number of _\bf_\bo_\br_\bk_\bs and _\bv_\bf_\bo_\br_\bk_\bs since system
+ startup and the number of pages of virtual memory involved
+ in each kind of fork. If given a -\b-s\bs argument, it instead
+ prints the contents of the _\bs_\bu_\bm structure, giving the total
+ number of several kinds of paging related events which have
+ occurred since boot. If given a -\b-i\bi argument, it instead
+ reports on the number of _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\br_\bu_\bp_\bt_\bs taken by each device
+ since system startup. If given a -\b-m\bm argument, it instead
+ reports on the usage of kernel dynamic memory listed first
+ by _\bs_\bi_\bz_\be of allocation and then by _\bt_\by_\bp_\be of usage.
+
+ If none of these options are given, _\bv_\bm_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt will report in
+ the first line a summary of the virtual memory activity
+ since the system has been booted. If _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bv_\ba_\bl is specified,
+ then successive lines are summaries over the last _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\bv_\ba_\bl
+ seconds. ``vmstat 5'' will print what the system is doing
+ every five seconds; this is a good choice of printing inter-
+ val since this is how often some of the statistics are sam-
+ pled in the system; others vary every second, running the
+ output for a while will make it apparent which are recom-
+ puted every second. If a _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt is given, the statistics are
+ repeated _\bc_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bt times. The format fields are:
+
+ Procs: information about numbers of processes in various
+ states.
+
+ r in run queue
+ b blocked for resources (i/o, paging, etc.)
+ w runnable or short sleeper (< 20 secs) but swapped
+
+ Memory: information about the usage of virtual and real
+ memory. Virtual pages are considered active if they belong
+ to processes which are running or have run in the last 20
+ seconds. A ``page'' here is 1024 bytes.
+
+ avm active virtual pages
+ fre size of the free list
+
+ Page: information about page faults and paging activity.
+ These are averaged each five seconds, and given in units per
+ second.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 February 27, 1988 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+VMSTAT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual VMSTAT(1)
+
+
+
+ re page reclaims (simulating reference bits)
+ at pages attached (found in free list)
+ pi pages paged in
+ po pages paged out
+ fr pages freed per second
+ de anticipated short term memory shortfall
+ sr pages scanned by clock algorithm, per-second
+
+ up/hp/rk/ra: Disk operations per second (this field is sys-
+ tem dependent). Typically paging will be split across
+ several of the available drives. The number under each of
+ these is the unit number.
+
+ Faults: trap/interrupt rate averages per second over last 5
+ seconds.
+
+ in (non clock) device interrupts per second
+ sy system calls per second
+ cs cpu context switch rate (switches/sec)
+
+ Cpu: breakdown of percentage usage of CPU time
+
+ us user time for normal and low priority processes
+ sy system time
+ id cpu idle
+
+ If more than 4 disk drives are configured in the system,
+ _\bv_\bm_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt displays only the first 4 drives, with priority given
+ to Massbus disk drives (i.e. if both Unibus and Massbus
+ drives are present and the total number of drives exceeds 4,
+ then some number of Unibus drives will not be displayed in
+ favor of the Massbus drives). To force _\bv_\bm_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt to display
+ specific drives, their names may be supplied on the command
+ line.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /dev/kmem, /vmunix
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ _\bs_\by_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(1), _\bi_\bo_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt(1)
+
+ The sections starting with ``Interpreting system activity''
+ in _\bI_\bn_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bl_\bl_\bi_\bn_\bg _\ba_\bn_\bd _\bO_\bp_\be_\br_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bn_\bg _\b4._\b2_\bb_\bs_\bd.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 February 27, 1988 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+W(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual W(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ w - who is on and what they are doing
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bw [ -\b-h\bhl\bls\bs ] [ user ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW prints a summary of the current activity on the system,
+ including what each user is doing. The heading line shows
+ the current time of day, how long the system has been up,
+ the number of users logged into the system, and the load
+ averages. The load average numbers give the number of jobs
+ in the run queue averaged over 1, 5 and 15 minutes.
+
+ The fields output are: the users login name, the name of the
+ tty the user is on, the host from which the user is logged
+ in, the time the user logged on, the time since the user
+ last typed anything, the CPU time used by all processes and
+ their children on that terminal, the CPU time used by the
+ currently active processes, the name and arguments of the
+ current process.
+
+ The -\b-h\bh flag suppresses the heading. The -\b-s\bs flag asks for a
+ short form of output. In the short form, the tty is abbre-
+ viated, the login time and cpu times are left off, as are
+ the arguments to commands. -\b-l\bl gives the long output, which
+ is the default. The -\b-f\bf option suppresses the ``from''
+ field.
+
+ If a _\bu_\bs_\be_\br name is included, the output will be restricted to
+ that user.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/utmp
+ /dev/kmem
+ /dev/drum
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ who(1), finger(1), ps(1)
+
+A\bAU\bUT\bTH\bHO\bOR\bR
+ Mark Horton
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ The notion of the ``current process'' is muddy. The current
+ algorithm is ``the highest numbered process on the terminal
+ that is not ignoring interrupts, or, if there is none, the
+ highest numbered process on the terminal''. This fails, for
+ example, in critical sections of programs like the shell and
+ editor, or when faulty programs running in the background
+ fork and fail to ignore interrupts. (In cases where no pro-
+ cess can be found, _\bw prints ``-''.)
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 28, 1987 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+W(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual W(1)
+
+
+
+ The CPU time is only an estimate, in particular, if someone
+ leaves a background process running after logging out, the
+ person currently on that terminal is ``charged'' with the
+ time.
+
+ Background processes are not shown, even though they account
+ for much of the load on the system.
+
+ Sometimes processes, typically those in the background, are
+ printed with null or garbaged arguments. In these cases,
+ the name of the command is printed in parentheses.
+
+ W does not know about the new conventions for detection of
+ background jobs. It will sometimes find a background job
+ instead of the right one.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 28, 1987 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WAIT(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WAIT(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ wait - await completion of process
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwa\bai\bit\bt
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ Wait until all processes started with &\b& have completed, and
+ report on abnormal terminations.
+
+ Because the _\bw_\ba_\bi_\bt(2) system call must be executed in the
+ parent process, the Shell itself executes _\bw_\ba_\bi_\bt, without
+ creating a new process.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ sh(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Not all the processes of a 3- or more-stage pipeline are
+ children of the Shell, and thus can't be waited for. (This
+ bug does not apply to _\bc_\bs_\bh(1).)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WALL(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WALL(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ wall - write to all users
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwa\bal\bll\bl
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW_\ba_\bl_\bl reads its standard input until an end-of-file. It then
+ sends this message, preceded by `Broadcast Message ...', to
+ all logged in users.
+
+ The sender should be super-user to override any protections
+ the users may have invoked.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /dev/tty?
+ /etc/utmp
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mesg(1), write(1)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ `Cannot send to ...' when the open on a user's tty file
+ fails.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WC(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ wc - word count
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwc\bc [ -\b-l\blw\bwc\bc ] [ name ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW_\bc counts lines, words and characters in the named files, or
+ in the standard input if no name appears. A word is a maxi-
+ mal string of characters delimited by spaces, tabs or new-
+ lines.
+
+ If an argument beginning with one of ``lwc'' is present, the
+ specified counts (lines, words, or characters) are selected
+ by the letters l\bl, w\bw, or c\bc. The default is -\b-l\blw\bwc\bc.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WHATIS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHATIS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ whatis - describe what a command is
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwh\bha\bat\bti\bis\bs [ -\b-M\bM _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh ] command ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW_\bh_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bs looks up a given command and gives the header line
+ from the manual page. You can then use the _\bm_\ba_\bn(1) command
+ to get more information.
+
+ Normally _\bw_\bh_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bs checks in a standard location (/usr/man) for
+ its database ``whatis''. This can be changed by supplying a
+ _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bh (a la the Bourne shell) with the -\b-M\bM flag. This search
+ path must be a colon (``:'') separated list of directories
+ which _\bw_\bh_\ba_\bt_\bi_\bs will search for files named ``whatis''. The
+ path can also be set with the environmental variable _\bM_\bA_\bN_\b-
+ _\bP_\bA_\bT_\bH.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/man/whatis data base
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ apropos(1), man(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 30, 1987 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WHEREIS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHEREIS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ whereis - locate source, binary, and or manual for program
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwh\bhe\ber\bre\bei\bis\bs [ -\b-s\bsb\bbm\bm ] [ -\b-u\bu ] [ -\b-S\bSB\bBM\bM dir ... -\b-f\bf ] name ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW_\bh_\be_\br_\be_\bi_\bs locates source/binary and manuals sections for
+ specified files. The supplied names are first stripped of
+ leading pathname components and any (single) trailing exten-
+ sion of the form ``.ext'', e.g. ``.c''. Prefixes of ``s.''
+ resulting from use of source code control are also dealt
+ with. _\bW_\bh_\be_\br_\be_\bi_\bs then attempts to locate the desired program
+ in a list of standard places. If any of the -\b-b\bb,\b, -\b-s\bs or -\b-m\bm
+ flags are given then _\bw_\bh_\be_\br_\be_\bi_\bs searches only for binaries,
+ sources or manual sections respectively (or any two
+ thereof). The -\b-u\bu flag may be used to search for unusual
+ entries. A file is said to be unusual if it does not have
+ one entry of each requested type. Thus ``whereis -m -u *''
+ asks for those files in the current directory which have no
+ documentation.
+
+ Finally, the -\b-B\bB -\b-M\bM and -\b-S\bS flags may be used to change or
+ otherwise limit the places where _\bw_\bh_\be_\br_\be_\bi_\bs searches. The -\b-f\bf
+ file flags is used to terminate the last such directory list
+ and signal the start of file names.
+
+E\bEX\bXA\bAM\bMP\bPL\bLE\bE
+ The following finds all the files in /usr/bin which are not
+ documented in /usr/man/man1 with source in /usr/src/cmd:
+
+ cd /usr/ucb
+ whereis -u -M /usr/man/man1 -S /usr/src/cmd -f *
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/src/*
+ /usr/{doc,man}/*
+ /lib, /etc, /usr/{lib,bin,ucb,old,new,local}
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Since the program uses _\bc_\bh_\bd_\bi_\br(2) to run faster, pathnames
+ given with the -\b-M\bM -\b-S\bS and -\b-B\bB must be full; i.e. they must
+ begin with a ``/''.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WHICH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHICH(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ which - locate a program file including aliases and paths
+ (_\bc_\bs_\bh only)
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwh\bhi\bic\bch\bh [ name ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW_\bh_\bi_\bc_\bh takes a list of names and looks for the files which
+ would be executed had these names been given as commands.
+ Each argument is expanded if it is aliased, and searched for
+ along the user's path. Both aliases and path are taken from
+ the user's .cshrc file.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ ~/.cshrc source of aliases and path values
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ A diagnostic is given for names which are aliased to more
+ than a single word, or if an executable file with the argu-
+ ment name was not found in the path.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Must be executed by a csh, since only csh's know about
+ aliases.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ sh, for, case, if, while, :\b:, .\b., break, continue, cd, eval,
+ exec, exit, export, login, read, readonly, set, shift,
+ times, trap, umask, wait - command language
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ s\bsh\bh [ -\b-c\bce\bei\bik\bkn\bnr\brs\bst\btu\buv\bvx\bx ] [ arg ] ...
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bS_\bh is a command programming language that executes commands
+ read from a terminal or a file. See i\bin\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn for the
+ meaning of arguments to the shell.
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ A _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is a sequence of non blank _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd_\bs separated
+ by blanks (a blank is a t\bta\bab\bb or a s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be). The first word
+ specifies the name of the command to be executed. Except as
+ specified below the remaining words are passed as arguments
+ to the invoked command. The command name is passed as argu-
+ ment 0 (see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2)). The _\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be of a simple-command is
+ its exit status if it terminates normally or 200+_\bs_\bt_\ba_\bt_\bu_\bs if
+ it terminates abnormally (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2) for a list of status
+ values).
+
+ A _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be is a sequence of one or more _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd_\bs separated
+ by |\b|.\b. The standard output of each command but the last is
+ connected by a _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be(2) to the standard input of the next
+ command. Each command is run as a separate process; the
+ shell waits for the last command to terminate.
+
+ A _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is a sequence of one or more _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be_\bs separated by
+ ;\b;, &\b&, &\b&&\b& or |\b||\b| and optionally terminated by ;\b; or &\b&. ;\b; and &\b&
+ have equal precedence which is lower than that of &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b|,
+ &\b&&\b& and |\b||\b| also have equal precedence. A semicolon causes
+ sequential execution; an ampersand causes the preceding
+ _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be to be executed without waiting for it to finish.
+ The symbol &\b&&\b& (|\b||\b|) causes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following to be executed
+ only if the preceding _\bp_\bi_\bp_\be_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be returns a zero (non zero)
+ value. Newlines may appear in a _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt, instead of semi-
+ colons, to delimit commands.
+
+ A _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd is either a simple-command or one of the follow-
+ ing. The value returned by a command is that of the last
+ simple-command executed in the command.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\br _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be [i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ...] d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ Each time a f\bfo\bor\br command is executed _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be is set to the
+ next word in the f\bfo\bor\br word list. If i\bin\bn _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd ... is
+ omitted, i\bin\bn "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is assumed. Execution ends when there
+ are no more words in the list.
+
+ c\bca\bas\bse\be _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd i\bin\bn [_\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn [ |\b| _\bp_\ba_\bt_\bt_\be_\br_\bn ] ... )\b) _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt ;\b;;\b;] ... e\bes\bsa\bac\bc
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ A c\bca\bas\bse\be command executes the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt associated with the
+ first pattern that matches _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd. The form of the pat-
+ terns is the same as that used for file name genera-
+ tion.
+
+ i\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [e\bel\bli\bif\bf _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt t\bth\bhe\ben\bn _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] ... [e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] f\bfi\bi
+ The _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following i\bif\bf is executed and if it returns
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Otherwise,
+ the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following e\bel\bli\bif\bf is executed and if its value is
+ zero the _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt following t\bth\bhe\ben\bn is executed. Failing that
+ the e\bel\bls\bse\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is executed.
+
+ w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt [d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt] d\bdo\bon\bne\be
+ A w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be command repeatedly executes the w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt and
+ if its value is zero executes the d\bdo\bo _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt; otherwise
+ the loop terminates. The value returned by a w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ command is that of the last executed command in the d\bdo\bo
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt. u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl may be used in place of w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be to negate the
+ loop termination test.
+
+ (\b( _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt )\b)
+ Execute _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt in a subshell.
+
+ {\b{ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt }\b}
+ _\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt is simply executed.
+
+ The following words are only recognized as the first word of
+ a command and when not quoted.
+
+ i\bif\bf t\bth\bhe\ben\bn e\bel\bls\bse\be e\bel\bli\bif\bf f\bfi\bi c\bca\bas\bse\be i\bin\bn e\bes\bsa\bac\bc f\bfo\bor\br w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be u\bun\bnt\bti\bil\bl d\bdo\bo
+ d\bdo\bon\bne\be {\b{ }\b}
+
+ C\bCo\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The standard output from a command enclosed in a pair of
+ back quotes (`\b``\b`) may be used as part or all of a word;
+ trailing newlines are removed.
+
+ P\bPa\bar\bra\bam\bme\bet\bte\ber\br s\bsu\bub\bbs\bst\bti\bit\btu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ The character $\b$ is used to introduce substitutable parame-
+ ters. Positional parameters may be assigned values by s\bse\bet\bt.
+ Variables may be set by writing
+
+ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be=\b=_\bv_\ba_\bl_\bu_\be ] ...
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br}\b}
+ A _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is a sequence of letters, digits or under-
+ scores (a _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be), a digit, or any of the characters *\b* @\b@
+ #\b# ?\b? -\b- $\b$ !\b!.\b. The value, if any, of the parameter is sub-
+ stituted. The braces are required only when _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br
+ is followed by a letter, digit, or underscore that is
+ not to be interpreted as part of its name. If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\b-
+ _\bt_\be_\br is a digit, it is a positional parameter. If
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is *\b* or @\b@ then all the positional parameters,
+ starting with $\b$1\b1, are substituted separated by spaces.
+ $\b$0\b0 is set from argument zero when the shell is invoked.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br-_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise
+ substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br=_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is not set, set it to _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; the value of
+ the parameter is then substituted. Positional parame-
+ ters may not be assigned to in this way.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br?_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute its value; otherwise,
+ print _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd and exit from the shell. If _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is omit-
+ ted, a standard message is printed.
+
+ ${\b{_\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br+_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd}\b}
+ If _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br is set, substitute _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd; otherwise substi-
+ tute nothing.
+
+ In the above _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is not evaluated unless it is to be used
+ as the substituted string. (So that, for example, echo
+ ${d-'pwd'} will only execute _\bp_\bw_\bd if _\bd is unset.)
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are automatically set by the shell.
+
+ #\b# The number of positional parameters in decimal.
+ -\b- Options supplied to the shell on invocation or by
+ s\bse\bet\bt.
+ ?\b? The value returned by the last executed command in
+ decimal.
+ $\b$ The process number of this shell.
+ !\b! The process number of the last background command
+ invoked.
+
+ The following _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs are used but not set by the shell.
+
+ H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE The default argument (home directory) for the c\bcd\bd
+ command.
+ P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH The search path for commands (see e\bex\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn).
+ M\bMA\bAI\bIL\bL If this variable is set to the name of a mail
+ file, the shell informs the user of the arrival of
+ mail in the specified file.
+ P\bPS\bS1\b1 Primary prompt string, by default '$ '.
+ P\bPS\bS2\b2 Secondary prompt string, by default '> '.
+ I\bIF\bFS\bS Internal field separators, normally s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be, t\bta\bab\bb,
+ and n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be. I\bIF\bFS\bS is ignored if _\bs_\bh is running as
+ root or if the effective user id differs from the
+ real user id.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ B\bBl\bla\ban\bnk\bk i\bin\bnt\bte\ber\brp\bpr\bre\bet\bta\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ After parameter and command substitution, any results of
+ substitution are scanned for internal field separator char-
+ acters (those found in $\b$I\bIF\bFS\bS) and split into distinct argu-
+ ments where such characters are found. Explicit null argu-
+ ments ("" or '') are retained. Implicit null arguments
+ (those resulting from _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs that have no values) are
+ removed.
+
+ F\bFi\bil\ble\be n\bna\bam\bme\be g\bge\ben\bne\ber\bra\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Following substitution, each command word is scanned for the
+ characters *\b*, ?\b? and [\b[.\b. If one of these characters appears,
+ the word is regarded as a pattern. The word is replaced
+ with alphabetically sorted file names that match the pat-
+ tern. If no file name is found that matches the pattern,
+ the word is left unchanged. The character .\b. at the start of
+ a file name or immediately following a /\b/, and the character
+ /\b/, must be matched explicitly.
+
+ *\b* Matches any string, including the null string.
+ ?\b? Matches any single character.
+ [\b[.\b..\b..\b.]\b]
+ Matches any one of the characters enclosed. A pair of
+ characters separated by -\b- matches any character lexi-
+ cally between the pair.
+
+ Q\bQu\buo\bot\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ The following characters have a special meaning to the shell
+ and cause termination of a word unless quoted.
+
+ ;\b; &\b& (\b( )\b) |\b| <\b< >\b> n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be s\bsp\bpa\bac\bce\be t\bta\bab\bb
+
+ A character may be _\bq_\bu_\bo_\bt_\be_\bd by preceding it with a \\b\.\b. \\b\n\bne\bew\bw-\b-
+ l\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored. All characters enclosed between a pair of
+ quote marks ('\b''\b'), except a single quote, are quoted. Inside
+ double quotes ("\b""\b") parameter and command substitution occurs
+ and \\b\ quotes the characters \\b\ '\b' "\b" and $\b$.
+
+ "\b"$\b$*\b*"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1 $\b$2\b2 .\b..\b..\b."\b" whereas
+ "\b"$\b$@\b@"\b" is equivalent to "\b"$\b$1\b1"\b" "\b"$\b$2\b2"\b" .\b..\b..\b. .\b.
+
+ P\bPr\bro\bom\bmp\bpt\bti\bin\bng\bg.\b.
+ When used interactively, the shell prompts with the value of
+ PS1 before reading a command. If at any time a newline is
+ typed and further input is needed to complete a command, the
+ secondary prompt ($\b$P\bPS\bS2\b2) is issued.
+
+ I\bIn\bnp\bpu\but\bt o\bou\but\btp\bpu\but\bt.\b.
+ Before a command is executed its input and output may be
+ redirected using a special notation interpreted by the
+ shell. The following may appear anywhere in a simple-
+ command or may precede or follow a _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd and are not
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ passed on to the invoked command. Substitution occurs
+ before _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd or _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt is used.
+
+ <_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard input (file descriptor 0).
+
+ >_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output (file descriptor 1).
+ If the file does not exist, it is created; otherwise it
+ is truncated to zero length.
+
+ >>_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ Use file _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd as standard output. If the file exists,
+ output is appended (by seeking to the end); otherwise
+ the file is created.
+
+ <<_\bw_\bo_\br_\bd
+ The shell input is read up to a line the same as _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd,
+ or end of file. The resulting document becomes the
+ standard input. If any character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd is quoted, no
+ interpretation is placed upon the characters of the
+ document; otherwise, parameter and command substitution
+ occurs, \\b\n\bne\bew\bwl\bli\bin\bne\be is ignored, and \\b\ is used to quote the
+ characters \\b\ $\b$ '\b' and the first character of _\bw_\bo_\br_\bd.
+
+ <&_\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt
+ The standard input is duplicated from file descriptor
+ _\bd_\bi_\bg_\bi_\bt; see _\bd_\bu_\bp(2). Similarly for the standard output
+ using >.
+
+ <&- The standard input is closed. Similarly for the stan-
+ dard output using >.
+
+ If one of the above is preceded by a digit, the file
+ descriptor created is that specified by the digit (instead
+ of the default 0 or 1). For example,
+
+ ... 2>&1
+
+ creates file descriptor 2 to be a duplicate of file descrip-
+ tor 1.
+
+ If a command is followed by &\b& then the default standard
+ input for the command is the empty file (/dev/null). Other-
+ wise, the environment for the execution of a command con-
+ tains the file descriptors of the invoking shell as modified
+ by input output specifications.
+
+ E\bEn\bnv\bvi\bir\bro\bon\bnm\bme\ben\bnt\bt.\b.
+ The environment is a list of name-value pairs that is passed
+ to an executed program in the same way as a normal argument
+ list; see _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2) and _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn(7). The shell interacts
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ with the environment in several ways. On invocation, the
+ shell scans the environment and creates a _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br for each
+ name found, giving it the corresponding value. Executed
+ commands inherit the same environment. If the user modifies
+ the values of these _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs or creates new ones, none of
+ these affects the environment unless the e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt command is
+ used to bind the shell's _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br to the environment. The
+ environment seen by any executed command is thus composed of
+ any unmodified name-value pairs originally inherited by the
+ shell, plus any modifications or additions, all of which
+ must be noted in e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt commands.
+
+ The environment for any _\bs_\bi_\bm_\bp_\bl_\be-_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd may be augmented by
+ prefixing it with one or more assignments to _\bp_\ba_\br_\ba_\bm_\be_\bt_\be_\br_\bs.
+ Thus these two lines are equivalent
+
+ TERM=450 cmd args
+ (export TERM; TERM=450; cmd args)
+
+ If the -\b-k\bk flag is set, _\ba_\bl_\bl keyword arguments are placed in
+ the environment, even if the occur after the command name.
+ The following prints 'a=b c' and 'c':
+ echo a=b c
+ set -k
+ echo a=b c
+
+ S\bSi\big\bgn\bna\bal\bls\bs.\b.
+ The INTERRUPT and QUIT signals for an invoked command are
+ ignored if the command is followed by &\b&; otherwise signals
+ have the values inherited by the shell from its parent.
+ (But see also t\btr\bra\bap\bp.\b.)
+
+ E\bEx\bxe\bec\bcu\but\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ Each time a command is executed the above substitutions are
+ carried out. Except for the 'special commands' listed below
+ a new process is created and an attempt is made to execute
+ the command via an _\be_\bx_\be_\bc_\bv_\be(2).
+
+ The shell parameter $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH defines the search path for the
+ directory containing the command. Each alternative direc-
+ tory name is separated by a colon (:\b:). The default path is
+ :\b:/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn:\b:/\b/u\bus\bsr\br/\b/b\bbi\bin\bn. If the command name contains a /, the
+ search path is not used. Otherwise, each directory in the
+ path is searched for an executable file. If the file has
+ execute permission but is not an _\ba._\bo_\bu_\bt file, it is assumed
+ to be a file containing shell commands. A subshell (i.e., a
+ separate process) is spawned to read it. A parenthesized
+ command is also executed in a subshell.
+
+ S\bSp\bpe\bec\bci\bia\bal\bl c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bds\bs.\b.
+ The following commands are executed in the shell process and
+ except where specified no input output redirection is
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ permitted for such commands.
+
+ #\b# For non-interactive shells, everything following the #\b#
+ is treated as a comment, i.e. the rest of the line is
+ ignored. For interactive shells, the #\b# has no special
+ effect.
+
+ :\b: No effect; the command does nothing.
+ .\b. _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be
+ Read and execute commands from _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be and return. The
+ search path $\b$P\bPA\bAT\bTH\bH is used to find the directory con-
+ taining _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be.
+ b\bbr\bre\bea\bak\bk [_\bn]
+ Exit from the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be loop, if any. If
+ _\bn is specified, break _\bn levels.
+ c\bco\bon\bnt\bti\bin\bnu\bue\be [_\bn]
+ Resume the next iteration of the enclosing f\bfo\bor\br or w\bwh\bhi\bil\ble\be
+ loop. If _\bn is specified, resume at the _\bn-th enclosing
+ loop.
+ c\bcd\bd [_\ba_\br_\bg]
+ Change the current directory to _\ba_\br_\bg. The shell parame-
+ ter $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE is the default _\ba_\br_\bg.
+ e\bev\bva\bal\bl [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The arguments are read as input to the shell and the
+ resulting command(s) executed.
+ e\bex\bxe\bec\bc [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ The command specified by the arguments is executed in
+ place of this shell without creating a new process.
+ Input output arguments may appear and if no other argu-
+ ments are given cause the shell input output to be
+ modified.
+ e\bex\bxi\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Causes a non interactive shell to exit with the exit
+ status specified by _\bn. If _\bn is omitted, the exit status
+ is that of the last command executed. (An end of file
+ will also exit from the shell.)
+ e\bex\bxp\bpo\bor\brt\bt [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked for automatic export to the
+ _\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn_\bm_\be_\bn_\bt of subsequently-executed commands. If no
+ arguments are given, a list of exportable names is
+ printed.
+ l\blo\bog\bgi\bin\bn [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]
+ Equivalent to 'exec login arg ...'.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bd _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...
+ One line is read from the standard input; successive
+ words of the input are assigned to the variables _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be
+ in order, with leftover words to the last variable.
+ The return code is 0 unless the end-of-file is encoun-
+ tered.
+ r\bre\bea\bad\bdo\bon\bnl\bly\by [_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ...]
+ The given names are marked readonly and the values of
+ the these names may not be changed by subsequent
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ assignment. If no arguments are given, a list of all
+ readonly names is printed.
+ s\bse\bet\bt [-\b-e\bek\bkn\bnp\bpt\btu\buv\bvx\bx [_\ba_\br_\bg ...]]
+ -\b-e\be If non interactive, exit immediately if a command
+ fails.
+ -\b-k\bk All keyword arguments are placed in the environment
+ for a command, not just those that precede the com-
+ mand name.
+ -\b-n\bn Read commands but do not execute them.
+ -\b-t\bt Exit after reading and executing one command.
+ -\b-u\bu Treat unset variables as an error when substituting.
+ -\b-v\bv Print shell input lines as they are read.
+ -\b-x\bx Print commands and their arguments as they are exe-
+ cuted.
+ -\b- Turn off the -\b-x\bx and -\b-v\bv options.
+
+ These flags can also be used upon invocation of the
+ shell. The current set of flags may be found in $\b$-\b-.
+
+ Remaining arguments are positional parameters and are
+ assigned, in order, to $\b$1\b1, $\b$2\b2, etc. If no arguments
+ are given, the values of all names are printed.
+
+ s\bsh\bhi\bif\bft\bt
+ The positional parameters from $\b$2\b2... are renamed $\b$1\b1...
+
+ t\bti\bim\bme\bes\bs
+ Print the accumulated user and system times for
+ processes run from the shell.
+
+ t\btr\bra\bap\bp [_\ba_\br_\bg] [_\bn] ...
+ _\bA_\br_\bg is a command to be read and executed when the shell
+ receives signal(s) _\bn. (Note that _\ba_\br_\bg is scanned once
+ when the trap is set and once when the trap is taken.)
+ Trap commands are executed in order of signal number.
+ If _\ba_\br_\bg is absent, all trap(s) _\bn are reset to their ori-
+ ginal values. If _\ba_\br_\bg is the null string, this signal
+ is ignored by the shell and by invoked commands. If _\bn
+ is 0, the command _\ba_\br_\bg is executed on exit from the
+ shell, otherwise upon receipt of signal _\bn as numbered
+ in _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2). _\bT_\br_\ba_\bp with no arguments prints a list of
+ commands associated with each signal number.
+
+ u\bum\bma\bas\bsk\bk [ _\bn_\bn_\bn ]
+ The user file creation mask is set to the octal value
+ _\bn_\bn_\bn (see _\bu_\bm_\ba_\bs_\bk(2)). If _\bn_\bn_\bn is omitted, the current
+ value of the mask is printed.
+
+ w\bwa\bai\bit\bt [_\bn]
+ Wait for the specified process and report its termina-
+ tion status. If _\bn is not given, all currently active
+ child processes are waited for. The return code from
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+SH(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual SH(1)
+
+
+
+ this command is that of the process waited for.
+
+ I\bIn\bnv\bvo\boc\bca\bat\bti\bio\bon\bn.\b.
+ If the first character of argument zero is -\b-, commands are
+ read from $\b$H\bHO\bOM\bME\bE/\b/.\b.p\bpr\bro\bof\bfi\bil\ble\be, if such a file exists. Commands
+ are then read as described below. The following flags are
+ interpreted by the shell when it is invoked.
+ -\b-c\bc _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg If the -\b-c\bc flag is present, commands are read from
+ _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg.
+ -\b-s\bs If the -\b-s\bs flag is present or if no arguments
+ remain then commands are read from the standard
+ input. Shell output is written to file descrip-
+ tor 2.
+ -\b-i\bi If the -\b-i\bi flag is present or if the shell input
+ and output are attached to a terminal (as told by
+ _\bg_\bt_\bt_\by) then this shell is _\bi_\bn_\bt_\be_\br_\ba_\bc_\bt_\bi_\bv_\be. In this
+ case the terminate signal SIGTERM (see _\bs_\bi_\bg_\bv_\be_\bc(2))
+ is ignored (so that 'kill 0' does not kill an
+ interactive shell) and the interrupt signal SIG-
+ INT is caught and ignored (so that w\bwa\bai\bit\bt is inter-
+ ruptible). In all cases SIGQUIT is ignored by
+ the shell.
+
+ The remaining flags and arguments are described under the
+ s\bse\bet\bt command.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ $HOME/.\b.profile
+ /tmp/sh*
+ /dev/null
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ csh(1), test(1), execve(2), environ(7)
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Errors detected by the shell, such as syntax errors cause
+ the shell to return a non zero exit status. If the shell is
+ being used non interactively then execution of the shell
+ file is abandoned. Otherwise, the shell returns the exit
+ status of the last command executed (see also e\bex\bxi\bit\bt).
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If << is used to provide standard input to an asynchronous
+ process invoked by &, the shell gets mixed up about naming
+ the input document. A garbage file /tmp/sh* is created, and
+ the shell complains about not being able to find the file by
+ another name.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 9
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WHO(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHO(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ who - who is on the system
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwh\bho\bo [ who-file ] [ a\bam\bm I\bI ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW_\bh_\bo, without any argument, reads the /etc/utmp file, and
+ lists the login name, terminal name, and login time for each
+ user currently logged into the system. If a single argument
+ is given, _\bw_\bh_\bo uses that file instead of /etc/utmp. Typi-
+ cally, that file will be /usr/adm/wtmp, which contains a
+ record of all the logins, logouts, crashes, shutdowns and
+ time changes since it was created. In either case, each
+ login will be listed with the user name, the terminal name
+ (with "/dev/" suppressed), login date and time, and, if
+ applicable, the host logged in from.
+
+ If /usr/adm/wtmp is being used as the file, the user name
+ may be empty or one of the special characters '|', '}' and
+ '~'. Logouts produce an output line without any user name.
+ For more information on the special characters, see utmp(5).
+
+ With two arguments, as in `who am I' (and also `who are
+ you'), _\bw_\bh_\bo tells you who you are logged in as.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/utmp
+ /usr/adm/wtmp
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ last(1), users(1), getuid(2), utmp(5)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 December 10, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WHOAMI(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHOAMI(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ whoami - print effective current user id
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwh\bho\boa\bam\bmi\bi
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW_\bh_\bo_\ba_\bm_\bi prints who you are. It works even if you are su'd,
+ while `who am i' does not since it uses /etc/utmp.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/passwd Name data base
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ who (1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WHOIS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WHOIS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ whois - DARPA Internet user name directory service
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwh\bho\boi\bis\bs name
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ whois help
+ Produces a helpful message similar to the following:
+
+ Please enter a name or a handle (``ident"), such as ``Smith"
+ or ``SRI-NIC". Starting with a period forces a name-only
+ search; starting with exclamation point forces handle-only.
+ Examples:
+ Smith [looks for name or handle SMITH ]
+ !SRI-NIC [looks for handle SRI-NIC only ]
+ .Smith, John [looks for name JOHN SMITH only ]
+ Adding ``..." to the argument will match anything from that
+ point, e.g. ``ZU..." will match ZUL, ZUM, etc.
+
+ To have the ENTIRE membership list of a group or organiza-
+ tion, if you are asking about a group or org, shown with the
+ record, use an asterisk character `*' directly preceding the
+ given argument. [CAUTION: If there are a lot of members
+ this will take a long time!] You may of course use exclama-
+ tion point and asterisk, or a period and asterisk together.
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ RFC 812: Nicname/Whois
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 June 6, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ window - window environment
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwi\bin\bnd\bdo\bow\bw [ -\b-t\bt ] [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-d\bd ] [ -\b-e\be e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be-\b-c\bch\bha\bar\br ] [ -\b-c\bc c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd
+ ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw implements a window environment on ASCII terminals.
+
+ A window is a rectangular portion of the physical terminal
+ screen associated with a set of processes. Its size and
+ position can be changed by the user at any time. Processes
+ communicate with their window in the same way they normally
+ interact with a terminal--through their standard input, out-
+ put, and diagnostic file descriptors. The window program
+ handles the details of redirecting input an output to and
+ from the windows. At any one time, only one window can
+ receive input from the keyboard, but all windows can simul-
+ taneously send output to the display.
+
+ Windows can overlap and are framed as necessary. Each win-
+ dow is named by one of the digits ``1'' to ``9''. This one
+ character identifier, as well as a user definable label
+ string, are displayed with the window on the top edge of its
+ frame. A window can be designated to be in the _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\bg_\br_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bd,
+ in which case it will always be on top of all normal, non-
+ foreground windows, and can be covered only by other fore-
+ ground windows. A window need not be completely within the
+ edges of the terminal screen. Thus a large window (possibly
+ larger than the screen) may be positioned to show only a
+ portion of its full size.
+
+ Each window has a cursor and a set of control functions.
+ Most intelligent terminal operations such as line and char-
+ acter deletion and insertion are supported. Display modes
+ such as underlining and reverse video are available if they
+ are supported by the terminal. In addition, similar to ter-
+ minals with multiple pages of memory, each window has a text
+ buffer which can have more lines than the window itself.
+
+O\bOP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bNS\bS
+ When _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw starts up, the commands (see long commands
+ below) contained in the file ._\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw_\br_\bc in the user's home
+ directory are executed. If it does not exist, two equal
+ sized windows spanning the terminal screen are created by
+ default.
+
+ The command line options are
+
+ -\b-t\bt Turn on terse mode (see _\bt_\be_\br_\bs_\be command below).
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+ -\b-f\bf Fast. Don't perform any startup action.
+
+ -\b-d\bd Ignore ._\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw_\br_\bc and create the two default windows
+ instead.
+
+ -\b-e\be e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be-\b-c\bch\bha\bar\br
+ Set the escape character to _\be_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bp_\be-_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br. _\bE_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bp_\be-_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br
+ can be a single character, or in the form ^_\bX where _\bX is
+ any character, meaning control-_\bX.
+
+ -\b-c\bc c\bco\bom\bmm\bma\ban\bnd\bd
+ Execute the string _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bm_\ba_\bn_\bd as a long command (see
+ below) before doing anything else.
+
+P\bPR\bRO\bOC\bCE\bES\bSS\bS E\bEN\bNV\bVI\bIR\bRO\bON\bNM\bME\bEN\bNT\bT
+ With each newly created window, a shell program is spawned
+ with its process environment tailored to that window. Its
+ standard input, output, and diagnostic file descriptors are
+ bound to one end of either a pseudo-terminal (_\bp_\bt_\by (4)) or a
+ UNIX domain socket (_\bs_\bo_\bc_\bk_\be_\bt_\bp_\ba_\bi_\br (4)). If a pseudo-terminal
+ is used, then its special characters and modes (see _\bs_\bt_\bt_\by
+ (1)) are copied from the physical terminal. A _\bt_\be_\br_\bm_\bc_\ba_\bp (5)
+ entry tailored to this window is created and passed as
+ environment (_\be_\bn_\bv_\bi_\br_\bo_\bn (5)) variable _\bT_\bE_\bR_\bM_\bC_\bA_\bP. The termcap
+ entry contains the window's size and characteristics as well
+ as information from the physical terminal, such as the
+ existence of underline, reverse video, and other display
+ modes, and the codes produced by the terminal's function
+ keys, if any. In addition, the window size attributes of
+ the pseudo-terminal are set to reflect the size of this win-
+ dow, and updated whenever it is changed by the user. In
+ particular, the editor _\bv_\bi (1) uses this information to
+ redraw its display.
+
+O\bOP\bPE\bER\bRA\bAT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ During normal execution, _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw can be in one of two states:
+ conversation mode and command mode. In conversation mode,
+ the terminal's real cursor is placed at the cursor position
+ of a particular window--called the current window--and input
+ from the keyboard is sent to the process in that window.
+ The current window is always on top of all other windows,
+ except those in foreground. In addition, it is set apart by
+ highlighting its identifier and label in reverse video.
+
+ Typing _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw's escape character (normally ^P) in conversa-
+ tion mode switches it into command mode. In command mode,
+ the top line of the terminal screen becomes the command
+ prompt window, and _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw interprets input from the keyboard
+ as commands to manipulate windows.
+
+ There are two types of commands: short commands are usually
+ one or two key strokes; long commands are strings either
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+ typed by the user in the command window (see the ``:'' com-
+ mand below), or read from a file (see _\bs_\bo_\bu_\br_\bc_\be below).
+
+S\bSH\bHO\bOR\bRT\bT C\bCO\bOM\bMM\bMA\bAN\bND\bDS\bS
+ Below, # represents one of the digits ``1'' to ``9''
+ corresponding to the windows 1 to 9. ^_\bX means control-_\bX,
+ where _\bX is any character. In particular, ^^ is control-^.
+ _\bE_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bp_\be is the escape key, or ^[.
+
+ #\b# Select window # as the current window and return to
+ conversation mode.
+
+ %\b%#\b# Select window # but stay in command mode.
+
+ ^\b^^\b^ Select the previous window and return to conversation
+ mode. This is useful for toggling between two windows.
+
+ e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be
+ Return to conversation mode.
+
+ ^\b^P\bP Return to conversation mode and write ^P to the current
+ window. Thus, typing two ^P's in conversation mode
+ sends one to the current window. If the _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw escape
+ is changed to some other character, that character
+ takes the place of ^P here.
+
+ ?\b? List a short summary of commands.
+
+ ^\b^L\bL Redraw the screen.
+
+ q\bq Exit _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw. Confirmation is requested.
+
+ ^\b^Z\bZ Suspend _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw.
+
+ w\bw Create a new window. The user is prompted for the
+ positions of the upper left and lower right corners of
+ the window. The cursor is placed on the screen and the
+ keys ``h'', ``j'', ``k'', and ``l'' move the cursor
+ left, down, up, and right, respectively. The keys
+ ``H'', ``J'', ``K'', and ``L'' move the cursor to the
+ respective limits of the screen. Typing a number
+ before the movement keys repeats the movement that
+ number of times. Return enters the cursor position as
+ the upper left corner of the window. The lower right
+ corner is entered in the same manner. During this pro-
+ cess, the placement of the new window is indicated by a
+ rectangular box drawn on the screen, corresponding to
+ where the new window will be framed. Typing escape at
+ any point cancels this command.
+
+ This window becomes the current window, and is given
+ the first available ID. The default buffer size is
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+ used (see _\bn_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be command below).
+
+ Only fully visible windows can be created this way.
+
+ c\bc#\b# Close window #. The process in the window is sent the
+ hangup signal (see _\bk_\bi_\bl_\bl (1)). _\bC_\bs_\bh (1) should handle
+ this signal correctly and cause no problems.
+
+ m\bm#\b# Move window # to another location. A box in the shape
+ of the window is drawn on the screen to indicate the
+ new position of the window, and the same keys as those
+ for the _\bw command are used to position the box. The
+ window can be moved partially off-screen.
+
+ M\bM#\b# Move window # to its previous position.
+
+ s\bs#\b# Change the size of window #. The user is prompted to
+ enter the new lower right corner of the window. A box
+ is drawn to indicate the new window size. The same
+ keys used in _\bw and _\bm are used to enter the position.
+
+ S\bS#\b# Change window # to its previous size.
+
+ ^\b^Y\bY Scroll the current window up by one line.
+
+ ^\b^E\bE Scroll the current window down by one line.
+
+ ^\b^U\bU Scroll the current window up by half the window size.
+
+ ^\b^D\bD Scroll the current window down by half the window size.
+
+ ^\b^B\bB Scroll the current window up by the full window size.
+
+ ^\b^F\bF Scroll the current window down by the full window size.
+
+ h\bh Move the cursor of the current window left by one
+ column.
+
+ j\bj Move the cursor of the current window down by one line.
+
+ k\bk Move the cursor of the current window up by one line.
+
+ l\bl Move the cursor of the current window right by one
+ column.
+
+ ^\b^S\bS Stop output in the current window.
+
+ ^\b^Q\bQ Start output in the current window.
+
+ :\b: Enter a line to be executed as long commands. Normal
+ line editing characters (erase character, erase word,
+ erase line) are supported.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+L\bLO\bON\bNG\bG C\bCO\bOM\bMM\bMA\bAN\bND\bDS\bS
+ Long commands are a sequence of statements parsed much like
+ a programming language, with a syntax similar to that of C.
+ Numeric and string expressions and variables are supported,
+ as well as conditional statements.
+
+ There are two data types: string and number. A string is a
+ sequence of letters or digits beginning with a letter.
+ ``_'' and ``.'' are considered letters. Alternately, non-
+ alphanumeric characters can be included in strings by quot-
+ ing them in ``"'' or escaping them with ``\''. In addition,
+ the ``\'' sequences of C are supported, both inside and out-
+ side quotes (e.g., ``\n'' is a new line, ``\r'' a carriage
+ return). For example, these are legal strings: abcde01234,
+ "&#$^*&#", ab"$#"cd, ab\$\#cd, "/usr/ucb/window".
+
+ A number is an integer value in one of three forms: a
+ decimal number, an octal number preceded by ``0'', or a hex-
+ adecimal number preceded by ``0x'' or ``0X''. The natural
+ machine integer size is used (i.e., the signed integer type
+ of the C compiler). As in C, a non-zero number represents a
+ boolean true.
+
+ The character ``#'' begins a comment which terminates at the
+ end of the line.
+
+ A statement is either a conditional or an expression.
+ Expression statements are terminated with a new line or
+ ``;''. To continue an expression on the next line, ter-
+ minate the first line with ``\''.
+
+C\bCO\bON\bND\bDI\bIT\bTI\bIO\bON\bNA\bAL\bL S\bST\bTA\bAT\bTE\bEM\bME\bEN\bNT\bT
+ _\bW_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw has a single control structure: the fully bracketed
+ if statement in the form
+ if <expr> then
+ <statement>
+ . . .
+ elsif <expr> then
+ <statement>
+ . . .
+ else
+ <statement>
+ . . .
+ endif
+ The _\be_\bl_\bs_\be and _\be_\bl_\bs_\bi_\bf parts are optional, and the latter can be
+ repeated any number of times. <_\bE_\bx_\bp_\br> must be numeric.
+
+E\bEX\bXP\bPR\bRE\bES\bSS\bSI\bIO\bON\bNS\bS
+ Expressions in _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw are similar to those in the C
+ language, with most C operators supported on numeric
+ operands. In addition, some are overloaded to operate on
+ strings.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 5
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+ When an expression is used as a statement, its value is dis-
+ carded after evaluation. Therefore, only expressions with
+ side effects (assignments and function calls) are useful as
+ statements.
+
+ Single valued (no arrays) variables are supported, of both
+ numeric and string values. Some variables are predefined.
+ They are listed below.
+
+ The operators in order of increasing precedence:
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> =\b= <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>
+ Assignment. The variable of name <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b1>, which must
+ be string valued, is assigned the result of <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2>.
+ Returns the value of <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2>.
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> ?\b? <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b> :\b: <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br3\b3>\b>
+ Returns the value of <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2> if <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b1> evaluates true
+ (non-zero numeric value); returns the value of <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b3>
+ otherwise. Only one of <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2> and <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b3> is
+ evaluated. <_\bE_\bx_\bp_\br_\b1> must be numeric.
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> |\b||\b| <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>
+ Logical or. Numeric values only. Short circuit
+ evaluation is supported (i.e., if <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b1> evaluates
+ true, then <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2> is not evaluated).
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> &\b&&\b& <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>
+ Logical and with short circuit evaluation. Numeric
+ values only.
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> |\b| <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>
+ Bitwise or. Numeric values only.
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> ^\b^ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>
+ Bitwise exclusive or. Numeric values only.
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> &\b& <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>
+ Bitwise and. Numeric values only.
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> =\b==\b= <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>,\b, <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> !\b!=\b= <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>
+ Comparison (equal and not equal, respectively). The
+ boolean result (either 1 or 0) of the comparison is
+ returned. The operands can be numeric or string
+ valued. One string operand forces the other to be con-
+ verted to a string in necessary.
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> <\b< <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>,\b, <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> >\b> <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>,\b,
+ Less than, greater than, less than or equal to, greater
+ than or equal to. Both numeric and string values, with
+ automatic conversion as above.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 6
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> <\b<<\b< <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>,\b, <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> >\b>>\b> <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>
+ If both operands are numbers, <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b1> is bit shifted
+ left (or right) by <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2> bits. If <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b1> is a
+ string, then its first (or last) <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2> characters are
+ returns (if <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br_\b2> is also a string, then its length
+ is used in place of its value).
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> +\b+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>,\b, <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> -\b- <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>
+ Addition and subtraction on numbers. For ``+'', if one
+ argument is a string, then the other is converted to a
+ string, and the result is the concatenation of the two
+ strings.
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> *\b* <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>,\b, <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br1\b1>\b> /\b/ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br2\b2>\b>,\b,
+ Multiplication, division, modulo. Numbers only.
+
+ -\b-<\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br>\b>,\b, ~\b~<\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br>\b>,\b, !\b!<\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br>\b>,\b, $\b$<\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br>\b>,\b, $\b$?\b?<\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br>\b>
+ The first three are unary minus, bitwise complement and
+ logical complement on numbers only. The operator,
+ ``$'', takes <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br> and returns the value of the vari-
+ able of that name. If <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br> is numeric with value _\bn
+ and it appears within an alias macro (see below), then
+ it refers to the nth argument of the alias invocation.
+ ``$?'' tests for the existence of the variable <_\be_\bx_\bp_\br>,
+ and returns 1 if it exists or 0 otherwise.
+
+ <\b<e\bex\bxp\bpr\br>\b>(\b(<\b<a\bar\brg\bgl\bli\bis\bst\bt>\b>)\b)
+ Function call. <_\bE_\bx_\bp_\br> must be a string that is the
+ unique prefix of the name of a builtin _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw function
+ or the full name of a user defined alias macro. In the
+ case of a builtin function, <_\ba_\br_\bg_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt> can be in one of
+ two forms:
+ <expr1>, <expr2>, . . .
+ argname1 = <expr1>, argname2 = <expr2>, . . .
+ The two forms can in fact be intermixed, but the result
+ is unpredictable. Most arguments can be omitted;
+ default values will be supplied for them. The _\ba_\br_\bg_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be_\bs
+ can be unique prefixes of the the argument names. The
+ commas separating arguments are used only to disambigu-
+ ate, and can usually be omitted.
+
+ Only the first argument form is valid for user defined
+ aliases. Aliases are defined using the _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs builtin
+ function (see below). Arguments are accessed via a
+ variant of the variable mechanism (see ``$'' operator
+ above).
+
+ Most functions return value, but some are used for side
+ effect only and so must be used as statements. When a
+ function or an alias is used as a statement, the
+ parenthesis surrounding the argument list may be omit-
+ ted. Aliases return no value.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 7
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUI\bIL\bLT\bTI\bIN\bN F\bFU\bUN\bNC\bCT\bTI\bIO\bON\bNS\bS
+ The arguments are listed by name in their natural order.
+ Optional arguments are in square brackets (``[ ]''). Argu-
+ ments that have no names are in angle brackets (``<>'').
+
+ a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs(\b([\b[<\b<s\bst\btr\bri\bin\bng\bg>\b>]\b],\b, [\b[<\b<s\bst\btr\bri\bin\bng\bg-\b-l\bli\bis\bst\bt>\b>]\b])\b)
+ If no argument is given, all currently defined alias
+ macros are listed. Otherwise, <_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg> is defined as
+ an alias, with expansion <_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg-_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt>. The previous
+ definition of <_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg>, if any, is returned. Default
+ for <_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg-_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt> is no change.
+
+ c\bcl\blo\bos\bse\be(\b(<\b<w\bwi\bin\bnd\bdo\bow\bw-\b-l\bli\bis\bst\bt>\b>)\b)
+ Close the windows specified in <_\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw-_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt>. If
+ <_\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw-_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt> is the word _\ba_\bl_\bl, than all windows are
+ closed. No value is returned.
+
+ c\bcu\bur\brs\bso\bor\brm\bmo\bod\bde\bes\bs(\b([\b[m\bmo\bod\bde\bes\bs]\b])\b)
+ Set the window cursor to _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be_\bs. _\bM_\bo_\bd_\be_\bs is the bitwise
+ or of the mode bits defined as the variables _\bm__\bu_\bl
+ (underline), _\bm__\br_\be_\bv (reverse video), _\bm__\bb_\bl_\bk (blinking),
+ and _\bm__\bg_\br_\bp (graphics, terminal dependent). Return value
+ is the previous modes. Default is no change. For
+ example, cursor($m_rev|$m_blk) sets the window cursors
+ to blinking reverse video.
+
+ e\bec\bch\bho\bo(\b([\b[w\bwi\bin\bnd\bdo\bow\bw]\b],\b, [\b[<\b<s\bst\btr\bri\bin\bng\bg-\b-l\bli\bis\bst\bt>\b>]\b])\b)
+ Write the list of strings, <_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg-_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt>, to _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw,
+ separated by spaces and terminated with a new line.
+ The strings are only displayed in the window, the
+ processes in the window are not involved (see _\bw_\br_\bi_\bt_\be
+ below). No value is returned. Default is the current
+ window.
+
+ e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\be(\b([\b[e\bes\bsc\bca\bap\bpe\bec\bc]\b])\b)
+ Set the escape character to _\be_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bp_\be-_\bc_\bh_\ba_\br. Returns the
+ old escape character as a one character string.
+ Default is no change. _\bE_\bs_\bc_\ba_\bp_\be_\bc can be a string of a
+ single character, or in the form ^_\bX, meaning control-_\bX.
+
+ f\bfo\bor\bre\beg\bgr\bro\bou\bun\bnd\bd(\b([\b[w\bwi\bin\bnd\bdo\bow\bw]\b],\b, [\b[f\bfl\bla\bag\bg]\b])\b)
+ Move _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw in or out of foreground. _\bF_\bl_\ba_\bg can be one
+ of _\bo_\bn, _\bo_\bf_\bf, _\by_\be_\bs, _\bn_\bo, _\bt_\br_\bu_\be, or _\bf_\ba_\bl_\bs_\be, with obvious mean-
+ ings, or it can be a numeric expression, in which case
+ a non-zero value is true. Returns the old foreground
+ flag as a number. Default for _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw is the current
+ window, default for _\bf_\bl_\ba_\bg is no change.
+
+ l\bla\bab\bbe\bel\bl(\b([\b[w\bwi\bin\bnd\bdo\bow\bw]\b],\b, [\b[l\bla\bab\bbe\bel\bl]\b])\b)
+ Set the label of _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw to _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl. Returns the old
+ label as a string. Default for _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw is the current
+ window, default for _\bl_\ba_\bb_\be_\bl is no change. To turn off a
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 8
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+ label, set it to an empty string ("").
+
+ l\bli\bis\bst\bt(\b()\b)
+ No arguments. List the identifiers and labels of all
+ windows. No value is returned.
+
+ n\bnl\bli\bin\bne\be(\b([\b[n\bnl\bli\bin\bne\be]\b])\b)
+ Set the default buffer size to _\bn_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be. Initially, it is
+ 48 lines. Returns the old default buffer size.
+ Default is no change. Using a very large buffer can
+ slow the program down considerably.
+
+ s\bse\bel\ble\bec\bct\bt(\b([\b[w\bwi\bin\bnd\bdo\bow\bw]\b])\b)
+ Make _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw the current window. The previous current
+ window is returned. Default is no change.
+
+ s\bsh\bhe\bel\bll\bl(\b([\b[<\b<s\bst\btr\bri\bin\bng\bg-\b-l\bli\bis\bst\bt>\b>]\b])\b)
+ Set the default window shell program to <_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg-_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt>.
+ Returns the first string in the old shell setting.
+ Default is no change. Initially, the default shell is
+ taken from the environment variable _\bS_\bH_\bE_\bL_\bL.
+
+ s\bso\bou\bur\brc\bce\be(\b(f\bfi\bil\ble\ben\bna\bam\bme\be)\b)
+ Read and execute the long commands in _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.
+ Returns -1 if the file cannot be read, 0 otherwise.
+
+ t\bte\ber\brs\bse\be(\b([\b[f\bfl\bla\bag\bg]\b])\b)
+ Set terse mode to _\bf_\bl_\ba_\bg. In terse mode, the command
+ window stays hidden even in command mode, and errors
+ are reported by sounding the terminal's bell. _\bF_\bl_\ba_\bg can
+ take on the same values as in _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\bg_\br_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bd above.
+ Returns the old terse flag. Default is no change.
+
+ u\bun\bna\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs(\b(a\bal\bli\bia\bas\bs)\b)
+ Undefine _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs. Returns -1 if _\ba_\bl_\bi_\ba_\bs does not exist, 0
+ otherwise.
+
+ u\bun\bns\bse\bet\bt(\b(v\bva\bar\bri\bia\bab\bbl\ble\be)\b)
+ Undefine _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be. Returns -1 if _\bv_\ba_\br_\bi_\ba_\bb_\bl_\be does not
+ exist, 0 otherwise.
+
+ v\bva\bar\bri\bia\bab\bbl\ble\bes\bs(\b()\b)
+ No arguments. List all variables. No value is
+ returned.
+
+ w\bwi\bin\bnd\bdo\bow\bw(\b([\b[r\bro\bow\bw]\b],\b, [\b[c\bco\bol\blu\bum\bmn\bn]\b],\b, [\b[n\bnr\bro\bow\bw]\b],\b, [\b[n\bnc\bco\bol\bl]\b],\b, [\b[n\bnl\bli\bin\bne\be]\b],\b, [\b[f\bfr\bra\bam\bme\be]\b],\b,
+ [\b[p\bpt\bty\by]\b],\b, [\b[m\bma\bap\bpn\bnl\bl]\b],\b, [\b[s\bsh\bhe\bel\bll\bl]\b])\b)
+ Open a window with upper left corner at _\br_\bo_\bw, _\bc_\bo_\bl_\bu_\bm_\bn and
+ size _\bn_\br_\bo_\bw, _\bn_\bc_\bo_\bl. If _\bn_\bl_\bi_\bn_\be is specified, then that many
+ lines are allocated for the text buffer. Otherwise,
+ the default buffer size is used. Default values for
+ _\br_\bo_\bw, _\bc_\bo_\bl_\bu_\bm_\bn, _\bn_\br_\bo_\bw, and _\bn_\bc_\bo_\bl are, respectively, the
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 9
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+ upper, left-most, lower, or right-most extremes of the
+ screen. _\bF_\br_\ba_\bm_\be, _\bp_\bt_\by, and _\bm_\ba_\bp_\bn_\bl are flag values inter-
+ preted in the same way as the argument to _\bf_\bo_\br_\be_\bg_\br_\bo_\bu_\bn_\bd
+ (see above); they mean, respectively, put a frame
+ around this window (default true), allocate pseudo-
+ terminal for this window rather than socketpair
+ (default true), and map new line characters in this
+ window to carriage return and line feed (default true
+ if socketpair is used, false otherwise). _\bS_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl is a
+ list of strings that will be used as the shell program
+ to place in the window (default is the program speci-
+ fied by _\bs_\bh_\be_\bl_\bl, see below). The created window's iden-
+ tifier is returned as a number.
+
+ w\bwr\bri\bit\bte\be(\b([\b[w\bwi\bin\bnd\bdo\bow\bw]\b],\b, [\b[<\b<s\bst\btr\bri\bin\bng\bg-\b-l\bli\bis\bst\bt>\b>]\b])\b)
+ Send the list of strings, <_\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg-_\bl_\bi_\bs_\bt>, to _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw,
+ separated by spaces but not terminated with a new line.
+ The strings are actually given to the window as input.
+ No value is returned. Default is the current window.
+
+P\bPR\bRE\bED\bDE\bEF\bFI\bIN\bNE\bED\bD V\bVA\bAR\bRI\bIA\bAB\bBL\bLE\bES\bS
+ These variables are for information only. Redefining them
+ does not affect the internal operation of _\bw_\bi_\bn_\bd_\bo_\bw.
+
+ b\bba\bau\bud\bd The baud rate as a number between 50 and 38400.
+
+ m\bmo\bod\bde\bes\bs
+ The display modes (reverse video, underline, blinking,
+ graphics) supported by the physical terminal. The
+ value of _\bm_\bo_\bd_\be_\bs is the bitwise or of some of the one bit
+ values, _\bm__\bb_\bl_\bk, _\bm__\bg_\br_\bp, _\bm__\br_\be_\bv, and _\bm__\bu_\bl (see below).
+ These values are useful in setting the window cursors'
+ modes (see _\bc_\bu_\br_\bs_\bo_\br_\bm_\bo_\bd_\be_\bs above).
+
+ m\bm_\b_b\bbl\blk\bk
+ The blinking mode bit.
+
+ m\bm_\b_g\bgr\brp\bp
+ The graphics mode bit (not very useful).
+
+ m\bm_\b_r\bre\bev\bv
+ The reverse video mode bit.
+
+ m\bm_\b_u\bul\bl The underline mode bit.
+
+ n\bnc\bco\bol\bl The number of columns on the physical screen.
+
+ n\bnr\bro\bow\bw The number of rows on the physical screen.
+
+ t\bte\ber\brm\bm The terminal type. The standard name, found in the
+ second name field of the terminal's _\bT_\bE_\bR_\bM_\bC_\bA_\bP entry, is
+ used.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 10
+
+
+
+
+
+
+WINDOW(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WINDOW(1)
+
+
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ ~/.windowrc startup command file.
+ /dev/[pt]ty[pq]?pseudo-terminal devices.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Should be self explanatory.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 12, 1986 11
+
+
+
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+WRITE(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual WRITE(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ write - write to another user
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ w\bwr\bri\bit\bte\be user [ ttyname ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bW_\br_\bi_\bt_\be copies lines from your terminal to that of another
+ user. When first called, it sends the message
+
+ Message from yourname@yoursystem on yourttyname at
+ time...
+
+ The recipient of the message should write back at this
+ point. Communication continues until an end of file is read
+ from the terminal or an interrupt is sent. At that point
+ _\bw_\br_\bi_\bt_\be writes `EOT' on the other terminal and exits.
+
+ If you want to write to a user who is logged in more than
+ once, the _\bt_\bt_\by_\bn_\ba_\bm_\be argument may be used to indicate the
+ appropriate terminal name.
+
+ Permission to write may be denied or granted by use of the
+ _\bm_\be_\bs_\bg command. At the outset writing is allowed. Certain
+ commands, in particular _\bn_\br_\bo_\bf_\bf and _\bp_\br(1) disallow messages in
+ order to prevent messy output.
+
+ If the character `!' is found at the beginning of a line,
+ _\bw_\br_\bi_\bt_\be calls the shell to execute the rest of the line as a
+ command.
+
+ The following protocol is suggested for using _\bw_\br_\bi_\bt_\be: when
+ you first write to another user, wait for him to write back
+ before starting to send. Each party should end each message
+ with a distinctive signal-(\b(o\bo)\b) for `over' is conventional-
+ that the other may reply. (\b(o\boo\bo)\b) for `over and out' is sug-
+ gested when conversation is about to be terminated.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /etc/utmp to find user
+ /bin/sh to execute `!'
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mesg(1), who(1), mail(1)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 5, 1986 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+XSEND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSEND(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ xsend, xget, enroll - secret mail
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ x\bxs\bse\ben\bnd\bd person
+ x\bxg\bge\bet\bt
+ e\ben\bnr\bro\bol\bll\bl
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ These commands implement a secure communication channel; it
+ is like _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(1), but no one can read the messages except the
+ intended recipient. The method embodies a public-key cryp-
+ tosystem using knapsacks.
+
+ To receive messages, use _\be_\bn_\br_\bo_\bl_\bl; it asks you for a password
+ that you must subsequently quote in order to receive secret
+ mail.
+
+ To receive secret mail, use _\bx_\bg_\be_\bt. It asks for your pass-
+ word, then gives you the messages.
+
+ To send secret mail, use _\bx_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd in the same manner as the
+ ordinary mail command. (However, it will accept only one
+ target). A message announcing the receipt of secret mail is
+ also sent by ordinary mail.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/secretmail/*.key: keys
+ /usr/spool/secretmail/*.[0-9]: messages
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mail (1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ It should be integrated with ordinary mail. The announce-
+ ment of secret mail makes traffic analysis possible.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+XSEND(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSEND(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ xsend, xget, enroll - secret mail
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ x\bxs\bse\ben\bnd\bd person
+ x\bxg\bge\bet\bt
+ e\ben\bnr\bro\bol\bll\bl
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ These commands implement a secure communication channel; it
+ is like _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bl(1), but no one can read the messages except the
+ intended recipient. The method embodies a public-key cryp-
+ tosystem using knapsacks.
+
+ To receive messages, use _\be_\bn_\br_\bo_\bl_\bl; it asks you for a password
+ that you must subsequently quote in order to receive secret
+ mail.
+
+ To receive secret mail, use _\bx_\bg_\be_\bt. It asks for your pass-
+ word, then gives you the messages.
+
+ To send secret mail, use _\bx_\bs_\be_\bn_\bd in the same manner as the
+ ordinary mail command. (However, it will accept only one
+ target). A message announcing the receipt of secret mail is
+ also sent by ordinary mail.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ /usr/spool/secretmail/*.key: keys
+ /usr/spool/secretmail/*.[0-9]: messages
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mail (1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ It should be integrated with ordinary mail. The announce-
+ ment of secret mail makes traffic analysis possible.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+XSTR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSTR(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ xstr - extract strings from C programs to implement shared
+ strings
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ x\bxs\bst\btr\br [ -\b-c\bc ] [ -\b- ] [ file ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bX_\bs_\bt_\br maintains a file _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs into which strings in com-
+ ponent parts of a large program are hashed. These strings
+ are replaced with references to this common area. This
+ serves to implement shared constant strings, most useful if
+ they are also read-only.
+
+ The command
+
+ x\bxs\bst\btr\br -\b-c\bc name
+
+ will extract the strings from the C source in name, replac-
+ ing string references by expressions of the form
+ (&xstr[number]) for some number. An appropriate declaration
+ of _\bx_\bs_\bt_\br is prepended to the file. The resulting C text is
+ placed in the file _\bx._\bc, to then be compiled. The strings
+ from this file are placed in the _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs data base if they
+ are not there already. Repeated strings and strings which
+ are suffices of existing strings do not cause changes to the
+ data base.
+
+ After all components of a large program have been compiled a
+ file _\bx_\bs._\bc declaring the common _\bx_\bs_\bt_\br space can be created by
+ a command of the form
+
+ x\bxs\bst\btr\br
+
+ This _\bx_\bs._\bc file should then be compiled and loaded with the
+ rest of the program. If possible, the array can be made
+ read-only (shared) saving space and swap overhead.
+
+ _\bX_\bs_\bt_\br can also be used on a single file. A command
+
+ x\bxs\bst\btr\br name
+
+ creates files _\bx._\bc and _\bx_\bs._\bc as before, without using or
+ affecting any _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs file in the same directory.
+
+ It may be useful to run _\bx_\bs_\bt_\br after the C preprocessor if any
+ macro definitions yield strings or if there is conditional
+ code which contains strings which may not, in fact, be
+ needed. _\bX_\bs_\bt_\br reads from its standard input when the argu-
+ ment `-' is given. An appropriate command sequence for run-
+ ning _\bx_\bs_\bt_\br after the C preprocessor is:
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+XSTR(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual XSTR(1)
+
+
+
+ c\bcc\bc -\b-E\bE name.c | x\bxs\bst\btr\br -\b-c\bc -
+ c\bcc\bc -\b-c\bc x.c
+ m\bmv\bv x.o name.o
+
+ _\bX_\bs_\bt_\br does not touch the file _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs unless new items are
+ added, thus _\bm_\ba_\bk_\be can avoid remaking _\bx_\bs._\bo unless truly neces-
+ sary.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ strings Data base of strings
+ x.c Massaged C source
+ xs.c C source for definition of array `xstr'
+ /tmp/xs* Temp file when `xstr name' doesn't touch _\bs_\bt_\br_\bi_\bn_\bg_\bs
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ mkstr(1)
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ If a string is a suffix of another string in the data base,
+ but the shorter string is seen first by _\bx_\bs_\bt_\br both strings
+ will be placed in the data base, when just placing the
+ longer one there will do.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 7, 1986 2
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+YACC(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual YACC(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ yacc - yet another compiler-compiler
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ y\bya\bac\bcc\bc [ -\b-v\bvd\bd ] grammar
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bY_\ba_\bc_\bc converts a context-free grammar into a set of tables
+ for a simple automaton which executes an LR(1) parsing algo-
+ rithm. The grammar may be ambiguous; specified precedence
+ rules are used to break ambiguities.
+
+ The output file, _\by._\bt_\ba_\bb._\bc, must be compiled by the C compiler
+ to produce a program _\by_\by_\bp_\ba_\br_\bs_\be. This program must be loaded
+ with the lexical analyzer program, _\by_\by_\bl_\be_\bx, as well as _\bm_\ba_\bi_\bn
+ and _\by_\by_\be_\br_\br_\bo_\br, an error handling routine. These routines must
+ be supplied by the user; _\bL_\be_\bx(1) is useful for creating lexi-
+ cal analyzers usable by _\by_\ba_\bc_\bc.
+
+ If the -\b-v\bv flag is given, the file _\by._\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt is prepared,
+ which contains a description of the parsing tables and a
+ report on conflicts generated by ambiguities in the grammar.
+
+ If the -d\bd flag is used, the file _\by._\bt_\ba_\bb._\bh is generated with
+ the _\bd_\be_\bf_\bi_\bn_\be statements that associate the _\by_\ba_\bc_\bc-assigned
+ `token codes' with the user-declared `token names'. This
+ allows source files other than _\by._\bt_\ba_\bb._\bc to access the token
+ codes.
+
+F\bFI\bIL\bLE\bES\bS
+ y.output
+ y.tab.c
+ y.tab.h defines for token names
+ yacc.tmp, yacc.acts temporary files
+ /usr/lib/yaccpar parser prototype for C programs
+
+S\bSE\bEE\bE A\bAL\bLS\bSO\bO
+ _\bl_\be_\bx(1)
+ _\bL_\bR _\bP_\ba_\br_\bs_\bi_\bn_\bg by A. V. Aho and S. C. Johnson, Computing Sur-
+ veys, June, 1974.
+ _\bY_\bA_\bC_\bC - _\bY_\be_\bt _\bA_\bn_\bo_\bt_\bh_\be_\br _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bi_\bl_\be_\br _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bi_\bl_\be_\br by S. C. Johnson.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ The number of reduce-reduce and shift-reduce conflicts is
+ reported on the standard output; a more detailed report is
+ found in the _\by._\bo_\bu_\bt_\bp_\bu_\bt file. Similarly, if some rules are
+ not reachable from the start symbol, this is also reported.
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Because file names are fixed, at most one _\by_\ba_\bc_\bc process can
+ be active in a given directory at a time.
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 April 29, 1985 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+YES(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual YES(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ yes - be repetitively affirmative
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ y\bye\bes\bs [ _\be_\bx_\bp_\bl_\be_\bt_\bi_\bv_\be ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bY_\be_\bs outputs _\be_\bx_\bp_\bl_\be_\bt_\bi_\bv_\be, or, by default, "y", forever.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 January 9, 1988 1
+
+
+
--- /dev/null
+
+
+
+COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
+
+
+
+N\bNA\bAM\bME\bE
+ compress, uncompress, zcat - compress and expand data
+
+S\bSY\bYN\bNO\bOP\bPS\bSI\bIS\bS
+ c\bco\bom\bmp\bpr\bre\bes\bss\bs [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-c\bc ] [ -\b-b\bb _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs ] [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+ u\bun\bnc\bco\bom\bmp\bpr\bre\bes\bss\bs [ -\b-f\bf ] [ -\b-v\bv ] [ -\b-c\bc ] [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+ z\bzc\bca\bat\bt [ _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be ... ]
+
+D\bDE\bES\bSC\bCR\bRI\bIP\bPT\bTI\bIO\bON\bN
+ _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs reduces the size of the named files using adaptive
+ Lempel-Ziv coding. Whenever possible, each file is replaced
+ by one with the extension .\b.Z\bZ,\b, while keeping the same owner-
+ ship modes, access and modification times. If no files are
+ specified, the standard input is compressed to the standard
+ output. Compressed files can be restored to their original
+ form using _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs or _\bz_\bc_\ba_\bt.
+
+ The -\b-f\bf option will force compression of _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be, even if it
+ does not actually shrink or the corresponding _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.Z file
+ already exists. Except when run in the background under
+ /_\bb_\bi_\bn/_\bs_\bh, if -\b-f\bf is not given the user is prompted as to
+ whether an existing _\bn_\ba_\bm_\be.Z file should be overwritten.
+
+ The -\b-c\bc (``cat'') option makes _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs/_\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs write to
+ the standard output; no files are changed. The nondestruc-
+ tive behavior of _\bz_\bc_\ba_\bt is identical to that of _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs -\b-c\bc.\b.
+
+ _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs uses the modified Lempel-Ziv algorithm popularized
+ in "A Technique for High Performance Data Compression",
+ Terry A. Welch, _\bI_\bE_\bE_\bE _\bC_\bo_\bm_\bp_\bu_\bt_\be_\br, vol. 17, no. 6 (June 1984),
+ pp. 8-19. Common substrings in the file are first replaced
+ by 9-bit codes 257 and up. When code 512 is reached, the
+ algorithm switches to 10-bit codes and continues to use more
+ bits until the limit specified by the -\b-b\bb flag is reached
+ (default 16). _\bB_\bi_\bt_\bs must be between 9 and 16. The default
+ can be changed in the source to allow _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs to be run on
+ a smaller machine.
+
+ After the _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs limit is attained, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs periodically
+ checks the compression ratio. If it is increasing, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs
+ continues to use the existing code dictionary. However, if
+ the compression ratio decreases, _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs discards the table
+ of substrings and rebuilds it from scratch. This allows the
+ algorithm to adapt to the next "block" of the file.
+
+ Note that the -\b-b\bb flag is omitted for _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs, since the
+ _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs parameter specified during compression is encoded
+ within the output, along with a magic number to ensure that
+ neither decompression of random data nor recompression of
+ compressed data is attempted.
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
+
+
+
+ The amount of compression obtained depends on the size of
+ the input, the number of _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs per code, and the distribution
+ of common substrings. Typically, text such as source code
+ or English is reduced by 50-60%. Compression is generally
+ much better than that achieved by Huffman coding (as used in
+ _\bp_\ba_\bc_\bk), or adaptive Huffman coding (_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\ba_\bc_\bt), and takes less
+ time to compute.
+
+ The -\b-v\bv option causes the printing of the percentage reduc-
+ tion of each file.
+
+ If an error occurs, exit status is 1, else if the last file
+ was not compressed because it became larger, the status is
+ 2; else the status is 0.
+
+D\bDI\bIA\bAG\bGN\bNO\bOS\bST\bTI\bIC\bCS\bS
+ Usage: compress [-fvc] [-b maxbits] [file ...]
+ Invalid options were specified on the command line.
+ Missing maxbits
+ Maxbits must follow -\b-b\bb.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: not in compressed format
+ The file specified to _\bu_\bn_\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs has not been
+ compressed.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: compressed with _\bx_\bx bits, can only handle _\by_\by bits
+ _\bF_\bi_\bl_\be was compressed by a program that could deal
+ with more _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs than the compress code on this
+ machine. Recompress the file with smaller _\bb_\bi_\bt_\bs.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: already has .Z suffix -- no change
+ The file is assumed to be already compressed.
+ Rename the file and try again.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be: filename too long to tack on .Z
+ The file cannot be compressed because its name is
+ longer than 12 characters. Rename and try again.
+ This message does not occur on BSD systems.
+ _\bf_\bi_\bl_\be already exists; do you wish to overwrite (y or n)?
+ Respond "y" if you want the output file to be
+ replaced; "n" if not.
+ uncompress: corrupt input
+ A SIGSEGV violation was detected which usually means
+ that the input file is corrupted.
+ Compression: _\bx_\bx._\bx_\bx%
+ Percentage of the input saved by compression.
+ (Relevant only for -\b-v\bv.)
+ -- not a regular file: unchanged
+ When the input file is not a regular file, (e.g. a
+ directory), it is left unaltered.
+ -- has _\bx_\bx other links: unchanged
+ The input file has links; it is left unchanged. See
+ _\bl_\bn(1) for more information.
+ -- file unchanged
+ No savings is achieved by compression. The input
+ remains virgin.
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+COMPRESS(1) UNIX Programmer's Manual COMPRESS(1)
+
+
+
+B\bBU\bUG\bGS\bS
+ Although compressed files are compatible between machines
+ with large memory, -\b-b\bb12 should be used for file transfer to
+ architectures with a small process data space (64KB or less,
+ as exhibited by the DEC PDP series, the Intel 80286, etc.)
+
+ _\bc_\bo_\bm_\bp_\br_\be_\bs_\bs should be more flexible about the existence of the
+ `.Z' suffix.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Printed 7/9/88 May 11, 1986 3
+
+
+